Optima XR240amx ESM

Front cover
GE Healthcare
Optima XR240amx and

Optima XR240amx HD Upgrade
Exclusive System Manual
GE EXCLUSIVE USE ONLY
Restricted To GE Healthcare.
This Material is the property of GE Healthcare and contains information
that is restricted to use by GE Healthcare Manufacturing, Engineering and
Service personnel. Any reproduction in whole or in part is strictly
prohibited. Neither this material nor any information contained herein shall
be disclosed to anyone outside of GE Healthcare Manufacturing,
Engineering and Service personnel.
If you are not a GE Healthcare Employee, you must exit this material now.
Direction 5761784-1EN, Rev 11

GE HEALTHCARE
Warning OPTIMA XR240AMX EXCLUSIVE SYSTEM MANUAL
REVISION 11 GE RESTRICTED DIRECTION 5761784-1EN
ATTENTION
LES APPAREILS A RAYONS X SONT DANGEREUX A LA FOIS POUR LE PATIENT ET POUR LE MANIPULATEUR
SI LES MESURES DE PROTECTION NE SONT PAS STRICTEMENT APPLIQUEES
Bien que cet appareil soit construit selon les normes de sécurité les plus severes, la source de rayonnement X
représente un danger lorsque le manipulateur est non qualifié ou non averti. Une exposition excessive au rayonnement
X entraîne des dommages a l’organisme. Par conséquent, toutes les précautions doivent être prises pour éviter que les
personnes non autorisées ou non qualifées utilisent cet appareil créant ainsi un danger pour les autres et pour elles-
mêmes. Avant chaque manipulation, les personnes qualifiées et autorisées à se servir de cet appareil doivent se
renseigner sur les mesures de protection etablies par la Commission Internationale sur la Protection Radiologique,
Annales 26: Recommandations de la Commission Internationale sure la Protection Radiologique et les normes
nationales en vigueur.
WARNING
X-RAY EQUIPMENT IS DANGEROUS TO BOTH PATIENT AND OPERATOR UNLESS MEASURES OF
PROTECTION ARE STRICTLY OBSERVED.
Though this equipment is built to the highest standards of electrical and mechanical safety, the useful x-ray beam
becomes a source of danger in the hands of the unauthorized or unqualified operator. Excessive exposure to x-radiation
causes damage to human tissue.
Therefore, adequate precautions must be taken to prevent unauthorized or unqualified persons from operating this
equipment or exposing themselves or others to its radiation.
Before operation, persons qualified and authorized to operate this equipment should be familiar with the
Recommendations of the International Commission on Radiological Protection (ICRP), contained in Annals Number 26
of the ICRP, and with applicable national standards.
ATENCION
LOS APARATOS DE RAYOS X SON PELIGROSOS PARA EL PACIENTE Y EL MANIPULADOR CUANDO LAS
NORMAS DE PROTECCION NO ESTAN OBSERVADAS
Aunque este aparato está construido según las normas de seguridad más estrictas, la radiacion X constituye un peligro
al ser manipulado por personas no autorizadas o incompetentes. Una explosicion excesiva a la radiación X puede
causar daños al organismo.
Por consiguiente, se deberán tomar todas las precauciones necesarias para evitar que las personas incompetentes o
no autorizadas utilicen este aparato, lo que seria un peligro para los demás y para si mismas.
Antes de efectuar las manipulaciones, las personas habilitadas y competentes en el uso de este aparato, deberán
informarse sobre las normas de protección fijadas por la Comisión Internacional de la Protección Radiológica, Anales
No 26: Recomendaciones de la Comisión Internacional sobre la Protección Radiológica y normas nacionales.
ACHTUNG
RÖNTGENAPPARATE SIND EINE GEFAHR FUR PATIENTEN SOWIE BEDIENUNGSPERSONAL, WENN DIE
GELTENDEN SICHERHEITSVORKEHRUNGEN NICHT GENAU BEACHTET WERDEN
Dieser Apparat entspricht in seiner Bauweise strengsten elektrischen und mechanischen Sichereitsnormen, doch in den
Händen unbefugter oder unqualifizierter Personen wird er zu einer Gefahrenquelle.
Übermäßige Röntgenbestrahlung ist für den menschlichen Organismus schädlish.
Deswegen sind hinreichende Vorsichtsmaßnahmen erforderlich, um zu verhindern, daßunbefugte oder unqualifizierte
Personen solche Geräte bedienen oder sich selbst und andere Personen deren Bestrahlung aussetzen können.
Vor Inbetriebnahme dieses Apparats solite sich das qualifizierte und befugte Bedienungspersonal mit den geltenden
Kriterien für den gefahrlosen Strahleneinsatz durch sorgfältiges Studium des Hefts Nr. 26 der Internationalen
Kommission für Strahlenschutz (ICRP) vertraut machen: Empfehlungen der Internationalen Kommission für
Strahlenschutz und anderer nationaler Normenbehörden.
Page 2
GE HEALTHCARE OPTIMA XR240AMX EXCLUSIVE SYSTEM MANUAL
Important Information
WARNING This service manual is available in English only.

(EN) • If a customer's service provider requires a language other than English, it is the customer's
responsibility to provide translation services.
• Do not attempt to service the equipment unless this service manual has been consulted and is
understood.
• Failure to heed this warning may result in injury to the service provider, operator or patient from
electric shock, mechanical or other hazards.
ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ Tова упътване за работа е налично само на английски език.
(BG) • Ако доставчикът на услугата на клиента изиска друг език, задължение на клиента е да
осигури превод.
• Не използвайте оборудването, преди да сте се консултирали и разбрали упътването за
работа.
• неспазването на това предупреждение може да доведе до нараняване на доставчика на
услугата, оператора или пациентa в резултат на токов удар, механична или друга опасност.
警告本维修手册仅提供英文版本。
(ZH-CN) • 如果客户的维修服务人员需要非英文版本，则客户需自行提供翻译服务。
• 未详细阅读和完全理解本维修手册之前，不得进行维修。
• 忽略本警告可能对维修服务人员、操作人员或患者造成电击、机械伤害或其他形式的伤
害。
警告本服務手冊僅提供英文版本。
(ZH-HK) • 倘若客戶的服務供應商需要英文以外之服務手冊，客戶有責任提供翻譯服務。
• 除非已參閱本服務手冊及明白其內容，否則切勿嘗試維修設備。
• 不遵從本警告或會令服務供應商、網絡供應商或病人受到觸電、機械性或其他的危險。
警告本維修手冊僅有英文版。
(ZH-TW) • 若客戶的維修廠商需要英文版以外的語言，應由客戶自行提供翻譯服務。
• 請勿試圖維修本設備，除非您已查閱並瞭解本維修手冊。
• 若未留意本警告，可能導致維修廠商、操作員或病患因觸電、機械或其他危險而受傷。
UPOZORENJE Ovaj servisni priručnik dostupan je na engleskom jeziku.
(HR) • Ako davatelj usluge klijenta treba neki drugi jezik, klijent je dužan osigurati prijevod.
• Ne pokušavajte servisirati opremu ako niste u potpunosti pročitali i razumjeli ovaj servisni
priručnik.
• zanemarite li ovo upozorenje, može doći do ozljede davatelja usluge, operatera ili pacijenta uslijed
strujnog udara, mehaničkih ili drugih rizika.
VÝSTRAHA Tento provozní návod existuje pouze v anglickém jazyce.

(CS) • V případě, že externí služba zákazníkům potřebuje návod v jiném jazyce, je zajištění překladu do
odpovídajícího jazyka úkolem zákazníka.
• Nesnažte se o údržbu tohoto zařízení, aniž byste si přečetli tento provozní návod a pochopili jeho
obsah.
• V případě nedodržování této výstrahy může dojít k poranění pracovníka prodejního servisu,
obslužného personálu nebo pacientů vlivem elektrického proudu, respektive vlivem mechanických
či jiných rizik.
ADVARSEL Denne servicemanual findes kun på engelsk.
(DA) • Hvis en kundes tekniker har brug for et andet sprog end engelsk, er det kundens ansvar at sørge
for oversættelse.
• Forsøg ikke at servicere udstyret uden at læse og forstå denne servicemanual.
• Manglende overholdelse af denne advarsel kan medføre skade på grund af elektrisk stød,
mekanisk eller anden fare for teknikeren, operatøren eller patienten.
Page 3
WAARSCHUWING Deze onderhoudshandleiding is enkel in het Engels verkrijgbaar.

(NL) • Als het onderhoudspersoneel een andere taal vereist, dan is de klant verantwoordelijk voor de
vertaling ervan.
• Probeer de apparatuur niet te onderhouden alvorens deze onderhoudshandleiding werd
geraadpleegd en begrepen is.
• Indien deze waarschuwing niet wordt opgevolgd, zou het onderhoudspersoneel, de operator of
een patiënt gewond kunnen raken als gevolg van een elektrische schok, mechanische of andere
gevaren.
HOIATUS See teenindusjuhend on saadaval ainult inglise keeles
(ET) • Kui klienditeeninduse osutaja nõuab juhendit inglise keelest erinevas keeles, vastutab klient
tõlketeenuse osutamise eest.
• Ärge üritage seadmeid teenindada enne eelnevalt käesoleva teenindusjuhendiga tutvumist ja
sellest aru saamist.
• Käesoleva hoiatuse eiramine võib põhjustada teenuseosutaja, operaatori või patsiendi vigastamist
elektrilöögi, mehaanilise või muu ohu tagajärjel.
VAROITUS Tämä huolto-ohje on saatavilla vain englanniksi.
(FI) • Jos asiakkaan huoltohenkilöstö vaatii muuta kuin englanninkielistä materiaalia, tarvittavan
käännöksen hankkiminen on asiakkaan vastuulla.
• Älä yritä korjata laitteistoa ennen kuin olet varmasti lukenut ja ymmärtänyt tämän huolto-ohjeen.
• Mikäli tätä varoitusta ei noudateta, seurauksena voi olla huoltohenkilöstön, laitteiston käyttäjän tai
potilaan vahingoittuminen sähköiskun, mekaanisen vian tai muun vaaratilanteen vuoksi.
ATTENTION Ce manuel d’installation et de maintenance est disponible uniquement en anglais.
(FR) • Si le technicien d'un client a besoin de ce manuel dans une langue autre que l'anglais, il incombe
au client de le faire traduire.
• Ne pas tenter d'intervenir sur les équipements tant que ce manuel d’installation et de maintenance
n'a pas été consulté et compris.
• Le non-respect de cet avertissement peut entraîner chez le technicien, l'opérateur ou le patient
des blessures dues à des dangers électriques, mécaniques ou autres.
WARNUNG Diese Serviceanleitung existiert nur in englischer Sprache.
(DE) • Falls ein fremder Kundendienst eine andere Sprache benötigt, ist es Aufgabe des Kunden für eine
entsprechende Übersetzung zu sorgen.
• Versuchen Sie nicht diese Anlage zu warten, ohne diese Serviceanleitung gelesen und
verstanden zu haben.
• Wird diese Warnung nicht beachtet, so kann es zu Verletzungen des Kundendiensttechnikers, des
Bedieners oder des Patienten durch Stromschläge, mechanische oder sonstige Gefahren
kommen.
ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ Το παρόν εγχειρίδιο σέρβις διατίθεται μόνο στα αγγλικά.
(EL) • Εάν ο τεχνικός σέρβις ενός πελάτη απαιτεί το παρόν εγχειρίδιο σε γλώσσα εκτός των αγγλικών,
αποτελεί ευθύνη του πελάτη να παρέχει τις υπηρεσίες μετάφρασης.
• Μην επιχειρήσετε την εκτέλεση εργασιών σέρβις στον εξοπλισμό αν δεν έχετε συμβουλευτεί και
κατανοήσει το παρόν εγχειρίδιο σέρβις.
• Αν δεν προσέξετε την προειδοποίηση αυτή, ενδέχεται να προκληθεί τραυματισμός στον τεχνικό
σέρβις, στο χειριστή ή στον ασθενή από ηλεκτροπληξία, μηχανικούς ή άλλους κινδύνους.
FIGYELMEZTETÉS Ezen karbantartási kézikönyv kizárólag angol nyelven érhető el.
(HU) • Ha a vevő szolgáltatója angoltól eltérő nyelvre tart igényt, akkor a vevő felelőssége a fordítás
elkészíttetése.
• Ne próbálja elkezdeni használni a berendezést, amíg a karbantartási kézikönyvben leírtakat nem
értelmezték.
• Ezen figyelmeztetés figyelmen kívül hagyása a szolgáltató, működtető vagy a beteg áramütés,
mechanikai vagy egyéb veszélyhelyzet miatti sérülését eredményezheti.
AÐVÖRUN Þessi þjónustuhandbók er aðeins fáanleg á ensku.
(IS) • Ef að þjónustuveitandi viðskiptamanns þarfnast annas tungumáls en ensku, er það skylda
viðskiptamanns að skaffa tungumálaþjónustu.
• Reynið ekki að afgreiða tækið nema að þessi þjónustuhandbók hefur verið skoðuð og skilin.
• Brot á sinna þessari aðvörun getur leitt til meiðsla á þjónustuveitanda, stjórnanda eða sjúklings frá
raflosti, vélrænu eða öðrum áhættum.
Page 4
AVVERTENZA Il presente manuale di manutenzione è disponibile soltanto in lingua inglese.

(IT) • Se un addetto alla manutenzione richiede il manuale in una lingua diversa, il cliente è tenuto a
provvedere direttamente alla traduzione.
• Procedere alla manutenzione dell'apparecchiatura solo dopo aver consultato il presente manuale
ed averne compreso il contenuto.
• Il mancato rispetto della presente avvertenza potrebbe causare lesioni all'addetto alla
manutenzione, all'operatore o ai pazienti provocate da scosse elettriche, urti meccanici o altri
rischi.
このサービスマニュアルには英語版しかありません。
(JA) • サービスを担当される業者が英語以外の言語を要求される場合、翻訳作業はその業者の責任で行
うものとさせていただきます。
• このサービスマニュアルを熟読し理解せずに、装置のサービスを行わないでください。
• この警告に従わない場合、サービスを担当される方、操作員あるいは患者さんが、感電や機械
的又はその他の危険により負傷する可能性があります。
경고 본 서비스 매뉴얼은 영어로만 이용하실 수 있습니다 .
(KO) • 고객의 서비스 제공자가 영어 이외의 언어를 요구할 경우 , 번역 서비스를 제공하는 것은 고객의
책임입니다 .
• 본 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조하여 숙지하지 않은 이상 해당 장비를 수리하려고 시도하지 마십시오 .
• 본 경고 사항에 유의하지 않으면 전기 쇼크 , 기계적 위험 , 또는 기타 위험으로 인해 서비스 제공자
, 사용자 또는 환자에게 부상을 입힐 수 있습니다 .
BRÎDINÂJUMS Šī apkopes rokasgrāmata ir pieejama tikai angļu valodā.
(LV) • Ja klienta apkopes sniedzējam nepieciešama informācija citā valodā, klienta pienākums ir
nodrošināt tulkojumu.
• Neveiciet aprīkojuma apkopi bez apkopes rokasgrāmatas izlasīšanas un saprašanas.
• Šī brīdinājuma neievērošanas rezultātā var rasties elektriskās strāvas trieciena, mehānisku vai
citu faktoru izraisītu traumu risks apkopes sniedzējam, operatoram vai pacientam.
ĮSPĖJIMAS Šis eksploatavimo vadovas yra tik anglų kalba.
(LT) • Jei kliento paslaugų tiekėjas reikalauja vadovo kita kalba – ne anglų, suteikti vertimo paslaugas
privalo klientas.
• Nemėginkite atlikti įrangos techninės priežiūros, jei neperskaitėte ar nesupratote šio
eksploatavimo vadovo.
• Jei nepaisysite šio įspėjimo, galimi paslaugų tiekėjo, operatoriaus ar paciento sužalojimai dėl
elektros šoko, mechaninių ar kitų pavojų.
ADVARSEL Denne servicehåndboken finnes bare på engelsk.
(NO) • Hvis kundens serviceleverandør har bruk for et annet språk, er det kundens ansvar å sørge for
oversettelse.
• Ikke forsøk å reparere utstyret uten at denne servicehåndboken er lest og forstått.
• Manglende hensyn til denne advarselen kan føre til at serviceleverandøren, operatøren eller
pasienten skades på grunn av elektrisk støt, mekaniske eller andre farer.
OSTRZEŻENIE Niniejszy podręcznik serwisowy dostępny jest jedynie w języku angielskim.
(PL) • Jeśli serwisant klienta wymaga języka innego niż angielski, zapewnienie usługi tłumaczenia jest
obowiązkiem klienta.
• Nie próbować serwisować urządzenia bez zapoznania się z niniejszym podręcznikiem
serwisowym i zrozumienia go.
• Niezastosowanie się do tego ostrzeżenia może doprowadzić do obrażeń serwisanta, operatora
lub pacjenta w wyniku porażenia prądem elektrycznym, zagrożenia mechanicznego bądź innego.
AVISO Este manual de assistência técnica encontra-se disponível unicamente em inglês.
(PT-BR) • Se outro serviço de assistência técnica solicitar a tradução deste manual, caberá ao cliente
fornecer os serviços de tradução.
• Não tente reparar o equipamento sem ter consultado e compreendido este manual de assistência
técnica.
• A não observância deste aviso pode ocasionar ferimentos no técnico, operador ou paciente
decorrentes de choques elétricos, mecânicos ou outros.
ATENÇÃO Este manual de assistência técnica só se encontra disponível em inglês.
(PT-PT) • Se qualquer outro serviço de assistência técnica solicitar este manual noutro idioma, é da
responsabilidade do cliente fornecer os serviços de tradução.
• Não tente reparar o equipamento sem ter consultado e compreendido este manual de assistência
técnica.
• O não cumprimento deste aviso pode colocar em perigo a segurança do técnico, do operador ou
do paciente devido a choques eléctricos, mecânicos ou outros.
Page 5
ATENŢIE Acest manual de service este disponibil doar în limba engleză.

(RO) • Dacă un furnizor de servicii pentru clienţi necesită o altă limbă decât cea engleză, este de datoria
clientului să furnizeze o traducere.
• Nu încercaţi să reparaţi echipamentul decât ulterior consultării şi înţelegerii acestui manual de
service.
• Ignorarea acestui avertisment ar putea duce la rănirea depanatorului, operatorului sau pacientului
în urma pericolelor de electrocutare, mecanice sau de altă natură.
ОСТОРОЖНО! Данное руководство по техническому обслуживанию представлено только на английском языке.
(RU) • Если сервисному персоналу клиента необходимо руководство не на английском, а на
каком-то другом языке, клиенту следует самостоятельно обеспечить перевод.
• Перед техническим обслуживанием оборудования обязательно обратитесь к данному
руководству и поймите изложенные в нем сведения.
• Несоблюдение требований данного предупреждения может привести к тому, что
специалист по техобслуживанию, оператор или пациент получит удар электрическим током,
механическую травму или другое повреждение
UPOZORENJE Ovo servisno uputstvo je dostupno samo na engleskom jeziku.
(SR) • Ako klijentov serviser zahteva neki drugi jezik, klijent je dužan da obezbedi prevodilačke usluge.
• Ne pokušavajte da opravite uređaj ako niste pročitali i razumeli ovo servisno uputstvo.
• Zanemarivanje ovog upozorenja može dovesti do povređivanja servisera, rukovaoca ili pacijenta
usled strujnog udara ili mehaničkih i drugih opasnosti.
UPOZORNENIE Tento návod na obsluhu je k dispozícii len v angličtine.
(SK) • Ak zákazníkov poskytovateľ služieb vyžaduje iný jazyk ako angličtinu, poskytnutie
prekladateľských služieb je zodpovednosťou zákazníka.
• Nepokúšajte sa o obsluhu zariadenia, kým si neprečítate návod na obluhu a neporozumiete mu.
• Zanedbanie tohto upozornenia môže spôsobiť zranenie poskytovateľa služieb, obsluhujúcej
osoby alebo pacienta elektrickým prúdom, mechanické alebo iné ohrozenie.
ATENCION Este manual de servicio sólo existe en inglés.
(ES) • Si el encargado de mantenimiento de un cliente necesita un idioma que no sea el inglés, el cliente
deberá encargarse de la traducción del manual.
• No se deberá dar servicio técnico al equipo, sin haber consultado y comprendido este manual de
servicio.
• La no observancia del presente aviso puede dar lugar a que el proveedor de servicios, el
operador o el paciente sufran lesiones provocadas por causas eléctricas, mecánicas o de otra
naturaleza.
VARNING Den här servicehandboken finns bara tillgänglig på engelska. .
(SV) • Om en kunds servicetekniker har behov av ett annat språk än engelska, ansvarar kunden för att
tillhandahålla översättningstjänster.
• Försök inte utföra service på utrustningen om du inte har läst och förstår den här
servicehandboken.
• Om du inte tar hänsyn till den här varningen kan det resultera i skador på serviceteknikern,
operatören eller patienten till följd av elektriska stötar, mekaniska faror eller andra faror.
OPOZORILO Ta servisni priročnik je na voljo samo v angleškem jeziku.
(SL) • Če ponudnik storitve stranke potrebuje priročnik v drugem jeziku, mora stranka zagotoviti prevod.
• Ne poskušajte servisirati opreme, če tega priročnika niste v celoti prebrali in razumeli.
• Če tega opozorila ne upoštevate, se lahko zaradi električnega udara, mehanskih ali drugih
nevarnosti poškoduje ponudnik storitev, operater ali bolnik.
DİKKAT Bu servis kılavuzunun sadece ingilizcesi mevcuttur.
(TR) • Eğer müşteri teknisyeni bu kılavuzu ingilizce dışında bir başka lisandan talep ederse, bunu
tercüme ettirmek müşteriye düşer.
• Servis kılavuzunu okuyup anlamadan ekipmanlara müdahale etmeyiniz.
• Bu uyarıya uyulmaması, elektrik, mekanik veya diğer tehlikelerden dolayı teknisyen, operatör
veya hastanın yaralanmasına yol açabilir.
Page 6
Legal Notes
TRADEMARKS
Optima XR240amxTM is a trademark of GE Healthcare. WPA and WPA2 are trademarks of the Wi-Fi
Alliance. All other products and their name brands are trademarks of their respective holders.
COPYRIGHTS
All material copyright © 2017, 2020 by General Electric Company, Inc. All rights reserved. The
material presented and contained herein may not be reproduced in any form or manner, without the
written permission of General Electric Company, Inc.
Page 7
Important Precautions
DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION
All packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent, have notation
“damage in shipment” written on all copies of the freight or express bill before delivery is accepted
or “signed for” by a General Electric representative or a facility receiving agent. Whether noted or
concealed, damage MUST be reported to the carrier immediately upon discovery, or in any event,
within 14 days after receipt, and the contents and containers held for inspection by the carrier. A
transportation company will not pay a claim for damage if an inspection is not requested within this
14 day period.
To file a report, call 1-800-548-3366. Select the option for “Install Support Services for FOI/FOA and
MIS.” Contact your local service coordinator for more information on this process.
CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT

All electrical installations that are preliminary to positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for
the equipment shall be performed by licensed electrical contractors. In addition, electrical feeds into
the Power Distribution Unit shall be performed by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections
between pieces of electrical equipment, calibrations and testing shall be performed by qualified GE
Healthcare personnel. The products involved (and the accompanying electrical installations) are
highly sophisticated, and special engineering competence is required. In performing all electrical
work on these products, GE will use its own specially trained field engineers. All of GE’s electrical
work on these products will comply with the requirements of the applicable electrical codes.
The purchaser of GE equipment shall only utilize qualified personnel (i.e., GE’s field engineers,
personnel of third-party service companies with equivalent training, or licensed electricians) to
perform electrical servicing on the equipment.
IMPORTANT...X-RAY PROTECTION
X-ray equipment if not properly used may cause injury. Accordingly, the instructions herein
contained should be thoroughly read and understood by everyone who will use the equipment
before you attempt to place this equipment in operation. GE Healthcare will be glad to assist and
cooperate in placing this equipment in use.
Although this apparatus incorporates a high degree of protection against x-radiation other than the
useful beam, no practical design of equipment can provide complete protection. Nor can any
practical design compel the operator to take adequate precautions to prevent the possibility of any
persons carelessly exposing themselves or others to radiation.
It is important that anyone having anything to do with x-radiation be properly trained and fully
acquainted with the recommendations of the National Council on Radiation Protection and
Measurements (NCRP) as published in NCRP Reports available from NCRP Publications, 7910
Woodmont Avenue, Room 1016, Bethesda, Maryland 20814, and of the International Commission
on Radiation Protection, and take adequate steps to protect against injury.
The equipment is sold with the understanding that GE Healthcare, its agents, and representatives
have no responsibility for injury or damage which may result from improper use of the equipment.
Various protective materials and devices are available. It is urged that such materials or devices be
used.
Page 8
LITHIUM BATTERY CAUTIONARY STATEMENT
DANGER - Risk of Explosion

Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the
manufacturer. Discard used batteries according to the manufacturer’s
instructions.
ATTENTION - Danger d’Explosion

Il y a danger d’explosion s’il y a replacement incorrect de la batterie.
Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du même type ou d’un type
recommandé par le constructeur. Mettre au rébut les batteries
usagées conformément aux instructions du fabricant.
TECHNICAL MANUAL UPDATES

When operating or servicing GE Healthcare products, please contact your GE representative for
the latest revision of product documentation. Product documentation may also be available on-line
at the GE Healthcare Documentation Portal.
OMISSIONS AND ERRORS

Customers, please contact your GE Healthcare sales or service representatives.
GE personnel, please use the GE Healthcare complaint handling process to report all omissions,
errors, and defects in this publication.
MEDICAL DEVICE REPORTING

The product contains the following Medical Devices:
FDA Medical Device

Component/Description Classification
X-Ray System Class II
Collimator Assembly Class II
Flat Panel Detector Class II
Product installation, service maintenance, repair or field replacement of these Medical Devices
should follow the applicable reporting requirements of the regulation.
OPTIMA XR240amx HD UPGRADE APPLICABILITY

Once the Optima XR240amx HD Upgrade has been installed on an applicable mobile x-ray system,
the upgraded system is equivalent and functions identically to a newly manufactured
Optima XR240amx. Throughout this manual, when the product name Optima XR240amx is used,
it is also applicable to a system that has had the Optima XR240amx HD Upgrade installed.
Page 9
Revision History
Revision Date Reason for change

1 22AUG2017 Initial release of document.
2 06SEP2017 Changes to part number attributes only. No changes to document content.
3 31OCT2017 Changes to part number attributes only. No changes to document content.
Added temperature requirements. Edited PM, System Data and Software,
4 15FEB2018 Configuration, Calibration and Troubleshooting. Added detector grips FRU
procedure. Added Optima XR240amx HD Upgrade applicability.
Updated LFC procedure. Removed AP reset procedure. Updated PACS Image
5 01JUN2018
Tests. Updated IP address change procedure.
6 21DEC2018 Canon/Toshiba Tube change.
Updated LFC procedure, GE Service Personnel Login and InSite configuration.
7 31DEC2018
Added HIS/RIS, Secondary Monitor, RFID Badge Reader. Gen 2 feature updates.
8 20JUN2019 Updated Chapter 7 and added Appendix B for Fluke tester.
Updated: LFC Procedure, HIS/RIS > User Profiles, VM Image Restore, RFID Badge
Reader Installation, Tether Installation (moved to Ch. 4), Display LUT Configuration
(Gen 1 only), Hospital Wireless Troubleshooting, DICOM Troubleshooting, Detector
Troubleshooting, PM Procedures, Snapshot, Cable Replacement, System PC
9 AUG312019 Replacement, Detector Charge Cable Assembly Replacement
Added: AutoGrid Config, Dose SR Config, Locating QAP/CAL Files (Gen 2 only),
Tether Installation, Board Failure Troubleshooting, USB PCB Ribbon Cable Folding
and Installation
Removed Appendix B and moved contents to Chapter 7.
Added CCS/QCS information. Update secondary monitor installation procedure.
Changed all instances of "sudo" to "su" login. Updated LFC. Added list of country
codes to Chapter 4. Updated IP Address Change Procedure. Added detector reset
10 15FEB2020 procedure. Added Detector Boot and Registration Troubleshooting. Updated detector
firmware download procedures. Updated Restoring System Data. Updated HIS/RIS
configuration and added application installation from USB. Added SN2295791
Detector Handle Latch. Minor text edits.
Added EI Dose Verification Procedure to calibration. Added Alternate Country
Selections to Wireless Detector Network configuration. Updated Manual Channel
Selection and Manual Transmit (TX) Maximum Power Setting. Updated Non-
purchased Options, DICOM Network Host Configuration. Added Ordering a Class C
License and Retrieving through a Terminal to Enabling Advanced Service mode.
11 NOV302020 Updated Display LUT Configuration (Gen 1 only), SN2175880. Added Hardware
Snapshot. Updated Detector Firmware Download.
Updated replacement procedures, Detector Charge Cable Assembly, Mantis Power
Supply, Power Switch Assembly, Overlay Board Assembly
Minor text edits.
Page 10
Preface publication conventions
Preface - Publication Conventions

Standardized conventions for representing information is a uniform way of communicating
information to a reader in a consistent manner. Conventions are used so that the reader can easily
recognize the actions or decisions that must be made. There are a number of character and
paragraph styles used in this publication to accomplish this task. Please become familiar with them
before proceeding forward.
It is important that you read and understand hazard statements, and not just ignore them.
Safety & Hazard Information

Proper product safety labeling allows a person to safely use or service a product. The format and
style for safety communications reflected in this publication represents the harmonization of IEC/
ISO 3864 and ANSI Z535 standards.
Within this publication, different paragraph and character styles are used to indicated potential
hazards. Paragraph prefixes, such as hazard, caution, danger and warning, are used to identify
important safety information. Text (Hazard) styles are applied to the paragraph contents that are
applicable to each specific safety statement.
Hazard Messages
Any action that will, could or potentially cause personal injury will be preceded by the safety alert
symbol and an appropriate signal word. The safety alert symbol is the triangle with an exclamation
mark within it. It Is always used next to the signal word to indicate the severity of the hazard.
Together, they are used to indicate a hazard exists.
Signal words describe the severity of possible human injures that may be encountered. The alert
symbol and signal word are placed immediately before any paragraph they affect. Safety
information includes:
1.) Signal Word - The seriousness level of the hazard.
2.) Symbol or Pictorial - The consequence of interaction with the hazard.
3.) Word Message:
a.) The nature of the hazard (i.e. the type of hazard)
b.) How to avoid the hazard.
The safety alert symbol is not used when an action can only cause equipment damage.
Text Format of Signal Words

DANGER - INDICATES AN IMMINENTLY HAZARDOUS SITUATION WHICH, IF
NOT AVOIDED, WILL RESULT IN DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY. THIS SIGNAL
WORD IS LIMITED TO THE MOST EXTREME SITUATIONS.
WARNING - INDICATES A POTENTIALLY HAZARDOUS SITUATION WHICH, IF NOT
AVOIDED, COULD RESULT IN DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY.
Caution - Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in
minor or moderate injury. It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices.
NOTICE - Indicates information or a company policy that relates directly or indirectly to the
safety of personnel or protection of property. This signal word is associated directly with a
hazard or hazardous situation and is used in place of 'DANGER,' 'WARNING,' or 'CAUTION.'
It can include:
Page 11
• Destruction of a disk drive

• Potential for internal mechanical damage, such as to a X-ray tube
Symbols and Pictorials Used

The following Symbols and Pictorials are be used in this publication. These graphical icons
(symbols) may be used to make you aware of specific types of hazards that could possibly cause
harm.
keep_up magnetic biohazard compressgas ppe-hearing
fragile impact corrosive heavyobject ppe-2people
static_elec heat general laser ppe-respitory
keep_dry pinch radiation poisongas ppe-loto
general explosive electrical flammable ppe-eye
torque crush/mechanical tipping Read Manual ppe-gloves
ce instuction poisonmatl entanglement instuction
Page 12
Publication Conventions
General Paragraph and Character Styles
Prefixes are used to highlight important non-safety related information. Paragraph prefixes (such
as Purpose, Example, Comment or Note) are used to identify important but non-safety related
information. Text styles are also applied to text within each paragraph modified by the specific
prefix.
EXAMPLES OF PREFIXES USED FOR GENERAL INFORMATION:

Purpose: Introduces and provides meaning as to the information contained within the chapter,
section or subsection (such as used at the beginning this chapter, for example).
Note: Conveys information that should be considered important to the reader.
Example: Used to make the reader aware that the paragraph(s) that follow are examples of information
possibly stated previously.
Comment: Represents “additional” information that may or may not be relevant to your situation.
Page Layout
Publication Part Number & Revision Number Publication Title
The current section and its title The current chapter and its title
are always shown in the footer of are always shown in the footer of
the left (even) page. the right (odd) page.
An exclamation point in a triangle is used Paragraphs preceeded by a symbol
to indicate important information to the user. (e.g. bullets) contain information that
Paragraphs preceeded by Alphanumeric has no specific order.
characters (e.g. numbers) contain infor-
mation that must be followed in a specific order.
Headers and footers in this publication are designed to allow you to quickly identify your location.
The document part number and revision number appears in every header on every page. Odd
numbered page footers indicate the current chapter, its title and current page number. Even page
footers show the current section and its title, as well as the current page number.
Page 13
Computer Screen Output/Input Text Character Styles

Within this publication, mono-spaced character styles (fonts) are used to indicate computer text
that’s either screen input and output. Mono-spaced fonts, such as courier, are used to indicated text
direction. When you type at your keyboard, you are generating computer input. Occasionally you
will see the math operator “greater-than” and “less-than” symbols used to indicate the start and
finish of variable output. When reading text generated by the computer, you are reading it as
computer generated output. In addition to direction, characters are italicized (e.g. italics) to indicate
information specific to your system or site.
Example: Fixed This paragraph’s font represents computer generated screen “fixed” output.
Output Its output is fixed from the sense that it does not vary from application
to application. It is the most commonly used style used to indicate
filenames, paths and text that do not change from system to system. The
character style used is a fixed width such as courier.
Example: This paragraph’s font represents computer screen output that is
Variable Output “variable”. It is used to represent output that varies from application
to application or system to system. Variable output is sometimes found
placed between greater-than and less-than operators for clarification. For
example: <variable_ouput> or <3.45.120.3>. In both cases, the < and >
operators are not part of the actual input.
Example: Fixed This paragraph’s font represents fixed input. It is computer input that
Input is typed-in via the keyboard. Typed input that does not vary from
application to application or system to system. Fixed text the user is
required to supply as input. For example: cd /usr/3p
Example: This paragraph’s font represents computer input that can vary from
Variable Input application to application or system to system. With variable text, the
user is required to supply system dependent input or information. Variable
input sometimes is placed between greater-than and less-than operators.
For example: <variable_input>. In these cases, the (<>) operators would
be dropped prior to input. For example: ypcat hosts | grep <3.45.120.3>
would be typed into the computer as:
ypcat hosts | grep 3.45.120.3
without the greater-than and less-than operators.
Buttons, Switches and Keyboard Inputs (Hard & Soft Keys)

Different character styles are used to indicate actions requiring the reader to press either a hard or
soft button, switch or key. Physical hardware, such as buttons and switches, are called hard keys
because they are hard wired or mechanical in nature. A keyboard or on/off switch would be a hard
key. Software or computer generated buttons are called soft keys because they are software
generated. Software driven menu buttons are an example of such keys. Soft and hard keys are
represented differently in this publication.
Example: Hard A power switch ON/OFF or a keyboard key like ENTER is indicated by applying a character style
Keys that uses both over and under-lined bold text that is bold. This is a hard key.
Example: Soft Whereas the computer MENU button that you would click with your mouse or touch with your hand
Keys uses over and under-lined regular text. This is a soft key.
Page 14
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Safety / Before You Begin ............................................................ 25
Section 1.1 How to Determine System Vintage
and Method of Remote Connection................................................................ 25
1.1.1 System Software Version............................................................................................. 25
1.1.2 PSI Code...................................................................................................................... 25
1.1.3 Back Office Lookup ...................................................................................................... 25
Section 1.2 Low Temperature Operation...................................................... 26
Section 1.3 Pinch point and crush hazard safety ........................................ 26
Section 1.4 Energy Sources .......................................................................... 27
Section 1.5 Lock Out/Tag Out (LOTO) Procedure for Electrical Power..... 28
1.5.1 Personnel Requirements.............................................................................................. 28
1.5.2 Preliminary Requirements............................................................................................ 28
1.5.3 Performing LOTO......................................................................................................... 29
1.5.4 Returning System to Service........................................................................................ 34
Section 1.6 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) ................................................... 35
1.6.1 Important ESD Considerations When Working on a Mobile System ........................... 35
1.6.2 Generating Static ......................................................................................................... 35
1.6.3 Personal Grounding Methods and Equipment ............................................................. 36
1.6.4 Grounding the Work Area ............................................................................................ 36
1.6.5 Recommended Materials and Equipment .................................................................... 37
Section 1.7 General torque values ................................................................ 37
Chapter 2 Planned Maintenance.................................................................... 38

Section 2.1 Before You Begin ....................................................................... 38
Section 2.2 Planned Maintenance Schedule ................................................ 38
Section 2.3 Planned Maintenance Procedures ............................................ 39
2.3.1 Prerequisites ................................................................................................................ 39
2.3.2 PM Procedures ............................................................................................................ 39
2.3.3 PM Procedure Details .................................................................................................. 53
2.3.4 Radiation Tests ............................................................................................................ 60
2.3.5 Cleaning (If Necessary)................................................................................................ 60
Chapter 3 System Data and Software ........................................................... 61

Section 3.1 Backing Up System Data ........................................................... 61
3.1.1 What is included in a system backup? ......................................................................... 61
3.1.2 Performing a System Backup....................................................................................... 61
Section 3.2 Performing Load From Cold (LFC)............................................ 62
3.2.1 Loading System Software ............................................................................................ 62
Section 3.3 Performing a FW Load From Cold (LFC) .................................. 75
Page 15
Section 3.4 Restoring Generator Firmware Only ......................................... 76

Section 3.5 Restoring System Data............................................................... 76
3.5.1 Before You Begin......................................................................................................... 76
3.5.2 Restoring System Data................................................................................................ 76
Section 3.6 Detector Firmware....................................................................... 78
3.6.1 Detector Sharing and Compatibility: ............................................................................ 78
3.6.2 Detector Firmware Download ...................................................................................... 78
Chapter 4 Configuration.................................................................................. 86
Section 4.1 System Configuration Overview................................................ 86
Section 4.2 Class M access............................................................................ 86
Section 4.3 Identifying MAC Addresses ....................................................... 87
Section 4.4 Country Codes ............................................................................ 87
Section 4.5 System Configuration Tool (SUIF)............................................. 89
4.5.1 Site Configuration ........................................................................................................ 90
4.5.2 Networking Configuration ............................................................................................ 91
4.5.3 General Configuration.................................................................................................. 93
4.5.4 Hardware Configuration............................................................................................... 93
4.5.5 Generator Configuration .............................................................................................. 93
4.5.6 Wireless Hospital Network Configuration .................................................................... 94
4.5.7 Wireless Detector Network .......................................................................................... 98
4.5.8 Options Configuration ................................................................................................ 101
4.5.9 Enabling Purchased Options in the SUIF .................................................................. 104
4.5.10 Dose SR Configuration ............................................................................................ 105
4.5.11 AutoGrid Configuration ............................................................................................ 107
4.5.12 InSite Configuration ................................................................................................. 108
4.5.13 PNF Configuration ................................................................................................... 111
4.5.14 Time Server Configuration....................................................................................... 113
4.5.15 OS Password Configuration (Gen 2 only)................................................................ 115
4.5.16 Secure Login Configuration (Gen 1 only) ................................................................ 119
Section 4.6 Security Configuration (Gen 2 only)........................................ 119
4.6.1 Overview.................................................................................................................... 119
4.6.2 Enabling Security Options ......................................................................................... 120
4.6.3 Security Options Configuration .................................................................................. 121
4.6.4 Antivirus ..................................................................................................................... 122
4.6.5 FIPS Encryption......................................................................................................... 133
4.6.6 Government Information System ............................................................................... 133
4.6.7 DoD Mode, Hardened/STIGS .................................................................................... 134
4.6.8 DICOM TLS ............................................................................................................... 135
4.6.9 Configuring Certificate Management ......................................................................... 139
4.6.10 Audit Trail and Node Authentication (ATNA) ........................................................... 154
4.6.11 Advanced Intrusion Detection Environment (AIDE) (File Check) ............................ 157
Section 4.7 Wireless Detector Access Point (AP) Configuration ............. 158
Page 16
Section 4.8 Auto Protocol Assist ................................................................ 158

4.8.1 Loading the Auto Protocol Assist Disk (Gen 2 only) .................................................. 158
4.8.2 Changing Auto Protocol Assist Settings..................................................................... 159
Section 4.9 DICOM Connectivity Configuration......................................... 160
4.9.1 Network Host Configuration ....................................................................................... 160
4.9.2 Printer Configuration .................................................................................................. 168
Section 4.10 Image Management .................................................................. 172
Section 4.11 Image Processing ..................................................................... 172
4.11.1 Enabling EMI Reduction........................................................................................... 172
4.11.2 Configuring EMI Reduction Parameters................................................................... 172
Section 4.12 Loading Demo Images ............................................................. 174
4.12.1 Loading Images from CD ......................................................................................... 174
Section 4.13 Installing the Operator Manual ................................................ 174
Section 4.14 Login and User Management .................................................. 175
Section 4.15 Installing the Dose Area Product (DAP) Meter....................... 175
Section 4.16 Installing Digital Detectors ...................................................... 176
4.16.1 Preliminary Requirements........................................................................................ 176
4.16.2 Procedure................................................................................................................. 176
4.16.3 Finalization ............................................................................................................... 187
Section 4.17 Configure HIS-RIS (Option)...................................................... 187
4.17.1 VM Installation Procedure ........................................................................................ 187
4.17.2 User Profiles............................................................................................................. 190
4.17.3 Time Zone Configuration.......................................................................................... 195
4.17.4 Enabling Outgoing Communication Through a Port................................................. 196
4.17.5 Windows Updates .................................................................................................... 200
4.17.6 Security Scans ......................................................................................................... 201
4.17.7 Microsoft License Registration ................................................................................. 204
4.17.8 Language Configuration........................................................................................... 209
4.17.9 Site Admin Account.................................................................................................. 218
4.17.10 HIS/RIS Application Installation/Integration ........................................................... 219
4.17.11 VM Image Backup/Restore .................................................................................... 221
4.17.12 Windows Password Change .................................................................................. 221
Section 4.18 Installing Hardware Options .................................................... 225
4.18.1 Detector Grid............................................................................................................ 225
4.18.2 Installing the Barcode Reader (Model OPI-4002) .................................................... 226
4.18.3 Installing the Barcode Reader (GE P/N 5150092-2) ................................................ 231
4.18.4 Installing the Tablet Holder Assembly...................................................................... 235
4.18.5 Installing the Wireless Exposure Handswitch .......................................................... 239
4.18.6 Secondary Monitor Installation, Lower Position (Gen 2 only) .................................. 249
4.18.7 Secondary Monitor Installation, Upper Position (Gen 2 only) .................................. 264
4.18.8 Secondary Monitor Configuration............................................................................. 277
4.18.9 RFID Badge Reader Installation .............................................................................. 281
4.18.10 RFID Badge Reader Configuration ........................................................................ 291
4.18.11 Tether Installation................................................................................................... 298
Page 17
Section 4.19 Importing Custom IP Looks ..................................................... 305

4.19.1 Transferring IP Looks Between Systems................................................................. 305
4.19.2 Importing Custom IP Looks from Optima XR220amx to Optima XR240amx Gen 1 306
4.19.3 Importing Custom IP Looks from Optima XR220amx to Optima XR240amx Gen 2 307
4.19.4 Importing Custom IP Looks from Optima XR240amx Gen 1 to Optima XR240amx Gen 2
308
4.19.5 Import Custom IP Looks from Optima XR240amx of the Same Vintage ................. 309
Section 4.20 Importing Protocol Database ................................................... 310
4.20.1 Transferring Protocol Database Between Systems ................................................. 310
4.20.2 Importing Protocol Database from Optima XR200/XR220amx................................ 311
Section 4.21 Enabling Advanced Service mode .......................................... 312
4.21.1 Retrieve 16-Digit Code ............................................................................................ 312
4.21.2 Ordering a Class C License..................................................................................... 314
4.21.3 Load Advanced Service (Class C) License from USB Drive ................................... 315
4.21.4 Verifying Advanced Service Operation .................................................................... 317
Section 4.22 IP Address Change Procedure ................................................ 317
Section 4.23 Top Cover LUT Configuration.................................................. 321
4.23.1 Display LUT Configuration (Gen 1 only) .................................................................. 321
4.23.2 Display LUT Configuration (Gen 2 only) .................................................................. 321
Chapter 5 Calibration .................................................................................... 323

Section 5.1 Preparing for Calibrations........................................................ 323
5.1.1 Saving Changes ........................................................................................................ 323
5.1.2 Temperature Requirements....................................................................................... 323
Section 5.2 Touchscreen Calibration .......................................................... 324
5.2.1 Calibrating the Touchscreen...................................................................................... 324
Section 5.3 Generator Calibration ............................................................... 324
5.3.1 Setting Filament Drive Level...................................................................................... 324
5.3.2 Viewing and Resetting Tube and Generator Usage Data.......................................... 325
Section 5.4 Detector Calibration.................................................................. 325
5.4.1 Executing Bad Pixel and Gain Calibrations ............................................................... 325
Section 5.5 Detector Checks and QAP........................................................ 335
5.5.1 Detector Check .......................................................................................................... 335
5.5.2 QAP Checkout ........................................................................................................... 336
Section 5.6 EI Dose Verification .................................................................. 338
5.6.1 Overview.................................................................................................................... 338
5.6.2 EI Dose Verification Procedure.................................................................................. 340
Section 5.7 Image Quality Calibration......................................................... 343
5.7.1 Calibrating the Printer ................................................................................................ 343
Section 5.8 Hardware Calibration ................................................................ 343
5.8.1 Drive Handle Calibration............................................................................................ 343
5.8.2 Touch Screen Calibration .......................................................................................... 344
5.8.3 DAP Calibration ......................................................................................................... 344
Page 18
Section 5.9 PACS Image Tests .................................................................... 346

5.9.1 Comparing PACS Test Images .................................................................................. 346
5.9.2 Determining PACS Burn/No-Burn Configuration........................................................ 347
5.9.3 Optional PACS tests .................................................................................................. 351
5.9.4 PACS Image Comparison Results ............................................................................. 354
Chapter 6 Mechanical Adjustment Procedures ......................................... 356

Section 6.1 Column Related Assemblies ................................................... 356
6.1.1 Column Balance Procedure ....................................................................................... 356
6.1.2 Tube Latch to Arm Pin Adjustment Procedure........................................................... 358
6.1.3 Column Rotational Detent Procedure ........................................................................ 361
Chapter 7 Radiation and Electrical Testing ................................................ 365

Section 7.1 Required Tests.......................................................................... 365
7.1.1 Required Test Equipment .......................................................................................... 365
7.1.2 Preparing for Testing.................................................................................................. 365
7.1.3 Collimator Testing ...................................................................................................... 366
7.1.4 Generator Tests ......................................................................................................... 370
7.1.5 Beam Quality Test...................................................................................................... 375
7.1.6 Testing Generator Operator Indicators ...................................................................... 377
Section 7.2 Testing Electrical Safety .......................................................... 377
7.2.1 Ground Resistance Testing........................................................................................ 378
7.2.2 Performing Leakage Current Testing ......................................................................... 387
7.2.3 Test Point Locations................................................................................................... 395
7.2.4 AC Power Plug Troubleshooting ................................................................................ 397
Section 7.3 Tube Radiation Leakage Test - Optional ................................ 398
7.3.1 Personnel Requirements............................................................................................ 398
7.3.2 Preliminary Requirements.......................................................................................... 398
7.3.3 Purpose...................................................................................................................... 398
7.3.4 Common Errors:......................................................................................................... 399
7.3.5 X-Ray Tube Leakage Radiation Requirement: .......................................................... 399
Section 7.4 Access to FDA 2579 Forms ..................................................... 402
7.4.1 Requesting Access .................................................................................................... 402
7.4.2 Accessing FDA 2579 Forms ...................................................................................... 402
Chapter 8 Theory .......................................................................................... 404

Section 8.1 Detector Bin Theory ................................................................. 404
8.1.1 Overview .................................................................................................................... 404
8.1.2 Wireless Access Point................................................................................................ 405
8.1.3 Docking Connectors and Shock Absorbers ............................................................... 405
8.1.4 Battery Indicators ....................................................................................................... 406
8.1.5 Detector Parking ........................................................................................................ 407
8.1.6 Detector Sleep Setting ............................................................................................... 408
8.1.7 Bin Charging Board (BCB) ......................................................................................... 408
8.1.8 Detector Charging Characteristics ............................................................................. 411
8.1.9 Detector Power Supply .............................................................................................. 412
Page 19
Section 8.2 Detector Theory......................................................................... 412

8.2.1 Detector Environmental Monitoring ........................................................................... 413
8.2.2 Detector Shock Monitoring ........................................................................................ 416
8.2.3 Detector Battery Monitoring ....................................................................................... 418
8.2.4 Tether, Bin, and Wireless Connection priority ........................................................... 420
8.2.5 Detector Registration ................................................................................................. 421
Section 8.3 Wireless Access Point (AP) connectivity theory ................... 422
8.3.1 Overview.................................................................................................................... 422
8.3.2 Configuration ............................................................................................................. 423
8.3.3 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) .......................................................... 424
8.3.4 Service Set Identifier (SSID)...................................................................................... 425
8.3.5 Pre-Shared Key (PSK)............................................................................................... 425
8.3.6 Username and password........................................................................................... 425
8.3.7 Channel and Transmit Power Management .............................................................. 425
8.3.8 Adaptive Radio Management (ARM) ......................................................................... 426
8.3.9 User channel selection .............................................................................................. 426
8.3.10 Boot ......................................................................................................................... 426
Section 8.4 Facility wireless connectivity theory....................................... 427
8.4.1 Overview.................................................................................................................... 427
8.4.2 Configuration ............................................................................................................. 427
8.4.3 Hardware and components........................................................................................ 431
Section 8.5 InSite theory .............................................................................. 432
8.5.1 InSite Configuration (Gen 1 only) .............................................................................. 432
8.5.2 InSite Configuration (Gen 2 only) .............................................................................. 434
8.5.3 InSite Features (Gen 1 only)...................................................................................... 434
Section 8.6 Connecting via FFA (Gen 2 only)............................................. 439
8.6.1 Agent Start Process Flow .......................................................................................... 445
Section 8.7 System Breaker Tripping.......................................................... 446
Section 8.8 System Battery Theory ............................................................. 451
8.8.1 Definitions .................................................................................................................. 451
8.8.2 Battery Arrangement and Connections...................................................................... 451
8.8.3 System Charging ....................................................................................................... 452
8.8.4 Battery Charging Theory (Charge Cut-Off / Hold-Off) ............................................... 453
8.8.5 Battery Failure Modes................................................................................................ 455
8.8.6 Storage and Self Discharge....................................................................................... 456
8.8.7 System Behavior at Battery End Of Life .................................................................... 458
Chapter 9 System Diagrams ......................................................................... 463

Section 9.1 Block Diagrams ......................................................................... 463
Section 9.2 System Architecture ................................................................. 471
Section 9.3 System Wiring ........................................................................... 473
Section 9.4 PC Connections ........................................................................ 475
9.4.1 PC 5765451 Connections.......................................................................................... 475
9.4.2 PC 5765451-2 w/ USB Adapter Connections ............................................................ 476
Page 20
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting .......................................................................... 477

Section 10.1 Performing Diagnostics ........................................................... 477
10.1.1 Running Diagnostics on the System ........................................................................ 477
Section 10.2 Remote Troubleshooting ......................................................... 481
10.2.1 Basic Linux Commands ........................................................................................... 481
10.2.2 Enable and Disable VNC ......................................................................................... 482
10.2.3 Reset AP .................................................................................................................. 482
10.2.4 Battery...................................................................................................................... 482
10.2.5 Detector.................................................................................................................... 482
10.2.6 PC ............................................................................................................................ 482
10.2.7 SSA .......................................................................................................................... 484
10.2.8 System Snapshot ..................................................................................................... 484
10.2.9 Hardware Snapshot ................................................................................................. 491
10.2.10 File Transfer Exposed Directories (Gen 1 only) ..................................................... 491
10.2.11 How to move Archive Logs in exposed directory for File Transfer (Gen 1 only) .... 491
10.2.12 How to move QAP/CAL files in exposed directory for File Transfer (Gen 1 only).. 491
10.2.13 Locating QAP/CAL Files (Gen 2 only).................................................................... 492
10.2.14 Checking Software and Hardware Versions .......................................................... 492
10.2.15 Pulling Images........................................................................................................ 493
10.2.16 Nautilus .................................................................................................................. 494
Section 10.3 Djinn Generator Troubleshooting Guide ................................ 495
10.3.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 495
10.3.2 Initial System and Generator Troubleshooting Steps............................................... 496
10.3.3 Common Issues ....................................................................................................... 496
10.3.4 Description of Djinn Beetle Errors ........................................................................... 501
10.3.5 In-Depth Djinn Beetle Generator Description........................................................... 511
10.3.6 Specific Error Code Handling and Actions .............................................................. 521
Section 10.4 Detector Bin Troubleshooting ................................................. 559
Section 10.5 Detector Troubleshooting........................................................ 565
10.5.1 Detector Overview.................................................................................................... 574
10.5.2 Detector Handling .................................................................................................... 575
10.5.3 Hardware Overview.................................................................................................. 576
10.5.4 Detector Grid............................................................................................................ 579
10.5.5 Detector Operation................................................................................................... 581
10.5.6 Tether....................................................................................................................... 586
10.5.7 Wireless Pre-Shared Key (PSK) .............................................................................. 587
10.5.8 Detector Labels ........................................................................................................ 588
10.5.9 Electromagnetic Interference ................................................................................... 588
10.5.10 Detector Icons ........................................................................................................ 590
10.5.11 Detector Registration and Management ................................................................ 591
10.5.12 Detector Sensors ................................................................................................... 591
10.5.13 Failure Modes ........................................................................................................ 592
10.5.14 Detector Diagnostics and Troubleshooting ............................................................ 592
10.5.15 Detector Boot and Registration Troubleshooting ................................................... 595
10.5.16 Detector Factory Reset .......................................................................................... 605
Section 10.6 Wireless Access Point (AP) Diagnostics (Gen 1 only).......... 611
10.6.1 Command Line Interface Diagnostics ...................................................................... 611
10.6.2 Troubleshooting Scenarios and Workflow................................................................ 612
Page 21
Section 10.7 Wireless Access Point (AP) Diagnostics (Gen 2 only) .......... 620
10.7.1 Access Point Diagnostics Home Page .................................................................... 620
10.7.2 Built In Self Test....................................................................................................... 620
10.7.3 Wireless Connectivity Diagnostic............................................................................. 623
10.7.4 Channel Monitoring Diagnostic................................................................................ 626
10.7.5 Remote Factory Reset............................................................................................. 628
Section 10.8 InSite Connectivity Troubleshooting ...................................... 629
10.8.1 InSite Troubleshooting (Gen 1 only) ........................................................................ 629
10.8.2 InSite Troubleshooting (Gen 2 only) ........................................................................ 632
10.8.3 Contacts................................................................................................................... 633
Section 10.9 Hospital Wireless Troubleshooting......................................... 633
10.9.1 Troubleshooting Scenarios and Workflow: .............................................................. 633
10.9.2 Band Selection......................................................................................................... 637
10.9.3 Roaming .................................................................................................................. 638
10.9.4 Advanced................................................................................................................. 640
Section 10.10System Battery Troubleshooting ........................................... 642
10.10.1 Replacement.......................................................................................................... 642
10.10.2 Examples ............................................................................................................... 643
Section 10.11SSA Key Troubleshooting ...................................................... 648
10.11.1 Resources.............................................................................................................. 648
10.11.2 Workflow ................................................................................................................ 648
Section 10.12DICOM Troubleshooting ......................................................... 650
10.12.1 Identifying Non-compliant DICOM Tags ................................................................ 650
10.12.2 Turn Off DICOM Validation.................................................................................... 650
10.12.3 Remove Private Tags On Push ............................................................................. 650
10.12.4 Manually Change Port Number for Network Nodes/Printers ................................. 650
Section 10.13Board Failure Troubleshooting .............................................. 651
Chapter 11 Replacement Procedures ............................................................ 652

Section 11.1 Cover Management ................................................................... 652
11.1.1 Requirements .......................................................................................................... 652
11.1.2 Side Cover Removal................................................................................................ 653
11.1.3 Top Cover Removal................................................................................................. 653
11.1.4 Front Cover Removal............................................................................................... 654
11.1.5 Front Bin Removal ................................................................................................... 658
11.1.6 Rear Bin Replacement............................................................................................. 661
11.1.7 Column Skirt Cover Removal .................................................................................. 664
11.1.8 Tube Head Cover Removal ..................................................................................... 666
Section 11.2 Cable Replacement ................................................................... 667
11.2.1 General Cable Replacement ................................................................................... 667
11.2.2 High voltage Cable Replacement ............................................................................ 671
Section 11.3 Cable Cover Installation ........................................................... 679
Section 11.4 Base Assembly.......................................................................... 680
11.4.1 Drive Wheel ............................................................................................................. 680
11.4.2 Battery Packs........................................................................................................... 685
Page 22
11.4.3 Front Bumper Assembly or Bumper Switch ............................................................. 689

11.4.4 Front Caster ............................................................................................................. 692
11.4.5 Spring Applied Brake (Column Rotational Brake) .................................................... 696
11.4.6 Column Support Assembly....................................................................................... 698
11.4.7 Rear Bin Kickplate.................................................................................................... 709
11.4.8 Motor Brake and Motor Reducer Assembly ............................................................. 710
11.4.9 Caterpillar Base Transition Board ............................................................................ 713
Section 11.5 Thorax Assembly...................................................................... 715
11.5.1 Spyder System Controller ........................................................................................ 715
11.5.2 Locust Drive Board................................................................................................... 717
11.5.3 Locust Drive Board Fuses........................................................................................ 718
11.5.4 Firefly Charger Board............................................................................................... 720
11.5.5 Firefly Board Fuses .................................................................................................. 722
11.5.6 Cricket Battery Board ............................................................................................... 724
11.5.7 Cricket Board Fuses................................................................................................. 726
11.5.8 Bin Charging Board (BCB) ....................................................................................... 728
11.5.9 Hornet UIF board ..................................................................................................... 730
11.5.10 Drive Login Active Board Collector ........................................................................ 732
11.5.11 Top Cover or Display & Inverter Collector.............................................................. 734
11.5.12 System PC ............................................................................................................. 738
11.5.13 USB PCB Ribbon Cable Folding and Installation................................................... 742
11.5.14 Detector Access Point (AP).................................................................................... 744
11.5.15 Whip Antenna......................................................................................................... 748
11.5.16 Detector Charge Cable Assembly.......................................................................... 750
11.5.17 Detector Bin Shock Absorber................................................................................. 753
11.5.18 Beetle Djinn Set of Cables ..................................................................................... 755
11.5.19 Djinn Power Module ............................................................................................... 757
11.5.20 Djinn HV Tank ........................................................................................................ 760
11.5.21 Djinn 30kW Auxiliary Module ................................................................................. 763
11.5.22 Drive Handle Assembly.......................................................................................... 765
11.5.23 Mantis Power Supply ............................................................................................. 768
11.5.24 EMI Filter................................................................................................................ 772
11.5.25 LVLE2 .................................................................................................................... 775
11.5.26 Power Cord Reel.................................................................................................... 777
11.5.27 AC Power Plug....................................................................................................... 779
11.5.28 AC Fuse Holder...................................................................................................... 782
11.5.29 AC Fuses ............................................................................................................... 784
11.5.30 Power Switch Assembly......................................................................................... 787
11.5.31 Overlay Board Assembly........................................................................................ 790
11.5.32 Tube Park Latch Assembly, Switch or Solenoid .................................................... 792
11.5.33 Digital Power Supply Assembly ............................................................................. 798
11.5.34 Collimator Lamp Power Supply.............................................................................. 800
11.5.35 Main Circuit Breaker and Cable Assembly............................................................. 801
11.5.36 Front Bin and Inner Front Bin................................................................................. 806
11.5.37 Handswitch............................................................................................................. 808
Section 11.6 Column, Horizontal Arm, X-ray Tube, Collimator .................. 809
11.6.1 Engaging Vertical Lock ............................................................................................ 809
11.6.2 Column Replacement............................................................................................... 812
11.6.3 Horizontal Arm Assembly......................................................................................... 821
11.6.4 Horizontal Arm Brake Cable Assembly with Track................................................... 825
Page 23
11.6.5 Tube Mount - Detent Side (Cathode Side) .............................................................. 831

11.6.6 Tube Mount - Friction Side (Anode Side) ................................................................ 835
11.6.7 Tube Yoke Assembly............................................................................................... 839
11.6.8 X-ray tube ................................................................................................................ 844
11.6.9 Collimator................................................................................................................. 848
11.6.10 Dose Area Product (DAP) meter ........................................................................... 856
11.6.11 SID Tape Measure................................................................................................. 858
11.6.12 Collimator Adjustment Knob .................................................................................. 860
11.6.13 Collimator Pointer .................................................................................................. 861
11.6.14 Collimator Lamp..................................................................................................... 865
11.6.15 Collimator Rotation Lock Finger ............................................................................ 869
11.6.16 Collimator Front Cover FRU .................................................................................. 871
11.6.17 Tablet Holder Assembly......................................................................................... 876
11.6.18 Secondary Monitor, Lower to Upper Position Mounting (Gen 2 only).................... 877
Section 11.7 Digital Detector.......................................................................... 895
11.7.1 Digital Detector Replacement .................................................................................. 895
11.7.2 Detector Grip ........................................................................................................... 896
11.7.3 Detector Handle Latch Replacement....................................................................... 899
Appendix A Printer Configuration Information .............................................. 903

Agfa Drystar 3000 Printer Parameters ..........................................................903
Agfa Drystar 5500 Printer Parameters ..........................................................906
Codonics Horizon Printer Parameters ..........................................................908
Fuji FM DPL Printer Parameters ....................................................................910
Fuji DryPix 1000 Printer Parameters .............................................................911
Kodak 8200 Printer Parameters .....................................................................916
Konica Dry Pro 793 Printer Parameters ........................................................921
Glossary ................................................................................................................ 923
Page 24
Chapter 1 Safety / Before You Begin
Section 1.1 How to Determine System Vintage

and Method of Remote Connection.
There are two vintages of Optima XR240amx systems; Gen 1 and Gen 2 (Generation 1 and
Generation 2). The Gen 2 systems are an iteration of the Gen 1 platform. Gen 2 systems have an
updated feature set and use a different method of remote connection. Use the information below to
determine which vintage of system you have, which will help to determine how to appropriately
service the system. All Gen 1 systems use Questra for remote connection, meaning connection is
established through the RSVP main page. Gen 2 systems use RSVP for remote connection,
meaning connection is established through the FFA main page. See Section 8.6 Connecting via
FFA (Gen 2 only) on page 439 for remote connection instructions.
1.1.1 System Software Version

Log into the system with GeService credentials. Select the gear on the upper right-hand corner of
the user interface and select, Launch. The Service User Interface Homepage will open. Scroll down
to the section labeled, Software Information and note the Software Build.
• XRAY_DRAGONFLY_3.XX = Optima XR240amx Generation 1
• XRAY_DRAGONFLY_DOD_2.XX = Optima XR240amx Generation 2
1.1.2 PSI Code

Search for the Asset PSI code in the regional CRM and compare to the table below:
PSI Codes Description

XMB208 Optima XR240amx Gen1 (0D)
XMB211 Optima XR240amx HD Upgrade - Superbee to Gen1 (0D)
XMB217 Optima XR240amx Gen2 Short Column
XMB218 Optima XR240amx Gen1 to Optima XR240amx Gen2 Upgrade
XMB219 Optima XR240amx Gen2 HD Upgrade - Superbee to Gen2 (0D)
1.1.3 Back Office Lookup

Log into FFA and search the asset system ID (see Section 8.6 Connecting via FFA (Gen 2 only) on
page 439). In the Review tab, view the System Info pane to determine PSI code and remote agent
type. Generation 2 systems will show as, Insite2-RSVP in the connectivity configuration;
Generation 1 systems will show as Insite2-Questra.
Chapter 1 Safety / Before You Begin Page 25

Section 1.2 Low Temperature Operation

If the system temperature is below -10° C (+14° F) it can be transported to a location where service
is to occur. Once the system is in the area where service is to occur, please power down the system
and let it the system stabilize for 1 hour prior to powering up.
For system power up, the system must be at a temperature of -10° C (+14° F) or higher.
• Perform Power Control Limits diagnostic check to confirm system battery temperature is
-10° C (+14° F) or higher.
- Navigate to the SUIF -> Diagnostics -> HW Diagnostics -> System Power -> Power
Control Limits.
- Start the test and confirm the results of the system battery packs 1 through 4 are -10° C
(+14° F) or higher.
- If the system batteries are below -10° C (+14° F), power down the system and wait 30
minutes before power back up and checking system batter power. Continue this process
until the system batteries are reporting a temperature of -10° C (+14° F) or higher.
Section 1.3 Pinch point and crush hazard safety

This section lists the potential pinch points or crushing hazards that exist for the system.
SYSTEM:
POTENTIAL CRUSH HAZARD: TAKE CARE NOT TO DRIVE THE SYSTEM OVER
CABLES OR OVER A PERSON’S FOOT.
DRIVE HANDLE:
POTENTIAL PINCH POINT: ALWAYS GRASP THE DRIVE HANDLE IN SUCH A WAY
THAT NEITHER HAND CAN BE PINCHED BETWEEN THE HANDLE SECTIONS.
TUBE PARK LATCH:
HAND CRUSH HAZARD: KEEP YOUR EXTREMITIES AND THE PATIENT’S

EXTREMITIES AWAY FROM THE TUBE PARK LATCH.
COLUMN:
POTENTIAL PINCH POINTS: THE VERTICAL COLUMN MAY CREATE PINCH POINTS
DURING UP AND DOWN MOTION.
Page 26 Section 1.2 Low Temperature Operation

COLUMN ARM:
POTENTIAL PINCH POINTS: THE COLUMN ARM MAY CREATE PINCH POINTS
DURING MOTION.
X-RAY TUBE AND COLLIMATOR:
POTENTIAL PINCH POINT: THE AREA WHERE THE TUBE CONNECTS TO THE ARM
MAY CREATE A PINCH POINT WHEN THE TUBE IS ROTATED. OPERATORS
SHOULD KEEP THEIR HANDS ON THE COLLIMATOR HANDLE AND KEEP PATIENT
CLEAR WHILE ROTATING THE TUBE.
Section 1.4 Energy Sources

Table 1-1 Energy Sources
Energy source Yes/No Location of energy Magnitude of energy

isolating means
Electrical Yes AC power plug 120 VAC/60Hz
220 VAC/50Hz
Electrical Yes Circuit breaker 156VDC
Electrical (batteries) Yes Battery board 156VDC
connector J1
Pneumatic No n/a n/a
Hydraulic No n/a n/a
Gas/water/steam No n/a n/a
Chemical No n/a n/a
Mechanical motion No n/a n/a
Gravity No n/a n/a
Rear suspension spring No n/a n/a
Column spring Yes Scroll lock at top of 610 N-m (450 lb-ft)
column
Thermal No n/a n/a
Stored energy (generator Yes Time discharge and 30kW generator: 8800J
capacitors) DVM verification
Air under pressure No n/a n/a
Oil under pressure No n/a n/a
Water under pressure No n/a n/a
Gas under pressure No n/a n/a
Steam No n/a n/a
Other No n/a n/a
Type of equipment and/or method selected to dissipate or isolate stored energy:

- Allow stored energy to dissipate from the generator. Stored energy is indicated by safety
lamps on the generator aux boxes at N1 and N2.
- After waiting period (times may vary), verify energy has dissipated with voltmeter at XJ1
and XJ2. See Section 1.5 Lock Out/Tag Out (LOTO) Procedure for Electrical Power on
page 28.
Type of equipment and/or method used to ensure disconnections:
- One lock and tag for each electrical power source
- Multiple locking device
Section 1.5 Lock Out/Tag Out (LOTO) Procedure for Electrical

Power
1.5.1 Personnel Requirements
Required persons: 1, trained in LOTO
Timing (min): 30
1.5.2 Preliminary Requirements
1.5.2.1 Tools and Test Equipment

• Standard tool kit
• DC Voltmeter
• LOTO Kit 5421892, contains (see Figure 1-1):
- 3 brass padlocks and identification labels
- 3 LOTO tag packages (25 tags per package)
- 1 electrical plug lockout device 110V - for AC power plug
- 2 electrical plug lockout devices 160VDC - for battery connectors
- 1 nylon carry bag
1.5.2.2 Consumables
• None
1.5.2.3 Replacement Parts

• None
1.5.2.4 Safety
• Verbally notify all affected personnel working in the area that LOTO is being performed.
1.5.2.5 Required Conditions

• None
Page 28 Section 1.5 Lock Out/Tag Out (LOTO) Procedure for Electrical Power
Figure 1-1 LOTO Kit Contents
1.5.3 Performing LOTO

1. Notify all affected personnel working in the area that LOTO is being performed.
2. Shut down all system software.
3. Turn off the Optima XR240amx system by pressing the power button and holding it for several
seconds until the power button light ring turns blue, indicating that the system is shutting down.
4. When the power light ring begins to blink blue, indicating that the system is in standby, switch
the circuit breaker (E2) to the OFF position. See Figure 1-2.
Figure 1-2 Circuit Breaker (E2) in OFF Position
5. Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.

6. Remove the Left, Right, and Front covers. Refer to Section 11.1 Cover Management on
page 652 for cover management procedures.
7. Locate the AC power plug (E1), system circuit breaker (E2), and battery connectors (E3). See
Figure 1-3.
(
(
(
Figure 1-3 Electrical Energy Lockout Locations
8. Apply an approved AC power plug locking device to the AC power plug (E1), then apply your
personal red lock and tag. See Figure 1-4.
Figure 1-4 AC power Plug with Locking Device Applied
9. Wait for the neon lights (N1, N2) on the Aux module to turn off. The neon lights indicate the
presence of DC bus voltage. See Figure 1-5.
POTENTIAL FOR SHOCK.

VOLTAGE MAY BE PRESENT EVEN WHEN THE SYSTEM IS SHUTDOWN.
USE PROPER LOCKOUT/TAGOUT PROCEDURES BEFORE SERVICING THE
SYSTEM.
Figure 1-5 Neon Lights N1 & N2 on Aux Module
10. See Figure 1-6. Use a DC voltmeter to measure the DC bus voltage at XJ1 and XJ2 to verify
there is no stored energy. If necessary, wait for the energy to dissipate before proceeding with
the LOTO procedure.

Item Description
1 XJ1 (bottom) & XJ2 (top) Connections
2 +150VDC
3 0VDC (ground)
Figure 1-6 DC Bus Voltage Measurement Locations

11. Disconnect the two green battery power connectors J3 and J4 and the two sense connectors
J13 and J14 from the Cricket board. Apply a locking device, then apply your personal red lock
and tag. See Figure 1-7.

Item Description
1 Battery power connectors (J3, J4)
2 Battery sense connectors (J13, J14)
Figure 1-7 Battery Connectors J3/J4/J13/J14 and Locking Device
12. Disconnect the two green battery power connectors J1 and J2 and the two sense connectors
J11 and J12 from the Cricket board. Apply a locking device, then apply your personal red lock
and tag. See Figure 1-8.
Item Description
2 Battery sense connectors (J11, J12)
Figure 1-8 Battery Connectors J1/J2/J11/J12 and Locking Device
13. Press the power button and verify that the system does not turn on.

14. See Figure 1-9. Verify that electrical power has been removed from the system by applying the
DC voltmeter (+) lead to connector J5 pin 1 (Item 1, left-side screw terminal) on the Cricket
board and the meter (-) lead to chassis ground (Item 2).
Item Description
1 Connect DC voltmeter (+) to J5 pin 1 (left-side screw terminal)
2 Connect DC voltmeter (-) to chassis ground
Figure 1-9 Cricket Board Test Points
1.5.4 Returning System to Service

1. Notify affected personnel that LOTO devices are being removed and equipment is being re-
energized.
2. Verify that all controls and switches are in the off or neutral position.
3. Verify that all personnel are clear and in a safe position.
4. Verify that the area is safe to re-energize the equipment.
5. Remove locks and tags as appropriate.
6. Reconnect the battery power connectors J1, J2, J3, J4 and battery sense connectors J11, J12,
J13, J14. Verify that any safety guards or devices have been reinstalled.
7. Reinstall all covers.
8. Remove tools and all non-essential equipment.
9. Re-energize equipment by switching the circuit breaker to the ON position. Power ON the
system; follow safe startup procedures.
10. Notify affected personnel that energy has been restored.
Section 1.6 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)

A sudden discharge of static electricity from your finger or other conductor can destroy static
sensitive devices or microcircuitry. Often the spark is neither felt nor heard, but damage occurs. An
electronic device exposed to electrostatic discharge (ESD) might not appear to be affected at all
and can work perfectly throughout a normal cycle. The device can function normally for a while, but
it has been degraded in the internal layers, reducing its life expectancy.
Networks built into many integrated circuits provide some protection, but in many cases, the
discharge contains enough power to alter device parameters or melt silicon junctions.
1.6.1 Important ESD Considerations When Working on a Mobile System
Static Discharge Risk to Components

If you are using a static mat or wrist strap, be sure to connect the mat and strap to machine ground,
not earth ground. This is necessary to isolate yourself from earth ground and equalize your potential
with the machine.
ESD damage prevention includes these steps:

1. Perform LOTO.
2. Verify that the AC plug is not connected to an energy source/outlet.
3. Connect ground mat and wrist strap assembly to frame connection point of the mobile unit.
1.6.2 Generating Static

The following table shows that different activities generate different amounts of static electricity, and
that static electricity increases as humidity decreases.
Table 1-2
Relative humidity
Event
55% 40% 10%
Walking across carpet 7,500 V 15,000 V 35,000 V
Walking across vinyl floor 3,000 V 5,000 V 12,000 V
Motions of bench worker 400 V 800 V 6,000 V
Removing bubble pack from PCB 7,000 V 20,000 V 26,500 V
Packing PCBs in foam-lined box 5,000 V 11,000 V 21,000 V
Many electronic components are sensitive to ESD. Circuitry design and structure determine the
degree of sensitivity. The following packaging and grounding precautions are necessary to prevent
damage to electric components and accessories.
• Transport products in static-safe containers to avoid hand contact.
• Protect all electrostatic parts and assemblies with conductive or approved containers or
packaging.
• Keep electrostatic sensitive parts in their containers until they arrive at static-free stations.
• Place items on a grounded surface before removing them from their container.

• When handling or touching a sensitive component or assembly, ground yourself by touching

the chassis.
• Avoid contact with pins, leads, or circuitry.
• Place reusable electrostatic-sensitive parts from assemblies in protective packaging or
conductive foam.
1.6.3 Personal Grounding Methods and Equipment
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD

This section defines a workzone that is not connected to the system under service. The mobile
system is a battery powered unit that can deliver lethal current. Ensure you are not providing an
earth ground path when practicing ESD procedures.
Use the following equipment to prevent static electricity damage to equipment:

• Wrist straps are flexible straps with a maximum of one-megohm +/- 10% resistance in the
ground cords. To provide a proper ground, wear the strap against bare skin. The ground cord
must connect snugly into the banana plug connector on the grounding mat or workstation.
• Heel, toe, and boot straps can be used at standing workstations and are compatible with most
types of shoes or boots. On conductive floors or dissipative floor mats, use them on both feet
with a maximum of one-megohm +/- 10% resistance between the operator and ground.
1.6.3.1 Static Shielding Protection Levels
Table 1-3
Method Voltage
Antistatic plastic 1,500
Carbon-loaded plastic 7,500
Metalized laminate 15,000
1.6.4 Grounding the Work Area

To prevent static damage of components and parts in the work area:

• Cover the work surface with approved static-dissipative material. Provide a wrist strap
connected to the work surface and properly grounded tools and equipment.
• Use static-dissipative mats, foot straps, or air ionizers to give added protection.
• Handle electrostatic sensitive components, parts, and assemblies by case or PCB laminate.
• Handle components only at static-free work areas.
Page 36 Section 1.6 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)

• Turn off power and input signals before inserting and removing connectors or test equipment.
• Use static-safe fixtures when fixtures must directly contact dissipative surfaces.
• Keep work area free of non-conductive materials, like plastic assembly aids and Styrofoam.
1.6.5 Recommended Materials and Equipment

Materials and equipment that are recommended for use in preventing static electricity include:
• Anti-static tape, smocks, aprons, or sleeve protectors
• Conductive bins, foam, tabletop workstations with ground cord of one-megohm +/-10%
resistance, and other assembly or soldering aids
• Static-dissipative table or floor mats with hard tie to ground
• ESD field service kits
• Static awareness labels
• Wrist straps and footwear straps providing one-megohm +/-10% resistance
• Material handling packages:
- Conductive plastic bags, plastic tubes and tote boxes
- Opaque shielding bags
- Transparent metalized shielding bags and shielding tubes
Section 1.7 General torque values

Unless specified otherwise, use the following table for fastener torque.
Table 1-1 Default Torque Values
Fastener Size Tool Size Tool Size Torque N-m Torque lb-ft Torque lb-in Torque
Hex Key Socket Kg-cm
M3 2.5 mm 5.5 mm 1 -- 8.9 10.3
M4 3 mm 7 mm 2.3 1.7 20.4 23.5
M6 5 mm 10 mm 7.9 5.8 70 80.8
M8 6 mm 13 mm 19 14 168 193.8
M10 8 mm 17 mm 38.4 28.3 339.6 391.8
M12 10 mm 18 mm 66.4 48.9 586.8 677.1
M14 12mm -- 105.9 78.1 937.2 1081.4
M16 14 mm 24 mm 160 117.8 -- --

Chapter 2 Planned Maintenance
Section 2.1 Before You Begin

Your GE Healthcare equipment is designed and manufactured to be of the highest quality. Likewise,
the maintenance requirements in this Service Manual are designed to help you maintain safe, high
quality performance of your equipment for its expected life.
This GE Service Manual is designed with the intent that customers or service providers can utilize
it to perform standard maintenance on the equipment (such as planned maintenance which is
typically time-based) without proprietary service tools or methods. Please note, alternative original
equipment manufacturer planned maintenance schedules may be utilized, and other routine
maintenance efficiencies may be attained, based on GE Healthcare’s or its approved partners’ use
of proprietary service tools and methods, including data analytics and back office capacity. These
GE Healthcare proprietary service tools and methods accomplish the prescribed and necessary
routine maintenance activities identified in the Customer Operations Manual/User Guides and
Service Manual.
Safe equipment performance and operation requires that personnel servicing the equipment be
fully trained on servicing medical X-ray apparatus. General Electric Company, GE Healthcare, and
its associates, maintain a world-wide organization that provides skilled X-ray service. If desired,
arrangements can usually be made to furnish periodic and/or emergency service on a contract
basis. A General Electric representative will be glad to discuss this plan.
Section 2.2 Planned Maintenance Schedule

The system does not require any planned maintenance (PM) to be performed for a 13 month period
following installation. PM schedules should begin in the 13th month that follows the system’s
installation anniversary date.
Following the 13th month, PM should be performed every 12 months.
For systems that were upgraded from an XR200/XR220amx to an XR240amx the schedule is the
same as an XR240amx install.
Page 38 Section 2.1 Before You Begin

Section 2.3 Planned Maintenance Procedures

2.3.1 Prerequisites
2.3.1.1 Tools Required

• Torque Wrench
• Low Profile Hex Sockets
• Dose meter
• kVp meter
2.3.1.2 Consumables
• Loctite 242 (GE part# 46-170686P2)
• Loctite 271 (GE part# 46-170684P1)
2.3.2 PM Procedures
Preventative Maintenance tasks are to be performed every 12 months, beginning on the 13th month
after install.
1. Wear Parts: The hand switch must be replaced at least once every 3 years.
2. System Performance: Review the system log files and discuss the system performance with
the customer to determine if there are any existing issues. Based on customer feedback,
address issues and concerns brought up and include in notes for closure of PM. Perform
calibrations and cleaning when determined as necessary.
2.3.2.1 Visual Inspection

1. Top Cover & Touch Screen: refer to Table 2-1 below.
Table 2-1 PM Procedures, Top Cover & Touch Screen
Min.
Component Procedure Expected Outcome Action
Top Cover Visually inspect the touch screen Top cover surface and touch Assess damage if any, 5
and top cover surface for wear or screen are free of excessive replace components as
damage. Ensure top cover is damage. necessary.
properly secured.
Top Cover Visually inspect switch and display Switch and display markings Replace components as 1
markings. are clearly legible. necessary.
2. Collimator: refer to Table 2-2 below.
Chapter 2 Planned Maintenance Page 39

Table 2-2 PM Procedures, Collimator
Min.
Switches and Knobs Inspect the switches and knobs for Field light switch and field size Adjust knobs or switches. 5
damage and functionality. knobs are not loose or Replace components as
damaged. Moving transverse necessary.
(lateral) and longitudinal field
sizing knobs moves the
respective collimator blades.
Light switch activates the
collimator light. Adjustment
knobs open/close the
collimator blades as intended.
SID Tape Inspect the SID tape measure for SID indicating tape is attached Replace components as 5
damage and functionality. to left side of collimator. Tape necessary.
extends to 6 feet (1830 mm)
and retracts automatically.
Mounting Inspect collimator rail stop and Collimator interface plate is Collimator interface plate is 5
plate spring release hardware. securely fastened to the X-ray securely fastened to the X-ray
Check collimator mounting tube. If not, DO NOT USE. tube. If not, DO NOT USE.
hardware. Service is required. Service is required.
Verify that three brass tabs hold
collimator securely to the
collimator interface plate.
Skin Guards Inspect skin guard arms. Guard arms are perpendicular Replace components as 5
to collimator bottom and free necessary.
of damage.
Rotation Lock Inspect rotation lock. Rotation lock is secure and Replace components as 5
undamaged. necessary.
3. Body: refer to Table 2-3 below.

Table 2-3 PM Procedures, Body
Min.
Covers Inspect covers for wear and There are no cracks, rough or Replace components as 5
damage; ensure covers are sharp edges. necessary.
properly secured.
Casters and Drive Inspect casters and drive wheels Casters and drive wheels Replace components as 5
Wheels for damage, ensure all mounting move freely, are free of debris, necessary.
hardware for the drive wheels are and are properly secured/
tightened to a torque of 3 N-m mounted to a torque of 3 N-m
(26.6 lb-in). (26.6 lb-in) for the drive
wheels.
Drive Handle Inspect the drive handle for wear There are no cracks, rough or Replace components as 5
or damage. sharp edges. necessary.
Tube Support Column Inspect tube support column Tube support column is tight Tighten fasteners and replace 5
mounting. and solid in its mounting. components as necessary.
Fasteners Inspect for any loose fasteners. Fasteners are tight and Tighten any loose fasteners. 5
secure.
4. External Cables: refer to Table 2-4 below.
Page 40 Section 2.3 Planned Maintenance Procedures

Table 2-4 PM Procedures, External Cables
Min.
External Cables Inspect all externally routed cables Cables are free of kinks, Replace components as 5
for kinks or damage in the twists, cuts, and damage, necessary.
insulation, check the cable covers cable covers are free of
for damage, ensure all cable ties damage, cables are routed
are in place and cables are routed and properly secured.
properly.
DAP Cable Ensure the DAP cable is properly DAP cable is properly Route and secure DP cable as 5
secured so that it does not obstruct secured. necessary.
the tube lock mechanism.
5. System Rating Plates: refer to Table 2-5 below.

Table 2-5 PM Procedures, System Rating Plates
Min.
Labeling Inspect all labeling on the system All labeling is present and Replace components as 5
to ensure they are present and legible. necessary.
legible.
• X-ray control, Generator, X-
ray tube (on the outside of
the unit, next to the main
breaker switch)
• Beam limiting device (on the
side of the collimator)
• Warning labels
• System Identification
• UDI
• Tube Focal Spot label is
present (remove top tube
cover)
6. Power Cord: refer to Table 2-6 below.

Table 2-6 PM Procedures, Power Cord
Min.
Power Cord Inspect cable for kinks or damage Cord and cord reel are free of Replace components as 5
in the insulation. Cord extends and kinks, twists, cuts, and necessary.
retracts into the cord reel. damage. Cord extends and
retracts into the cord reel.
7. Handswitch: refer to Table 2-7 below. Refer to 11.5.37 Handswitch on page 808 for
replacement procedure.
Table 2-7 PM Procedures, Handswitch
Min.

Handswitch Cord Inspect the handswitch cord for Handswitch cord and If any of these conditions are 5
nicks, cuts, severe pinching of the connections at handswitch observed, replace the
cord sheath, exposed wires at the and port bulkhead are not handswitch cord.
connector or sheath damage. damaged.

Table 2-7 PM Procedures, Handswitch (Continued)
Min.
Handswitch Appearance Inspect the handswitch for Handswitch is not damaged If any of these conditions are 5
accumulation of dirt, contrast observed, replace the
material, damage to the plastic handswitch.
housing or loosening in the plastic NOTE: Handswitch must be
housing. replaced once every 3 years.
Handswitch Holder Inspect the handswitch holder for There are no cracks, rough or Replace components as 5
wear or damage. sharp edges. necessary.
8. Detector and Detector Charging Bin: refer to Table 2-8 below.

Table 2-8 PM Procedures, Detector and Detector Charging Bin
Min.
Detector Visually inspect the detector Verify there are no cracks, Replace components as 5
surfaces and LCD display. breaks, or damage. necessary.
Charging Connector Check the alignment of the Floating bracket is aligned well Replace components as 5
detector charging floating bracket and indicator membrane necessary.
with the bin. Insert a detector and indicates charge.
ensure the indicator LEDs indicate
an accepted charge.
Bin Charging Indicator Check the bin indicators are intact Indicator LEDs illuminate. Replace components as 5
and ensure they display the necessary.
charge appropriately.
9. Secondary Monitor, Option (Gen 2 only): refer to Table 2-9 below.

Table 2-9 PM Procedures, Secondary Monitor, Option (Gen 2 only)
Min.
Monitor Inspect the touch screen and Monitor surface and touch Assess damage if any, 5
Monitor surface for wear or screen are free of excessive replace components as
damage. damage. necessary.
Monitor cables Inspect all externally routed cables Cables are free of kinks, Replace components as 5
for kinks or damage in the twists, cuts, and damage, necessary.
insulation, check the cable covers cable covers are free of
for damage, ensure all cable ties damage, cables are routed
are in place and cables are routed and properly secured.
properly.
Secondary Display Inspect for monitor counter There are no wear or damage. Replace components as 5
Mounting Arm balancing spring (tilt axis) wear or necessary.
crack or damage.
Secondary display Inspect the plunger pin for wear or There are no wear or damage. Replace components as 5
parking latch damage. necessary.

2.3.2.2 Functional Checks

1. Handswitch: refer to Table 2-10 below.
Table 2-10 PM Procedures, Handswitch
Min.
Handswitch Function Repeatedly press the handswitch Handswitch buttons and Replace the handswitch if the 5
buttons (exposure/prepare button movements are not blocked or buttons motion is not smooth
and collimator button) to check interfered. or if buttons are sticking.
that the switch moves smoothly
from inactive to active positions.
2. Charging Circuit: refer to Table 2-11 below.

Table 2-11 PM Procedures, Charging Circuit
Min.
Battery Charge Plug unit into power outlet. Unplug Confirm that battery level Replace components as 5
unit from power outlet. indicator on top cover flashes necessary.
when accepting AC charge.
Safe Charge Relay Power down the system and leave System can be moved. Replace components as 5
the circuit breaker ON. Depress necessary.
the emergency brake release.
3. Top Cover & Touch Screen: refer to Table 2-12 below.

Table 2-12 PM Procedures, Top Cover & Touch Screen
Min.
Login Press the drive login keys and Drive login keys illuminate Replace components as 5
ensure they illuminate when when pressed and allow login necessary.
pressed. Login to drive and ensure to system drive.
the keys are functional.
User Interface Turn on the UI/touch screen and UI turns on and responds to Replace components as 5
ensure it responds to touch. touch. necessary.
LEDs and Illumination Reboot the system to inspect the All LEDs are functional. Replace components as 5
top cover battery meter LED, necessary.
power button LED, and screen
illumination.
Light Sensor Cover the ambient light sensor Screen changes brightness as Replace components as 5
(can use finger) and observe the a function of the light sensor. necessary.
screen becomes dim. Remove the
cover and observe the screen
brightens.
4. Drive: refer to Table 2-13 below.

Table 2-13 PM Procedures, Drive
Min.

Brake Release Press the emergency brake Drive brakes release when Replace components as 5
release and attempt to drive the emergency brake release necessary.
system forward, backward. switch is depressed.

Table 2-13 PM Procedures, Drive (Continued)
Min.
Drive Performance Test drive the system forward, System does not jerk, drive is Calibrate drive handle 5
backward, and turning left/right. smooth, speed is easily (5.8.1 Drive Handle
controlled, system does not Calibration on page 343),
pull to either side, both sides ensure casters and drive
of the drive handle are wheels are tightened.
functional.
Bumper Function Inspect the bumper to ensure Bumper can be engaged and Adjust the bumper, replace 5
functionality. Depress the bumper released. When engaged, the components as necessary.
from various angles and attempt to system will only allow
drive forward/backward; ensure backwards movement.
system will not allow forward
movement when bumper is
depressed. Release the bumper to
ensure it can be disengaged.
Drive Speed Limit Un-park/un-latch the tube from the The drive speed is reduced Adjust the latch, replace 5
latch and attempt to drive forward, when tube arm is removed components as necessary.
backward. from latch.
5. Tube Column and Arm: refer to Table 2-14 below.

Table 2-14 PM Procedures, Tube Column and Arm
Min.
Tube Latch Park and un-park the tube to the Horizontal tube arm latch Tighten latch and hardware. 5
tube latch. Attempt to disengage operates smoothly and holds Replace components as
the latch without pressing the arm securely in the park necessary.
release handle. Attempt to move position. The lock prevents
the tube (vertical, extension, vertical travel, extension, and
rotate) without pressing the rotation.
release.
Vertical Column Rotation Rotate the tube vertical column as Vertical tube column rotates Replace components as 5
far as possible in either direction, 270° from latch position to necessary.
until rotation is stopped. latch position.
Horizontal Tube Arm Move the horizontal tube arm from Tube arm moves smoothly Replace components as 5
Vertical Travel the latched position to the upper from bottom to top of vertical necessary.
travel limit. column.
Horizontal Tube Arm Extend and retract the horizontal Tube arm extends and retracts Tighten cover screws. 5
Extension tube arm. smoothly. Replace components as
necessary.
Horizontal Tube Arm Rotate the horizontal tube arm 90° Horizontal tube arm, rotates Replace components as 5
Rotation in either direction. 90° to in both directions. necessary.
Tube Tilt Tilt the tube back towards the Tube unit rotates back 10° and Replace components as 5
vertical column and forwards forward 110°. necessary.
towards the operator.
6. Collimator: refer to Table 2-15 below.

Table 2-15 PM Procedures, Collimator
Min.
Attempt to rotate the collimator Rotation Lock is secure and Replace components as
without disengaging the locks. undamaged. Must be no necessary.
movement between collimator
and tube unit.
Rotate the collimator and observe Collimator rotates 90° from
the rotational detent engage. center to either side.
Collimator Rotation 5
Rotational detent knob Replace rotational detent
engages at center and at 90° knob assembly if excessive
either side from center. rotational movement is
Tighten the rotational detent knob. Tightening rotational detent present.
knob clockwise will secure
collimator in any position.
Field Lamp Press the field light on the Collimator field lamp should Replace components as 5
collimator. illuminate. necessary.
Mechanical Stop Remove the collimator cover and Collimator blades adjust as Adjust mechanical stop. 5
inspect the mechanical stop for the intended without interference Replace components as
blades. Ensure there is no contact or contact between necessary.
between the adjustment screw and components.
the arm.
SID Tape Extend and retract SID tape. SID tape extends to 6 ft. (1830 Replace components as 5
mm). SID tape retracts necessary.
automatically.
7. X-ray: refer to Table 2-16 below.

Table 2-16 PM Procedures, X-ray
Min.
X-Ray Control Caution: Radiation Hazard The collimator lamp comes on. Troubleshoot connections and 5
Unit must be in a location where The tube anode rotates when X-ray control based on steps
X-rays can be made safely. at prep position. An audible outlined in this manual.
1. Close collimator blades and tone an X-ray on indicator Replace components as
move tube arm to its lowest lights are present when necessary.
position. making an exposure. After the
exposure is completed,
2. Select lowest kVp and mAs
observe that the dose is
settings.
reported on the technique
3. Press the handswitch collimator screen if DAP is present.
lamp button and verify the
collimator lamp operation.
4. Press the X-ray handswitch
button to the first position (Prep
position).
5. Press the X-ray handswitch
button to the second position
(expose).
8. Generator: refer to Table 2-17 below.

Table 2-17 PM Procedures, Generator
Min.
Thermal Overload Test according to 2.3.3.2 Test the Test results are Pass. Replace components as 30
Interlock Thermal Overload Interlock on necessary.
page 59.
9. Detector Charging Bin: refer to Table 2-18 below.

Table 2-18 PM Procedures, Detector Charging Bin
Min.
Charging Connector Check the alignment of the Floating bracket is aligned well Replace components as 5
detector charging floating bracket and indicator membrane necessary.
with the bin. Insert a detector and indicates charge.
ensure the indicator LEDs indicate
an accepted charge.
Bin Charging Indicator Check the bin indicators are intact Indicator LEDs illuminate. Replace components as 5
and ensure they display the necessary.
charge appropriately.
2.3.2.3 Suspended Mass (Essential to Safety)

1. Suspended Mass (Essential to Safety): refer to Table 2-19 below.
Table 2-19 PM Procedures, Suspended Mass (Essential to Safety)
Min.
Suspended Mass (Essential to Safety)
Attention: The fasteners specified below are safety items. Ensure that the correct fastener
characteristics, part number and specified torque are used.

Table 2-19 PM Procedures, Suspended Mass (Essential to Safety) (Continued)
Min.
Safety Latch Activation Visually inspect the bolt head for 2 x 1000-M4C008-07 bolts in Inspect for missing bolt. If 30
Plate Hardware the torque stripe. Assess whether the Safety Latch Activation missing, attempt to locate and
(Bolt 1000-M4C008-07 or not the torque stripe on the body Plate are torqued to 2.2 N-m remove as to not interfere with
Hexagon Socket Head and the bolt has moved. Manually (19.5 lb-in). any mechanical motion.
Cap Screw, M4-0.7, inspect the bolt/nut for looseness If replacing with a new bolt,
X8mm Long, Grade 12.9 (by hand or torque wrench). verify that it is 1000-M4C008-
Steel, Black Oxide, RoHS Torque the bolt to 2.2 N-m (19.5 lb- 07 Hexagon Socket Head Cap
Fastener.) in). See Figure 2-1 on page 53. Screw, M4-0.7, X8mm Long,
(Assembly 5505000) Grade 12.9 Steel, Black
Oxide, RoHS Fastener. Apply
Loctite 242 over the bolt
threads and torque the bolt to
the specified torque. Apply a
new torque stripe with a
different color than the
previous and note the
difference.
If reusing the same bolt, verify
that it is 1000-M4C008-07
Hexagon Socket Head Cap
Screw, M4-0.7, X8mm Long,
Grade 12.9 Steel, Black
Oxide, RoHS Fastener. Clean
the existing Loctite from the
bolt threads. Reapply Loctite
242 over the bolt threads and
torque the bolt to the specified
torque. Apply a new torque
stripe with a different color
than the previous and note the
difference.

Min.
Spring Mounting Bolt Visually inspect the bolt head for 2 x 1000-M4C016-07 bolts in Inspect for missing bolt. If 30
Hardware the torque stripe. Assess whether the Spring Mounting are missing, attempt to locate and
(1000-M4C016-07 - or not the torque stripe on the body torqued to 2.3 N-m (20.4 lb-in). remove as to not interfere with
Hexagon Socket Head and the bolt has moved. Manually any mechanical motion.
Cap Screw, M4-07, inspect the bolt for looseness (by If replacing with a new bolt,
X16mm Long, Grade 12.9 hand or torque wrench). Torque verify that it is 1000-M4C016-
Steel, Black Oxide, RoHS the bolt to 2.3 N-m (20.4 lb-in). See 07 - Hexagon Socket Head
Fastener) Figure 2-2 on page 54. Cap Screw, M4-07, X16mm
(Assembly 5555001) Long, Grade 12.9 Steel, Black
Oxide, RoHS Fastener. Apply
threads and torque the bolt to
the specified torque. Apply a
new torque stripe with a
different color than the
difference.
that the bolt is 1000-M4C016-
07 - Hexagon Socket Head
Cap Screw, M4-07, X16mm
Long, Grade 12.9 Steel, Black
torque the bolt/nut to the
specified torque. Apply a new
torque stripe with a different
color than the previous and
note the difference.

Min.
Tube Arm to Tube Yolk Visually inspect the bolt head for 8 x 1000-M6C020-07 bolts in Inspect for missing bolt. If 30
Mount Assembly the torque stripe. Assess whether the Tube Arm to Tube Yolk missing, attempt to locate and
Hardware or not the torque stripe on the body Mount Assembly are torqued remove as to not interfere with
(1000-M6C020-07 - and the bolt has moved. Manually to 13.2 N-m (116.8 lb-in). any mechanical motion.
Hexagon Socket Head inspect the bolt for looseness (by If replacing with a new bolt,
Cap Screw, M6-1, hand or torque wrench). Torque verify that it is 1000-M6C020-
X20mm Long, Grade 12.9 the bolt to 13.2 N-m (116.8 lb-in). 07 - Hexagon Socket Head
Steel, Black Oxide, RoHS See Figure 2-3 on page 55. Cap Screw, M6-1, X20mm
Fastener) Long, Grade 12.9 Steel, Black
(Assembly 5507700) Oxide, RoHS Fastener. Apply
threads and torque the bolt/
nut to the specified torque.
Apply a new torque stripe with
a different color than the
difference.
that it is 1000-M6C020-07 -
Hexagon Socket Head Cap
Screw, M6-1, X20mm Long,
Grade 12.9 Steel, Black
torque the bolt/nut to the
specified torque. Apply a new
torque stripe with a different
color than the previous and
note the difference.
X-ray Tube to Collimator Remove collimator (see 4 x M6 JIS B0205 bolts in the Inspect for missing bolt/nut. If 30
Mating Flange 11.6.9 Collimator on page 848). X-ray Tube to Collimator missing, attempt to locate and
(Bolt M6 X 20, Black Visually inspect the bolt head for Mating Flange are torqued to 8 remove as to not interfere with
Oxide M6 JIS B0205) the torque stripe. Assess whether N-m (70.8 lb-in). any mechanical motion.
(Assembly 5508800-2) or not the torque stripe on the body Replace the collimator
and the bolt has moved. Manually
inspect the bolt for looseness (by
hand or torque wrench). Torque
the bolt to 8 N-m (70.8 lb-in). See
Figure 2-4 on page 56.

Min.
Secondary Monitor, Option (Gen 2 only)
Secondary Display Arm Visually inspect the nut for the 2X 3002-M6C-04 nuts in Inspect for missing Nut. If 30
Mounting Hardware torque stripe. Assess whether or Secondary display arm are missing, attempt to locate and
(Nut 3002-M6C-04 not the torque stripe on the body torqued to 10.5±10% N-m remove as to not interfere with
Hexagon Prevailing and the nut has moved. Manually (92.93±10% lb-in). any mechanical motion.
Torque Nut, ISO7040, inspect the nut for looseness (by If replacing with a new nut,
M6-1.0, Grade 8 Steel, hand or torque wrench). Torque verify that it is 3002-M6C-04
Zinc Plated, RoHS the bolt to 10.5±10% N-m Hexagon Prevailing Torque
Fastener) (92.93±10% lb-in). See Figure 2-5 Nut, ISO7040, M6-1.0, Grade
(Assembly 5792760) on page 57. 8 Steel, Zinc Plated, RoHS
Fastener. Apply Loctite 243
over the nut threads and
torque the nut to the specified
than the previous and note
the difference.
If reusing the same nut, verify
that the nut is 3002-M6C-04
Hexagon Prevailing Torque
Nut, ISO7040, M6-1.0, Grade
8 Steel, Zinc Plated, RoHS
Fastener. Clean the existing
Loctite from the nut threads.
Reapply Loctite 243 over the
nut threads and torque the
bolt/nut to the specified
than the previous and note
the difference.
Attention: The part below is a critical item. Ensure that the correct part number is used.
Secondary Monitor, Option (Gen 2 only)

Secondary Display Visually inspect the welded joints There should not be any Replace components as 30
Mounting Bracket for the weld cracks. surface cracks/development necessary.
Weldment See Figure 2-6 on page 58. and breakage at the welded
(Bracket Weldment - joint of the hook.
5792761)
(Assembly 5792760)

2.3.2.4 Electrical Safety Testing

1. Ground Resistance: refer to Table 2-20 below.
Table 2-20 PM Procedures, Ground Resistance
Min.
Ground Strap Check the ground strap for proper Ground strap is present and Replace components as 5
connection and clear of any debris. clear of debris. necessary.
Ground Resistance Ground resistance test. See Test results are Pass. Replace components as N/A
7.2.1 Ground Resistance Testing necessary.
on page 378.
2. Power Cord Leakage Currents: refer to Table 2-21 below.

Table 2-21 PM Procedures, Power Cord Leakage Currents
Min.
Leakage Leakage test. See Test results are Pass. Replace components as N/A
7.2.2 Performing Leakage Current necessary.
Testing on page 387.
2.3.2.5 Calibrations
Perform additional system calibrations as determined necessary from system performance review.
Refer to Chapter 5 Calibration for instructions.
1. Touchscreen: refer to Table 2-22 below.
Table 2-22 PM Procedures, Touchscreen
Min.
Touch Screen Calibration As needed based on Customer Calibration results are Pass. If a failure is encountered, 5
inputs. See 5.8.2 Touch Screen execute again. Replace
Calibration on page 344. components as necessary.
2. DAP: refer to Table 2-23 below. DAP Calibration is to be performed every 2 years per
5.8.3 DAP Calibration on page 344. If calibration is not required at a given PM cycle, this
section is not applicable.
Table 2-23 PM Procedures, DAP
Min.
DAP calibration Execute DAP Calibration. Refer to Calibration pass. If a failure is encountered, 30
5.8.3 DAP Calibration on execute again. Replace
page 344. components as necessary.
3. Detector: refer to Table 2-24 below. Perform detector calibrations at each PM per Section
5.4 Detector Calibration on page 325.
Note: Detector Calibrations are required yearly.

Table 2-24 PM Procedures, Detector
Min.
Detector calibration + Execute Detector Calibrations, Calibration, Detector Checks If a failure is encountered, 30
Detector Checks and Detector Checks and QAP as and QAP pass. execute again. Replace
QAP indicated by the instructions in the components as necessary.
SUIF. Refer to Chapter
5 Calibration.
4. Backup: refer to Table 2-25 below.

Table 2-25 PM Procedures, Backup
Min.
System State Backup Create a new system state Backup successfully created. Label and store the new 30
backup. See 3.1.2 Performing a system state backup.
System Backup on page 61.
2.3.2.6 Radiation Tests

1. Regulatory: refer to Table 2-26 below.
Table 2-26 PM Procedures, Regulatory
Min.
Radiation Tests Perform Tests according to Test results are Pass. Replace components as 135
2.3.4 Radiation Tests on page 60. necessary.
- Generator Operator Indicators
- Technique accuracy for kVp
- Technique accuracy for mAs
- Linearity
- Reproducibility of exposures
- Collimator Alignment
- Collimator light field intensity
- Collimator field size indicator
accuracy
- Beam quality half value layer

2.3.3 PM Procedure Details

The following contains detailed procedural information for some of the PM Schedule items above.
2.3.3.1 Suspended Mass Checks
Attention: This bolt is a safety bolt. Ensure applied torque is 2.2 N-m (19.5 lb-in). If
replacement is needed, ensure the correct part no. 1000-M4C008-07 is used. Verify that it is
a Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw, M4-0.7, X8mm Long, Grade 12.9 Steel, Black Oxide,
RoHS Fastener.
Item Description
1 Bolt 1000-M4C008-07, Hexagon Socket Head
Cap Screw, M4-0.7, X8mm Long, Grade 12.9
Steel, Black Oxide, RoHS Fastener. QTY: 2
Torque 2.2 N-m (19.5 lb-in)
(Assembly 5505000)
Figure 2-1 Safety Latch Activation Plate Hardware

a Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw, M4-07, X16mm Long, Grade 12.9 Steel, Black Oxide,
RoHS Fastener.
Item Description
1 Bolt 1000-M4C016-07, Hexagon Socket Head
Cap Screw, M4-07, X16mm Long, Grade 12.9
Steel, Black Oxide, RoHS Fastener. QTY: 2
Torque 2.3 N-m (20.4 lb-in).
(Assembly 5555001)
Figure 2-2 Spring Mounting Bolt Hardware

a Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw, M6-1, X20mm Long, Grade 12.9 Steel, Black Oxide,
RoHS Fastener.

Item Description
1 Bolt 1000-M6C020-07, Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw,
M6-1, X20mm Long, Grade 12.9 Steel, Black Oxide, RoHS
Fastener, QTY: 8
Torque 13.2 N-m (116.8 lb-in).
(Assembly 5507700)
Note: A low profile hexagon bit will be needed to properly torque these bolts.
Figure 2-3 Tube Arm to Tube Yolk Mount Assembly Hardware

Attention: This bolt is a safety bolt. Ensure applied torque is 8 N-m (70.8 lb-in). Verify that it
is a Bolt M6X20, Black Oxide M6 JIS B0205.
Item Description
1 Bolt M6X20, Black Oxide M6 JIS B0205, QTY: 4
Torque 8 N-m (70.8 lb-in)
(Assembly 5508800-2)
Figure 2-4 X-ray Tube to Collimator Mating Flange

Attention: This nut is a safety bolt. Ensure applied torque is 10.5±10% N-m (92.93±10% lb-
in). Verify that it is a Nut 3002-M6C-04 Hexagon Prevailing Torque Nut, ISO7040.
Item Description
1 Nut 3002-M6C-04 Hexagon Prevailing Torque Nut, ISO7040,
M6-1.0, Grade 8 Steel, Zinc Plated, RoHS Fastener, QTY: 2
Torque 10.5±10% N-m (92.93±10% lb-in)
(Assembly 5792760)
Figure 2-5 Display Arm Mounting (Gen 2 only)

Attention: The part below is a critical item. Verify that the correct part number, 5792761, is
used.
Item Description
1 Secondary Display Mounting Bracket Weldment, 5792761
(Assembly 5792760)
2 Inspection Areas
Figure 2-6 Secondary Display Mounting Bracket Weldment (Gen 2 only)

2.3.3.2 Test the Thermal Overload Interlock

1. Power off the system.
2. Remove the left side cover and let front cover. See Section 11.1 Cover Management on
page 652.
3. At the front of the unit, to the left of the main circuit breaker, locate the thermal overload cable
connector. The thermal overload cable is connected to a short pigtail cable that is plugged into
the generator 15 kW auxiliary module. See Figure 2-7.
4. Disconnect the thermal overload cable from the 15 kW auxiliary module.
Item Description
1 Disconnect thermal overload cable at the pigtail connector
2 OR - - - -disconnect thermal overload cable pigtail from the 15 kW auxiliary module
Figure 2-7 Thermal Overload Cable Connection
5. Turn on system power and wait until it boots to Applications level.

6. Attempt to make an exposure. Verify that the generator aborts the exposure with a tube
thermal overload error.
7. Reconnect the thermal overload cable.

2.3.4 Radiation Tests

Requirements are pass or fail. Service is required if any requirement has failed.
Table 2-27 HHS Tests
Inspect Requirement Time Est.

1. Generator operator indicators Check for proper operation of tones and buzzers as 10 min.
required by regulations. See 7.1.6 Testing Generator
Operator Indicators on page 377.
2. Technique accuracy kVp See 7.1.4.2 Testing kVp Accuracy on page 370. 25 min.
3. Technique accuracy mAs See 7.1.4.3 Testing mAs Accuracy on page 371. 30 min.
4. Linearity See 7.1.4.4 Testing Reproducibility and Linearity of 40 min.
Exposure on page 374.
5. Reproducibility of exposures See 7.1.4.4 Testing Reproducibility and Linearity of 40 min.
Exposure on page 374.
6. Collimator alignment See 7.1.3.2 Testing Light Field to X-ray Field Alignment 30 min.
on page 367.
7. Collimator light field intensity See 7.1.3.1 Testing Light Intensity on page 366. 15 min.
8. Collimator field size indicator See 7.1.3.3 Testing Field Size Indicator Accuracy on 30 min.
accuracy page 369.
9. Beam quality half value layer See 7.1.5.1 Measuring Half Value Layer (HVL) on 30 min.
page 375.
2.3.5 Cleaning (If Necessary)
2.3.5.1 Cleaning PC Cooling Vents

2. Remove the top cover. See 11.1.3 Top Cover Removal on page 653.
3. Clean the cooling vents of the PC assembly.
4. Replace top and side covers.
2.3.5.2 Cleaning PC Fans

2. Remove the top cover. See 11.1.3 Top Cover Removal on page 653.
3. Clean the cooling fan on each side of the PC assembly.
4. Replace top and side covers.
2.3.5.3 Cleaning the System

Refer to the appropriate XR240amx Operator Manual for cleaning instructions.

Chapter 3 System Data and Software
Section 3.1 Backing Up System Data

This section describes the process to save system files, so that there is a valid backup available if
the system software ever needs to be reloaded or upgraded.
You will need the external CD/DVD drive and a blank media disk (CD-R or DVD-R format), or a USB
drive (i.e. memory stick: It is recommended that you obtain a Sandisk Cruzer 4Gb (GE Part Number
5423551, labeled Daily Use).
The backup takes about ten minutes to complete, but depends upon the amount of data that must
be saved. For example, if multiple detectors are registered to the system, there are more calibration
files that must be saved, resulting in longer backup times.
It is not recommended to restore system data with a backup from a different system. This will cause
a quarantine condition on the back office. It is acceptable to restore IP looks, protocols and user
accounts from a different system.
3.1.1 What is included in a system backup?

During a system backup the following data is saved:
• Calibration files
• Configuration files
However, the following data is not saved by system backup:

• Image data: Use a separate process for archiving image data. See the Optima XR240amx
Operator Manual for instructions.
• Procedure protocols: Save the protocol database only if you have made changes to the default
values. Default values are always loaded during a software installation. The default protocol
database is included with each shipped system. See the Optima XR240amx Operator Manual
for instructions on saving the protocol database.
• RRA report, DEI report, and Dose report data.
3.1.2 Performing a System Backup
1. On the Applications desktop, press the UTILITIES button.

2. On the Utilities desktop, press LAUNCH.
3. On the SUIF Service Home tab, select the UTILITIES tab.
4. In the left navigation frame, expand the SYSTEM folder.
5. Press the BACKUP link.
6. Select the backup media by selecting CD/DVD or USB.
7. Connect the external CD/DVD drive to the USB ports (2 USB port connections required) and
insert supported media (CD-R or DVD -R), or connect a USB drive.
8. Press START.
Chapter 3 System Data and Software Page 61

The status bar displays a series of messages: "Starting BACKUP," "BACKUP successful," and
"Backup has completed successfully." The backup takes about one minute, after which the
right frame displays "SYSTEM BACKUP SUCCESS."
9. Close the SUIF by pressing EXIT.
Section 3.2 Performing Load From Cold (LFC)
POTENTIAL FOR DATA LOSS

Before installing, upgrading, or restoring system software, be sure to archive all protocols and
patient files, back up calibration and configuration data if possible, and manually push system data
to the Data Lake through the Data Analytics Tool. Installing software can destroy existing files,
including patient, calibration, and configuration files. Avoid reconfiguring and recalibrating the
system, and ensure data protection by periodically performing a system backup. Always perform a
system backup before performing a system software load or upgrade.
3.2.1 Loading System Software

Use these procedures to re-install the complete system software. The following procedures install
both the operating system and application software on the system.
LIMITED ACCESS
Ensure the system clock is synchronized with local time before loading applications. This is done
to prevent a lock out of Class C and/or Class M access. If the time is off after loading the OS, update
the time prior to loading applications. See 3.2.1.5 Check/Set System Clock Time on page 67.
POTENTIAL FOR DATA LOSS

Pay particular attention to the instruction for system reboot in the following procedure. It is important
to cycle power according to the specified procedure. Cycling power at the wrong time or by the
wrong method can corrupt the system’s operating system.
3.2.1.1 Personnel Requirements

Required persons: 1
Operating System (OS) Load: 20 minutes
Applications Load: 20 minutes
Total Time: 60 minutes
Page 62 Section 3.2 Performing Load From Cold (LFC)

3.2.1.2 Preliminary Requirements
3.2.1.2.1 Tools and Test Equipment

• Service Keyboard
• External CD/DVD drive
• Optima XR240amx Operating System (OS) DVD
• Optima XR240amx Applications DVD
• Any applicable software patches.
3.2.1.2.2 Consumables
• Blank DVD-R Disk (or USB drive) for system backup
3.2.1.2.3 Replacement Parts

• None
3.2.1.2.4 Safety
• None
3.2.1.2.5 Required Conditions

• Service Keyboard and External CD/DVD drive connected to USB ports under drive handle.
• System Backup performed. See 3.1.2 Performing a System Backup on page 61.
3.2.1.3 Preparation
1. Power on the system.
2. Perform system backup, including the Protocol database. See 3.1.2 Performing a System
Backup on page 61.
3. For systems with InSite connectivity: Push machine operating and performance data to the
Data Lake via the Data Analytics Tool (DAT):
a. Insert Class M key.
b. Open a terminal window.
c. Type: /magichome/xruser/bin/DataAnalytics/daMain.py ENTER
If successful, return message is printed on screen: log push successful (Figure 3-1)
Figure 3-1 Log Push Successful
3.2.1.4 Install Operating System

Note: The touchscreen is not active until the first reboot in 3.2.1.6 Install Application Software below.

1. Place the Optima XR240amx OS DVD in the CD/DVD drive, then power off the system.
2. Power ON the system. To ensure PC is set into BIOS mode, hold down F11 key on keyboard
and restart system. Release F11 as soon as NUM lock lights on keyboard.
As an alternate method, power ON the system. Frequently press F11 once per second until
the Please select boot device: screen appears.
3. Select the name of the CD/DVD drive from the menu and press the ENTER key on the service
keyboard (Figure 3-2). The OS Install screen will display.
Figure 3-2 Select CD/DVD Drive* as Boot Device
Note: *In this example, the name of the CD/DVD drive is TEAC. The name will change depending on the
manufacturer and model number of the drive.
4. In the OS Install screen (Welcome to HELiOS 6!), select GEHC X-ray Default
Configuration (Figure 3-3).
Figure 3-3 HELiOS Welcome Screen
5. Some intermediate checks run (Figure 3-4) before the Installation Screen appears. (Figure 3-
5).

Figure 3-4 Intermediate Checks
Figure 3-5 Installation Screen
6. After installation of all packets is completed, some post-installation checks run before the
completion screen appears (Figure 3-6).

Figure 3-6 Post-Installation Checks
7. When OS install is complete (about 20 minutes) an Installation Complete screen appears

(Figure 3-7).
Figure 3-7 Installation Complete
8. Using the keyboard, tab to and select REBOOT from the lower right corner (Figure 3-7) press
the ENTER key.
Note: Wait approximately 3 minutes after selecting REBOOT. If nothing appears on the OS GUI screen,
then power down the system using the power button. Power the system ON again. When the OS
GUI screen appears, eject the OS DVD and insert the applications DVD. A WARNING about root
user access may appear (Figure 3-8); select the CLOSE button in the pop-up window, then
continue with applications installation.

Figure 3-8 Root Warning
9. Proceed with application software installation (below).
3.2.1.5 Check/Set System Clock Time
LIMITED ACCESS
the time prior to loading applications.
1. Refer to Figure 3-9. Check that the displayed time in the upper right-hand corner is correct.
Reference PC clock or cell phone clock. If the displayed time is not within 60 seconds, proceed
with the following steps.
Figure 3-9 Date/Time Displayed on OS Screen
2. Using a mouse, click on the date/time setting on the top ribbon, then click the Edit button.
(Figure 3-10)

Figure 3-10 Edit Date/Time
3. At the Clock Preferences window, click the Time Settings button. (Figure 3-11)
Figure 3-11 Clock Preferences
4. Adjust the time and then click the Set System Time Button. (Figure 3-12)

Figure 3-12 Set Time
5. Proceed to installation of application software below.
3.2.1.6 Install Application Software
LIMITED ACCESS
the time prior to loading applications. See 3.2.1.5 Check/Set System Clock Time on page 67.
1. After system restart, insert Optima XR240amx Applications DVD in the CD/DVD drive. If auto-
run does not start, press the CDROM icon on the desktop. The CDROM Autorun screen will
display (Figure 3-13).
Figure 3-13 CDROM Autorun Screen
Note: Pressing HOME or END on the keyboard will select the first and last icon on the OS GUI. The arrow
keys and ENTER key can then be used to select the icons.
2. Using the keyboard, select OK on the CDROM screen (Figure 3-13) and press the ENTER
key. The touchscreen is not yet active.
3. Select RUN on the CDROM Run Screen (Figure 3-14) and press the ENTER key.

Figure 3-14 CDROM Run Screen
4. In the X-Ray Application Install Manager Screen (Figure 3-15), use the keyboard to select
Optima XR240amx from the pull-down menu option, then select INSTALL and press the
ENTER key.
Figure 3-15 X-Ray Application Install Manager Screen
5. The X-Ray Application Installation process will begin (Figure 3-16).

Figure 3-16 Application Installation
6. When installation is complete, an Installation succeeded message will appear

(Figure 3-17). Using the keyboard, select OK and press ENTER.
Figure 3-17 Installation Succeeded
7. Press ALT + S on the keyboard to select the SHUTDOWN button on the Application Install
Manager screen (Figure 3-18), then press the ENTER key.

Figure 3-18 X-Ray Application Install Manager Screen
8. After about 30 seconds, the following screen will appear (Figure 3-19). Press and hold the
Power Button for about 4 seconds to shut down the system.
Figure 3-19 Post-Installation Screen
9. Press the Power Button to turn on the system.

Note: Gen 2 only - Skip to Step 12.
10. Gen 1 only - When the system has booted, the Set UDI screen will appear (Figure 3-20). Enter
the last set of numbers starting with DF as shown in Figure 3-22. Enter all characters in
UPPER CASE.
Note: The touchscreen is now active.

Figure 3-20 Set UDI Screen (Gen 1 only)
11. Gen 1 only - The UDI label is located at the front of the system as shown in Figure 3-21. Make
note of the last set of numbers starting with DF (Figure 3-22).
Figure 3-21 UDI Label Location

;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
Figure 3-22 UDI Number
Note: Ensure the UDI is entered correctly. If the UDI is not entered correctly, remote access may not be
possible.
12. Gen 2 only - When the system has booted, the Set Password screen will appear (Figure 3-
23). To set the initial password, enter an alphanumeric combination with a minimum of 10
characters. If special characters are used, only these are allowed: @ # % _ - (Figure 3-
24). Setting the password at this point will change both the EA3 and OS passwords.
Inform the customer of the password that was set on the system. If the customer is setting the
password, it is their responsibility to maintain its control.
If at any point the password becomes unknown, the only recovery is to complete another software
load.
Note that the OS password can be changed again at any time using the SUIF utility. See
4.5.15 OS Password Configuration (Gen 2 only) on page 115.
Figure 3-23 Initial Set Password Screen (Gen 2 only)
Figure 3-24 Invalid Password Screens (Gen 2 only)

3.2.1.7 Finalization
1. Load applicable software patches.
2. Restore backups (Section 3.5 Restoring System Data on page 76) or configure the system.
See Chapter 4 Configuration.
a. Under SUIF > Configuration > General, make sure the date and time match the Local time
and time zone.
3. Perform the AP initial configuration through SUIF > Configuration (figure below). Select the
correct country in the drop-down menu and fill in the System ID and Installation Date. Select
Commit, then reboot the system for these changes to take effect. See 4.5.1 Site Configuration
on page 90.
Figure 3-25 Country Configuration
4. Register and pair detectors. See Section 4.16 Installing Digital Detectors on page 176.
5. Change the default IP Address if previously performed. Refer to Section 4.22 IP Address
Change Procedure on page 317.
6. Perform the functional checks at Table 2-16, PM Procedures, X-ray, on page 45.
7. Verify that images can be created and transferred via networking (as applicable).
8. Configure InSite. InSite must be re-committed in order to re-establish remote connectivity to
the back office after an LFC is performed. See 4.5.12 InSite Configuration on page 108.
Section 3.3 Performing a FW Load From Cold (LFC)

1. Shut down the system and turn the main circuit breaker off.
2. Wait one minute, then restore power and boot the system.


5. On the Service Home tab, press the UTILITIES tab button.

6. Press the SUBSYSTEM SOFTWARE button.
7. Press the HW FIRMWARE INSTALL button.
8. Press the DOWNLOADS link.
9. Select HW FIRMWARE INSTALL.
10. Connect the USB firmware dongle to the single USB port on the right.
11. Follow the on-screen instructions.
12. After the firmware load is completed, remove the USB firmware dongle.
13. Reboot the system for the operating system install to complete.
14. Restore generator TNT data. See Section 3.5 Restoring System Data on page 76.
Section 3.4 Restoring Generator Firmware Only

4. Press the SUBSYSTEM SOFTWARE button.
5. Press the HW FIRMWARE INSTALL link.
6. Select DOWNLOADS, then GENERATOR SW INSTALL.
8. Reboot the system for the restore to take effect.
9. Restore generator TNT data. See Section 3.5 Restoring System Data on page 76.
Section 3.5 Restoring System Data

3.5.1 Before You Begin
The following procedure enables you to restore only one selection at a time, so you must repeat the
procedure for each item to be restored. To completely restore all of the system files (calibration and
configuration), execute this procedure for each of the system items below:
• Digital
• Generator TNT Data
• IUI
• System Control
• IP Looks
• Digital Cassette
• OS Configuration
• User Accounts
3.5.2 Restoring System Data

Note: Do not insert the backup media until the restore utility screen is displayed (step 7).
Page 76 Section 3.4 Restoring Generator Firmware Only

It is not recommended to perform a system restore of MagicOS/OS Configuration or System Control

between different systems. There is a potential to cause conflicting DICOM and networking
information on the hospital side, resulting in no connection or inability to properly archive. There is
also possibility to send conflicting hardware identifier data to the back office resulting in inability to
remotely service. IP looks and protocols can be restored between systems of the same vintage.

5. Press the RESTORE link. (Figure 3-26)
Figure 3-26 System Restore Screen
6. Select media type: CD/DVD or USB.

7. Follow the on-screen instructions. Remember that each item must be restored individually
(there is no Restore All).
8. When the status bar indicates that the restore was successful and all items have been
restored, exit the SUIF.
9. Reboot the system for the restore to take effect.
10. If the Security option was enabled on the system, the Security Configuration must be reset:
a. Go to SUIF > Configuration > Security > Security Configuration.
b. Reset the Security Configuration settings (Antivirus, FIPS, etc.). See 4.6.3 Security
Options Configuration on page 121.
c. Press Commit and reboot the system for any changes to take effect.

Section 3.6 Detector Firmware

3.6.1 Detector Sharing and Compatibility:
The HDx Detectors have the ability to be shared between systems which utilize the HDx Detector
platform. If detector sharing is desired between systems which utilize the HDx detector, the
following conditions must be met:
1. Detector compatibility table (resident to both detector and system software) includes both
detector and system software information.
2. Detector private key is current
XR240 Gen1 HDx detectors do not meet the above conditions and cannot be shared between Gen1
and Gen2 systems. XR240 Gen2 HDx detectors by default do meet the above conditions and can
be shared between Gen1 and Gen2 systems. Sharing is also possible between XR240 Gen2
detectors and Fixed Rad systems with HDx detectors.
3.6.2 Detector Firmware Download

• Detector connected via bin or tether.
DO NOT run the firmware download tool with the detector connected wirelessly. Any potential
wireless interruptions will halt the firmware upload process and may cause critical detector
functional issues.
• Firmware package is available on portable media.
• Gen 1 firmware: 2.36
• Gen 2 firmware (for systems with XRAY_DRAGONFLY_DOD_2.X software installed): 3.13+
• Gen 2 firmware (for systems with XRAY_GANAPATI_3.X software installed): 4.8+
Note: Gen1 systems must use the procedure in section 3.6.2.2 below to update detector firmware. All
Gen2 systems, regardless of software version, may use the procedure in section 3.6.2.3 Procedure
for Gen2 Systems Installed with XRAY_DRAGONFLY_DOD_2.X Software on page 80 to update
detector firmware, which requires the service personnel to type code into a terminal; however, if
doing the detector firmware download on a Gen2 system that has XRAY_GANAPATI_3.X software,
the instructions in 3.6.2.4 Procedure for Gen2 Systems Installed with XRAY_GANAPATI_3.X
Software on page 83 may be used. These systems with newer software allow service personnel to
update the detector firmware in the SUIF with button presses
3.6.2.2 Procedure for Gen1 Systems Only

1. Power on system and Detector.
2. Gen1 systems must use the tether for this procedure. Detector firmware download cannot be
completed through the bins on Gen1 systems.
Disconnecting detector during FW download will cause serious damage to detector!

Make sure there is only one detector connected to the system at a time.
3. Connect a Service Keyboard and CD drive to the system.
4. Insert FW media into CD drive.
Page 78 Section 3.6 Detector Firmware

5. Open a terminal window CTRL+SHIFT+F5, then select the terminal icon.

6. Become root:
Type: su root ENTER
Password: current password ENTER
7. Mount the CD drive:
mount /media/cdrecorder ENTER
8. Type these commands:
a. cd /magichome/xruser ENTER
b. mkdir /magichome/xruser/Firmware ENTER
c. Make a directory for each size detector being upgraded.
mkdir /magichome/xruser/Firmware/10x12 ENTER
mkdir /magichome/xruser/Firmware/14x17 ENTER
d. cd /media/cdrecorder ENTER
e. cp ./FW_XXXXX.zip /magichome/xruser/Firmware ENTER (where XXXXX is
the firmware subversion) Firmware version on the media can be found by typing:
ls ENTER to view the media contents.
f. cd /magichome/xruser/Firmware ENTER
g. unzip FW_XXXXX.zip ENTER (where XXXXX is the firmware subversion)
h. cd /media/cdrecorder/10x12 ENTER
i. cp ./DetectorCompatibilityTable.cfg /magichome/xruser/Firmware/
10x12 ENTER
j. cd /media/cdrecorder/14x17 ENTER
k. cp ./DetectorCompatibilityTable.cfg /magichome/xruser/Firmware/
14x17 ENTER
l. cd /media/cdrecorder/ ENTER
m. chmod 777 /magichome/xruser/Firmware/* ENTER
Update Firmware
9. Run the firmware download script:
cd /magichome/xruser/Firmware ENTER
export PATH=/usr/java/jre/bin/:$PATH ENTER
(*Note: There are no spaces in the script above, except between “export” and “PATH”)
./DetectorUpdater.sh ENTER
10. Enter IP of detector:
Tether IP: 192.168.3.30
11. The script will automatically run a ping test and should return packet successful.
12. The script will ask questions:
Keep AED? ENTER
hit key to continue ENTER
13. Wait for script to finish; about 7 to 10 minutes.
Do not leave the system and detector until downloading finishes. Disconnecting detector with tether
cable or power off during FW download will cause serious damage to detector!
14. Verify update was successful:
At the conclusion of the script, the terminal will display:

SUBVERSION: followed by each version of FW that have been loaded onto the detector. Verify
the FW package was loaded, example ALL_XXXXX will be displayed; match this to the
subversion from the firmware media.
This can also be achieved by running Detector BIST as Class M in SUIF > Diagnostics > Digital
Detector > Built In Self Test.
Note: If the detector becomes unresponsive or unreachable, it may be due to upgrade interruption or other
reasons. Record any details as available, then return the detector to Varex for service.
Update Compatibility Table

15. Keep detector connected.
16. Type one of the following commands, base upon detector size:
cd /magichome/xruser/Firmware/10x12 ENTER
cd /magichome/xruser/Firmware/14x17 ENTER
17. Type: ftp [Detector IP] ENTER, where [Detector IP] is the IP of the detector:
Tether IP: 192.168.3.30
18. Name: sdaccess ENTER
19. Password: PerkinElmer ENTER
20. cd calibration ENTER
21. put DetectorCompatibilityTable.cfg ENTER
22. ls ENTER
Check if the edit timestamp of DetectorCompatibilityTable.cfg matches the current
time in system
23. Exit the FTP into the detector by typing:
by ENTER
exit ENTER
3.6.2.2.1 Finalization
1. Reboot system and detector.
2. Verify detector boots wirelessly.
3. Register and pair the detector. See Section 4.16 Installing Digital Detectors on page 176.
4. Perform QAP (Section 5.5 Detector Checks and QAP on page 335). If QAP fails, perform
detector calibrations (Section 5.4 Detector Calibration on page 325) and check QAP again.
3.6.2.3 Procedure for Gen2 Systems Installed with

XRAY_DRAGONFLY_DOD_2.X Software
The following procedure may be used on all Gen2 systems, which requires service personnel to
type code in a terminal; however, if doing the detector firmware download on a Gen2 system that
was installed with XRAY_GANAPATI_3.X software, the instructions in 3.6.2.4 Procedure for Gen2
Systems Installed with XRAY_GANAPATI_3.X Software on page 83 may be used. These newer
systems allow service personnel to update the detector firmware in the SUIF.
Setup
1. Power on system and Detector.
2. For Gen 2 systems, connect Detector to Tether or the Charging Bin.


3. Connect a Service Keyboard and CD drive to the system.

4. Insert FW media into CD drive.
6. Become root:
Type: su root ENTER
7. Mount the CD drive:
mount /media/cdrecorder ENTER
8. Type these commands:
a. cd /magichome/xruser ENTER
b. mkdir /magichome/xruser/Firmware ENTER
c. Make a directory for each size detector being upgraded.
- mkdir /magichome/xruser/Firmware/10x12 ENTER
- mkdir /magichome/xruser/Firmware/14x17 ENTER
d. cd /media/cdrecorder ENTER
e. cp ./FW_XXXXX.zip /magichome/xruser/Firmware ENTER (where XXXXX is
the firmware subversion) Firmware version on the media can be found by typing:
ls ENTER to view the media contents.
f. cd /magichome/xruser/Firmware ENTER
g. unzip FW_XXXXX.zip ENTER (where XXXXX is the firmware subversion)
h. cd /media/cdrecorder/10x12 ENTER
i. cp ./DetectorCompatibilityTable.cfg /magichome/xruser/Firmware/
10x12 ENTER
j. cd /media/cdrecorder/14x17 ENTER
k. cp ./DetectorCompatibilityTable.cfg /magichome/xruser/Firmware/
14x17 ENTER
l. cd /media/cdrecorder/ ENTER
m. For SW Version XRAY_DRAGONFLY_DOD_2.X, type:
cp ./PkiTools_32bits.lnx /magichome/xruser/Firmware ENTER
For SW Version XRAY_GANAPATI_3.X, type:
cp ./PkiTools_64bits.lnx /magichome/xruser/Firmware ENTER
n. cd /magichome/xruser/Firmware ENTER
o. chmod 777 /magichome/xruser/Firmware/* ENTER
Update Firmware
9. Run the firmware download script:
- cd /magichome/xruser/Firmware ENTER
- ./DetectorUpdater.sh ENTER
10. Enter IP of detector:
- Tether IP: 192.168.3.30
- Small bin: 192.168.6.30
- Large bin: 192.168.5.30
11. The script will automatically run a ping test and should return packet successful.
12. The script will ask questions:
- Keep AED? ENTER
- hit key to continue ENTER

13. Wait for script to finish; about 7 to 10 minutes.
Do not leave the system and detector until downloading finishes. Disconnecting detector with tether
cable or power off during FW download will cause serious damage to detector!
14. Verify update was successful:
At the conclusion of the script, the terminal will display:
SUBVERSION: followed by each version of FW that have been loaded onto the detector. Verify
the FW package was loaded, example ALL_XXXXX will be displayed; match this to the
subversion from the firmware media.
This can also be achieved by running Detector BIST as Class M in SUIF > Diagnostics > Digital
Detector > Built In Self Test.
Note: If the detector becomes unresponsive or unreachable, it may be due to upgrade interruption or other
reasons. Record any details as available, then return the detector to Varex for service.
Update Compatibility Table

15. Keep detector connected.
16. Type one of the following commands, base upon detector size:
- cd /magichome/xruser/Firmware/10x12 ENTER
- cd /magichome/xruser/Firmware/14x17 ENTER
17. Type: ftp [Detector IP] ENTER, where [Detector IP] is the IP of the detector:
- Tether IP: 192.168.3.30
- Small bin: 192.168.6.30
- Large bin: 192.168.5.30
18. Name: sdaccess ENTER
19. Password: PerkinElmer ENTER
20. cd calibration ENTER
21. put DetectorCompatibilityTable.cfg ENTER
22. ls ENTER
Check if the edit timestamp of DetectorCompatibilityTable.cfg matches the current
time in system
23. Exit the FTP into the detector by typing:
- by ENTER
- exit ENTER
Update Private Key

24. Become root:
Type: su root ENTER
25. kilall ENTER (shuts down applications)
26. cd /magichome/xruser/Firmware ENTER
27. Run PKITools:
For SW Version XRAY_DRAGONFLY_DOD_2.X, type:
./PkiTools_32bits.lnx ENTER
For SW Version XRAY_GANAPATI_3.X, type:
./PkiTools_64bits.lnx ENTER
28. Type: 4 ENTER to test if there is correct private key

29. Wait until screen shows Test Status: PASSED

- If test passes, go to step 32.
30. If step 29 fails, Type: 2 to set correct private key. (No need to press Enter.)
31. Wait until screen shows Test Status: PASSED

32. Type: q to quit the tool.
33. Remove the files that were copied from the media:
- Change directories to root, type: cd / ENTER
- rm -r /magichome/xruser/Firmware ENTER
If asked if you want to remove [Firmware] directories, type y.
34. su xruser ENTER - return to xruser
35. start.magic ENTER - Start system applications
Note: If the correct key is already installed, another installation attempt will show fail because there is
already a correct key. So as long as Verify private key passed, there is no need to perform
again or troubleshoot.
1. Reboot system and detector.
3. Register and pair the detector. See Section 4.16 Installing Digital Detectors on page 176.
3.6.2.4 Procedure for Gen2 Systems Installed with XRAY_GANAPATI_3.X

Software
This procedure is only for Gen2 systems that were installed with XRAY_GANAPATI_3.X software.
Gen1 systems and Gen2 systems installed with XRAY_DRAGONFLY_DOD_2.X software do not
have this capability in the SUIF. Refer to 3.6.2.2 Procedure for Gen1 Systems Only on page 78 or
3.6.2.3 Procedure for Gen2 Systems Installed with XRAY_DRAGONFLY_DOD_2.X Software on
page 80 for instructions for these older systems.
Setup
1. Power on the system and detector.
2. Connect the detector to the tether or charging bin (wired connection).
3. Remove all other detectors from any wired connections to the system, and power the other
detectors off.


Downloading the Detector Firmware

4. Go to the Detector Firmware Download page by going to the SUIF > UTILITIES >
SUBSYSTEM SOFTWARE > DETECTOR FIRMWARE INSTALL > DETECTOR FIRMWARE
DOWNLOAD (see figure below).
Figure 3-27 Detector Firmware Download Page in the SUIF
5. In the Detector Location list, choose the location of the detector (Large Bin, Small Bin, or
Tether).
6. In the Firmware Location list, select where the new firmware is located (USB or CD).
7. In the Detector Size list, select the size of the detector (10x12, 14x17, or 17x17). This will load
the appropriate compatibility tables to the detector.
8. Click DOWNLOAD at the bottom of the page and wait about 7 to 10 minutes for the firmware
to download.
Disconnecting the detector from the wired connection during a firmware download could cause
serious damage to the detector.
9. Reboot the detector once the download has completed.
Updating the Private Key (If Applicable)

10. Power on the system and detector.
11. Connect the detector via the tether or bin (wired connections).
12. Remove all other detectors from any wired connections and power the other detectors off.
13. Go to the Install Detector Private Key page by going to SUIF > UTILITIES > SUBSYSTEM
SOFTWARE > DETECTOR FIRMWARE INSTALL > DETECTOR PRIVATE KEY (see figure
below).

Figure 3-28 Detector Private Key Page in the SUIF
14. Click UPDATE PRIVATE KEY at the bottom of the page.

Note: The application, including the SUIF, will be terminated when the installation begins. The private key
will be installed on the detector and the applications will be started automatically.
1. Reboot system and detector
2. Go to SUIF > DIAGNOSTICS > DIGITAL DETECTOR> BUILT IN SELF TEST and run BIST
to verify that the firmware versions have been updated.

Chapter 4 Configuration
Potential for Data Loss

• Always create an up-to-date backup of system data after changing the configuration.
• For configuration changes to take effect, restart the system after exiting the Service User
Interface (SUIF). You must restart the system before using it for patient acquisitions.
Section 4.1 System Configuration Overview

• During system installation. The system is delivered with pre-configured information from the
manufacturing process. However, many parameters are specific to the customer and location.
These parameters need to be configured. Other parameters should be confirmed and/or
modified per the customers preference. Refer to the Pre-Installation Checklist for specific site
configurations.
• If system backups are lost or missing. A software install resets all configuration data. If the
software is re-installed but system configuration backup files are not restored, the system must
be manually configured according to specific site parameters. GE Service Personnel must be
contacted to enable any purchased options. If system configuration backup files are restored,
you do not need to reconfigure the system.
• After adding purchased options. Installation of purchased options can only be performed by
an authorized GE Healthcare service representative. If you add purchased options to the
system, update the system configuration files immediately and create and save a new backup.
Purchased option configurations are described in 4.5.8 Options Configuration on page 101.
Section 4.2 Class M access

A valid Class M SSA Key is needed to enabled Class M features. The Class M permissions for X-ray
need to be enabled for your SSA profile to allow access. Follow the instructions on the SSA Support
Central Site for gaining access and acquiring a Class M Key, https://ssa.gehealthcare.com/#/home.
Note: The Class M Key expires after 30 days and permissions must be renewed.
Page 86 Section 4.1 System Configuration Overview

Section 4.3 Identifying MAC Addresses

1. Connect a Service Keyboard to the system.
3. Become root:
Type: su root ENTER
Password: current password )ENTER
4. Type: ifconfig | more ENTER
eth0 is for hardwire Ethernet connection
wlan0 is for wireless Ethernet connection
Section 4.4 Country Codes

Below is a list of country codes used for configuration.
Some countries will not be listed in the drop-down of countries under the SUIF → Configuration
→ Site tab. For countries that have this scenario, refer to Table 4-10 Alternate Country Selections
on page 99 for the recommended alternate country selection in the SUIF. For example, for systems
being installed in Fiji, select the country option as Australia. For systems being installed in Bermuda,
select the country option as United Kingdom. Table 4-10 contains the full list.
Table 4-1 Country Codes
Country Code Country Code Country Code

NORTHERN MARIANA
UNITED STATES US GREECE GR MP
ISLANDS
AFGHANISTAN AF GREENLAND GL NORWAY NO
ALAND ISLANDS AX GRENADA GD OMAN OM
ALBANIA AL GUADELOUPE GP PAKISTAN PK
ALGERIA DZ GUAM GU PALAU PW
AMERICAN SAMOA AS GUATEMALA GT PANAMA PA
ANDORRA AD GUERNSEY GG PAPUA NEW GUINEA PG
ANGUILLA AI GUYANA GY PARAGUAY PY
ARGENTINA AR HAITI HT PERU PE
ARMENIA AM HONDURAS HN PHILIPPINES PH
ARUBA AW HONG KONG HK POLAND PL
AUSTRALIA AU HUNGARY HU PORTUGAL PT
AUSTRIA AT ICELAND IS PUERTO RICO PR
AZERBAIJAN AZ INDIA IN QATAR QA
BAHAMAS BS INDONESIA ID REUNION RE
BAHRAIN BH IRAN IR ROMANIA RO
BANGLADESH BD IRAQ IQ RUSSIA RU
BARBADOS BB IRELAND IE RWANDA RW
BELARUS BY ISLE OF MAN IM SAINT BARTHELEMY BL
Chapter 4 Configuration Page 87

Table 4-1 Country Codes (Continued)

SAINT KITTS AND
BELGIUM BE ISRAEL IL KN
NEVIS
BELIZE BZ ITALY IT SAINT LUCIA LC
BERMUDA BM JAMAICA JM SAINT MARTIN MF
SAINT PIERRE AND
BHUTAN BT JAPAN JP3 PM
MIQUELON
SAINT VINCENT AND
BOLIVIA BO JERSEY JE VC
THE GRENADINES
BOSNIA AND
BA JORDAN JO SAMOA WS
HERZEGOVINA
BRAZIL BR KENYA KE SAN MARINO SM
BRUNEI
BN KUWAIT KW SAUDI ARABIA SA
DARUSSALAM
LAO PEOPLE'S
BULGARIA BG DEMOCRATIC LA SENEGAL SN
REPUBLIC
BURKINA FASO BF LATVIA LV SERBIA RS
CAMBODIA KH LEBANON LB SINGAPORE SG
CANADA CA LESOTHO LS SLOVAK REPUBLIC SK
CAYMAN ISLANDS KY LIECHTENSTEIN LI SLOVENIA SI
CENTRAL AFRICAN
CF LITHUANIA LT SOUTH AFRICA ZA
REPUBLIC
CHAD TD LUXEMBOURG LU SOUTH KOREA KR
CHILE CL MACAU MO SPAIN ES
MACEDONIA (THE
CHINA CN FORMER YUGOSLAV MK SRI LANKA LK
REPUBLIC OF)
CHRISTMAS ISLAND CX MALAWI MW SURINAME SR
SVALBARD AND JAN
COLOMBIA CO MALAYSIA MY SJ
MAYEN
COSTA RICA CR MALDIVES MV SWEDEN SE
CÔTE D'IVOIRE CI MALTA MT SWITZERLAND CH
MARITIME FORWARD TAIWAN (REPUBLIC
CROATIA HR MB TW
OPERATING BASE OF CHINA)
CYPRUS (REPUBLIC MARITIME TANZANIA (UNITED
CY MI TZ
OF) OFFSHORE REPUBLIC OF)
CZECH REPUBLIC CZ MARSHALL ISLANDS MH THAILAND TH
DENMARK DK MARTINIQUE MQ TOGO TG
TRINIDAD AND
DOMINICA DM MAURITANIA MR TT
TOBAGO
Page 88 Section 4.4 Country Codes

Table 4-1 Country Codes (Continued)

DOMINICAN
DO MAURITIUS MU TUNISIA TN
REPUBLIC
ECUADOR EC MAYOTTE YT TURKEY TR
TURKS AND CAICOS
EGYPT EG MEXICO MX TC
ISLANDS
MOLDOVA (REPUBLIC
EL SALVADOR SV MD UAE AE
OF)
ESTONIA EE MONACO MC UGANDA UG
ETHIOPIA ET MONGOLIA MN UKRAINE UA
FAROE ISLAND FO MONTENEGRO ME UNITED KINGDOM GB
FEDERATED STATES
FM MOROCCO MA URUGUAY UY
OF MICRONESIA
FINLAND FI BURMA MM US VIRGIN ISLANDS VI
FRANCE FR NEPAL NP UZBEKISTAN UZ
NETHERLAND
FRENCH GUIANA GF AN VANUATU VU
ANTILLES
FRENCH POLYNESIA PF NETHERLANDS NL VATICAN CITY VA
FRENCH SOUTHERN
TF NEW ZEALAND NZ VENEZUELA VE
TERRITORIES
GEORGIA GE NICARAGUA NI VIETNAM VN
GERMANY DE NIGERIA NG WALLIS AND FUTUNA WF
GHANA GH NORTH KOREA KP ZIMBABWE ZW
Section 4.5 System Configuration Tool (SUIF)
1. On the Applications desktop, press the UTILITIES button .

2. On the Utilities desktop, next to Service, press LAUNCH.
The Service Home tab is displayed. The Home tab contains summary information including
site identification, connectivity parameters, and enabled options.
3. Press the CONFIGURATION tab.
4. On the Configuration page, in the left folder tree, select the parameter group to change.
5. Configure the system according to site preferences.
An overview of the configurable system attributes is given in the tables below.
Contact a GE service representative for items marked “Editable by GE Healthcare personnel
only.”
6. On each page, after making changes, press COMMIT.
7. For configuration changes to take effect, restart the system after exiting the Service User
Interface (SUIF). You must restart the system before using it for image acquisitions.

4.5.1 Site Configuration

The following information can be viewed regardless of service mode. However, some fields are
editable only by sites with Advanced Service mode enabled (Section 4.21 Enabling Advanced
Service mode on page 312), and some are editable only by GE Healthcare personnel.
Table 4-2 Site Tab Parameters
Parameter Definition
Site Name Name of specific site where system is installed.
Street Address 1 Street address of site where system is installed.
Street Address 2 Street address, continued, of site where system is installed.
City City where system is installed.
State/Province State or province where system is installed.
Postal Code Postal or ZIP code where system is installed.
The country in which the system is installed. Selecting the proper
Country country will automatically configure the Access Point to communicate
with the Detector(s). (See Section 4.4 Country Codes on page 87.)
Department name (for example, Radiology) responsible for system
Department Name
maintenance.
Telephone Phone number of department responsible for system.
Fax Fax number of department responsible for system.
Contact Person Name Person responsible for system maintenance.
Contact Person Phone Phone number of person responsible for system maintenance.
System identifier assigned by GE Healthcare following system
System ID
installation and prior to customer turnover.
Editable by GE Healthcare personnel only.
Installation Date
Date system installation is completed, created by GE Healthcare.
Note: System ID must be configured in order for Site parameters to save upon selecting COMMIT.
4.5.1.1 Updating the GE System ID (Gen 2 Only)

Follow the below procedure if the GE System ID needs to be updated. This will allow the system to
still keep proper connection to the back office:
1. Commit the new system ID in the SUIF → Configuration → Site
2. Reboot the system
3. Open a terminal window CTRL+SHIFT+F5
4. Login as root:
Type: su root ENTER
5. Type the following command to verify what ID is currently there:
GetSerialNumber.py ENTER
6. Type the following command to set the RSvP ID to the original GE System ID:
SetAgentConfig.py -crm [original GE System ID] ENTER
7. Reboot the system. The system should now be able to communicate properly with the back
office via RSvP.
Page 90 Section 4.5 System Configuration Tool (SUIF)

4.5.2 Networking Configuration

The following information can be viewed regardless of service mode.
Table 4-3 Networking Tab Parameters (Gen 1 only)
Options: DHCP or Static.
DHCP Configuration Determines whether the IP address is assigned, or acquired
dynamically. If Static is selected, enter associated information in IP
Address, Subnet Mask, and DNS fields.
System IP address.
IP Address Fixed Only
Enabled only if Wired IP Settings is set to Static.
System subnet mask.
Subnet Mask Fixed Only
Default gateway.
Default Gateway Fixed Only
Site domain name server.
Static DNS Server 1
Static DNS Server 2
Application Entity Title for DICOM.
AE Title Fixed Only
Fixed value.
Software port used for network communications.
Port Number Fixed Only
Fixed value.
Table 4-4 Networking Tab Parameters (Gen 2 only)
Options: DHCP or Static.
DHCP Configuration Determines whether the IP address is assigned, or acquired
dynamically. If Static is selected, enter associated information in IP
Address, Subnet Mask, and DNS fields.
Options: Yes or No
IPv6 Support
Select Yes if the facility both supports and desires IPv6 networking.
System IP address.
Static IP Address
System subnet mask.
Static Subnet Mask
Default gateway.
Static Default Gateway
System IP address
Static IPv6 Address Enabled only if Wired IP Setting is set to Static and Yes for IPv6
Support.

Table 4-4 Networking Tab Parameters (Gen 2 only) (Continued)
1-128
Similar to subnet mask for IPv4
Static IPv6 Prefix Length
Enabled only if Wired IP Setting is set to Static and Yes for IPv6
Support.
Default gateway.
Static IPv6 Default Gateway Enabled only if Wired IP Settings is set to Static and Yes for IPv6
Support.
Static DNS Server 1
Static DNS Server 2
Application Entity Title for DICOM.
AE Title
Fixed value.
Software port used for network communications.
Fixed Port Number
Fixed value.
PACS Image Conversion from 16-bit (default) to 14-bit. Do not
Fourteen-bit Image Push enable without proper testing. See Section 5.9 PACS Image Tests
on page 346.
Figure 4-1 Network Configuration (Gen 2 only)

4.5.3 General Configuration

If the site is using a master time server (see 4.5.14 Time Server Configuration on page 113), some
settings in this section are superseded by the master clock server data.
Table 4-5 General Tab Parameters
Timezone Time zone of site where system is installed.
System Clock System time in YYYYMMDD HH:MM:SS format.
Date Display Format MM-DD-YYYY or DD-MM-YYYY.
Time Display Format Military (24-hour) or AM/PM (12-hour).
Measurement System English or Metric.
Application Language Language used for application screens.
Interval between QAP tests, in days. When time-out is reached,
QAP Timeout system users see a warning flag indicating that a QAP test should be
performed.
Applies to USA Veterans Affairs facilities.
VA Site
Yes or No.
Period of inactivity (no user input or processing activity) after which
Screen Blank Timeout
the screen will go blank, in minutes.
Adjust the mask that is applied to the acquired image from the
Image Mask Adjustment
detector. Options: 3mm, 2mm, 1mm, 0, -1mm, -2mm, -3mm.
DAP Display Unit (Gen 2
Select the units in which to display dose.
only)
4.5.4 Hardware Configuration
Table 4-6 Hardware Tab Parameters
Collimator Light Maximum
Time, in seconds, that the collimator light will remain on.
On Time
Collimator Lamp Install
Date the collimator lamp was installed. YYYY-MM-DD format.
Date
4.5.5 Generator Configuration
Table 4-7 Generator Tab Parameters
Percentage of the tube thermal capacity limit, from 0 to 100. When this
Tube HUR Alarm1 limit is reached, X-ray exposure is inhibited and an alarm sounds.
Tube ID Tube ID. Not editable.

Table 4-7 Generator Tab Parameters
Serial number of the tube. Confirm the serial number matches that of
Tube Serial
the attached tube.
Tube Install Date and Date and time the tube was installed. YYYYMMDD HH:MM:SS
Time format.
1. Only available when the site is configured as a VA site.
4.5.6 Wireless Hospital Network Configuration

If the site doesn’t require authentication certificates and keys, go directly to 4.5.6.2 Configuring
Broadcast SSID Networks on page 94 or 4.5.6.3 Configuring Non-Broadcast SSID Networks on
page 95 to configure the wireless network.
Networking configuration information is gathered during the pre-installation phase. Refer to the Pre-
Installation checklist for site-specific networking parameters.
4.5.6.1 Adding Certificates

If your customer uses site-specific network security certificates, contact the IT administrator to
obtain a copy of the certficate(s) on a USB flashdrive.
1. Ensure that the restoration of all configuration parameters has been completed and the system
has been reset.
2. Launch the SUIF and navigate to CONFIGURATION > WIRELESS.
3. Launch the wireless configuration utility as instructed on the screen.
4. Connect the USB flashdrive containing the site-specific certificates to a left-side USB port.
5. Click on the Certificates tab.
a. Observe the USB flashdrive-resident certificates in the pull-down list next to the ADD
button.
b. If there is more than one certificate, you will need to select each certificate individually.
c. Click ADD to install the displayed certificate from the drop-down list.
6. Continue with the site-specific configurations as defined by the IT administrator.
7. Exit the Configuration utility.
8. Remove the USB flashdrive.
9. Reset the system.
4.5.6.2 Configuring Broadcast SSID Networks

1. On the Wireless configuration screen, confirm that the "adapter" is ON or ENABLED.
2. Select the Current Status tab.
3. Click SCAN to find the network.
Note: Some customers may have their network access in a non-broadcast mode. Proceed to
4.5.6.3 Configuring Non-Broadcast SSID Networks on page 95.
4. In the Scan Results window, double-click the network to which you want to connect.

5. In the Network Config window, some fields are auto-populated. Depending on the type of
authentication used by the network, complete the other required information, as described in
the table below:
Table 4-8 Network Config Window Fields
Authentication Type Required Fields No FIPS FIPS ON

Static WEP (Shared Key Y N
• WEP keys
authentication)
• Encryption (if different than TKIP) Y N
WPATM-Personal (PSK)
• PSK
• Encryption (if different than TKIP) Y N
• Identity
• Password
• Client certificate
WPATM-Enterprise (EAP)
• Inner Auth
• Private key file
• Private key password
• PEAP version (only if EAP method is set to PEAP)
• Encryption (if different than TKIP) Y Y
WPA2TM-Personal (PSK)
• PSK
• Encryption (if different than CCMP) Y N
• Identity
• Password
WPA2TM-Enterprise (EAP)
• Inner Auth
WPA2 -Enterprise (EAP)
TM • EAP-TLS N Y
6. Click ADD.
7. Select the Current Status tab, and click CONNECT. Verify successful connection message.
8. To verify connectivity:
a. Select FILE menu > TOOLS.
b. Enter the IP of the machine you want to ping.
c. Press START PING and check for messages verifying connectivity.
d. Press STOP PING.
4.5.6.3 Configuring Non-Broadcast SSID Networks

1. On the Wireless configuration screen, select NETWORK menu > ADD.
2. Select the box: Network is not broadcasting SSID (hidden)
3. Select IP settings:
- If the system will be identified on the network by a static IP address, select STATIC IP,
and enter the IP address, netmask, and gateway. If no gateway is used, you must enter
0.0.0.0.

- If the system will be identified on the network using DHCP, select DHCP.
4. Enter the network SSID.
5. Choose the authentication type.
Some fields are auto-populated. Depending on the type of authentication, complete the other
required information, as described in the table below:
Table 4-9 Authentication Types
Authentication Type Required Fields No FIPS FIPS ON

Static WEP (Shared Key • WEP keys Y N
authentication)
WPATM-Personal (PSK) • Encryption (if different than TKIP) Y N
• PSK
WPATM-Enterprise (EAP) • Encryption (if different than TKIP) Y N
• Identity
• Password
• Inner Auth
WPA2TM-Personal (PSK) • Encryption (if different than TKIP) Y Y
• PSK
• Encryption (if different than CCMP) Y N
• Identity
• Password
WPA2TM-Enterprise (EAP)
• Inner Auth
WPA2TM-Enterprise (EAP) • EAP-TLS N Y
6. Click ADD.
7. Select the Networks tab, and verify that the network is listed.
8. Select the Current Status tab, and click CONNECT. Verify successful connection message.
9. To verify connectivity:
a. Select FILE > TOOLS.
b. Enter the IP of the machine you want to ping.
c. Press START PING and check for messages verifying connectivity.
d. Press STOP PING.
4.5.6.4 IPv6 Support (Gen 2 only)

IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6) is the latest IP version which provides identification and location
of systems. The latest version has enhanced security over previous versions.

Both IPv6 and IPv4 destination configuration are supported. These are integrated into the software,
there is no option to enable in the SUIF > Configuration > Options page.
Both IPv6 and IPv4 can be configured on system simultaneously.
Note: Confirm with site networking administrators that they support IPv6 before configuration.
IPv6 is disabled by default. IPv6 can be enabled in the Advanced tab of the Wireless UI (Figure 4-
2 and Figure 4-3). IPv6 can be configured for DHCP or Static just like IPv4.
No system reboot or wireless repair needed
Figure 4-2 IPv6 Configuration (1 of 2)

Figure 4-3 IPv6 Configuration (2 of 2)
4.5.6.5 Troubleshooting Connections

If you try to connect in an enterprise situation, it will continue to try to connect until you tell it to stop
by selecting DISCONNECT.
4.5.7 Wireless Detector Network

GE personnel and customers that have purchased an Advanced Service package have the ability
to choose the wireless channel and transmit (TX) power with which the AP and Detector(s)
communicate.
4.5.7.1 Alternate Country Selections

Some countries will not be listed in the drop-down of countries under the SUIF → Configuration
→ Site tab. For countries that have this scenario, refer to the table below for the recommended
alternate country selection in the SUIF. The table also shows the recommended Channel Selection
and Transmit Power.

Table 4-10 Alternate Country Selections
Recommended Country
System Installed in: Channel Selection Transmit Power
Selection in SUIF
Swaziland South Africa Default 21 dBm
Libya Egypt or Nigeria Default 21 dBm
Puerto Rico or US Virgin
Barbados Default 21 dBm
Islands
Dominican Republic or
Jamaica Default 21 dBm
Panama
Moldova Romania or Turkey Default 21 dBm
Mongolia Russia or China Default 21 dBm
Serbia Austria Default 21 dBm
Cambodia Singapore Default 21 dBm
Fiji Australia Default ≥ 20 dBm
Bermuda United Kingdom Default ≥ 20 dBm
St.Lucia Trinidad and Tobago Default 21 dBm
Macedonia Albania Default 21 dBm
Ivory Coast Kenya Default < 20 dBm
4.5.7.2 Manual Channel Selection

Channel Selection: Displays all available channels based on the regulatory table of the AP and
Detector. Choosing a specific channel or set of channels may reduce traffic however it may
decrease overall performance by limiting the AP automatic channel switching feature.
To select the channel, touch the box with the desired channel and then select COMMIT. Select the
desired channel for better connectivity by touching the box on the menu. To clear the selection to
default, select RESET. Reboot the system after configuration is completed for changes to take
effect.

Figure 4-4 Channel Selection
4.5.7.3 Manual Transmit (TX) Maximum Power Setting

Transmit (TX) Maximum Power Setting: Select the power at which the AP broadcasts. To change
the Transmit Power, select the value from the drop-down menu and select COMMIT. To clear the
selection to default, select RESET. The default setting is 21 dBm.
Note: For countries that are not listed in the drop-down selection under SUIF → Configuration → Site,
refer to Table 4-10 Alternate Country Selections on page 99 for the requested country and Transmit
Power setting, then select the COMMIT button. Reboot the system after configuration is completed
for changes to take effect.

Figure 4-5 Transmit (TX) Maximum Power Setting
4.5.8 Options Configuration

The Optima XR240amx systems are delivered with a base set of operating software that is
configured for immediate operation.
Optional software and hardware purchased by the site must be enabled by GE Healthcare service
personnel, such as:
• Repeat Reject Analysis (RRA)
• Auto Protocol Assist (APA)
• Generator Power (30 kW - display only, not editable) (Gen 1 only)
• Dose SR (Gen 2 only)
• AutoGrid (Gen 2 only)
• Quick Enhance (Gen 2 only)
• Audit Logs (Gen 2 only)
• RFID Badge Login (Gen 2 only)
• Second Monitor (Gen 2 only)
• Security (Gen 2 only)
• TLS Enable (Gen 2 only)
• Remote HIS-RIS (Gen 2 only)
• DoD Mode (Gen 2 only)
• Critical Care Suite/Quality Care Suite (Gen 2 only)
Non-purchased options must be enabled by GE Healthcare service personnel, such as:
• Drive Login
• Secure Login
• DICOM Connectivity
• Remove Patient Orientation DICOM Tag

When an option is purchased, a rating plate is supplied with that option. Rating plates for options
must be placed on the system. Be sure to properly apply rating plates so they can be checked
for accuracy and compliance.
After attaching the rating plate, complete the Product Locator Card as required.
4.5.8.1 Purchased Options

Table 4-11 Purchased Options
Options are Disable or Enable.
Auto Protocol Assist When enabled, the default setting is RPC. To change the setting
to SPC, see 4.8.2 Changing Auto Protocol Assist Settings on
page 159.
RRA reporting for image acquisitions.
Repeat Reject Analysis
Yes or No
Dose Structured Reporting/Dose Reports (See 4.5.10 Dose SR
Dose SR (Gen 2 only) Configuration on page 105)
Yes or No
Scatter reduction via software algorithm for specific anatomies.
AutoGrid (Gen 2 only) (See 4.5.11 AutoGrid Configuration on page 107)
Yes or No
Quick tools, reprocessing, and clinical workflow optimizations.
Quick Enhance (Gen 2 only)
Yes or No
Log history of user and system functions such as login and
remote connection enable. Logs can be pushed to site controlled
Audit Logs (Gen 2 only) log server.
Yes or No
User login via RFID badge reader.
RFID Badge Login (Gen 2 only)
Yes or No
Second viewing monitor attached to the vertical column.
Second Monitor (Gen 2 only)
Yes or No
Includes Antivirus, FIPS, DICOM TLS, AIDE, Government
Security (Gen 2 only)
Information System Warning Banner
Transport Layer Security (TLS) for DICOM data in transit.
TLS Enable (Gen 2 only)
Yes or No
Allows the user to complete the exam workflow directly from the
Remote HIS-RIS (Gen 2 only) system by integrating HIS and RIS systems.
Yes or No
Hardened/STIGS (Security Technical Implementation
Guidelines) intended for US Government and/or highly secure
DoD Mode (Gen 2 only) customers.
Yes or No

Table 4-11 Purchased Options (Continued)
Analyzes frontal chest images to identify cases with a critical
Critical Care Suite (Gen 2 only) finding (pneumothorax) and enables case prioritization at PACS.
(See CCS and QCS Installation Manual PN 5824137-1EN)
Algorithms used to determine whether the acquired X-ray image
is a frontal chest and lung coverage is adequate, and to
Quality Care Suite (Gen 2 only)
automatically rotate the frontal chest image. (See CCS and QCS
Installation Manual PN 5824137-1EN)
4.5.8.2 Non-purchased Options

Table 4-12 Non-Purchased Options
Drive Login1 Yes or No
Secure Login
Yes or No
(Login Management)
DICOM Connectivity Yes or No
Remove Patient Orientation
Yes or No
DICOM Tag
1.For XR240 Gen1 systems, the drive will re-lock after 5 minutes. For XR240 Gen2 and
XR240 Gen2 with CCS, the drive will re-lock after 15 minutes. These XR240 Gen2 systems
may or may not have the RFID Badge Reader installed. It makes no difference if logging in
via the drive keypad itself or with the RFID badge reader; the drive will unlock again using
both methods.

4.5.9 Enabling Purchased Options in the SUIF
Figure 4-6 Options Configuration (1 of 2) (Gen 2 only)
Figure 4-7 Options Configuration (2 of 2) (Gen 2 only)
You must have a Class M service key to activate the purchased options.
Press COMMIT and restart the system to enable the selected options.

1. Turn on the system.

2. Log in to the system with user name GEService and current password.
3. Enable and connect Class M SSA key.

5. On the Utilities desktop, press SERVICELAUNCH.
The Service Home tab is displayed.
6. Press the CONFIGURATION tab button.
7. On the SUIF Configuration tab, in the left folder tree, select OPTIONS.
8. Find the option to enable, and press YES.
9. Press COMMIT.
10. Restart the system.
11. Apply the option’s rating plate to the correct place on the system.
12. Log in to the system. The enabled option is now available for use.
4.5.9.1 Enabling Critical Care Suite/Quality Care Suite in the SUIF

Critical Care Suite/Quality Care Suite (CCS/QCS) are purchasable options for Gen2 systems only.
Please refer to the CCS and QCS Install Manual (PN 5824137-1EN) for instructions on how to
enable this option as the procedure is different than all other purchasable options.
4.5.10 Dose SR Configuration

Radiation Dose Structured Reporting (RDSR) is an option that allows for dose structured reporting.
RDSR is similar to a DICOM image. It can provide dose information for both analog and digital
exams as well as the dose for rejected images. Dose SR also organizes data to show dose at
irradiation event level and can provide supplementary details related to dose such as technique
data.
Dose SR must be enabled before configuration. See 4.5.9 Enabling Purchased Options in the SUIF
on page 104.

2. On the left side of the screen, select Preferences > DAP
3. Press On (figure below).

Figure 4-8 Enable DAP
4. On the left side of the screen, select Preferences > Image Management
5. At Auto Send, press Edit (figure below).
Figure 4-9 Edit Auto Send
6. For each applicable network host, check the box next to Dose SR (figure below).

Figure 4-10 Check Dose SR
7. Press Save
4.5.11 AutoGrid Configuration

AutoGrid Configuration is an option that not only reduces scatter reduction on an input image but
also reduces workflow. This is because there is less to handle or store a physical grid.
The AutoGrid software, when activated, will automatically be applied to all acquisitions where the
protocol recommends the use of a grid but no physical grid is applied.
Note: If the physical grid is applied to the detector, AutoGrid will be disabled for that acquisition.
AutoGrid must be enabled before configuration. See 4.5.9 Enabling Purchased Options in the SUIF
on page 104.

2. On the left side of the screen, select Preferences > Image Processing
3. At AutoGrid, press On (figure below).
The AutoGrid software can be configured at three global strength options (Low, Medium, and
High). The strength indicates the amount of scatter reduction that will occur during image
processing. The Low strength corresponds to the amount of scatter reduction that would occur
through using a 6:1 ratio grid, Medium an 8:1 ratio grid, and High a 12:1 ratio grid.

Figure 4-11 AutoGrid Configuration
4.5.12 InSite Configuration

InSite allows GE Remote Engineers to connect to the system to help troubleshoot and identify any
potential issues. InSite connection also allows for system telemetry and usage metrics to be sent
to GE for analysis and health reporting of the medical system. Per GE Healthcare Global Service
Privacy and Security Standards, all machine telemetry and usage metrics must be void of any
patient health information (PHI). Thus, all data sent to the GE Back Office has been de-identified.
Once InSite has been configured, contact GE Cares to verify the system is communicating.

• System ID has been committed. See 4.5.1 Site Configuration on page 90.
• System to Hospital Wireless Networking Configuration has been committed. See
4.5.6 Wireless Hospital Network Configuration on page 94.
4.5.12.2 Procedure (Gen 1 only)

For Gen 2 procedures, see 4.5.12.3 Procedure (Gen 2 only) on page 109.
1. In the SUIF select the Configuration Icon.
2. Select INSITE displayed on the left hand side of the SUIF (Figure 4-12).

Figure 4-12 InSite Configuration
3. Enter the following details based on the site networking architecture:

a. Remote Connection: Yes/No (must be set to Yes if remote connectivity is desired)
b. Proxy Required: Yes/No
c. Proxy Server Address:
d. Proxy Server Port:
e. Authorization Required: Yes/No
f. Proxy Server User:
g. Proxy Server Password:
4. If the site needs a VPN tunnel for InSite Connectivity, set the following parameters
Note: If the site allows communication through port 443, this configuration is not required:
a. Proxy Required = Yes
b. Proxy Server Address = 150.2.1.251
c. Proxy Server Port = 8002
Note: The Enterprise URL is a default value and does not require modification unless instructed.
5. Commit changes and reboot the system.
6. Ensure the system is active by contacting GE Cares.
4.5.12.3 Procedure (Gen 2 only)

For Gen 1 procedures, see 4.5.12.2 Procedure (Gen 1 only) on page 108.
1. In the SUIF select the Configuration Icon.
2. Select INSITE displayed on the left hand side of the SUIF (Figure 4-13, Figure 4-14).

Figure 4-13 InSite/RSVP Configuration (1 of 2)
Figure 4-14 InSite/RSVP Configuration (2 of 2)
3. Enter the following details based on the site networking architecture:

a. Remote Connection: Yes/No (must be set to Yes if remote connectivity is desired)
Special Configuration: If the site is US Government/DoD, then this selection must
be NO. Configuration of InSite is completed at this point.
b. Proxy Required: Yes/No
c. Proxy Server Address:
d. Proxy Server Port:
e. Authorization Required: Yes/No
f. Proxy Server User:

g. Proxy Server Password:

Note: Proxy Server User and Proxy Server Password fields will not appear if Authorization Required is set
to NO (Figure 4-13).
Note: The configuration and architecture needed can be found from the Pre-Installation Checklist
provided by the site. If this information is not available, contact site Wireless Networking
Administration to determine configuration needed.
It may be necessary for the site to grant a firewall exemption for the device. Outbound traffic for
InSite communication should be allowed for each of the following Enterprise URLs:
• https://insite.gehealthcare.com:443
• https://as1-insite.gehealthcare.com:443
• https://as2-insite.gehealthcare.com:443
It is also recommended that a DNS be used in for InSite. This can be configured in the
4.5.6 Wireless Hospital Network Configuration on page 94.
4. If the site needs a VPN tunnel for InSite Connectivity, set the following parameters
Note: If the site allows communication through port 443, this configuration is not required:
a. Proxy Required = Yes
b. Proxy Server Address = 150.2.1.251
c. Proxy Server Port = 8002
Note: The Enterprise URL is a default value and does not require modification unless instructed.
5. Commit changes and reboot the system.
6. After reboot is complete, login to the system with geservice credentials.
7. Remote servicing sessions are initiated through FFA. For all remote servicing tools to function
as intended, the system credentials must be sent to the GE Healthcare Back Office via the
password configuration page. If this action is not performed, remote servicing will not be
functional.
a. Ensure the system is remotely connected; credentials will not be received by the GE
Healthcare Back Office if the system does not have remote connectivity active. Log into
FFA using Chrome (https://ffa.health.ge.com) and search the system ID. If the system is
connected, it will show as ONLINE in the System Info pane of the Review tab.
b. In SUIF → Configuration → Password Configuration, enter the and the New
Password. By selecting, Change Password, the credentials are encrypted and sent via
secure tunnel to GE Healthcare Back Office.
8. Ensure the remote servicing tools function properly by contacting GE Cares.
See Section 8.5 InSite theory on page 432 for more information on remote servicing
applications supported for this product. See Section 10.8 InSite Connectivity Troubleshooting
on page 629 for information on identifying issues preventing full connectivity.
4.5.13 PNF Configuration

The Firewall option at the top of the PNF area must be set to On. If it is set to Off, select TURN
FIREWALL ON.
• When the firewall is off, all network traffic in both directions is allowed. This setting is used
primarily for troubleshooting.
• When the firewall is on, it allows only the network communications that are specified by its
configuration and rejects all the rest.
After modifying any PNF options, select RESTART FIREWALL to apply the changes.

4.5.13.1 PNF GUI Control Area

The PNF GUI Control area, near the top of the screen, contains these options:
Table 4-13 PNF GUI Control Options
Option Action
Configure filter settings that allow access through the firewall by
Filter Settings
adding allowed services and IP addresses, and removing filters.
Options:
BACKUP CURRENT FILTERS: Create a backup of the current filters.
RESTORE FROM BACKUP FILTERS: Restore the filters to a
Backup/Restore previously backed up set.
RESTORE TO FACTORY DEFAULTS: Reset all filter settings to
those originally installed.
REMOVE BACKUP FILTERS:
Show the firewall rules that are currently in effect on this system.
Network Tools
Select REFRESH to refresh the list of rules.
Select which red interfaces the filter settings should be applied to.
Configure PNF
Select UPDATE RED INTERFACES to apply the changes.
4.5.13.2 PNF Tabs and parameters
Table 4-14 PNF Parameters
Option Description
Named Services tab
Used to set up filters to allow traffic to common network services (such as telnet or ftp) by
name, without needing to know the port and protocol.
Services/Allowed IPs Lists current filters by name and IP.
Select the Delete box checkbox next to the filter to delete, then
Remove Existing Filters
select DELETE EXISTING FILTERS.
From the Service Name drop-down list, select the service to be
allowed (such as telnet, ssh, ftp).
Add New Filter In the Allowed IPs field, specify a particular IP address, a range
of IP addresses, or a masked subnet.
Select ADD FILTER to apply your changes.
Allowed Nodes tab
Used to set up filters to allow all traffic from specified nodes. You can specify a particular IP
address, a range of IP addresses, or a masked subnet.
Allowed IPs Lists current filters by IP.
In the Allowed IPs field, specify a particular IP address, a range
Add New Filter of IP addresses, or a masked subnet.

Table 4-14 PNF Parameters(Continued)
Option Description
DICOM tab
Used to add DICOM port numbers (all IP addresses are allowed DICOM access; the DICOM
application may limit access by IP). You can add multiple DICOM ports.
Allowed DICOM Ports Lists current DICOM ports by number.
Select the Delete box checkbox next to the port to delete, then
In the Allowed Port field, specify a particular DICOM port.
Add New Filter
Expert tab
Used to set up detailed filters by port, protocol, and node-lock (source).
Used only by advanced IT users.
Name/Port/Protocol Lists current filters by name, port number, protocol, and IP.
In the Name field, specify the filter name.
In the Allowed IPs field, specify a particular IP address, a range
of IP addresses, or a masked subnet.
Add New Filter In the Allowed Port field, specify a particular port.
From the Protocol drop-down list, select the protocol to be
allowed (TCP, UDP, Any).
NAT tab
Used to define NAT (Network Address Translation) rules.
Lists current filters by name, source IP, destination IP,
Name/Source IP/Dest. IP
destination port, and protocol.
In the Name field, specify the filter name.
In the Source IP field, specify the source IP.
In the Destination IP field, specify the destination IP.
Add New Filter In the Destination Port field, specify the destination port.
From the Protocol drop-down list, select the protocol to be
allowed (TCP, UDP, Any).
4.5.14 Time Server Configuration

Note: GE recommends configuration Time Server on the system to ensure proper time synchronization.
Configuring a Time Server is not necessary for basic system function, but can enhance the general
operation and user experience.
Synchronization with the NTP server can be done only after the system is successfully connected
to the network. For wireless networks, refer to 4.5.6 Wireless Hospital Network Configuration on
page 94.

1. In the SUIF, select the Configuration Icon.

2. Select TIME SERVER displayed on the left hand side of the SUIF(Figure 4-15).
Figure 4-15 Time Server Configuration
3. Select the link CLICK HERE on the Date, Time and NTP Settings main page (Figure 4-15).
4. Choose to manually set the date and time (Figure 4-16) or check the box Synchronize date
and time over the network (see next step).
Figure 4-16 Date and Time Settings

5. If Synchronize date and time over the network is chosen, select the NTP server
from the list and press ADD (Figure 4-17).
Figure 4-17 NTP Server Configuration
4.5.15 OS Password Configuration (Gen 2 only)

The system can change or modify the OS password. This utility is used to set the root password on
the system. If this is the first time that this password is set, the current OS password is the value
that was set as on the last Load From Cold. This is shown as Old Password in the configuration
page (Figure 4-18). This view is only available with user administrator access or as a GE Service
representative.
Note: When the OS root password is changed, this will set the remaining OS account passwords to a
random value.
Note: This process should be done at install after remote connection is established, if enabled. This is
needed to establish a remote shell and to enable file transfer via SFTP. If the customer wants InSite
connectivity with Remote Servicing, this step MUST be performed, or Remote Service will not be
allowed.
Inform the customer of the password that was set on the system. If the customer is setting the
password, it is their responsibility to maintain its control.
If the password is forgotten or lost, the only recovery is a complete software reload.
1. Go to SUIF → Configuration → Password Configuration.
2. Enter the Old Password which is the current password.
3. Enter the New Password as an alphanumeric combination of at least 10 characters. Follow
on-screen instructions regarding special characters.
4. Confirm the New Password in the ReType New Password Field.
5. The Show Password box removes the hash and allows the user to see the password in text.
6. The ReType New Password field will outline in green if the passwords match, red if the
passwords do not match.

7. Press Change Password.
Figure 4-18 OS Password Configuration SUIF Page
4.5.15.1 Password Workflow (Gen 2 only)

This section discusses the workflow of the EA3 and root password changes as the equipment
transitions from manufacturing through configuration on site. It provides additional information to aid
GE service personnel when configuring the system.
Note: Both EA3 and OS password updates are user facing per GE privacy and security requirements. If
at any point the passwords become unknown or lost, remote connection will be interrupted and
system login may be denied. Recovery is a complete LFC.
Manufacturing Password
Manufacturing sets the password to complete configurations. Manufacturing then runs a script
to reset the password prior to shipment. Passwords affected: EA3 and OS
System Arrival On Site
When the system arrives on site, GE service personnel must enter in a new password to login
and begin configuration and installation. Passwords affected: EA3 and OS
System Configuration
1. After networking is established and InSite is configured, enter SUIF > Configuration >
Password Configuration (figure below).

Figure 4-19 OS Password Configuration SUIF Page
2. Set the password again. This will send the OS password only to the back office. EA3 will
remain as set above. Passwords affected: OS only
* OS password configuration in SUIF changes all user accounts: xruser, root, insite
* Updates FFA password vault
* Remote connection sessions for SSH, SFTP will automatically login using stored OS
credentials
3. The EA3 Admin password is set per the site/FE preference via the EA3 login
management in the Local Users tab (figure below). Passwords affected: EA3 only

Figure 4-20 EA3 Local Users Tab
4.5.15.1.1 Restoring User Accounts from another XR240amx System

After restoring from a backup of a different XR240amx system, the password on the destination
system will then be changed to the password from the source system.
OS credentials are not backed up or restored. It is not necessary to execute another OS password
change after restoring User Accounts. Passwords affected: EA3 only
The EA3 password should be changed if it is not as intended after restore. See previous discussion.
4.5.15.1.2 Password Strategy

System UDI and GON are combined for the password.
All characters in the UDI after the ) are used, beginning with DF (figure below).
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
Figure 4-21 UDI Number
The GON is assigned for every asset and found in:

- CRM
- SynerGE
- eGIB
UDI + GON = Password
Example: If the GON is 487652 and the UDI is as shown above, then the password is
DFAAAYY00001AA487652

4.5.16 Secure Login Configuration (Gen 1 only)

Select SAVE to apply your changes, or CANCEL to cancel them.
Use the arrow buttons to move through the pages.
Table 4-15 Secure Login options
Option Description
Audit Message Settings tab
Audit Source ID IP address of audit message source.
Patient Name
On or Off.
Anonymized
Enterprise Repository tab
Enterprise Repository 1 On or Off.
Host Name/IP Primary audit server name or IP.
Port Number Port number used to communicate with primary audit server.
Protocol used to communicate with primary audit server (TCP,
Protocol
UDP).
Send Test Message Test connection with primary audit server.
Enterprise Repository 2 On or Off.
Host Name/IP Secondary audit server name or IP.
Port Number Port number used to communicate with secondary audit server.
Protocol Protocol used to communicate with secondary audit server.
Send Test Message Test connection with secondary audit server.
Local Repository tab
On/Off Radio buttons.
Refresh Button to refresh the list.
Event ID / Time / Event
Headers for list of messages.
Outcome
Display Raw XML Display the raw data file to the user.
Section 4.6 Security Configuration (Gen 2 only)

4.6.1 Overview
Security is a purchased option which includes several sub-options. If a customer purchases the
Security package, this also includes Audit Logs, DICOM TLS (TLS Enable), Antivirus, AIDE
(Advanced Intrusion Detection Environment), FIPS (wireless security), and DoD Warning Banner
(Government Information System). Each of these options can be individually enabled and
configured pending customer preference. For US Government (Department of Defense/DoD)
customers, DoD Mode (Hardened STIGS) also must be configured separately. The installation of
the security options is not necessary for basic system function but can enhance the general
operation and user experience. Contact GE Healthcare Service Personnel for enabling these
options. Refer to the configuration matrix in Table 4-16 below for dependencies and enablement.

If a customer purchases the Security Option yet chooses not to enable some of the sub-options, the
installing personnel must document in the installation activity who made the decision from the site
and why this decision was made.
Table 4-16 Security Matrix
Then you CAN

Purchased
Purchased DoD have, in addition to But you CANNOT
Security Then you can have: →
Mode? → the second column: have:
Option? →
→
DICOM TLS (default off)
- Class M enabled
Audit Logs (default off)
- Class M enabled
AIDE (passively on)
- No enabling
Yes No Remote connection Hardened/STIGS
Antivirus (default on)
- Class A enabled
FIPS (default off)
- Class A enabled
Warning Banner (default off)
- Class A enabled
DICOM TLS (default off)
- Class M enabled
Hardened/STIGS -
Audit Logs (default off) comes with DoD
- Class M enabled Mode purchase;
AIDE (passively on) appears in the
- No enabling Security
Yes Yes Configuration page Remote connection
Antivirus (default on) only if DoD Mode is
- Class A enabled enabled; once DoD
FIPS (default off) Mode is enabled,
- Class A enabled Hardened/STIGS is
Class A enabled
Warning Banner (default off)
- Class A enabled
4.6.2 Enabling Security Options

This section applies to Gen 2 only.
By default, all security options are disabled at initial installation.
GE Service Personnel must enable the following options. Refer to Figure 4-22 below.
1. In SUIF > Configuration > Options, under Purchased Options, set Security to YES.
This will enable the Security Configuration page for:
- Antivirus (refer to 4.6.4 Antivirus on page 122)
- FIPS (refer to 4.6.5 FIPS Encryption on page 133)
- Government Information System
2. Set Audit Logs to YES.
3. Set TLS Enable to YES.
Page 120 Section 4.6 Security Configuration (Gen 2 only)

4. If the customer is US Government/Department of Defense, set DoD Mode to YES.

Enabling DoD Mode in SUIF > Configuration > Options will also enable Hardened/STIGS in
the Security Configuration page. Only enable this option for US Government/Department
of Defense customers. The only way to disable this option once committed is to perform a
Load from Cold.
Note: If many Security options are enabled all at once, it may take 5 to 10 minutes for the system to
Commit those changes
5. Reboot the system after configuring these options. After reboot, the Security Configuration
page will appear in SUIF > Configuration > Security. See 4.6.3 Security Options Configuration
below.
Figure 4-22 Options Screen
4.6.3 Security Options Configuration

By default, all security options are disabled at initial installation.
After enabling the security options (see 4.6.2 Enabling Security Options above), the Security
Configuration screen will be available after a reboot. Choose the following options in SUIF >
Configuration > Security > Security Configuration (see Figure 4-23 below).
By default, Antivirus is ON. FIPS, Government Information System and Hardened/STIGS are OFF.
Enable these per site requirements.
- Antivirus (refer to 4.6.4 Antivirus below for configuration).
- Ensure the site is compliant with FIPS prior to enabling this option. If a FIPS check fails
upon boot, the system will not complete boot and a Load from Cold will be needed for
recovery.
- Do not enable Government Information System unless the customer is US Government/
Department of Defense.
- Do not enable Hardened/STIGS unless the customer is US Government/Department of
Defense. The only method to disable Hardened/STIGS is a Load from Cold.

- If the site has Security + DoD Mode + Hardened/STIGS, then Remote Connection must
be OFF. In SUIF > Configuration > InSite, select No for Remote Connection. Commit the
No selection and reboot the system. See 4.5.12 InSite Configuration on page 108 for
more information.
- After enabling the options in the Security Configuration Page, it is not necessary to reboot.
You may proceed to configure each of the options.
Figure 4-23 Security Configuration Screen
4.6.4 Antivirus
Optima XR240amx Gen 2 introduces antivirus scanning in the form of McAfee's Endpoint Security
for Linux Threat Prevention (ENSL). This optional security feature will be enabled by default when
the security option is purchased and configured on the system. GE validates McAfee software and
engine versions to ensure compatibility with system software and firmware. Lack of validated virus
protection could lead to system instability or failure. For this reason, GE Healthcare recommends
only installing McAfee software and engine versions that are listed in 4.6.4.4 Validated Antivirus
Software on page 129.
If a virus is found in a file or directory, the system will quarantine the file and raise a virus detection
security alert to the user. It is best to contact your site's security or network administrators to
determine the root cause of this alert. There is no way to accept the file if it has been quarantined.
The recommended action is to take a system snapshot and then do a LFC on the system.
The alert will take the form of a blinking red bell-shaped icon next to the status bar at the bottom of
the worklist graphical user interface. The icon can be clicked and will display a more detailed
message describing the virus detection alert. When the alert is closed, the blinking red bell-shape
will no longer be displayed. See Figure 4-24 below for the bell-shaped alert icon in the bottom left-
hand corner of the status bar.

Figure 4-24 Alert Icon in Status Bar
The antivirus feature includes three status and configuration user interface pages located in the
SUIF. These pages can be used to check the antivirus, engine file, and virus definition (DAT)
version information, while also providing virus scan summaries.
4.6.4.1 Antivirus EPO Setup

This is the default page that opens when the user clicks the Anti-Virus link. The top of the page
displays the current version information for the antivirus release, engine version, and DAT file
version.
McAfee's ePolicy Orchestrator (ePO) is an enterprise antivirus solution that allows for the
monitoring, updating, and scanning of devices that have been configured to connect to the ePO;
however, this can only be done if the customer supports ePO server. This page allows the user to
enter the credentials (Server IP Address, Port No, User Name, and Password) to connect to a
facility's ePO. Once configured and applied, the screen will display the connection status in the
upper-right corner of the screen. At this point, it will be the facility's responsibility to maintain the
antivirus feature via the ePO. See Figure 4-25 below.
Figure 4-25 McAfee's ePolicy Orchestrator (ePO) Setup
The ePO is capable of remotely pushing version updates as seen below in Figure 4-26:

Figure 4-26 ePO Remote Setup
4.6.4.2 Antivirus Non-ePO Setup

For facilities that do not have an ePO implemented, this screen allows for manual update of engine
and DAT file versions. The on-screen instructions indicate where the most recent engine and DAT
files can be found, as well as the instructions on how to prepare these files. These instructions are
taken directly from the McAfee web support page. See Figure 4-27 below.

Figure 4-27 Antivirus Non-ePO Setup
1. Once the files have been copied to a USB disk, insert the USB into the system.
2. The file path for the USB stick must be entered so that the system knows where to look to
download and install the new versions. For the Optima XR240amx, this file location will be
/media/usbdisk/. See Figure 4-28 below.
Figure 4-28 Antivirus Manual Update

3. Once the file location is specified, the UPDATE DAT and UPDATE ENGINE buttons can be
pressed. The status of the update will be displayed in the screen under Status Information.
See Figure 4-28 above.
Once the update is complete, the Antivirus Details at the top of the page will update to reflect the
new file versions. See Figure 4-29 below.
Note: With a non-ePO configuration, it is the customer's responsibility to maintain up-to-date DAT engine
file definitions.
Figure 4-29 Antivirus Details
4.6.4.3 Antivirus Scan

The antivirus feature runs in two distinct modes: On-Demand Scanning and On-Access Scanning.
See below.
4.6.4.3.1 On-Demand Scanning

On-demand scanning is a full-system virus scan that can be triggered by the user from the Antivirus
GUI in the SUIF. The user will be able to start a scan. A full-system scan can take an extended
amount of time to complete. The Status Information window will show the progress of the scan,
and the user will have the ability to stop the scan once started. If it is started after stopping, the scan
will start over again. See Figure 4-30 below.

Figure 4-30 On-Demand Scan
A summary of the scan results will be displayed in the Status Information box, and more detailed
scan logs can be viewed by clicking on the OnDemandScan link next to the scan log label (see
Figure 4-31). This will open a window containing all the detailed scan operation reports (see
Figure 4-32).
Figure 4-31 Scan Log Link

Figure 4-32 Scan Reports
4.6.4.3.2 On-Access Scanning

On-Access Scanning (OAS) is a background process that scans individual files as they are
accessed by the system. This allows for near real-time scans of files that are in immediate use.
If OAS finds a virus, a virus detection alert will be triggered, and additional information will be
recorded in the antivirus status section of the SUIF.
If a virus is found, contact the facility System Administrator, the Security and/or Networking
Administrator, and GE Technical Support, then perform a Load From Cold.
An example of OAS discovering a test virus file can be seen in Figure 4-33 below:

Figure 4-33 Example of Found Virus
4.6.4.4 Validated Antivirus Software

GE Healthcare recommends not installing or using unvalidated anti-virus software and engine
version. Doing so may result in system instability or failure.
The Optima XR240amx systems have been validated to run with the software listed in the following
table:
Supported Anti-Virus Software Supported Version(s)
McAfee Endpoint Security for Linux Threat Prevention 10.5.0
McAfee ePolicy Orchestrator (with McAfee Endpoint v5.9

Security for Linux Threat Prevention)
Engine Version 5900
6000
4.6.4.5 McAfee ePolicy Orchestrator 5.9.0 Server Console Configuration

To be configured by site Networking/Security Administrator.
Note: Use Internet Explorer.
4.6.4.5.1 Create a New Subgroup

1. Login to the McAfee ePolicy Orchestrator Console
2. Click Menu → Systems → System Tree
3. Expand the drop-down menu in the Systems Tree and click on the Group you wish to add to
the Optima XR240amx Subgroup
4. Click on the New Subgroup button and enter the desired name

4.6.4.5.2 Configure Product Update Rules for New Subgroup

Please note that if the DAT and Engine product update task is locked, the following steps in this
section will not be possible.
1. Expand the drop-down menu in the Systems Tree and click on the newly created Subgroup
for the Optima XR240amx system
2. Click on the Assigned Client Task tab
3. Click on the Edit Assignment link of the product update task
4. Click on the Break Inheritance radio button in the Inheritance section
5. Click on the Disabled button in the Schedule Status section
6. Click on the Save button
4.6.4.5.3 Configure Product Deployment Rules for New Subgroup

Please note that if the DAT and Engine product deployment task is locked, the following steps in
this section will not be possible.
1. Expand the drop-down menu in the Systems Tree and click on the newly created Subgroup
for the Optima XR240amx system
2. Click on the Assigned Client Tasks tab
3. Click on the Edit Assignment link of the product deployment task
4. Click on the Break Inheritance radio button
5. Click on the Create New Task button
6. Enter a desired Task Name and add a Description
7. Click on the Selected packages radio button
8. Under Package types, uncheck all boxes except for DAT
9. Click on the Save button
4.6.4.5.4 Create New On-Access Policy

1. Click Menu → Policy → Policy Catalog
2. Select Endpoint Security Threat Prevention in the Product drop-down menu.
3. Select On-Access Scan in the Category drop-down menu.
4. Click on the New Policy button. Name the policy and click on the OK button.
5. Click on the newly created policy in the catalog window to open the configuration page.
6. Click on Show Advanced.

7. Scroll down to the Exclusions window and add the following exclusions:
Also Exclude When To
File Name or Path Subfolders Exclude
/magichome/xruser/ Yes Read / Write
/magichome/flightrecorder/ Yes Read / Write
/database/ Yes Read / Write
/enggdata/log/ Yes Read / Write
/usr/share/gehc_security/ Yes Read / Write
/export/home/insite/ Yes Read / Write
/var/log/ Yes Read / Write
/_adming/Manage_NSS/ Yes Read / Write
/media/nss/ Yes Read / Write
/mnt/system/log/ Yes Read / Write
/cgroup/ Yes Read / Write
/dev/ Yes Read / Write
/proc/ Yes Read / Write
/selinux/ Yes Read / Write
/sys/ Yes Read / Write
When To
File Type Exclude
vmdk Read / Write
dbl Read / Write
ctl Read / Write
log Read / Write
jar Read / Write
war Read / Write
dtx Read / Write
dbf Read / Write
frm Read / Write
myd Read / Write
myi Read / Write
rdo Read / Write
arc Read / Write
8. Click on the Save button.
4.6.4.5.5 Create New Tag

1. Click Menu → Systems → Tag Catalog
2. Click on the New Tag button.
3. Enter a name for the new tag and click on the Next button.
4. Select System Name and OS OEM Identifier from the Available Properties list.

5. For the System Name property, create the following setting:

Value (case
Property Comparison sensitive)
System Name Equals magic
6. For the OS OEM Identifier property, create the following settings:

Property Comparison Value
OS OEM Identifier Contains HELiOS release 6.9.2
or Contains HELiOS release 6.10
Red Hat Enterprise Linux
or Contains
Server release 6.10
7. Click the Next button.

8. Select the On each agent-server communication and when a "Run Tag Criteria" action
is taken radio button.
9. Click the Next button.
10. Select the Apply the tag now… check box.
4.6.4.5.6 Create New Assignment Policy Rule

1. Click Menu → Policy → Policy Assignment Rules
2. Click on the New Assessment Rule button.
3. Enter a name for the new assignment policy rule and click the Next button.
4. Click on the Add policy button. Select Endpoint Security Threat Prevention from the Product
drop-down menu. Select On-Access Scan from the Category drop-down menu. Select the
newly created policy from the Policy drop-down menu.
5. Click on the Next button.
6. Click on the Tag option in the Available Properties window. Select Has Tag in the Comparison
drop-down menu. Click the […] button and select the newly created Tag in the Value drop-
down menu. Click the OK button.
7. Click on the Next button.
4.6.4.5.7 Assign Assignment Policy Rule to Client Device and

Move to New Subgroup
1. Click Menu → Systems → System Tree
2. Click on the top-level group in the Systems Tree.
3. Click on the preset drop-down menu and select This Group and All Subgroups.
4. In the Quickfind field, enter the IP address of the system and click Apply.
5. Click on the checkbox next to the desired system.
6. Click on the Actions button in the lower left of the Systems list. Highlight Tag and click on the
Clear Tag action.
7. Select an existing Tag for the client system and click OK. Do this for all existing tags
8. Click on the checkbox next to the desired client system. Click on the Actions button in the
lower left of the Systems list. Highlight Tag and click on the Apply Tag action.
9. Select the newly created tag and click OK.

10. Click on the checkbox next to the desired client system. Click on the Actions button in the
lower left of the Systems list. Highlight Directory Management and click on the Move
Systems action.
11. Select the desired Subgroup for the Optima XR240amx system and click on the OK button in
the lower left.
4.6.5 FIPS Encryption

The Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS) 140-2 defines how encryption and hashing
modules are allowed to secure information on government networks. All branches of the federal
government (VA, DoD, MDA, etc) will use this standard.
This is part of the Security Option bundle and is disabled by default when the bundle is purchased.
This option can be enabled in the Security Configurations folder in the SUIF. Configuring this
requires a reboot of the system.
Having this option enabled will limit some of the encryption options that are allowed in the DICOM
TLS configuration as well as the hospital wireless configuration.
Every time the system is rebooted, it will complete a self-scan to see if we are meeting the FIPS
140-2 requirements. If a violation is detected, the system will issue a security alert (blinking red icon
on the lower UI) and will disable the external wireless and wired network interfaces. These
interfaces can be manually re-enabled if needed or desired. However, if FIPS does a scan while the
system is booting and finds a violation on bootup, you will not be able to load the OS, and a load
from cold will be required to get the system back. This also means that you will not be able to create
a new backup of the system or protocols if this were to happen. You would need to use old backups,
if available.
Note that enabling FIPS mode may affect back-office connectivity.
For all the reasons listed above, do NOT enable this option until you speak with the site's security
administrators. Do not enable this option if the site does not explicitly say to turn it on.
4.6.6 Government Information System

The US Government Information System Warning Banner must be enabled for all US Government/
Department of Defense customers. This will print the following text at the EA3 (system login)
screen:
"You are accessing a U.S. Government (USG) Information System (IS) that is provided for
USG-authorized use only. By using this IS (which includes any device attached to this IS), you
consent to the following conditions: -The USG routinely intercepts and monitors
communications on this IS for purposes including, but not limited to, penetration testing,
COMSEC monitoring, network operations and defense, personnel misconduct (PM), law
enforcement (LE), and counterintelligence (CI) investigations. -At any time, the USG may
inspect and seize data stored on this IS. -Communications using, or data stored on, this IS are
not private, are subject to routine monitoring, interception, and search, and may be disclosed
or used for any USG authorized purpose. -This IS includes security measures (e.g.,
authentication and access controls) to protect USG interests--not for your personal benefit or
privacy. -Notwithstanding the above, using this IS does not constitute consent to PM, LE or CI
investigative searching or monitoring of the content of privileged communications, or work
product, related to personal representation or services by attorneys, psychotherapists, or

clergy, and their assistants. Such communications and work product are private and
confidential. See User Agreement for details."
4.6.7 DoD Mode, Hardened/STIGS

4.6.7.1 Summary
DoD Mode is a configuration specifically for the United States Department of Defense. If you are
not a United States Department of Defense site, please ignore this configuration.
DoD Option allows Hardened mode to be enabled. Hardened mode applies additional security
configurations. These configurations impact remote service, specifically SSH. Root SSH login is not
permitted. Therefore, everything will need to be done as an xruser. SSH will idle after 15 minutes
of no activity, so users would have to re-login. Additionally, it will display the United States
Department of Defense warning banner on the screen, stating that you are about to enter a United
States Department of Defense system.
4.6.7.2 Configuring DoD Mode

The DoD Mode option needs to first be enabled in the Options page before the Hardened/STIGS
option can be enabled in the Security Configuration page.
Refer to the following instructions on how to properly configure this option.
Once Hardened/STIGS is turned on, the only way to turn it off is to do a LFC on the system. Do not
turn this option on if the site is not a United States Department of Defense customer.
1. Go to SUIF → Configuration → Options
2. Enable the Security option and DoD Mode option (Figure 4-34).
3. Press COMMIT, then restart the system for the changes to take place.
Figure 4-34 DoD Mode Configuration in SUIF

4. After system restart, go to Configuration → Security → Configuration. With both Security

and DoD Mode turned on, you should now see Hardened/STIGS as the last feature to
configure on the Security Configuration page. This is where you can turn on or off the DoD
Mode option of Hardened/STIGS (Figure 4-35).
Figure 4-35 Hardened/STIGS Configuration
4.6.8 DICOM TLS

4.6.8.1 Introduction
The successor of Secure Socket Layer (SSL), DICOM Transport Layer Security (TLS) is a
cryptographic protocol that provides confidentiality and integrity between two data sources. Its
specific purpose for the system is to protect data in DICOM traffic. It relies on public-key
cryptography (PKI). The connection is private because the transmitted data is encrypted, and
machine identity can be authorized before transmission to ensure the recipient of the data is
authorized. The most current version of TLS on the system is TLS 1.2, but it also supports TLS 1.1
and TLS 1.0.
4.6.8.2 Certificate Management

Digital certificates are signed public key certificates. Their data structures have verifiable data of an
entity, its public key, and some other attributes. The host certificate is the digital certificate of the X-
ray system, while the trusted certificates are the digital certificates of PACS, RIS, or CA, where CA
(Certificate Authority) is the entity that issues digital certificates.
Private Key
The private key must be generated before any other certificate is generated, or an error will
occur. It is kept secret and is only known by the system. It is protected with a password and
created on the system simultaneously with the public key. The private key will only work with

the corresponding public key. It can be imported via USB to the system; however, one must
know the passphrase to decrypt it.
Host Certificate
The Host Certificate is a digital file that contains the public key of the system. It is shareable
via USB export and generated on the system; however, only one of these is supported at a
time. If the system generates the private key, the system must also generate the host
certificate.
Trusted Certificates
Trusted Certificates can be certificates of other systems or a CA certificate. Many of these can
be loaded onto the system, but they must be loaded via USB. If the system does not have the
CA Certificate, one must have the PACS's certificate to make TLS work on the system.
Certificate Signing Request (CSR)
The CSR exports a file that allows the signing of a host certificate by the CA server.
Certificate management consists of two different customer environments: direct comparison which
is self-signed, and trusted signature chain comparison which is CA-signed.
In direct comparison, the customer does not have a CA. Each machine is given the public
certificates in advance for all the machines that are authorized to use this network. To authenticate
a partner, a machine compares the incoming connection information with the certificates on its list.
See Figure 4-36 below for a representation of this installation process.
Figure 4-36 Direct Comparison Installation Process
In trusted signature chain comparison, a third party is involved - the Certificate Authority. The CA
signs these certificates for the machines, using its signature. Other systems in the network use
these signatures to assure that these certificates are for machines that are authorized to use the
network. See Figure 4-37 below for a representation of this installation process.

Figure 4-37 Trusted Signature Installation Process
4.6.8.3 Enabling the TLS Option in SUIF

1. Go to SUIF → Configuration → Options
2. Enable the TLS option and the Security option (Figure 4-38).
3. Press COMMIT, then restart the system for the changes to take place.
Figure 4-38 TLS Configuration in SUIF

4.6.8.4 Enabling the TLS Option in Network Connections

1. To enable TLS for network hosts and DICOM printers, go to the Utilities page. Under System
Settings, press EDIT for Network Connections (see Figure 4-39 below).
Figure 4-39 TLS Configuration in Network Settings
2. To enable TLS for Network Hosts, press ADD next to Network Hosts (Figure 4-40).
3. To enable TLS for DICOM Printers, click ADD next to DICOM Printers (Figure 4-40).
Figure 4-40 Adding Network Hosts and Printers
4. For Network Hosts, under the Host tab, mark the Enable TLS box (Figure 4-41). As Storage
Commitment is not supported for TLS, check No on the right-hand side. Press SAVE when
complete.

Figure 4-41 Network Host Settings
5. For DICOM Printers, under the Printer tab, mark the Enable TLS box (Figure 4-42). Press
SAVE when complete.
Figure 4-42 DICOM Printer Configuration
4.6.9 Configuring Certificate Management

Once the Security Bundle is enabled, Certificate Management will become visible in the SUIF
under Configuration → Security. The Certificate Management feature manages the system’s
identity files, as well as files with which the system communicates.
Note: TLS must be enabled in both the Options page in the SUIF and in the Network Connections page
under System settings before configuration can be accomplished. See 4.6.8.3 Enabling the TLS

Option in SUIF on page 137 and 4.6.8.4 Enabling the TLS Option in Network Connections on
page 138.
There are four different configurations for certificate management. Contact site Networking and
Security Administrators to determine which configuration to use.
4.6.9.1 System-Generated Private Key, Facility with CA (Gen 2 only)

Note: You will need to work with the site's IT (Networking Admin) for this configuration.
1. Generate the private key under Configuration → Security → Certificate Management and
click on Private Keys in the drop down. Then click GENERATE PRIVATE KEY to have the
system generate the key itself (Figure 4-43). A Success message will appear on the bottom
of the screen to confirm key was generated.
Figure 4-43 Generating Private Key
2. Generate the CSR under Configuration → Security → Certificate Management and click
on CSR in the drop down. Insert a USB drive into the system, then click GENERATE AND
EXPORT CERTIFICATE SIGNING REQUEST to export the CSR onto the USB drive
(Figure 4-44). A Success message will appear on the bottom of the screen to confirm key was
generated.

Figure 4-44 Generating CSR
3. To get the host certificate signed by the CA, take the USB drive with the CSR to the CA server
(will need site IT assistance, likely Networking Admin). Upload the CSR to the CA. The CA will
use the CSR to generate a host certificate for the system.
Note: A ".csr" extension can be manually added to the end of the CSR file to help the CA recognize the
CSR file format. Ex: A file named "certificate" can be renamed to "certificate.csr"
4. Import the signed Host Certificate into the system by going to Configuration → Security →
Certificate Management and click on Host Certificate in the drop down. Insert the USB
drive containing the signed Host Certificate into the system, then click on IMPORT (Figure 4-
45).
Note: To check whether the host certificate/trusted certificate were added, click on Back (shown in
Figure 4-45 and Figure 4-46, respectively). You should then see the corresponding certificate listed
in the table.

Figure 4-45 Importing Host Certificate
5. Import the CA-Trusted Certificate into the system by going to Configuration → Security →
Certificate Management and click on Trusted Certificates in the drop down. Insert the
USB drive containing the CA-Trusted Certificate into the system, then click on IMPORT
(Figure 4-46).
in the table.

Figure 4-46 Importing Trusted Certificate
6. Restart the system for changes to take effect.
4.6.9.2 Importing Private Key via USB Drive, Facility with CA (Gen 2 only)
click on Private Keys in the drop down. Insert the USB drive containing the Private Key,

then click IMPORT PRIVATE KEY (Figure 4-47).
Figure 4-47 Importing Private Key
2. Enter the Passphrase for the Private Key given to you by the site (Figure 4-48). If the site does
not know the Passphrase for their Private Key, you will need to generate the Private Key on
the system instead.
Figure 4-48 Private Key Password

3. The following window will appear (Figure 4-49). Select the corresponding file containing the
Private Key, then click OPEN to load the file. A Success message will appear on the bottom
Note: If the file is not shown, change the drop down from All Supported Types to All Files.
Figure 4-49 Selecting Private Key
4. Generate the CSR under Configuration → Security → Certificate Management and click
on CSR in the drop down. Insert a USB drive into the system, then click GENERATE AND
EXPORT CERTIFICATE SIGNING REQUEST to export the CSR onto the USB drive
(Figure 4-50). A Success message will appear on the bottom of the screen to confirm key was
generated.

Figure 4-50 Generating CSR
5. To get the host certificate signed by the CA, take the USB drive with the CSR to the CA server
(will need site IT assistance, likely Networking Admin). Upload the CSR to the CA. The CA will
use the CSR to generate a host certificate for the system.
Note: A ".csr" extension can be manually added to the end of the CSR file to help the CA recognize the
CSR file format. Ex: A file named "certificate" can be renamed to "certificate.csr"
6. Import the signed Host Certificate into the system by going to Configuration → Security →
Certificate Management and click on Host Certificate in the drop down. Insert the USB
drive containing the signed Host Certificate into the system, then click on IMPORT (Figure 4-
51).
in the table.

Figure 4-51 Importing Host Certificate
7. Import the CA-Trusted Certificate into the system by going to Configuration → Security →
Certificate Management and click on Trusted Certificates in the drop down. Insert the
USB drive containing the CA-Trusted Certificate into the system, then click on IMPORT
(Figure 4-52).
in the table.

Figure 4-52 Importing Trusted Certificate
4.6.9.3 System-Generated Private Key, Facility without CA (Gen 2 only)

click on Private Keys in the drop down. Then click GENERATE PRIVATE KEY to have the

system generate the key itself (Figure 4-53). A Success message will appear on the bottom
Figure 4-53 Generating Private Key
2. Generate the public key (host certificate) under Configuration → Security → Certificate
Management and click on Host Certificate in the drop down. Then click INSTALL SELF-
SIGNED CERTIFICATE to have the system generate the certificate itself. The certificate will
be listed on the screen once it is generated (Figure 4-54).
3. Once the host certificate is made, export it onto a USB and give to a site administrator to put
on their PACS (or equivalent) system.

Figure 4-54 Installing Self-Signed Certificate
4. Import the certificate of the DICOM destination (ex: PACS) by going to Configuration →
Security → Certificate Management and click on Trusted Certificates in the drop
down. Insert the USB drive containing the certificate of the DICOM destination into the system,
then click on IMPORT to import the certificate via USB (Figure 4-55).
Figure 4-55 Importing DICOM Certificate

4.6.9.4 Importing Private Key via USB Drive, Facility without CA (Gen 2 only)
click on Private Keys in the drop down. Insert the USB drive containing the Private Key,
then click IMPORT PRIVATE KEY (Figure 4-56).
Figure 4-56 Importing Private Key
2. Enter the Passphrase for the Private Key given to you by the site (Figure 4-57). If the site does
not know the Passphrase for their Private Key, you will need to generate the Private Key on
the system instead.

Figure 4-57 Private Key Password
3. The following window will appear (Figure 4-58). Select the corresponding file containing the
Private Key, then click OPEN to load the file. A Success message will appear on the bottom
Note: If the file is not shown, change the drop down from All Supported Types to All Files.
Figure 4-58 Selecting Private Key

4. Generate the public key (host certificate) under Configuration → Security → Certificate
Management and click on Host Certificate in the drop down. Then click INSTALL SELF-
SIGNED CERTIFICATE to have the system generate the certificate itself, or insert a USB drive
containing the host certificate into the system and click IMPORT. Refer to previous step if
importing the Host Certificate.The certificate will be listed on the screen once it is generated
(Figure 4-59).
5. Once the host certificate is made, export it onto a USB and give to a site administrator to put
on their PACS (or equivalent) system.
Figure 4-59 Installing Self-Signed Certificate
6. Import the certificate of the DICOM destination (ex: PACS) by going to Configuration →
Security → Certificate Management and click on Trusted Certificates in the drop
down. Insert the USB drive containing the certificate of the DICOM destination into the system,
then click on IMPORT to import the certificate via USB (Figure 4-60).

Figure 4-60 Importing DICOM Certificate
4.6.10 Audit Trail and Node Authentication (ATNA)

4.6.10.1 Introduction
Audit Trail and Node Authentication (ATNA) is used to establish security measures that can provide
user accountability, patient information confidentiality, and data integrity through the use of audit
trails, user authentication, and connection authentication.
For this application, Audit Trails will be used to provide user accountability. With this feature, one
can audit user's activities, detect instances of non-compliant behavior, determine compliance with
security policies, and assist with detecting improper creation, access, modification, and or deletion
of protected health information by collecting usage data. The data itself constitutes the audit trail
while the collection and review of data is called security auditing.
The local repository shows logged audit messages with a basic viewer, seen in Figure 4-61 below.
Audit messages are automatically logged to this local database. The system supplies a viewer to
view audit messages; however, it is archaic and minimal because it is designed for transfer.

Figure 4-61 Audit Messages
4.6.10.2 ATNA Configuration

The Audit Logs option needs to first be enabled in the Options page before it can be configured.
Refer to the following instructions on how to properly enable and configure this option.
1. Under SUIF → Configuration → Options turn on the Audit Logs option (see Figure 4-62).

Press COMMIT, then restart the system for the change to take effect.
Figure 4-62 Audit Logs Configuration
2. Under the SUIF → Configuration → Audit Logs → Audit Message Settings tab, specify
the Audit Source ID. This is blank by default but should be used to name the system as the
customer wishes. Press SAVE once the name is entered and reboot the system for changes
to take effect. See Figure 4-63 below.
Figure 4-63 Audit Message Settings

3. To configure sending audit trail messages to a server (syslog server), go to SUIF →

Configuration → Audit Logs → Enterprise Repository tab. Configure a Syslog server (the
server that receives audit messages) like DICOM by entering the Host Name/IP, Port Number,
and Protocol (TCP or UDP). Press SAVE once completed and reboot the system for changes
to take effect (see Figure 4-64 below).
Note: A test message can be sent to a server to verify successful integration by pressing SEND TEST
MESSAGE.
Figure 4-64 Enterprise Repository Settings
4.6.11 Advanced Intrusion Detection Environment (AIDE) (File Check)

This optional security feature will be enabled by default when the security option is purchased and
configured on the system. Advanced Intrusion Detection Environment (AIDE) runs passively in the
background with no configuration needed. Upon software installation, AIDE takes a comparison
snapshot of system files and once per day will automatically scan GE application files on the
system.
If a difference is found in a file or directory compared to the comparison snapshot, the system will
raise a file integrity security alert to the user. The alert will take the form of a blinking red bell-shaped
icon next to the status bar at the bottom of the worklist graphical user interface (Figure 4-65). The
icon can be clicked and will display a more detailed message describing the file integrity alert. After
this alert is closed, the icon will disappear.
Figure 4-65 Alert Icon in Status Bar
GE recommends taking a snapshot and calling service if a file integrity security alert is triggered.

The goal for GE Service is to identify if an alert is a false positive or if an actual intrusion or
tampering occurred. If a false positive, engineering would need to be informed so they can add an
exception for the files and provide instructions on how to clear the false-positive.
Correcting a truly corrupted file will require a Load From Cold of the system.
Section 4.7 Wireless Detector Access Point (AP)

Configuration
The wireless detector access point is automatically configured for wireless communication upon
selecting a country in the SUIF Site Configuration tab. See Section 4.4 Country Codes on page 87
for the list of codes.
For US model AP, only 'US' can be selected as the country code. For RoW model APs, US cannot
be selected. For Japan model AP, only Japan can be selected.
Section 4.8 Auto Protocol Assist

4.8.1 Loading the Auto Protocol Assist Disk (Gen 2 only)
The Auto Protocol Assist (APA) disk (5815397) should only be loaded on Optima XR240amx Gen2
systems. While Auto Protocol Assist is a purchasable option, there are no consequences if this disk
is loaded on an Optima XR240 Gen2 system that did not purchase the APA option. This disk is not
applicable for Optima XR200/XR220 or Optima XR240 Gen1 systems and will cause issues if
loaded on Optima XR200/XR220 or Optima XR240 Gen1 systems.
To load this disk on a Gen2 system, follow these instructions:
1. Attach the external CD/DVD drive to the system.
2. Insert the APA disk into the CD/DVD drive.
3. Go to the System Utilities screen, then click on Preferences ' Protocols (see Figure 3 below)
Page 158 Section 4.7 Wireless Detector Access Point (AP) Configuration
Figure 4-66 Protocols Tab in the System Utilities Page
4. Select RETRIEVE, then choose the media to retrieve from (USB or CD) to start the load.
4.8.2 Changing Auto Protocol Assist Settings

If the site wants to change the Auto Protocol Assist setting from RPC (the default) to SPC, follow
these instructions to modify the appropriate configuration file. This process sets the sequence tag
that will be used by the system:
Auto Protocol Assist must be enabled in the SUIF. See 4.5.8 Options Configuration on page 101.
1. In the following path:
cd /magichome/xruser/config
2. Type this command:
vi PatientListApp.xml
3. Modify the following line to contain RPC or SPC, according to site setup:
<APRDicomTag>RPC</APRDicomTag>
or
<APRDicomTag>SPC</APRDicomTag>
4. Save the changes and exit.
5. Type this command:
vi DMTags.xml
6. Set the Auto Protocol Assist setting to the desired value.
For RPC, use these values:

<PPSLoopBack>
<Element>
<TagGroup>0x0032</TagGroup>
<TagElement>0x1064</TagElement>
<Sequence>

<Element>
</Element>
</Sequence>
</Element>
</PPSLoopBack>
For SPC, use these values:

<PPSLoopBack>
<Element>
<Sequence>
<Element>
</Element>
</Sequence>
</Element>
</PPSLoopBack>
7. Save the changes and reset the system.
Section 4.9 DICOM Connectivity Configuration

Follow the procedures in this section to configure DICOM connectivity to network hosts and printers.
After successful configuration, use the tables below to capture the system’s DICOM connectivity
configuration for future reference. Store the worksheets in a secure location at the site.
4.9.1 Network Host Configuration
4.9.1.1 Adding Network Hosts

This section provides instructions for setting the system preferences for network host connections.

3. On the Utilities desktop, next to Network Connections, press EDIT.
4. On the Network Connections window, in the Network Hosts section, press ADD.
The Add Network Host screen appears.
Page 160 Section 4.9 DICOM Connectivity Configuration

5. On the Add Network Host window, on the Host tab, enter the appropriate values in the fields
listed below.
Table 4-17 Add Network Host – Hosts Tab Description
Function Description
Name of the host that appears in the Network Hosts lists and
Host Label on the Image Management screen. Host labels cannot
contain spaces; use underscores ( _ ) to separate words.
Application Entry Title DICOM application title.
IP/Network Address IP address of the network host.
Port Number Port number for the network host.
Type of information the host will provide upon query from
Query Retrieve
another host. Options are No provider, Study, and Patient.
Storage Commitment Designates whether the host will store image data.
Storage Commitment -
Application Entry Title (if
DICOM application title.
Storage Commitment is
Yes)
Storage Commitment -
Network Address (if Storage IP address of the storage database.
Commitment is Yes)
Storage Commitment - Port
Number (if Storage Port number for the storage database.
Commitment is Yes)
Comments Area for notes about the network host or configuration.
6. Press SAVE.
7. Select the PREFERENCES tab.
8. On the Add Network Host window, on the Preferences tab, select the appropriate options as
described below.
Table 4-18 Add Network Host – Preferences Tab Description
Allow this network host to query the
Allows this host to search and filter the system.
TERRA_NETWORK
Allow this network host to retrieve from Allows this host to open and display exams from the
the (system name) system.
Allow this network host to send images
Allows the host to send images to the system.
to the TERRA_NETWORK
This network host accepts multiple Allows multiple frame images to be sent to this
frame image. network host.
Perform de-identification (anonymous
Automatically de-identifies (anonymizes) any
patient images) when sending to this
images that the system sends to this host.
network host.

Table 4-18 Add Network Host – Preferences Tab Description(Continued)
Burns the VOI LUT (Look-Up Tables) into the
DICOM header to be displayed by PACS. Leaving
this option unselected sends all available VOI LUTs
Apply “Burn-On-Send” to images when
to the DICOM header for PACS to query and apply.
sending to this network host.
Note: PACS should be configured to read the first
VOI LUT for proper display of images on the
Acquisition workstation.
This node acts as the Destination for receiving the
MPPS NCreate & N-Set Notification. When
configured for MPPS, the System sends information
Send MPPS N-Create and N-Set
like which exam is in progress, when a Study is
notification to this network host.
completed, how many images were acquired, and
what was the radiation dose to which the patient
was exposed during that session, etc.
Designates the host as the DICOM Worklist
provider. Defining the Radiology Information
Make this network host as the HIS/RIS
System (RIS) and Hospital Information System
source.
(HIS) host allows patient worklists to be downloaded
Note: Read the next row, two check from those networks to the system.
boxes are needed to make this the
Note: Both HIS/RIS checkboxes must be selected
active HIS/RIS source
in order for the network host to be the active HIS/
RIS source (see figure below).
Make this network host as the Active This checkbox must be marked in order to make the
HIS/RIS source. (Only one host can be network host the ACTIVE HIS/RIS source. Only
designated as the Active HIS/RIS checking the box above will not allow the worklist to
source). be pulled from this source (see figure below).
DR Images sent as CR Modality Options are Yes or No.

Figure 4-67 HIS/RIS Network Host Settings
9. Press SAVE.
10. Repeat this process for each network host device the site wants to add.
4.9.1.2 Performing a C-Echo Test

Use this function to determine if the system is communicating with a particular network host.

3. On the Network Connections window, in the Network Hosts section, select the network host
connection to test, and press C-ECHO TEST.
A message appears saying whether the test passed or failed.
- A “passed” message means that the network host is working and that exams can be
retrieved from or transferred to it.
- A “failed” message means that the system could not contact the network host. Perform
the following tasks to resolve the problem:
* Re-try the test at a later time. The host may be temporarily unavailable.
* Confirm the host configuration on the Edit screen. (On the Network Connections
window, in the Network Hosts section, select the network host connection to verify,
and press EDIT.
If the problem persists, contact the technical support group or system administrator.
4.9.1.3 Private DICOM Tag Removal

The images generated on the Optima XR240amx have information stored in DICOM tags. There
are two types of tags: public and private. Private tags are used for internal purposes and public tags
are used for the site administrators

In certain site infrastructures, the PACS or LTA (Long Term Archives) may reject or not allow
images to store because of private tags.
The purpose of the procedure below is to provide additional information and steps to ensure private
tags can be removed before networking the images to the destination.
1. Insert a SSA Key, USB keyboard, and USB mouse in the 3 left USB ports on the system.
2. Open a terminal window CTRL+SHIFT+F5, then select the terminal icon. (Figure 4-68)
Figure 4-68 Terminal Icon
3. As shown below, in the terminal window as xruser type: nautilus ENTER. (Figure 4-69)
Figure 4-69 Nautilus Command
4. The below window will appear (Figure 4-70). Use the mouse to select and scroll through the
Nautilus window. Locate the folder labeled terra as shown below and with the mouse double-
click the folder.
Figure 4-70 Nautilus Window, "terra" folder
5. Locate the folder labeled resources as shown below and with the mouse double-click the
folder. (Figure 4-71)

Figure 4-71 Nautilus Window, "resources" folder
6. Locate the folder labeled NETWORK as shown below and with the mouse double-click the
folder. (Figure 4-72)
Figure 4-72 Nautilus Window, "NETWORK" folder
7. Locate the folder labeled merge as shown below and with the mouse double-click the folder.
(Figure 4-73)
Figure 4-73 Nautilus Window, "merge" folder
8. Locate the file labeled mergecom.pro as shown below and with the mouse double-click the
file. (Figure 4-74)

Figure 4-74 Nautilus Window, "mergecom.pro" file
9. In the dialog box (Figure 4-75), select Display to view the mergecom.pro file.
Figure 4-75 Display File
10. Using the mouse, scroll down as shown below and locate
EXPORT_PRIVATE_ATTRIBUTES_TO_NETWORK. (Figure 4-76)
Figure 4-76 EXPORT_PRIVATE_ATTRIBUTES_TO_NETWORK

11. Using the mouse, click to the right of the word Yes. Using the keyboard, delete the word Yes
and replace it with the word No as shown below. Then click on Save at the top. (Figure 4-77)
Figure 4-77 Change value to "No" and Save
12. From the menu, select File > Quit. (Figure 4-78)
Figure 4-78 Quit
13. From the menu, select File > Close All Folders. (Figure 4-79)

Figure 4-79 Close All Folders
14. Press CTRL + C to stop Nautilus, then exit the engineering terminal.
15. Reboot the system.
16. Ensure that image transfer is successful by transferring images to either the PACS or the LTA
based on site need.
4.9.1.4 Removing Network Hosts

Follow these instructions to remove a network host.

3. On the Network Connections window, in the Network Hosts section, select the network host
connection to delete, and press REMOVE.
A message appears saying “Are you sure you want to remove (host name)?”
4. Press YES to remove the network host connection.
4.9.2 Printer Configuration
4.9.2.1 Adding Printers

This section provides instructions for setting the system preferences for printer connections.

4. On the Network Connections window, in the DICOM Printers section, press ADD.
The Add Printer screen appears.
5. On the Add Printer window, on the Printer tab, enter the appropriate values in the fields listed
below.
Note: Gen 2 only - Printer configuration now supports IPv6. If needed, see 4.9.2.3 Enabling the IPv6
Option in Network Connections on page 170.

For suggested parameter values for specific printer brands and models, refer to Appendix
A Printer Configuration.
Table 4-19 Add Printer Screen Parameter Descriptions
Attribute Value
Printer tab
Name of the printer that appears in the DICOM Printers list
and on the print setup screens. DICOM printer labels
DICOM Printer Label
cannot contain spaces in the name. Use underscores ( _ )
to separate words.
DICOM application title, provided by the site’s network
Application Entry Title
administrator.
IP address of the printer, provided by the site’s network
Network Address
administrator.
Port number of the printer. May be site-specific; check with
Port Number
site.
Pixel Depth Resolution of the printer. Options are 10 or 12.
Designates the pixel size the printer uses. This is specified
Printer Pixel Size (micron)
by the printer manufacturer.
Configuration Information Area for notes about the printer or configuration.
Density Min Minimum density range.
Density Max Maximum density range.
Magnification Type Options are Replicate, Bilinear, Cubic, None.
Smooth Factor Image smoothing factor.
Trim Designates whether there is to be trim. Yes or No.
Polarity Options are Normal, Reverse.
Border Density Color of the image border. Options are Black, White.
Color of areas that have no image printed. Options are
Empty Image Density
Black, White.
Designates the memory size of the printer, in Mbytes. This
Printer Memory Size
is specified by the printer manufacturer.
Layouts tab
Number and layout of images that may be printed on a
single sheet of film or paper.
Select the desired layouts
allowed for this printer Some selections control the orientation of the images on
the page. For example, two images per page may be side
by side, or one above the other.
Slide formats available for the printer, if any. Options are 35
Slide formats
or 40 mm.
Film Sizes tab
Select the sizes of film available for this printer, and enter the pixel width (W) and pixel height
(H). Pixel width and height values are provided by the printer manufacturer based on what
the printer supports.
Printer Settings tab
# Of Copies

Table 4-19 Add Printer Screen Parameter Descriptions(Continued)
Attribute Value
Print Mode
Magnification
Format
Orientation
Media Type
Destination
Media Size
6. Press SAVE.
7. Repeat this process for each printer the site wants to add.
4.9.2.2 Removing Printers

Follow these instructions to remove a printer.

3. On the Network Connections window, in the DICOM Printers section, select the printer
connection to delete, and press REMOVE.
A message appears: “Are you sure you want to remove (printer name)?”
4. Press YES to remove the printer connection.
4.9.2.3 Enabling the IPv6 Option in Network Connections


3. To enable IPv6 for network hosts and DICOM printers, go to the Utilities page. Under System
Settings, press EDIT for Network Connections (see Figure 4-80 below).

Figure 4-80 Configuration in Network Settings
4. To enable IPv6 for Network Hosts, press ADD next to Network Hosts (Figure 4-81).
Figure 4-81 Add Network Hosts
5. For Network Hosts, under the Host tab, mark the IPv6 box (Figure 4-82). Press SAVE when
complete.

Figure 4-82 Network Host Settings
Section 4.10 Image Management

Image management parameters let the site control how images will be handled after acquisition,
including printing, archiving, and deleting. For more information about image management
parameters, including Auto Print, Auto Send (sometimes called Auto Push), and Auto Delete, refer
to the Optima XR240amx Operator Manual.
Section 4.11 Image Processing

4.11.1 Enabling EMI Reduction
The EMI Reduction algorithm is designed to reduce artifacts resulting from electromagnetic
interference from other equipment in the area during image acquisition.
Administrative users can enable or disable EMI reduction using the UTILITIES > PREFERENCES
> IMAGE PROCESSING screen.
Contact a GE service representative to configure EMI reduction factors.
4.11.2 Configuring EMI Reduction Parameters
POTENTIAL AFFECT ON IMAGE QUALITY

Do not modify these parameters unless instructed explicitly by X-ray Engineering. Image Artifacts
can be injected or made worse.
The EMI correction algorithms should remain disabled for the majority of customers. If artifacts
(sometimes called herring bones) are visible and occur in only particular locations within the facility,
it is possible it is EMI enduced. The source of the EMI emission is always external to the system.
Page 172 Section 4.10 Image Management

Turn ON the EMI correction and have the customer use the system and evaluate the images. The
default setting will correct most situations. If problems persist, contact the OLC to escalate to
Engineering. Do not attempt to "fix it" by playing with the default values; there are over 100,000
possible combinations.
When EMI corrections are enabled, additional data is collected pre-exposure. This data is used to
detect EMI frequencies that may interfere with image quality. As a result, the customer may notice
that image acquisition times are slightly longer.
Lastly, when EMI is enabled, it will only have effect on new images after EMI is enabled. It is not
possible to apply EMI corrections to pre-existing images prior to EMI being enabled or imported
from other systems.
To configure EMI reduction settings, several parameters are available to GE service users on the
Calibration page of the SUIF. To adjust the parameters, follow these steps.
2. Log in to the system with user name geservice and current password.
3. Before starting the SUIF, connect the USB service key.

5. On the Utilities desktop, next to Service, press LAUNCH.
6. Press the CALIBRATION tab button.
7. On the Calibration page, in the left folder tree, select EMI REDUCTION.
8. Configure the EMI Reduction parameters according to site preferences.
Table 4-20 EMI Reduction Parameters
Signal Amplitude Minimum signal required at a given frequency to result in
subtraction of the suspected EMI signal. Range: 0.25 to 10
counts.
Minimum Correctable Minimum frequency, in hertz, at which the EMI reduction
Frequency algorithm searches for suspect signals. Range: 1 to 24 Hz.
Maximum Correctable Maximum frequency, in hertz, at which the EMI reduction
Frequency algorithm searches for suspect signals. Range: 1024 to 4096 Hz.
Maximum Allowable Any correction to the image will be smaller than or equal to this
Correction value. Range: 1 to 20 counts.
Maximum Number Of The EMI reduction algorithm is an iterative process. This
Iterations parameter can be set to end the iterative loop before the
amplitude threshold is reached. Range: 1 to 20 iterations.
9. After making changes, press COMMIT to put the changes into effect. Or, press RESTORE
DEFAULT to undo any changes made since entering the page (or since last pressing
COMMIT).

Section 4.12 Loading Demo Images

Load demo images from the CD-ROM provided with the system into the image database.
Refer to Image Management chapter in the Optima XR240amx Operator Manual more details.
4.12.1 Loading Images from CD

Follow this process to access images stored on a CD.
1. Attach the external CD/DVD drive, and insert the disk with images into the CD/DVD drive.
2. On the Image Management screen, press Source CD1.
The exam list is updated to show the images stored on the CD.
3. Select the exams to copy.
4. Copy the exams to the Local database.
5. Press the LOCAL Destination button.
A message appears: “Selected images will be copied to (destination name).
Select OK to confirm.“
6. Press OK.
7. Open the exams from the Local database.
If the exams are being viewed on a computer that has the DICOM viewer installed, images may
be viewed directly from the disk.
Section 4.13 Installing the Operator Manual

For this process you will need to have the Service keyboard and the DVD/CD drive connected.
To install the Operator Manual (OM), follow these steps:
1. Login as geservice.
2. Password <current password>.
3. Insert the OM media into the external CD/DVD drive.
4. Exit all service applications, and close the SUIF.
5. Insert a Class M Service Key into one of the left-hand USB ports.
6. Open the Engineering User Interface by pressing CTRL+SHIFT+F5
7. In the ENGUI, open a terminal by selecting the terminal icon.
8. Change directory, type:
cd /magichome/xruser/
Press ENTER.
9. To run the interactive script, at the prompt, type:
./xrdinstall.om
Press ENTER.
10. You will be asked if you wish to continue with the installation, press ENTER.
11. Choose the language to install by entering the corresponding number displayed on the screen.
12. Allow load process to complete.
13. Once you see the line that says Installation Complete, at the prompt, type:
exit
14. Remove the OM media from the external CD/DVD drive.
15. Disconnect the Service keyboard and DVD/CD drive.
Page 174 Section 4.12 Loading Demo Images

16. Confirm that the Operator Manual will display in the UI: From the image review screen, select
the drop-down menu at the top of the screen and select, Guide.
Section 4.14 Login and User Management

System administrators can perform a number of tasks that affect what users can do or will see. The
administrative options are described in the Optima XR240amx Operator Manual, Appendix A Login
Administration.
Note: If you have any question about the Account and Password information, please consult your
administrator.
Section 4.15 Installing the Dose Area Product (DAP) Meter

1. Shut down the system and turn off the main circuit breaker.
2. Unpack the DAP meter.
3. Slide the meter into the lower set of collimator rails (the set further from the collimator). The
meter must be installed with the cable exiting toward the rear.
4. Connect the DAP cable to the existing connector in the cable drape. See Figure 4-83.
Figure 4-83 DAP Meter Cable Attached
5. For Optima XR240amx systems, the DAP meter option is a standard option and has already
been enabled. It can be turned on/off at the Applications level.
a. On the Applications desktop, click the UTILITIES button.

b. On the Utilities desktop, select PREFERENCES > OPTIONS.
c. Turn the DAP function ON.
Notice: The system must be reset using the power button each time the DAP meter is disconnected
and then reconnected with system power on. The DAP meter does not support "Hot Swapping".

Failure to reset the system in this occurrence can result in an inaccurate dose value reported by the
DAP meter.
7. Refer to the system Operator Manual for instructions on DAP usage.

8. Perform DAP calibration. See 5.8.3 DAP Calibration on page 344.
Section 4.16 Installing Digital Detectors

The digital detectors use a wireless signal to communicate with the system. The detectors contain
a docking mechanism that provides charging power when the detectors are in the detector bin.
The detectors have a backup tether (purchasable option for Gen 2) that can be attached to provide
power and wired communication if needed. For Gen 1 systems, the backup tether must be attached
to the detector to register with the system, and can then be removed and stored after use.
In order for the detector and host system to communicate with each other, they must be registered
and then paired. This means that they are linked and creates a secure connection to transfer data
back and forth between each other. The pairing process allows registered digital detectors to
connect wirelessly to the host system.
Note: The digital detector can only be paired with one system at a time to prevent inadvertent connection
to another nearby system. Multiple detectors can be registered with the system, but only one can
be the active detector at a given time. A tethered connection will take precedence over a wireless
connection.

• None
4.16.2 Procedure
4.16.2.1 Charging the Detector Battery

The detectors are shipped with a battery blank installed. Remove the blank and insert a detector
battery. Blanks can be saved and used for detector return shipments.
1. See Figure 4-84. Insert the battery into the slot with the label side up. Gently push the battery
fully into the slot until it clicks into place.
Note: If the battery is inserted upside down, it will not fully seat in the slot. Remove it and turn it over.
Figure 4-84 Detector Battery Installation
Page 176 Section 4.16 Installing Digital Detectors

2. Power ON the detector. To turn it on, press and hold the power button (Figure 4-86, Item 6) for
1 second. The detector will go through boot-up.
Note: The digital detector indicator display will turn off after several seconds to save detector battery
power. Simply press and release the detector power button to turn the display back on.
3. Put the detector in the bin to charge (Figure 4-85).
Figure 4-85 Detectors in Bin
4. The battery status is indicated on the Detector LED Display (Figure 4-86, Item 1), the Detector
Bin LED display (Figure 4-87), and the Detector Icon in the Status Bar (Figure 4-88).


Item Description
Detector Battery – 4 bars: >75% to ≤100%

1
Detector Battery – 1 bar: >10% to ≤25%
Detector Battery Low: ≤10%, Below charge for exposures
No Detector Battery
LAN Connection
2
No LAN Connection
Wireless Connectivity – 4 bars – Excellent signal
Wireless Connectivity – 3 bars – Good signal
3 Wireless Connectivity – 2 bars – Low signal
Wireless Connectivity – 1 bars – Very Low signal
No Wireless Connectivity
4 Temperature Warning
5 Shock Warning
6 Power Button
Figure 4-86 Detector Display and Power Button

Indicator Description
Solid 4 Green: Fully charged, 100%
Blinking 4 Green: Charging, >75% to <100%
Blinking 3 Green: Charging, >50% to ≤75%
Blinking 1 Green: Charging, >10% to ≤25%, Minimum charge for exposures
Blinking 1 Orange: Charging, ≤10%, Below charge for exposures
Error Codes
(A detector with battery must be properly inserted in slot.)
Blinking 4 Green simultaneously: Communication error or 15VDC error
Figure 4-87 Detector Bin Battery Status Indicators

14×17 Icon 10×12 Icon Description
Discharging Digital Detector Battery – 4 green bars: >75% to ≤100%
Discharging Digital Detector Battery – 1 green bar: >10% to ≤25%
Discharging Digital Detector Battery Low: ≤10%, Below charge for

exposures
Charging Digital Detector Battery Low: ≤10%, Below charge for exposures
Charging Digital Detector Battery – 1 green bar: >10% to ≤25%
Charging Digital Detector Battery – 2 green bars: >25% to ≤50%
Figure 4-88 Digital Detector Icons in Status Bar
5. When the detector batteries are fully charged, proceed with 4.16.2.3 Detector Registration
(Gen 2 only) below.
4.16.2.2 Detector Registration (Gen 1 only)

2. Under SYSTEM, select WIRELESS DETECTOR, then press EDIT for Detector Registration
(Figure 4-89).

Figure 4-89 System - Wireless Detector
Figure 4-90 System - Wireless Detector - Detector Registration
4.16.2.2.1 Adding A New Detector Identified By Name (Gen 1 only)

1. Tether the detector you wish to register to the system.
2. Press the ADD button on the Detector Registration screen (Figure 4-90).
3. Choose NAME for the Select Identification Type (Figure 4-91).

Figure 4-91 System - Wireless Detector - Add By Name
4. Enter the new Digital Detector Name.

5. Choose to make the new Digital Detector PRIMARY or SECONDARY.
6. Press SAVE. The new Digital Detector is now registered with the system.
7. Label the new Digital Detector with the Detector Name.
4.16.2.2.2 Adding A New Detector Identified By Color and Shape (Gen 1 only)
2. Press the ADD button on the Detector Registration screen (Figure 4-90).
3. Choose COLOR AND SHAPE for the Select Identification Type (Figure 4-92).
Figure 4-92 System - Wireless Detector - Add By Color and Shape
4. Choose the Color and Shape from the pulldown menus.

7. Apply the label with the appropriate shape and color into the indent on the edge of the Digital
Detector.
4.16.2.3 Detector Registration (Gen 2 only)

Note: Before detector registration can begin, the Country Code, System ID, and Installation Date under
SUIF > Configuration > Site, press commit at the bottom of the page, then reboot the system for the
changes to take effect. If this is not done, you will get the error seen in Figure 4-93 below.

Figure 4-93 Add Detector Error Screen

2. Under SYSTEM, select WIRELESS DETECTOR, then press EDIT for Detector Registration
(Figure 4-94).
Figure 4-94 System - Wireless Detector

Figure 4-95 System - Wireless Detector - Detector Registration
4.16.2.3.1 Adding A New Detector Via Bin - Identified By Name (Gen 2 only)
1. Insert the detector you wish to register to the system into its corresponding bin.
2. Press the ADD button on the Detector Registration screen. See Figure 4-95 above.
3. The system will ask for the location of the detector - tether, large bin, or small bin. Click on the
corresponding picture that matches the location and press OK. See Figure 4-96.
Figure 4-96 System - Wireless Detector - Detector Location
4. Choose NAME for the Select Identification Type (Figure 4-97).

Figure 4-97 System - Wireless Detector - Add By Name
5. Enter the new Digital Detector name.

4.16.2.3.2 Adding A New Detector Via Bin - Identified By Color and Shape
(Gen 2 only)
1. Insert the detector you wish to register to the system into its corresponding bin.
2. Press the ADD button on the Detector Registration screen. See Figure 4-95 above.
corresponding picture that matches the location and press OK. See Figure 4-96 above.
4. Choose COLOR AND SHAPE for the Select Identification Type (Figure 4-98).
Figure 4-98 System - Wireless Detector - Add By Color and Shape

Detector.

4.16.2.3.3 Adding A New Detector Via Tether - Identified By Name (Gen 2

only)
Note: The tether is a purchasable option. The customer may not have this option available. If this is the
case, detector registration must be done via bin (see above).
2. Wait until a message appears at the bottom of the screen saying, Calibration data
upload from Digital Cassette image detector is now complete. This may
take up to one minute. Then press the ADD button on the Detector Registration screen. See
Figure 4-95 above.
4. Choose NAME for the Select Identification Type. See Figure 4-97 above.
5. Enter the new Digital Detector Name.
7. Press SAVE, then insert the detector into the bin until a message appears stating
Successful pairing of detector in bin slot. The new Digital Detector is now
registered with the system.
4.16.2.3.4 Adding A New Detector Via Tether - Identified By Color and Shape
(Gen 2 only)
2. Wait until a message appears at the bottom of the screen saying, Calibration data
upload from Digital Cassette image detector is now complete. This may
take up to one minute. Then press the ADD button on the Detector Registration screen. See
Figure 4-95 above.
4. Choose COLOR AND SHAPE for the Select Identification Type. See Figure 4-98 above.
7. Press SAVE, then insert the detector into the bin until a message appears stating
Successful pairing of detector in bin slot. The new Digital Detector is now
registered with the system.
Detector.
4.16.2.4 Detector Pairing

In order for the detector and host system to communicate with each other, they must be “paired”.
This means that they are linked and creates a secure connection to transfer data back and forth
between each other. The pairing process allows registered digital detectors to connect wirelessly
to the host system.
Note: The digital detector can only be paired with one system at a time to prevent inadvertent connection
to another nearby system.
4.16.2.4.1 Pairing Instructions

As a part of Detector Registration:
Pairing occurs automatically during the Detector Registration Add/Edit process. See above.

Following the Registration process, the digital detector is ready for use with the system.
When sharing a registered detector with another system:
Sharing is the ability to move registered, compatible detectors between systems. When sharing,
you are able to use a detector on multiple systems with no additional configuration required. The
act of sharing only requires pairing to be done between the detector and the system to ensure the
detector is ready to connect wirelessly to that system.
Pairing a detector can be done two ways:
• Tether:
Connect the detector you wish to pair to the system with the tether. The detector will
automatically pair to the system and can then be used for imaging.
• Bin:
Place the detector you wish to pair into the system bin. The detector will automatically pair to
the system and can then be used for imaging.
Note: Pairing the detector with another system will only be successful if the detector was previously
registered with that system.
4.16.3 Finalization
• Perform detector checks and QAP. See Section 5.5 Detector Checks and QAP on page 335.
Section 4.17 Configure HIS-RIS (Option)

4.17.1 VM Installation Procedure
For this process you will need to have the Service keyboard connected.
Required Parts: Optima XR240amx HIS/RIS Windows USB Dongle, 5807401-2
2. With Class M enabled, open the SUIF.
3. Enable the Remote HIS-RIS as shown in Figure 4-99.

Figure 4-99 HIS/RIS Option in SUIF
4. Open the Engineering User Interface by pressing CTRL+SHIFT+F5.

5. In the ENGUI, open a terminal by selecting the terminal icon. (Figure 4-100)
Figure 4-100 Terminal Icon in Engineering UI
6. Once the terminal window is open, remove the Class M key to allow for access of the Optima
XR240amx HIS/RIS Windows USB Dongle (5807401-2).
Note: Keep the terminal window open and do not close it. If terminal window is closed, the Class M key
will need to be reinserted to access it.
7. Insert the Optima XR240amx HIS/RIS Windows USB Dongle (5807401-2) into one of the three
open USB ports on the left of the system.
8. In the already opened terminal window become root (Figure 4-101):
Type: su root ENTER
Type: current root password ENTER
9. Check the contents of the dongle (Figure 4-101):
Type: ls -l /media/usbdisk ENTER
Page 188 Section 4.17 Configure HIS-RIS (Option)

Figure 4-101 Windows Dongle Contents
10. Install the files that are located on dongle (Figure 4-102):
Type: /magichome/xruser/bin/vm-installer.sh ENTER.
Figure 4-102 VM Installer

12. Remove the HIS/RIS USB Dongle.
13. After boot up, log into the system and verify that HIS-RIS button is available as shown in
Figure 4-103 below.
Figure 4-103 HIS-RIS Button

4.17.2 User Profiles

• xruser - auto log on account/standard user
• siteadmin - Site Administrative user
• root - GE Service/Administrative user
After loading the VM Image and launching the HIS/RIS Link icon, allow Windows to boot. Windows
will automatically launch into xruser account.
1. Select the Start icon -> User Account Icon. Change user to root.
Figure 4-104 Change user to root
2. From the Login Screen, select the Ease of Access icon -> Select On-Screen Keyboard

Figure 4-105 Ease of Access icon and selecting On-Screen Keyboard
Figure 4-106 Entering Password with On-Screen Keyboard
Default password for the Root Account: xr240!root

3. Press Enter. User will receive a prompt to reset the password. Type the new password into
the field.

New password = [Enter an alphanumeric combination for the password, inform the site of the
Windows password selection.]
Note: minimum password length is 6 characters
4. Select OK to log into the root account.
Figure 4-107 Password Changed
5. From the Windows Desktop, right click the UpdateUser… shortcut (figure below). If no mouse
is available, select the Right Click icon on the right-hand bar (second figure below) of the
Windows desktop, then click the UpdateUser… shortcut. When the right-click menu appears,
select Run with PowerShell.
Figure 4-108 UpdateUser

Figure 4-109 Right-Click Icon
6. After PowerShell opens, open the soft keyboard (lower left corner of the screen) and follow
prompts.
Type: A = [A] Yes to All
Press Enter
This script will automatically run and generate a random password for the xruser account.
Figure 4-110 Script in PowerShell
7. After the script runs, a notification appears that the password reset has been successful for the
xruser account

Figure 4-111 Success Notification
8. Close the PowerShell window and return to the Windows desktop.

4.17.3 Time Zone Configuration

1. Select the Time (lower right of desktop) to open the Time/Date. Select Date and time
Settings.
Figure 4-112 Date and Time Settings Link
2. Select appropriate Time Zone from the dropdown. Note: It may be easier to use the soft
keyboard arrows to make selection within the Time Zone dropdown. Once time zone is select,
user may notice the time is incorrect on the menu bar. This will be updated after the Windows
application is rebooted.

Figure 4-113 Date and Time Settings
4.17.4 Enabling Outgoing Communication Through a Port

Complete the following steps using the root account. Contact the site's Wireless Networking
Administrator to determine which ports to enable for outbound communication.
1. Open Search box, type Firewall.
2. Select Open to launch Windows Defender Firewall Popup.
Figure 4-114 Open Windows Defender Firewall
3. Select Advanced Settings -> Outbound Rules in the left-hand pane.

Figure 4-115 Select Outbound Rules
4. Select New Rule in the right-hand pane

5. Select Port, then click Next.
Figure 4-116 Select New Rule, Port
6. At Specific remote ports, type 80,443 in the text box. Click Next.

Figure 4-117 Configure Specific remote ports
7. Select Allow the connection, then click Next.
Figure 4-118 Select Allow the connection
8. Make no changes to the When does this rule apply screen. Click Next.

Figure 4-119 Allow default selections
9. Add a descriptive name to the Name: text box. Click Finish.
Figure 4-120 Name the Port
10. Verify the Port name created appears in the Outbound Rules list.

Figure 4-121 Outbound Rules list
11. Close all popups and return to the desktop.

12. Select the Windows Start icon, select Shutdown.
13. Windows will automatically close and return to worklist.
Note: If further troubleshooting is needed to establish communication, temporarily disable the firewall on
windows and PNF. Temporarily disabling the firewall will help determine if any additional ports need
to be opened.
4.17.5 Windows Updates

This procedure is to be completed only after Windows has been installed. Adequate wireless
network connection must be present in order to update Windows. Connection can be made through
a guest network at a site. Connect to available hospital network in the Networking section in SUIF
→ Configuration → Wireless Hospital Network.
Note: If connection to the site network is poor upon configuration, the procedure for Windows Updates
can be completed using a mobile hotspot. The mobile device must have adequate cellular service
(at least 4G) in order to access the internet. Once a mobile hotspot is established, the Windows
Updates can continue.
Complete the following steps using the root account.
1. Select HIS/RIS Link icon from the worklist. Windows will launch into xruser account
automatically.
2. Once Windows has launched, switch account to root user. Enter root password. Login to
Windows.
3. Select the Windows Search. Type Updates into the search Window. Click Open to open
Windows update screen.
4. Click Check for updates. Follow any prompts that may appear.

Figure 4-122 Check for updates
5. After Windows Updates are complete, reboot Windows.

6. After Windows has booted, switch to root account.
7. Repeat steps 2 through 4 until no additional updates are found.
Note: Automatic updates should be turned ON, unless otherwise specified by the site. This can be
checked under Advanced options (see figure above). The user can select to pause if needed
when automatic updates are being made.
4.17.6 Security Scans

Complete the following steps using the root account.
1. From the Search menu, type: mrt.exe /f
2. Select Open to run the Microsoft Windows Malicious Software Removal Tool.

Figure 4-123 Open Malicious Software Removal Tool
3. Click Next to start the scan.
Figure 4-124 Start Scan
4. Allow scan to run in full. Follow any prompts as necessary.

5. Once scan is complete, close out of the tool.
6. Return to the Windows Search, Type threat into the search bar. Select Virus & threat
protection.

Figure 4-125 Virus & threat protection Window
7. Select Scan Options - Select Full Scan, scroll to bottom to select Scan Now.
Figure 4-126 Select Full Scan, Scan Now
8. Allow Scan to run and follow any prompts as necessary.

Figure 4-127 Scan Running Window
9. Once scan is complete, reboot Windows.
4.17.7 Microsoft License Registration
4.17.7.1 Procedure for HIS/RIS Option Part Number 5808523-2 (or 5808868-2)
This procedure is for any systems that had the HIS/RIS option with part number 5808523-2 (or
5808868-2). The option will have a unique Microsoft license for each system HIS/RIS was ordered
for, and thus the unique Product Key needs to be entered into the system.
This procedure requires an Internet connection.
1. Log into the root account.
2. Select the search icon from the Windows menu bar.
3. Type activation into the search field.
4. Select Open to open the Activation Settings.

Figure 4-128 Open Activation settings
5. From Activation Window, select Change product key.
Figure 4-129 Select Change product key
6. Enter Product key code which is located on the CoA (Certificate of Authenticity) label.

Figure 4-130 Enter Product key code
7. Click Next once product key has been entered.

8. Click Activate.
Figure 4-131 Activate Windows
9. Once Windows is activated, click Close.

Figure 4-132 Windows activated
10. Upon activating the Windows Product Key, the CoA label will need to be placed on the Mantis
Frame underneath the system covers. This will keep the Product Key Label safe from wear
and tear.
Figure 4-133 CoA label placement
4.17.7.2 Procedure for HIS/RIS Option Part Number 5808523-3 (or 5808868-3)
This procedure is for any systems that had the HIS/RIS option with part number 5808523-3 (or
5808868-3). The option was changed to have one single Microsoft license to be used across all GE
Healthcare systems, so no unique Product Key needs to be entered into the system. Instead, the
Product Key was installed with the VM Installation in 4.17.1 VM Installation Procedure on page 187.
1. Log into the root account.
2. Select the search icon from the Windows menu bar.
3. Type activation into the search field.
4. Select Open to open the Activation Settings.

Figure 4-134 Open Activation settings
5. In the Activation window under Windows, you should see information listed for Activation,
Product ID, and Product Key, meaning the key was activated.
Figure 4-135 Windows Activation Information

6. Upon activating the Windows Product Key, the CoA label will need to be placed on the Mantis
Frame underneath the system covers. This will keep the Product Key Label safe from wear
and tear.
Figure 4-136 CoA label placement
4.17.8 Language Configuration

This section is only applicable if the local language needs to be changed from the default of English.
4.17.8.1 Keyboard Localization

User can select to display multiple languages for the soft keyboard. This section will describe the
process to switch the soft keyboard language (default soft keyboard language is English for all user
accounts).
Note: Language settings are only applicable to the user account currently logged in.
1. Log into the user account.
2. Select soft keyboard icon from the menu bar. If the soft keyboard is open, select the keyboard
button within the soft keyboard UI.
3. Select Language Preferences to launch the language settings

Figure 4-137 Select Language Preferences
4. Add necessary language by clicking Add a language.
Figure 4-138 Add a language
5. Search for language of interest and select as necessary. Follow prompts.

Note: User may receive notification that system is "Offline" when attempting to install language
features.

6. Language for the soft keyboard will be added to the local user account.
Figure 4-139 Language Added
4.17.8.2 Language Package

For the xruser account language setting, log into the xruser account.
1. Log into the xruser account.
2. Select soft keyboard icon from the menu bar
3. Select Language Preferences to launch the language settings

Figure 4-140 Select Language Preferences
4. Add desired language by clicking Add a language.
Figure 4-141 Add a language
5. After the adding the language, click Options.

Figure 4-142 Select Options
6. At Language Pack, click Download to download the language package.
Figure 4-143 Download Language Pack
7. Once the Language Package download is complete return to the main language setup page.
8. From the Language screen, move the desired language to the default. Also change the
Windows display language to the desired language.

Figure 4-144 Set Default and Display language
If the language settings are to be set across all user account, complete the following steps.

4.17.8.2.1 Setting Language for All Accounts

1. From the Language screen, select Administrative language settings.
Figure 4-145 Select Administrative language settings
2. Select the Administrative tab. Click Change system locale…
Figure 4-146 Click Change system locale…

4.17.10.1 Optima XR240amx Gen2 Systems Installed with

Any Optima XR240amx Gen2 systems that have software version XRAY_DRAGONFLY_DOD_2.X
or later must install the site's applications from a network location. Applications cannot be installed
via external media.

XRAY_GANAPATI_3.X Software
Any Optima XR240amx Gen2 systems that have software version XRAY_GANAPATI_3.2X or later
can install applications via a USB. The system supports USB formats: FAT32, exFAT, and NTFS.
Prerequisites
- HIS/RIS option is enabled in the SUIF
- Windows VM is installed on the Magic PC
- Class M SSA key is connected to the system
Attaching and Detaching a USB Drive
Do not insert a new USB drive in the system while running the following procedure. The only USB
drives that should be attached to the system during this procedure are the Class M SSA key and
the USB drive that contains the site's application.
Do not unplug the existing USB that is in use with the VM until instructed below.
1. Open the Windows VM by clicking on the HIS/RIS button on the Worklist window and wait for
Windows to load.
2. Click on the Close button on the top right corner to close the Window.
3. Insert the USB into any USB port of the Magic PC and wait 5 seconds for the USB to be
mounted to the Magic PC
4. Open Enggui (CTRL+SHIFT+F5) and start a terminal.
5. Type: su root ENTER
6. Type the following command to attach the USB:
/magichome/xruser/bin/vm_usb_utils.sh attach ENTER
7. Open the VM by clicking on the HIS/RIS button on the worklist window. The USB should have
been mounted and accessible within Windows VM
Note: If the VM window button is behind the terminal and/or Enggui, close the terminal window
and/or Enggui.
8. Install the required applications from USB by copying the applications from the File Explorer
window and pasting it onto the desktop.
Make sure to keep the USB inserted into the system - DO NOT REMOVE.
9. Unmount the USB from the Windows VM by doing the following, but keep the USB in the
system after this step:
a. Right click on the USB in the File Explorer
b. Click on Eject in the drop-down menu
c. Wait for the USB to no longer appear in the File Explorer window. If it does not disappear,
wait for the Safe to Remove pop-up. Do NOT remove the USB from the system yet, but
proceed to the next step.

10. To detach the USB from the Magic PC, type the following commands:
su root ENTER
current root password ENTER
/magichome/xruser/bin/vm_usb_utils.sh detach ENTER
If the terminal and/or Enggui was previously closed in Step 7, close the VM window and re-
launch the Enggui and/or terminal window.
11. The USB can now be removed from the system.
4.17.11 VM Image Backup/Restore
4.17.11.1 VM Image Backup Creation

Perform VM Image Backup once HIS/RIS application has been configured onto the system.
Note: Use a USB disk that is at least 32 GB to support backup.
1. Plug in Class M Service Key and keyboard into system.
2. Plug in USB Media for the Backup (automount should occur).
3. Open Enggui (CTL+SHIFT+F5) and start a terminal.
5. Within the GUI type the following command:
/magichome/xruser/bin/vm-backup.sh ENTER
6. Allow backup to run (Estimate 10 to 15 minutes for completion, timing will depend on
applications installed within VM)
7. Exit the enggui. Type: exit ENTER
4.17.11.2 VM Image Restore

This process is only necessary if a System LFC has been performed or if the HIS/RIS configuration
has been corrupted.
1. Install the VM Software (must be completed prior to the VM Image Restore). See 4.17.1 VM
Installation Procedure on page 187.
4. Plug in USB Media for the Restore (automount should occur).
/magichome/xruser/bin/vm-restore.sh ENTER
4.17.12 Windows Password Change

1. Launch Remote HIS/RIS application from the Worklist
2. Windows will automatically launch in xruser account
3. From the Windows menu, select the user account for which you want to change the password
4. Once in the account you want to change the password, select the search icon and type
password.
5. Select Sign-in options, then Open.

Figure 4-153 Select Sign-in options
6. Click the Change button at Change your account password.
Figure 4-154 Change your account password
7. Enter the current password for the user account. Select Next.


Any Optima XR240amx Gen2 systems that have software version XRAY_DRAGONFLY_DOD_2.X
or later must install the site's applications from a network location. Applications cannot be installed
via external media.

XRAY_GANAPATI_3.X Software
Any Optima XR240amx Gen2 systems that have software version XRAY_GANAPATI_3.2X or later
can install applications via a USB. The system supports USB formats: FAT32, exFAT, and NTFS.
Prerequisites
- HIS/RIS option is enabled in the SUIF
- Windows VM is installed on the Magic PC
- Class M SSA key is connected to the system
Attaching and Detaching a USB Drive
Do not insert a new USB drive in the system while running the following procedure. The only USB
drives that should be attached to the system during this procedure are the Class M SSA key and
the USB drive that contains the site's application.
Do not unplug the existing USB that is in use with the VM until instructed below.
1. Open the Windows VM by clicking on the HIS/RIS button on the Worklist window and wait for
Windows to load.
2. Click on the Close button on the top right corner to close the Window.
3. Insert the USB into any USB port of the Magic PC and wait 5 seconds for the USB to be
mounted to the Magic PC
4. Open Enggui (CTRL+SHIFT+F5) and start a terminal.
6. Type the following command to attach the USB:
/magichome/xruser/bin/vm_usb_utils.sh attach ENTER
7. Open the VM by clicking on the HIS/RIS button on the worklist window. The USB should have
been mounted and accessible within Windows VM
Note: If the VM window button is behind the terminal and/or Enggui, close the terminal window
and/or Enggui.
8. Install the required applications from USB by copying the applications from the File Explorer
window and pasting it onto the desktop.
Make sure to keep the USB inserted into the system - DO NOT REMOVE.
9. Unmount the USB from the Windows VM by doing the following, but keep the USB in the
system after this step:
a. Right click on the USB in the File Explorer
b. Click on Eject in the drop-down menu
c. Wait for the USB to no longer appear in the File Explorer window. If it does not disappear,
wait for the Safe to Remove pop-up. Do NOT remove the USB from the system yet, but
proceed to the next step.

10. To detach the USB from the Magic PC, type the following commands:
su root ENTER
current root password ENTER
/magichome/xruser/bin/vm_usb_utils.sh detach ENTER
If the terminal and/or Enggui was previously closed in Step 7, close the VM window and re-
launch the Enggui and/or terminal window.
11. The USB can now be removed from the system.
4.17.11 VM Image Backup/Restore
4.17.11.1 VM Image Backup Creation

Perform VM Image Backup once HIS/RIS application has been configured onto the system.
Note: Use a USB disk that is at least 32 GB to support backup.
2. Plug in USB Media for the Backup (automount should occur).
/magichome/xruser/bin/vm-backup.sh ENTER
6. Allow backup to run (Estimate 10 to 15 minutes for completion, timing will depend on
applications installed within VM)
7. Exit the enggui. Type: exit ENTER
4.17.11.2 VM Image Restore

This process is only necessary if a System LFC has been performed or if the HIS/RIS configuration
has been corrupted.
1. Install the VM Software (must be completed prior to the VM Image Restore). See 4.17.1 VM
Installation Procedure on page 187.
4. Plug in USB Media for the Restore (automount should occur).
/magichome/xruser/bin/vm-restore.sh ENTER
4.17.12 Windows Password Change

1. Launch Remote HIS/RIS application from the Worklist
2. Windows will automatically launch in xruser account
3. From the Windows menu, select the user account for which you want to change the password
4. Once in the account you want to change the password, select the search icon and type
password.
5. Select Sign-in options, then Open.

Figure 4-153 Select Sign-in options
6. Click the Change button at Change your account password.
Figure 4-154 Change your account password
7. Enter the current password for the user account. Select Next.

Figure 4-155 Enter the current password
8. Follow the prompts: Type in the new password (minimum 6 characters) and confirm the
password. Type the password hint. Select Next.
Figure 4-156 Set new password
9. User will receive confirmation new password has been saved. Select Finish.

Figure 4-157 Select Finish
Note: Only one password change is allowed per 24-hour period. If multiple password changes are
attempted within 24 hours, user will receive an error message.
Figure 4-158 Error message

Section 4.18 Installing Hardware Options

4.18.1 Detector Grid
The Digital Detector grid is integrated with a holder that fits the detector exactly. The grid and
detector are keyed to allow for proper alignment and attachment. Once together, you may handle
the grid and detector as one unit with the same weight limits.
The markings on the grid surface show the direction of the grid lines.

Item Description
1 Grid Front (6:1 grid ratio or 8:1 grid ratio are available options for both the 14×17 and
10×12 detectors.)
2 Grid Back
3 Grid Line Indicators show direction of grid lines. Gaps between indicators show
center of grid/detector.
Figure 4-159 Detector Grid
The detector automatically detects when the grid is properly in place. If the grid has been put on
backwards, the system will give an alert to the user on the Acquisition Screen.
4.18.1.1 Grid Attachment
Figure 4-160 Attaching the Grid
See Figure 4-160.

• The bottom edge of the detector should be placed into the bottom lip of the grid holder while
held in the vertical position with the carbon graphite cover (on the front of the detector) facing
the inside of the grid holder.
• Ensure the head up arrow on the grid is aligned to the head up arrow on the detector, then
press the detector into the top edge of the grid holder.
• Be careful to not pinch your fingers or clothing when assembling.
While in use, keep a firm grasp on both the grid holder and the detector. The markings for the active
area are clearly shown on the exterior surface of the grid holder.
4.18.1.2 Grid Handling

The grid is a sensitive device containing delicate mechanical structures. It is made of very thin
pieces of lead (Pb) and interspersed with Aluminum (Al).
• Do not drop the grid.
• Do not allow objects to hit/impact the grid.
• Do not immerse grid in water or other liquid.
• Do not peel labels.
• Inspect the grid for physical damage before use.
• Clean the grid regularly (between each use). Refer to 2.3.5.3 Cleaning the System on page 60
for more information.
4.18.2 Installing the Barcode Reader (Model OPI-4002)

Unpack the OPI-4002 barcode reader and associated components.
Note: The USB cable is packaged and shipped in a separate box than the barcode reader
assembly.
4.18.2.1 Installing the Barcode Reader Receiver

1. Plug the USB cable into the barcode reader receiver. See Figure 4-161.
Note: If the position of the label makes the barcode unreadable, move the label so the barcode
can be read. A sample label similar to the one on the USB receiver is shown in Figure 4-161
below.
Figure 4-161 Sample Barcode Label
2. Perform LOTO on the system. See Section 1.5 Lock Out/Tag Out (LOTO) Procedure for
Electrical Power on page 28.
3. Remove the system side covers and the top cover. See Section 11.1 Cover Management on
page 652.
4. Remove the two screws from the inside of the left drive handle support, then remove the cover.
See Figure 4-162.
Page 226 Section 4.18 Installing Hardware Options

Figure 4-162 Left Drive Handle Screws and Cover
5. Route the USB cable through the opening in the bottom of the left drive handle support. See
Figure 4-163.
Note: You may need to loosen the detector bin mounting screws to provide clearance for
routing the cable.
&DEOH
DFFHVV
KROH
Figure 4-163 Cable Access Hole and Receiver Placement on System
6. Attach the USB receiver to the plastic clip with the barcode facing out as shown in Figure 4-
163.

7. Plug the USB cable into a USB port on the PC. See Figure 4-164.
Figure 4-164 Connect USB Cable to PC
The Windows standard device driver will be installed automatically when you connect the
barcode reader receiver to the USB port and the system is powered up.
During initialization, the LED is orange. When the receiver LED turns green, the initialization
is complete and a connection has been made.
4.18.2.2 Connecting the Barcode Reader

1. Turn on system power.
2. Verify that the USB receiver is connected and that the green LED is blinking.
3. On the barcode reader, press the trigger key to start scanning.
4. Scan the barcode label on the USB receiver (Figure 4-161) to register the barcode reader.
The connection is complete and the barcode reader is ready for use.
Do not replace the covers at this point. You will need to scan the barcode receiver label
during configuration.
5. Each time the system is rebooted, a message saying, “Do you want to connect to a
bluetooth SPP?" appears. The user needs to select YES or the barcode reader functionality
will not be enabled.
4.18.2.3 Barcode Reader LED Indicators

By default, the OPI-4002 scanner is in power saving mode. To turn it on, press the trigger key for a
few seconds. If the scanner is not in use for a while, it will go into sleep mode and the trigger key
must be pressed for a few seconds to reactivate the unit before scanning.
The table below lists the state of the scanner based on the scanner LEDs.
Table 4-21 LED Indicator State
Color Description
Green Barcode was successfully read.
Red Blinking Data transmission error. The battery may need to be charged.
Red Solid Charging on the cradle. The LED changes from red to green when the battery
is fully charged.

4.18.2.4 Charging the Barcode Reader

The barcode reader will not start up if the battery is empty. Use the charging cradle to charge the
battery. It takes about three hours to fully charge a battery. Adapters are provided to connect the
AC/DC converter to various power outlet configurations.
Figure 4-165 OPI-4002 Barcode Reader Charging Cradle and Power Adapters
4.18.2.5 Configuring the Barcode Reader (Model OPI-4002)

The following section provides instructions for the default configuration and two optional settings.
Have a printed copy of these pages on hand so you can scan the necessary barcodes. Refer to the
OPI-4002 User’s Guide for additional configuration options.
4.18.2.5.1 Setting to Default Configuration

1. Turn on the system. Wait until the green LED on the barcode reader receiver starts flashing.
2. Press the barcode reader trigger to start the scan.
3. Scan the Reset To Default QR code (Figure 4-166).
Figure 4-166 Reset to Default QR Code
You will hear three quick sets of high-low-high beeps.

Whenever you scan the Reset To Default QR code, rescan the barcode label (on the barcode
reader receiver) and re-program any optional configuration.
4. Scan the barcode label (Figure 4-161) on the barcode reader receiver to register the barcode
reader.
You will hear one set of high-low beeps, a short pause, and then one long high beep.
The connection is complete and the barcode reader is ready for verification.

4.18.2.5.2 Verifying the Default Configuration

1. Turn on the system. Wait until the login screen appears.
2. Verify that a green LED is blinking on the barcode reader receiver.
3. Scan any barcode.
You will hear one set of high-low beeps. The scanned barcode characters appear in the Login
ID field on the login screen, and the cursor remains at the end of the scanned barcode.
The configuration is successful and the barcode reader is ready for use.
4. Replace the system covers.
4.18.2.5.3 Optional Configuration 1

Optional configuration 1 is to add a Tab at the end instead of Return.
This configuration sets the barcode reader to add a Tab at the end of the scan instead of a Return.
Have a printed copy of these pages on hand so you can scan the necessary barcodes. If you make
a mistake during this configuration, start over at step 1.
1. Power up the system. Wait until the green LED on the receiver starts flashing.
2. Perform 4.18.2.5.1 Setting to Default Configuration on page 229.
3. Scan the barcodes shown in Figure 4-167, top to bottom.
After scanning each barcode you will hear one set of high-low-high beeps. The scanner will
beep at a one-second interval, and the LED will alternate green and red.
After scanning the last barcode, the scanner beam will turn off.
6(7
5=
7$%
(1'
Figure 4-167 Set Tab at the end instead of Return
4.18.2.5.4 Verifying Optional Configuration 1

ID field on the login screen, and the cursor moves to the Password field.

4.18.2.5.5 Optional Configuration 2

Optional configuration 2 is to strip first two and last four characters, and add a Tab suffix.
This configuration sets the barcode reader to strip the first two and last four characters, and add a
Tab at the end of the scan. Have a printed copy of these pages on hand so you can scan the
necessary barcodes. If you make a mistake during this configuration, start over at step 1.
1. Power up the system. Wait until the green LED on the receiver starts flashing.
2. Perform 4.18.2.5.2 Verifying the Default Configuration on page 230.
3. Scan the barcode shown in Figure 4-168.
After scanning the barcode you will hear three sets of high-low-high beeps.
Figure 4-168 Strip first two and last four characters, and add a Tab suffix
4.18.2.5.6 Verifying Optional Configuration 2

ID field on the login screen, with the first two and last four characters stripped. The cursor
moves to the Password field.
4.18.3 Installing the Barcode Reader (GE P/N 5150092-2)

Unpack the 5150092-2 (OPI-3301i) barcode reader and associated components.
Note: The USB cable is packaged and shipped in a separate box from the barcode reader
assembly.
4.18.3.1 Barcode Scanner and USB Wireless Adapter Identification

Identify the Barcode scanner and USB wireless adapter as shown below Figure 4-169 and
Figure 4-170. Note: Images are shown for representation only, actual color may vary.

Figure 4-169 Barcode Reader Scanner (Model number: OPI-3301i)
Figure 4-170 Wireless USB Adapter (Model number: OPA-3201)
4.18.3.2 Installing the Barcode Reader Receiver

1. Plug the USB cable (5443804) into the barcode USB wireless adapter.
2. Remove the system side covers and the top cover. See Section 11.1 Cover Management on
page 652.
See Figure 4-171.

4. Route the USB cable through the opening in the bottom of the left drive handle support. See
Figure 4-172.
Note: You may need to loosen the detector bin mounting screws to provide clearance for
routing the cable.
&DEOH
DFFHVV
KROH
Figure 4-172 Cable Access Hole and Receiver Placement on System
5. Attach the USB wireless adapter to the plastic clip with the barcode facing out as shown in
Figure 4-172.
Note: Do not replace the covers at this point. You will need to scan the barcode receiver label during
configuration.
If the position of the plastic clip makes the barcode unreadable, move the wireless USB adapter and
align plastic clip so the barcode can be read.

6. Plug the USB cable into a USB port J9 on the PC. Refer to Section 9.4 PC Connections on
page 475 for port location.
4.18.3.3 Connection and Pairing Procedure

Once the USB adapter is connected and the system is powered ON, blue LED on wireless USB
adapter glows continuously.
1. Using the barcode scanner, scan the barcodes in Figure 4-173 below one at a time, in order
1-2-3.
Figure 4-173 Barcode Configuration Codes
Note: If the Barcode scanner fails to read the above barcodes, download and print fresh barcodes from
the link below:
http://opticonfigure.opticon.com/sl/?z=Bm&a=4&b=0&d=1
2. Scan the barcode on the wireless USB adapter (Figure 4-170).
3. Once the pairing between the barcode scanner with wireless USB adaptor is established, then
the blue LED light on wireless USB adapter and barcode scanner starts blinking.
4.18.3.4 Verifying the Default Configuration

2. Verify that a blue LED is blinking on the barcode scanner and wireless USB adapter.
3. Scan any regular barcode. Do not use any of the barcodes in this manual.
4. You will hear one set of high-low beeps. The scanned barcode characters appear in the Login
ID field on the login screen, and the cursor remains at the end of the scanned barcode.
5. The configuration is successful, and the barcode reader is ready for use.
6. To enable optional configurations, refer to respective barcode reader sections on the system/
service manuals.
4.18.3.5 Disconnection Procedure

To disconnect the scanner from the host device (wireless USB adapter), perform the following:
1. Press the trigger switch on the scanner for 5 seconds.
2. When the connection is closed, the Red LED will light up and the buzzer will sound 3 times.
4.18.3.6 Reconnection Procedure

This will reconnect the scanner to the last known paired device. To reconnect to the last known
paired device, perform the following:

1. Scan any regular barcode. Do not use any of the barcodes in this manual.
4.18.3.7 Other Information

• When no operation has been performed for 3 minutes, the Bluetooth connection closes
automatically. Scan any regular barcode to re-establish the connection.
• Wait time for the Bluetooth connection (pairing) is up to 3 minutes.
• A flashing Orange LED indicates a low battery level.
• The barcode reader will not start up if the battery is empty. Use the charging cradle to charge
the battery. It takes about three hours to fully charge a battery. Adapters are provided to
connect the AC/DC converter to various power outlet configurations.
• Refer to the link given below for more details about Barcode scanner, Wireless USB Adaptor:
https://wiki.opticonusa.com/techsupport/en/OPI-3301i
4.18.4 Installing the Tablet Holder Assembly

Note: Do not install the tablet holder if the secondary monitor option is to be installed.
1. Shut down the system and turn off the main circuit breaker.
2. Unpack the tablet holder assembly.
3. Remove the 4 screws on the lead apron hanger, and then remove the lead apron hanger from
the column.
4. Hang the tablet holder assembly (item 2) on the column. Put the lead apron hanger (item 3) on
the tablet holder assembly in order to install the lead apron hanger and the tablet holder
assembly on the column. Apply thread locker (i.e. Loctite 243) to the 4 tablet holder assembly
mounting screws (item 1), and tighten the screws. Torque to 3.2 N-m (28.3 lb-in).

Item Description
1 Tablet holder assembly mounting screws (4)
2 Tablet holder assembly
3 Lead apron hanger
Figure 4-174 Installing the tablet holder assembly
5. Unlock the tablet clamp assembly with the key.
/2&.
6. Lift up the top cover of the tablet holder clamp.

7. Put the tablet on the tablet holder and make sure the tablet is clamped well.
After you turn the key to lock the clamp, please check the back of the tablet clamp assembly to make
sure the tablet is well fixed by the clamp without any possibility to fall down from the holder. (See
below figures)
)5217
%$&.
1RW&ODPSHG :HOO&ODPSHG
8. Lock the tablet clamp assembly with the key and remove the key.
/RFN
7DEOHW
9. Tablet holder assembly functional check.

a. Tilt the tablet holder from 10° to -10°.
b. Rotate the tablet holder from 0° to 90°
c. Pull the handle on the tablet holder assembly to relax it from the column.
d. Rotate the tablet holder arm around the column from 0° to 180°.

10. Hand over the keys to site administrator.
4.18.5 Installing the Wireless Exposure Handswitch

Leave the wired handswitch on the system as a backup.
2. Remove both side covers and the top cover. See Section 11.1 Cover Management on
page 652.
3. Identify the components of the kit shown below (Table 4-22, Figure 4-175, Figure 4-176):
Table 4-22 Wireless Handswitch Kit 5503600
Part Number Description

5503600: Wireless Handswitch kit, contains the following items:
5503601 Wireless Handswitch Collector (see Figure 4-175):
PCB Module (with cable)
Spare transmitter
Remote Finder/Transmitter
Cradle
Receiver (with cable)
5486733 Receiver Mount (see Figure 4-176)
5497064 Self-tapping Screw, KA35 X 10mm, Phillips Pan Head (not
shown)
5497362 Drill Bit, 0.5 inch with 0.375 inch shank (not shown)
5497364 Drill Bit, #22 (not shown)
5498227-1EN Wireless Handswitch Installation Manual (this document)
46-302200P7 Rating Plate (not shown)

3&%0RGXOH
6SDUH7UDQVPLWWHU &UDGOH
5HPRWH)LQGHU7UDQVPLWWHU
5HFHLYHU
Figure 4-175 Wireless Handswitch Collector - 5503601
Figure 4-176 Receiver Mount

4. Remove the existing nut and washer located behind where the PCB Module is to be placed,
then attach the ground wire from the PCB Module to the system chassis stud and re-install the
washer and nut. See Figure 4-177.
Figure 4-177 Attach Ground Wire
5. Mount the PCB Module in the bottom of the Thorax as shown below (Figure 4-178) by
removing the adhesive liner and applying pressure to activate the adhesive.
Figure 4-178 Mount PCB Module in Bottom of Thorax

6. Route the cable attached to the PCB Module up along the main cable bundle between the
Spyder and Locust boards. See Figure 4-179.
Figure 4-179 Route Cable
7. Disconnect the J5 plug from the Spyder board and plug into End C of the main cable from the
PCB Module.
Plug End B of the main cable into Spyder J5.
See Figure 4-180 to see how connections appear after re-wiring is complete.
(QG%
-&RQQHFWRU
-3OXJ
(QG&
6S\GHU%RDUG
Figure 4-180 Cable Connection to Spyder Board

8. Remove the top-left mounting fastener on the Spyder board and mount the ground terminal,
End D, of the main cable underneath the head of the fastener. See Figure 4-181.
(QG'
*URXQG)DVWHQHU
Figure 4-181 Ground Connection
9. Continue routing the main cable (twisted black and red wires) up through the Thorax (Figure 4-
182) to the LVLE2 and plug End A of the main cable into J6 on the LVLE2 (Figure 4-183).
Figure 4-182 Route Red/Black Wires

&RQQHFWWR-
Figure 4-183 Connect Cable to LVLE2 J6
10. Position the Receiver Mount on the top cover. The mount is curved and will fit the contour of
the top cover when it is located in the proper position. See Figure 4-184 for approximate
location.
Figure 4-184 Receiver Mount Location

11. While holding the Receiver Mount securely in position, mark the locations for the 3 mounting
holes and the cable access hole. See Figure 4-185.
Figure 4-185 Mark Holes
12. Drill the holes in the top cover using the drill bits provided in the kit. See Figure 4-186.
Figure 4-186 Drill Holes
13. Temporarily remove the two nylon nuts from the standoffs on the Receiver. Run the cable of
the Receiver through the ½" diameter hole in the Receiver Mount, then place the Receiver onto
the Receiver Mount and reinstall the nylon nuts to secure it to the mount. Do not over-tighten
the plastic nuts. See Figure 4-187.
Figure 4-187 Assemble Receiver and Receiver Mount
14. Use a pair of cutters to remove the excessive length of the standoffs so that they are flush with
the surface of the Receiver Mount. See Figure 4-188.

Figure 4-188 Trim Standoffs
15. Run the cable of the Receiver through the large hole (1/2 in.) in the top cover.
16. Attach the Receiver/Mount assembly to the top cover using the 3 self-tapping screws provided
in the kit. See Figure 4-189. Do not over-tighten the screws.
Figure 4-189 Attach Receiver/Mount Assembly to Top Cover

17. Route the cable along the power switch cable of the top cover. See Figure 4-190. Zip tie the
cables as necessary.
Figure 4-190 Route the Cable
18. Continue routing the cable along the side of the PC and down through the hole in the sheet
metal of the Thorax and between the Locust and Spyder boards. Plug the cable into the
connector on the PCB Module. See Figure 4-191. Zip tie the cables as necessary.
Figure 4-191 Route Cable to PCB Module

19. Re-install the top cover and the side covers.

20. Mount the cradle (in the customer’s desired location) by removing the adhesive liner and
applying pressure to activate the adhesive.
21. Power up the system.
22. Press the collimator light button on the wireless handswitch.
If the collimator light on the system goes on, the wireless handswitch is ready for use.
23. Confirm that the system will take exposures using the wireless handswitch.
24. Apply the rating plate:
a. Apply the rating plate label to front cover, next to the power cord area. See Figure 4-192.
Figure 4-192 Apply Rating Plate
b. Fill out and submit the product locator card(s).

4.18.6 Secondary Monitor Installation, Lower Position (Gen 2 only)

The Secondary Monitor can be mounted at two different positions on the column. Consult with site
Radiology Administration to determine which position to mount the secondary monitor.
This procedure is for the lower (default) position.
For new installation in the upper position, see 4.18.7 Secondary Monitor Installation, Upper Position
(Gen 2 only) on page 264.
To change an existing lower position mounting to the upper position, see 11.6.18 Secondary
Monitor, Lower to Upper Position Mounting (Gen 2 only) on page 877.

Required persons: 1
Timing: 4 hours

• Loctite 243
• Torque witness (tamper proof) paint
4.18.6.2.3 Parts
4.18.6.2.4 Safety
• None

• Perform LOTO on the system. See Section 1.5 Lock Out/Tag Out (LOTO) Procedure for
• Remove front covers, top cover and front bin. See Section 11.1 Cover Management on
page 652. Discard top and bottom cable exit covers.
• Remove and discard HV Cable Clamp, See 11.2.2 High voltage Cable Replacement on
page 671.
• Refer to Figure 4-193. Remove and discard M4 bolt (Item 1) and washer (Item 2). Remove the
apron hanger (Items 3 & 4) and technique holder (Item 5) with adhesive tapes (Item 6) from
the column. Retain apron hanger for reassembly. Discard technique holder, adhesive tapes
and all fasteners.


Item Description
1 M4x8mm Hexagonal socket button head type bolt (#1003-
M4C008-22) (Discard)
2 M4 flat washer (#2000-M4-02) (Discard)
3 Apron Hanger (#5505085) (Retain)
4 Mounting hardware, apron hanger (Discard)
5 Technique Holder (#5505092) (Discard)
6 Adhesive Tape (#5505093) (Discard)
Figure 4-193 Column Preparation
4.18.6.3 Procedure, Lower Mount Position

1. Unpack the 19" LCD PCAP Monitor (#5798907), Monitor mounting bracket assembly
(#5798908) and Miscellaneous parts (#5798909), from packaging box.
2. Refer to Figure 4-194. After unpacking the Monitor (Item 1), place it over a foam sheet, screen
facing down.


Item Description
1 19" LCD PCAP Monitor (#5798907)
2 Safety hook mounting bolts, M4x14mm hexagonal socket head
type bolts, and Nord Lock washers, M4, Qty. 4
3 Safety Hooks, Qty 2
4 M6x40mm hexagonal socket head type bolts, M6 Nord Lock
washer, and Nyloc nuts, Qty 2
5 M4x8mm pan head screws, Qty. 2
6 I/O Cover
Figure 4-194 Secondary Monitor, Preparation
3. Refer to Figure 4-194. Remove and retain 4 each safety hook mounting bolts and washers
(Item 2), 2 each safety hooks (Item 3), 2 each bolts with washers and nuts (Item 4), 2 each pan
head screws (Item 5) and I/O cover (Item 6).
4. Refer to Figure 4-195. Remove and retain M3 pan head screw and spring washer (not shown)
and NCT holder (Item 1).
Figure 4-195 NCT Holder, visible after I/O Cover removal

5. Refer to Figure 4-196. Assemble the Monitor Mounting Bracket Assembly (Item 1) onto the
Monitor (Item2): Apply Loctite 243 to 4 each of M4x20mm bolts (Item 3) and install with 4 each
of Nord Lock washers (Item 4). Torque bolts (Item 3) to 3.1 Nm (27 lb-in) and apply paint mark
over bolt head to bracket.

Item Description
1 Monitor Mounting Bracket Assembly (#5798908)
2 19" LCD PCAP Monitor (#5798907)
3 M4x20mm Hexagonal socket head type bolts (#1000-M4C020-
02), Qty 4
4 Nord Lock washers (#2206-M4N-05), Qty. 4
Figure 4-196 Secondary Monitor and Mounting Bracket
6. Refer to Figure 4-197. Install the two safety hooks (Item 1) on the monitor at the original
locations, capturing the tube on the Mounting Bracket Assembly: Apply Loctite 243 to 4 each
of M4x14mm bolts (Item 2) and install with Nord Lock washers (Item 3). Torque bolts (Item 2)
to 3.1 Nm (27 lb-in).
7. Refer to Figure 4-197. Apply Loctite 243 to 2 each of M6x40mm bolts (Item 4) and install on
safety hooks (Item 1) with M6 Nord Lock washers (Item 5) and Nyloc nuts (Item 6). Torque
bolts (Item 4) to 4 Nm (35 lb-in).


Item Description
1 Safety Hooks, Qty 2
2 M4x14mm hexagonal socket head type bolts, Qty 2
3 Nord Lock washers, M4, Qty. 4
4 M6x40mm hexagonal socket head type bolts, Qty 2
5 M6 Nord Lock washers, Qty 2
6 Nyloc nuts, Qty 2
Figure 4-197 Safety Hooks

8. Refer to Figure 4-198. Install the tie wrap holder (Item 1) onto one of the handle rear covers
(Item 2). Apply Loctite 243 to screw (Item 3) before assembling with Nyloc nut (Item 4).
Item Description
1 Tie Wrap Holder (#U0212AC)
2 Handle Rear Cover (#5792771)
3 M3x10mm Philips flat head type screw
(#1010-M3C010-14)
4 Nyloc nut (#3002-M3C-04)
5 Handle Rear Cover with Tie Wrap Holder
Installed
Figure 4-198 Handle Rear Cover with Tie Wrap Holder

9. Refer to Figure 4-199. Position the handle rear cover without tie holder (Item 1) on top side of
the monitor mounting assembly handle. Position the handle rear cover with tie holder (Item 2)
on bottom side of the monitor mounting assembly. Apply Loctite 243 to 4 M5x20 bolts (Item 3)
and install to secure handle rear covers.
Item Description
1 Handle Rear Cover (#5792771)
2 Handle Rear Cover with Tie Wrap Holder
3 M5x20 hexagonal socket head type bolts
(#1000-M5C020-02), Qty. 4
Figure 4-199 Handle Rear Cover Installation

10. Refer to Figure 4-200. Position apron hanger (Item 1) on monitor mounting bracket assembly
(Item 2). Apply Loctite 243 to 4 M5x6mm bolts (Item 3) and install with 4 flat washers (Item 4).
Torque bolts (Item 3) to 3.2 Nm (28 lb-in).

Item Description
1 Apron Hanger (#5505085)
2 Monitor Mounting Bracket Assembly
(#5798908)
3 M5x6mm Hexagonal Socket Button Head
Type Bolt (1003-M5C006-22), Qty. 4
4 Flat Washer (#2000-M5-02), Qty. 4 (not
shown)
Figure 4-200 Apron Hanger Installation

11. Place the monitor mounting bracket assembly over the vertical column as shown in Figure 4-
201 below.
Figure 4-201 Monitor Bracket Placement on Column
12. Refer to Figure 4-202. Apply Loctite 243 to all bolt threads in this step. Secure monitor bracket
to vertical column with 4 M5x10mm bolts (Item 1) and M5 Nord lock washers (Item 2). Install
M4x14mm bolt (Item 3) and M4 Nord lock washer (Item 4). Install 4 M5x6mm bolts (Item 5)
and M5 Nord lock washers (Item 6). Torque M5 bolts (Items 1 & 5) to 3.2 Nm (28 lb-in). Torque
M4 bolt (Item 3) to 1.6 Nm (14 lb-in).


Item Description
Type Bolt (#1003-M5C010-22), Qty. 4
2 M5 Wide Series Nord Lock Washer (#2206-
M5W-05), Qty. 4 (not shown)
Type Bolt (#1003-M4C014-22)
M4W-05) (not shown)
Type Bolt (1003-M5C006-22), Qty. 4
6 M5 Nord Lock Washer (2206-M5N-05) (not
shown)
Figure 4-202 Securing Monitor Bracket to Column
13. Ensure that the monitor swivels/tilts freely and latches/unlatches.

14. Refer to Figure 4-203. Attach the monitor video cable (Item 1) to the monitor using two screws
on connector. Attach end of ground cable (Item 2) labeled “To 5790697” with M4 Nyloc nut
provided within the connection terminal. Attach power cable (Item 3) with flat side towards
monitor, using integral pull-and-release connector (Item 4). Attach USB cable (Item 5) and
secure with NCT holder (Item 6) and M3 pan head screw and spring washer (Item 7).

Item Description
1 Monitor Video Cable (#5790693)
2 Ground Cable (#5797572)
3 Power Cable (#5790695)
4 Pull-and-Release Connector
5 USB Cable (#5790694)
6 NCT Holder
7 M3 Pan Head Screw and Spring Washer
Figure 4-203 Connections at Monitor

15. Refer to Figure 4-204. Cover the secondary display monitor cables using cable sheath
(Item 1). Route cables as shown. Secure with cable ties at two tie wrap holders (Items 2 & 3).
Refer to dimensions A & B. Install I/O cover (Item 4) with 2 M4x8mm bolts (removed at Step 3).
Route monitor cables along HV cables in cable sheath (Item 5).

Item Description
1 Monitor Cable Sheath (#5453234-1)
2 Tie Wrap Holder
3 Tie Wrap Holder
4 I/O Cover
5 Cable Sheath (#5453234)
A Distance between I/O cover (Item 4) cable exit & tie wrap holder
(Item 2): ~310mm (~12.2 in.)
B Distance between tie wrap holder (Item 2) & tie wrap holder
(Item 3): ~690mm (~27.2 in.)
Figure 4-204 Monitor Cable Routing at Column
16. Once the monitor cables are routed and secured, check for freedom of movement by moving
the monitor to different positions.
17. Arrange the cable bundle as shown in Figure 4-205, use a cable tie to maintain cable positions.
Install the clamp pieces (Items 12 & 13) onto the cable bundle. DO NOT TIGHTEN THE
CLAMP YET.
18. Mount the clamp to the Thorax chassis. Slide the clamp to the rear of the mounting screw slots.
19. Tighten the clamp around the cable bundle, ensuring that the cables are not pinched by the
clamp.


Item Description Item Description

1 DAP Cable 8 Vertical brake cable
2 Collimator Cable 9 Monitor Video Cable
3 Monitor Power Cable 10 Horizontal arm lock cable
4 Anode cable (HV +) or Cathode 11 Anode cable (HV +) or Cathode
(HV -) (HV -)
5 Monitor USB Cable 12 Upper External Cable Clamp
(#5503015-3)
6 Auxiliary Cable 13 Lower External Cable Clamp
(#5503015-4)
7 Monitor Ground Cable
Figure 4-205 Cable Bundle Arrangement and Clamps

20. Refer to Figure 4-206. Connect the monitor video cable to J17 (Item 1) on the PC, under J13
(Item 2). Orient video cable connector with the long side UP and to the far right side (Item 3)
of J17. Connect monitor USB cable to J6 port (Item 3).

Item Description
1 J17 (HDMI/DisplayPort)
2 J13 (24V power)
3 Orient connector with long side UP and to far
right side of J17
4 J6 (USB Port)
Figure 4-206 Connections at PC
21. Refer to Figure 4-207. Connect the monitor ground cable (Item 1) to grounding (earth) point on
chassis using existing self-locking nut.
Item Description
1 Monitor Ground Cable (#5797572)
2 Grounding Point on Chassis
Figure 4-207 Ground Connection

22. Disconnect PC cooling fan power cable (5557077-2) at LVLE2 J5. Connect one connector of
monitor power cable (#5790695) to LVLE2 J5. Connect fan power cable to other connector of
monitor power cable.
23. Coil excess lengths of cables and tie in upright position between front bin and upper chassis.
Refer to Figure 4-208.
Figure 4-208 Coiled and Secured Cables
24. Refer to Figure 4-209. Install two M4 socket set screws (Item 1) in the monitor mounting
bracket at the location shown.
Item Description
1 M4x4mm hexagonal socket set screw
(#1040-M4C004-27), Qty. 2
Figure 4-209 Screw Holes
1. Remove LOTO and secure all covers. See Section 1.5 Lock Out/Tag Out (LOTO) Procedure
for Electrical Power on page 28.
2. Move the monitor around the column through full travel, checking the latch function and
ensuring the cables do not bind. Cycle 5 times.

3. Power on the system and the secondary monitor. Check that the secondary monitor mirrors
the primary display in the top cover.
4.18.7 Secondary Monitor Installation, Upper Position (Gen 2 only)

The Secondary Monitor can be mounted at two different positions on the column. Consult with site
Radiology Administration to determine which position to mount the secondary monitor.
This procedure is for new installation at the upper position.
For new installation at the lower (default) position, see 4.18.6 Secondary Monitor Installation, Lower
Position (Gen 2 only) on page 249.
To change an existing lower position mounting to the upper position, see 11.6.18 Secondary
Monitor, Lower to Upper Position Mounting (Gen 2 only) on page 877.

Required persons: 1
Timing: 4 hours

• Loctite 243
4.18.7.2.3 Parts
4.18.7.2.4 Safety
• None

• Remove front covers, top cover and front bin. See Section 11.1 Cover Management on
page 652. Discard top and bottom cable exit covers.
• Remove and discard HV Cable Clamp, See 11.2.2 High voltage Cable Replacement on
page 671.
• Refer to Figure 4-210. Remove and discard M4 bolt (Item 1) and washer (Item 2). Remove the
apron hanger (Items 3 & 4) and technique holder (Item 5) with adhesive tapes (Item 6) (if
installed) from the column. Retain apron hanger for reassembly. Discard technique holder,
adhesive tapes and all fasteners.


Item Description
1 M4x8mm Hexagonal socket button head type bolt (#1003-
M4C008-22) (Discard)
2 M4 flat washer (#2000-M4-02) (Discard)
3 Apron Hanger (#5505085) (Retain)
4 Mounting hardware, apron hanger (Discard)
5 Technique Holder (#5505092) (Discard)
6 Adhesive Tape (#5505093) (Discard)
Figure 4-210 Column Preparation
4.18.7.3 Procedure, Upper Mount Position

1. Refer to Figure 4-211. Remove two arm caps by slightly spreading the open end and sliding

off.
Item Description
1 Arm Caps, Qty. 2
Figure 4-211 Arm Caps

2. Refer to Figure 4-212. Disassemble monitor arm from the mounting bracket by removing nuts
(Item 3) and washers (Item 2). Remove M6 bolts (Item 1) from bracket. Discard all fasteners.

Item Description
1 M6x30mm Hexagonal Bolts (#1006-M6C030-04), Qty. 2
2 M6 Nord Lock Washer (#2206-M6N-05), Qty. 2 (not
shown)
3 M6 Nyloc Nut (#3002-M6C-04)m Qty. 2 (not shown)
Figure 4-212 Lower Mounting Position

3. Refer to Figure 4-213. Insert two new M6 bolts (Item 1) into bracket upper position as shown.
Position monitor arm on bolts and apply Loctite 243 to bolt threads. Install new lock washers
(Item 2) and lock nuts (Item 3). Torque lock nuts (Item 3) to 10.5 Nm (93 lb-in).

Item Description
shown)
Figure 4-213 Upper Mounting Position
4. Refer to Figure 4-211. Install two arm caps that were removed at Step 1.

5. Refer to Figure 4-214. Remove the plunger mounting block (Item 1) from the lower position by
removing two M4 bolts (Item 2) and Nord lock washers (Item 3). Discard bolts (Item 2) and
retain lock washers (Item 3) for reuse.
6. If present, remove and retain two M4 socket head set screws (Item 4) from upper mounting
position.
7. Apply Loctite 243 to two new M4 bolts (Item 2). Install plunger mounting block (Item 1) at upper
position with two new M4 bolts (Item 2) and retained Nord lock washers (Item 3). Torque M4

Item Description
1 Plunger Mounting Block (#5792762)
2 M4x8mm Hexagonal Socket Button Head Type Bolt
(#1003-M4C008-22), Qty. 2
3 M4 Nord Lock Washers (#2206-M4N-05), Qty. 2
4 M4x4mm hexagonal socket set screw (#1040-M4C004-
27), Qty. 2
Figure 4-214 Plunger Mounting Block

8. Refer to Figure 4-215. Apply Loctite 243 to four M5x6mm bolt threads (Item 2) and install apron
hanger (Item 1) to monitor mounting bracket assembly with four flat washers (Item 3). Torque
M5 bolts (Item 2) to 3.2 Nm (28 lb-in).

Item Description
Type Bolt (1003-M5C006-22), Qty. 4
shown)

216 below.

10. Refer to Figure 4-217. Apply Loctite 243 to all bolt threads in this step. Secure monitor bracket
to vertical column with four M5x6mm bolts (Item 1) and M5 Nord lock washers (Item 2). Torque
M5 bolts (Item 1) to 3.2 Nm (28 lb-in).

Item Description
Type Bolt (1003-M5C006-22), Qty. 4
2 M5 Nord Lock Washer (2206-M5N-05),
Qty. 4 (not shown)

11. Move the monitor around the column, checking the latch function. To adjust the latch:
a. Refer to Figure 4-218. To adjust the plunger mounting block, loosen two M4 bolts (Item 1)
and reposition block. Torque M4 bolts (Item 1) to 2 Nm (18 lb-in).
Item Description
(#1003-M4C008-22), Qty. 2
Figure 4-218 Plunger Mounting Block Adjustment

b. Refer to Figure 4-219. To adjust the positioning cone mounting block, remove two M5
bolts (Item 1) and lock washers (Item 2). Discard bolts. Apply Loctite 243 to two new M5
bolt threads and install with lock washers. Torque M5 bolts (Item 1) to 4 Nm (35 lb-in)

Item Description
(1003-M5C012-22), Qty. 2
2 M5 Nord Lock Washers (#2206-M5N-05), Qty. 2 (not
shown)
Figure 4-219 Positioning Cone Mounting Block Adjustment
12. Install monitor on bracket. See 4.18.6.3 Procedure, Lower Mount Position on page 250, Steps
1 thru 9.

on connector. Attach ground cable (Item 2) with M4 Nyloc nut provided within the connection
terminal. Attach power cable (Item 3) with flat side towards monitor, using integral pull-and-
release connector (Item 4). Attach USB cable (Item 5) and secure with NCT holder (Item 6)
and M3 pan head screw and spring washer (Item 7).

Item Description
5 USB Cable (#5790694)
6 NCT Holder

(Item 1). Route cables as shown. Secure with cable ties at three tie wrap holders (Items 2, 3
& 4). Refer to dimensions A, B & C. Install I/O cover (Item 5) with two previously removed
M4x8mm screws. Route monitor cables along HV cables in cable sheath (Item 6).

&
Item Description
2 Tie Wrap Holder
3 Tie Wrap Holder
4 Tie Wrap Holder
5 I/O Cover
(Item 2): ~330mm (~13 in.)
(Item 3): ~440mm (~17.3 in.)
C Distance between tie wrap holder (Item 3) & tie wrap holder
(Item 4): ~340mm (~13.4 in.)
16. Complete cable routing and connections. See 4.18.6.3 Procedure, Lower Mount Position on
page 250, Steps 17 thru 22.

Item Description
(#1040-M4C004-27), Qty. 2
4.18.8 Secondary Monitor Configuration
4.18.8.1 Enabling Secondary Monitor Option


7. On the SUIF Configuration tab, in the left folder tree, select OPTIONS.
8. Find the Second Monitor option and press YES to enable (Figure 4-223).
9. Press COMMIT.

Figure 4-223 Second Monitor Option
4.18.8.2 Configuring Secondary Monitor On Screen Display (OSD)

2. Refer to Figure 4-224. Press the button located on right side for <1 second to display the OSD.

Figure 4-224 Color Mode/LUT Configuration
3. Rotate the button until Color Mode is highlighted in red and press the button for <1 second.
4. Rotate the button to choose the LUT number that corresponds to the top cover installed on the
system and press the button for <1 second to select:
- Select 5796431 if 5555005-2 or 5555005-8 Top Cover is installed
- Select 5796432 if 5555005-10 Top Cover is installed
- Select 5796433 if 5555005-12 Top Cover is installed
Note: Do not select DICOM at this time. For future use only.
5. Rotate the button to choose Exit and press the button for <1 second to return to the Main
Menu.
6. Lock the OSD to prevent changes. Follow the instructions below.
4.18.8.3 Locking the On Screen Display (OSD)

See 4.18.8.2 Configuring Secondary Monitor On Screen Display (OSD) above to access the
secondary monitor On Screen Display (OSD).
See 4.18.8.4 On Screen Display (OSD) Factory Mode below to access a locked OSD.
1. Refer to Figure 4-225. Rotate the button until Management is highlighted in red and press the
button for <1 second.
2. Rotate the button until Key Lock is highlighted in red and press the button for <1 second.

3. Rotate the button until Yes is highlighted in red and press the button for <1 second. The display
return to the Main Menu.
4. Rotate the button to choose Exit and press the button for <1 second to return to the Main
Menu. Do the same to exit the Main Menu.
Figure 4-225 Key Lock Configuration
• Upon exiting the Main Menu, the OSD will be locked.

• When the OSD is locked, no one can make any changes to the display.
• The OSD can be unlocked and accessed by entering Factory Mode (next procedure).
4.18.8.4 On Screen Display (OSD) Factory Mode

Use this procedure to access the locked secondary monitor On Screen Display (OSD).
1. Disconnect the power cable from the display (or turn off the system).
2. Hold down the monitor button for >15 seconds (see Figure 4-224 above for button location).
3. After 15 seconds, continue to hold down the power button, and plug the power back into the
monitor (or turn the system back on).
4. Wait for the LED on the monitor to turn green. Once it turns green, release the power button.
5. Press the button for <1 second to enter the OSD.
6. OSD Main Menu shows additional information while in Factory Mode (see Figure 4-226)

Figure 4-226 Factory Mode
7. From the Main Menu, select the desired option as described in earlier procedures.
For example, selecting Management will display the screen below (Figure 4-227). Note that
the screen title shows Factory Mode.
Figure 4-227 Management Screen, Factory Mode
If Key Lock is turned OFF during service, make sure to turn it back ON before exiting Factory Mode.
Leaving the OSD unlocked allows tampering.
8. To exit Factory Mode and restore the monitor to normal function, turn off by pressing power
button for >3 seconds, then turn on by pressing power button for >1 second.
4.18.9 RFID Badge Reader Installation

2. Remove both side covers and the top cover. See Section 11.1 Cover Management on
page 652.
See Figure 4-228.

4. See Figure 4-229. Disconnect cable (Item 1) at the drive handle PCB board (Item 2). Remove
and retain two screws (Item 3) and PCB board (Item 1).
Note: The PCB board is removed to aid for ease of assembly. Note the position of the PCB board relative
to the space plate during disassembly of the PCB so that you can align it similarly when re-installing.
If needed, use a marker to index the fastener positions in the slots of the drive handle PCB board
prior to removal. When reinstalling, use the marks to align the board to install in the original position.
5. Remove four screws with washers (Item 4), two nuts (Item 5), two screws (Item 6) and spring
blade support (Item 7). Retain two nuts (Item 5) and two screws (Item 6). Discard support
(Item 7) and four screws with washers (Item 4).


Item Description
1 Cable Connector
2 Drive Handle PCB Board (5395457)
3 M3x8mm Screw, Qty. 2
4 M5x16mm screw and washer, Qty. 4
5 M5 Lock Nut, Qty. 2
7 Spring Blade Support (5410468)
Figure 4-229 Drive Handle Components

6. See Figure 4-230. Assemble the new spring blade support (Item 1) to the spring steel clamp
plate with the retained M5x25mm screws (Item 2), and lock nuts (Item 3). Note orientation of
screw heads.

Item Description
1 Spring Blade Support (5410468-1)
3 M5 Lock Nut, Qty. 2
Figure 4-230 Spring Blade Support

7. See Figure 4-231. Install the drive handle PCB board (Item 1) with retained M3x8mm screws
(Item 2). Connect cable (Item 3).

Item Description
1 Drive Handle PCB Board (5395457)
3 Cable
Figure 4-231 Drive Handle PCB Board Installation

8. See Figure 4-232. Position the spacer plate (Item 1) over the spring support plate. Install
M5x16mm screws (Item 2) with Loctite 243. Torque to 4.0 Nm (35 lb-in).
9. Place three plastic bushings (Item3) over clinch nuts on spacer plate (Item 1).

Item Description
1 Spacer Plate (5794494)
2 M5x16mm Screw (1003-M5C016-22), Qty. 3
3 Bushing, Qty. 3
Figure 4-232 Spacer Plate Installation

10. See Figure 4-233. Position the RFID board (Item 1) on the spacer plate, with the upper right
corner located in the slot on the spacer plate (Item 2). Secure with three M2 screws (Item 3).
Item Description
1 RFID Board (5793915)
2 Spacer Plate Slot
3 M2x6mm Screw (1007-M2C006-14), Qty. 3
Figure 4-233 RFID Board Installation

11. Secure the RFID board cable (Item 1) as shown in Figure 4-234 using cable ties (Item 2).
Route the ties behind the plastic bushings.
Item Description
1 RFID Board Cable
2 Cable Tie, Qty. 2
Figure 4-234 Securing the Cable
12. Remove the four side screws (two on each side) on the detector bin. Loosen the front three
screws on the detector bin.
13. Move the detector bin outward and route the RFID cable into the chassis as shown in
Figure 4-235.
Figure 4-235 Cable Routing

14. Connect the RFID cable to the USB Port J7 on the PC as shown in Figure 4-236.
Figure 4-236 USB Port J7 on PC
15. Function check: Connect the top cover temporarily and power on the system. Confirm that the
LED (Item 1, Figure 4-237) on the RFID board lights up and there is an audible "beep."
Figure 4-237 RFID Board LED
16. Tighten the front three screws on the detector bin. Install the four side screws (two on each
side) on the detector bin.
17. Assemble the drive handle left hand cover.
18. Install all remaining covers.

19. Affix RFID label (Item 1, Figure 4-238) to the center of drive handle left hand cover as shown.
Item Description
1 RFID Label (5794460)
A Dimension: 125mm (4.92 in.)
Figure 4-238 RFID Label Position on Drive Handle Cover
20. Affix RFID FCC label (Item 1, Figure 4-239) to the front cover as shown.
Item Description
1 RFID FCC Label
A Dimension: 15mm (0.6 in.)
Figure 4-239 RFID FCC Label Position on Front Cover
21. Calibrate the drive handle. See 5.8.1 Drive Handle Calibration on page 343.

4.18.10 RFID Badge Reader Configuration

Follow these steps to configure the RFID badge reader.
1. Enable badge login. See 4.18.10.1 Enabling RFID Badge Login Option below.
2. Configure the badge types. See 4.18.10.2 Badge Type Configuration on page 292. For a
complete list of compatible badges, see 4.18.10.7 Compatible RFID Badges on page 297.
3. Configure Login Management for RFID badges. See 4.18.10.3 Configuring Login
Management For RFID Badges on page 293.
4. Add users and register RFID Badges. See 4.18.10.4 Add Users with RFID Badges on
page 295.
To update an existing user with a RFID badge, see 4.18.10.5 Updating RFID Badge Information on
page 296.
Note: The RFID badges will be able to logout a user from the Worklist, Image Management and Utilities
windows only.
4.18.10.1 Enabling RFID Badge Login Option

You must have a Class M service key.

7. On the SUIF Configuration tab, in the left folder tree, select OPTIONS. See Figure 4-240.
8. Under Non-Purchased items, enable the Secure Login option. Under Purchased items,
enable the RFID Badge Login option.
9. Press COMMIT.

Figure 4-240 Options Configuration
4.18.10.2 Badge Type Configuration

The specific badge types used at the site can be found in the Pre-Installation Checklist or by
contacting the Site Security Administrator.

5. On the SUIF Configuration tab, in the left folder tree, select RFID BADGE READER. See
Figure 4-241.
Note: If RFID Badge Reader is not available, enable the option. See 4.18.10.1 Enabling RFID Badge
Login Option on page 291.
6. Under Badge Types, use the drop-downs to change Configurations 1 to 4 (Figure 4-241) to
the RFID card types that will be used. Not all four configurations need to be changed if only
one card type is used. The card type need only be listed as one of the four configurations. See
4.18.10.7 Compatible RFID Badges on page 297 for a complete list of compatible badges.
7. Press COMMIT.

Figure 4-241 RFID Badge Reader Configuration
Note: If incorrect badge types are selected, you will not be able to register any of the badges. Make sure
the correct configurations are selected before proceeding.
4.18.10.3 Configuring Login Management For RFID Badges

Note: Secure login and RFID badge login options must be enabled before this configuration can be done
(see above sections).

2. Select PREFERENCES, LOGIN MANAGEMENT, then EDIT (Figure 4-242).
Figure 4-242 Preferences, Login Management

3. After login with sufficient credentials, the Application tab will be displayed (Figure 4-243).
Enable Display Last Logon Name to allow for easy tracking of RFID user logins. Press
APPLY CONFIGURATION.
Figure 4-243 Application Tab
4. Select the Groups tab (Figure 4-244). Press Add Local Group to add the groups and assign
the corresponding roles as shown in the table below. Press APPLY ROLES after each
assignment.
Table 4-23 Group Names and Roles
Group Name Role

geserviceGroup GE Service
adminGroup Administrator
standardGroup Standard User
limitedGroup Limited User

Figure 4-244 Groups Tab
4.18.10.4 Add Users with RFID Badges

1. Select the Local Users tab (Figure 4-245). Press ADD LOCAL USER to create an account for
each user that will need RFID badge access.
2. Enter a unique User ID. Complete Full Name, Password and Confirm Password.
Figure 4-245 Local Users Tab
3. Press the ADD RFID button to add badge credentials to a user account. When the Register
RFID pop-up appears (Figure 4-246), swipe the desired badge to associate it with the newly
created user. The user's badge number will populate in the text field. Select CONFIRM to
proceed to return to the Add User screen.

Figure 4-246 Register RFID Screen
4. Press ADD USER (Figure 4-245).

5. Have a user log into and out of the system to confirm badge registration was successful.
Repeat this process for the remaining users.
Note: If the system does not read the RFID Badge, you can still press ADD USER without the RFID
Badge field filled in. See the next section.
4.18.10.5 Updating RFID Badge Information

2. Select PREFERENCES, LOGIN MANAGEMENT, then EDIT (Figure 4-242).
3. After login with sufficient credentials, select the Local Users tab (Figure 4-247).
Figure 4-247 Local Users Tab, Update RFID

4. From the list at Local Users, select the desired user and press UPDATE RFID.
5. When the Register RFID pop-up appears (Figure 4-246), swipe the desired badge to associate
it with the user. The user's badge number will populate in the text field. Select CONFIRM to
finish.
6. Have a user log into and out of the system to confirm badge registration was successful.
4.18.10.6 Disabling the RFID Badge Reader

1. Log into SUIF > Configuration > RFID Badge Login
2. Set Beeper Volume to OFF and commit.
3. Go to Configuration > Options. Turn off Badge Reader. Commit, and restart the system.
4.18.10.7 Compatible RFID Badges

The four default RFID Badges are:
- HID Prox: RDR-608x Compatible
- iCLASS (ISO14443A, ISO15693) UID/CSN - RDR758x Equivalent
- Indala ASP UID (Motorola)
- CASI-RUSCO (GE Security, UTC)
All compatible badges are listed in the table below.
Table 4-24 Compatible RFID Badges
AWID ISONSAS™
aptiQ™ MIFARE® CSN I-tag CSN
Bosch ReadyKey Pro UID Infineon my-d™CSN
Cardax UID Kantech ioProx
CASI-RUSCO Keri KC-10x UID
CDVI Keri KC-26x
CEPAS CAN Keri NXT UID
LEGIC Advant CSN (ISO 15693,
Corbin Russwin® UID
14443A)
Cotag NEDAP Prox
Deister UID NFC Type 1 CSN
DESFire CSN NFC Type 2 CSN
DIGITAG NFC Type 3 CSN
Dimpna UID NFC Type 4 CSN
EM 410x (4100, 4102, 4105, 4200) NXP ICODE® SLI CSN
Farpointe Data Pyramid NXP MIFARE Classic CSN
Farpointe Data Pyramid UID NXP MIFARE DESFire CSN
GProx-II UID NXP MIFARE DESFire EV1 CSN
GProx-II ID NXP MIFARE Plus CSN
HID™ iCLASS™ CSN NXP MIFARE Ultralight CSN
HID™ Prox Oyster CSN
HiTag 1 CSN Paradox

Table 4-24 Compatible RFID Badges(Continued)
HiTag 2 CSN Philips/NXP

HiTag S CSN Postech
Honeywell Nexwatch RF Logics UID
ID Teck UID Rosslare
ID Teck Alternate (128 Bits) SecuraKey-02 Radio Key®
Indala 26 bit / 40134 (Motorola) SecuraKey e*tag® CSN
Indala ASP UID Sony FeliCa CSN
Indala ASP+ UID TechnoGym (Key Fob) CSN
Indala Custom Formats: Please contact
Texas Instruments Tag-It CSN
RF IDeas sales
ISO 14443A CSN Urmet
ISO 14443B CSN XceedID® MIFARE® CSN
ISO 15693 CSN
4.18.11 Tether Installation

The backup tether is optional on Gen 2.

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• None

Item: Backup tether
Quantity: 1
Item: DPS
Quantity: 1
4.18.11.2.4 Safety
• None

• Remove the side covers and the top cover. See 11.1.3 Top Cover Removal on page 653.
• Remove the front bin. See 11.1.5 Front Bin Removal on page 658.

4.18.11.3 Procedure
1. Perform LOTO on the system.
2. Refer to figure below. Remove the front two mounting nuts (Item 1) and washers securing the
PC (Item 3) and two fans (Items 2). Do not remove the fans or PC.

Item Description
1 Mounting Nuts and Washers, front side
2 Cooling Fans (one each side)
3 PC
Figure 4-248 Cooling Fans and PC
3. See figure below. Position Detector Power Supply (DPS) (Item 1) over fans (Items 2) and PC
(Item 3) as shown. Secure DPS with washers and nuts.


Item Description
1 Detector Power Supply (DPS)
2 Cooling fans (one each side)
3 PC
Figure 4-249 DPS, Cooling Fans and PC
4. See figure below. Disconnect power connection (Item 1) from LVLE at J1 (Item 2) and
reconnect the power connection (Item 1) to DPS cable (Item 3). Connect remaining DPS cable
(Item 3) to the J1 connection (Item 2) on LVLE.

Item Description
1 Existing Power Connection (5557007)
2 LVLE J1
3 DPS Cable (5557007)
Figure 4-250 Power Connections at LVLE
5. Locate the cable connection between the AC Power cables labeled TO 5557069-2 at the front
of the PC. See figure below.
Figure 4-251 AC Power Cables
6. Disconnect the AC power cables shown above. Reconnect each end of TO 5557069-2 AC
Power Cable to the respective DPS cables (5557076-1 and 5557011-2). See figure below.

Figure 4-252 AC Power Connections
7. Remove the tether plug from the rear of the front bin. See figure below.
Figure 4-253 Removing Front Bin Plug
8. Locate Cable Asm - DPM to PC-Backup Tether (P/N 5557041) and remove retaining nut from
connector end. Route cabling through knockout hole in front bin.
9. See figure below. Install the Cable Asm - DPM to PC-Backup Tether connector (P/N 5557041)
in the front bin knockout (red mark facing up). Install and tighten retaining nut.

Figure 4-254 Tether Connector in Front Bin
10. Remount front bin into position while routing tether cable as shown in figure below. Secure the
front bin in place.
Figure 4-255 Tether Cable Routing at Front Bin
11. Route tether cable (figure below) through the center hole leading up to the PC.

Figure 4-256 Tether Cable Routing
12. Connect the ends of tether cable to PC connection J2 and DPS relay board J1 (figure below).
Figure 4-257 Tether Cable Connections
13. Remove LOTO from the system. See 1.5.4 Returning System to Service on page 34.
14. Install all covers.
2. Connect detector to tether.
3. Register and pair detector. See Section 4.16 Installing Digital Detectors on page 176.
4. Perform exposure.

Section 4.19 Importing Custom IP Looks

Custom Image Processing (IP) looks can be imported from Optima XR220amx and Optima
XR240amx systems.
A service keyboard and CD/DVD drive or USB drive will be needed to execute the procedure.
An initial system state backup must be performed on both the source system target system. The
system state backup will contain the desired IP looks. Should any errors occur, the backups can be
used to recover original data.
When using a script to upgrade IP Looks configuration files from Optima XR220amx to Optima
XR240 Gen 2 or from Optima XR240 Gen 1 to Optima XR240 Gen 2, only Custom Looks are
upgraded or copied to new IP Looks configuration files. After completing the upgrade process, the
Custom Looks will be changed to the destination system's look format. Some parameters not in
destination system's IP Looks will be deleted; and the parameters not existing in source system will
be added into the Custom Looks. For example, in the source system there is a Custom Look for
Abdomen_anteroposterior for all patient sizes. When this config file (Abdomen_antero-
posterior.cfg) is restored from source system to destination system, only the Custom Looks will be
restored. The 4 default Standard Factory Looks for all image types will not be restored.
4.19.1 Transferring IP Looks Between Systems

See the following table for an overview of the transfer method between different generations of
systems. The first column is the type of system that you are starting with (From/Source), and the
second column is the type of system you want to transfer Custom IP Looks to (To/Destination).
Table 4-25 IP Looks Transfer Methods
From / Source To / Destination Method of Transfer Section in Manual

Optima XR200/ Optima XR240amx Script 4.19.2 Importing Custom IP
220amx Gen1 Looks from Optima
XR220amx to Optima
XR240amx Gen 1 on
page 306
Optima XR200/ Optima XR240amx Script 4.19.3 Importing Custom IP
220amx Gen2 Looks from Optima
XR220amx to Optima
XR240amx Gen 2 on
page 307
Optima XR240amx Optima XR200/ Cannot Do
Gen1 220amx
Optima XR240amx Optima XR240amx SUIF > Utilities > System 4.19.5 Import Custom IP
Gen1 Gen1 > Restore Looks from Optima
XR240amx of the Same
Vintage on page 309
Optima XR240amx Optima XR240amx Script 4.19.4 Importing Custom IP
Gen1 Gen2 Looks from Optima
XR240amx Gen 1 to Optima
XR240amx Gen 2 on
page 308
Gen2 220amx

Table 4-25 IP Looks Transfer Methods (Continued)

Optima XR240amx Optima XR240amx Cannot Do
Gen2 Gen1
Optima XR240amx Optima XR240amx SUIF > Utilities > System 4.19.5 Import Custom IP
Gen2 Gen2 > Restore Looks from Optima
XR240amx of the Same
Vintage on page 309
4.19.2 Importing Custom IP Looks from Optima XR220amx to Optima

XR240amx Gen 1
A system state backup must be performed on the XR220amx system from which the IP looks are
to be copied. The system state backup will contain the desired IP looks. Any existing IP looks on
the XR240amx Gen1 system which overlap with the IP looks on the XR220amx system will be
replaced. Therefore, it is suggested to perform this import when the XR240amx Gen1 system is
initially installed.
Software Revision Requirements: All Dragonfly XR240amx Gen 1 Software
(XRAY_DRAGONFLY_3.XX)
1. Perform a System State Backup on both the XR220amx (source) and XR240amx Gen 1
(target). See 3.1.2 Performing a System Backup on page 61.
Note: In the event of a failure converting custom looks from the source system, this backup can be used
as a recovery.
2. Insert a Class M Service Key and open a terminal window by pressing CTRL+SHIFT+F5 on
the service keyboard.
3. On the target system (Optima XR240amx Gen 1), insert the backup media created from the
source system (XR220amx system) into the external CD/DVD drive or connect a USB drive.
4. Mount the media by typing:
mount /media/cdrecorder (ENTER)
or
mount /media/usbdisk (ENTER)
5. Run the restore script from the terminal window by typing the following commands:
cd /magichome/xruser/config/restore/ (ENTER)
./restoreCustomIPLookstoDragonfly.sh (ENTER)
6. Follow the instruction and then wait for import process to complete.
8. Unmount CD/DVD or USB by typing:
umount /media/cdrecorder (ENTER)
or
umount /media/usbdisk (ENTER)
9. Exit the engineering terminal window by typing:
exit (ENTER)
11. Notify applications specialist or site technicians to verify custom IP looks.
a. Identify one Custom IP look which was transferred from the source XR220amx system.
b. Start an exam and take two exposures for the anatomy view for which the custom look
was created.
Page 306 Section 4.19 Importing Custom IP Looks

c. Reprocess the images with the custom look.

d. Properly close the exam and verify the image meets auto-send criteria (no error
message).
e. Re-open the exam and verify the images are still available (Raw and Processed).
4.19.3 Importing Custom IP Looks from Optima XR220amx to Optima

XR240amx Gen 2
to be copied. The system state backup will contain the desired IP looks. Any existing IP looks on
the XR240amx Gen2 system which overlap with the IP looks on the XR220amx system will be
replaced. Therefore, it is suggested to perform this import when the XR240amx Gen2 system is
initially installed.
Software Revision Requirements: Dragonfly XR240amx Gen 2 Software
(XRAY_DRAGONFLY_DOD_2.27 and later)
1. Perform a System State Backup on both the XR220amx (source) and XR240amx Gen 2
(target). See 3.1.2 Performing a System Backup on page 61.
as a recovery.
source system (XR220amx system) into the external CD/DVD drive or connect a USB drive.
or
./restoreCustomIPLooksFrom220To240G2.sh (ENTER)
or
exit (ENTER)
a. Identify one Custom IP look which was transferred from the source XR220amx system.
was created.
message).

4.19.4 Importing Custom IP Looks from Optima XR240amx Gen 1 to

Optima XR240amx Gen 2
A system state backup must be performed on the XR240amx Gen1 system from which the IP looks
are to be copied. The system state backup will contain the desired IP looks. Any existing IP looks
on the XR240amx Gen2 system which overlap with the IP looks on the XR240amx Gen1 system
will be replaced. Therefore, it is suggested to perform this import when the XR240amx Gen2 system
is initially installed.
Software Revision Requirements: Dragonfly XR240amx Gen 2 Software
(XRAY_DRAGONFLY_DOD_2.27 and later)
1. Perform a System State Backup on both the XR240amx Gen 1(source) and XR240amx Gen
2 (target). See 3.1.2 Performing a System Backup on page 61.
as a recovery.
source system (XR240amx Gen 1 system) into the external CD/DVD drive or connect a USB
drive.
or
./restoreCustomIPLooksFrom240G1ToG2.sh (ENTER)
or
exit (ENTER)
a. Identify one Custom IP look which was transferred from the source XR240amx Gen
1system.
was created.
message).
Page 308 Section 4.19 Importing Custom IP Looks

4.19.5 Import Custom IP Looks from Optima XR240amx of the Same

Vintage
IMPORTANT: This procedure is only for importing Custom IP Looks from an Optima XR240amx of
the same vintage (Gen 1 to Gen 1, Gen 2 to Gen 2, or Gen2 to Gen2 with CCS software).
to be copied. The system state backup will contain the desired IP looks. Any existing IP looks which
overlap both systems will be replaced. Therefore, it is suggested to perform this import when the
XR240amx is initially installed.
1. On the Optima XR240amx (target system), perform a full system backup an CD/DVD or USB.
See 3.1.2 Performing a System Backup on page 61.
Note: In the event of a failure restoring custom looks from the source system, this backup can be used as
a recovery.
2. On the Optima XR240amx target system, insert the backup media created from the source
system.

7. Press the RESTORE link. (Figure 4-258)
Figure 4-258 System Restore Screen
8. Select media type: CD/DVD or USB, then press START.

9. See Figure 4-259.In the drop-down menu, select IP LOOKS then scroll down and press
START; allow the restore to complete.

Figure 4-259 System Restore - IP Looks

Section 4.20 Importing Protocol Database

The protocol database can be imported/converted from Optima XR220amx to Optima XR240amx.
A service keyboard and CD/DVD drive or USB drive will be needed to perform the procedure.
4.20.1 Transferring Protocol Database Between Systems

See the following table for an overview of the transfer method between different generations of
systems. The first column is the type of system that you are starting with (From/Source), and the
second column is the type of system you want to transfer Protocols to (To/Destination).
Table 4-26 Protocol Transfer Methods
From / Source To / Destination Method of Transfer Section in Manual

Optima XR200/ Optima XR240amx Script Section 4.20 Importing
220amx Gen1 Protocol Database on
page 310
Optima XR200/ Optima XR240amx Script Section 4.20 Importing
220amx Gen2 Protocol Database on
page 310
Gen1 220amx
Optima XR240amx Optima XR240amx Utilities > Preferences > Optima XR240amx Operator
Gen1 Gen1 Protocols Manual, Preferences
Chapter: Protocols
Page 310 Section 4.20 Importing Protocol Database

Table 4-26 Protocol Transfer Methods (Continued)

Chapter: Protocols
Gen2 220amx
Optima XR240amx Optima XR240amx Cannot Do
Gen2 Gen1
Chapter: Protocols
4.20.2 Importing Protocol Database from Optima XR200/XR220amx
4.20.2.1 Perform Protocol Backup on XR220amx

A protocol backup must be performed on the source system (i.e. the XR220 system from which the
protocols are being copied).
1. Insert the CD/DVD drive into the system.
2. From the Worklist, select UTILITIES.
3. Select PREFERENCES > PROTOCOLS.
4. Press BACK UP.
Note: This should take few minutes and issue a warning with the status.
5. On a laptop, check that the backup CD/DVD contains a folder with:
TargetEI.xml
protocolDBDump.cust
6. This can also be checked via engineering terminal by typing:
mount /media/cdrecorder
cd /media/cdrecorder
ls
7. If desired, the content of the CD/DVD can be copied on an empty USB drive for import into the
XR240amx system.
4.20.2.2 Import Protocol Backup into XR240amx

1. Insert the CD/DVD created from the XR220amx into the XR240amx system.
2. Insert the Class M Service Key and open a terminal window by pressing CRTL+SHIFT+F5 on
3. Run the script from the terminal window using the following commands:
cd /magichome/xruser/bin/
restoreProtocolDB_BCMODE
4. A prompt will appear and ask if you want to proceed.
Type: y and ENTER
5. A prompt will appear and ask where the PDB is located.
Type: 1 and ENTER for CD/DVD option
Type: 2 and ENTER for USB option
6. The XR220amx Protocol Database and target EI values will be imported/converted to
XR240amx.

Note: some EI target values may not be converted; the script will display a message to inform
the user of all EI target anatomy, view, adult/prediatric entries for which the EI target could not
be converted.
umount /media/cdrecorder ENTER
or
umount /media/usbdisk ENTER
9. Exit the engineering terminal and reboot the system.
10. Notify applications specialist or site technicians to verify protocols are as desired.
Section 4.21 Enabling Advanced Service mode

GE Healthcare classifies three service modes:
• Class A - Standard Service
• Class C - Advanced Service
• Class M - Restricted to GE personnel
Advanced Service (sometimes called “in-house service” or “extended service”) is available to
customers that have purchased an Advanced Service package license from GE Healthcare.
Advanced Service provides the following functionality:
• SUIF in Advanced Service mode
• Detailed error descriptions in the Service Error Log Viewer
• Advanced diagnostics
• Extended error log with filtering
• AP/Detector Channel Management
When an Advanced Service package license is purchased, GE-provided files need to be loaded
onto the system to enable Class C Advanced Service mode. Obtaining and loading those files is
explained below.
For creating Class C licenses using the production website, use the SupportCentral link below:
http://supportcentral.ge.com/@ssakey
The link below is a direct link to ordering a Class C license:
http://supportcentral.ge.com/ProcessMaps/
form_new_request.asp?prod_id=103407&form_id=389514&node_id=1087674&map_id=&referen
ce_id=&reference_type
Note: Class C can be enabled by a Class A or a Class M user. For Class A users, the files generated to
enable class C can be emailed to the Class A user or provided to the user loaded on a USB drive.
It is assumed that the user already has taken the needed training on using the SSA website and
this document only speaks to enabling Class C on the system once the files have been obtained.
4.21.1 Retrieve 16-Digit Code

Class C licenses are generated based on a set of numbers and letters that are unique to each
individual system. Follow the below steps to retrieve the 16-digit code needed to enable Class C
licenses.
Page 312 Section 4.21 Enabling Advanced Service mode

4.21.1.1 Retrieving through the SUIF

3. Press the CONFIGURATION tab button (Figure 4-260).
Figure 4-260 Configuration Tab
4. Select SITE on the left side (Figure 4-261).
Figure 4-261 Site Configuration
5. Scroll down on the right side and select the SERVICE CONTRACT MANAGEMENT button:
6. The Service Contract Management screen is shown. Select the VIEW SERVICE ID tab
(Figure 4-262).
Figure 4-262 Service Contract Management screen

7. On the bottom of the screen is a 16-digit code (Figure 4-263). Write down the code carefully;
it is case-sensitive.
8. Use this 16-digit code to create the Class C license in the SSA website.
Figure 4-263 16-Digit Code
4.21.1.2 Retrieving through a Terminal

2. Login as root:
Type: su root ENTER
3. Type the following to retrieve the 16-digit code:
/magichome/xruser/bin/AuthManager.lnx -manage -hostid ENTER
4. Use this 16-digit code to create the Class C license in the SSA website
4.21.2 Ordering a Class C License

1. Go to the following site:
http://supportcentral.ge.com/ProcessMaps/
form_new_request.asp?prod_id=103407&form_id=389514&node_id=1087674&map_id=&ref
erence_id=&reference_type
2. Fill out the required information.
- Requestor: Person filling out the form
- Ship To information: Can be your name and home address, this information is not
critical, but is mandatory.
- Modality: DI & MV
- Type of Order: Complete RCAT Order
3. Once the above information is correct, select the Set Values button and fill out all the
information for the product. Click Submit to submit set values.
- Service Key: Select R44991**, where ** depends on the type of agreement.

4. Select Submit at the bottom of the page to submit the workflow.

5. An in-house process leader will review the request. If the system is entitled to a Class C
license, the process leader will email you, and they may ask for the 16-digit code at this time.
If it is not entitled, the process leader will let you know, and you will need to contact your
manager and sales leader to get the RCAT number added to the GON.
- After emailing the 16-digit code to the process leader, the process leader will respond with
the License file to be loaded on the XR240 system.
Note: To verify the 16-digit code is correct, or to renew a Class C license, go to https://
ssa.gehealthcare.com/#/softkey-renew on a laptop and input the SID of the system. Click with in
the 16-digit entry box. The key displayed should match the key from the system.
4.21.3 Load Advanced Service (Class C) License from USB Drive

The license file is provided by GE Healthcare and must be copied to a USB drive (e.g., a thumb
drive).
1. Insert the USB drive (with license file) in an available accessory USB port (Figure 4-264,
Item 1).
1 2
Item Description
1 Three USB Accessory Ports
2 Service Port — Do Not Use
Figure 4-264 USB Ports


3. Press the CONFIGURATION tab button (Figure 4-265).
Figure 4-265 Configuration Tab
4. Select SITE on the left side (Figure 4-266).
Figure 4-266 Site Configuration
5. Scroll down on the right side and select the SERVICE CONTRACT MANAGEMENT button:
6. The Service Contract Management screen is shown. Select the INSTALL tab (Figure 4-267).
Figure 4-267 Service Contract Management screen

7. A window will appear listing the available license to load. Select the license file and select
Open.
8. Remove the USB drive, reboot the system, and select TEST LICENSE (Figure 4-268). The
screen should show that Class C is enabled.
Note: The Test License key will always display the highest authentication level. If an enabled Class M key
is on the system, the Test License key will show that Class M is enabled.
Figure 4-268 License Enabled
4.21.4 Verifying Advanced Service Operation

1. On the Applications desktop, press TOOLS.
2. On the Tools desktop, press SERVICELAUNCH.
3. Verify that the Home screen says “Advanced Service” at the top of the page.
4. Exit the SUIF.
Section 4.22 IP Address Change Procedure

The system uses IP Addresses 192.168.x.x for communication between the PC and the detectors.
If the hospital network to the PC is also 192.168.x.x, issues may occur. Perform the following
instructions to change the default internal IP Address if an IP Address conflict occurs with the
hospital network.
1. Insert a SSA Key and USB keyboard in the left USB ports on the system.
2. Open a terminal window using CTRL+SHIFT+F5 and click on the terminal window icon.
3. Run the Change IP script by entering the following text at the prompt. Note that this command
will kill all applications software and it may take several seconds for the below options in Step
4 to appear:
Gen 1 only:
Type: sudo /magichome/xruser/config/svcmgr/changeIp.sh ENTER
Gen 2only:
Type: su root ENTER
Type: /magichome/xruser/config/svcmgr/changeIp.sh ENTER

4. Select one of the six options of subnet IP addresses and press ENTER (excluding the
conflicting subnet, Option #4 192.168.x.x). Write down the IP Address you select, you will need
this in a later step.
1. 172.16.x.x
2. 172.17.x.x
3. 172.18.x.x
4. 192.168.x.x (SW LFC default)
5. 10.10.x.x
6. 10.11.x.x
7. 10.12.x.x
5. Exit out of the terminal, then restart applications (figure below).
Figure 4-269 Restart Applications
6. Click OK to confirm application restart (figure below).
Figure 4-270 Confirm Restart
7. Log into the system, then reboot the system.

8. After reboot, insert a valid SSA key and open a terminal window by pressing CTRL+SHIFT+F5
9. Reset the AP to factory defaults. Type the following:
Gen 1 only:
Type: sudo /magichome/xruser/bin/interfaceToAccessPoint factoryReset
ENTER
A <<Success>> message appears after AP is set to factory defaults.
Gen 2 only:
Type: su root ENTER
Type: cd /magichome/xruser/bin ENTER
Page 318 Section 4.22 IP Address Change Procedure

Type: ./serviceAccessPoint.sh factoryReset ENTER

A <<Success>> Message will NOT appear after AP is set to factory defaults. The system might
say Failed with GE password. Trying admin, which is OK. After that string, make
sure there are no other failures, which means the AP has been successfully set to factory
defaults.
11. After reboot, insert a valid SSA key and open a terminal window by pressing CTRL+SHIFT+F5
12. Confirm the IP addresses are set to the new subnet by typing:
ifconfig | more ENTER
13. Confirm the br1 IP address is XX.XX.20.1, where XX.XX is the subnet IP address previously
selected and noted. See figure below. Note that the remaining IP's, eth1, eth2, et., will also
follow the selected subnet address scheme.
Figure 4-271 IP Address with Selected Subnet
14. Refer to the subnet IP address noted before and verify that AP was set to factory defaults by
logging in as admin. To do this, type the below command, where XX.XX is the subnet IP
address previously selected and noted:
Type: ssh admin@XX.XX.4.30 ENTER
Type: yes ENTER
Password = admin ENTER
Note: Note: Logging in using admin as the password indicated that the AP has been reset to defaults.
After successful login, prompt should show the MAC address as shown below.
Figure 4-272 MAC Address at Prompt
15. Exit out of AP SSH. Type:

exit (ENTER)
16. Test network connectivity by performing a C-Echo test to the Network Hosts by selecting in
TOOLS > SYSTEM > NETWORK CONNECTIONS (Edit) > C-ECHO.
17. Recommit the country code in SUIF > CONFIGURATION > SITE. Follow the procedure at
4.5.1 Site Configuration on page 90.
18. Reboot the system:
FINALIZATION
Gen 1 only:
1. Connect the detector via tether, unregister and re-register the detector. Follow the procedure
at Section 4.16 Installing Digital Detectors on page 176.
2. Reboot the detector make sure the detector boot is successful.
3. Take an exposure make sure it is successful.
4. Remove the tether and make sure detector can boot successfully via wireless mode.
5. Verify detector wireless connection is active.
6. Take an exposure make sure it is successful.
7. Repeat for all detectors.
Gen 2 only:
1. If the country code was changed in Step 17 above to a country code that was different than
the original (i.e. changed from Germany to France), re-register the detector. Follow the
procedure at Section 4.16 Installing Digital Detectors on page 176. If the country code was
kept the same as the original, the detector does NOT need to be re-registered.
2. Ensure that the detector successfully pairs with the system in the bin. You can check this by
looking at the notification bar at the bottom of the worklist screen (figure below).
Figure 4-273 Notifications in Worklist
3. Remove the detector from the bin and confirm that it pairs wirelessly with the system.
4. Take an exposure to make sure it is successful.
5. Repeat for all detectors.
Page 320 Section 4.22 IP Address Change Procedure

Section 4.23 Top Cover LUT Configuration

4.23.1 Display LUT Configuration (Gen 1 only)
Once the new top cover is replaced, power up the system. The LUT file will need to be updated as
part of the finalization. The LUT files are labeled based on the top cover installed.
Configure the system to the appropriate LUT by doing the following:
2. Open the ENGGUI by pressing CTRL+SHIFT+F5 on the keyboard.
3. In the ENGGUI, open a terminal by select the terminal icon.
4. In the terminal widow, type:
cd /magichome/xruser/bin/ ENTER
5. Locate the available LUT files, type:
./monitorLut.sh ENTER
6. Select number 4 as shown below.
7. Exit the terminal window. Type: exit ENTER

9. Perform the following calibration:
- Touchscreen - see Section 5.2 Touchscreen Calibration on page 324
10. Perform the following checks:
- Generator operator indicators - see 7.1.6 Testing Generator Operator Indicators on
page 377
4.23.2 Display LUT Configuration (Gen 2 only)

Configure the system to the appropriate LUT by doing the following:

1. Go to SUIF → Calibration → Monitor → Look Up Table (Figure 4-274)
Figure 4-274 LUT Selection in SUIF
2. Select from the Current LUT dropdown menu, select the part number of the Top Cover which
was installed.
3. Select Commit.
page 377
Page 322 Section 4.23 Top Cover LUT Configuration

Chapter 5 Calibration
Section 5.1 Preparing for Calibrations

This chapter explains how to calibrate the detector, printer, touchscreen, drive subsystem, and
elements of the generator. It also covers how to determine the appropriate burn configuration for
PACS images.
FOLLOW PROCEDURES
Important! Perform the calibrations in the order shown in the left frame of the Calibration screen
on the Service User Interface (SUIF).
While working in the SUIF, watch the status bar and wait for activities to complete before starting
the next step. Look for messages like "Ready..." or "Ready for input."
5.1.1 Saving Changes

After changing, creating, or restoring calibration files, be sure to reboot the system so that the
application software can detect the file changes.
After completing the steps in this chapter, save the changes by performing a system backup. See
Section 3.1 Backing Up System Data on page 61 for the backup procedure.
5.1.2 Temperature Requirements

For system calibration and configuration, the internal temperature (inside the covers) must be 10°
C (50° F) or higher.
Perform Power Supply Thermal diagnostic checks to confirm that the system temperature is 10° C
(50° F):
1. Navigate to the SUIF -> Diagnostics -> HW Diagnostics -> System Power -> Power Supply
Thermal.
2. Confirm that the Mantis Temperature and the LVLE 2 Temperature are 10° C (50° F) or higher.
If the Mantis or LVLE 2 temperature is below 10° C (50° F), keep the system powered up and
wait 30 minutes before system calibration. During this time system configuration can occur.
Continue to perform Power Supply Thermal diagnostic check until the Mantis and LVLE2 both
are reporting a temperature of 10° C (50° F) or higher. Once this occurs system calibration can
be performed.
Chapter 5 Calibration Page 323

Section 5.2 Touchscreen Calibration

5.2.1 Calibrating the Touchscreen
Follow this procedure to set the active area of the touchscreen and align it to the underlying video
application to ensure accurate measurement.

3. On the SUIF home page, press the CALIBRATION tab button.
4. On the Calibration page, in the left folder tree, select TOUCHSCREEN.
5. Press START and follow the on-screen instructions.
6. The touchscreen calibration utility prompts you to touch a cross-hair icon in a series of nine
locations. Afterward, you can press ACCEPT to write the settings to the calibration config file,
or CANCEL to discard the settings.
When the cross-hair appears, you have 10 seconds to respond. A countdown timer is
displayed. If you do not respond within 10 seconds, the calibration is aborted.
After you touch all the calibration points, you have 90 seconds to verify pointer accuracy before
accepting the changes. A countdown timer is displayed. If you do not respond within 90
seconds, calibration is aborted.
Important! If the program aborts or you press CANCEL, the utility does not revert to the prior
calibration; the touchscreen calibration is lost. The touchscreen accuracy may be very poor
and require some effort to restart the calibration from the SUIF.
7. Press ACCEPT to write the settings to the calibration config file, or CANCEL to discard the
settings.
8. Click on HARDWARE CALIBRATION and perform the TOUCHSCREEN CALIBRATION at the
hardware level. See. 5.8.2 Touch Screen Calibration on page 344.
Section 5.3 Generator Calibration

5.3.1 Setting Filament Drive Level
EXPOSURE TO RADIATION
Employ X-ray safety practices to minimize exposure to radiation. Use portable shields or lead
aprons. Aim the tube away from personnel. Adjust both lateral and transverse collimator blades to
the minimum field size setting.
NO DETECTOR IN BEAM DURING CALIBRATION

Make sure there is no digital detector in the X-ray field at any time during this calibration.
Page 324 Section 5.2 Touchscreen Calibration

This procedure automatically sets the initial filament drive levels for each X-ray tube focal spot.

4. On the Calibration page, in the left folder tree, select GENERATOR > FILAMENT DRIVE.
The process is a sequence of 24 exposures: 9 for the small filament and 15 for the large. The
system automatically sets the technique and selects the focal spot.
Use the handswitch to initiate the prep and expose sequence. The handswitch must be fully
released after each exposure.
A display updates the completion status for each of the 24 exposures.
After completing exposure 24, press COMPLETE to finalize the calibration.
5.3.2 Viewing and Resetting Tube and Generator Usage Data

Use this procedure to display and store tube usage data that can be accessed to determine
warranty coverage. Reset the data after replacing a tube.
Note: It is recommended that you record the current values prior to making any changes.

The Service Home tab is displayed. The Home tab contains summary information including
site identification, connectivity parameters, and enabled options.
3. Press the CALIBRATION tab button.
4. On the Calibration page, in the left folder tree, select GENERATOR > TUBE WARRANTY.
5. Select RESET and follow the on-screen instructions.
6. Exit the SUIF and launch it again to see the reset values.
Section 5.4 Detector Calibration

Detector Calibrations should be performed during the scheduled PM checks.
For system operation, detector calibrations are not normally required as the detector contains a set
of calibration files. Calibrations should only be performed if image quality issues warrant updating
bad pixel maps and/or gain calibration files. It is suggested to first perform QAP, if QAP fails then
Bad Pixel and Gain Calibration will need to be performed.
Note: Generation 2 systems can execute the following procedure via tether (if installed) or via wireless.
5.4.1 Executing Bad Pixel and Gain Calibrations

Use the Bad Pixel Calibration tool to detect defective pixels. Then use the Gain Calibration Tool to
calibrate a gain coefficient for each pixel to achieve uniform gain across the detector. Perform these
two calibrations in sequence.

Note: DO NOT change the exposure techniques for these calibrations. They are automatically set by the
calibration software and are required for proper calibration.
5.4.1.1 Bad Pixel Calibration

This procedure calculates defective pixels from dark and X-ray images.
The detector must be connected via tether and stabilized for a minimum of 10 minutes. The 10-
minute counter starts when the calibration is initiated. Bad pixel calibration will not be successful if
system and detector has not stabilized for 10 minutes.
Note: If the Bad Pixel Calibration is started before the 10 minutes and fails, the system will need to be
restarted. Once reboot is completed a 10 minute wait period for detector stabilization will restart.
Be sure that the correct firmware is downloaded to the detector before proceeding.
Bad pixel calibration is a multi-step process, including a QC test exposure and four additional
exposures. The generator technique for each exposure is set automatically by the system.
aprons. Aim the tube away from personnel.
1. Power On the detector and connect the tether to the detector, see Figure 5-1 below.
Figure 5-1 Detector with Tether Connected

3. Select SHUT DOWN as shown in Figure 5-2.
Page 326 Section 5.4 Detector Calibration

Figure 5-2 Tools and Utilities Selection Screen
4. Power ON the system and login using the Service login and password.

6. In the Tools and Utilities desktop select LAUNCH, see Figure 5-3.
Figure 5-3 Service Selection in Tools and Utilities
7. Select CALIBRATION on the top of the SUIF, see Figure 5-4.

Figure 5-4 Calibration Selection in SUIF
8. On the Calibration screen, in the left folder tree, select DETECTOR > BAD PIXEL, see
Figure 5-5.
Figure 5-5 Bad Pixel Calibration Selection
9. Reference the time on the system and wait 10 minutes before proceeding. If this process is
started before the 10 minutes, the user will have to shut down the system and wait 10 minutes
again upon opening up the Bad Pixel Calibration window.
10. Press START and follow the on-screen instructions. The first step is the transfer of 17 images.

Note: The SUIF will guide the user through the 9-step process for Bad Pixel Calibration. Please continue
to reference this document if you need further clarification on the next step in the process.
11. For Step 2 of 9, do the following setup steps before proceeding:

a. Set the distance between the tube and the detector to 120cm.
b. Make sure that the collimator is fully open by turning on the collimator light and adjusting
the focal spot to the largest settings. See Figure 5-6.
Figure 5-6 Collimator Settings
c. Place detector on lead apron with the tether connection away from the system.
Remove the grid if necessary. Align with the detector so that the beam is centered
(Figure 5-7).

Figure 5-7 Detector Centered to Beam with Tether Connection Away from System
d. Install the flat field phantom from the front of the collimator into the collimator rails in as
shown Figure 5-8 below.
Figure 5-8 Flat Field Phantom Installed
e. Press START to continue with step 2 of 9.

12. Continue with the steps as detailed in the SUIF. Press COMPLETE when all 9 steps are
completed as shown in Figure 5-9.

Figure 5-9 Bad Pixel Calibration Complete
13. Ensure that the Bad Pixel Calibration passed by selecting DET CAL SUMMARY and locating
the Detector Serial number. The Calibration for the detector should list Bad Pixel and give a
date and result of calibration as shown in Figure 5-10.
Figure 5-10 Detector Calibration Summary
5.4.1.2 Gain Calibration

The bad pixel calibration (see 5.4.1.1 Bad Pixel Calibration on page 326) must be performed before
starting the gain calibration.
Gain Calibration can be done for 60 kVp, 80 kVp, and 120 kVp and are selectable in the SUIF
Calibration screen. 80kVp and 120kVp need to be completed with the flat field phantom installed. If

Bad Pixel Calibration was just performed, and the flat field phantom is already installed, the user
can complete these calibrations prior to performing the 60kVp calibration. The Gain Calibration
creates gain maps used to compensate for gain non-uniformities. The X-ray tube must be
positioned at 120cm SID, full FOV and the beam centered on the detector for this calibration. See
5.4.1.1 Bad Pixel Calibration on page 326, Step 11 for information on positioning of the tube if
needed.
aprons. Aim the tube away from personnel.
1. Refer to Figure 5-11 for the following steps.
Figure 5-11 Detector Gain
2. On the Calibration page, in the left folder tree, select DETECTOR > GAIN.
3. Select 80 KVP.
a. Each process begins with a QC exposure to check for setup and alignment errors,
followed by a sequence of 10 exposures. The generator technique for each exposure is
set automatically by the system.
b. Press and hold the Prep/Expose handswitch to make the exposures. Release the
handswitch after each exposure. An exposure inhibit symbol appears in the status bar
until the system is ready for the next exposure.
c. After the last exposure, calculations are performed and the message "Calibration
completed successfully" appears, along with instructions to select CANCEL to
abort calibration or COMPLETE to save gain calibration data.
d. After each kV technique, the program returns to the calibration summary page. Re-open
the gain calibration page to verify that the date and pass/fail result for the calibration were
properly updated, then continue by selecting the next technique and starting the
calibration.

5. Select 120 KVP and repeat Steps 4a through 4d.

6. Remove the flat field phantom from the collimator rails.
7. Select 60 KVP and repeat Steps 4a through 4d.
8. Refer to Det Cal Summary to ensure that the Detector Gain Calibrations are completed.
9. Reboot the system after calibrations are completed.
5.4.1.3 Manual Bad Pixel Calibration (Gen 2 only)

Due to manufacturing limitations, a detector may have defective pixels, which are called Bad Pixels.
These defective pixels must be identified to be corrected by interpolating with their neighboring
good pixels. To correct the bad pixels, a bad pixel calibration process is needed to find all the bad
pixels in the detector. The current tool can be used on each individual detector. The calibration will
combine the bad pixel maps from detector manufacturing (BP_Mfg), bad pixels caught by images
acquired during the calibration (BP_Sys), and the bad pixels defined by user (BP_User).
The overall process is 5 steps:
1. Mark the bad pixel(s).
2. After marking is done, return to SUIF, based on the bad pixel information marked, system will
validate and display the bad pixel marking result on the instructions screen.
3. User to connect the correct detector to the system with correct receptor, and move to next step
if success.
4. User to select: Append, Overwrite, or Erase User Bad Map in the detector.
5. Show the status of operation and complete the process.
Prerequisites:
• Detector must be registered to the system and connected via tether or wireless.
• Detector calibrations must be completed.
• Detector Bad Pixel calibration must be completed with Passing results.
Procedure:
1. Insert Class M SSA Key and open the SUIF. Confirm the header of the homepage states
Exclusive.
2. From the image review screen (Figure 5-12), select a raw image in which bad pixels are
present. Enter the image view and select Annotations/Mask. Select the X (bad pixel tool),
then select the line tool and mark the bad pixel(s). Press Close, then select Save.

Figure 5-12 Bad Pixel Marking
3. Navigate to SUIF → Calibration → Detector → Manual Bad Pixel. (Figure 5-13)
Figure 5-13 Manual Bad Pixel in SUIF

4. Select Continue and follow the on-screen instructions. The system will validate and display the
bad pixel marking results on the instructions screen.
5. The user has the option to Append, Overwrite, or Erase the Bad Map.
- Append will add additional Bad Pixels to the map
- Overwrite will replace the old map with the new map
- Erase will replace the map with an empty file
6. The system will report a success or failure of the operation. Retry the calibration(s) if there is
a failure.
7. Reboot the system after successfully completing the manual bad pixel calibration.
Finalization
1. Take an image to ensure there are no bad pixels.
2. Monitor bad pixels with the site and repeat as necessary.
Section 5.5 Detector Checks and QAP

Perform QAP every time you calibrate the detector, and as the final step in calibrations during
installation.
For more information about performing QAP and viewing QAP results, see the Optima XR240amx
Operator Manual 5755209-1EN, Quality Assurance and Maintenance.
5.5.1 Detector Check

1. Pre-requisite: detector must be registered and selected as primary.
Note: A detector connected with a tether is the active detector and will be used for the test. If no detector
is connected with a tether, the active wireless detector will be used.
2. On the Worklist screen, at the bottom on the Status Bar, press the QAP button (Figure 5-14).
Figure 5-14 QAP Button on Status Bar
3. On the Image Quality screen, in the left folder tree, select QUALITY CONTROL TOOLS >
ACQUISITION. Press DETECTOR CHECK. See Figure 5-15.

Figure 5-15 Image Quality Screen
4. On the Detector Check screen, press START (Figure 5-16).
Figure 5-16 Detector Check Test Screen
Note: The test takes about one minute. While the test is running, the status bar at the bottom of the screen
says "Performing Dark Image Tests".
5. When the test is complete, the results screen is displayed. Scroll to the right side of the screen
to see the pass/fail results. All tests should pass. If there are any failures, contact GE Service.
6. Press EXIT to quit the QAP session and return to Applications.
5.5.2 QAP Checkout

Page 336 Section 5.5 Detector Checks and QAP

Proper tube and collimator alignment with the detector is needed for consistent results. Align
detector with system as shown in Figure 5-17 below.
- Place lead apron on floor.
- Place detector on lead apron with the tether connection away from the system.
- Remove the grid if necessary.
- Manually align tube to detector using collimator field light to expose the entire detector
surface.
- Make sure the collimator is at 0 degrees rotation.
Figure 5-17 QAP Set-up
1. On the Worklist screen, at the bottom on the Status Bar, press the QAP button (Figure 5-18).
Figure 5-18 QAP Button on Status Bar
2. On the Image Quality screen, in the left folder tree, select QUALITY CONTROL TOOLS >
ACQUISITION. Press QAP. See Figure 5-19.

Figure 5-19 Image Quality Screen
3. Press START.
Note: The test takes about ten minutes, and is made up of three parts. After completing each part, the
program automatically advances to the next part, but you must press START to initiate the testing
for each part.
4. Follow the procedure as detailed on the screen. The status bar at the bottom of the screen will
display status messages. When the tests are complete, the results screen will be displayed.
5. Scroll to the right side of the screen to see the pass/fail results. All tests should pass. If there
are any failures, contact GE Service.
6. Press EXIT to quit the QAP session and return to Applications.
Section 5.6 EI Dose Verification

Note: Applicable to Gen 2 only.
5.6.1 Overview
Exposure Index (EI) is a feature to provide visual and quantitative information for detector exposure
in digital x-ray imaging. To standardize EI across different digital RAD systems from different
manufacturers, IEC published the Standard IEC 62494-1 in 2008. All GE Digital RAD systems
integrated with FlashPad HD have implemented EI features per the IEC Standard. In addition, a
specific Technical Mode is provided for users to verify dose reported by EI.
EI is proportional to the detector entrance exposure. Its value divided by 100 is comparable to
detector entrance dose measurement in the unit of µGy at calibration condition (RQA5, an x-ray
spectrum obtained with ~71kVp with additional 21mm Aluminum filter on GE systems).
EI is computed based on detector conversion factor (CF) and signal count measured on a raw
image after offset, gain, and bad pixel correction. The image region of interest (ROI) for
measurement is the central 10% of the detector imaging area per IEC standard. As an example, for
14"x17" or 35cm x 43cm detector, ~11.0cm x 13.5cm ROI at the center is used for EI computation.
Page 338 Section 5.6 EI Dose Verification

To minimize the effect of image non-uniformity, the EI dose is ideally computed at the source to
imager distance (SID) where the detector gain calibration is performed. However, to avoid the effect
of non-uniformity of x-ray field on the measurement due to different sizes of dosimeter probes, it is
recommended to use a large size probe compatible to the area of EI analysis on detector or long
SID to improve the accuracy of dose reading relative to the EI from detector.
During the acquisition, backscatter from support surface could also affect result, especially for ion
chamber-based dosimeter. It is recommended to use solid state dosimeter or ion chamber probe
with foam or wood material (no metal table or lead sheet or lead apron behind) to support both
detector and dose probe. X-ray Field of View (FOV) is open to cover the whole detector imaging
area with additional margin to avoid artifact from collimator blade.
IEC Standard specifies uncertainty of inverse calibration function used in EI computation is less
than 20% which is also considered as a threshold for this verification. To minimize the uncertainty
error, the following test conditions are recommended:
• 71 kVp
• 20mm Aluminum Flat Field Phantom stacked with 1mm Aluminum plate in the collimator rails
(A 1mm Al plate is not required. See 5.6.2.3 Alternate Setup on page 340.)
• Grid removed.
• Both detector and probe should be supported by low attenuation foam or wood table during
the test, especially when ion chamber probe is used.
• FOV to cover whole detector imaging area with ~4cm beyond.
• Set SID to ~180cm and orientation same as those for detector calibration or QAP.
• Both detector and dosimeter probe will be exchangeable to be placed at the same position, the
center of FOV, and same support during the measurement.

5.6.2 EI Dose Verification Procedure

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• Calibrated Dosimeter
Min Dose: < 0.5mR (5 Gy) (See 5.6.2.3 Alternate Setup on page 340 if not available)
Resolution: < 0.05mR (0.5 Gy) (See 5.6.2.3 Alternate Setup on page 340 if not available)
Probe Size: Larger (better)
Recommended:
Piranha with CB2 or R100 external probe
RaySafe X2 with R/F sensor
Radcal with 180cc ion chamber
Keithley with 150 cc ion chamber
• 20mm Al Flat-Field Phantom
• 1mm Al sheet. Note: A 20mm Al flat field phantom can be used if this is not available. See
Alternate Setup below.

• Generator calibrations completed. See Section 5.3 Generator Calibration on page 324.
• Detector calibrations completed. See Section 5.4 Detector Calibration on page 325.
5.6.2.3 Alternate Setup

If 1mm Al plate is not available, EI verification could also be done at 80kVp with 20mmAl phantom
only. In this case, the technique used in Steps 9 and 16 in 5.6.2.4 Procedure below shall be 80kVp
and 12.5mAs. Equation in Step 18 in 5.6.2.4 Procedure below should be modified to following for
computation:
Final error between reported EI and measured dose should be within +17%/-23%.
If dosimeter probe has min dose threshold > 0.5mR (5 Gy) and resolution > 0.05mR (or 0.5 Gy),
increase mAs in Steps 9 and 16 in 5.6.2.4 Procedure by 2x or 4x to minimize measurement error.
In this case, DI value could be +3 or +6 of original value based on proposed default mAs in Steps
9 and 16 in 5.6.2.4 Procedure. The specification for error between reported EI and measured dose
should be same.
5.6.2.4 Procedure
1. Login to system by using admin or GE Service.
2. In Worklist window, select the Tool icon → Preferences → DI → Edit on DI-Preferences to
open a Deviation Index Window.
Note: If the generator calibrations and detector calibrations are not completed, the user will not be able to
click on the "Edit" button.

3. Enable Technical Mode by selecting the box next to Technical Mode.
4. Close Deviation Index window and then Preference-DI window.

5. Connect a detector to be tested in either wireless mode or tether mode.
6. See figure below. Place the detector on a wood or foam support, about 20cm away from floor.
Remove a grid if it is attached.
Figure 5-20 Detector Setup
7. Set the SID to 175-180 cm from tube focal spot to detector or dosimeter probe.
8. Create a new patient with Upper Extremity and Hand protocol.
9. Adjust the technique to 71kVp and 25mAs.
If only using a 20mm Al phantom (no 1mm Al phantom), technique should be 80kVp and
12.5mAs.
10. Set FOV large enough to cover whole detector image area with additional 4-5 cm margin.
11. Insert a 20mm Al + 1mm Al phantom in the collimator rails.
Note: The 1mm Al phantom is not required, a different technique and calculation will need to
be used. See Alternate Setup above.
12. Take an exposure and record EI value from image annotation:
EI Value = ______________ (in unit of Gy * 100)
13. Remove the detector from the x-ray field.
14. Remove the Al phantom(s), place a large size dosimeter probe on the same support surface,
and align it to the center of FOV with the same FOV and SID as the probe. See figure below.

Figure 5-21 Dosimeter Probe Setup
15. Replace the 20mm Al phantom only (no 1mm Al phantom) back into the collimator rails.
16. Take another exposure in the same technique as Step 9 above, ignoring the acquired image
on the system.
17. Read the dose value from the dosimeter.
Dose Reading _________________ (Unit: µGy)
Note: if the unit of dose reading is mR, convert units to Gy:
_____________ (mR) * 8.76 (Gy/mR) = ____________ (Gy)
18. Perform the following calculation:
- If a 1mm Al phantom was used initially:
- If a 1mm Al phantom was NOT used initially:
19. The system passes the test if the error is within +/-20%. See below if the test fails.
20. In Worklist window, select the Tool icon → Preferences → DI → Edit on DI-Preferences to
open a Deviation Index Window.
21. Disable Technical Mode by deselecting the box next to Technical Mode.
22. Close Deviation Index window and then the Preference-DI window.
5.6.2.5 Additional Considerations in Case of Failure

If the detector fails the EI verification, check the following:

• Is there any setup difference for exposures between detector and dose measurement? System
setup must be exactly same, including exposure technique, SID, FOV, filtration, and low
attenuation material to support detector and dosimeter probe especially if ion chamber-based
dosimeter is used.
• Is the sensing area of dosimeter probe large enough or SID not too short? The error will be
reduced if the size of the probe is close to 10% area of the detector or SID is not too short.
• Does the dosimeter probe have min dose threshold ≤ 0.5mR (or 5 Gy) and resolution ≤ 0.05mR
(or 0.5μGy)? If not, see Alternate Setup above.
• Perform detector gain calibration and then run this verification procedure again.
• Run this procedure with a different calibrated dosimeter.
Section 5.7 Image Quality Calibration

5.7.1 Calibrating the Printer
Follow this procedure to send grayscale output to the printer and to calculate compensation LUT
(look up table) for compatibility.

4. On the Calibration page, in the left folder tree, select IMAGE QUALITY > PRINTER.
5. Press the CALIBRATION icon.
6. In the left frame, select IMAGE QUALITY > PRINTER.
7. Select the correct printer from the Printer Label drop-down list.
Section 5.8 Hardware Calibration

5.8.1 Drive Handle Calibration
Follow this procedure to calibrate the drive handle and ensure accurate movement and steering.

4. On the Calibration page, in the left folder tree, select HARDWARE CALIBRATION > DRIVE
HANDLE.

5.8.2 Touch Screen Calibration

Follow this procedure to calibrate the touch screen. This calibration is needed for when the Spyder
board has control of the display due to switch display functionality. This calibration is in addition to
the SW touch screen calibration also found in the SUIF.

4. On the Calibration page, in the left folder tree, select HARDWARE CALIBRATION > TOUCH
SCREEN.
5.8.3 DAP Calibration

DAP calibration at Installation only needs to be performed if the site is above 300m elevation.
Planned Maintenance calibration of the DAP must occur at least once per 2 years.

- Required persons: 1
- Timing (min): 30

- Dose meter with mR or uGy measurement units.
- None
5.8.3.2.3 Safety
- Appropriate ionizing radiation PPE

- DAP meter is connected.
- DAP meter is enabled in software.
- No DAP related errors in the system error log.
- DAP temperature stabilized to the operating environment.
- Wait 5 minutes after the DAP is connected and energized per the OEM for internal
stabilization before calibration or clinical use.
5.8.3.3 Purpose
The purpose of this calibration is to modify the correction factor stored in the DAP device. The DAP
response is dependent upon temperature and atmospheric pressure.
The DAP Calibration correction factor (CF) is stored in the DAP itself and not on the system. For
this reason adhere to the following;
Page 344 Section 5.8 Hardware Calibration

- Do not press COMMIT if you are exploring, entering random numbers and making
exposures. This loads interim CF values into the DAP. Assume this value to be bad. By
pressing CANCEL the original DAP resident CF value will be restored.
- Do not return the system to clinical use if the system shuts down in the middle of this
calibration. The DAP will contain an interim CF value. Assume this value to be bad.
Restore the system to proper working order and perform this calibration procedure. Make
sure you press COMMIT to save the correct and valid CF value.
- A result of PASS is presented when the test meter and the DAP reported values have less
than a 10% error.
* At this point you can select COMMIT and the calibration is complete, or you can select
CONTINUE and repeat in the attempt to reduce the PASS Error percentage. Do not
expect to achieve a 0% error result. It is possible but not probable due to the variables
of the X-ray beam and measurement devices.
5.8.3.4 Procedure
Prior to launching the DAP Calibration utility in the SUIF service interface the following set-up
conditions must be followed.
Do not deviate from this instruction or randomly enter values into the DAP calibration utility. Failure
to follow this instruction can result in grossly inaccurate Dose Value reporting during clinical system
usage.
1. Place the dose meter at least 25 cm (10 in) above the floor to reduce scatter.
Note: For Black and Red Piranha there is not need to raise the dose meter off of the ground.
Note: The dose meter and the collimator need to be parallel to each other for accuracy.
2. Place the tube with relation to the dose meter as follows:
a. FOV = 10 cm x 10 cm (centered on imaging receptor)
b. SID = 100 cm
Note: It is recommended to place a piece of paper on top of the dose meter to allow for measuring of the
light field to ensure that it is setup correctly. See Figure 5-22 Measuring the Light Field.
Figure 5-22 Measuring the Light Field

Do not disturb the SID from this point on. Failure to follow this instruction can result in grossly
inaccurate Dose Value reporting during clinical system usage.
3. Launch the DAP calibration utility as follows;
a. On the Applications desktop, press the UTILITIES button.

b. On the Utilities desktop press the Service LAUNCH button.
c. On the SUIF home page press the CALIBRATION tab button.
d. On the calibration page, in the left folder tree, press HARDWARE CALIBRATION.
e. In the left navigation frame press HARDWARE and select DAP CALIBRATION.
4. Follow the On-Screen instructions.
Notes:
- Only valid X and Y values entered in millimeters will be accepted.
- Configure your dose meter to measure in either milli-Roentgen (mR) or micro-Grays
(uGy).
- Select the appropriate unit of measure in the DAP calibration utility and enter the
measured value when prompted.
* A test meter dose reading of 150 to 500 mR is acceptable. However, it is dependent
upon the actual FOV, SID, KV, mAs.
Section 5.9 PACS Image Tests

Follow these procedures to test image display characteristics and determine the burn configuration
for PACS images for each destination host.
The different possible configurations are:
- No-Burn, if VOI LUT properly handled on PACS
- 14-bit push image, if 16-bit VOI LUT not properly handled on PACS but 14-bit VOI LUT is
properly handled.
- Burn-on-Send, if VOI LUT not properly handled on PACS
- DX as CR, if customer wants to see the images as CR on PACS
- DX as CR + Burn-on-Send
5.9.1 Comparing PACS Test Images

In the following tests, use the nine PACS test images to test image display characteristics and
determine image display configuration.
Each PACS test image consists of two aspects:
• On the right, a clinical chest image with image number and GE logo watermark (Figure 5-23).
• On the left, a series of 12 vertical bands. The top six bands are dark and the bottom six are
bright.
Inside each band are five small squares with different intensities (like the 5%/95% squares in
a SMPTE pattern). The squares provide a quantitative way to compare two images.
Page 346 Section 5.9 PACS Image Tests

The pixel data in every test image is identical. Only the DICOM headers, annotations, and window
center (WC) and window width (WW) values are slightly different for each pattern.
Figure 5-23 PACS/Image Display Test Image
5.9.2 Determining PACS Burn/No-Burn Configuration
5.9.2.1 Verifying PACS Monitor Calibration

1. Verify that the PACS monitor is calibrated according to DICOM Standard Part 14. Each site is
responsible for providing evidence of PACS monitor calibration.
2. At the application desktop, press IMAGE TOOLS.
3. Click SMPTE to load the SMPTE pattern into the Patient List.
4. Send the SMPTE pattern to the PACS review workstation
5. Verify that 5% and 95% squares are equally visible on PACS (Figure 5-24).

Figure 5-24 SMPTE Pattern
5.9.2.2 Loading Test Images

1. Load the PACS test images onto the acquisition workstation. Use either:
- A DICOM-formatted CD-ROM with images.
- Images that are stored on the system in Image Tools.
2. Verify that the patient name is GE_PACS_Test_Image Definium and the patient ID is
2000002.
5.9.2.3 Sending No-Burn Images to the PACS

1. In the Worklist screen, press the UTILITIES tab button.
2. Next to Service, press LAUNCH. Select CONFIGURATION > NETWORKING and select NO
for 14-bit push image.
3. Press the Exit icon, reboot the system, and navigate back to System Utilities screen. Next to
Network Connections, press EDIT.
4. Select the appropriate network host and press EDIT.
5. On the Preferences tab, verify that the following parameter is NOT checked:
Apply Burn-on-Send to images when sending to this network host.
6. In the Images list, highlight PACS Test Image #1.
7. In the Destination icon list, press the appropriate PACS network host.

5.9.2.4 Sending Burn-On-Send Images to the PACS

2. Next to Network Connections, press EDIT.
4. On the Preferences tab, check Apply Burn-on-Send to images when sending to
this network host.
5.9.2.5 Sending 14-bit push images to the PACS

2. Next to Service, press LAUNCH. Select CONFIGURATION > NETWORKING and select YES
for 14-bit push image.
3. Press the Exit icon, reboot the system, and navigate back to System Utilities screen. Next to
Network Connections, press EDIT.
5. On the Preferences tab, verify that the following parameter is NOT checked:
Apply Burn-on-Send to images when sending to this network host.
5.9.2.6 Reviewing Images on PACS

1. On the PACS review workstation, display PACS test images #1, #3 and #6. To identify an
image, look in the chest image region for the watermark image number next to the GE logo.
2. Verify that image #1 and #3 are displayed with a Value-of-Interest Look-Up Table (VOI-LUT).
3. Verify that image #6 is displayed with a Linear Look-Up Table (Linear LUT).
4. Compare PACS Test Images #1, #3 and #6 and note the following items:
a. The number of distinct bright and dark bands (based on the band intensity)
b. The number of squares visible in each band
Count bands that have distinct gray levels, not simply the number of bands with visible
squares. For example, in Figure 5-25, there are two squares in band #4, three squares in
band #5, and three squares in band #11. There are three distinct dark bands and six
distinct bright bands. This is because the top three dark bands are indistinguishable.

Figure 5-25 Example showing distinct bands and visible squares
- If PACS test images #1, #3 and #6 appear visually identical (with an equal number of
bright and dark bands), the PACS supports 16-bit VOI-LUT. Configure the PACS as No-
Burn and 14-bit image push as NO for this host.
- If PACS Test Images #1 and #3 appear visually different (with a different number of bright
and dark bands), and Images #3 and #6 appear visually identical or if on image #1 you
can see saturation in the lung or abdomen of the chest region (saturation appears as a
completely flat dark or white area), the PACS does not support 16-bit VOI-LUT or applies
it incorrectly. Configure the PACS as No-Burn and 14-bit image push as YES for
this host.
- If PACS Test Images #3 and #6 appear visually different (with a different number of bright
and dark bands), or if you can see saturation in the lung or abdomen of the chest region
(saturation appears as a completely flat dark or white area), the PACS does not support
VOI-LUT or applies it incorrectly. Configure the PACS as Burn-on-Send for this host.
5. Repeat sections 5.9.2.3 Sending No-Burn Images to the PACS, 5.9.2.4 Sending Burn-On-
Send Images to the PACS and 5.9.2.6 Reviewing Images on PACS for each PACS destination
host.
6. Record the results in the table below.
Table 5-1 PACS Image Test Results
Example Test 1 Test 2 Test 3 Test 4 Test 5 Test 6 Test 7

Distinct dark
3
bands
1 0
2 0
3 0
4 2
5 3
6 4
7 5
8 4
9 4
10 3

Table 5-1 PACS Image Test Results
Example Test 1 Test 2 Test 3 Test 4 Test 5 Test 6 Test 7

11 3
12 0
Distinct bright
6
bands
In addition to the test results above, use Table 5-2 as a guideline to determine if a PACS should be
configured as Burn-on-Send. This table considers only whether a PACS supports VOI-LUT
Table 5-2 PACS Support of VOI-LUT
No-Burn Burn-on-Send
GE Centricity RA1000 v1.0, v2.0, v2.1 GE Pathspeed v7.12, 8.0
GE Centricity RA600 v6.1, 7.0 GE AW v3.1, 4.0
GE Radworks v5.1 Kodak DirectView v4.3
GE Pathspeed v8.1 or later Kodak DirectView v5.1, 5.2
McKesson HRS v3.3, 3.3.2 Kodak Directview(CEMAX ICON), v4.3
Fuji Synapse v3.0, 3.1 Merge eFilm, v2.0
Agfa IMPAX v4.5, 5.2 Stentor iSite v3.0, v3.3.1
Philips Siemens Magic View 300
RealTime iPACS Viewer v5.0 VA Vista
- Picker
- Neusoft v3.0
- Thinking Systems
5.9.3 Optional PACS tests

Perform the following tests to obtain further information for troubleshooting.
5.9.3.1 Sending all PACS Test Images

1. Send all nine images to PACS and follow the test instructions in Table 5-3:
- Send images #1, #2, #4, and #5 as No-Burn
- Send image #3 as 14-bit push image and No-Burn
- Send images #6-8 as Burn-on-Send
2. If the site is interested in exploring CR-Fallback as an option, configure the PACS for CR-
fallback with help from the local IT team. Then send image #9 as No-Burn.
- In the SUIF, press the UTILITIES tab button
- Next to Network Connections, press EDIT
- On the PREFERENCES tab, select the option, DX Images sent as CR Modality

and do not select APPLY BURN-ON-SEND to images when sending to this network host.
Table 5-3 Test Instructions for all PACS Images
Image # Platform Send Annotation notes

1 All No-Burn None Test No-Burn mode
2 All No-Burn None Identical to #1
3 14-bit Image Push None Test 14-bit Image Push
4 All No-Burn Text Test annotations
5 All No-Burn L Test annotations
6 All Burn-on-Send None Test Burn-on-Send mode
7 All Burn-on-Send Text Test annotations
8 All Burn-on-Send L Test annotations
9 All No-Burn None Test TEXT? CR-Fallback
5.9.3.2 Verifying DICOM Header Tags

1. On the PACS review workstation, open PACS test image #1 (Patient ID 2000002).
2. Access the DICOM header information through a drop-down list, a button, or by right-clicking
the image and then selecting an option such as “information,” “i,” or “header.” For help, contact
local IT support.
3. Verify No-Burn mode by verifying that:
a. The WC tag is 0028x1050 and the WW tag is 0028x1051
b. The values are WC=16800\16800\16800 and WW=7000\5250\10500
4. Verify VOI-LUT tags as follows:
a. Search the DICOM header for tag 0028x3010VOILUTSequence.
b. Below that tag, verify that there are three additional tags:
* 0028x3002LUTDescriptor
* 0028x3003LUTExplanation
* 0028x3006LUTData
c. Verify that each VOILUTSequence has a LUTExplanation set to either Normal, Harder,
or Softer.
5. Record the results in Table 5-4 on page 354.
6. Open PACS test image #6 and view the DICOM header.
7. Verify Burn-on-Send mode by ensuring that:
b. No VOILUTSequence tag should be present. If a VOILUTSequence is present, the image
was not sent correctly. Resend the image as Burn-on-Send.
9. Open PACS test image #9 and view the DICOM header. Verify that the Modality Tag
0008x0060 as the value CR.
10. Open PACS test image #3 and view the DICOM header.
11. Verify 14-bit push image mode by ensuring that:


b. Below that tag, verify that there are three additional tags:
* 0028x3002LUTDescriptor
* 0028x3003LUTExplanation
* 0028x3006LUTData
c. Verify that each VOILUTSequence has a LUTExplanation set to either Normal, Harder,
or Softer.
5.9.3.3 Verifying WC and WW Values
No-Burn Mode (PACS Test Image #1)

The DICOM header of each PACS Test Image is always sent with WC/WW=16800/7000. The
values displayed on the PACS may appear differently. This is acceptable according to DICOM
standards. The values can show up as 32768/65536, 16800/7000, or something else. The most
common and preferred implementation is to show values of 32768/65536 on the PACS.
1. Open PACS test image #1.
2. Verify that the WC/WW values are 32768/65536.
If the values do not appear as 32768/65536, check that the VOI-LUT is enabled on the PACS.
The VOI-LUT often can be enabled with a drop-down list on the image or through hanging
protocols.
Note: This does not indicate that the PACS does not support VOI-LUTs. Support for VOI-LUTs
is strictly determined by the visual appearance of PACS test images #1 and #6.
3. Record the results in Table 5-4 (see 5.9.4 PACS Image Comparison Results on page 354).
Burn-on-Send Mode (PACS Test Image #6)

If the values do not appear as 32768/65536, check that the full range display is enabled on the
PACS. The full range display often can be enabled with a drop-down list on the image or
through hanging protocols.
14-bit Push Image Mode (PACS Test Image #3)

If the values do not appear as 8192/16384, check that the full range display is enabled on the
PACS. The full range display often can be enabled with a drop-down list on the image or
through hanging protocols.

5.9.3.4 Checking for Image Saturation

2. Check that the clinical chest area appears with no saturation in the lung or abdomen region.
5.9.3.5 Testing Reduced Dynamic Range with Burn-On-Send

The Burn-on-Send configuration causes a reduced dynamic range in the image if you change the
window level of the image on the PACS.
2. Change the window level on the PACS to attempt to see the five squares in all twelve bands.
Start by changing the WC value to 0 and the WW value to 100 (the appropriate values may
vary among different PACS workstations).
The loss of dynamic range is most common in the top dark band. If reduced dynamic range
occurs, the five squares will not be visible in the top dark band (band #1).
5.9.4 PACS Image Comparison Results

Use the values in Table 5-4 to quantitatively compare images. For example, to determine if a PACS
supports GE VOI-LUTs, compare PACS test images #1 and #6. If the number of distinct bands and
visible squares are equal, then the PACS correctly supports VOI-LUTs.
Table 5-4 PACS Image Comparison Results
Tests Results
WC = __________
DICOM header on PACS (image #1 No-Burn) WW = __________
VOI-LUT (Yes/No)
WC = __________
DICOM header on PACS (image #6 Burn-on-Send) WW = __________
VOI-LUT (Yes/No)
WC = __________
DICOM header on PACS (image #2 14-bit image push) WW = __________
VOI-LUT (Yes/No)
WC = __________
Values displayed on PACS viewer (image #1)
WW = __________
WC = __________
WW = __________
WC = __________
WW = __________
Saturation visible in lung or abdomen region
Able to see all five squares in top band of image #6
Able to see all five squares in top band of image #1
Images #1, 4, 5 appear visually identical
Images #6, 7, 8 appear visually identical

Table 5-4 PACS Image Comparison Results
Tests Results
PACS able to select Normal/Harder/Softer
Modality tag
DICOM header on PACS (image #9 CR-Fallback).
0008x0060 = CR

Chapter 6 Mechanical Adjustment

Procedures
THE POTENTIAL FOR INJURY OR DEATH FROM ELECTRICAL AND

HAZARDS MECHANICAL HAZARDS IS HIGH. CAREFULLY READ AND FOLLOW
EXIST INSTRUCTIONS.
Section 6.1 Column Related Assemblies

6.1.1 Column Balance Procedure

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 20

• Loctite 242 (GE part# 46-170686P2) or equivalent

• None
6.1.1.2.4 Safety
• None

• None
Page 356 Section 6.1 Column Related Assemblies

6.1.1.3 Procedure
1. Remove the apron hanger bracket from the vertical column. See Figure 6-1.
Item Description
1 Apron hanger bracket
Figure 6-1 Apron Hanger Bracket
2. You now can see the top of the compressed spring assembly (see Figure 6-2). There is up to
1.5 inches of adjustment before the tool insertion becomes un-usable.
Note: The column comes pre-adjusted such that the fine adjustment range falls within the physical
adjustment opening in the column (see Figure 6-2, Item 2). Do not attempt to adjust the spring
tension if the tool does not engage in the adjustment holes easily.

Item Description
1 Counterbalance adjustment holes
2 Physical adjustment opening in the column
Figure 6-2 Vertical Counterbalance Adjustment

Chapter 6 Mechanical Adjustment Procedures Page 357
3. Raise the tube arm to approximately 2.5 cm (1 in) from the top of the column. This reduces
spring tension, allowing easier adjustment.
4. Using a 4 mm hex key inserted into the adjustment holes (see Figure 6-2), you can adjust the
spring tension for up to 5 lbs of balance force.
5. Rotating the assembly clockwise reduces the tension on the spring resulting in less buoyancy
of the arm.
6. Rotating the assembly counter-clockwise increases the tension on the spring resulting in more
buoyancy of the arm.
7. Adjust the spring tension such that 80% of the main travel is stable. 10% at the lowest tube
position and 10% of the highest tube position should have minimal to no movement when the
brakes are engaged.
8. Apply thread locker (i.e. Loctite 242) to the apron hanger bracket screws. Install the bracket
and tighten the screws.
6.1.2 Tube Latch to Arm Pin Adjustment Procedure

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 20

• None

• None
6.1.2.2.4 Safety
• None

• None
6.1.2.3 Procedure
Note: The tube latch assembly mounted to the main body of the mobile unit (called the Thorax assembly)
has minimal to no adjustment capability. Therefore, the adjustments must be performed relative to
the tube latch pin arm mounting assembly. There is up to 13 mm of adjustment capability for smooth
and reliable engagement of the tube latch assembly.

1. Ensure the tube latch assembly is properly secured to the Thorax. See Figure 6-3.
Item Description
1 Tube latch assembly
Figure 6-3 Tube Latch Assembly on Thorax
2. Adjust the screw tension of the tube latch pin assembly on the horizontal arm (see Figure 6-4)
such that it is snug but can be moved forward/backward with slight effort.
3. Make sure the arm is fully retracted/compressed.

Item Description
1 Tube latch pin assembly
Figure 6-4 Tube Latch Pin Assembly
4. Lower the horizontal arm so that it engages with the Thorax tube latch assembly. Manually
slide the tube latch pin assembly to facilitate the engagement.
5. Manually release the Thorax side of the tube latch such that the horizontal arm side of the pin
assembly is not disturbed.
6. Carefully torque fasteners of the tube latch pin assembly to 8.1 N-m (71.7 lb-in) - no thread
locker is used. See Figure 6-4.
7. Raise and lower the horizontal arm such that the arm latching feature can be engaged and
disengaged several times to ensure smooth and reliable functionality.

6.1.3 Column Rotational Detent Procedure

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 20

• None

• None
6.1.3.2.4 Safety
• None

• None
6.1.3.3 Procedure
1. Ensure the tube latch to arm pin adjustment procedure has been completed (see 6.1.2 Tube
Latch to Arm Pin Adjustment Procedure on page 358).
2. Disengage the tube latch and raised the tube slightly above the tube latch.
3. Using the collimator left/right lock switch buttons, rotate the column such that you feel the
column rotation detent setting.
4. Release the collimator lock switches when the column rotational lock detent is felt.
5. Lower the tube to engage the tube latch assembly.
If the alignment is not correct, proceed with the following steps.

Column Rotation Detent Adjustment

1. Remove the left side cover and left front cover. See 11.1.4 Front Cover Removal on page 654.
2. Locate the column detent eccentric adustment (Item 1) as shown in Figure 6-5. A 6mm Allen
wrench or adapter (for ratchet) is required for the adjustment.
IItem Description
1 Column detent eccentric adjustment
Figure 6-5 Column Detent Eccentric Adjustment
3. Locate the column detent lock nut (Figure 6-6, Item 1) at the bottom of the column (under-side
of the chassis). While holding the eccentric adjustment from the top, loosen the detent lock nut
with a 3/4" wrench or socket.

IItem Description
1 Column detent lock nut
Figure 6-6 Column Detent Lock Nut
4. The detent is adjusted through the use of an eccentric, using a 6 mm Allen wrench. Rotate the
eccentric to adjust the left-to-right positioning of the tube latch pin (located on bottom of the
horizontal arm) such that it squarely aligns with the tube latch assembly (located on top of the
Thorax). See Figure 6-7.

IItem Description
1 Tube latch assembly
2 Tube latch pin
Figure 6-7 Column Detent Latch Alignment
5. While holding the eccentric adjustment in position to prevent movement, torque the 3/4"
column detent lock nut to 18 N-m (159.3 lb-in).
6. Using the collimator left/right lock switches to disengage the locks, rotate the column left and
right such that it stops in the detent and then verify the tube latch mechanism engages
smoothly and reliably from both clockwise and counterclockwise rotational directions. Re-
adjust as necessary.
7. Install the front and side covers.

Chapter 7 Radiation and Electrical Testing

When instructed to do so during installation, planned maintenance, or repair procedures, complete
the tests in this chapter to meet regulatory compliance requirements and to ensure that X-rays are
generated properly. Required when replacing certified components.
Section 7.1 Required Tests

7.1.1 Required Test Equipment
Gather the test equipment, tools, and materials listed below. Record the serial number and
calibration due date, if applicable. Also record the manufacturer if not specified below.
• HHS test kit (GE 46-303879G1, 46-315694G1)
• Oscilloscope
• Radiation meter with integrate mode
• Probe test stand
• Light meter with 5% accuracy rating
• Digital multimeter
• Light to X-ray field test pattern (GE 46-303843P1 or equivalent)
• Ground tester (Hioki 3157 or Fluke ESA612 or equivalent)
• Leakage tester (Dale 601/601E or Fluke ESA612 or equivalent)
7.1.2 Preparing for Testing

For all tests, verify that the DAP meter is removed from the collimator rails unless otherwise
specified.
Before beginning testing, perform the required calibrations (see Chapter 5 Calibration).
Chapter 7 Radiation and Electrical Testing Page 365

7.1.3 Collimator Testing

Perform these tests to verify that:
• The collimator lamp illuminates properly
• The light field and X-ray field are aligned
• The field size matches the expected size per the settings on the collimator
7.1.3.1 Testing Light Intensity

Use this procedure to verify that the collimator high-intensity field lamp illuminates at a distance of
100 cm (39.37 in) from the focal spot at no less than the light intensity specification in Table 7-1.
Site location Light intensity

Global 160 lux (14.9 ft-c)
Table 7-1 Light Intensity Specification
1. Verify that the light meter has an accuracy of 5% or better.

2. Remove the collimator covers.
3. Adjust the CLS (collimator lamp supply) potentiometer so that the voltage at the collimator
lamp is 20.0 - 22.0 V.
Note: Ignore voltage polarity. The lead positions dictate polarity.
4. Place the light meter on a horizontal surface 100 cm (39.37 in) from the X-ray tube focal spot.
Direct the sensor toward the collimator light source.
5. Turn on the collimator lamp.
Note: Important! To ensure that the lamp reaches full brightness, wait while the lamp illuminates and then
automatically shuts off after 30 seconds. Then turn on the lamp again and proceed to the next step.
6. Use the dials on the front of the collimator to adjust the field size to 10 x 10 inches.
7. Turn off the collimator lamp.
8. Turn off the room lights and use the light meter to measure the ambient light level. Record the
ambient light level here:
Ambient light level: ______________
9. Turn on the collimator lamp.
10. Position the light meter in the center of each quadrant and record the intensity of the light field
here:
Quadrant 1: ____________________
Quadrant 2: ____________________
Quadrant 3: ____________________
Quadrant 4: ____________________
11. Turn off the collimator lamp.
12. Calculate the average illumination by summing the light levels of the 4 quadrants and dividing
by 4, then subtracting the ambient light level. Record the average illumination here:
Average illumination: ______________
13. Verify that the average illumination is greater than the ambient brightness by the specification
listed in Table 7-1.
Page 366 Section 7.1 Required Tests

7.1.3.2 Testing Light Field to X-ray Field Alignment

Use this test to verify that the light field and X-ray field are aligned laterally and longitudinally. Total
misalignment may not exceed the specification that pertains to the site, given below.
Table 7-2 Light Field to X-ray Field Alignment Specification by Site
Site location Total misalignment

Global Not to exceed 1.8% of SID
This procedure requires a light to X-ray test pattern, GE p/n 46-303843P1.
7.1.3.2.1 Preliminary Test - Light Field Accuracy
Note: If this test fails, then the Light to X-ray Field Alignment Test on page 368 will fail.
1. Place the X-ray receptor on a flat, horizontal surface such as a table or floor 40 inches from
the source.
2. Place the light to X-ray field test pattern on the receptor and center it squarely.
3. Align the X-ray tube to the receptor.
4. Set the source-to-image distance (SID) to 40 inches.
5. Use the collimator dials to adjust the light field settings to 10 X 10 inches on the collimator
scales.
6. Turn on the field light and squarely center the crosshair on the test pattern.
7. Minimize the room lights.
8. See Figure 7-1. Measure the light field projection edges on the test pattern marks to the 10 X
10 inches test pattern scale for each North, South, East, and West vector. (This is the error
measurement.)
- If the light field is outside the test pattern scale, record it as a positive (+) value.
- If the light field is inside the test pattern scale, record it as a negative (-) value.
Enter the measurements here:
Error measurement: N _____ S_____ E_____ W_____

: (
Item Description
1 Light field to X-ray field test pattern
2 Light field or X-ray field
Figure 7-1 Light to X-ray Field Test
9. Calculate the absolute error value for N+S and E+W and record it here:
ABS(N+S) error: _____
ABS (E+W) error: _____
10. Determine the percentage of misalignment and record it here:
ABS(N+S) error / SID * 100 = __________
ABS(E+W) error / SID * 100 = __________
Pass criteria is ≤ 1.8% SID
7.1.3.2.2 Light to X-ray Field Alignment Test

1. Prepare for an exposure.
2. Align the X-ray tube to the receptor for a SID = 40 inches.
3. Place the test pattern on the receptor and center it squarely.
4. Use the collimator dials to adjust the light field settings to 10 X 10 inches on the test pattern.
5. Minimize the room lights.
6. Select 50 kVp and 1 mAs (small spot).
7. Make an exposure.
8. Continue with the procedure below:

7.1.3.2.3 Light Field to X-ray Field Alignment

1. Select the RAW image, select Annotation, select Measurement Tools, then select line cursors.
2. Using the Line Measurement Tools, measure the text pattern scale number seen for each
North, South, East, and West edge of the image. This is the X-ray field dimension (for example,
4.7).
Enter the measurements in the X-ray field row of Table 7-3.
Value N S E W
Light field 5 5 5 5
X-ray field
Error
Table 7-3 Optima XR240amx Light Field to X-ray Field Alignment
3. Determine the error (difference) between the light field and X-ray field values for the N, S, E,
and W vector.
- If the X-ray field value is greater than 5, record the error as a positive (+) value.
- If the X-ray field value is less than 5, record the error as a positive (+) value.
4. Calculate the absolute error value for N+S and E+W and record it here:
ABS(N+S) error: _____
ABS (E+W) error: _____
5. Determine the percentage of misalignment and record it here:
ABS(N +S) error / SID * 100 = __________
ABS(E +W) error / SID * 100 = __________
6. Verify that the percentage of misalignment is within the specification in Table 7-2 on page 367.
7.1.3.3 Testing Field Size Indicator Accuracy

Use this test to ensure that the difference between the indicated field size and the actual field size
is not greater than the specification that pertains to the site, given below.
Table 7-4 Field Size Indicator Specification by Site
Site location Total difference

Global Not to exceed 1.8% SID in either direction
To determine image size and centering, exposures are to be completed in Application mode. All
measurements are to use the RAW image.
1. Prepare for an exposure.
2. Align the X-ray tube to the receptor.
3. Set the SID to 100 cm.
4. Set the X-ray angle to 0 degrees.
5. Set the field size to 25 x 25 cm.
6. Select 50 kVp and 1 mAs.
7. Take an exposure.
8. Select the Measurement Tools icon, and select Line.
9. Using the Line Measurement tool, measure the size of the X-ray image at the detector plane.
Line values are displayed in the bottom right corner of the screen.

10. Measure the distance between the front blade and rear blade of the image. Record that value
as d1, here:
d1 _____
11. Measure the distance between the left blade and right blade of the image. Record that value
as d2, here:
d2 _____
12. Calculate the indicator to actual size error, using d1 and d2 from above.
25 cm - actual size d1 25 cm - actual size d2
---------------------------------- x 100 -------------------------------- x 100
100 cm 100 cm
13. Record the error values here:
(d1) = height of image % error __________
(d2) = width of image % error ___________
14. Verify that the difference between indicated field size and actual field size does not exceed the
specification in Table 7-4 on page 369.
7.1.4 Generator Tests
7.1.4.1 Operator Warning Message

Verify that the following warning message is displayed on the control panel (ensure the warning
label of the applicable language is legible as required by local regulations):
"Warning: This X-ray unit may be dangerous to patient and operator unless safe exposure
factors, operating instructions and maintenance schedules are observed. To be used by
authorized personnel only."
7.1.4.2 Testing kVp Accuracy

Perform the kVp accuracy test to determine whether actual X-ray energy generated by the system
at a particular voltage matches the expected energy (within a specified tolerance).
kVp accuracy is measured using a non-invasive meter, such as the Piranha, which connects to a
laptop or tablet via Bluetooth.
1. Prepare the test meter according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Turn on system power and boot up the system.
3. Position the tube above the kVp meter at a SID of 100 cm (39.4 in).
4. Collimate the beam to slightly larger than the kVp meter active sensor.
5. Select the kV and mAs as defined in Table 7-5.
Table 7-5 kV and mAs Settings for kVp Accuracy - 30 kW Generator
Sample Selected kV Selected mAs Exposure Time (See Note)

1 50 2.5 <40mS
2 80 2.5 <40mS
3 125 1.6 <40mS
4 50 25 >40mS
5 80 32 >40mS
6 125 25 >40mS
Note: Exposure Time reference is for generator specifications (not selectable).

6. Make an exposure and measure the kVp value. Record the values in Table 7-6.
Table 7-6 kVp Values for kVp Accuracy - 30 kW Generator
Sample Measured kVp Acceptance Criteria

1 +/- 4 kVp and +/- 2% of selected kVp
4 +/- 4 kVp of selected kVp
7. Verify that the kVp accuracy passes the regulatory limits for each test exposure.
7.1.4.3 Testing mAs Accuracy
7.1.4.3.1 Overview
mAs accuracy is measured using a non-invasive kVp meter and oscilloscope connected to the mA
test point of the generator. Considering a threshold of 75% of the requested kV, the mAs is the
integral of the mA during the exposure time:
The exposure time (pulse width) is the time between when the kV waveform rises above the
threshold and when the kV falls back below the threshold.
For short exposure times (< 15 mSec), it is necessary to accurately measure and calculate the mAs
by integrating the mA and time in defined intervals. (Three are used for this example.)
The integrated values are the sum of the weighted means of the measured time intervals for
the full exposure time.
Mt1+ Mt2 + Mt3 = MT
Where
M = mean of the measured mA
t1, t2, t3 = time interval of the measured mean of mA (Mt1, Mt2, Mt3)
T = total exposure time @ 75% of kVp rise and fall value.
MT * T = mAs
This is simplified by the use of an oscilloscope that supports signal integration. The TDS 3000 family
of scopes provides this function using vertical cursors and gating cursors selections. So a single
measurement can be made for the full exposure defined as T above with a highly accurate result.

Figure 7-2 mA Waveform, Example 1
For exposures > 15 mSec the waveform stabilizes and the effects of Mt1 and Mt2 become
negligible.
Using the cursor gating function find the mean of the entire waveform.
Figure 7-3 mA Waveform, Example 2
Note: Because of the nature of the design of the high frequency generator, the use of a kV meter to
determine kVp rise time is not necessary. The rise/fall of the kVp waveform has negligible impact
upon the mAs measurement.
7.1.4.3.2 Procedure
1. Connect a CH 1 scope probe to TP5 (signal scale is 100mA = 1V) of the generator and chassis
ground. See Figure 7-4.
Note: TP4 is the mA Anode Negative signal and can be used in place of TP5.

73
73
Figure 7-4 Generator TP4 & TP5 mAs Test Points
2. Select the kV and mAs as defined in Table 7-7.
Table 7-7 kV and mAs Settings for mA Accuracy - 30 kW Generator
Sample Selected kV Selected mAs Exposure Time (See Note)

1 50 2 <15mS
2 125 1.25 <15mS
3 50 25 >15mS
4 125 25 >15mS
Note: Exposure Time reference is for generator specifications (not selectable).
3. Adjust scope settings to display a single waveform.

4. Using the vertical cursor measurement functions, position the cursors on the mA waveform at
75% of the rise/fall for the entire exposure.
5. Using the undisturbed vertical cursor measurement functions, record the mean of the mA
waveform for the entire exposure. This requires using the integration function of the
oscilloscope. Each scope can vary as to how this is performed.
For the TDS 3000 Series scopes, the following applies.
a. Press the MEASURE button. Press the GATING button (ignore on/off state).
b. Press the BETWEEN THE V BAR CURSORS button.
c. Press SELECT MEASUREMENT FOR CH 1 button.
d. Change selections as need and select MEAN.

6. Record the CH 1 Mean value in Table 7-8.
Table 7-8 Ch1 Mean Value - 30 kW Generator
Sample Ch1 Mean value Measured Time Acceptance Criteria

1 +/- 20% or 0.1mAs, whichever is greater
7. Verify that mAs accuracy passes the regulatory limits for each test exposure.
7.1.4.4 Testing Reproducibility and Linearity of Exposure

Reproducibility: For any specific combination of selected technique factors, the estimated
coefficient of variation (C.V.) of radiation exposures shall be no greater than 0.05.
Linearity: The quotients of the average measured dose divided by the selected technique
values at 2 consecutive settings shall not exceed 0.10 times their sum result for
HHS.
Data collections for each sample set defined in the tables below consist of 10 exposures each.
Each sample of 10 exposures must be completed within 1 hour of start. There are a total of
60 exposures required to complete this section.
Testing is to be done using a non-invasive meter, such as the Piranha, which connects to a laptop
or tablet via Bluetooth.
1. Prepare the test meter according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Position the dose probe 30 cm above the floor to limit scatter effects.
3. Position the tube above the probe at a SID of 100 cm.
4. Collimate the beam to slightly larger than the dose probe active sensor.
5. Select the kV and mAs starting with Sample A in Table 7-9.
Table 7-9 kV and mAs Values for Reproducibility Tests - 30kW Generator
Selected kV Selected mAs

Sample A 80 32
SID = 100 cm
Sample B 80 40
SID = 100 cm
6. Measure the exposure in uGy for each of the 10 exposures. Each sample of 10 exposures
must be completed within 1 hour of start.
After each exposure, recycle the technique (switch to other values and then return them to the
original values). Also vary the time between exposures to capture any filament heating
variations.

7. Measure and record the values in Table 7-10.
Table 7-10 Measured uGy Values
Measured uGy for each exposure

Sample
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A
B
8. Repeat this process of 10 exposures with Sample B, using the correct techniques as given in
Table 7-9.
9. Verify that the reproducibility (Coefficient of Variation) for samples A and B is < 0.045 as
calculated.
Calculation:
[CV] = the Coefficient of Variation = [Std Dev] / [Average Mean]
[Std Dev] = the standard deviation of 10 samples [Sample A - exposures 1 through
10]
[Average Mean] = the average of 10 samples [Sample A - exposures 1 through 10]
Sample A: ______________
Sample B: ______________
10. Verify that the linerarity for samples A and B is < 0.10 for HHS. (This is a pass or fail solution.)
Calculation:
ABS[(avgmA/Selected mAs) - (avgmB/Selected mAs) <= (0.1((avgmA/Selected mAs) +
(avgmB/Selected mAs))]
[avgmX] = the average of 10 samples [Sample X = exposures 1 through 10]
Avg Mean Sample A = avgmA =________________

Avg Mean Sample B = avgmB =________________
Verify the linearity meets the regulatory limits.
7.1.5 Beam Quality Test
7.1.5.1 Measuring Half Value Layer (HVL)

This test measures the combined HVL of the tube and collimator.
1. See Figure 7-5. Using a probe holder, position the probe a minimum of 30 cm (12 in) from a
flat level surface (to avoid scatter) and 30 cm (12 in) from the X-ray beam output port
(collimator).
2. Collimate the beam down to just cover the receptor of the dose probe.

;UD\
)RFDO6SRW
7XEH
&ROOLPDWRU
$GGLWLRQDO7HVW
)LOWUDWLRQ
7DSH
FPLQ
8VHIXO%HDP
3UREH
0DLQWDLQDWOHDVW
7DEOHRUDQ\ FPLQ
RWKHUREMHFW IURPDQ\REMHFW
Figure 7-5 HVL Test Setup
3. Select kVp of 80, mAs of 12.5.

4. Remove or dial out all filters that are removable by the operator and collimate slightly larger
than the active volume of the probe using the light field.
5. Make an exposure and measure exposure with no added filters. Record the reading.
Exposure (without additional filtration) ___________
This represents 100% transmission level.
6. Place 3 mm additional filtration (using filters from HVL Attenuator, GE p/n 46-194427P274,
total aluminum filtration = 3.0 mm) in beam. Additional filtration must be as close to the source
as possible. Affix to the collimator rails using masking tape. Ensure tape does not encroach
upon the usable beam.
7. Make an exposure with additional filtration. Record the reading.
Exposure (with additional filtration) ___________
8. Determine the ratio.
Ratio = ________________ Exposure (with additional filtration) / Exposure (without additional filtration)
Note: The ratio of Exposure (with additional filtration) to Exposure (without additional filtration) shall be
equal to or greater than 0.5.
9. Enter the beam quality data in Table 7-11.
Table 7-11 Beam Quality Data (Half Value Layer)
Radiation Reading Ratio Aluminum Manufacture

(with/without) Filtration Date
With Without
Value
Additional Filtration Additional Filtration
3.0 mm

7.1.6 Testing Generator Operator Indicators
7.1.6.1 Testing Tones, Buzzers, and the X-ray ON Indicator

1. On the system touchscreen, start an exam and select an exposure.
2. Make the exposure.
3. Verify that an X-ray tone sounds and the X-ray ON indicator illuminates during the exposure.
4. Verify that the selected kVp and mAs are displayed in the protocol modification frames and the
left side of the status bar. Both displays should match.
7.1.6.2 Testing the Heat Unit Alarm

1. Change the generator configuration of the Tube HUR Alarm to 95%. Select COMMIT.
3. Make X-ray exposures (use appropriate radiation safety procedures, i.e. close collimator
blades, etc.):
- 80kVp
- 40mAs
4. When the Heat Units go below 95%, a tone is heard.
5. Return the Tube HUR Alarm to 20% (default). Select COMMIT.
Section 7.2 Testing Electrical Safety
This procedure is intended for the field engineer and describes the test procedure for the IEC 62353
Planned Maintenance and power plug replacement for the mobile X-ray products.
The IEC 62353: Medical Electrical Equipment - Planned Maintenance and power plug replacement
of Medical Electrical Equipment standards ensures the electrical safety of medical electrical
equipment.
Perform Ground Resistance testing

Site Location Installation PM Repair
Within USCAN Fluke ESA612 Fluke ESA612 Fluke ESA612
Outside USCAN Hioki Tool Using 25A current source Fluke ESA612 Fluke ESA612
Perform Leakage Current testing

Site Location Installation PM Repair
Fluke ESA612 -or- Fluke ESA612 -or- Fluke ESA612 -or-
Within USCAN
Dale 601/601E Dale 601/601E Dale 601/601E
Outside USCAN Fluke ESA612 -or- Fluke ESA612 -or- Fluke ESA612 -or-
Dale 601/601E Dale 601/601E Dale 601/601E

7.2.1 Ground Resistance Testing

Ground resistance test must be performed (mandatory) during every PM. The ground resistance
test must be repeated if the AC power plug has been replaced or disturbed at any time.
Note: Ground resistance testing can be performed with two different tools:
• 7.2.1.1 Ground Resistance Test using Fluke ESA612 on page 378.
• 7.2.1.2 Ground Resistance Test with Hioki 3157 on page 382.
Ground resistance testing must be performed if the AC power plug has been replaced or disturbed.
7.2.1.1 Ground Resistance Test using Fluke ESA612
Personnel Requirements
Required Persons: 1
Timing: 30mins
PM frequency – 12 months
Preliminary Requirements
Tools and Test Equipment
· Standard Toolkit
· Fluke ESA612 or below equivalent specification
Specification:
Test Standard Selections - ANSI/AAMI ES-1, IEC62353, IEC60601-1, and AN/NZS 3551
Voltage
Ranges (Mains voltage) .... 90.0 V to 132.0 V ac rms 180.0 V to 264.0 V ac rms
Range (Point-to-point voltage)
5000 m ........................................ 0.0 V to ≤150 V ac rms
2000 m ......................................... 0.0 V to ≤300.0 V ac rms
Accuracy........................................(2 % of reading + 0.2 V)
Earth Resistance
Modes............................................ 2-Wire
Test Current ....................................>200 mA ac
Range .............................................. 0.000 Ù to 2.000 Ù
Accuracy............................................(2 % of reading + 0.015 Ù)
Equipment Current
Range .................................... 0.0 A to 20.0 A ac rms
Accuracy.................................(5 % of reading + (2 counts or 0.2 A, whichever is greater))
Leakage Current
Modes* ..................................AC+DC (True-rms)
AC only
DC only
* For tests that do not use MAP voltage, AC+DC, AC ONLY, and DC ONLY modes are
available for all leakages. MAP voltages are available only in True-rms (shown as
AC+DC)
Patient Load Selection ............... AAMI ES1-1993, IEC 60601
Crest factor ................................... ≤3
Ranges ..........................................0.0 µA to 199.9 µA
200 µA to 1999 µA
2.00 mA to 10.00 mA
Page 378 Section 7.2 Testing Electrical Safety

Frequency response/Accuracy
DC to 1 kHz .................(1 % of reading + (1 μA or 1 LSD, whichever is greater))
1 kHz to 100 kHz ........ (2 % of reading + (1 μA or 1 LSD, whichever is greater))
1 kHz to 5 kHz (current > 1.6 mA) ......(4 % of reading + (1 μA or 1 LSD, whichever is greater))
100 kHz to 1 MHz ...........(5 % of reading + (1 μA or 1 LSD, whichever is greater))
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

Voltage present!
Disconnect the AC charging plug from any wall outlet power source.
Before you start the test, ensure the system is in OFF position and the system input power plug is
connected to test socket on the side of Fluke ESA612 meter.
It is recommended to use a Fluke ESA612 to set up the test conditions. The nominal AC Mains
should be 120VAC or 220VAC to match the standard system plug. Refer to 7.2.3 Test Point
Locations on page 395 for earth resistance test points of the system 120VAC or 220VAC AC Mains
(site-specific input source).
Note: It is important to ‘Zero/Null’ leads to eliminate resistance in test leads as described below.
1. Make sure the power cord from the system is connected into outlet of the Fluke ESA612.
2. From the setup menu, press F4 button for More to show additional menu selections.
3. Press F2 button for Instrument to select the instrument setup.

4. Press F1 button for Standard to open the scroll box.
5. Press up or down to scroll through the standard selections.

6. When IEC62353 standard is displayed, press F1 button for Standard.

7. Press F4 button for Done to complete the standard setup.
8. Push to display the resistance function menu.
9. Connect one end of a test lead to the V/Ω/A jack.

10. If you use an accessories probe, connect it to the other end of the test lead and put the probe
tip into the Ø/Null jack. If you use an alligator clip accessory, connect it to the other end of the
test lead, put the null post adapter in the Ø/Null jack, and clamp the alligator clip to the null
post adapter.
Note: The Ø/Null jack does not accept the test leads supplied with the Product.
To avoid electric shock, remove the null post adapter from the Null jack after a test lead zero is
performed. The Null jack becomes potentially hazardous during some of the other test conditions.
11. Push ZERO LEADS button until the display shows 0.000Ω
12. Now connect one end of the test lead between the V/Ω/A jack of the test meter and other end
to an exposed conductive surface of the system ensuring that the input power plug of the
system remains in the test socket on the side on the Fluke ESA612. Refer to Table 7-12 for
the list of conductive surfaces (accessible dead metal parts) of the system.
Note: When a current of 200mA from the current source with a no-load voltage not exceeding 24V at a
frequency of 50/60Hz is applied between conductor terminals for 5 to 10 seconds, the voltage drops
between the terminals. The resistance determined using the current and voltage drop should not be
greater than 0.2 Ohm (200 mΩ).
The resistance value will be displayed on the Fluke. Record the test results in Table 7-13.

13. Using steps 10 to 12 above, take measurements for each test point identified in Table 7-12.
Record test results in Table 7-13 as appropriate. Refer to 7.2.3 Test Point Locations on
page 395 for locations of test points.
Note: Fluke recommends the Null test be performed before testing each test point.
Table 7-12 Ground Measurement Test Points
Test Point Component Test Point Description

1 Tube Tube endcap screws or HV cable nuts (Figure 7-15)
2 Collimator Collimator Skin guards (Figure 7-16)
3 Column Scroll support rivets on column (Figure 7-17)
Screw used for mounting strain relief of wired Hand switch cable on
4 Bin
detector bin (Figure 7-18)
5 Latch Tube latch on top-cover (Figure 7-19)
The resistance, when measured, should NOT be greater than 0.3 Ohm (300 Ohm).
Table 7-13 Ground Resistance Test Results
Expected Measured Result

Test Point Units
Value Value (Pass/Fail)
1. X-ray Tube (On the HV Cable Cathode Ω ≤ 0.3
Ring)
2. Collimator Skin Spacers Ω ≤ 0.3
3. Rivets on the top column Ω ≤ 0.3
4. M4 Screw inserted into PEM nut on Ω ≤ 0.3
detector bin
5. Park Latch Assembly on the Chassis Ω ≤ 0.3
Note: If the measured value exceeds the expected value then refer to 7.2.4 AC Power Plug
Troubleshooting on page 397 for power plug troubleshooting procedure to fix the grounding issues.
7.2.1.2 Ground Resistance Test with Hioki 3157
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

Voltage present!
Disconnect the AC charging plug from any wall outlet power source.
Obtain a Hioki 3157 grounding tester or equivalent. For sites in Europe, use the cables that are
provided with the Hioki tester. For sites outside of Europe, obtain the following:
• Two green/yellow ground stranded wire cables:
- Cable A = 2.5 mm² (12 AWG), 3 m (9.8 ft)
- Cable B = 2.5 mm² (12 AWG), 5 m (16.4 ft)
• Two lugs to fit 0.64 cm (0.25 in) terminals to the meter end of each cable (Figure 7-6).
• Two clamps to fit onto the other end of the cables (Figure 7-6).

Figure 7-6 Lug and Clamp on Ground Wire
7.2.1.2.1 Attaching Test Cables

1. On the tester, loosen both the current output (Source) terminal knob (top right) and the voltage
measurement (Sense) terminal knob (bottom right) by turning them counterclockwise.
2. Connect Cable B to the current output knob.
3. Connect the short bar between the current output and voltage measurement knobs as shown
in Figure 7-7.
Figure 7-7 Test Cable B and Short Bar Installation
4. Turn the two knobs clockwise to tighten.

5. Loosen the other current output (Source) terminal (top left), attach Cable A, and re-tighten the
knob.
The resulting connections should look as shown in Figure 7-8.

Figure 7-8 Cable A, Cable B, and Short Bar Connections
7.2.1.2.2 Setting Test Parameters

1. Turn on the tester by pressing the POWER button.
The tester enters the ready state five seconds after startup (the model name and version
display during startup).
2. Verify that the tester displays the test parameters specified in Table 7-14.
Table 7-14 Ground Resistance Test Parameters
Test Parameter Values

Canada: 30.0 A
Current
All other countries: 25.0 A
Test value 0.100 Ohms
Timer 5.0 sec
If it does not, perform the following steps to change the parameters as needed (the system will
save the settings even after system power is turned off). See Figure 7-9.
A. While in the ready state, press the or button until the output current display
begins flashing.
B. Press the or button to change the output current. The value changes in
0.1-A increments. To change the value by 1.0-A increments, press + or
button.
C. Press the button again to move to each of the other settings (Maximum Test
Value, Timer, and Frequency).
D. Use the or + buttons as needed to adjust the values.
E. Press .

Figure 7-9 Test Parameter Value Settings
3. While in the ready state, press the + buttons to display the Optional function
setting screen.
The Output Current Frequency is the first digit displayed, where the value is 0 for 50 Hz or 1
for 60 Hz. The Pass/Fail hold function is represented by the second digit.
4. Press the or button until the second digit begins flashing.

5. Press the button to change the value to 1 (Figure 7-10).
6. Press the + buttons to save this setting and return to the ready state. The unit will
display and hold the measured resistance value after the test.
Figure 7-10 Current Setting on the Tester
7.2.1.2.3 Performing Zero Adjustment

Ground measurements may be affected by a voltage drop in the A and B cables. To account for the
voltage drop, perform the zero adjustment procedure before taking ground measurements.
1. Confirm that the unit is in the ready state.
2. Short circuit cable A with cable B.
Figure 7-11 Cable A and Cable B Short-Circuited
3. Press the button.

The orange test indicator is displayed, the 0ADJ indicator begins flashing below the resistance
value, and the zero adjustment begins. During the zero adjustment, a preset current is output
through the shorted leads. When zero adjustment is complete (about three seconds), the unit
enters the ready state, and the 0ADJ lamp lights.
If the test cables are too resistive, the offset cannot be set. Use less-resistive cables and try to
set the offset again. The zero adjustment function is automatically disabled if the output current
value is changed or if data settings are changed.
Zero adjustment is possible within a range equivalent to a resistance between 0.000 Ohms and
0.100 Ohms on the resistor indicator. If the measured value falls outside this range, the
resistance value flashes, and the unit enters the ready state.
Figure 7-12 Tester During and After Zero Adjustment
7.2.1.2.4 Taking Ground Measurements

1. Turn off system power and main circuit breaker.
2. Connect cable A to the grounding pin on the electrical plug.
3. Connect cable B to the first measurement point listed in Table 7-15.
4. On the tester, press the green START button.
The orange indicator is displayed, the Test Current display value quickly increases from 0.0 to
the preset output current (25.0 A or 30.0 A), and the timer value decreases from 5.0 seconds
to 0.0 seconds.
If the test passes, the green Pass indicator is displayed. Record the displayed resistance value
in Table 7-15.
5. Press Stop.

6. Move cable B to the next measurement (Table 7-15), then repeat steps 4 and 5.
The voltage must not exceed 2.5 V (0.1 ohms).
Table 7-15 Ground Measurement Test Points
Measured
Component Measurement point
resistance
Tube endcap screws or HV cable nuts
Tube
See Figure 7-15
Skin guards
Collimator
See Figure 7-16
Scroll support rivets
Column
See Figure 7-17
Screw used for mounting strain relief of wired handswitch cable
Bin
See Figure 7-18
Tube latch on top cover
Tube latch
See Figure 7-19
7.2.2 Performing Leakage Current Testing

If ground testing is required for this system, verify that the ground testing results are < 0.3 Ohms
before conducting leakage testing.
Leakage testing must be performed if the AC power plug has been replaced or disturbed.
The leakage current must not exceed 300 uA.
Before you begin, verify these steps:
1. Complete ground testing, if required (see 7.2.1 Ground Resistance Testing on page 378).
2. Ensure that all system covers are installed.
3. Obtain a Dale 601/601E or Fluke ESA612 test meter.
Refer to 7.2.2.1 Leakage Current Testing using Dale 601/601E below or 7.2.2.2 Leakage Current
Testing using Fluke ESA612 on page 391.
7.2.2.1 Leakage Current Testing using Dale 601/601E

Perform leakage testing under the five specific conditions outlined in Table 7-16:
Table 7-16 Leakage Current Test Conditions
Test Meter
Condition Power X-ray On Section reference
Outlet
7.2.2.1.1 Condition 1: Power Off, Normal
1 Off Normal No
Outlet, X-ray Off
7.2.2.1.2 Condition 2: Power Off, Reversed
2 Off Reversed No
Outlet, X-ray Off
7.2.2.1.3 Condition 3: Power On, Normal
3 On Normal No
Outlet, X-ray Off
7.2.2.1.4 Condition 4: Power On, Reversed
4 On Reversed No
Outlet, X-ray Off
7.2.2.1.5 Condition 5: Power On, Normal
5 On Normal Yes
Outlet, X-ray On

7.2.2.1.1 Condition 1: Power Off, Normal Outlet, X-ray Off
Potential test equipment damage. Always pause in the OFF position when moving the OUTLET
switch from NORMAL to REVERSED or REVERSED to NORMAL. Failure to do so can result in the
internal test meter failure and tripping of facilities circuit breakers.
1. Turn off the system power, main circuit breaker ON.

On the test meter, set the Function switch to ENCLOSURE LEAKAGE, the L2 switch to
CLOSED, the Outlet switch to NORMAL and the M.A.P/Lift Gnd to OFF (Figure 7-13).
Figure 7-13 Dale 601 Meter

2. Insert the black coil cord with clamp into the CHASSIS connection located on the top of the
test meter (Figure 7-14).
Figure 7-14 Dale 601 Meter, Top View
3. Connect the Dale 601 test meter to a wall outlet.

4. Important! Connect the System AC power cord to the receptacle on the test meter.
5. Using the clamp, connect to all conductive surfaces listed in Table 7-19. Record the readings.
Readings should be close to 0.0. Address high readings by checking for damaged ground wire
or internal system wiring that could be causing current to flow to the tested component or
chassis. Leakage current must not exceed 300 uA.
7.2.2.1.2 Condition 2: Power Off, Reversed Outlet, X-ray Off

1. On the test meter, set the Outlet switch to Reversed.
2. Verify the system power is OFF, main circuit breaker ON.
3. Using the clamp, connect to all conductive surfaces.
4. Record the readings in Table 7-19.
7.2.2.1.3 Condition 3: Power On, Normal Outlet, X-ray Off

1. Turn on the system power.
2. On the test meter, set the Outlet switch to Normal.
7.2.2.1.4 Condition 4: Power On, Reversed Outlet, X-ray Off

1. On the test meter, set the Outlet switch to Reversed.
2. Verify that system power is on.

7.2.2.1.5 Condition 5: Power On, Normal Outlet, X-ray On
Wear a lead vest to protect yourself from radiation.
1. On the test meter, set the Outlet switch to Normal.

2. Verify that system power is on.
3. Make an exposure (see Table 7-17) while using the clamp to connect to all conductive
surfaces.
Table 7-17 Exposure Technique
Generator power kVp mAs

30 kW 125 100
7.2.2.1.6 Leakage Current Test Points and Results

Table 7-18 Leakage Current Test Points

Tube
See Figure 7-15
Skin guards
Collimator
See Figure 7-16
Column
See Figure 7-17
Bin
See Figure 7-18
Tube latch
See Figure 7-19
Table 7-19 Leakage Current Test Results, Dale 601/601E Meter
Condition 1: Condition 2: Condition 3: Condition 4: Condition 5:

Power off, Power off, Power on, Power on, Power on,
Conductive surface normal outlet, reversed outlet, normal outlet, reversed outlet, normal outlet,
X-ray off X-ray off X-ray off X-ray off X-ray on
Leakage current
Tube
Collimator
Column
Bin
Tube latch

7.2.2.2 Leakage Current Testing using Fluke ESA612
Personnel Requirements
Required Persons: 1
Timing: 30mins
PM frequency – 12 months
Preliminary Requirements
Tools and Test Equipment
· Standard Toolkit
· Fluke ESA612 or below equivalent specification
Specification:
Test Standard Selections - ANSI/AAMI ES-1, IEC62353, IEC60601-1, and AN/NZS 3551
Voltage
Ranges (Mains voltage) .... 90.0 V to 132.0 V ac rms 180.0 V to 264.0 V ac rms
Range (Point-to-point voltage)
5000 m ........................................ 0.0 V to ≤150 V ac rms
2000 m ......................................... 0.0 V to ≤300.0 V ac rms
Accuracy........................................(2 % of reading + 0.2 V)
Earth Resistance
Modes............................................ 2-Wire
Test Current ....................................>200 mA ac
Range .............................................. 0.000 Ù to 2.000 Ù
Accuracy............................................(2 % of reading + 0.015 Ù)
Equipment Current
Range .................................... 0.0 A to 20.0 A ac rms
Accuracy.................................(5 % of reading + (2 counts or 0.2 A, whichever is greater))
Leakage Current
Modes* ..................................AC+DC (True-rms)
AC only
DC only
* For tests that do not use MAP voltage, AC+DC, AC ONLY, and DC ONLY modes are
available for all leakages. MAP voltages are available only in True-rms (shown as
AC+DC)
Patient Load Selection ............... AAMI ES1-1993, IEC 60601
Crest factor ................................... ≤3
Ranges ..........................................0.0 µA to 199.9 µA
200 µA to 1999 µA
2.00 mA to 10.00 mA
Frequency response/Accuracy
DC to 1 kHz .................(1 % of reading + (1 ìA or 1 LSD, whichever is greater))
1 kHz to 100 kHz ........ (2 % of reading + (1 ìA or 1 LSD, whichever is greater))
1 kHz to 5 kHz (current > 1.6 mA) ......(4 % of reading + (1 μA or 1 LSD, whichever is greater))
100 kHz to 1 MHz ...........(5 % of reading + (1 A or 1 LSD, whichever is greater))
TEST DESCRIPTION
It is recommended to use Fluke ESA612 or equivalent meter to establish the test conditions. The
nominal AC Mains should be 120VAC or 220VAC, to match the standard system plug.

Note: Before you start the test, ensure the Equipment input power plug is connected to test socket on the
side of Fluke ESA612 meter and the system is in ON condition. If ground testing is required for this
system, verify that all ground testing results passed are ≤0.3 Ohms before conducting leakage
testing. Leakage testing must be performed if the AC power plug has been replaced or disturbed.
The leakage current must not exceed 300 uA.
The Equipment Leakage Current test must be conducted under both Normal Condition and Single
Fault Condition. The test procedures for both the conditions are described below.
TEST UNDER NORMAL CONDITIONS

To perform the Equipment Leakage Current Test under normal conditions, follow the steps listed
below:
Note: Refer to Table 7-20 for normal test conditions. Refer to Table 7-21 for the leakage current test
points of the system for 120VAC or 220VAC AC Mains (site-specific input source).
1. Push μA to access the leakage current main menu.
2. Push the F1 key for Direct Equipment.
3. Push the Polarity button to select NORMAL.

4. Now connect one end of the test lead between the V/Ω/A jack of the test meter and other end
to an exposed conductive surface of the system (Refer Table 7-21 for test points) ensuring that
the input power plug of the system remains in the test socket on the side on the Fluke ESA612.
5. The leakage current value will be displayed. Record the test results in Table 7-22.
6. Repeat the above steps for each test point in Table 7-21 and record the test results in Table 7-
22 for each test points.
7. Repeat above steps with test Conditions 2 and 3 as per Table 7-20. Record the test results in
Table 7-23 for Condition 2 and Table 7-24 for Condition 3.
Table 7-20 Normal Test Condition
Condition Power Test Meter Polarity X-Ray

1 OFF Normal No
2 ON Normal No
3 ON Normal Yes

Table 7-21 Test Points

Tube
See Figure 7-15
Skin guards
Collimator
See Figure 7-16
Column
See Figure 7-17
Bin
See Figure 7-18
Tube latch
See Figure 7-19
Table 7-22 Results of Leakage Current Test Under Normal Conditions, Condition 1
Test Point Units Expected Measured Result

Tube endcap screws or HV cable nuts μA ≤ 300
Collimator Skin guards μA ≤ 300
Scroll support rivets μA ≤ 300
Screw used for mounting strain relief of wired μA ≤ 300
Hand switch1 cable
Tube latch on top-cover μA ≤ 300

Hand switch1 cable

Hand switch1 cable

TEST UNDER SINGLE FAULT CONDITION (SFC)

In SFC, a single fault means of protection against electrical hazard is defective or faulty.
To create Single Fault Condition, see Table 7-25 below.
Table 7-25 SFC Test Conditions for 120VAC or 220VAC AC Mains
Condition Power Test Meter Polarity X-Ray

1 On Reversed No
2 On Earth Open No
To perform the Equipment Leakage Current Test under SFC, follow the steps listed below:
Note: Refer to Table 7-25 for the test conditions. Refer to Table 7-21 for test points.
1. Set up Test Condition 1 listed in Table 7-25.
2. Press the Polarity button to select Reversed.
3. Connect one end of the test lead between the V/Ω/A jack of the test meter and the other end
system remains in the test socket on the side on the Fluke ESA612.
4. The leakage value will be displayed. Record the test results in Table 7-26.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each leakage current test point shown in Table 7-21
6. Set up Test Condition 2 listed in Table 7-25.
7. Press the Earth button to select Open.
8. Connect one end of the test lead between the V/Ω/A jack of the test meter and the other end
system remains in the test socket on the side on the Fluke ESA612.
9. The leakage value will be displayed. Record the test results in Table 7-27.
10. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each leakage current test point shown in Table 7-21.
Table 7-26 Results of the leakage current test under SFC Condition 1

Hand switch1 cable

Table 7-27 Results of the leakage current test under SFC Condition 2

Hand switch1 cable
Note: If the measured value exceeds the expected value then refer to 7.2.4 AC Power Plug
Troubleshooting on page 397 for power plug troubleshooting procedure to fix the leakage current.
7.2.3 Test Point Locations
Figure 7-15 Tube Test Points

Figure 7-16 Collimator Test Points
Figure 7-17 Column Test Point

Figure 7-18 Detector Charging Bin Test Point
Figure 7-19 Tube Latch Test Point
7.2.4 AC Power Plug Troubleshooting



Electrical Power on page 28. Leave the AC Plug (E1) exposed.
7.2.4.2 Procedure
1. Perform LOTO on the system. Leave the AC Plug (E1) exposed.
2. Remove screws on the top of plug.
3. Check the cable core for open strands or broken wires, and are connected properly to plug.
4. Ensure all ground connections are properly tightened.
5. Inspect cord reel box and termination of ground cables.
Note: If the system uses a molded power cord type, then check ground connection, cord reel box and
termination of ground cables.
Section 7.3 Tube Radiation Leakage Test - Optional

7.3.1 Personnel Requirements
Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 90 including setup and clean up

• RTI Piranha model 657 with R100, R100B or Piranha Dose probe as provided by the vendor
(or equivalent)
• 3 mm lead to block the primary beam
• Metric tape measure
7.3.2.2 Consumables
• None
7.3.2.3 Safety
• Appropriate ionizing radiation PPE
7.3.3 Purpose
The purpose of this section is to provide guidance and definition for those that wish to perform a
radiation leakage test of the X-ray tube/collimator assembly (also known as "source assembly").
Per the technical data sheet, the Leakage Technique Factor is 150 kV, 0.4 mA.
This is used by Canon/Toshiba for their bench testing.
The technique for this mobile system is 125 kV, 250 mAs.
The details as to why and how are explicitly defined at the end of this section.
Page 398 Section 7.3 Tube Radiation Leakage Test - Optional

This content applies to the Optima XR240amx.
7.3.4 Common Errors:

• The most common error identified is incorrect meter settings. Many test meters have the ability
to perform what they define as “Dose Rate”, “Dose Accumulate” or some similar verbiage
measurements. However, these settings are not applicable to our system as described above.
Ensure your test meter is configured for a single measurement and zeroed as
applicable. Reset the meter for each subsequent exposure.
• Another common error is poor positioning of the probe. Care should be taken to ensure the
probe is positioned perpendicular to the focal spot at a 1 meter distance. See Figure 7-20.
• Ensure the collimator blades are closed and block the collimator port with at least 10 HVL
equivalence of lead (3 mm or more) to block the primary beam limiting scatter radiation noise
in the readings. See Figure 7-20.
• Ensure your units of measure conversions are correct.
7.3.5 X-Ray Tube Leakage Radiation Requirement:

Tube Leakage Radiation < 0.88 mGy/hr at 1m from focal spot (125 kV, 250 mAs)
GE Rejection limit < 0.80 mGy/hr at 1m from focal spot (125kV, 250mAs)
This rating is applicable at the Long-Term Maximum Input Power rating. Multiply the measured
leakage of each 125 kV, 250 mAs exposure (in mGy) by 6.9 to determine the leakage radiation of
each exposure at this power level.
Repeat measurements as needed, one exposure at different locations, each at 1 meter from the
focal spot. See Figure 7-20 and Figure 7-21. It is also recommended that 520 seconds between
exposures is observed for tube thermal considerations. These readings are not cumulative.
The integration value (IV/hr) is determined with the following formula;
(3600 sec/hour) x Continuous mA / desired mAs = Integration Value (IV)/hr

(3600 sec/hour) x 0.48 mA / 250 mAs = 6.912 / hr
Calculate the Leakage reading by the following formula;
Integrated Leakage Reading = Measured dose x IV/hr

Integrated Leakage Reading = Measured dose x 6.9

7HVW
,RQL]DWLRQ
0H
&KDPEHU
HUW
EK d,K
PPOHDG
&ROOLPDWRU VKHLOGLQJ
&ROOLPDWRU
)RFDO6SRW
%ODGHV 7XEH3RUW
&ORVHG
Figure 7-20 Test Tool Setup
Figure 7-20 illustrates the positioning of the test tool (ionization chamber) in 2 dimensions only.
Ensure the ionization chamber is perpendicular to the source in each dimension for accurate
readings. The testing parameters per 21CFR 1020.30 define that this test should be performed in
“1 meter in any direction from the source” (3 dimensionally). Also stated is the following;
“Compliance shall be determined by measurements averaged over an area of 100 square cm with
no linear dimension greater than 20 cm.” This statement defines the maximum size of the Ionization
Chamber that should be used.
Figure 7-21 illustrates the approximate position of the Canon/Toshiba Rotanode™ E7894X X-ray
Tube assembly utilized with these defined products.
Note: When making these measurements, it is common to see the highest readings relative to the anode
side of the tube.
Page 400 Section 7.3 Tube Radiation Leakage Test - Optional

ŽůůŝŵĂƚŽƌ
7XEH
3RUW EK
&HQWUDO%HDP5HIHUHQFH
)ODQJH
PP

PP
PP

d,K
Figure 7-21 Model E7894X Focal Spot Reference (Drawings not to scale)
See OEM data sheet for details
Background:
The Optima XR240amx product is a battery operated system and not capacitive discharge or field
emission systems. Therefore, per regulatory requirements (21CFR 1020.30 being the most
stringent), we fall under the “For all other diagnostic source assemblies” category.
Per 21CFR, the leakage radiation from the diagnostic source assembly shall not exceed 0.88 mGy
air kerma in 1 hour. In our system, we are not capable of performing continuous exposures for this
time frame. Therefore, an integrated leakage reading would be desired. However, the system
design is such that independent mA and time control is not possible. It is a two point system
interface design. Additionally, most exposures are sub-second in length approaching the test
meters capabilities.
The maximum rated tube potential is 125 kVp

The maximum continuous tube current is defined by the “continuous anode input power” found in
the tube technical data sheet. Per Canon/Toshiba, for the E7894X tube, the average anode power
is 60 watts. Knowing the average anode power is 60 W and the max kVp is 125, we then get;
60 W / 125 kVp = 0.48 mA continuous
For testing purposes, a radiographic exposure is used and the leakage measured for that exposure.
The technique used for measurement is a rad exposure of 125 kVp, 250 mAs.
The actual values for the 30 kW systems are 125 kVp at ~77.01 mA and ~ 3.246 seconds.
The actual values for the 15 kW systems are 125 kVp at ~64.39 mA and ~3.883 seconds.
Using these actual values the duty cycle (IV/hr) becomes 6.9 exposures per hour.
The exact mA and time used to get 250 mAs on a 30 kW versus the 15 kW systems may be
different, but the mAs ratio relative to continuous 0.48 mA at 125 kVp calculate to be the same.

Section 7.4 Access to FDA 2579 Forms

7.4.1 Requesting Access
To gain access to the Service Forms Repository, you will need to request DSF access from
MyResources.
https://myresources.health.ge.com/idm/user/uihome.controller
See Figure 7-22. When requesting access:
• Choose PM Search to see submitted PM forms
• Choose Assemblers Search to see submitted FDA2579 forms
• Do not select Admin unless there is a very specific need or your request may be rejected.
Figure 7-22 MyResources Request Page
7.4.2 Accessing FDA 2579 Forms

The process:
• FE closes the install SR in CRM.
• This initiates MFG QA to upload HHS data to the FDA repository
• FDA approves these and approved forms are placed in the repository for field team access.
(This could take a couple of weeks, depending on the FDA's response.)
Service Forms Repository: http://pmc.health.ge.com/PMCheckList/home.do#
The FDA 2579 forms are found on the second tab, Submitted System Calibration Forms, as
shown below in Figure 7-23.
Page 402 Section 7.4 Access to FDA 2579 Forms

Figure 7-23 Service Forms Repository

Chapter 8 Theory
Section 8.1 Detector Bin Theory

The Optima XR240amx charging bin will support two digital detectors, one 10 × 12 inch and one
14 × 17 inch. The system can charge one detector or both detectors simultaneously. The charge
status of each detector is displayed on the LED State of Charge (SOC) display on the bin.
8.1.1 Overview

Item Description
1 Storage compartment for tether, etc.
2 Cover, detector wireless access point
3 Detector battery charge indicators
4 Detector shock absorbers (four)
5 Floating docking connectors (two)
6 10 × 12 inch detector storage
7 14 × 17 inch detector storage
8 Grid storage, removable divider panels (two)
Figure 8-1 Optima XR240 Detector Bin Features
The detector and bin are indexed with a groove on the right-hand side (charge indicator side) which
allows the detector to fit and charge in only one direction. If detectors are forced into the bin slots
in the wrong direction, damage may occur. The 14 × 17 detector takes approximately 2.5 hours to
recharge from 0% to 100%, the 10 × 12 detector takes approximately 2.25 hours to recharge from
Page 404 Section 8.1 Detector Bin Theory

0% to 100%. Both the charge rate and capacity of the detector batteries are different; therefore, it
is important to ensure the detectors are inserted into the proper charging slot and that the charging
cables are properly connected to the bin charging board.
8.1.2 Wireless Access Point

The wireless Access Point is physically located in the bin. For more information on Access Point
theory, refer to Section 8.3 Wireless Access Point (AP) connectivity theory on page 422; for
information on troubleshooting, refer to Section 10.6 Wireless Access Point (AP) Diagnostics
(Gen 1 only) on page 611; for information on replacement, refer to 11.5.14 Detector Access Point
(AP) on page 744.
8.1.3 Docking Connectors and Shock Absorbers

Each detector slot contains a docking connector which is spring loaded and floating (see
Figure 8-2). Each connector contains two magnets. These magnets aid in maintaining connection
between the detector and the docking connector. The design of the connector allows for positive
engagement and supplies both charge and communications. The bin charging board senses the
presence of the detector via pin 1 of the docking connector (ground signal loop). The resistor on the
bin charging board provides 5VDC to pin 1 referenced to ground without a detector present. When
the detector is inserted, pin 1 is grounded and the bin charge board senses that transition to initiate
charging. Pin 16 on the left-hand side of the docking connector must also maintain positive
connection to receive a charge. To ensure positive engagement and proper connection, make sure
that the floating connector is flush on each side. If the left side is lower than the right side, a detector
communication error may occur. If a communication error occurs, all 4 LEDs on the associated bin
charging indicator will flash in unison and the detector will not charge.
Figure 8-2 Floating docking connector
There are two shock absorbers in each bin slot, for a total of four. The shock absorbers aid in
alignment to the floating docking connector and dampen the insertion into the bin to prevent
accidental damage (see Figure 8-3).
Chapter 8 Theory Page 405

Figure 8-3 Shock absorber
8.1.4 Battery Indicators

The battery status of each detector is displayed on the battery charging indicator membrane on the
right-hand side of the bin (see Figure 8-4). The membrane is connected to the bin charging board
via a ribbon cable. The color and quantity of the 4 LEDs indicates the state of charge. The battery
indicator(s) will flash when the detector is charging and will only appear illuminated with a detector
properly inserted into the corresponding slot.

Indicator Description
Solid 4 Green: Fully charged, 100%
Blinking 4 Green: Charging, >75% to <100%
Blinking 1 Green: Charging, >10% to ≤25%, Minimum charge for exposures
Blinking 1 Orange: Charging, ≤10%, Below charge for exposures
Error Codes
(A detector with battery must be properly inserted in slot.)
Blinking 4 Green simultaneously: Communication error or 15VDC error
Figure 8-4 Detector bin charging status indicators
8.1.5 Detector Parking

The system does not require that either detector be parked or placed in the bin for drive
functionality. The system will not be speed limited if one or both detectors are removed from the bin.
If a detector is tethered, the speed will be limited to half capacity. Although the detectors do not need
to be inserted into the bin for driving, the park switch on the caterpillar board is shorted to ignore
the no-park signal. This is achieved by the detector park switch jumper cable attached at pin J10
on the Caterpillar board (see Figure 8-5).

Figure 8-5 Detector park switch jumper cable
8.1.6 Detector Sleep Setting

The Digital Detector can be set to turn OFF automatically at a designated time to save the battery
power of the primary or active Digital Detector. If the Digital Detector sleep time is set to 15 minutes,
the Digital Detector will automatically go into the sleep mode after 15 minutes without taking an
exposure. Each exposure sequence will reset the sleep timer. Once the Digital Detector is in sleep
mode you must press the Power button of the Digital Detector for one second to exit the sleep
mode. The Digital Detector will wake up and be ready for an exposure in about 45 seconds.
Any secondary or non-active detectors will automatically turn off after 15 minutes to save battery
power.
The Digital Detector Sleep Time can be set from 15 to 45 minutes, or NEVER (does not go to sleep).
8.1.7 Bin Charging Board (BCB)

The bin charging board is located behind the right-hand side (charge indicator side) cover, directly
underneath the locust drive board (see Figure 8-6). The bin charging board receives 24VDC input
from the LVLE2 power supply via pin J1 and provides 15VDC output to each of the detector docking
connectors, 14 × 17 (J2) and 10 × 12 (J3). The battery charging indicator is connected to pin J7 via
a ribbon cable, and pins J4 and J5 provide Ethernet connection to the PC. Refer to Figure 8-7 for
block wiring diagram.

Figure 8-6 Bin charging board location
Figure 8-7 BCB block wiring diagram
The bin charging board also contains 4 LED indicators which display status of charge (1 LED for
each docking connector), 5VDC status, and heart-beat (Figure 8-8). The LED indicators can be
used to aid in troubleshooting. Refer to Section 10.4 Detector Bin Troubleshooting on page 559.


Item LED Color Description Meaning

1 DS1 Blue Heart-beat 1 blink per second: charging board
operating normally
10 blinks per second: charging board
errors
2 DS2 Yellow 15VDC output turn on 14 × 17 detector charging
3 DS3 Green 5VDC OK 5VDC used for board internal logic okay
4 DS4 Yellow 15VDC output turn on 10 × 12 detector charging
Figure 8-8 Bin charging board LED locations
The voltage path and statuses can also be measured from several locations on the BCB
(Figure 8-9). The test point locations (labeled as TPX) can also be used to aid in troubleshooting.
Refer to Section 10.4 Detector Bin Troubleshooting on page 559.
Note: Voltages are measured with reference to the grounded mounting corners.


Item TP Location Description

1 TP1 24VDC
2 TP2 5VDC
3 TP3 3.3VDC
4 TP4 GND
5 TP5 GND
6 TP6 Heartbeat signal
7 TP7 Charging control signal (10×12 detector)1
8 TP8 Charging control signal (14×17 detector)1
9 TP9 Wake up signal (14×17 detector)
10 TP10 Wake up signal (10×12 detector)
11 TP11 Park status output
12 TP12 Park status input signal (14×17 detector)
13 TP13 Park status input signal (10×12 detector)
14 TP14 AGND
15 TP15 GND
16 TP16 15VDC
17 TP17 15VDC for 14×17 detector charging
18 TP18 15VDC for 10×12 detector charging
19 - GND
1.1.Refer 8.1.8 Detector Charging Characteristics on page 411 for information
on the charge control signal.
Figure 8-9 Bin charging board test point descriptions
8.1.8 Detector Charging Characteristics

When inserted into the bin properly, the detectors can be charged in all modes of operation, ON,
sleep/idle, and Off. The bin charging board uses a pulse width modulation algorithm to charge the

detector batteries when inserted properly into the charging bin due to the difference in battery size
and capacity between the two detector batteries. This can be measured with an oscilloscope on the
bin charging board from TP7-GND and TP8-GND. For troubleshooting detector charge control
issues, check that voltage is present with a voltmeter before checking presence of the pulse width
modulation with an oscilloscope.
8.1.9 Detector Power Supply

The detector power supply is located underneath the top cover, on a bracket on top of the system
PC (Figure 8-10). The battery stack provides power directly to the detector power supply. When the
detector is connected to the system by tether, the detector power supply supplies 14 to 16VDC
through pins 1 and 7, 2 and 8. There is no voltage present at the tether when the detector is not
connected.
The detector power supply does not charge the detector batteries. It only supplies the 14 to 16VDC
power for detector function. The detector must be inserted into the bin to charge the batteries. An
alternative is to use the desktop charger.
Although the detector battery is not charged while tethered, the battery must remain inserted in the
detector to maintain structural integrity when placed underneath a patient and to prevent image
quality issues. If the battery is removed, an inhibit message will appear.
Figure 8-10 Detector power supply
Section 8.2 Detector Theory

The Optima XR240amx is a mobile X-ray system using two, universal, digital, cassette-sized
detectors (10"x12" and 14"x17") connected wirelessly or tethered to the system.
Page 412 Section 8.2 Detector Theory

Figure 8-11 Optima XR240amx Detector LCD Status Bar
8.2.1 Detector Environmental Monitoring

DEM includes the detector environment control and monitoring mechanisms implemented into the
detector. These mechanisms are used to monitor and manage the detector patient contact surface
temperature, monitor detector shock events, and monitor detector battery during non-tethered
mode throughout routine detector use.
The goal of the Detector Environmental Management feature is the following:
• Provide a means to monitor and manage detector surface temperature and report warning/
critical messages to the user
• Provide a means to monitor and manage detector shock events, report serious/critical
messages to the user, and report detector shock event history
• Provide a means to monitor and manage detector battery strength and report warning
messages to the user
8.2.1.1 Overview
For the Dragonfly release, two different sizes of PKI detectors will be supported - 14"x17" and
10"x12". Overall functionality for these two detectors will be the same.
The PKI detectors will perform environmental monitoring tasks internally and communicate with the
Dragonfly system.
The detector does provide the user a visual indicator of the remaining detector battery capacity as
well as if a thermal limit has been exceeded or a shock event has occurred. These indicators should
be used as a means for visual observation of the detector monitoring components. The user should
review the system error logs for additional information as it relates to detector battery capacity,
detector surface temperature, and detector shock events.

8.2.1.2 Detector Surface Temperature Monitoring

The purpose of the detector surface temperature monitoring functionality is to ensure the detector
is thermally safe for contact with the patient per IEC regulatory standards. The detector has internal
temperature sensors positioned to provide maximum patient-contact surface temperature. The
detector surface temperature will be monitored on the active (primary) detector during clinical use;
this is not applicable to the detector calibration process.
8.2.1.3 Detector Surface Temperature Monitoring - Implementation

Within the detector design, the detector will be responsible for the temperature sensor health test,
monitoring frequency, sensor value averaging, and the regression equation applied to the surface
temperature values.
The detector will also have an internal shutdown temperature timer in the event communication is
lost with the system and a temperature threshold has been exceeded. This timer will switch the
detector into a powered off state within a specific time period if communication to the system is lost
and a temperature threshold has been exceeded. Additionally, if a maximum temperature threshold
has been exceeded during use, the system will shut the detector off once the image acquisition has
been completed - or immediately if no acquisition is in process.
8.2.1.4 Detector Surface Temperature Monitoring - Sensing and Reporting

Several configurable values will be provided by the system to the detector during the detector boot
process when detector communication is first established with a system. These parameters will
establish the threshold values for the detector surface temperature and the detector shutdown time.
These parameters include: Talert, Twarning, and Tshutdown_time (Table 8-1).
Table 8-1 Detector Surface Temperature System Configurable Values
Description Parameter Default Value

Default Threshold Value for Alert Talert 39°C
Default Threshold Value for Twarning 41°C
Detector Shutdown
Temperature shutdown timeout Tshutdown_time 120 sec
See Figure 8-12. The Detector Surface Temperature Flowchart depicts the detector surface
temperature data handling between the detector and the system. The detector has five internal
temperature sensors. These sensor values are used in a regression equation by the PKI detector
to solve for the surface temperature. This surface temperature is subsequently read by the system
at a frequency of 2 seconds. If the received value exceeds the threshold values (Talert or Twarning),
the system logs the event and the event will remain active until the temperature drops back below
the threshold value. The detector software will then communicate the specific event to the user
through the IUI handling. These events will be logged within the detector specific temperature log
file on the system as well as the system error log.
Detector surface temperature will also be requested by the detector at the time of acquisition prep
within an exam. This value, in degrees of Celsius, will be reported within the image DICOM header.
If communication between the system and the detector is lost, the detector will report temperature
alerts or warnings upon reestablishing communication if the detector surface temperature exceeds
a threshold value. If communication cannot be re-established to the system, the detector will power
off after Tshutdown_time. Primary detectors that have lost communication to the system will also inhibit
a scan.

Figure 8-12 Detector Surface Temperature Flowchart
• If the detector surface temperature sensor value output is below Talert, no action is taken by
the detector or the system.
• If the detector surface temperature sensor value output is above Talert, but below Twarning, the
detector will report a temperature alert event to the system.
- This event will be logged on the system error log and detector-specific temperature log,
and the system operator will be alerted through a user notification that the detector
surface temperature is high and to use caution during use.
• If the detector surface temperature sensor value output is at or greater than Twarning, the
detector should report a temperature warning event to the system.
- This event will be logged on the system error log and detector-specific temperature log,
the system operator will receive a user notification stating the detector surface
temperature is at a specified safety limit, and the detector will be shut down.
- The act of shutting down the detector will cause it to lose communication with the system,
thereby causing a scan-inhibit by the loss of communication.
- If an acquisition is in progress, the system should confirm the acquisition is complete,
confirm the image has been received by the system, and send a detector shutdown
command which will inhibit any further acquisitions.
- Once the detector has received the shutdown command, the system should clear the
detector-temperature error message for the user.
- If the detector has lost communication with the system and its temperature exceeds
Twarning, the detector will wait a configurable time period, Tshutdown_time, before turning off.
8.2.1.5 Detector Surface Temperature - Event Logging

Detector Surface Temperature events will be stored within a system error log and the detector-
specific error log. Reported detector surface temperature data will be stored within a detector-
specific log file. Log data include detector serial number, time stamp (date, time), and temperature.

8.2.1.6 Detector Surface Temperature - User Reporting

User reporting is limited to the error messages displayed on the user interface as described in the
Table 8-2 below.
Table 8-2
Error/ Major
Recovery
Inhibit Symbolic Name Error Text Function Conditions Description
Class
Code Impacted
1221093 EM_DET_DC_COMM Digital Cassette Detector Digital Cassette
_FAILURE communication lost. Detector
(Detector not
Confirm communication communication lost.
XRImDet Warning communicating
with detector. Call service Confirm
with system)
if problem persists. communication with
detector.
1221047 EM_DET_DC_DEM_ Digital Cassette detector Digital Cassette
SURFACE_TEMP_FA surface temperature has detector surface
(Detector
TAL reached the upper limit. temperature has
XRImDet Warning Temperature) >
Exposures are inhibited. reached the upper
Twarning
limit. Exposures are
inhibited.
267 DETECTOR_SURFA Detector surface Digital Cassette
CE_TEMPERATURE temperature has reached detector surface
(Detector
_OUT_OF_RANGE the upper limit. Inhibit_Condit temperature has
N/A Temperature) >
ions_RAD reached the upper
Twarning
limit. Exposures are
inhibited.
1221048 EM_DET_DC_DEM_ Digital Cassette detector Digital Cassette
SURFACE_TEMP_W surface is warm. Please Talert < (Detector detector surface
ARNING exercise caution in XRImDet Warning Temperature) < temperature
handling the detector. Twarning approaching
specification limit.
8.2.2 Detector Shock Monitoring

During routine detector use, the detector may be subject to a drop or an impact to a surface which
may cause internal damage. To help diagnose the extent of the damage, the detector will monitor
shock events which occur during a powered-on and a powered-off state.
8.2.2.1 Detector Shock Monitoring - Implementation

The detector design will include 6 shock sensors (3 to measure critical level, 3 to measure warning,
or serious, level). Sensors are oriented such that one critical and one warning sensor measure
shock in each of the 3-planes of motion (-x, -y, and -z).
In order to provide shock event information to the user and engineering, the detector will always
record the last 10 critical or warning shock events for each direction. The recorded event for each
measurement will include a status of each shock sensor as well as a timestamp of the recorded
event from the detector clock. The shock record log within the detector utilizes a circular buffer
format.

Figure 8-13 Detector Shock Monitoring Flowchart
The detector will send the system a message once a shock event is detected and return a
notification to the user. These warning messages are defined as following:
• Level 3 (critical): Indicating a critical shock event has been detected. The system will inhibit the
use of the detector until successful QAP has been performed. The event is logged into the
detector event log, a warning message is displayed, and acquisition is inhibited.
- After successful competition of a QAP, the system will clear the critical event from the
detector event buffer and allow the detector to be used again.
• Level 5 (warning): Indicating a serious event has been detected. The event is logged into the
detector event log and a warning message is displayed.
- After the system receives and locally logs a serious shock event, the system will clear the
event from the detector event buffer.
8.2.2.2 Detector Shock Monitoring - User Reporting

The system will provide a detector health page interface to report shock events. This summary will
be located within Utilities->Preference->Health Page. The Health Page will use data requested from
the detector SD card as its stored data source and will summarize accumulated events. To reduce
multiple events, an accumulation of events within a defined time period are considered to be one
event.
Each trigger (x, y, or z-axis and serious/critical) will be grouped into a singular event based on the
detector timestamp. (e.g. Corner Event + Face Event = 1 Shock Count (consolidated event occurs
within specific time)
8.2.2.3 Detector Shock Monitoring - Error Handling

• During selection of the Health Page, if the SD card data request cannot be received, the Health
Page will not display any shock information.
• During selection of the Health Page, if the SD card data cannot be parsed into defined events,
an error will be reported to user and the Health Page will not display information.
The error messages for shock sensing are listed in Table 8-3 below.

Table 8-3 Detector Shock Monitoring Error Messaging

Error/ Major
Recovery
Inhibit Symbolic Name Error Text Function Conditions Description
Class
Code Impacted
1221093 EM_DET_DC_COMM_ Digital Cassette Detector Digital Cassette
FAILURE communication lost. Detector
(Detector not
Confirm communication with communication lost.
XRImDet Warning communicating
detector. Call service if Confirm
with system)
problem persists. communication with
detector.
1221051 EM_DET_DC_DEM_S Critical impact to detector Critical impact to
HOCK_EVENT_SERI occurred. To confirm image Detector detector occurred.
XRImDet Warning
OUS quality, perform QAP prior Critical Shock
to next exposure.
265 CRITICAL_DETECTO Critical impact to detector Inhibit_Condi Detector Critical impact to
R_SHOCK occurred. N/A
tions_RAD Critical Shock detector occurred.
1221052 EM_DET_DC_DEM_S Serious impact to detector Serious impact to
Detector
HOCK_EVENT_MAJO occurred. XRImDet Warning detector occurred.
Serious Shock
R
8.2.3 Detector Battery Monitoring
8.2.3.1 Detector Battery Monitoring - Implementation

Detector battery monitoring specifically applies to a primary, non-tethered detector in a powered-on
state out of the bin during clinical use.
- Battery monitoring includes the following information.
- Battery capacity (charge level); primary detector in use.
- Battery status: not present in detector while tethered causes acquisition inhibits
- Battery capacity; detectors in use and in bin.
- Battery status: charging, not able to charge (faulty battery), not present in detector.
Two unique log files store battery-monitoring information. The system error log file contains user
notifications. And a battery log (battery serial-number specific) contains history of battery charge
level from the polled values (every 60 seconds).

Figure 8-14 Detector Battery Monitoring Flowchart
8.2.3.2 Detector Battery Monitoring - Sensing and Reporting

Detector battery-level information will be reported at request of the system in the form of battery
level remaining, in percent of full charge.
The following battery-level threshold values are used:
- ≤ 6%; the detector will be commanded to shut down by the system for battery longevity
and potential that remaining battery capacity would not complete another exam. If in an
acquisition and the battery drops into this range, the acquisition is to be completed, the
image received, and the shutdown command sent to the detector. No additional user
message is supplied for this range as the < 10% inhibit message is raised in this range.
- ≤ 10%; acquisition inhibit; inhibit condition would need to be cleared by tethering detector
to continue use
- ≤ 25%; user alert message; the user can continue use (no user interaction required to
clear message)
8.2.3.3 Detector Battery Monitoring - Event Logging

If the detector is tethered, powered on, and the battery is removed from the detector, a warning
message (error code 1221231) is sent to the system to indicate the battery is removed. The system
inhibits exposure (inhibit code 285) and alerts the user the battery is removed or damaged. The
rationale for the inhibited acquisition is for image quality concerns as well as the detector's weight-
bearing capability without a battery present.
8.2.3.4 Detector Battery Monitoring - Error Handling

The error messages for battery monitoring are shown Table 8-4 below.

Table 8-4 Detector Battery Monitoring Error Messaging

Major
Error/ Recovery
Symbolic Name Error Text Function Conditions Description
Inhibit Code Class
Impacted
1221093 EM_DET_DC_CO Digital Cassette Detector Digital Cassette
MM_FAILURE communication lost. Confirm (Detector not Detector communication
communication with detector. XRImDet Warning communicating lost. Confirm
Call service if problem with system) communication with
persists. detector.
1201057 EM_DET_BATTE Detector battery charge is Detector battery charge
RY_LOW low. Please charge the Battery charge is low.
XRImDet Warning
detector battery as soon as level < 25%
possible.
1201058 EM_DET_BATTE Detector battery capacity is Detector battery
Battery charge
RY_CRITICAL not sufficient to support XRImDet Warning capacity is not sufficient
level < 10%
exposure. to support exposure.
256 DETECTOR_BAT Detector battery charge is not Inhibit_Con Detector battery
Battery charge
TERY_LOW sufficient to support ditions_RA N/A capacity is not sufficient
level < 10%
exposure. D to support exposure.
1221230 EM_DETECTOR_ Detector battery is not able to Digital detector battery
BATTERY_NOT_ charge. Replace battery or Detector sending not charging because of
CHARGING tether to continue imaging. XRImDet Warning Battery Fault battery fault - notify
Call service if problem signal user.
persists.
1221231 EM_DETECTOR_ Tethered detector does not Digital detector does not
NO_BATTERY_I detect battery inserted. detect a battery present;
NH Check battery is inserted Detector sending inhibit acquisition for
properly. Call service if No Battery signal image-processing and
XRImDet Warning
problem persists. (while tethered in potential for detector
use) damage without battery
present providing
mechanical strength.
285 DETECTOR_NO_ Tethered detector does not Digital detector does not
BATTERY detect battery. Check battery detect a battery present;
insertion. inhibit acquisition for IQ
Detector sending
Inhibit_ concerns and potential
No Battery signal
Conditions_ N/A for detector damage
(while tethered in
RAD without the battery
use)
present and providing
mechanical strength/
rigidity for the detector.
8.2.4 Tether, Bin, and Wireless Connection priority

The Universal Cassette size detectors support wired and wireless connectivity.
Wired connections can be made with a tether, or via the charging bin.
Wireless connection is made using 802.11n.
Priority of the connection is determined based on link speed:
1. Tether or Bin wired connection
2. Wireless connection
For example, while the detector is tethered (during Registration, or for a tethered exam), the
detector's wireless radio is disabled by default. Upon disconnecting the tether, the detector will

enable its wireless radio and automatically connect to the system Access Point (assuming
Registration and Pairing have been previously completed, and the SSID/PSK stored in the detector
match the system).
The same behavior will occur with the bin, as the docking connection (wired Ethernet) has priority.
Once that connection is terminated (by removing the detector from the bin), the wireless connection
will be established between the detector and the system AP.
8.2.5 Detector Registration

The goal for Detector Registration in Optima XR240amx is to maintain the workflow established in
previous X-ray mobile systems and other products using the URP detector. For registration, the
workflow remains largely unchanged, with minor adjustments made to accommodate additional
detector information in the user interface for Optima XR240amx systems.
The Detector Registration Window is used by the Field Engineer or Customer to perform the Add,
Remove, Edit, and Identify actions.
8.2.5.1 Registration “IDENTIFY”

When Identify is chosen from the Detector Registration workflow, the intent is for the Primary
detector to begin flashing an indicator for 15 seconds. The system will indicate to the user if the
Primary detector is not connected (either by tether or wirelessly).
8.2.5.2 Detector Sleep Setting

Detector Sleep time management allows the user to setup the Primary detector sleep timeout while
the detector is connected wirelessly. The time refers to time between X-ray exposures, or from the
detector's perspective, time since last in "Imaging" mode.
The system has a default setting of 30 minutes. The setting is updated upon detector boot and
connection to the system as the Primary wireless detector or Active tethered detector.
If the detector is the Active one on the system, IDC software manages the countdown (from boot,
or last exposure) and will command this Active detector off if the timer expires.
If the detector has no communication with the system, it will power down after 15 minutes. This is
managed internal to the detector. The IDC software ensures the internal detector timer is always
set to 15 minutes.
8.2.5.3 Detector Pairing

Pairing is the process of configuring the detector for wireless connection with a system. For Optima
XR240amx, this is the action of writing the SSID and Product Shared Key (PSK) to the detector
memory.
Only when Registered, set as Primary, and Paired can the detector be used for wireless digital
cassette exams. Pairing can occur at any time, but unless the detector is Registered with the
system, and designated as Primary, it will not be usable wirelessly.
Connecting the Tether or placing the detector into the charging bin will allow wired communication
between the detector and system.
Pairing will occur for ANY detector connected to the tether or bin of the system. This is done to
ensure pairing takes place quickly and reliably for the customer. Pairing will also occur every time,
regardless of if the detector already has the correct SSID, as a method to be sure even in the case
or PSK expiration or regeneration, the proper credentials are written to the detector.

Table 8-5
Error Recovery Recommended Action Customer Text - Condition
Code Class English
1221233 Advisory Successful pairing of the Successful pairing of Successful pairing by bin or
detector the detector. tether
1221234 Warning Please remove detector from Pairing of the Pairing failed with bin or
bin/tether and retry or call detector failed. tether
service if problem persists.
1221235 Warning Successful pairing of detector Successful pairing of Successful pairing of
via tether. detector via tether. detector via tether.
1221237 Warning Please remove tether from Pairing of the Pairing failed with tether
detector and retry. Call service detector failed via
if problem persists. tether.
1221239 Warning Successful pairing of detector Successful pairing of Successful pairing via large
in large bin slot. detector in large bin bin slot
slot.
1221240 Warning Successful pairing of detector Successful pairing of Successful pairing via small
in small bin slot. detector in small bin bin slot
slot.
1221241 Warning Please remove detector from Pairing of detector Pairing failed via large bin
large bin slot and retry. Call failed in large bin slot. slot
1221242 Warning Please remove detector from Pairing of detector Pairing failed via small bin
small bin slot and retry. Call failed in small bin slot. slot
Section 8.3 Wireless Access Point (AP) connectivity theory

8.3.1 Overview
The Optima XR240amx Mobile X-ray System combines tethered and IEEE 802.11n wireless-
capable digital detectors. The detectors communicate with the host system via an Access Point
(AP) connected to the PC through an Ethernet connection. Additionally, the host system can
connect to and interact with the facility network using an on-board wireless card to download and
upload HIS/PACS data to the facility system.
Page 422 Section 8.3 Wireless Access Point (AP) connectivity theory
Figure 8-15 Overview of how the Ethernet and 802.11n architectures interface with the
digital detectors
The Aruba AP 215 establishes 802.11n wireless communication on the 5GHz frequency band
between the system and digital detector. The AP will be used in three different models with specific
firmware based on geographical location: US, Japan, and Rest of World (RoW). The US and Japan
models have a fixed country code while the RoW model has a selectable country code. This
configuration sets the regulatory domain for the radio frequencies the AP uses.
The system is required to support multiple 802.11 based digital detectors. The system architecture
uses an AP with integrated antennas to allow 5GHz frequency band 802.11n communication with
the detectors. The AP is required to boot with the system-configured settings and create a wireless
local network. Detectors that are properly configured and registered with the network will be able to
connect to the WLAN in order take and transfer X-ray exposures to the system.
8.3.2 Configuration
GE default settings are written to the AP when running initial configuration. The default username
and password pre-shared key (PSK) will remain unchanged. The Access Point does not need to be
configured at any point unless the following scenarios occur:
• Installation: Commit the country of installation to establish detector wireless communication to
the AP.
• AP FRU Replacement: Commit the country of installation to establish detector wireless
communication to the AP. All previously registered detectors must be re-paired for PSK to be
recognized. Refer to 11.5.14 Detector Access Point (AP) on page 744 for the AP FRU
Replacement procedure. Refer to 10.5.11 Detector Registration and Management on
page 591 for Detector Registration procedure.

If the AP configuration is not cleared prior to the following scenarios, the system will have no method
of PSK recovery, thus requiring a physical reset of the AP.
• System PC FRU Replacement when engineering terminal access is allowed: Clear the AP
configuration prior to replacement by running the following commands:
Gen 1 only:
Type: sudo ./interfaceToAccessPoint factoryReset ENTER
OR
Login as root:
Type: su root ENTER
Type: [current password] ENTER
Type: ./interfaceToAccessPoint factoryReset ENTER
Gen 2 only:
Type: su root ENTER
Refer to 11.5.12 System PC on page 738 for the PC FRU replacement procedure.
• System PC FRU Replacement when engineering terminal access is NOT allowed: Clear the
AP configuration prior to replacement by executing a physical reset of the AP. Refer to
11.5.12 System PC on page 738 for the PC FRU replacement procedure.
• System Software Load from Cold (LFC): Clear the AP configuration prior to replacement by
running the following commands:
Gen 1 only:
Type: sudo ./interfaceToAccessPoint factoryReset ENTER
OR
Login as root:
Type: su root ENTER
Type: ./interfaceToAccessPoint factoryReset ENTER
Gen 2 only:
Type: su root ENTER
Note: If the software is corrupt or non-functional, a physical reset must be performed prior to
completing LFC. Refer to Section 3.2 Performing Load From Cold (LFC) on page 62.
8.3.3 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)

The AP connects to the host PC via an Ethernet port. Connectivity with the AP is established as
soon as the AP gets an IP through the eth2 port of the system. Connectivity between detector and
system is established once the detector IP address is assigned by the DHCP server and
authentication passes. The system will have the DHCP server configured for eth2 (AP) with a single
address: This will help with initial system configuration, since by default the AP is configured as a
DHCP client. The DHCP pool on the AP is configured to use a different subnet. This frees the
system from client management.
8.3.4 Service Set Identifier (SSID)

The SSID of the WLAN will be generated by the AP using the format of "XR240xxxxxxxx", where
xxxxxxxx is the MAC address of the eth2 Ethernet port of the system. This value can be viewed
from the service user interface. A wireless connection from the AP to the detector will only be
allowed after registration and pairing. This is because the SSID and Pre-Shared Key (PSK) are
written to the detector at pairing. The SSID can also be viewed through the CLI by running the
command at ./interfaceToAccessPoint <ssid>.
Note: If the system PC is replaced, the default username and password must be restored prior to
replacement, then all detectors must be registered and paired again as the SSID is PC-dependent.
8.3.5 Pre-Shared Key (PSK)

The security passphrase for the WLAN SSID for detector connection is generated automatically.
When the PSK is renewed, all detectors registered to the system must be repaired with the system
to allow for wireless connection.
8.3.6 Username and password

The username and password are needed to execute commands via terminal access. If the
username and password are lost, a factory reset to defaults must be performed.
The username and password must be restored prior to replacing the system PC or the detectors
will be unable to communicate with the system.
8.3.7 Channel and Transmit Power Management

Selecting the appropriate channel and transmit power is dependent on the regulatory domain of
both the AP and the detector. The regulatory domain contains a list of country codes and a list of
allowed channels and transmit powers for each country code. See Section 4.4 Country Codes on
page 87 for the list of codes.
The list of country codes, supported channels, and supported transmit powers can be queried from
the AP via the CLI by running the command <countryCode> or <getAllowedCountryCodes>,
<currentChannel> or <getWorkingChannels>, and <countryTXPower>. The AP country
code selection is configured on initial set-up by selecting the country in the SUIF. If the selected
country is not supported by the AP, the user will be warned that wireless exposures are not allowed
for the selected country (1221246: EM_AP_COUNTRY_FAILURE). If the country is supported, the
list of allowed channels will be queried from the AP and stored in a dynamic configuration file on the
system (/magichome/xruser/config/atlas/WifiApProperties.dyn).
The detectors store a list of supported channels that can be queried based on country code.
However, since a detector may not always be connected, the query will only occur when a detector
is registered. Upon registration, the list of detector allowed channels will be stored in the same
dynamic configuration file as the ones for the AP (/magichome/xruser/config/atlas/
WifiApProperties.dyn). In addition, every time a detector is registered its allowed channels will
be intersected against the previous master list of allowed channels. This intersected list will be
saved as the new master list. This will be done for all registered detectors. If registering the detector
would result in no channel intersection, detector registration will not be allowed.

A country is considered to support wireless exposure if its country code is selectable in both the AP
and detector and has at least one channel intersected in the list of supported channels (AP and all
registered detectors). If the system country code is changed, all detectors will be unregistered and
the list of detector allowed channels will be cleared.
8.3.8 Adaptive Radio Management (ARM)

The AP has an Adaptive Radio Management (ARM) feature that can adaptively choose an optimal
channel and transmit power based monitoring data of the neighboring RF environment. Users can
select the channels that will be supported by the ARM. While in ARM mode, the AP is set to a certain
channel and power level. The AP will continually scan other channels to find an optimal channel in
which to switch and the optimal transmit power at which to broadcast.
8.3.9 User channel selection

Advanced service sites will have the ability to manually select the channel on which the detector
and AP communicate (Figure 8-16), allowing the site to distribute traffic among the allowed
channels as required.
Figure 8-16 Detector Channel Selection
8.3.10 Boot
Upon boot, the system will ensure the AP is connected by a background ping during the boot thread.
The system will ping with GE default credentials - if that fails, the system will then ping with admin
(factory reset) credentials. If the ping fails with both GE default and factory reset credentials, the
system considers this an 'AP Down' failure. This is important when executing an AP replacement,
hard, or soft reset. If the AP can login with factory reset credentials, the system considers this an
'Initial Configuration Failed' error where the country code must be recommitted in the SUIF.
Section 8.4 Facility wireless connectivity theory

8.4.1 Overview
The Optima XR240amx system can connect to and interact with the facility network using an on-
board wireless card to download and upload HIS/PACS data to the facility network, to allow GE
Healthcare InSite remote connectivity, and to transfer machine parametric and performance data
to the Data Lake for analysis and viewing. The Optima XR240amx mobile x-ray system allows for
connectivity to facility wireless network infrastructure through 802.11 a/b/g/n and allows wired
connection through LAN.
8.4.2 Configuration
Facility networking information is gathered at pre-installation. Information includes authentication,
SSID(s), MAC address, and infrastructure (firewall/proxy/PNF) and is entered to the system
configuration at installation. If at any time the configuration changes, any proprietary class user (A/
C/M) can access the configuration at SUIF>CONFIGURATION>WIRELESS HOSPITAL
NETWORK (Figure 8-17).

Figure 8-17 Hospital Wireless configuration in SUIF
ADDRESSING
Any IP address consists of four 'octets' (XXX.XXX.X.XXX) which are designated by binary
numbering. The minimum value for any octet is 0 (for 2nd, 3rd, and 4th octet). Every IP and subnet
mask has 2 portions, a network and a host portion. For the IP address, the first three octets
represent the network portion and the last octet represents the host portion. All devices connected
to a network will have the same network portion but unique host portions. All devices on the same
network must have the same subnet mask.
The first octet of the IP address is used to identify the class (a-e) however, only a, b, and c are used.
Subnet masks also have class a, b, and c. If the class of the IP address and class of the subnet
mask match, then it is referred to as a 'Classful' network. Private IP addresses exist for class a, b,
and c but are generally used for internal communication. A default gateway is the device
responsible for moving data off the local area network. The default gateway has an IP address
structured like any other device on the network. The default gateway will be the same for all devices
on the network.
The facility network to which the system is connected should assign the Optima XR240amx system
an IP address (if using DHCP) given that the MAC address is known. The MAC address can be
found on the system PC and is also gathered during system pre-installation phase. if using static
IP, the address must be obtained from the site’s IT department.
The system supports communication to the hospital network through both static and DHCP. This
can be configured through SUIF>CONFIGURATION>NETWORKING (Figure 8-18).
Page 428 Section 8.4 Facility wireless connectivity theory

Figure 8-18 Network IP configuration in SUIF
SERVICE SET IDENTIFIER (SSID)

The service set identifier (SSID) or network name is a unique set of characters which identifies the
WLAN network. All broadcasting SSIDs can be scanned and viewed from the system using the scan
tool located in SUIF>CONFIGURATION>WIRELESS>CURRENT STATUS>SCAN. By selecting
MERGE SSID the system will automatically combine SSIDs which broadcast at 2.4 and 5.0 GHz.
The channel with the best signal strength will be displayed. If the desired network is hidden (not
broadcasting SSID), a connection can still be established by selecting the NETWORK IS NOT
BROADCASTING SSID (HIDDEN) box in the ADD selection on the NETWORKS Tab. The SSID
must be manually entered. Whether broadcasting or not, the network SSID, Authentication,
Encryption, PSK and certificates (if applicable) will need to be configured for proper connection.
AUTHENTICATION
Open or shared key authentication must occur before the device attempts to communicate to the
network through the facility wireless access point.
ENCRYPTION
Data transfer security.
PRE-SHARED KEY (PSK)

The Pre-Shared Key or network password must be configured for proper connection.
FIREWALL AND PRODUCT NETWORK FILTER (PNF)

The default setting for PNF on the Optima XR240amx is set to On. This allows only specified
network communication such as remote access.
PROXY
A proxy is an intermediate device which bridges connection between devices or users. Proxies can
help control access and security of devices on the facility network. If the facility network
infrastructure contains a proxy, the server IP address and port number must be known and

configured within the Optima XR240amx. If facility utilizes a proxy and it is not configured within the
system, InSite connectivity and remote access may not be allowed.
FREQUENCY (BAND STEERING & BAND SELECT)

This refers to the option available in the wireless management home page to select which band, 2.4
or 5 GHz. If the site is utilizing Band Steering or Band Select, select the 5 GHz band.
WiFi operates in two discrete frequency bands: 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz. The 2.4 GHz band offers better
spatial coverage however, the 2.4 GHz band only offers 3 available channels for use in an
enterprise network, which leads to many issues in larger institutions including co-channel
interference and overcrowding. To alleviate this, many sites also utilize the 5 GHz spectrum as
there are more than 20 channels available and much less traffic. If a network that utilizes Band
Steering/Band Select sees a client capable of 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz connections, it will not let the
client connect to the 2.4 GHz network. By doing this, the goal is to force the client to move to the 5
GHz network and minimize connections on the 2.4 GHz network. Vendor implementations of Band
Steering vary widely. This manifests itself as long roaming times (large gaps in connectivity while
moving around the facility) and further inspection of log files shows little success connecting to 2.4
GHz Access Points (APs) while also showing consistent success connecting to 5 GHz APs. There
are other times where for other reasons (usually pertaining to timing settings on the wireless
controllers) having the client operate on one band or the other only instead of both is desirable.
When in doubt, utilize the 5 GHz band.
INSITE REMOTE CONNECTIVITY

The Optima XR240amx system must have network connectivity to allow for remote access. Refer
to Section 8.5 InSite theory for more information.
ROAMING
Roaming occurs when the system is between access points and must decide how to maintain
connectivity. There are several configurable fields within the Roaming tab of the wireless
configuration window (Figure 8-19), however these should not be adjusted unless necessary.
The Min. dB to attempt to connect field is used to establish the minimum connection threshold. If
the best signal strength the system hears from neighboring access points (APs) is not above this
threshold the system will not attempt to connect. The default value is -75 dB and users should not
have to adjust this value.
The Min. dB to remain connected field is used to establish the threshold at which the system will
automatically disconnect from an AP and search for a better connection (if a roam has not already
taken place). The default value is -80 dB and users should not have to adjust this value.
The Min. dB difference to roam to new AP field is used to establish the roaming threshold. After
scanning its environment, if the system sees another access point (AP) that matches the network
the system is assigned to that is at least X dB better (where X is the Min. dB difference to roam to
a new AP value) then the system will attempt to roam to the new AP. For example, if the value is
set to 7 dB, the current RSSI is -70 dB, and the best AP signal that matches the current profile is -
63 dB, the system will attempt to roam to the new AP. The default value is 7 dB. Environments with
dense AP deployments (APs are not spaced very far apart) or sharp geometry may find they need
to decrease this value to improve roaming performance.
The Background Scan Parameters are controlled by the final three sliders on the page and
determine how often the client is performing background scans to evaluate the RF environment.
One of the primary jobs of the wireless software is to constantly monitor the RF environment it is in
to determine whether it is connected to the proper AP or whether it is time to roam to a new one.
The way the Optima XR240amx does this is by doing a background scan. These sliders help
determine how often that background scan is performed. The Fast scan when signal is below
(dB) determines when the Fast Scan Rate (sec) is used and when the Slow Scan Rate (sec) is
used. If the signal strength of the current connection falls below this threshold, the fast scan rate
Page 430 Section 8.4 Facility wireless connectivity theory

will be used. If the signal strength of the current connection is above this threshold, the slow scan
rate is used. In dense installations of APs (APs are not spaced very far apart) it may be necessary
to decrease the fast scan rate to 4 seconds and the slow scan rate to 10 seconds so that the client
can pick up the new APs quickly as they become available.
Figure 8-19 Roaming settings
8.4.3 Hardware and components
WIRELESS NETWORK CARD

The wireless network interface card (NIC) is used to control connection to the facility wireless
network. The NIC uses two antennas for communication.
ANTENNAS
Optima XR240 has two WiFi antennas located on either side of the PC as shown in Figure 8-20.
The dual antennas help provide better spatial coverage to establish and maintain connection to the
facility wireless network.
Figure 8-20 PC WiFi antennas

Section 8.5 InSite theory

The Optima XR240amx has multiple product vintages, or product generations, which use different
remote connection models. Generation 1 XR240 uses InSite 2, which differs from the fixed InSite 1
connection. Generation 2 XR240 uses RSVP, which is different from both InSite 1 and InSite 2. All
connection models enable similar remote servicing tools and data analytics for health monitoring.
Unless specified otherwise, InSite 2 and RSVP are referred to in this document as just InSite. The
InSite function provides the ability to remotely connect to the system enabling remote serviceability
on the system. This capability allows system tools and logs to be accessed and executed through
remote network connection.
The InSite functionality is comprised of individual features and capabilities listed below. The InSite
agent will allow for remote Internet connection between the system and GE back office. See
Figure 8-21 below for a basic workflow diagram.
InSite 2 and RSVP have a different functionality from a fixed system utilizing InSite 1. InSite 2 and
RSVP connection is initiated from the back office and the remote connection is wireless through a
secure tunnel.
There are 4 categories of functions on the Dragonfly system that are enabled by InSite agent:
- Remote Shell Access
- File Transfer
- VNC
- Transfer of system data to Data Lake
Figure 8-21 InSite RSvP basic workflow
8.5.1 InSite Configuration (Gen 1 only)

Note: See also 4.5.12 InSite Configuration on page 108.
InSite configuration screen, shown in Figure 8-22 below allows the system to communicate with GE
back office. It is essential that the appropriate fields are filled out based on the hospital wireless
network the system is communicating with. Figure 8-22 shows what the InSite 2 configuration GUI
looks like after a LFC is performed and system state is not restored.
Note: Only Class M users will have access to modify the Enterprise URL, Tunnel URL, Authorization
Scheme, and Log Level settings.
Page 432 Section 8.5 InSite theory

If a Proxy Server is not required there is no configuration that is needed in the InSite configuration
window and should be left to default as shown in Figure 8-22 below.
Figure 8-22 InSite Configuration
Proxy Required: A proxy server in most cases will be present in the hospital network. This
information is part of the Pre-Install Checklist (5748354-1EN) and should be filled out prior to
installation. The Hospital Network Administrator can provide this information as well. If Proxy is
required, the following fields will need to be filled out:
• Proxy Server Address: A server address is needed only if there is a proxy server. This IP
address will be supplied by the Hospital Network Administrator.
• Proxy Server Port: A server port is needed only if there is a proxy server. This port number
will be supplied by the Hospital Network Administrator.
• Authorization Required: Some proxy servers will require a level of authorization. If
authorization is required, this information was filled out as part of the Pre-Install Checklist
(5748354-1EN). If you cannot locate the checklist you will need to contact the Hospital Network
Administrator for this information. If 'Yes' is selected for this function, the following fields will
need to be filled out:
- Proxy Server User - This is the assigned user login provided by the Hospital Network
Administrator and is only needed when authorization is required.
- Proxy Server Password - This is the assigned password provided by the Hospital
Network Administrator and is only needed when authorization is required.
- Authorization Scheme (Class M only) - This is determined by the Hospital Network
Administrator and is only needed if authorization is required.
• Log Level: None, Warn, Error (Class M Only) - Log level would be used for troubleshooting
connection issues on the end-to-end communication between the system and the back office.
Recommended log level is Error.
- None: logs everything, however decreases system performance
- Warn: logs warnings and errors only
- Error: logs errors only

• Tunnel URL (Class M only): This URL is set to the RSvP back office server by default upon
LFC. The Tunnel URL should not be edited without a request from engineering. The tunnel
URL is used for file transfer and SSH remote terminal.
• Enterprise URL (Class M only): This URL is set to the RSvP back office server by default
upon LFC. The Enterprise URL should not be edited without a request from engineering. The
enterprise URL is used for VNC remote viewing.
8.5.2 InSite Configuration (Gen 2 only)

Refer to 4.5.12 InSite Configuration on page 108.
8.5.3 InSite Features (Gen 1 only)
8.5.3.1 Remote Shell Access

InSite allows for remote shell access using SSH protocol, this enables the ability to access the
system software files and logs. The SSH protocol provides a secure access tunnel to the system
from the GE Back office. Remote shell access is a standard feature for InSite. The FSE/RTE
initializing remote shell access will still need to provide the necessary OS log in credentials to
connect remotely through remote shell. if there are issues with accessing the system ensure that
the proper updates are loaded on the end user computer. Check the InSite2 SupportCentral website
for updates and notifications. If issues with connecting persist, submit a ticket.
SSH is the only protocol enabled for remote connection. Refer to Figure 8-23 below for an example
on how to connect with SSH through the RSvP back office server.
Note: Although 'XRAY_Telnet' is listed below, Telnet protocol is not supported on Optima XR240. Use
only SSH protocol to gain remote shell access to the Optima XR240 systems.
Figure 8-23 Starting an SSH session through RSvP
8.5.3.2 File Transfer

File Transfer will enable the ability to pull logs from the system for engineering analysis from
systems as needed. InSite functionality does not support a push mechanism. The pull of logs is
done once access request has been initialized by engineering or RTE. File Transfer is limited to
1GB in size, and files with a size greater than 1GB will not transfer successfully.
File Transfer is limited to five directories to choose from, these are the directories that will need to
be available for File Transfer as of right now. The directories may change upon conversations with
the RTE Team and Engineering:

- /engdata/Snapshots - Listed as 'Snapshot' in RSvP

- /database/image/export - Listed as 'Images' in RSvP
- /var/log - Listed as 'Boot Logs' in RSvP
- /magichome/xruser/log - Listed as 'Networking Logs' in RSvP
- /magichome/enggdata/log - Listed as 'Log Files' in RSvP
If a specific file or log is needed that does not reside in the above exposed directories, the user can
copy the file from its current location to one of the above directories through remote shell. Once this
is done, it is important to select refresh.
Follow the below steps on how to transfer a file using the RSvP back office server. These steps are
under the assumption that the system is connected and the user has conducted all the required
training to access RSvP.
Note: If file transfer is needed on a system that has not placed a call for service, then consent to connect
to the system must be granted prior to file transfer.
Note: 'Refresh' icon will be non-selectable until the system goes into fast polling mode (green lightning
bolt).
1. Select the File Transfer tab as shown in Figure 8-24 below.
2. Select the box next to 'Recursive' and then select the Refresh icon as showing in Figure 8-24
below.
Figure 8-24 File Transfer tab
3. Select the desired file from the list of available options as shown in Figure 8-25 below.
4. Select 'Send to Back Office' to transfer the desired file to the Back Office, see Figure 8-25
below.

Figure 8-25 Select the desired directory or file listed
5. Monitor the process of transferring the file from the medical device to the back office for
completion as shown in Figure 8-26 below.
Figure 8-26 Transfer progress/status
6. Once the file is complete with transferring to the back office a green check mark will appear
under Status. Under Action select the Download icon to begin transferring the file to the user's
laptop or computer, see Figure 8-27 below.
Figure 8-27 Download from Back Office
7. Follow the prompts and save the file to the desired location. The file can then be viewed.

8.5.3.3 Remote Desktop Share

Remote Desktop Share allows the remote user to view the User Interface real time. This feature
would allow the remote user to do the following:
• Aid in Clinical Applications questions and issues.
• Ability to see the issues the customer is experiencing.
• Ability to run remote diagnostics.
VNC (Virtual Network Computing) is the protocol being used for remote desktop sharing. When
VNC is enabled, the remote user can control the UI (User Interface).
Note: Prior to enabling VNC on the system you MUST have customer consent. The Customer or end user
must be present on the system and provide visual confirmation that the system is being controlled
remotely.
The VNC server on the systems is turned off by default. The steps provided below include turning
on the VNC server.
Note: When VNC session is complete the VNC server needs to be turned off. Please ensure to close the
VNC server. See the last step below
1. Wait for the green lightning bolt to indicating that the system is in fast polling, see Figure 8-28
below.
Figure 8-28 Fast Polling Enabled
2. Under the Remote Tools tab, at SSH, select Connect as shown in Figure 8-29 below.
Figure 8-29 Enable SSH Remote Shell
3. Log in using the applicable root password.

4. In the terminal window type: cd /magichome/xruser/bin/ ENTER.
5. Start the VNC by typing: ./insitevnc start ENTER.
6. Close the SSH window
7. Under the Remote Tools tab, at UL_VNC, select Connect as shown in Figure 8-30 below.

Figure 8-30 Connect UL_VNC
8. Select OK in the TotalAccecss: Proxy Config popup that appears. Do not make any changes
to the popup, see Figure 8-31 below.
Figure 8-31 Proxy Config popup
9. Select OK in the TotalAccess: Allow Command GUI show below in Figure 8-31.
Figure 8-32 Allow VNC Viewer
10. The VNC session will begin.
IMPORTANT: Ensure that the end user and/or customer can confirm that they see cursor movement on the
system without their interaction. During this process, DO NOT open or close any windows until the
end user or customer confirms. If the end user or customer does not confirm close the VNC
connection immediately.

11. Once VNC session is complete, type: ./insitevnc stop ENTER in the SSH window.
Section 8.6 Connecting via FFA (Gen 2 only)

FFA is a wrapper which sits on top of an ecosystem of dependent subsystem databases. All of the
subsystems need to work in concert for FFA to retain full functionality. Dependencies include,
regional CRMs, STEP, MDR database for FFA data, ETL, Axeda. Prerequisite to connecting via
FFA is proper system configuration including password management.
1. Go to the FFA link in Google Chrome; either staging or production depending on the
development cycle.
Production: Must use Google Chrome: https://ffa.health.ge.com
2. See Figure 8-33 below. Select Standard (Includes Insite1, Insite2, and RSvP) as the
Workflow Type.
3. Enter the system ID into the System ID text field.
4. Press Get Started.
Figure 8-33 Start Remote Troubleshooting
5. User must have a valid service event assigned to their name to connect remotely. If the
following popup box (Figure 8-34) appears (and is in your name), select Yes. Otherwise, select
Continue without a Service Event.

Figure 8-34 Popup
6. After selecting Get Started (Step 4), the user will be taken to the Review Tab (Figure 8-35).
Figure 8-35 FFA Review Tab Screen
7. Make sure the system is online and available to connect.

- Review the Connectivity Status in the System Info pane
- If the system is available to connect remotely, Status will indicate Online.
8. Select the Connect Tab.
9. Device will enter fast polling mode (Figure 8-36).
Figure 8-36 Fast Polling Mode
10. Enter a Service Event ID (this is necessary if you selected Continue without a Service
Event in Step 5).
11. Select a reason for connecting (Figure 8-37).
Page 440 Section 8.6 Connecting via FFA (Gen 2 only)

Figure 8-37 Selecting a Reason for Connecting
12. The available connection methods that are currently supported are:
- SSH - Secure Shell (See Connecting to SSH on page 442)
- Desktop - Remote Desktop Viewer (VNC) (See Connecting to Desktop on page 443)
- File Transfer - SFTP (See Connecting to File Transfer (SFTP) on page 444)
See Figure 8-38 and Figure 8-39 below.
Figure 8-38 Available Connection Methods - SSH and Desktop

Figure 8-39 Available Connection Methods - SFTP
Connecting to SSH
1. Press Launch for SSH under Connectivity Tools (Figure 8-40).
Figure 8-40 Connectivity Tools
2. Select Yes to acknowledge the Putty Security Alert.

Login as root will happen automatically (Figure 8-41).
Figure 8-41 SSH Connection
3. When completed with SSH session, type: exit ENTER.

4. Close the SSH putty window.
5. Select Disconnect from the SSH widget.

Connecting to Desktop
1. Start SSH connection. See Connecting to SSH above.
2. When logged in to SSH, start the x11 VNC server by typing:
cd /magichome/xruser/bin ENTER
./insitevnc start ENTER
3. Press Launch for Desktop under Connectivity Tools (Figure 8-42).
Figure 8-42 Connectivity Tools
4. The following will appear showing connection status (Figure 8-43).
Figure 8-43 Desktop Connection Status
5. Figure 8-44 below shows access granted with system screen.

Figure 8-44 Desktop Access Granted
When completed with VNC session:

1. Close the VNC viewer.
2. Select Disconnect from the Desktop widget.
3. In the SSH terminal, type:
./insitevnc stop ENTER
Connecting to File Transfer (SFTP)

Prerequisite: the SFTP account credentials must be passed to the back office for this function to
work. With the system communicating to the back office, navigate to
SUIF>Configuration>Password Configuration. Enter the 'Old Password' and the 'New Password'
and select 'Update Password'. Upon selecting this, the system will update all OS account
passwords as well as the back office credentials needed to support auto-logon for SFTP and SSH.
1. Press Connect in the File Transfer widget (Figure 8-45).
Figure 8-45 File Transfer Widget
2. View the Status pane, wait for connection to be established (Figure 8-46).

Figure 8-46 Status Pane
3. Type in the file path in the Search Bar or Navigate the file structure to the file of interest
(Figure 8-47).
Figure 8-47 File Selection
4. To download a file, select the Download Icon on the right-hand side of the system pane. The
file will be downloaded to the Back Office and locally. Open the file to view, save the file if
necessary.
- For image files, make sure 'De-identify' is selected.
- For all other files, make sure 'De-identify' is NOT selected. Enter in a reason for
unselecting 'De-identify'. Make sure 'Validate File Transfer' is selected.
- If downloading to your local PC, make sure that Popups are allowed from the FFA site.
5. To end the session, select Disconnect in the File Transfer Widget.
8.6.1 Agent Start Process Flow

During system boot, agent checks for Remote Connection = Yes
If Remote Connection = No, the agent will not start
If Remote Connection = Yes, then agent will start using RestartAgent.py
- InSite must be configured in SUIF>Configuration>Insite. Upon selecting, 'Commit', agent
will restart.
- ~2 to 5 minutes after commit/restart, system credentials should be verified by all
dependent ecosystems. Run, AgentStatus.py and look for:
* <Running>Yes
* <Registered>Yes
* <Quarantine>No

* <CRMVerified>Yes
- All of the above conditions must be met to allow connection
Agent Status can be viewed by running (from any directory):
AgentStatus.py ENTER
Section 8.7 System Breaker Tripping

Overview
The system by design has the ability to cause the main circuit breaker to trip. The circuit breaker
itself is a dual function device. The primary function is that of its name, a circuit breaker. If an over-
current condition is directly sensed, the “Breaker” will trip. The secondary function is a remote trip
capability “Breaker Trip”. This is a safety mechanism to prevent equipment damage. A distributed
architecture design has been employed which relies on separate controllers to determine potentially
hazardous conditions. When a controller determines it necessary to trip the breaker, a
“Communication” is sent to the Spyder control board for logging and a “Real Time Line” is pulled
and sensed by the Firefly board. The Firefly board contains the physical interface to trip the circuit
breaker and sends the trip command to the secondary feature of the circuit breaker “Breaker Trip”
causing the breaker to trip. The circuit breaker also provides a set of contacts that act as a feedback
mechanism. The Firefly board monitors these for abnormal states. See Figure 8-48.
^ƉǇĚĞƌ 'E <ZͺdZ/WͺDͺϮϰsͺE
:ϭ :ϵ :ϲ
WŽǁĞƌDŽĚƵůĞ
:Ϯ :Ϯ
:ϯ
:/EE >ŽĐƵƐƚ &ŝƌĞĨůǇ
ϭϱŬtDĂŝŶ
:ϯ :ϭϮ :ϭϬ
ƵǆDŽĚƵůĞ:ϭ
:ϲ :ϴ :ϳ ƌĞĂŬĞƌ
dƌŝƉ
ƌŝĐŬĞƚ
:ϭ͕:Ϯ͕:ϯ͕:ϰ :ϱ ƌĞĂŬĞƌ
^ǇƐƚĞŵĂƚƚĞƌŝĞƐ
ZĞĂůdŝŵĞ>ŝŶĞ ĂƚƚĞƌǇ
>ĞŐĞŶĚ ŽŵŵƵŶŝĐĂƚŝŽŶƐ ƌĞĂŬĞƌdƌŝƉ
Figure 8-48 Block Diagram Overview
Page 446 Section 8.7 System Breaker Tripping

System Controllers
Spyder Board
This board is a general controller receiving feedback and issuing commands. When a fault
condition is sensed by the Spyder board or messages are received from the Generator the
following commands become active;
FPGA_TRIP_CMD output from the Spyder FPGA converted to BKR_TRIP_CMD_24V_N

signal.
BKR_TRIP_CMD_24V_N J6 Pin 15 (to Firefly) and J9 Pin 15 (From Locust)
Note: This is a Real Time line and can be pulled by the Spyder, Locust, or Firefly.
This signal is also called TRIP_CMD_24V_N
DJINN Control Board

CAN Messaging to the Spyder DJINN J1 to Spyder J1
Locust Board
This board is responsible for drive and switches.
DSP handles Current sensing, temps, Spyder CAN Interface
CPLD handles peripheral circuits (Switches and interlocks, fuse status, Drive handle)
If a fault is sensed then the following signaling becomes active;
DSP_TRIP_CMD_N
CPLD_TRIP_CMD_N
DSP and CPLD Trip commands are a logic AND to produce TRIP_CMD_N
TRIP_CMD_24V_N J2 Pin 15 to Spyder board Real Time line
Firefly Board
This board is responsible primarily for the system charging circuitry. If a fault is sensed then the
following signaling becomes active;
FPGA_TRIP_CMD_N output from FPGA TRIP_CMD_5V TRIP_CMD_H

TRIP_CMD_H (24vdc) J10 Pin 4
TRIP_CMD_L J10 Pin 6
If the Spyder or Locust pulled the Real Time line then the following signaling becomes active;
TRIP_CMD_24V_N J2 Pin 15 from Spyder board Input to FPGA

FPGA_TRIP_CMD_N output from FPGA TRIP_CMD_5V TRIP_CMD_H
TRIP_CMD_H (24vdc) J10 Pin 4
TRIP_CMD_L J10 Pin 6
The following signals are condition feedback;

Since we have only 1 circuit breaker this seems meaningless since when it trips we lose power
and cannot sense the tripped breaker. However, the system monitors this feedback in the event
that an abnormal condition might exist. (Welded contacts for example)
BREAKER _TRIPPED (24vdc) J10 Pin 1 BREAKER_TRIPPED_FPGA (Logic)
BREAKER_TRIPPED_FPGA input to FPGA

Note: BREAKER_TRIPPED is connected to the “NO” (Normally Open) terminal of the breaker.
See Figure 8-49.
This “NO” state is when the breaker is off or has tripped.
Breaker tripped = Position 6 & 7 open (24 vdc present at Firefly J10 Pin1=HIGH)
Breaker not tripped = Position 6 & 7 closed (ground from Firefly J10 Pin3 applied = no 24 vdc
sensed by the Firefly)
:hDWZ WŽƐŝƚŝŽŶϭ WŽƐŝƚŝŽŶϱ ddͺZt

;:ƵŵƉĞƌϭͲϴͿ ;ϭϲϬsĚĐŝŶͿ
&ƌŽŵƌŝĐŬĞƚ:ϱWŝŶϭ
dZ/WͺDͺ,/', WŽƐŝƚŝŽŶϮ WŽƐŝƚŝŽŶϲ dZ/Wͺ&ͺ

&ƌŽŵ&ŝƌĞĨůǇ ;&ĞĞĚďĂĐŬŽŵŵŽŶͿ
:ϭϬWŝŶϰ dŽ&ŝƌĞĨůǇ:ϭϬWŝŶϯ
dZ/WͺDͺ>Kt
WŽƐŝƚŝŽŶϯ dZ/Wͺ&ͺEK
ƌĞĂŬĞƌdƌŝƉƉĞĚƐŝŐŶĂů
&ƌŽŵ&ŝƌĞĨůǇ WŽƐŝƚŝŽŶϳ ;&ĞĞĚďĂĐŬEŽƌŵĂůůǇŽƉĞŶͿ
:ϭϬWŝŶϲ
dŽ&ŝƌĞĨůǇ:ϭϬWŝŶϭ
ddͺ<Z
WŽƐŝƚŝŽŶϰ WŽƐŝƚŝŽŶϴ
:hDWZ
;ϭϲϬsĚĐKƵƚͿ ;:ƵŵƉĞƌϭƚŽϴͿ
dŽƌŝĐŬĞƚ:ϱWŝŶϮ
Figure 8-49 Circuit Breaker Wiring, Rear View
Conditional Events
Physical
There is a short circuit somewhere in the system. This can be sensed directly by the circuit breaker
or by one of the controllers.
System decisions
For the following the system will attempt to create an error log entry for the trip cause.
1. Current into the batteries is too high.
(Error Codes: 8301051 may be present)
a. A faulty Mantis Supply.
i. Run “Power Control Comm” and “Power Supply Thermal” diagnostics.
b. Unknown batteries added to the system.
i. Examine battery pack cover for evidence of tampering.
2. Pack X voltage is too high (greater than 50 volts).
(Error Codes: 8301071, 8301072, 8301073, 8301074, and/or 8301049 may be present)
Note: Pack 4 voltage may exceed 50V under certain conditions when charge cut-off (hold-off)
is active.
a. A charging circuit fault.
i. Possible corrupted firmware of Firefly.

b. Unknown batteries added to the system.

* Examine battery pack cover for evidence of tampering.
3. Battery stack voltage is too high (greater than 190 volts).
(Error Codes: 8301075 and/or 8301050 may be present)
Note: By design the system will shut off the charger at 180volts. The breaker will trip at 190
volts as a failsafe.
a. Possible DJINN error 0510 or 0582
i. Follow DJINN troubleshooting guide.
b. A charging circuit fault.
i. Possible corrupted firmware of Firefly.
c. Unknown batteries added to the system.
i. Examine battery pack cover for evidence of tampering.
4. Battery stack voltage is too low during idle (less than 132 volts).
a. Circuit Breaker left on during storage/shipment.
i. Either unplugged or system powered off with the circuit breaker on will drain the
batteries.
b. Charge cycle will not complete due to Over Voltage or Temp errors.
i. A single or groups of batteries have been replaced.
ii. A single battery has a faulty cell.
c. A soft or unsymmetrical battery pack.
i. A soft pack will not hold a state of charge as long as its neighbors.
In this case the system charges normally, yet exhibits issues in a relatively short
period of time after charging is stopped.
* A defective battery within the pack or an old battery that has reached its useful
life.
ii. An unsymmetrical battery pack is generally a new pack that for whatever reason has
not been properly conditioned.
d. For issues 4a through 4e, see 5b below.
5. Battery stack voltage is too low during driving (less than 126 volts).
a. Same as 4a, 4b
b. The batteries need to be properly charged.
i. 4a, 4b, and 4cii can be resolved as follows;
1. Place the system in “Safe Mode” charging and charge overnight.
a. Set jumper J17 on the Firefly board to the “Safe” position (pins 2 and 3).
b. Ensure the breaker is ON and the system is OFF.
When in this position the system is in a trickle charge mode. The Mantis
provides only enough energy to charge the batteries.
2. Restore the system to “Normal Mode” charging and charge uninterrupted for 1 hour
after the battery meter shows 100% charge. This is about 5 hours.
The battery meter display is based upon the charging algorithm. This is what
synchronizes the display to actual state of charge.
ii. 4ci can be resolved as follows;
Make sure to bleed off any residual charge by unplugging the system and turning the
collimator light on several times.

1. Run “Power Control Limits” diagnostic with system unplugged.

or
2. Measure individual battery packs voltages during exposure.
a. Identify bad pack by unusually low voltage.
6. Battery temperature is too high.
(Error codes: 8301048, 8301062, 8301063, 8301064, and/or 8301065 may be present)
a. This generally occurs during charging or up to 1 hour after charging has stopped.
b. This is an indication a battery pack has a faulty battery. There is a single temp sensor
attached to the center battery of the 3 battery pack. If one of the outside batteries is faulty,
it will overheat during charging. It can take a long time for this heat to migrate to the center
battery of the 3 resulting in this error.
i. Run “Power Control Limits” diagnostic with system unplugged.
Note: During discharge (idle) the power control limits diagnostic for Pack 4 voltage
will be approximately 0.5V lower than actual pack 4 voltage due to the additional
diode voltage drop.
ii. Identify bad pack by unusually low voltage.
7. Breaker trips randomly, during use, idle, charge, or drive.
a. This could be an aged or defective circuit breaker.
i. With the system ON, while holding the blade of a screw driver, gently tap on the face
and/or the exposed side of the circuit breaker with the screw driver handle.
ii. If the breaker trips, it is an indication it is weak and should be replaced.
b. Examine the System Health Page. Compare the record of un-commanded to commanded
circuit breaker trips to the system error log. This is a record of how the customer utilizes
the circuit breaker.
c. Review the system error log. If error codes mentioned in previous sections are prevalent,
refer to the appropriate sections above for troubleshooting. It is likely NOT the circuit
breaker in these cases.

Section 8.8 System Battery Theory

8.8.1 Definitions
Table 8-6
Ambient Temperature The average temperature seen by the batteries.

C-Rate A common way to specify the charge/discharge current of a battery. It denotes the
rate in terms of total battery capacity. It is calculated by dividing the charge or
discharge current by the total battery capacity (Ampere-hours, Ah). For example, a
12Ah battery is discharged with a current of 3A. The C-rate is equal to 3A / 12Ah =
0.25C rate, also expressed as C/4.
Cell The minimum unit of which a VRLA battery is composed. Nominal voltage is 2V/cell.
Discharge Rate Current taken from a battery expressed as a fraction of the C-rate.
Nominal Voltage The nominal value of rated voltage. In lead acid batteries the nominal voltage is 2V/
cell.
Open Circuit Voltage (OCV) The measured voltage of a battery/pack without a load attached.
Refresh Charge As recommended by the OEM, to bring a battery from a current or depleted state of
charge to a fully charged state using a controlled "smart charge" method. By design
the system employs a smart charge algorithm.
Self-Discharge A battery's loss of stored energy over time in a no-load condition due to the internal
current flowing in a battery. The rate of self-discharge is proportional to the storage
temperature. Batteries have a longer shelf life at lower temperatures.
Shelf Life The maximum period of time a battery can be stored under specific conditions
without supplemental charging.
State of Charge (SOC) State of charge is the equivalent of a fuel gauge for a battery. This is the combination
of the voltage level, the current capability, and the operating temperature. 100%
SOC is when the voltage across individual cells is balanced, stabilized and held
constant with minimal charge current required at the temperature of the operating
environment.
Sulfation A low state of charge (SOC) in a lead acid battery can lead to sulfation that can
seriously damage the battery. In a low SOC state, lead crystals formed during
discharge can become so large they resist being dissolved during the recharge
process. This prevents the battery from being fully recharged. Sulfation can occur
when the battery is left at low SOC for a long period of time.
VRLA Valve Regulated Lead Acid Battery
8.8.2 Battery Arrangement and Connections

The battery packs connect to the Cricket Battery Board at connectors J1-J4. The connector
numbers on the Cricket board correspond to the Pack number referenced on the service screens
and system manuals.

- 3DFN
- 3DFN
- 3DFN
- 3DFN
Figure 8-50
They are wired in series, with Pack 1 referenced to ground. Each pack has three 12Vdc batteries
in series.
Figure 8-51
8.8.3 System Charging

There are 6 basic stages in a full charge cycle.
1. Evaluation - Firefly determines the initial voltage and current for charging, based on the initial
condition of the batteries. (< 1 min)
2. Initial Phase / Soft Start - Firefly applies a voltage to the batteries, 3 to 5Vdc above the
measured value. This raises the plate potential to accept charging current. (< 5 minutes)
3. Bulk / Constant Current phase - Elevated current is applied. This raises the overall energy
potential of the individual cells, up to a maximum of 4A, until the total voltage of the battery
stack reaches 169 VDC. This phase also has a 3 hour time limit, to prevent overcharging in
the event of battery/charger failure.
4. Absorption / Constant Voltage phase - A constant voltage is held at 169 VDC, as the
batteries begin to reach a full state of charge. Charge current continues to go down as demand
from the batteries is reduced. This helps to condition the batteries from normal internal
Page 452 Section 8.8 System Battery Theory

degradation resulting from usage and charging, also tops off the energy capacity of each
battery/cell. The system moves to the next charge phase when: a) the net current into the
batteries falls below 1.5A + 45 min, or b) the expiration of a 4 hour time limit.
5. Trickle / balance phase - Voltage is maintained around 162 VDC for 30 min. Allows the
individual cells in each battery to normalize or balance relative to their neighbor. Also, upon
completing, the Firefly synchronizes the battery display with the actual state of charge.
6. Battery Rest (Charge Cut-Off) - Charging voltage is held at 164Vdc for the remainder of time
the system is plugged in. The charger stays on and supplies only the current necessary to keep
the batteries fully charged and to power the rest of the system. During discharge (idle) the
power control limits diagnostic for Pack 4 voltage will be approximately 0.5V lower than actual
pack 4 voltage due to the additional diode voltage drop. During charge the power control limits
diagnostic for pack 4 voltage will be approximately 0.7V higher than actual pack 4 voltage due
to the additional diode voltage drop. Note that during portions of real charge it is normal for
there to be wide variations in pack to pack voltage. During hold-off or cut-off charge, power
control limits diagnostic for pack 4 voltage may be 10V (or more) higher than actual pack 4
voltage due to the following relationship: [Pack4 Voltage = Mantis Voltage – Pack 3 Voltage –
Pack 2 Voltage – Pack1 Voltage].
Note: Actual voltages may be lower than indicated due to thermal compensation which will
occur if any battery pack's temperature exceeds 35C.
8.8.4 Battery Charging Theory (Charge Cut-Off / Hold-Off)

The system does not require a daily, weekly or timed charging schedule. Users should charge the
system when convenient according to the site's preferred workflow to maintain an adequate state
of charge during usage. To optimize the amount of time the batteries are on charge, the system may
at times inhibit charge so the batteries can rest. This is managed by the system independent of any
user habits, workflows, or charging cycles.
The charge cut-off allows the batteries to rest when charging is complete, even while connected to
AC power input. The mantis powers the system while the batteries are at rest, except while taking
exposures. The nominal voltage is 169V limited to an initial charge current of 4A. Time on charge
is controlled by the system when AC is present. Temperature compensation has been introduced
to lower voltage when any pack > 35°C to optimize voltage at higher temperatures.
The advantages the system-managed charging are that the batteries are allowed to rest during the
cut-off phase to avoid unnecessary charging and the battery temperatures are lower.
8.8.4.1 Safe Charge & Battery Jumper

If the batteries are depleted to a point that the system will not turn on or move, plug the system into
power with the breaker turned on. This action will allow the emergency brake to be released to move
the system.
8.8.4.2 Diagnostics
During discharge (idle) the Power Control Limits diagnostic for Pack 4 voltage will be approximately
0.5V lower than actual pack 4 voltage due to the additional diode voltage drop. During charge the
power control limits diagnostic for pack 4 voltage will be approximately 0.7V higher than actual pack
4 voltage due to the additional diode voltage drop. Note that during portions of real charge it is
normal for there to be wide variations in pack to pack voltage. During hold-off or cut-off charge,
power control limits diagnostic for pack 4 voltage may be 10V (or more) higher than actual pack 4
voltage due to the following relationship: [Pack4 Voltage = Mantis Voltage - Pack 3 Voltage - Pack
2 Voltage - Pack1 Voltage]. The error code, 8301091 - General Charge Error, is present when the
firmware does not detect the cut-off circuit or it is not functioning properly. In this event, charging
will continue at a maintenance voltage level so batteries do not discharge.

Battery data is collected in the sysPRM.log located at: /magichome/xruser/log. The following
parameters are logged at each exposure:
- IV - Generator Input Voltage
- LPIV - Lowest Peak Input Voltage (voltage at time of exposure)
- skVp - Selected kVp (to generator)
- smAs - Selected mAs (to generator)
- AkVp - Actual kVp (from generator)
- AmAs - Actual mAs (from generator)
- AmA - Actual mA
The following parameters are logged every one (1) minute:
- V1 - Pack 1 voltage in mV
- VS - Battery Set Voltage in mV
- BATT C - Battery Current in mA
- LVLE C - LVLE Current in mA
- T1 - Pack 1 Temp in mdegC
- BSOC - System Battery State of Charge - independent of User State of Charge (USOC)
and when working properly should not drop below 40%
- CS - Charge State - Value 0-8 as follows: 0=Discharge; 1=Charge initialization; 2=Charge
Soft Start; 3=Bulk Charge; 4=Absorption Charge; 5=Equalization Charge; 6=Trickle
Charge; 7=Not used; 8=Maintenance charge
- EC - Extended Charge Needed (binary) 1=the extended charge is queued. The value
resets to 0 once the 3-6 hour extended charge is completed
The following parameters are logged upon a change to any of the three:
- AC - AC sense (binary) - AC is provided by the Firefly board according to the AC sense
in the Mantis Power Supply
- CHRG - Charge request (binary) - CHRG is provided by the Firefly board according to
whether or not it is requesting a charge.
- USOC - User State of Charge (as indicated on UI) - USOC is provided by the Firefly board
according to its tally of user charge (the value that is displayed on the UI)
Visualizations of the system battery data can be viewed through the Data Analytics dashboard if the
system has been properly configured for Insite connectivity. The visualizations and parametric data
show a historical view of system health and can be used as a tool to predict potential failures. When
the Lowest Peak Input Voltage (LPIV) drops below 110V, the system batteries may need to be
monitored. If the LPIV drops below 95V, the batteries may not recover and may need (proactive)
replacement. While monitoring LPIV, also consider the battery state of charge; a low LPIV and a
low state of charge may only be indicative of discharged batteries and not necessarily failed
batteries.

8.8.5 Battery Failure Modes
8.8.5.1 Shorted Cell

For VRLA batteries, the nominal voltage of a fully charged cell is 2.13Vdc/cell. Over time or due to
a manufacturing defect, an individual cell can become shorted, effectively reducing its voltage to
zero. If a cell is shorted, then a 12Vdc battery (reading 12-13Vdc when healthy) will effectively read
10-11Vdc when an open circuit voltage measurement is done.
During charging, a shorted cell can be "hidden" from detection. A "shorted cell" often times is not
an actual short but a very low capacity cell. Therefore, during recharge it will actually take a higher
percentage of the voltage given a higher internal impedance. This will then result in that cell
warming up, which makes it more efficient in charging. Multiple bad cells in an 18 cell pack (6 cells
per battery) may cause that pack to trip the thermal limit. When measuring a battery pack voltage
then, its voltage may appear consistent with the other packs in the system.
The best way to detect a shorted cell is during a state of discharge, with the system indicating
< 60%, and ideally measured with the batteries disconnected from the system.
Measurements in-system is possible using the "Power Control Limits" diagnostic under the "System
Power" heading (Figure 8-52). In this situation with the system disconnected from an AC source,
you can use this diagnostic as a way to obtain Pack 1 through Pack 4 voltages and temperatures.
It is recommended in this case to increase the load on the batteries by turning on the field light
several times. You need to press "Start" in the diagnostics to refresh the results. This will help reveal
a pack with a shorted cell, should one exist. See 10.10.2 Examples on page 643.
Figure 8-52 Power Control Limits Screen
Note: After replacing a single battery pack into a system, it is possible that voltage differences may exist,
even differences that look like a shorted cell (2Vdc). Also account for pack 4 offset pending on the
state of charge. The new pack may have a different state of charge compared to the others and
thus, a different voltage. See 10.10.1 Replacement on page 642 for guidance on battery pack
replacement.

8.8.5.2 Reduced Capacity from Sulfation

Sulfation is the formation or deposit of lead sulfate on the surface and in the pores of the active
material of the batteries' negative lead plates. This occurs normally during every discharge cycle. If
the sulfation becomes excessive, large crystals form on the plates, and the battery will not operate
efficiently (or at all).
Table 8-7
Common Causes Prevention/Mitigation

Battery inactivity in a Customers should not leave their systems in a discharged state for
discharged state extended periods of time. If a system is to be stored and unused
for 2 weeks or more, it is recommended to fully recharge the
system first. Then store it with the circuit breaker OFF and each
battery pack disconnected from the Cricket circuit board. The
design is such that the main power cable from the Cricket to the
Firefly is dual purpose; a) power delivery, and b) voltage sense.
The voltage sense resistors on the Cricket and Firefly boards
create a parasitic current drain.
An alternative approach is to leave the system powered on and
plugged in. The system will reach a full charge state and remain in
the Maintenance charge state.
Operation at excessive Customers should use their systems in environmental conditions
temperatures (temperature, humidity) as specified in the Pre-Installation Manual.
Prolonged under-charging Customers should attempt to fully charge their system at least
once per week. Overnight is often the most convenient.
Prolonged over-charging The system automatically protects against over-charging by
monitoring the Voltage, Current, and Temperature during the
various charge phases. By design, this is not a concern when the
Firefly jumper J17 is in the "Normal" charge mode position and the
replacement batteries have been properly integrated into the
system.
8.8.6 Storage and Self Discharge

Improper storage conditions contribute to some of the more common forms of battery misuse and
may result in latent battery failures.
All batteries lose charge over time when kept on open circuit (shelf storage). This phenomenon is
termed self-discharge. Storage temperature is the key factor influencing the self-discharge rate
because it plays a major role in determining the speed at which the internal chemical reaction
proceeds. As temperature increases, the speed of chemical reactions increases.
For the system battery packs, the recommended storage temperature is 25°C (77°F). At 25°C
(77°F), the storage life recommended by GE is 6 months. For every 8°C rise in ambient
temperature, the storage life is cut by 50%.
1. Spare battery packs should be stored in a clean, dry, cool location, ideally between 10°C
(50°F) and 25°C (77°F) for no longer than 1 year.
2. Should the battery packs be stored at higher temperatures or for longer than 1 year, they must
be put through a refresh charge.

3. If the open-circuit voltage (OCV) of a battery pack drops to 36V while in storage, it must be put
through a refresh charge. The battery pack may be permanently damaged if the OCV is
allowed to drop below 35.7V.
Table 8-8
Storage Temperature Storage Temperature GE Allowed Storage Time

10°C to 25°C 50°F to 77°F 6 months
26°C to 30°C 78°F to 86°F 4 months
31°C to 35°C 87°F to 95°F 2.5 months
36°C to 40°C 96°F to 104°F 1.5 months
8.8.6.1 Batteries and System Storage

Has your system been in storage or inactive for a long period of time? If so you need to perform a
refresh charge before handing the system back over to the customer.
To properly store a working system:

1. Bring the system up to a full level of charge preferably allowing the system to charge overnight,
including the detector batteries as applicable.
2. Unplug the system from the AC source (wall plug).
3. Power down using the system power on/off button.
4. Remove the detector battery from the detector.
5. Turn off the circuit breaker.
6. Disconnect each battery pack from the Cricket circuit board (J1, J2, J3, J4).
Have a system that was not properly stored?

Storage environment is specified at > 5º C (41º F).
Systems delivered below this temperature will exhibit abnormal behavior and error codes related to
low temperature. Systems delivered in this condition should be allowed 24 hours to stabilize system
component temperature.
You may see errors like the following:
Table 8-9
Error Code Error Text Debug Text (Class C/M)

8301052 System battery failure. Contact Service Battery pack 1 temperature
communication lost
8301053 System battery failure. Contact Service System Battery pack 2 temperature
battery failure. Contact Service communication lost
communication lost
communication lost

Table 8-9
Error Code Error Text Debug Text (Class C/M)

8301001 Hardware error. Complete exam. Call service Firefly FPGA temperature too
low
8301003 Hardware error. Complete exam. Call service Firefly Power Supply
temperature too low
A temperature-stabilized but improperly stored system could have some power related issues:
• Very low level of charge (approximately 135Vdc). You may see the following:
- System battery level errors.
- System trips the breaker when trying to power up.
- System randomly shuts down, in conjunction with an imbalanced battery pack voltage
level.
- System will not power up (If voltage falls below 85Vdc).
- Generator errors.
A common indication is the system reports generator and/or system errors at boot. In some cases,
these issues are seen even when the system reports a healthy amount of charge remaining via the
battery indicator. This does not necessarily mean part replacement. See Sections
10.10.1 Replacement on page 642, 8.8.4 Battery Charging Theory (Charge Cut-Off / Hold-Off) on
page 453, and 10.10.2 Examples on page 643.
Table 8-10
Error Code Error Text Debug Text (class C/M)

3606001* Generator Error Generator Error - Generator in error
state
3600131* Generator Warning Error DjinnError 0581H:Input voltage
detected is low
3600130* Generator Abort Error DjinnError 0504H:DC bus rising time
too slow
8300102 When any fuse on Locust board broken N/A
8300101 When any logic power out of specification N/A
*may appear in conjunction with more specific generator errors.
8.8.7 System Behavior at Battery End Of Life

The X-ray system has some key indicators when the batteries are close to their end of life.
8.8.7.1 The system may cease charging when:
Battery voltage(s) exceeds preset limits.

If there are mismatches in the battery packs of the system, such as a fully charged battery pack
introduced into a set of depleted batteries, a battery pack could begin to be overcharged, causing
its voltage to rise to the limit.

Table 8-11
8301066 Battery pack 1 voltage over 48V. Charge Inhibited

8301070 Battery Stack voltage over 180V. Charge Inhibited
Other charge related faults could cause this condition, such as cabling defects or resistive
connections (introducing impedance imbalances among the battery packs and/or their
connections).
Battery temperature(s) exceeds preset charging limits

A single weak battery impacts its battery pack. A weak battery will generally have higher internal
impedance thus consuming more power which can result in overheating. There is a single
temperature sensor attached to the middle battery of each battery pack. These errors can occur
only during charging. A weak outside pack can take significant time to transfer the heat into the
center battery where the sensor is located. Also see Section Battery temperature(s) exceeds
preset limits on page 460.
Table 8-12
8301058 Battery pack 1 temperature over 55C. Charge Inhibited

8301078 Average battery temperature over 55C
8.8.7.2 The system circuit breaker may trip when:
Low voltage condition

• Battery stack voltage is too low during idle (less than 132Vdc)
• Battery stack voltage is too low during driving (less than 126Vdc)
As the batteries reach normal end of life (not bad cells), their voltage will dip much more under load
than fresh batteries. A very low level of charge (approximately 135Vdc) can accentuate this
phenomenon. Additionally, aged batteries will likely work just fine for shorter and shorter periods of
time as they can no longer store and provide the required energy as when they were new. The
system will detect this and produce the following error codes either before or after the breaker trip
event.
Table 8-13
8301043 Battery voltage below threshold. Trip breaker to protect batteries.

8301046 Battery stack voltage < 132Vdc while idle or < 126Vdc while driving.
If upon review of the system error logs, these codes appear frequently, it may indicate the batteries
are weak and ready for replacement. Before part replacement, consider that these messages may
also appear following a period of non-use of the system (requiring a full system charge to remedy),
or a usage pattern that does not allow a full system recharge. See Section 8.8.4 Battery Charging

Theory (Charge Cut-Off / Hold-Off) on page 453, and 10.10.2.1 A confirmed generator error fix after
a full system charge. on page 643.
Battery voltage(s) exceeds preset limits

These errors are very uncommon. This would indicate a malfunction in the charging circuit limits
and control. Corrupted firmware or non-GE approved batteries installed are possible causes. A
battery pack with multiple bad cells might also generate these errors. If a single pack reports > 50V
error you can move it to a different location to confirm it is bad (swap pack 1 with pack 4 for
example).
Table 8-14
8301071 Battery pack 1 voltage over 50V. Breaker to trip

8301075 Battery Stack voltage over 190V. Breaker to trip
After a system reboot the following error message(s) will display.
Table 8-15
8301049 Last breaker trip due to high battery voltage

8301050 Last breaker trip due to high battery voltage
Battery temperature(s) exceeds preset limits

This is similar to the charge inhibit thermal limit defined above with this single difference. Transfer
of heat from an outside battery to the center battery within a single battery pack can take a
significant amount of time. As a result the system can sense an overheat condition well after the
system has been disconnected from the AC source (wall plug) and result in a breaker trip during
system transport or usage. This is an unlikely situation but cannot be completely discounted.
Table 8-16
8301062 Battery pack 1 temperature over 60C. Breaker will Trip

After a system reboot the following error message will display.
Table 8-17
8301048 Last breaker trip due to battery temp
Battery charging current exceeds preset limits

This failure would indicate either a failure of the current measurement circuitry on the Firefly board,
or a power supply fault of the Mantis power supply.

Table 8-18
8301051 Last breaker trip due to high charge current
A short-circuit condition
The short circuit may exist on the Firefly, Locust, or Cricket board, but these circuit boards have
fuses that will likely blow first. A short in the wiring harnesses could also result in a breaker trip.
However, these conditions are probably a least likely cause within the context of this discussion.
See Section 8.7 System Breaker Tripping on page 446 for detailed theory and fault isolation.


Chapter 9 System Diagrams
Section 9.1 Block Diagrams
^ƉǇĚĞƌ 'E <ZͺdZ/WͺDͺϮϰsͺE
:ϭ :ϵ :ϲ
WŽǁĞƌDŽĚƵůĞ
:Ϯ :Ϯ
:ϯ
:/EE >ŽĐƵƐƚ &ŝƌĞĨůǇ
ϭϱŬtDĂŝŶ
:ϯ :ϭϮ :ϭϬ
ƵǆDŽĚƵůĞ:ϭ
:ϲ :ϴ :ϳ ƌĞĂŬĞƌ
dƌŝƉ
ƌŝĐŬĞƚ
:ϭ͕:Ϯ͕:ϯ͕:ϰ :ϱ ƌĞĂŬĞƌ
^ǇƐƚĞŵĂƚƚĞƌŝĞƐ
ZĞĂůdŝŵĞ>ŝŶĞ ĂƚƚĞƌǇ
>ĞŐĞŶĚ ŽŵŵƵŶŝĐĂƚŝŽŶƐ ƌĞĂŬĞƌdƌŝƉ
Figure 9-1 Block Diagram Overview
Chapter 9 System Diagrams Page 463

['HWHFWRU ['HWHFWRU
&KDUJH &KDUJH
%DWWHU\
5HFHSWDFOH 5HFHSWDFOH
,QGLFDWRU
'RFNLQJ 'RFNLQJ

&ULPSIOH[
5HF
+6XE'3OXJ +6XE'3OXJ &ULPSIOH[
3OXJ
+6XE'5HF +6XE'5HF
- -
0LFURILW3OXJ
0LFURILW5HF
%,1&KDUJLQJ%RDUG -

- - -
5-5 5-5 P0Q/3OXJ
5-3
5-3 5-3 P0Q/5HF
5-5
86%WR
(7+
$GDSWRU
86%$3OXJ 5-5
86%$5(& 5-3
-
-
3&
;
-
/9/(
;
Figure 9-2 Bin Charging Board Diagram
Page 464 Section 9.1 Block Diagrams

Figure 9-3 BCB block wiring diagram
Chapter 9 System Diagrams Page 465

Figure 9-4 External interfaces, ports and data flows
Page 466 Section 9.1 Block Diagrams

&RLO
3RZHU5HOD\
&RQWDFW
+DOOV +DOOV 'HWHFWRU3RZHU
6XSSO\
%UDNH
%UDNH
/ 5
'36$VVHPEO\
;
- - - - - -
&DWHUSLOODU
%DVH7UDQVLWLRQ%RDUG

-
%DWWHU\9ROWDJH
0233%DWW
7XEH
3KRHQL[5(&
3KRHQL[3OXJ
3DUN N:0DLQ$X[ 0RGXOH
/DWFK 3KRHQL[3OXJ -
$
0Q/3OXJ 'ULYH -
N:2SWLRQDO$X[0RGXOH
0Q/5(&
6HQVRU
0Q/5(&
0Q/3OXJ
- 3RZHU0RGXOH - -
3KRHQL[5(& 6XE'3OXJ
3KRHQL[3OXJ
- 9'&
P0Q/3OXJ
P0Q/5(&
P0Q/3OXJ
P0Q/5(&
0LQL)LW5(&
0LQL)LW3OXJ
-
&ROXPQ76
9HUWLFDO
0233%DWW /RFXVW 0233%DWW
%UDNH - 'ULYH%RDUG -
$UP ;
%UDNH /9/(
;
P0Q/5(&
P0Q/3OXJ
+DUG%UDNH
5HOHDVH %DWW
6ZLWFK
0233%DWW
0233%DWW
- - -
0Q/3OXJ
0Q/5(&
0Q/3OXJ
0Q/5HF
$
-
0233%DWW
0Q/5(& -
0Q/3OXJ 3KRHQL[3OXJ 0Q/3OXJ
0Q/3OXJ
0Q/5HF
0Q/5(& 3KRHQL[5(&
3KRHQL[5(&
3KRHQL[3OXJ
- -
0Q/5(&
0Q/3OXJ
$ ) ) $ $ &/6

-
%UHDNHU7ULS ;
%DWW
0Q/3OXJ
0Q/3OXJ
0Q/5HF
0Q/5HF
)
&ULFNHW - 0DQWLV6XSSO\ $
0Q/
0Q/
---- %UHDNHU
3OXJ
5HF
)LUHIO\
P0Q/
%DWWHU\
%DWWHU\7HPS
6/3RZHU -
5HF
0Q/5(&
- -
3KRHQL[5(&
3KRHQL[3OXJ
%RDUG &KDUJHU%RDUG %DWW

- ; -
0Q/3OXJ
0Q/5HF
%DWW ;
--

3DFN
- 2Q2II%XWWRQ
3DFN
--
3DFN
3DFN
9'&%DWWHU\6WDFN
$K95/$
9'&3DFNV
Figure 9-5 Battery Power Diagram
Page 467
%DFNXS +RVSLWDO '9'&' .H\ERDUG ['HWHFWRU ['HWHFWRU

7HWKHU 1HWZRUN %XUQHU &KDUJH &KDUJH %DWWHU\
,QGLFDWRU
5-3 5HFHSWDFOH 5HFHSWDFOH
+\SHUWURQLFV
:L)L :L)L GDWD SRZHU
9'& 'RFNLQJ 'RFNLQJ &ULPSIOH[
3OXJ
86%%XONKHDG &ULPSIOH[
5HF
5-3 5-3 86%$3OXJ 86%$3OXJ 86%$3OXJ +6XE'3OXJ +6XE'3OXJ

5-5 5-5 60$ 60$ 86%$5(& 86%$5(& 86%$5(& +6XE'5HF +6XE'5HF
- - - - - - - - -
0LFURILW3OXJ
0LFURILW5HF
02339DF 3&
0:35
0:&3
9'& -
02339GF
9 %,1&KDUJLQJ%RDUG -
- - - - - -
5-5 5-5 86%$5(& 0'53OXJ 86%$5(& 86%$5(&
5-3 5-3 86%$3OXJ 0'55(& 86%$3OXJ 86%$3OXJ - -
86%WR(7+ 5-5 5-5
86%$5(& $GDSWRU
5-3 5-3 5-3
%OXHWRRWK 86%$3OXJ 5-5
5-5
:L)L %DUFRGH 5-3
$FFHVV3RLQW 5HDGHU /9'6
2SWLRQDO
0'55(&
0'53OXJ 86%%5(& -
P0Q/5(&
P0Q/3OXJ
- - /9/(
'36$VVHPEO\ ;
;
6S\GHU
6\VWHP&RQWUROOHU

Figure 9-6 PC Diagram (Gen 1 only)
Page 468
5HOD\%RDUG 02339DF 3&

&RLO 02339GF
9'& ;
3RZHU5HOD\
&RQWDFW
'HWHFWRU3RZHU
6XSSO\

'36$VVHPEO\
5-3
;
5-5
P0Q/
P0Q/
5(&
:L)L
3/*
$FFHVV3RLQW
+97DQN
N:0DLQ$X[ 0RGXOH 6S\GHU

3KRHQL[3OXJ
$
6\VWHP&RQWUROOHU
N:2SWLRQDO$X[0RGXOH
9'&
3RZHU0RGXOH -
3KRHQL[5(&
3KRHQL[3OXJ
9'&
P0Q/3OXJ
P0Q/5(&
P0Q/3OXJ
- P0Q/5(& -
6XE'5(&
P0Q/5(&
6XE'3OXJ
6XE'3OXJ
P0Q/3OXJ
6XE'5HF
9'&
-
/RFXVW 0233%DWW
'ULYH%RDUG -
-
; -
/9/( 9'&
3&6LGH)$1 3&6LGH)$1
; -
P0Q/5(&
P0Q/3OXJ

9'&
-
0233%DWW
P0Q/5HF
P0Q/3OXJ

-
0Q/3OXJ
0Q/5HF
- $
72:LUHOHVV
&RLO
+DQGVZLWFK
2SWLRQDO
-
0Q/5(& -
0Q/3OXJ &LUFXLW%UHDNHU5HOD\
0HDQRI3DWLHQW3URWHFWLRQ
[0233 /HYHOVRI0233
)LUHIO\
%DWWHU\9ROWDJH &KDUJHU%RDUG
$&/LQH9ROWDJH ;
Figure 9-7 LVLE2 Diagram
Page 469
%DFNXS
7HWKHU
+\SHUWURQLFV
9'&
5-3
5-5
-
02339DF 3&
0:35
0:&3
5HOD\%RDUG 02339GF
&RLO
9'& - 9 ;
3RZHU5HOD\ -
&RQWDFW 5-5
'HWHFWRU3RZHU
6XSSO\ 5-3

'36$VVHPEO\
5-3
;
5-5
P0Q/
P0Q/
5(&
:L)L
3/*
$FFHVV3RLQW
0HDQRI3DWLHQW3URWHFWLRQ '&
[0233 /HYHOVRI0233 $&
%DWWHU\9ROWDJH
$&/LQH9ROWDJH
9'& 9HU\+LJK9ROWDJH
-
P0Q/5(&
P0Q/3OXJ
/9/(
;
0233%DWW
$
-
0Q/5(&
0Q/3OXJ
Figure 9-8 DPS Diagram
Page 470
Section 9.2 System Architecture
2SWLPD;5DP[*HQ6\VWHP$UFKLWHFWXUH
'2&5(9
Figure 9-9 Gen 1 System Architecture Schematic
Page 471
2SWLPD;5DP[*HQ6\VWHP$UFKLWHFWXUH
'2&5(9
Figure 9-10 Gen 2 System Architecture Schematic
Page 472 Section 9.2 System Architecture

Section 9.3 System Wiring
2SWLPD;5DP[*HQ
6\VWHP:LULQJ
:,55(9
Figure 9-11 Gen 1 System Wiring
Page 473
2SWLPD;5DP[*HQ
6\VWHP:LULQJ
:,55(9
Figure 9-12 Gen 2 System Wiring
Page 474 Section 9.3 System Wiring

Section 9.4 PC Connections

9.4.1 PC 5765451 Connections

Item Port Description Item Port Description

1 J13 PLB06M 24V power 11 J14 SMA WiFi Antenna
2 J15 RS232 COM Unused 12 J6 USB 3.0 Bulkhead
• Keyboard, Mouse
3 J16 VGA Unused 13 J7
• Service Key
4 J17 HDMI/DP Unused 14 J8 • CD/DVD, etc.
5 J18 DP Unused 15 J9 USB 3.0 Barcode Reader
6 J19 eSATA Unused 16 J3 LVDS PC Video to Spyder
7 LB RJ45 Loopback (2 ports) 17 J4 RJ45 eth2 Access Point
8 J1 RJ45 eth0 Site Ethernet 18 J5 RJ45 eth3 14x17 Detector
Bin
9 J2 RJ45 eth1 Detector 19 J10 USB 2.0 Spyder Board
Tether
10 J12 20 J11 USB 2.0 USB-to-Eth for
SMA WiFi Antenna
10x12 detector bin eth4
Figure 9-13 PC 5765451 Connections
Page 475
9.4.2 PC 5765451-2 w/ USB Adapter Connections

Item Port Description Item Port Description

1 J13 PLB06M 24V power 14 J8 USB 3.0 Unused
2 J15 RS232 COM Unused 15 J9 USB 3.0 Barcode Reader
3 J16 VGA Unused 16 J3 LVDS PC Video to Spyder
4 J17 HDMI, Secondary Monitor 17 J4 RJ45 eth2 Access Point
5 J18 HDMI Unused 18 J5 RJ45 eth3 14x17 Detector Bin
6 J19 eSATA Unused 19 J10 USB 2.0 Spyder Board
7 LB RJ45 Loopback (2 ports) 20 J11 USB 2.0 USB-to-Eth for 10x12
detector bin eth4
8 J1 RJ45 eth0 Site Ethernet J2 USB 2.0 PCB on Bulkhead
• Keyboard, Mouse
9 J2 RJ45 eth1 Detector Tether 21 J3
• Service Key
10 J12 SMA WiFi Antenna J4 • CD/DVD, etc.
11 J14 SMA WiFi Antenna 22 - Ribbon cable to J20 on PC
(LVLE side)
12 J6 USB 3.0 Secondary Monitor 23 USB4 Internal, Unused
Touch
13 J7 USB 3.0 RFID Badge Reader
Figure 9-14 PC 5765451-2 Connections
Page 476 Section 9.4 PC Connections

Chapter 10 Troubleshooting
Section 10.1 Performing Diagnostics

Follow these steps to diagnose system issues:
1. Review the error log to help determine what system functionality is affected.
- Connect the USB service key to a left-side USB port. Before starting the SUIF, attach the
external CD/DVD drive (both USB connections must be made) and insert the Class M
service docs CD for this product into the CD/DVD drive. You must wait approximately 1
minute for the drive to stop spinning before launching the SUIF.
2. Speak with the system operator to determine under what circumstances issues occur.
3. Test specific areas of the system using the applicable Diagnostic tests in the SUIF.
10.1.1 Running Diagnostics on the System

1. At the SUIF, press the DIAGNOSTICS button.
2. At the left navigation bar, select from among the diagnostic categories (Table 10-1).
3. Press a diagnostic test and follow the on-screen instructions.
Table 10-1 System Diagnostic Categories
Category Description
System Power See 10.1.1.1 Testing System Power
System Control See 10.1.1.2 Testing System Control
Drive and Brakes See 10.1.1.3 Testing the Drive System and Brakes
Generator See 10.1.1.4 Testing the Generator
Detector Tethered See Section 10.5 Detector Troubleshooting on page 565
Wireless Detector See Section 10.5 Detector Troubleshooting on page 565
Communication Details included on product
10.1.1.1 Testing System Power

Table 10-2 describes the system power tests available in the SUIF.
Table 10-2 System Power Tests
Test Description
Power Control Comm Low level communication and control test of the Spyder control board
and other hardware controllers.
Power Control Limits Compares actual battery voltage and current readings to limits.
Power Supply Thermal Compares internal temperature readings to limits.
Collimator Light Reports system recognition of collimator lamp on/off commands from
various inputs.
On/Off Button Disables system shutdown while in diagnostics.
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Page 477

Table 10-2 System Power Tests(Continued)
Test Description
Breaker Trip Tests whether the system is able to control the breaker.
AC Present Tests whether the system recognizes that the power plug is connected
to the receptacle.
10.1.1.2 Testing System Control

Table 10-3 describes the system control tests available in the SUIF.
Table 10-3 System Control Tests
Test Description
Drive Login Reports system recognition of keypad functionality.
System Sanity Includes several tests, including:
• System monitoring checks: Tests actual board voltages of local
and remote supplies against the limits.
• Memory test: Verifies the memory function of the Spyder board.
• Integrity check: Performs board flash storage cyclic redundancy
checks (CRC) to determine if the software code is valid.
• Communication tests: Checks the Spyder ability to test local and
system communications.
Overlay Test Visual check of X-ray on indicators.
Audio Check Audio check of X-ray on indicators.
Video Test Displays the color bar test pattern, and black and white screens to
check for bad pixels.
Wired Handswitch Tests the X-ray generation initiation circuitry.
Wireless Handswitch Tests the X-ray generation initiation circuitry.
10.1.1.3 Testing the Drive System and Brakes

Table 10-4 describes the drive system and brake tests available on the SUIF.
Table 10-4 Drive System and Brake Tests
Test Description
Drive Handle Test Tests whether the system recognizes handle switch activation.
Drive Tests Tests drive directional and speed control functionality.
Brake Tests Tests the drive brakes, vertical column release, column rotation and
arm extension releases, and the tube park latch to determine if each is
able to receive a system signal.
Tube Interlocks Tests whether the system recognizes that the tube park is latched.
Detector Parked Determines if the bin switch recognizes when the detector is in the bin.
Bumper Determines if the system is properly reading signals from the switches
on the bumper.
Page 478 Section 10.1 Performing Diagnostics

10.1.1.4 Testing the Generator

Table 10-5 describes the generator tests available on the SUIF.
Table 10-5 Generator Tests
Test Description
Rotation Test A compound test that includes tube filament impedance and 70C circuit
tests.
Tube Rotor Impedance Tests tube stator winding impedance.
Power Supplies Checks the +13 V, 48 V, 3 V3 power supply.
Resonant Components Determining if the system receives one pulse from each side of each
resonant component.
Inverter Test Tests with low DC bus value and independently driven switches.
Test 70C Circuit Tests to determine if the internal temperature for the HV tank and
control circuitry is within limits.
Rise Time/Regulation Tests the generators ability to recognize and control the DC Bus.
Real Time Lines Test Tests the real time circuitry of components.
Fil 1 Drv Clsd Loop Tests filament driver 1 in closed loop.
Fil 1 Xfmr Primary Tests open load transformer primary for filament 1.
Fil 1 Drv Short Test Tests filament driver 1 in short circuit.
Fil 2 Drv Clsd Loop Tests filament driver 2 in closed loop.
Fil 2 Xfmr Primary Tests open load transformer primary for filament 2.
Fil 2 Drv Short Test Tests filament driver 2 in short circuit.
MA Measurement Tests mA measurement.
KV Measurement Tests kV measurement.
KV Test A compound test that includes:
• kV measurement
• Inverter test
• Resonant component verification
MA Test A compound test that includes:
• mA measurement
• Filament driver 1 in short circuit
• Filament driver 2 in short circuit
• Open load transformer primary for filament 1
• Open load transformer primary for filament 2
• Filament driver 1 in closed loop
• Filament driver 2 in closed loop
Auto Test Tests both mA and kV measurement circuitry in a simulated system
level.

10.1.1.5 Testing the Tethered Detector

Table 10-6 describes the tethered detector tests available on the SUIF.
Table 10-6 Detector (Tethered) Tests
Test Description
Built In Self Test Performs a detector internal memory test.
Ethernet Stats Verifies ability to transfer images through communication
channels with CRC and Image data integrity checking.
10.1.1.6 Testing the Wireless Detector

Table 10-7 describes the wireless detector tests available on the SUIF.
Table 10-7 Wireless Detector Tests
Test Description
Ethernet Stats Verifies ability to transfer images through communication
channels with CRC and Image data integrity checking.
10.1.1.7 Testing Network Communication

Table 10-8 describes the network communication tests available on the SUIF.
Table 10-8 Communication Tests
Test Description
Hospital Network Performs low-level TCP-IP checks to determine if the
system can communicate with the network.
Port to Port Diag Isolates the ports on the PC and, instead, connects them
to one another to test ability to send and receive signals.
Page 480 Section 10.1 Performing Diagnostics

Section 10.2 Remote Troubleshooting

10.2.1 Basic Linux Commands
Terminal window commands are performed in Linux syntax. Below are some basic tools to use for
navigating through a terminal window in Linux.
10.2.1.1 How to locate a file:

• For information on how to use the locate command type: locate --help ENTER.
• To locate a file ignoring case type: locate -i [filename] ENTER.
Example: locate -i sitemaped ENTER will find the file sitemapEd.
• Once the directory where file is located is found, type cd and [space], then highlight the
directory. Use the right mouse button to paste the path to quickly go to the directory.
10.2.1.2 How to copy a file:

• For information on how to use the cp command type: cp --help ENTER.
• You must be a root user to copy files.
• Copy files by using the cp command and create a new name for the file being copied as shown
below. This is important to do prior to editing files.
10.2.1.3 How to view a log file:

• To view the current information in the log file without updates type:
more [filename].log ENTER.
Example: more sysPRM.log ENTER.
The log will start at the beginning, use [Spacebar] to view the entire log if in SSH, [Shift] + [Page
Up/Down] if in engineering terminal.
• To view a desired log in real time, type: tail -f [filename].log ENTER.
Example: tail -f sysPRM.log ENTER.
This will allow you to follow the desired log file and get updates while activities are being done
on the system.
To exit out of the log and return to command prompt press: [Control] + C

10.2.2 Enable and Disable VNC

VNC (Virtual Network Connect or Computing) is enabled for all XR240 systems. This feature allows
for the remote user to view, and control the UI (User Interface) of the system. Prior to enabling VNC
the remote user must enable a remote shell using SSH and type the following commands:
1. Type: cd /magichome/xruser/bin ENTER.
2. Type: ./insitevnc start ENTER.
Once this is done, you can select "VNC" and the session will work. If the above commands are not
done then VNC will not start when selected.
Note: Once VNC session is completed the VNC server will need to stopped.
To stop the VNC server type the following commands:
1. If not already in the directory, type: cd /magichome/xruser/bin ENTER.
2. Stop the server by typing: ./insitevnc stop ENTER.
10.2.3 Reset AP
Resetting the AP can be done if it is believed that the AP software or configuration is causing issues
with system to detector communication. Once the AP reset is done, reboot the system, then Commit
the Country selection in SUIF > Configuration > Site, then reboot again. The selection for Country
will remain the same, however the information will need to be committed and the system needs to
be restarted for the Country value to be updated back to the AP. All detectors will need to be
repaired, but not re-registered once this is done as well.
Gen 1 only - To reset the AP configuration for Gen 1, type:
sudo /magichome/xruser/bin/interfaceToAccessPoint factoryReset ENTER
Gen 2 only - To reset the AP configuration for Gen 2, type:
cd /magichome/xruser/bin ENTER.
./serviceAccessPoint.sh factoryReset ENTER.
10.2.4 Battery
The sysPrm.log now lists information about the generator and the battery at exposure.
Open the sysPRM.log by going to directory: /magichome/xruser/log/ ENTER.
Once in the proper directory, you can use Nautilus or simply type: more sysPRM.log ENTER.
10.2.5 Detector
XRImDet.log - This log can be used to determine pairing errors and help to determine the primary
detector.
SoftFlashPad.log - This log communication between the system and the detector. This log reports
detector boot and communication with the detector from the system.
Pki_detectors.log - This log is directly from the detector but does not have much use in
determining system to detector functionality.
aplogs.log - This log file comes directly from the AP and can help to find the status of the wireless
communication between the primary detector and the system.
10.2.6 PC
Below is a list of different logs and executables that may help you for root cause analysis.
Page 482 Section 10.2 Remote Troubleshooting

10.2.6.1 Checking how long the system has been up without a restart
It is recommended that the system be restarted at a minimum of once a week. To check when the
system was last restarted type:
uptime ENTER.
10.2.6.2 Checking disk space on the system

Type: df -h ENTER. This command will allow you to check the size of the disk, how much of the
disk is used, how much is available, and the amount of used by percentage.
Type: free ENTER. This command will give you a readout of how much memory as well include
what is shared, the buffers, and what is cached.
10.2.6.3 PC Wireless Communication

• Check the Dmesg log for messages related to wlan.
• Type: ifconfig ENTER to list out the Ethernet ports on the system.
- br1: Bridge Interface
- eth0: Hospital Wired
- eth1: Detector Tether
- eth2: Detector Wireless (AP)
- eth3: Bin large detector
- eth4: Bin small detector
- wlan0: Hospital wireless
- lo: Loopback interface
• Type: iwconfig wlan1 ENTER to check the configure of wlan and signal quality.
• Type: iwlist wlan1 SCAN ENTER this command will execute a scan for the access points
that can be recognized by the PC.
• Type: ping [AP IP address] ENTER this command will allow you to verify that the
wireless AP and the PC is communicating.
• Check processing times you can review the sysMSG.log file for the below types of messages
and use the time stamps for guidance:
- 2532,2016-05-09,08:49:28:074,"VEN", XRImProc,1, START ACQUISITION - ACQ_ID:
76 APPTYPE = SE
- 2543,2016-05-09,08:49:31:131,"VEN", XRImProc,1,
PREVIEW_PROCESSING_START| 1: 6: 4.264.109
- 2544,2016-05-09,08:49:31:274,"VEN", XRImProc,1,
FAST_PREVIEW_PROCESSING_DONE| 1: 6: 4.408.118
- 2551,2016-05-09,08:49:35:469,"VEN", XRImProc,1, RAW_PROCESSING_START| 1: 6:
8.602.724
- 2552,2016-05-09,08:49:36:504,"VEN", XRImProc,1, RAW_PROCESSING_DONE| 1: 6:
9.638.234
- 2557,2016-05-09,08:49:36:571,"VEN", XRImProc,1,
SE_CONDITIONED_PROCESSING_START| 1: 6: 9.705.239
- 2558,2016-05-09,08:49:42:988,"VEN", XRImProc,1,
SE_CONDITIONED_PROCESSING_DONE| 1: 6:16.121.592
• Check for write issues on the Database type: smartctl ENTER.

10.2.7 SSA
The SSA feature does have a log that can be accessed through the SUIF under Configuration ->
Site. In the Site page scroll to the bottom and select the icon labeled Service Contract Management.
A GUI will open and there will be a selection for View Log.
If the system is not able to enable VNC, this same log can be view by typing the following command:
more /enggdata/log/AuthManager.log ENTER.
10.2.8 System Snapshot

For some conditions and errors a snapshot is needed for engineering investigations. Generally, it
is best to take the snapshot during the error because a reboot clears any conditions. However, a
post-reboot snapshot may still be useful. Ideally, when the snapshot is created OLE/TSE can
remotely log into the system and transfer the snapshot to Healthcare Secure Transfer. If the system
is not remotely connected, the snapshot will need to be created, copied onto a USB stick, and then
loaded into the Healthcare Secure Transfer web site via a laptop.
Note: All snapshots are completely wiped if a software load is performed.
10.2.8.1 Snapshot Prerequisites, Tools and Test Equipment

• Encrypted USB Stick that is FAT32 formatted
• GE Laptop
• Access to Healthcare Secure Transfer web site (see below)
10.2.8.2 Access to Healthcare Secure Transfer Web Site

All Snapshots pulled from the systems need to be loaded on Healthcare Secure Transfer. You will
need access to Healthcare Secure Transfer to view the snapshot if there is an issue that you need
to investigate.
1. Use this link to the GE MyTech page which includes the user guide and FAQs for Healthcare
Secure Transfer:
https://mytech.ge.com/help-and-support/article?id=GEKB2012981&locale=en

2. Complete the training shown below.
Figure 10-1 Global Privacy Training as shown in SupportCentral page
3. Join a Network Security Group through OneIDM:

a. In the drop-down menu for All Businesses select GE Healthcare
b. In the drop-down menu for All Groups leave the default selection, search for a group
name, or choose Group Name
c. In the keyword search type in one of the following options from the user guide that applies
to you:
d. Click Search
4. Join the Network Security Group.
5. For any issues, please use the SupportCentral website to raise a ticket.
10.2.8.3 Snapshot Creation Process

There are several ways to create a Snapshot; via the SUIF, via the ENGUI, or via the xTerm/SSH.
Another acceptable technique for capturing a snapshot is using Nautilus in HeliOS but is not
explained here.
10.2.8.3.1 Snapshot using SUIF

1. Open the SUIF and navigate to Utilities > Create System Snapshot
2. Press the START button. See figure below.

Figure 10-2 Create System Snapshot in SUIF
3. You will see a Snapshot in Progress popup.

4. Wait for completion.
5. Proceed to 10.2.8.5 Copying the Snapshot to USB on page 487.
10.2.8.3.2 Snapshot using ENGUI

1. Insert your SSA Key and press CTRL+SHIFT+F5 on the service keyboard.
2. The screen below appears. Press the Snapshot (camera) icon.
Figure 10-3 Snapshot Icon
3. You will be prompted to enter a name for the file (figure below).
Figure 10-4 File Name Prompt
4. Press OK.

5. You will see a Snapshot in Progress popup.

10.2.8.4 Snapshot using xTerm/SSH

A snapshot can be manually created via SSH remotely or in the engineering terminal (xTerm).
To create a snapshot via the engineering terminal:
2. The screen below appears. Press the Terminal icon.
3. Type the commands (shown below) to create a snapshot:

cd /magichome/xruser/engg ENTER.
./collectLogs.sh ENTER.

If creating a snapshot remotely via SSH, the commands are the same as stated in Step 3 above. It
then becomes much easier to retrieve the snapshot as it can be transferred to your local PC directly
via the InSite agent (using SFTP/FTP function) and then uploaded to global shares.
10.2.8.5 Copying the Snapshot to USB

If the system is connected via InSite, contact OLE/TSE to remotely download the snapshot and
upload to Healthcare Secure Transfer.
If the system is not connected, the snapshot must be retrieved manually. Follow the steps below:
2. The screen below appears. Press the Terminal icon.

3. Login as root.
Type: su root ENTER
4. Remove SSA Key but do not close the terminal—if you do, you will need to reinsert SSA Key
and reopen/restart.
5. Place a USB disk into one of the left available USB ports on the system.
6. When the USB disk is inserted onto the system, it should be auto mounted. Verify that USB
disk is mounted:
Type: mount /media/usbdisk ENTER
7. Verify that the disk is already mounted as shown in the figure below.
8. You may receive other errors such as does not exist. Confirm the USB is mounted by
changing directories:
Type: cd /media/usbdisk ENTER
9. If the suffix between the brackets says usbdisk, then it is mounted:

[xruser@magic usbdisk]
10. Go to the Snapshot directory:
Type: cd /enggdata/Snapshots/ ENTER
11. List the snapshots on the system:
Type: ls ENTER

12. Copy the desired snapshot to the USB:

Type: cp /enggdata/Snapshots/desired file name.zip /media/usbdisk
ENTER
You can use Tab on the keyboard to autofill the snapshot. Be careful of snapshots having the
same name except for the date.
13. Verify the Snapshots have been copied successfully to the USB disk:
Type: cd /media/usbdisk ENTER
14. List the contents of the USB disk and verify the content is present on the USB disk:
Type: ls ENTER
15. Exit the USB disk directory:

Type: cd / ENTER
16. Be sure to unmount the USB disk, at next prompt:
Type: umount /media/usbdisk ENTER
17. Remove the USB disk from the system. Close the terminal window.
18. Place the USB disk into your GE PC.
19. Rename the file(s) on the USB to append the prefix: XR_Customer Site Name_System
ID_CSO_
Example: snap_-No_PROB_DESCRIPTION-WedOct7121449EDT2015.zip should be
renamed to:
XR_Holland_616394D5K_CSO_snap_-No_PROB_DESCRIPTION-
WedOct7121449EDT2015.zip
20. Proceed to 10.2.8.6 Placing Snapshots into Healthcare Secure Transfer below.

10.2.8.6 Placing Snapshots into Healthcare Secure Transfer

1. Open Healthcare Secure Transfer on your PC at http://bench.ge.com/977226/portal/360044
and upload the snapshot to Healthcare Secure Transfer by dragging and dropping the file/
folder or selecting the File/Folder Upload option.
- Rename the file(s) to append the prefix: XR_Customer Site Name_System ID_CSO_
Example: snap_-No_PROB_DESCRIPTION-WedOct7121449EDT2015.zip should be
renamed to:
XR_Holland_616394D5K_CSO_snap_-No_PROB_DESCRIPTION-
WedOct7121449EDT2015.zip
- Note: Transfer from a USB does require USB port exemption on your laptop.
- Note: You may be required to enter an F5 remote key to proceed with upload or
download.
2. Once the file/folder is uploaded, the Regional User can make the file/folder visible to Global
Engineering by moving the data from the Regional Folder (example in Figure 10-7) to the
respective Regional Escalation Folder (example in Figure 10-8)
- The Regional Escalation Folder is visible to both the Regional and Global Teams.
- NOTE: Data will be purged from the Regional Escalation Folder after 30 days.
Figure 10-7 Regional Folder
Figure 10-8 Regional Escalation Folder

10.2.9 Hardware Snapshot

A hardware snapshot is used to capture all the logs of the microcontrollers to help with hardware-
related issues. This includes the Firefly, Locust, Spyder, Djinn Generator logs.
10.2.9.1 Prerequisites
• 4GB USB Stick that is FAT32 formatted. Any USB Stick with a higher memory capacity must
be formatted with a disk management tool with 4GB as the partition size and FAT32 as the file
format.
Note: To re-format a USB stick to 4GB, plug it into your laptop, open File Explorer, right-click on the USB
drive, and select "Format". Set the allocation unit size to 4069.
10.2.9.2 Procedure
1. Insert the 4GB USB Stick into the far-right USB ports on the system (closest to handswitch)
2. Go to SUIF → Diagnostics → Hardware Diagnostics → Hardware Snapshot
3. Press Start to export the snapshots onto the 4GB USB Stick and wait for the export to
complete.
10.2.10 File Transfer Exposed Directories (Gen 1 only)

• /enggdata/Snapshots - directory which is labeled as Snapshot folder.
• /database/image_export - directory which is labeled as Images folder.
• /var/log - directory which is labeled as Boot Logs folder.
• /magichome/enggdata/log - directory which is which is labeled as Networking Logs folder.
10.2.11 How to move Archive Logs in exposed directory for File Transfer
(Gen 1 only)
This process details how to copy archive logs to the back office, with the assumption that a SSH
terminal window is already opened.
1. In SSH terminal window type: cd /enggdata/log_archives ENTER.
2. Copy the files to the exposed Snapshot folder for file transfer by typing: cp log_[date and
time stamp needed] /enggdata/Snapshots ENTER.
3. Once this is done you will see the log listed under the Snapshot folder for File Transfer.
10.2.12 How to move QAP/CAL files in exposed directory for File Transfer
(Gen 1 only)
This process details how to copy archive logs to the back office, with the assumption that a SSH
terminal window is already opened.
1. Go to the desired directory where the information is located by typing:
cd /magichome/xruser/config/IDC/DetectorData/ ENTER.
/magichome/xruser/log/sysMSG.log ENTER.
2. To determine the detectors configured on the system, and which detector is currently in use
(example shown below) type: ls -ltr ENTER.

3. The listed detector what has the current, or most recent time stamp is the detector in use. In
the above example it is detector serial number 3174941701620.
4. Access the detector files by typing: cd [Detector Serial Number] ENTER.
Example using same detector is shown below.
5. The detector will have approximately 30 files. For ease in transferring the files create a
directory using the detector serial number for easy identification by typing:
mkdir /enggdata/Snapshots/[Detector Serial Number] ENTER.
6. Copy the created directory by typing:
cp *.* /enggdata/Snapshots/[Detector Serial Number] ENTER.
7. The created file will now be located under the Snapshots folder for file transfer. Each of the
files will still have to be transferred over to the back office, you can selection multiple files as
long as it is under 1GB in size.
10.2.13 Locating QAP/CAL Files (Gen 2 only)

This process details how to locate QAP/CAL XR240amx files with the assumption that a SSH
terminal window is already open
The new QAP/CAL XR240axm files can be found in the following directories.
The dark images can be located by typing:
/enggdata/IDC/TABLETOP
The result files can be located by typing:
/export/home/insite/server/htdocs/suif/iq/en/iqst/DigitalCassette
Note: It is not necessary to move these files to an exposed directory during remote troubleshooting.
10.2.14 Checking Software and Hardware Versions

Use the following commands to determine the software and/or hardware version on the system.
To determine the SW version type: swhwinfo ENTER.

To determine the extended SW version, Application versions, and hardware versions type:
swhwinfo -all ENTER.
10.2.15 Pulling Images

This process details how to have an image, both raw and processed sent to an exposed directory
labeled Images for file transfer.
1. On the system, anonymize the image that needs to be sent to back office.
2. Select the anonymized image, from the series.
3. Under Image Tools select Export for InSite as shown below.
4. This process can be repeated for sending the raw image as well if requested.
5. Go to /database/image_export to locate the image files.

10.2.16 Nautilus
Nautilus is a commonly used tool in the field on X-ray systems. Due to Nautilus being a separate UI
it can only be used through VNC when remotely connected. To enable VNC, see 10.2.2 Enable and
Disable VNC on page 482. It is suggested to use SSH for copying and updating files.
To start Nautilus:
1. On-Site FE must insert SSA Key and Open an engineering terminal
2. Remote user can (through VNC) type: nautilus ENTER into the engineering terminal to
start the Nautilus UI.

Section 10.3 Djinn Generator Troubleshooting Guide
Figure 10-9 Djinn Beetle Wiring Diagram
This section consists of the following topics:

Initial Steps & Common issues…………………………… Page 496
Complete Table of Generator Errors............……………. Page 501
In-depth Description Generator and Parts ……………… Page 511
Specific Error Code Handling and Actions ……………… Page 521
10.3.1 Introduction
The Djinn Beetle generator is the X-ray generation subsystem used in Optima XR240amx systems.
It is a bootable subsystem with 2 way CANOpen communication to the system. Logic power is a
48V DC input from the system’s LVLE2. Battery stack voltage is also input to the generator.
The troubleshooting steps will involve the following:

Error Code: For each error code, a list of Potential GENERATOR FRU involved is given. There is
also a specific section for each error giving specific trouble shooting steps.
System diagnostics: Automated tests (performed by the System with a PASS/FAIL status report).

FE actions: Tests (performed by the System with a manual set-up), or manual tests (electrical
measurements, cable checks….)
In each diagnostic sequence, a list of actions is listed, System diagnostics are named “Diag” and
FE actions are named “FE”. Based on this action result, some FRUs can be excluded. If several
FRUs are still possibly faulty, then another diagnostic will be applied, and so on. However if only
one FRU can be faulty, then the FRU is isolated and the action result is given.
10.3.2 Initial System and Generator Troubleshooting Steps
Recommended Order of Troubleshooting steps

Step Description
If Generator doesn't power up properly, check LEDs (page 517) and generator & system cabling
1
(communication error or auto diag error) – see section on common issues
2 Check Error Log thru service menu using M class service key, identify possible FRUs
Go to error specific instructions for diagnostics, if multiple errors check for FRU commonality,
3
execute simple tests first
4 If the errors could involve the tube and generator, follow these basic steps first to rule out FRUs
Basic Tube Steps Basic Generator/System Steps
System Filament Diagnostics (SUIF – Diagnostics - Error code specific diagnostic steps
Generator))
- Fil 1,2 Xfmr Primary; Fil 1,2 Drv Clsd Loop; Fil 1,2 Drv
Short Test
System Rotor Diagnostics (SUIF – Diagnostics - Check battery voltages (SUIF-Diagnostics-Hardware
Generator) Diagnostics-Power Control Limits)
- Tube rotor impedance
Verify Rotor can spin (hold down hand trigger ½ LED Check (page 519) and cable check if not starting
way and listen for the rotor) up properly - covers must be removed
Tube Stator Resistance Test, pg. 544 Cable check, generator and system connections
Check thermal sensor cable (pg. 552)
5 If possible, after fix, confirm that system is functional and robust
10.3.3 Common Issues
10.3.3.1 No Communication with Djinn or Generator Fails to Boot

There are several ways to identify if the generator is communicating (with the system). The most
basic communication can be verified at the Techniques Screen. If non-zero kVp and mAs values
are displayed, it’s likely that the system is communicating with the generator. If zeros or dots are
displayed, there is a communications issue.
Page 496 Section 10.3 Djinn Generator Troubleshooting Guide

Example screen of when generator communication is lost
The generator subsystem will communicate to the system if the Main Auxiliary Module is
disconnected or not communicating. If the power module is not communicating there will be no
communication with the system.
In these situations, you would normally expect to see the following errors:
FRU System System errortext debug text (with M class service key)
disconnected error code
Main Aux 3600124 Generator DjinnError 0480H: Rotor communication problem, 087BH:
Communication Failure Rotation not ready when requested temperature
Main Aux 3606001 Generator Error Generator in ERROR state
Power 3600124 Generator Communication with the generator has been lost
Module Communication Failure
Diagnostic sequence: Check the following, if these functions are not working as expected, the
problem may be deeper than a communication issue.
• Check cables between Power Module and Main Auxiliary Module and System. Run LVLE2
CAN cable connection test; LVLE2 output voltage tests starting on pg. 546.
• Check that techniques adjust normally, without added delay. If there is any latency between
adjacent selections, there may be other system issues.
• Check Djinn Beetle LEDs status (pg. 517), if all LEDs are off, refer to error 0A85 and check
power connections.
• Restart system and Djinn Generator (Power OFF / Power ON).
• If problem persists, re-download Djinn Software.
10.3.3.2 Boot up with Generator in Error State

With SW D4.2.9A and B, there is a known issue with the Djinn Generator if it boots with an error
before the system is ready to receive the error code. This was fixed in SW D.4.2.9F release. In this
situation, the system will indicate that the generator did not boot without showing the true error.
Additionally, generator communications will not be possible in this error state.
error errortext debug text

code
3606024 Generator Power Up Failure Generator boot timed out. Failed to boot to standby
In This State the System Will The System Will Not The System May Allow

Show a generator boot error Allow techniques to be adjusted Generator SW Download – may
take several reboots / attempts
Pass any Generator Diagnostics
Show actual Generator reported
errors in Error Log.
There are a few ways to troubleshoot at this point and these should always be attempted before
ordering parts.
1. Analyze the Class M Error Log. Look for generator errors that may have happened in the
recent past, these may contain the information needed to troubleshoot the true issue.
2. Look for other errors or issues with the system, specifically ones that are related to the
functions of the Spyder board. It’s possible that the Spyder board may be corrupt causing
communication issues with the Djinn, troubleshoot Spyder board if needed.
3. Check Auxiliary and PM LEDs (pg. 518)
4. Complete Cable Checks within the generator and between the system, check for continuity
within the cables with multi meter where possible.
5. Attempt several reboots. If you can get the generator to boot (without error) even one time, you
may be able to reproduce the error and then the system will display this error. Use the Debug
text portion of the error to troubleshoot further.
6. Perform a Generator SW Download. This may take several attempts / reboots. If successful,
it may overwrite corrupt data and solve the issue.
7. Replace the Power Module.
8. Replace the Main Auxiliary Module.
9. Replace the Spyder Board.
10.3.3.3 Power Supply and Battery Related Errors

There are a few different things to check to qualify if the issues are related to the systems battery
stack. Check the errors below before replacing any FRUs. If these errors match your situation,
evaluate the batteries first.
System System errortext debug text (M class service Remarks

error key)
code
8300101 when any logic power NA System reported error that indicates low logic
out of spec. power on the Locust board. When combined
with the errors below, this almost always
indicates a battery issue.
8300102 when any fuse on the NA System reported error that indicates low logic
locust board are power on the Locust board. When combined
broken with the errors above, this almost always
indicates a battery issue.
3606001 Generator error Generator is in ERROR state Typical (system reported) generator error when
exhibiting battery issues

System System errortext debug text (M class service Remarks

error key)
code
3600131 Generator Warning DjinnError 0581H: Low input
Error voltage during boost while Vin <
95V
Typical generator reported error when
3600130 Generator Abort Error DjinnError 0523H: Input stage
exhibiting battery issues
damaged
3600134 Generator Inhibit non- DjinnError 0A81H: Misc: Internal
thermal Error power supplies out of spec
3600134 Generator Inhibit non- DjinnError 0466H Rotor: 48V Typical generator error when exhibiting battery
thermal Error supply rotation circuit out of range issues. This issue could also be related to the
[40V-50V] 48VDC supplied by the LVLE2.
3600134 Generator Inhibit non- DjinnError 0108H: Fil small: 48V
thermal Error supply filament circuit out of range
[44V-52V]
Occasional generator error when exhibiting
3600134 Generator Inhibit non- DjinnError 0202H: Fil large:
battery issues. This issue could also be related
thermal Error Filament open circuit detected
to the 48VDC supplied by the LVLE2.
3600130 Generator Abort Error DjinnError 0100H: Fil large:
Unexpected generator firmware
error
10.3.3.4 Djinn Reboots / Clicking Noise

When the generator boots it will make a few faint clicking noises, which is completely normal. These
noises can also be heard during a Firmware download and during a Generator SW Download. The
noises are relay contacts that the generator activates several times during these processes.
However, if the generator continues to make these clicking noises, this indicates that something is
wrong, usually that the generator is not able to boot. If the generator continues to click after boot:
Inspect power connections and voltage levels to the Main Auxiliary Module and Power Module.
Refer to error 0A85.
Perform the Djinn Main Auxiliary Fuse Test.
Replace Power Module if not resolved
10.3.3.5 Exposure Does Not Start

There are cases where exposures will not start but no generator error is produced. Use this
sequence to diagnose if the generator may be the source of the issue.
Diagnostic sequence:

ǆƉŽƐƵƌĞĚŽĞƐŶŽƚƐƚĂƌƚ
/ŶǀĞƐƚŝŐĂƚĞ
^ǇƐƚĞŵƚŽũŝŶŶ
ĐĂďůĞ
ŽĞƐĞǆƉŽƐƵƌĞƐƚĂƌƚ ͍
12 <(6
& ͗ 'ƌŽƵŶĚǁŝƌŝŶŐƚĞƐƚ E ͗

WƌŽďůĞŵƐŽůǀĞĚ
)$,/ 3$66
E ͗
ŚĂŶŐĞWKtZ
ŽƌƌĞĐƚŐƌŽƵŶĚ
DKh>
ǁŝƌŝŶŐ
ŽĞƐĞǆƉŽƐƵƌĞƐƚĂƌƚ ͍
12 <(6
E ͗
E ͗
/ŶǀĞƐƚŝŐĂƚĞ^ƉǇĚĞƌ
WƌŽďůĞŵƐŽůǀĞĚ
ďŽĂƌĚ
Figure 10-10
10.3.3.6 Wiring
If wiring issues are at all suspected, it is strongly advised to closely inspect everything. Here are
some things to look for:
- Loose wires inside of connectors
- Receded pins / receptacles inside of cable connectors
- Loose terminals on the HV Tank, Power and Main Aux Modules
- Visually inspect for pinched insulation within the connectors
10.3.3.7 Fuse on Main Auxiliary Module

There is a non-replaceable fuse inside of the MAIN AUXILIARY Module (on Batteries voltage). It
can be tested via the Djinn Main Auxiliary Fuse Test (see section starting on pg. 535).
If the fuse is blown, the generator will not be supplied by the battery anymore, and will report error
0584 (see section starting on pg. 535)

10.3.4 Description of Djinn Beetle Errors
10.3.4.1 System Reported Error Related to generator:
System Reported
Description
Error Code
3600130 Generator Abort Error
3600131 Generator Warning Error
3600132 Generator Debug Error
3600133 Generator Inhibit thermal Error
3600134 Generator Inhibit non-thermal Error
The generic errors shown above may be displayed to the customer on the applications screen if a
generator issue occurs. Additional more detailed errors are present in the class M error log. For
example, the system raises the Abort error 3600130 if the Djinn sends it any Abort class error.
Similarly the system raises the Warning error 3600131 if the Djinn sends it any Warning class error
and so on.
Generator error codes consist of four numbers written in hexadecimal. The first two digits describe
the Djinn module sub component to which the error is related, as you can see in the table below.
The last two digits provide the specific details of the error condition.
First two digits of

Djinn sub Components
Djinn Error Code
01 Heater 1 (Small Filament)

02 Heater 2 (Large Filament)
04 Rotor
05 Boost / DC Bus
06 KV
07 Thermal
08 System
09 Boot
0A Various
0B MA Generation
81 CAN Open
10.3.4.2 Complete Table of Generator Errors:

This table lists every possible generator error code, description and likely related FRUs. This table
is meant to help in the case where multiple error codes are seen, it is then critical to evaluate the
FRU commonalities and interactions between FRUs to find the correct FRU(s). The error specific
diagnostic instructions starting on page 521 can be followed if a single error is occurring to fix the
issue.

Table 10-9 Generator Error Codes
Involved FRUs
Generator Check for Generator

Error Code Error Tube/ HV System Power HV Aux Aux
Error presence of Set of LVLE2 Batteries
Description class cables cables Module Tank 15kW 30kW
Code other errors Cables
Fil Small
Unexpected INHIBI
0100 X
generator firmware T
error
Fil Small: Filament

INHIBI
0101 over current X
T
detected
Fil small: Filament INHIBI

0102 X X X X
open circuit detected T
Fil small: Filament

INHIBI
0103 drive current X
T
exceeds max limit
Fil small: Filament

INHIBI
0104 drive current below X
T
min limit
Fil small: Filament

INHIBI
0105 inverter is off and X
T
current not zero
Fil small: Over

INHIBI
0107 current detection on X
T
filament
Fil small: 48V supply

INHIBI
0108 filament circuit out of X X
T
range [44V-52V]
Fil small:
Unexpected INHIBI
0181 X
error
Fil small: Autodiag

DEBU
0183 failed during X
G
generator boot
Fil large:
Unexpected INHIBI
0200 X
error
Fil large: Filament

INHIBI
0201 over current X
T
detected
Fil large: Filament INHIBI

0202 X X X X
open circuit detected T
Fil large: Filament

INHIBI
0203 drive current X
T
exceeds max limit
Fil large: Filament

INHIBI
0204 drive current below X
T
min limit
Fil large: Filament

INHIBI
T
current not zero
Fil large: Over

INHIBI
0207 current detection on X
T
filament

Table 10-9 Generator Error Codes(Continued)
Involved FRUs

Fil small: 48V supply

INHIBI
0208 filament circuit out of X X
T
range [44V-52V]
Fil small:
Unexpected INHIBI
0281 X
error
Fil large: Autodiag

DEBU
0283 failed during X
G
generator boot
Rotor: Lost rotor

communication INHIBI
0401 X X X
between Power and T
Main Aux modules
Rotor: Generator
SW corruption. INHIBI
0402 X
Download generator T
SW
Rotor: Over current

0403 detected on rotation ABORT X X
phases.
Rotor: Open circuit

phases.
Rotor: Rotation
0405 phases current ABORT X X X
unbalanced.
Rotor: Rotation
0406 phases angle error ABORT X X
detected.
Rotor: Rotation
INHIBI
T
current not zero.
Rotor: Generator
0409 ABORT X
SW corruption
Engineering:
INHIBI
0410 Simulation Rotor SW X
T
detected
Rotor: Generator
INHIBI
0412 SW corruption at X
T
boot
Rotor: Over current

phases
Rotor:
Communication
INHIBI
0458 failure between X X X
T
Power and Main Aux
modules

Involved FRUs

Rotor:
Communication
INHIBI
T
Power and Main Aux
modules
Rotor:
Communication
INHIBI
T
Power and Main Aux
modules
Rotor:
Communication
INHIBI
T
Power and Main Aux
modules
Rotor: 48V supply

0466 rotation circuit out of X ABORT X X
range [40V-50V]
Rotor: Current
0467 measurement issue ABORT X
on rotation
Rotor: Measurement
0468 ABORT X
circuit failure at boot
Rotor:
Communication
INHIBI
T
Power and Main Aux
modules
Rotor: Board found

INHIBI
0481 in reset state. Reset X
T
system
Rotor: State
mismatch between INHIBI
0482 X
Power and Main Aux T
modules
Rotor: State
0483 X
modules
Rotor: State
0484 X
modules
Rotor: State
0485 X
modules
Rotor: State
mismatch between
0486 ABORT X
Power and Main Aux
modules.
Rotor: Service mode

diagnostic DEBU
0487 X
communication G
failure

Involved FRUs

Rotor: Speed
communication
0488 failure between ABORT X X X
Power and Main Aux
modules
Rotor: Generator
detected INHIBI
0489 X
incompatible rotor T
board circuit
Input stage:
Unexpected
0500 ABORT X
generator firmware
error
Input stage: DC Bus

0501 command out of ABORT X
range [100V-420V]
Input stage: DC Bus

rise time too fast
0503 during DC Bus ABORT X X X X
charge [DC Bus <
200V]
Input stage: DC Bus

rising time too slow
0504 during DC Bus ABORT X X X X
charge [DC Bus <
200V]
Input stage: No input

current detected
0505 ABORT X
during DC Bus
charge
Input stage: Over

voltage on DC INHIBI
0510 X
output detected [DC T
Bus > 460V]
Input stage:
Unexpected INHIBI
0511 X
error
Input stage:
Software over input INHIBI
0520 X
current detected [Iin T
> 140A]
Input stage: Input INHIBI

0523 X
stage damaged T
Input stage:
Hardware over input INHIBI
0524 X
current detected [Iin T
> 140A]
Input stage: Boot

INHIBI
0525 timeout when boot is X
T
started
Input stage: DC Bus

0580 timeout when boot is ABORT X
started

Involved FRUs

Input stage: Low

input voltage during DEBU
0581 X X X X
boost while Vin < G
95V
Input stage: High

input voltage during INHIBI
0582 X X X
boost while Vin > T
200V
Input stage: Low DC

Bus voltage during INHIBI
0583 X X X X X
boost while Vout < T
280V
Input stage: No input

voltage detected
0584 ABORT X X X X
before boost start
[Vin < 90V]
Input stage: Input

current detected INHIBI
0585 X X
while boost is off [Iin T
> 8A]
kV: Unexpected
0600 generator firmware ABORT X
error
kV: Exposure
0601 sequence error from ABORT X X
system
kV: Unbalanced kV
0602 [kV cathode - kV ABORT X X X X
anode > 10kV]
kV: Unbalanced kV
0603 [kV anode - kV ABORT X X X X
cathode > 10kV]
kV: kV max reached

on anode [kV >
0604 X ABORT X X X X
125% of kV anode
target]
kV: kV max reached

on cathode [kV >
0605 X ABORT X X X X
125% of kV cathode
target]
kV: Too many spits

0606 detected [spits count ABORT X X
> 8 per second]
kV: Inverter current

0607 X X X
measured & T
expected values.
kV: Inverter over

INHIBI
0608 current detected [ILR X X X
T
> 250A]
kV: Measured kV is
greater than target
0609 ABORT X X
before exposure
start

Involved FRUs

kV: Measured kV too

060A low after exposure ABORT X X X
start [kV < 3kV]
kV: Unexpected
060C generator firmware ABORT X
error
kV: Measured kV too

low during exposure
060E X ABORT X X X X
[kV < 75% of kV
target]
kV: Inverter current INHIBI

060F X
regulation issue T
RTL: Issue detected

INHIBI
0611 on X-ray hardware X X
T
command (RTL2)
RTL: Issue detected

INHIBI
0613 on X-ray hardware X X
T
enable (RTL4)
kV: Techniques
DEBU
0616 demanded cannot X X X X X
G
be achieved
kV: Synchronization
0681 issue at exposure ABORT X
start
kV: kV detected
INHIBI
0684 while inverter is off X
T
[kV > 1kV]
kV: Resonant
current detected INHIBI
0685 X
while inverter is off T
[ILR > 1A]
Thermal: Tube
INHIBI
0701 overtemp switch X X
T
open
Thermal: Tank
INHIBI
0702 temperature is too X
T
high
Thermal: Power
INHIBI
0703 board temperature is X
T
too high
Thermal: Filament
INHIBI
T
too high
Thermal: Rotor
INHIBI
T
too high
Thermal: Tank
DEBU
0706 temperature is X
G
getting hot
Thermal: Power
DEBU
G
rising

Involved FRUs

Thermal: Filament
DEBU
G
rising
Thermal: Rotor
DEBU
G
rising
Thermal: Tank
INHIBI
0782 temperature sensor X X
T
failure is detected
Thermal: Power
INHIBI
0783 board temperature X
T
sensor failure
Thermal: Tube
INHIBI
0784 thermal protection X
T
error
Config: Revision
INHIBI
0785 device configuration X X X
T
failure detected
Config: Unexpected
INHIBI
0786 generator parts X X X
T
detected
Config: Generator
INHIBI
0787 parts identification is X X X
T
impossible
Thermal: Filament
INHIBI
0788 board temperature X
T
sensor failure
Thermal: Thermal
sensor INHIBI
0789 X X X
communication T
failure
Thermal: There is no
response from at INHIBI
078A X X X
least one thermal T
sensor
Thermal: Rotor
INHIBI
078B board temperature X
T
sensor failure
Thermal: Incorrect
temperature on INHIBI
078C X
Rotor board sensor T
ID
Sys: Exposure start

0801 timeout [Time > ABORT X X
180s]
WDT: Watchdog SW
0802 ABORT X
error on CanCtrl task
WDT: Watchdog SW
0803 ABORT X
error on DevCtrl task
WDT: Watchdog SW
0804 ABORT X
error on SysCtrl task

Involved FRUs

Sys: System
INHIBI
0805 identification X X
T
mismatch
Sys: System CAN

0806 command received ABORT X
is unknown
WDT: Watchdog SW
0814 error on RoseRT ABORT X
task
Boot: Download has

INHIBI
0901 been requested by X
T
system
Boot: No application
INHIBI
0902 or application X
T
corruption
Boot: No database
INHIBI
0903 or database X
T
corrupted
Boot: Database not INHIBI

0905 X
compatible with SW T
Boot: Application not INHIBI

0906 X
compatible with Boot T
Boot: FPGA missing INHIBI

0907 X
or corrupted T
Boot: FPGA not DEBU

0908 X
compatible with SW G
Boot: Rotor FW not DEBU

0909 X
compatible with SW G
Boot: Boot INHIBI

090A X
corruption T
RTL: X-ray hardware

090B command risen at ABORT X X
generator boot up
WDT: Watchdog SW DEBU

090C X
error G
Boot: Autodiag
INHIBI
0981 failure detected on X X X
T
diag
Misc: Internal power INHIBI

0A81 X X
supplies out of spec T
Cable: Power
module's internal INHIBI
0A82 X
cabling is missing or T
damaged
Cable: Cable
between Tank and INHIBI
0A83 X X X
Power module is T
missing or damaged
Misc: External 48V

INHIBI
0A85 power supplies out X X X X X X
T
of spec

Involved FRUs

Misc: Simulation SW INHIBI

0A87 X
detected T
Misc: NVRAM WARNI

0A90 X
Battery is low NG
Misc: Real-time INHIBI

0A91 X
clock issue detected T
Misc: Reboot caused

DEBU
0AA0 by an unexpected X
G
crash
WDT: Watchdog SW INHIBI

0AA1 X
error T
mA: mA measured
INHIBI
0B81 while inverter is off X X X
T
[mA > 1mA]
mA: No mAs
measured after
0B82 X ABORT X X X
exposure start [mAs
< 0.005]
mA: Inconsistency
between mA anode
0B83 ABORT X X X X
and mA cathode
measurement
mA: mA
measurement at DEBU
0B84 X X X X
start of exposure G
lower than expected
mA: mA
measurement at DEBU
0B85 X X
start of exposure G
higher than expected
mA: Filament ageing

saturation detected
DEBU
0B86 when computed X X X X
G
target reach
command limit
mA: Measured mA is
out of range during
0B87 ABORT X X X X
exposure [mA < 10%
of target]
CANOpen:
8110 Communication ABORT X X
overflow detected
CANOpen:
Communication INHIBI
8130 X X
watchdog failure T
detected
10.3.4.3 Testing a System after a Generator Component Change

In situations dealing with intermittent generator issues, additional testing may be desired to build
confidence that the repair solved the issue. In addition to the Finalization Tasks listed for the FRU
replacement procedure in the System Service Manuals, some optional use (stress) testing may
help flush out intermittent issues.

a. Charge the system if needed.

b. Unplug the system.
c. Attempt to confirm that the issues are no longer present, check all functionality.
i. Turn on the collimator lamp.
ii. Drive the system.
iii. Power cycle the system.
iv. Take several high power exposures (125kVp, 25 or 125 mAs), see that no errors
occur.
v. Repeat customer exposures that triggered the issue (if applicable).
d. If no errors appear during the high power exposures, and the issue can no longer be
reproduced the fix was successful.
10.3.5 In-Depth Djinn Beetle Generator Description

In a Optima XR240amx system, the 15kW Djinn Beetle generator subsystem consists of 3 main
generator modules; the Power Module, the HV Tank and the Main Auxiliary Module. An additional
30kW Auxiliary Module is added to the system to increase the capacity of the generator subsystem.
Location of generator parts is described in the following picture for 30kW generator.
0DLQ$X[LOLDU\
+97DQN
0RGXOH
N:$X[LOLDU\
0RGXOH
3RZHU0RGXOH
Figure 10-11 View of 30kW Djinn Components from the rear of the system (rear bin
removed)
This section includes:

- Description of the parts of the generator and their functions.
- Interconnection of the different parts and Graphic Diagrams of the generator.
- Djinn Beetle LEDs Behavior.
- Generator configuration and calibration.

Generator parts and functions

1. POWER MODULE (FRU)
:ϭͲ&͗ϰϴsĚĐ :ϯͲ&͗ϰϴsĚĐ
:ϭͲ͗E
ŽƵƚƉƵƚĂŶĚE ŝŶƉƵƚ
;ƚŽ^WzZͿ
;ƚŽD/EhyͿ ;ƚŽ>s>ϮͿ
h^ĂŶĚďĂƚƚĞƌǇƐƚĂĐŬ
ǀŽůƚĂŐĞ;ƚŽD/EhyͿ
Figure 10-12 Power Module
The Power Module includes:

• The system controller (CTRL board) for the Djinn Beetle generator subsystem. It uses
CANOpen communications protocols to communicate with the system’s Spyder Board (J1). It
is the first point of communication from the system and it also passes the communications
(Through the FILAMENT board) from the Power Module to the Main Auxiliary Module.
• The filaments currents generation (FILAMENT board), the current is provided to the filament
through the HV Tank (to isolate FILAMENT board from High Voltage).
• A boost converter (on the POWER board) to generate DC BUS (420Vdc) from battery voltage.
• Power switches (on the POWER board) of the Main Inverter for High Voltage generation, the
rest of inverter (transformer + multipliers) is included in the HV Tank.
2. HV TANK (FRU)
EK d,K
Figure 10-13 High Voltage (HV) Tank
See the HV receptacles for Anode and Cathode where HV Cables shall be connected
The High Voltage Tank includes:

- Parts of the Main Inverter (transformer + multipliers) for High Voltage generation (in the

kilo-volt range) needed to produce X-ray.

- Insulation between the High Voltage and the FILAMENT board in the POWER Module.
- Measurement feedback (kV and mA) to the Power Module.
Figure 10-14 High Voltage (HV) Tank
High Voltage (HV) Tank, INT MEAS board (TP4: Anode current, TP5: Cathode current, TP6:
Ground; when referenced to ground, 10mV ≡ 1mA)
Due to the high voltages produced in the HV Tank, oil is used to isolate the high voltage components
from the casing. If you ever see oil seeping from the HV Tank, replace it immediately.
3. MAIN AUXILIARY MODULE (FRU)
Figure 10-15 Main Auxiliary Module
The MAIN AUXILIARY Module (sometimes referred to as the Main Aux Box or 15kW Aux Box)
serves three main purposes:
- Control and interface to the Tube’s rotor.
- Pass through of the system stack voltage to Power Module (with the addition of a
stiffening capacitor); the Neon’s N1 and N2 indicate the presence of DC BUS voltage.
- Monitoring of the Tube’s thermal sensor.
4. 30KW AUXILIARY MODULE

Figure 10-16 30kW Auxiliary Module
The 30kW AUXILIARY Module (sometimes referred to as the 30kW Aux Box) adds additional
stiffening capacitance to the MAIN AUXILIARY Module.
The Neon’s N1 and N2 indicate the presence of DC BUS voltage.
5. DJINN BEETLE SET OF CABLES
Figure 10-17 Djinn Beetle set of cables
The set of cables includes:

- 2 ground cables. (not used)
- 2 Djinn HV Tank to Power cables (one short and one long)
- 1 cable Filament Board to Auxiliary (pn: 5557064)
- 1 cable Filament to HV Tank (pn: 5159146)

- 1 Flat Cable CONTROL to HV Tank (pn: 5144844)

- 1 Shielded Cable Assy- Djinn Aux Box to Djinn Power Board (pn: 5557063)
Pin Signal
5, 12 CAN Low and CAN High
1, 2, 7, 8 48Vdc
4, 9, 10, 13, 14, 15 Ground
6 Rotor state
3, 11 Not used
Figure 10-18 Filament Board to Auxiliary (pn: 5557064)
Figure 10-19 Filament to HV Tank (pn: 5159146)
Pin Signal
2, 7, 9, 11 Ground
3 Vcc (+5V from CTRL board)
1, 16 Used for Tank presence check, short-circuited on INT MEAS board
4 HV Tank Uniq ID and HV Tank inner temperature (Digital signal)
13 Cathode kV measurement
15 Anode kV measurement
14 Cathode current measurement
12 0V reference for Cathode current measurement
6 Current injection for Cathode current measurement Diag
10 Anode current measurement
8 0V reference for Anode current measurement
5 Current injection for Anode current measurement Diag
Figure 10-20 Flat Cable CONTROL to HV Tank (pn: 5144844)

Pin Signal
1 Internal Generator DC BUS (420Vdc)
2 Battery Stack Voltage
3 0V reference for DC BUS and battery stack voltage
Figure 10-21 Shielded Cable Assy- Djinn Aux Box to Djinn Power Board (pn: 5557063)
Interconnection and Graphic Diagrams

Figure 10-22 Djinn Beetle Graphic Diagram
Djinn Beetle LEDs Behavior

This describes the Djinn Beetle LEDs behavior, Djinn has LEDS on CTRL board as well as on
ROTOR board. None of these LEDs are tracking cabling problem. They are independent from the
system behavior.

1. POWER Module LEDs
Figure 10-23 Djinn Beetle LEDs on POWER Module
Control LEDs:
- Boot/Appli (green):
* Flash slowly: Boot mode, Djinn is starting or failing in start mode (if it continues to
slowly flash after start up).
* Flash Fast: Appli mode, normal behavior when Djinn is ON.
- RAM/Bus Error (red):
* If ON, there is a HW defect on the CTRL board, Flashes during boot/Download.
- FPGA (green):
* OFF during Boot up.
* Flash Fast: FPGA ready, normal behavior when Djinn is ON.
2. MAIN AUX Module LEDs

Figure 10-24 Djinn Beetle LEDs on MAIN AUXILIARY Module
Rotor Board LEDs:

- Boot/Application (orange):
* Two LEDs Flash slowly together: Boot mode, or when a rotor application download is
in process
* Two LEDs flash fast alternatively: Application mode, normal behavior
- Rotor Inverter ON (orange):
* If ON, Rotor control Inverter is ON (Anode speed control active)
- General Errors (red):
* Continuously ON indicates that an error is active on Rotor (including Thermal Switch
from tube)
* Back to OFF when errors are cleared
- CAN/HW Config Error (red):
* ON in case of CAN error or HW/SW configuration mismatch error
Main Auxiliary Module : NEON N1 and N2 lamps ON if Capacitor is charged (DC BUS presence).
When generator is put into IDLE state, after a few min the generator DC Bus will discharge.
Generator is put into IDLE state when the tube is put into the park position or the system goes into
standby mode.
Generator Configuration and Calibration
A. Generator SW Download
The Djinn generator is a bootable subsystem with its own resident software. Components of this
software reside on the POWER Module and the MAIN AUXILIARY Module. No software is loaded
on the HV Tank. To update the generator software in the field the system must be used to download
the software from the system to the generator. Note that every system has both the 15kW and the
30kW software packages stored in it. The generator relies on the system to provide it the correct
15kW/30kW software configuration, it cannot sense if it’s physically configured as a 15kW or 30kW.
Note that after a SW download, it is needed to perform a filament calibration (see section c below
for more details).

To perform the Generator SW Download, navigate to:

- Utilities-Service-Utilities-Subsystem Software-HW Firmware Install-Downloads-
Generator SW Install, and follow the on screen instructions.
Figure 10-25 Generator SW Download Screen
B. Filament Drive Calibration

Filament Drive Calibration (sometimes referred to as Filament Ageing) is used to set the initial
filament drive levels for each X-ray tube focal spot. It consists of a sequence of 24 exposures, 9 for
the small filament and 15 for the large filament. The techniques for this calibration are automatically
set during the calibration.
The Filament Drive Calibration should be performed when performing an X-ray Tube replacement.

Figure 10-26 Filament Drive Calibration Screen on System
1. Since this calibration is used to adjust filament drive levels, it is completely normal to get some
errors while running this calibration. As long as the Calibration completes successfully, do
not worry if you see “mA measurement at start of exposure lower than expected [mA <
target - 20%]” (debug text = 0B84), “mA measurement at start of exposure higher than
expected [mA > target + 20%]” (debug text = 0B85) or “Filament ageing saturation
detected when computed target reach command limit” (debug text = 0B86) errors
during calibration. You may also see system reported errors “OpDesc received
negative PPD parameter”.
2. If however the Filament Drive Calibration errors out and cannot complete, further
troubleshooting is necessary.
10.3.6 Specific Error Code Handling and Actions

Error Code Structure
A class M service key should always be used when troubleshooting the generator. This will provide
access to the extended content of the error log.
Generator errors can be broken up into two categories; system reported (generic) generator errors
and errors reported directly from the generator. This is a very important distinction when
troubleshooting as a system reported generator error may not always be a generator error at all.
Indeed, issues due to battery or to tube will create generator errors.
The information given by the error code and its description text includes that following:
• Description: it describes briefly the error detected in Generator.
• Data: it shows detailed information over the state of the generator when the error occurred. It
is composed by 5 fields: data content (i.e. HV Tank temperature), data description (i.e.
temperature), data value (i.e. type float with 2 decimal parts), data gain (i.e. multiplication by
10) and data unit (i.e. mA).

• Precise description: it shows additional information of the error. It defines the description of
the error in detail with their database value.
• Error class: there are three classes of errors that correspond to different levels of impact to
the system.
A Djinn inhibit error will abort the ongoing x-ray exposure, and go to an error state until the cause
of error disappeared.
A Djinn abort error will abort the ongoing x-ray exposure and immediately go back to a standby
state (i.e. tube arc).
A Djinn warning is only the information. The Generator will not abort the ongoing x-ray exposure
and it will not go back to a standby state (i.e. input voltage slightly out of range).
Note: Some columns of error logs shown in the document are removed for clarity.
Error Diagnostics Instructions

A diagnostic sequence in Djinn Beetle Generator is described for each error in order to isolate the
faulty FRU. The suggested action taken to isolate a faulty part is described as:
• Diag Automated test by the system which gives a PASS/FAIL status report. It is used normally
to check communication between the system and the Generator and also to check the
Generator parts for basic function via software.
• FE Semi-manual or manual test or check to be performed by a FE.
Safe Diagnostic Practices

For all invasive procedures, perform LOTO and verify with a DVM that all stored electrical energy
has been dissipated prior to performing the service action.
Software version consideration

The scope of this document is to give troubleshooting for errors obtained with Djinn Beetle SW
D4.2.9F or later version.
At error troubleshooting level, main differences between previous SW D4.2.9B and SW D4.2.9F
are:
- Error Description and Class updated for a better understanding.
- With SW D4.2.9B, when the system boots while the generator has an error, the system
will indicate that the generator did not boot and generator communications will not be
possible. With SW D4.2.9F, this issue is solved and generator will be able to send error
code to system when the system will boot, this will make the troubleshooting much easier.
- With SW D4.2.9B, error 0A81 monitor internal power supplies (3.3V, 5V…) and external
power supplies (48V) which is ambiguous and do not link directly to the external power
supply. With SW D4.2.9F, error 0A81 is split:
* One error dedicated to the internal power supplies (3.3V, 5V…): error 0A81.
* One error dedicated to the external power supplies (48V): New error 0A85.
- With SW D4.2.9F, error code 0682 and 0683 become 0A82 and 0A83.
1. Heater 1 (Small Filament) and Heater 2 (Large Filament)

All errors starting with 01 are related to small filament, and errors starting with 02 are related to large
filament.
Error 0100 Unexpected Generator FW error

Or Error 0200 Unexpected Generator FW error

Or Error 0101 Filament over current detected (measured current > estimated current)
Or Error 0201 Filament over current detected (measured current > estimated current)
Or Error 0103 Fil Drive current exceeds max limit (target > max heater)
Or Error 0203 Fil Drive current exceeds max limit (target > max heater)
Or Error 0104 Fil Drive current below min limit (target < min heater)
Or Error 0204 Fil Drive current below min limit (target < min heater)
Or Error 0105 Fil Inverter is OFF and current not zero
Or Error 0205 Fil Inverter is OFF and current not zero
Or Error 0107 Over current detection on filament
Or Error 0207 Over current detection on filament
Or Error 0108 48V supply filament circuit out of range [44V-52V]
Or Error 0208 48V supply filament circuit out of range [44V-52V]
Or Errorx0183 Autodiag failed during generator boot
Or Error 0283 Autodiag failed during generator boot
Check for other errors and apply diagnostic sequence for them. If no other errors are reported,
restart Djinn Generator (Power OFF / Power ON). If problem persists, re-download Djinn Software.
If the problem persists, replace POWER MODULE.
Error 0102 Filament open circuit detected (measured current < estimated current)
Or Error 0202 Filament open circuit detected (measured current < estimated current)

Figure 10-27
Fil (1 or 2) Drv Short Test:

SUIF-Diagnostics-Generator Diagnostics-Fil Drv (1 or 2) Short
Run Fil 1 or 2 diagnostic based on the error code first 2 digits. This test drives the Filament inverter
at two fixed frequency with a short-circuit at the output of the Fil1 using a relay on Filament-Board
output. Then it verifies if measured current is in a proper range.
Fil Xfmr Primary:

Run Fil 1 or 2 diagnostic based on the error code first 2 digits. This diagnostic drives the filament
inverter and creates a resonant current through the parasitic Magnetic inductance at primary
transformer pins. Then it verifies if measured current is different from 0.
No Fil Power tank connection:

Manually Operated Diagnostic
Perform LOTO on the system, Disconnect the 4-wire cable between POWER MODULE J6 and HV
Tank J5. Perform cable pin to pin continuity check.

Figure 10-28
Filament HV Cable connection Test:

Perform LOTO on system. Remove cathode HV cable at the HV Tank and inspect for insulator
cracks, damaged pins, or high voltage arc tracks. Clean or replace as necessary.
Filament impedance through HV Cable Test:

Perform LOTO on system. Disconnect the HV Cathode Cable from HV Tank. Using a multimeter
check that the 3 impedances measured between all pins of HV Cable pins are below 5 ohms.
2. mA Generation
Error 0981 Autodiag failure detected on Diag (6030 = mA measure / 6090 = kV measure)
Figure 10-29

mA measurement connection test:

Check that the measurement ribbon cable between HV Tank J6 and POWER MODULE J7 is
properly connected. Press connectors on both sides. Launch mA Measurement diagnostic and
check that the result is passed.
mA measurement cable and resistor test:

Perform LOTO on the system. Disconnect measurement ribbon cable between HV Tank J6 and
POWER MODULE J7 and perform pin to pin continuity check. Then reconnect the cable at the HV
Tank end connector J6 ONLY. With an ohmmeter, at the Power module cable end, measure the
resistance between pin 5 and 8, and between pin 6 and 12. Resistance measured should be 10
ohms±0.5 for each measurement set.
At the Power module cable end, measure the resistance between pin 10 and 8, then between pin
12 and 14. Resistance measured should be 110ohms±2ohms for each measurement set.
KV measurement cable and resistor test:

POWER MODULE J7 and perform pin-to-pin continuity. Then reconnect the cable at the HV Tank
end connector J6 ONLY. With an ohmmeter, at the Power Module cable end measure impedance
between pins 9 and 13, then between pins 9 and 15. Measured value should be between 41k +/-
1k ohm.
Figure 10-30
Error 0B81 mA measured while inverter is off [mA > 1mA]

Or Error 0B82 No mAs measured after exposure start [mAs < 0.005]
Or Error 0B83 Inconsistency between mA anode and mA cathode measurement [error > 10% or
5mA]

Figure 10-31
If error is still present after these tests, replace tube.
mA measurement connection test:

properly connected. Press connectors on both sides. Launch mA Measurement diagnostic and
check that the result is passed.
mA measurement cable and resistor test:

Perform LOTO on the system. Disconnect the measurement ribbon cable between HV Tank J6 and
POWER MODULE J7 and perform pin to pin continuity check. Then reconnect the cable at the HV
Tank end connector J6 ONLY. With an ohmmeter, at the Power module cable end, measure the
resistance between pin 5 and 8, and between pin 6 and 12. Resistance measured should be
10ohms ±0.5ohms for each measurement set.
At the Power module cable end, measure the resistance between pin 10 and 8, then between pin
12 and 14. Resistance measured should be 110ohms ±2ohms for each measurement set.

Figure 10-32
Error 0B84 mA measurement at start of exposure lower than expected [mA < target - 20%]
Or Error 0B86 Filament aging saturation detected when computed target reach command limit
Or Error 0B87 Measured mA is out of range during exposure [mA < 10% of target]
Start by doing a new filament calibration. If error 0B84 or 0B86 occurs during calibration, ignore and
continue the calibration (See pg. 520)
If error persists after calibration, do the following sequence:
Figure 10-33
Fil Drv (1 or 2) Short Test:


at two fixed frequency with a short-circuit at the output of the Fil (1 or 2) using a relay on Filament-
Board output. Then it verifies if measured current is in a proper range.
Filament HV Tank Power connection Test:

Check that the heater cable from the HV Tank is connected to the power module and is not in short
circuit. Inspect connectors for pushed or damaged pins. Perform pin to pin continuity check.
Figure 10-34
Filament aging clearing test:

Perform the filament calibration. Ensure it completes without errors i.e. 0B84, 0B85 and 0B86.
Retest the system using the same techniques that originally failed.
Error 0B85 mA measurement at start of exposure higher than expected [mA > target + 20%]
Start by doing a new filament calibration. If error 0B84 or 0B86 occurs during calibration, ignore and
continue the calibration (See pg. 520).
If error persists after calibration, do the following sequence:

Figure 10-35
Fil Drv (1 or 2) Short Test:

at two fixed frequency with a short-circuit at the output of the Fil1 using a relay on Filament-Board
output. Then it verifies if measured current is in a proper range.
Filament ageing clearing test:

Perform the filament calibration. Ensure it completes without errors i.e. 0B84, 0B85 and 0B86.
Retest the system using the same techniques that originally failed.
Boost and DC Bus

Error 0500 Unexpected Generator firmware error
Or Error 0511 Unexpected Generator firmware error
Or Error 0501 DC Bus command out of range [100V-420V]
Or Error 0505 No input current detected during DC Bus charge
Or Error 0510 Over voltage on DC output detected [DC Bus > 460V]
Or Error 0520 Software over input current detected [Iin > 140A]
Or Error 0523 Input Stage damaged
Or Error 0524 Hardware over input current detected [Iin > 140A]

Or Error 0525 Boost timeout when boost is started

Or Error 0580 DC Bus timeout when boost is started
Or Error 0585 Input current detected while boost is off [Iin > 8A]
Restart Djinn Generator (Power OFF / Power ON). If problem persists, re-download Djinn Software.
Error 0503 DC Bus rising time too fast during DC Bus charge [DC Bus < 200V]
Or Error 0504 DC Bus rising time too slow during DC Bus charge [DC Bus < 200V]
Figure 10-36
If error is still present after these tests, replace power module
DC Bus cable connection test :

Check the cable at both ends and perform visual inspection for damage and pin to pin resistance
check, then connect the DC Bus (shielded cable with 3-points connectors) to the MAIN AUXILIARY
XJ2 and the POWER MODULE J1 (DC-BAT-GND) make sure that the wires are connected tightly.
Tighten the screws if it is necessary.

Figure 10-37
Error 0581 Low input voltage during boost while Vin < 95V
Figure 10-38
Input power connection test:

Perform LOTO on the system. Check that the Input power cable (END A) is correctly connected to
the J6 connector of Cricket and that there are no loose screws. Check that the Input power cable
(END B) is correctly connected to the XJ1 connector of MAIN AUXILIARY and that there are no
loose screws.

Figure 10-39
Input Voltage Measurement test:

Ensure that the cable from the battery stack to Djinn MAIN AUXILIARY XJ1 is connected correctly,
screws are tight, and cable is not damaged. Verify the battery voltage of 144Vdc minimum is
present on XJ1 pins 1 and 2. Perform LOTO on the system. Ensure that the cable from MAIN
AUXILIARY XJ2 to POWER MODULE J1 (DCBAT-GND) is not damaged and perform continuity
check. Check that the POWER MODULE connection J1(DC-BAT-GND) is secure. Remove LOTO
from the system, turn the system on and verify the battery stack voltage is between 144V and 180V
at the POWER MODULE end of the cable on J1 pins 2 and 3.
Figure 10-40
Error 0582 High input voltage during boost, Vin > 200V

Figure 10-41

on the system, turn on the system and verify the battery stack voltage is between 144V and 180V
Figure 10-42
Error 0583 Low DC Bus voltage during boost, Vout < 280V
replace POWER MODULE.

Error 0584 No input voltage detected before boost start [Vin < 90V]
Figure 10-43
Input power connection test:

Check that the Input power cable (END A) is correctly connected to the J6 connector of Cricket and
that there is no loose screw. Check that the Input power cable (END B) is correctly connected to
the XJ1 connector of MAIN AUXILIARY and that there are no loose screws.
Djinn Main Auxiliary Fuse Test:


Check the continuity between the + BAT of the XJ1 connector and the +BAT of the XJ2 connector
of the Main Auxiliary Module.
Figure 10-44

on the system, turn on the system and verify the battery stack voltage is between 144V and 180V
Figure 10-45
3. KV
Error 0600 Unexpected Generator firmware error
Or Error 060C Unexpected generator firmware error
Or Error 060F Inverter current regulation issue
Or Error 0681 Synchronization issue at exposure start
Error 0684 kV detected while inverter is off [kV > 1kV]
Or Error 0685 Resonant current detected while inverter is off [ILR > 1A]
Error 0609 Measured kV is greater than target before exposure start

If the problem persists, replace POWER MODULE. If the problem is still there, replace tank

Error 0602 Unbalanced kV [kV cathode - kV anode > 10kV]

Or Error 0603 Unbalanced kV [kV anode - kV cathode > 10kV]
Figure 10-46
KV Measurement:
SUIF-Diagnostics-Generator Diagnostics-KV
This test applies a known voltage into the KV measurement circuit board and checks if real
measured value is in a specified range.

end connector J6 ONLY.
With an ohmmeter, at the Power Module cable end measure impedance between pins 9 and 13,
then between pins 9 and 15. Measured value should be between 40k and 42k.
Figure 10-47

Error 0604 kV max reached on anode [kV > 125% of kV anode target]
Or Error 0605 kV max reached on cathode [kV > 125% of kV cathode target]
Check for other errors (linked to unbalance or filament) and apply diagnostic sequence for them. If
no other errors are reported, replace the Power Module. If error persists replace the High Voltage
tank
Error 060E Measured kV too low during exposure [kV < 75% of kV target]
check that ribbon cable between tank and power module (5414844) is well connected.
If error persists replace the Power Module. If error persists replace the High Voltage Tank
Error 0616 kV: Techniques demanded cannot be achieved

Check for other errors and apply diagnostic sequence for them.
Error 0606 Too many spits detected [spits count > 8 per second]
Figure 10-48
Check spit side test:


read the error data value associated with the too many spits error (Error 0606).
If the data = 1 then spits are on the Anode side
If the data = 2 then spits are on the Cathode side
If the data = 3 then spits are on both Anode and Cathode sides
HV Cable connector tube side test:

Using the results from the Spit Side test (above), remove the suspected HV cable connection(s) at
the tube. Inspect the connection(s) for insulator cracks, damaged pins, or HV arc tracks. Clean or
replace as necessary, apply HV grease and reconnect. Ensure HV cable is properly seated and
tightly secured.
HV Cable connector HV Tank side test:

Using the results from the Spit Side test (above), remove the suspected HV cable connection(s) at
the High Voltage Tank. Inspect the connection(s) for insulator cracks, damaged pins, or HV arc
tracks. Clean or replace as necessary, lubricate connection(s) and reconnect. Ensure HV cable is
properly seated and tightly secured.
Error 0607 Inverter current mismatch between measured & expected values

Figure 10-49
Inverter test:
SUIF-Diagnostics-Generator Diagnostics-Inverter
This test drives the MOSFETs gates in order to confirm the inverter is functional, test with low DC
BUS value.
KV inverter tank ILR connection test:

Check that the two small cables that connect the POWER MODULE to the HV Tank are properly
connected.
KV tank ILR Primary connection test:


Perform LOTO on the system. Disconnect MAIN AUXILIARY module from POWER MODULE. On
HV Tank, connect ohmmeter between 2 inverter connection terminals. Check that the measured
impedance is lower than 2 ohms.
Figure 10-50
Error 0608 Inverter over current detected [ILR > 250A]

Check for other errors and apply diagnostic sequence for them. If no other errors are reported, use
the following flowchart.
Figure 10-51
Is too many spits in the log:

Manually operated diagnostic

Check In the class M error log check to see if errors "0606: too many spits error" was reported
recently.
Inverter test:
BUS value.
Error 060A Measured kV too low after exposure start [kV < 3kV]
Figure 10-52
KV Measurement:
SUIF-Diagnostics-Generator Diagnostics-KV
Launch the software diagnostic 6090h from the system interface. This test applies a known voltage
into the KV measurement circuit board and checks if real Measured value is in a specified range.
Inverter test:
BUS value.

KV measurement connection test:

correctly connected and is not damaged (open or shorted). Push on both ends to ensure proper
connection.

Figure 10-53
4. Rotation
Error 0401 Lost rotor communication between Power and Main Aux modules
Reset the system and check cabling between both modules. If problem persists, re-download Djinn
Software. If the problem persists, replace MAIN AUXILIARY. If problem persists replace tube.
Error 0403 Over current detected on rotation phases

Or Error 0404 Open circuit detected on rotation phases
Or Error 0405 Rotation phases current unbalanced
Or Error 0413 Over current detected on rotation phases
Or Error 0467 Current measurement issue on rotation
Reset the system and check cabling between Main Aux Module and Power Modules.
Run Tube Rotor Impedance Diagnostic on system (Service –> Diagnostics -> Generator) This
diagnostic tests the stator impedance, the DC Bus presence (before and after fuse), and the rotation
power bridge. Note result.
Measure stator impedance using Tube Stator Resistance Test as described below. Note result.
If Tube Rotor Impedance Tests Fails and Tube Stator Resistance Test passes – replace Main
Auxiliary Module
If Tube Rotor Impedance Tests Fails and Tube Stator Resistance Test Fails– check Tube Stator
Resistances at the tube:
- If Tube Stator Resistances at the tube are incorrect, replace the tube.
- If Tube Stator Resistances at the tube are correct, check for proper wiring of rotor harness
to the tube

- If wiring of rotor harness to the tube is incorrect, correct it

- If wiring of rotor harness to the tube is correct, replace the Main Auxiliary Module
Check Rotor cable connection and cable for issues and reattempt Tube Rotor Impedance
Diagnostic.
If problem persists, replace MAIN AUXILIARY.
Additional Specific tests for Error 0413 Over current detected on rotation phases
If Tube Rotor spins up and down without errors but the system reports 0413 errors intermittently
when x-rays are being shot, replace the tube
Tube Stator Resistance Test: Locate the stator connection at the Aux Module, see picture below.
Remove the rotor supply cable, using cable schematic below identify pins 1,2,3 and ground.
Measure the resistance between the pins, the nominal measurements should be Pin 1 to Pin 2 =
29 ohms, Pin 1 to Pin 3 = 59 ohms, Pin 2 to Pin 3 = 88 ohms. Any measurement that is outside of
+/- 3 ohms of these values indicates a failed tube rotor/stator and the tube should be replaced.
Figure 10-54
Error 0480 Communication failure between Power and Main Aux modules

Reset the system and check cabling between both modules. If problem persists, re-download Djinn
Software. If the problem persists, replace MAIN AUXILIARY. If problem persists replace Power
Module
Error 0402 Generator SW corruption

Or Error 0406 Phase error
Or Error 0407 Rotation inverter is off and current not zero
Or Error 0409 Generator SW corruption
Or Error 0410 Simulation Rotor SW detected
Or Error 0412 Generator SW corruption at boot
Or Error 0458 Communication failure between Power and Main Aux modules
Or Error 0468 Measurement circuit failure at boot
Or Error 0481 Board found in reset state
Or Error 0482 State mismatch between Power and Main Aux modules
Or Error 0487 Service mode diagnostic communication failure
Or Error 0488 Speed communication failure between Power and Main Aux modules
Or Error 0489 Generator detected incompatible rotor board circuit
Or Error 078B Rotor board temperature sensor failure
Or Error 078C incorrect temperature on Rotor board sensor ID
If the problem persists, replace MAIN AUXILIARY. If the error persists, replace Power Module.
5. System Communication
Error 0805 System identification mismatch
Or Error 0806 System CAN command received is unknown
Check if 15/30kW setting is properly configured (see pg. 500). Restart system and Djinn Generator
(Power OFF / Power ON). If problem persists, re-download Djinn Software. If the problem persists,
replace Power Module. If problem persists, check cable from Spyder board.
Error 0601 Exposure sequence error from system (Hardware command raised before software
command)
Or Error 0611 Issue detected on X-ray hardware command (RTL2)
Or Error 0613 Issue detected on X-ray hardware enable (RTL4)
Or Error 0801 Exposure start timeout [Time > 180s]
Or Error 090B X-ray hardware command risen at generator boot up
Or Error 8110 Communication overflow detected
Or Error 8130 Communication watchdog (Node guarding) failure detected

Figure 10-55
Ground wiring test: With the ohmmeter check that the impedance between any of the Djinn
Modules chassis and the system chassis is lower than 5 ohms.
6. Low Voltage Power Supplies

Error 0A82 Power module's internal cabling is missing or damaged
Or Error 0A81 Internal power supplies out of spec

Check for other errors and apply diagnostic sequence for them. If error persists, restart Djinn
Generator (Power OFF / Power ON). If problem persists, re-download Djinn Software. If the
problem persists, replace POWER MODULE.
Error 0466 48V supply rotation circuit out of range [40V-50V]

follow the sequence below.
Figure 10-56
LVLE2 CAN cable connection test:

Perform LOTO on the system. Perform cable pin to pin continuity check on the LVLE2 CAN cable
(cable between Power Module J1-F and Main Auxiliary Module connector labeled CAN). Ensure it’s
connected properly on both sides and is not visibly damaged.
Figure 10-57
Error 0A83 Cable between Tank and Power module is missing or damaged

Figure 10-58

Manually Performed Diagnostic
Perform LOTO on system. Check that the measurement ribbon cable between HV Tank J6 and
POWER MODULE J7 is correctly connected and is not damaged (open or shorted). Push on both
ends to ensure proper connection.

Perform LOTO on system. Disconnect measurement ribbon cable between HV Tank J6 and

Figure 10-59
Error 0A85 Misc: External 48V power supplies out of spec

if the error is intermittent, occurs at the end of exposures and is associated with other errors related
to low voltage power supplies and filament, then replace LVLE2.
Otherwise, follow the sequence below:
Figure 10-60
48V Measure no Power:

Perform LOTO on the system. Disconnect the LVLE2 CAN cable (cable between POWER
MODULE J1-F and MAIN AUXILIARY connector labelled CAN). On the Power Module connector
J2-F measure pins 1, 2, 7, 8 relative ground (pins 4, 9, 10, 13, 14, 15), each should read 48Vdc
±2.5V.
Power supplies:
SUIF-Diagnostics-Generator Diagnostics-Power Supplies
This test checks that internal power supplies (+/-13V, 48V, 3.3V) are within the proper range when
all the modules are turned off.
LVLE2 CAN cable connection test:


Perform LOTO on the system. Perform cable pin to pin continuity check on the LVLE2 CAN cable
(cable between POWER MODULE J1-F and MAIN AUXILIARY connector labeled CAN). Ensure
it's connected properly on both sides and is not visibly damaged
Figure 10-61
LVLE2 output voltage test:

With the system on carefully disconnect LVLE2 system power supply from J2-F of the Power
Module (it is normal if the system alarms / errors in this situation). Check end B for 48Vdc +/- 2.5V.
If voltage is out of spec, determine if LVLE2 is faulty.
If the measurement is within specifications perform LOTO on the system then reconnect the cable.
Remove LOTO and power back up. Measure pins 1 and 2 of the J2-F connection of the Power
Module. If this voltage is out of specification the Power Module may have an internal short that is
overloading the LVLE2.
Figure 10-62
Battery Voltage measurement Test:

With the system in idle state, measure the battery stack voltage directly on the cable connected to
Djinn at XJ1 connector on the Main Auxiliary Module. Check that the voltage remains in an
acceptable range (higher than 144Vdc).
7. Cooling / Thermal
Error 0702 Tank temperature is too high

Or Error 0706 Tank temperature is getting hot
Restart system and Djinn Generator (Power OFF / Power ON). If problem persists, re-download
Djinn Software. If the problem persists, replace HV Tank.
Error 0703 Power board temperature is too high

Or Error 0704 Filament board temperature is too high

Or Error 0707 Power board temperature is rising

Or Error 0708 Filament board temperature is rising
Or Error 0783 Power board temperature sensor failure
Or Error 0784 Tube thermal protection error (Estimated stored energy reached tube limit)
Or Error 0788 Filament board temperature sensor failure
Djinn Software. If the problem persists, replace POWER MODULE.
Error 0789 Thermal sensor communication failure

Or Error 078A There is no response from at least one thermal sensor
Djinn Software. If the problem persists, replace POWER MODULE. If problem persists replace HV
tank
Error 0705 Rotor board temperature is too high

Or Error 0709 Rotor board temperature is rising
Djinn Software. If the problem persists, replace MAIN AUXILIARY.
Error 0701 Tube overtemp switch open (verify all connections before troubleshooting the tube)
Figure 10-63
Test 70°C circuit:

SUIF-Diagnostics-Generator Diagnostics-70°C circuit

This diagnostic checks the status of thermal switch connected to rotation board.
Thermal sensor resistance test:

Perform LOTO on the system. Disconnect thermal sensor rotation cable from Tube at generator
component Y J5 and measure tube thermal switch resistance (END B) with an ohm meter. Verify
that it is less than 2 ohms. This will isolate the fault to the tube or the associated system cabling to
the tube from the generator. If greater than 2 ohms, measure tube thermal switch at the tube with
feedback cable disconnected.
Figure 10-64
Error 0782 Tank temperature sensor failure is detected
Figure 10-65


Error 0786 Unexpected Generator parts detected

Or Error 0785 Revision device configuration failure detected
Figure 10-66

Perform LOTO on the system. Check that the measurement ribbon cable between HV Tank J6 and
POWER MODULE J7 is correctly connected and is not damaged (open or shorted). Push on both
ends to ensure proper connection.


Figure 10-67
Error 0787 Generator parts identification is impossible
Figure 10-68


Figure 10-69
Thermal Sensor no Tank test:

Perform LOTO on the system. Disconnect the ribbon cable between HV Tank and POWER
MODULE. Remove LOTO and boot system. Read error reported.
8. Miscellaneous
Error 0802 Watchdog SW error on CanCtrl task
Or Error 0803 Watchdog SW error on DevCtrl task
Or Error 0804 Watchdog SW error on SysCtrl task
Or Error 0814 Watchdog SW error on RoseRT task
Or Error 0901 Download has been requested by system (Waiting for download sequence)
Or Error 0902 No application or application corruption
Or Error 0903 No database or database corrupted
Or Error 0905 Database not compatible with SW
Or Error 0906 Application not compatible with Boot
Or Error 0907 FPGA missing or corrupted
Or Error 0908 FPGA not compatible with SW
Or Error 0909 Rotor FW not compatible with SW
Or Error 090A Boot corruption
Or Error 090C Watchdog SW error
Or Error 0A87 Simulation SW detected
Or Error 0A90 NVRAM battery is low
Or Error 0A91 Real-time clock issue detected
Or Error 0AA0 Reboot caused by an unexpected crash
Or Error 0AA1 Watchdog SW error
Restart system. If problem persists, re-download Djinn Software. If the problem persists, replace
the Power Module.
9. System Diagnostic Descriptions

Tube rotor impedance
Description: Launch the software diagnostic 0x4020h from the system interface. This diagnostic
tests the stator impedance, the DC Bus presence (before and after fuse), and the rotation power
bridge.
Power supplies
Description: Launch the software diagnostic 0x8050h from the system interface. This test checks
that internal power supplies (+/-13V, 48V, 3.3V) are within the proper range when all the modules
are turned off

Resonant Components
Description: Launch the software diagnostic 0x6080h from the system interface. Resonant
components verification one pulse on each side. This test drives the MOSFETs gates in order to
confirm the inverter resonant components are functional.
Inverter test
Description: This test drives the MOSFETs gates in order to confirm the inverter is functional, test
with low DC BUS value.
Test 70°C circuit

Description: This diagnostic checks the status of thermal switch connected to rotation board.
Rising time and regulation test

Description: This diagnostic checks that the DC bus stays in an acceptable range several times in
a row after asking a RAD_MODE voltage command.
RTL Test
Description: This test checks that the RTL commands sent by system are properly received by
Djinn.
Fil 1 Drv Clsd Loop

Description: This test sends 3 targets of current on Fil1 and checks the measured feedbacks are in
a correct range. It also checks feedback measured on inactive filament Fil2 to determine that there
is no short-circuit between the two filaments.
Fil 1 Xfmr Primary

Description: This test drives the inverter of Fil1 and creates a resonant current through the parasitic
Magnetic inductance at primary transformer pins. Then it verifies if measured current is different
from 0.
Fil 1 Drv Short Test

Description: This test drives the Fil1 inverter at two fixed frequency with a short-circuit at the output
of the Fil1 using a relay on Filament-Board output. Then it verifies if measured current is in a proper
range.
Fil 2 Drv Clsd Loop

Description: This test sends 3 targets of current on Fil2 and checks the measured feedbacks are in
a correct range. It also checks feedback measured on inactive filament Fil1 to determine that there
is no short-circuit between the two filaments.
Fil 2 Xfmr Primary

Description: This test drives the inverter of Fil2 and creates a resonant current through the parasitic
Magnetic inductance at primary transformer pins. Then it verifies if measured current is different
from 0.
Fil 2 Drv Short Test

Description: This test drives the Fil2 inverter at two fixed frequency with a short-circuit at the output
of the Fil2 using a relay on Filament-Board output. Then it verifies if measured current is in a proper
range.
MA Measurement
Description: This test applies a known voltage into the mA measurement circuit board and checks
if real Measured value is in a specified range.
KV Measurement
Description: This test applies a known voltage into the KV measurement circuit board and checks
if real Measured value is in a specified range.
KV Test
Description: This diagnostic performs the following group of standalone diagnostic tests simulating
normal system functionality:
• HV Tank connection test
• KV Measurement
• Inverter test
mA Test
• HV Tank connection test
• mA Measurement
• Inverter test
Rotation Test
• Check the communication with the rotation board
• Tube Rotor impedance
• Test 70C circuit
• Sequence start and brake
• Discharge test
• Verify Checksum rotation
Auto Test
Description: This test runs automatically at start-up and encompasses the mA measurement and
kV measurement tests.
Definitions

Term or Acronym Definition

MWS My Workshop
SSRS Sub-System Requirements Specifications
mA Tube emission in mA
kV Kilo Volts
HW Hardware
SW Software
DSO Digital Storage Oscilloscope
DVM Digital Value Multimeter
LVLE2 Low Voltage Low Energy Sub System
FS (LF, SF) Focal Spot (Large Focal, Small Focal)
FRU Field Replaceable Unit
HV High Voltage
CTRL CONTROL
ILR Resonant Inductor Current

Section 10.4 Detector Bin Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting Scenarios and Workflow:
Common user-reported symptoms and use cases can be found in this section. This section details
a workflow to isolate and troubleshoot detector charging bin issues. Included are log file locations,
error messages, diagnostic tools, and recommended corrective actions.
Table 10-10 Detector Bin Troubleshooting
Symptom System Message Log File Probable Cause Diagnostic Action

Detector will not None None Debris blocking Visually inspect for Remove debris.
insert into the bin. the connector. debris or damage.
Floating docking Visually inspect Ensure the spring
connectors floating docking loaded floating
damaged or connectors for connector returns to
misaligned. damage. the appropriate
position.
Replace damaged
floating connectors.
Detector inserted Ensure the detector is Insert the detector
incorrectly. inserted with the properly.
'keyed' edge on the
right-hand side, LED
display facing
downward.
Check bin for physical Replace any
damage to bin rails, damaged hardware
etc. that may prevent
proper insertion.
Tips: It is possible for the spring loaded docking connector to get
stuck in the depressed position, not allowing proper contact with
the detector. This misalignment may cause the detector to not
accept a charge or may cause a short/crowbar.

Table 10-10 Detector Bin Troubleshooting (Continued)

Detector will not "Pairing of 14x17in Reference Log: Detector not Check the UI for list of Register the
pair when (35x43cm) detector failed." /enggdata/log/ registered. registered detectors. detector, then pair
inserted into the XRImDet.0.log the detector.
"Pairing of 10x12in
bin. (25x30cm) detector failed." DEVICE_
CONNECTION
"Please remove detector
from bin and retry or call Reference Log:
service if problem /magichome/xruser/log/
persists." sysMSG.log
CONNECTION_TYPE
"Pairing of 14x17in Reference Log: AP configuration /magichome/xruser/bin./ Refer to Section
(35x43cm) detector failed." /enggdata/log/ issues. interfaceToAccessPoint 10.6 Wireless
XRImDet.0.log Errors Access Point (AP)
"Pairing of 10x12in
(25x30cm) detector failed." DEVICE_ Refer to Section Diagnostics (Gen 1
CONNECTION 10.6 Wireless Access only) on page 611.
"Please remove detector
from bin and retry or call Reference Log: Point (AP) Diagnostics
service if problem /magichome/xruser/log/ (Gen 1 only) on
persists." sysMSG.log page 611.
"Access point configuration CONNECTION_TYPE
failed."
"Access point boot failed."
"Wireless exposure is not
supported for the selected
country."
Detector will not At 25%: "Detector battery Reference Log: Detector battery Check 24VDC present Proceed to next.
charge when charge is low. Please /magichome/xruser/log/ defective. on TP1.
inserted into the charge the detector battery DEM_XXXXX_
as soon as possible" BATTERY_ Check TP17 (14x17) Proceed to next.
bin.
SENSOR.Y.LOG and TP18 (10x12) for
At 10%: "Detector battery
15VDC present.
capacity is not sufficient to
support exposure." Visually inspect cabling Proceed to next.
At <6%: "Digital Cassette and connections.
Detector communication Check pin 1 on docking Proceed to next.
lost. Confirm connector for 5VDC
communication with
present.
detector. Call service if
problem persists." Ensure battery is Change battery.
Charging in Bin: "Detector present.
battery is not able to Tips: The 15VDC is present and the LEDs are active if a detector
charge. Replace battery or with no battery is inserted into the bin. The BCB tries to charge
tether to continue imaging.
because the 5VDC to ground is still shorted at pin 1, the BCB
Call service if problem
persists."
cannot tell if charge is injecting into the battery.
The log will not indicate a decreasing battery charge when
If tethered: "Tethered
inserted into the bin as there is no communication to the IDC
detector does not detect
battery inserted. Check
subsystem while docked. The decrease in battery charge must
battery is inserted properly. be witnessed with the detector out of the bin and as the active/
Call service if problem primary. System logs battery data every 60 seconds if the value
persists. " has changed by 1% and with every acquisition.
Page 560 Section 10.4 Detector Bin Troubleshooting


Detector will not At 25%: "Detector battery Reference Log: Charging cable Visually inspect cabling If cabling is
charge when charge is low. Please /magichome/xruser/log/ defective from bin for damage. damaged, replace
inserted into the charge the detector battery DEM_XXXXX_ to BCB connector and proceed.
bin. (Continued) as soon as possible." BATTERY_SENSOR J2 or J3.
.Y.LOG Check pin TP17 and Proceed to next.
TP18 on BCB for 15
Floating docking VDC present.
support exposure."
connector
At <6%: "Digital Cassette Check pin 1 on docking Replace cabling with
defective.
Detector communication connector in bin for docking connector.
lost. Confirm 5VDC to ground.
communication with
Tips: It is possible for the spring loaded docking connector to get
problem persists."
stuck in the depressed position, not allowing proper contact with
the detector. This misalignment may cause the detector to not
Charging in Bin: "Detector accept a charge or may cause a short/crowbar.
battery is not able to
charge. Replace battery or
persists."
None Reference Log: LED membrane Check LED membrane Proceed to next.
/magichome/xruser/log/ or indicator cable. for illumination with
DEM_XXXXX_ detector inserted.
BATTERY_SENSOR
.Y.LOG Check UI to ensure Proceed to next.
detector is recognized.
Check DEM log for Proceed to next.
indications of charge
increase.
If UI and DEM log Replace LED
indicate charge, isolate membrane or
to LED membrane and indicator cable.
indicator cable to J7 on
BCB.
Tips: The user may report that the detector is not charging based
only off of the LED membrane status. If only the LED membrane
is defective, the detector may still be charging as indicated by the
GUI or the DEM logs.


Detector will not At 25%: "Detector battery Reference Log: Defective BCB or Check BCB LED heart Proceed to next.
charge when charge is low. Please /magichome/xruser/log/ 15 VDC from BCB beat at DS1 (heart beat
inserted into the charge the detector battery DEM_XXXXX_ lost. (Tip 1) 1/sec is normal; 10/sec
bin. (Continued) as soon as possible." BATTERY_SENSOR indicates errors)
.Y.LOG
Check LEDs at DS2-4 Proceed to next.
support exposure."
(DS2 is 15 VDC OK for
14x17, DS3 is 5V DC
At <6%: "Digital Cassette OK for internal logic,
Detector communication DS4 is 15 VDC OK for
lost. Confirm
10x12).
communication with
detector. Call service if Check TP17 (14x17) Proceed to next.
problem persists." and TP18 (10x12) for
Charging in Bin: "Detector 15VDC present.
battery is not able to Check 5 VDC bus at Replace or proceed
TP2. to next.
Call service if problem Check detector Replace cabling if
persists." charging cables and damaged or replace
docking connectors. BCB.
24 VDC from HW Diagnostic: Power Proceed to next.
LVLE lost due to Control Comm &
faulty LVLE or Power Supply Thermal
cabling. (Tip 2)
Check cabling and Replace cabling.
connections from LVLE
to BCB.
Check TP1 on BCB for Replace LVLE.
24VDC present (J1 is
24VDC connection
from LVLE)
Tips:
1. Be sure that the detector charging cables are connected to the
proper terminal. J2, yellow, top is 14x17J3, orange, bottom is
10x12. If cables are reversed, there may be a false positive for
loss of 15 VDC.
2. It is possible to simulate 24 VDC loss by pulling pin J1 on BCB.
The detector com lost message occurs then detector shuts off if
it is in the bin. Removing the detector from the bin will initiate a
boot-up, then inserting back into the bin will cause a shut-down
with no 24vdc. If +24V on J8 is lost, the PC will shut down. If
+24V is lost anywhere else, should not effect communication
while on a tether cable.
No charge in bin, None None Shock absorbers. Examine the bin and Replace shock
LED not shock absorbers to absorbers.
illuminated. ensure they are
working properly.
Tips: The magnetic connection is fairly strong and the bin is tight.
Even with a shock absorber depressed, the connection remains
tight. Repetitive inserting and removal with a depressed shock
absorber may not be a 'short/crowbar' condition, there is built-in
protection in the BCB to prevent this.


Charging None Reference Log: LED indicator Check UI to ensure Proceed to next.
indicators on bin /magichome/xruser/log/ membrane detector is recognized.
are not DEM_XXXXX_ defective or LED
BATTERY_SENSOR Check DEM log for Proceed to next.
illuminated. indicator cable
.Y.LOG indications of charge
defective. (Tip 1)
increase.
If UI and DEM log Replace LED
indicate charge, isolate membrane or
to LED membrane and indicator cable.
indicator cable to J7 on
BCB.
BCB defective or Check BCB LED heart Proceed to next.
15VDC from BCB beat at DS1 (heart beat
lost. (Tip 2) 1/sec is normal; 10/sec
indicates errors)
Check LEDs at DS2-4 Proceed to next.
(DS2 is 15 VDC OK for
14x17, DS3 is 5 VDC
OK for internal logic,
DS4 is 15 VDC OK for
10x12).
Check TP17 (14x17) Proceed to next.
and TP18 (10x12) for
15 VDC present.
Check 5 VDC bus at Proceed to next.
TP2.
Check detector Replace cabling if
charging cables and damaged or replace
docking connectors. BCB.
Tips:
1. If only the LED membrane or cable is defective, the detector
may still be charging as indicated by the GUI or the DEM logs.
2. This may be a secondary use case. The user may initially
report the detector will not charge in the bin as noted. The BCB
supplies power to the state of charge LED membrane.


While tethered, None Reference Log: Defective DPS. Tether the detector. Proceed to next.
the battery is /magichome/xruser/log/
At 25%: "Detector battery Unplug the battery. Proceed to next.
losing charge. DEM_XXXXX_
charge is low. Please
BATTERY_SENSOR If the DPS is OK, the Replace DPS.
charge the detector battery
.Y.LOG detector will remain
as soon as possible."
connected. If faulty, the
detector
support exposure." communication will be
lost.
At <6%: "Digital Cassette
Detector communication Note: Exposures will be inhibited without the detector battery
lost. Confirm inserted.
communication with
problem persists."
Charging in Bin: "Detector
battery is not able to
persists."
Short duty cycle None Reference Log: Battery not Ensure proper Ensure proper
or short battery /magichome/xruser/log/ allowed to fully charging cycle. charging cycle.
life. DEM_XXXXX_ charge.
charge is low. Please
BATTERY_SENSOR
charge the detector battery Detector inserted Check that the detector Place detector in
.Y.LOG
as soon as possible."
into wrong bin. is inserted in the proper bin slot.
At 10%: "Detector battery correct bin slot.
support exposure." Be sure that the Correct charging
detector charging cable termination.
At <6%: "Digital Cassette cables are connected
Detector communication
to the proper terminal.
lost. Confirm
communication with J2, yellow, top is 14x17
detector. Call service if J3, orange, bottom is
problem persists." 10x12.
Charging in Bin: "Detector Tips: Inserting small detector in the large detector slot may not
battery is not able to hurt the battery, but with a slower charge rate it may not fully
charge when the user wants to use it.
persists."
Detector HW N/A N/A Detector Refer to Refer to
Issue hardware failure. 10.5.14 Detector 10.5.14 Detector
Diagnostics and Diagnostics and
Troubleshooting on Troubleshooting on
page 592 for page 592 for
troubleshooting issues troubleshooting
with the detector issues with the
hardware. detector hardware.

Section 10.5 Detector Troubleshooting

a workflow to isolate and troubleshoot detector issues. Included are log file locations, error
messages, diagnostic tools, and recommended corrective actions.
For executing commands related to the Wireless Access Point (AP) as shown in Table 10-12:
1. When instructed to "Execute the xx" command, you must:
2. Navigate to the /magichome/xruser/bin directory.
3. Preface the "xx" command with the following: ./interfaceToAccessPoint
4. For example, to execute the clients command:
./interfaceToAccessPoint clients
Table 10-11 File Paths for Log Files in Table 10-12
Log Name Full File Path

DevMasterServer.log /enggdata/logs/DevMasterServer.log
SysError.log /magichome/xruser/sysError.log
InterfaceToAccessPoint.log /enggdata/logs/InterfaceToAccessPoint.log
SysMSG.log /magichome/xruser/sysMSG.log
VarLogMessages.Log /enggdata/logs/VarLogMessages.log
Table 10-12 Detector Troubleshooting

Image Transfer None None System or None Reboot both System
Slow on Tether Detector Memory and Detector
OR Wireless approaching
capacity

Table 10-12 Detector Troubleshooting (Continued)

Image Transfer None Devmastersvr.log AP Channel Confirm Country Code Use SUIF to Set
Slow on Wireless will show connection Congested selection in SUIF is Country Code to
status. (Search for correct appropriate setting.
Lines tagged with Reboot system
"checkSignalMonitor()
snr") Tip: Via Class M SUIF - Configuration >
InterfaceToAccessPoint
General > Wireless Regulatory Code
.log Review channel Verify that the AP is
review for errors selections for WiFi not set to transmit on
communication via channels used by
SUIF the Hospital/clinic
Tips: Execute the getWorkingChannels
command to review configured channels.
Work with Hospital IT to determine if there is
overlap with hospital network.
Execute the clients command to view the

Channels currently used by Paired Detectors.
AP Signal Verify Detector LCD Review Display for 4
Strength too Low Display shows WiFi bars
Wireless Connectivity
Tip: The presence of >1 bar will show basic
connectivity.
Verify detector-AP Move Detector and
distance less than 200 AP closer together
feet
Tip: The number of WiFi bars should increase
as Detector/AP move closer together
Page 566 Section 10.5 Detector Troubleshooting


Detector Boot (If detector boot fails, no In SysError.log Detector Not Confirm detector is Register the
Fails on Wireless Text related to Boot On successful boot Registered Registered to the Detector via User
Process will display) show you will see: system Interface
(10.5.11 Detector
--1221029, Digital
Registration and
Cassette Detector Boot
is in progress
Management on
page 591)
--1221101, Digital
Cassette detector Too many Confirm <10 Detectors Select desired
calibration upload in Detectors registered to the detector in
progress Registered system dropdown box
--1221030, Digital Detector Not Confirm the detector in Select desired
Cassette Detector Boot Primary question is set as the detector in
is complete primary detector dropdown box
--1221102, Digital Tips: It is always necessary to pair a newly registered detector in
Cassette detector
the charging bin to complete the pairing process.
calibration upload
completed It may be necessary to reboot the detector after changing it to
primary to complete boot.
Detector Not Confirm the detector is Place detector in bin
Paired with paired with the system. and allow pairing to
System Verify detector LCD commence.
shows full signal
strength.
Isolate to Attempt to boot Send Snapshot to
Wireless detector on Tether Engineering
Connection.
If the above steps do
not restore Wireless,
confirm Detector
Communication is
functional by booting
with Tether. Send
Snapshot of logs to
Engineering for
Review.
See the Detector Boot
Fails on Tether section
if Tethered Boot Fails,
or AP Troubleshooting
section for further
Wireless Connectivity
solutions.


Detector Boot "Digital Cassette In SysError.log Impaired Data Confirm wireless Ping wireless
Incomplete on Detector Boot is in On successful boot, you Transmission communication. detector
Wireless progress" will see: Note: If the system
Note: will not show --1221029, Digital
begins the Wireless
"Digital Cassette Cassette Detector Boot Boot Process, but fails
Detector Boot is is in progress to complete the
complete" or "calibration Calibration upload, the
--1221101, Digital
upload completed" system is able to
Cassette detector
calibration upload in
establish wireless
progress communication with
the detector, but data
--1221030, Digital transfer is impaired.
Cassette Detector Boot
is complete Tip: Use the InterfaceToAccesspoints.log to
--1221102, Digital
identify the Wireless IP address of the
Cassette detector detector.
calibration upload Isolate fault to Wireless 1. Boot via Tether
completed
If boot is successful via 2. Send Snapshot to
Tether, the boot issue Engineering
is adequately isolated
to Wireless
communications. Use
DevMasterServer.log;
InterfaceToAccesspoin
t.log; and
Pki_Detectors.log to
further interrogate
wireless issues.
Reset wireless Unregister & Re-
communication Register detector,
then Re-Pair
System or Refresh Detector Reboot Detector
Detector Software Software Settings
Error
Refresh System Reboot System
Software
Tips: Detector reboot requires ~1 min
System reboot requires ~3 min


Detector Boot (If detector boot fails, no In SysError.log No System does not With detector
Fails on Tether Text related to Boot On successful boot, you Communication recognize detector powered on, Ping
Process will display) will see: with Detector detector at
192.168.3.30
--1221029, Digital
Cassette Detector Boot If successful, reboot
is in progress detector and
system. If not
--1221101, Digital
successful, see
Cassette detector
calibration upload in
below.
progress PC Network Determine if the With detector powered
--1221030, Digital Controller error system sees an on:
Cassette Detector Boot Ethernet connection on Connect to Tether and
is complete the Ethernet ports. review
VarLogMessages.log
--1221102, Digital
Cassette detector for evidence eth1 port
is connected.
calibration upload
completed With detector powered
on:
Place detector in Bin
and review
VarLogMessages.log
for evidence eth3 (for
10x12 detectors) or
eth4 (for 14x17)
detectors is connected.
Tips: If both diagnostics fail, the root cause is
likely Detector FW or Detector HW.
A Detector FW Factory Reset is possible (see
below). If the FW Flash does not resolve the
issue, contact Engineering for further
support.
Corrupted Reset Detector Factory 1. Send Snapshot to
Detector Software Defaults. Engineering
2. Press Detector
Power Button 10
times (approx 1x/
second). Detector
will default to
Factory Network
Configurations.


Detector Boot Digital Cassette In SysError.log System or Refresh Detector Reboot Detector
Incomplete on Detector Boot is in On successful boot, you Detector Software Software Settings
Tether progress will see: Error
Note: will not show --1221029, Digital Software
"Digital Cassette Cassette Detector Boot
Detector Boot is Tips: Detector reboot requires ~1 min
is in progress
complete" or "calibration System reboot requires ~3 min
--1221101, Digital
upload completed" Communication Confirm With detector
Cassette detector
calibration upload in Error Communication with powered on, Ping
progress Detector detector at
--1221030, Digital 192.168.3.30
Cassette Detector Boot If successful, reboot
is complete detector and
--1221102, Digital system. If not
Cassette detector successful, see
calibration upload below.
completed
System-Detector Re-Pair via Bin
Pairing Fails
Failed Tethered None None System or Refresh Detector Reboot Detector
"Ping" test Detector Software Software Settings
Error
Software
Tips: Detector reboot requires ~1 min
System reboot requires ~3 min
Corrupted Reset Detector Factory 1. Send Snapshot to
Detector Software Defaults. Engineering
2. Press Detector
Power Button 10
times (approx 1x/
second). Detector
will default to
Factory Network
Configurations.


Loss of Wireless Digital Cassette SysError.log SSID Profile / Verify connectivity via Reboot Detector,
Connectivity Detector 1221093 Digital PSK or other Tether and Bin Re-Pair by placing
communication lost. Cassette Detector authentication detector in the Bin
Confirm communication communication lost error between AP
Unregister & Re-
with detector. Call and Detector
Register detector,
service if problem
then Re-Pair
persists
AP to Detector Verify AP Firmware at Open the SUIF to
connectivity lost latest revision Homepage and
review the AP
Version.
Devmastersvr.log will Wireless Channel Review logs for error Confirm Country
show connection status. Selection or messages. Code selection in
(Search for Lines Congestion SUIF is correct
tagged with
"checkSignalMonitor() Unregister & Re-
snr") Register detector,
InterfaceToAccessPoint
then Re-Pair
.log
Devmastersvr.log will AP Boot Failure Reboot System
indicate if AP boot
completed or failed.
(Search for Lines
tagged with
"WifiHAPDMM.cpp")
Pairing Fails Pairing of the detector SysError.log Invalid SSID/PSK Review Reboot Detector
failed. Please remove 1221234, Pairing of the or other InterfaceToAccessPoint.l
og or Reboot System
detector from bin/tether detector failed. configuration data
and retry or call service DevMasterServer.log for Unregister & Re-
wireless access point Register detector,
if problem persists.
error logging.
then Re-Pair
Other Review AP
Troubleshooting or Bin
Charging
Troubleshooting
sections for further
solutions.


Image Loss (After exposure, image SysMSG.log Confirm the Review SysMSG.log for Educate users on
does not appear on system evidence of premature exposure
Clinical UI -- because completed exposure termination (if techniques and
the user prematurely exposure without any of the following log handswitch use.
messages are missing,
released exposure error It is common for
premature termination is
switch, thereby likely): customers to
terminating exposure release exposure
before exposure XRSysProxy,1,
switch before the
begins.) START_PREPARE
received
exposure fully
terminates. When
XRSysProxy,1, hand- this happens, no
switch pressed : expose image is transferred
XRSysProxy,1, Publish but the user still
event expects image.
RTB2_XRAY_ON_HI
XRSysProxy,1, Publish
event
RTB2_XRAY_ON_LO
(A complete exposure is SysMSG.log Confirm image XRImProc,1, Send Snapshot to
taken, but image processing steps FAST_PREVIEW_PROC Engineering
processing fails in either completed ESSING_DONE
Preview, Raw or without error XRImProc,1,
Processed Image RAW_PROCESSING_D
steps.) ONE
XRImProc,1,
SE_CONDITIONED_PR
OCESSING_DONE
(System configured for SysMSG.log Confirm the If the system is configured Set Clinical User
CR exposure) system was for Wireless Exposure, Interface for
configured for SysMSG.log will show: Wireless Exposure
Wireless Digital exposureMode=DigitalCa and repeat
ssetteFixedRAD
Detector technique.
exposure. If set If configured for CR
for CR exposure, exposure, SysMSG.log
no image transfer will show:
will occur. exposureMode=TableTop
FilmRAD


Image Transfer Digital Cassette SysError.log AP-Detector See "Loss of Wireless
Incomplete on Detector 1221093 Digital connectivity loss Connectivity" section
Wireless communication lost. Cassette Detector
Confirm communication communication lost
with detector. Call
service if problem
persists
None None User released Incomplete Exposure Educate users on
handswitch Technique: handswitch exposure
before technique released prior to full techniques and
completed exposure technique handswitch use.
completion.
In this scenario,
SysMSG.log will show: images will likely be
XRSysProxy,1, hand- transferred to the
switch released : expose system, but will
prior to
appear low quality
since exposure was
XRSysProxy,1, Publish incomplete.
event
RTB2_XRAY_ON_LO
XRSysProxy,1,
STOP_SEQUENCE
received
XRSysProxy,1,
STOP_PREPARE
received

10.5.1 Detector Overview

Detector primary functions are:
- To convert X-ray data into digital image data
- To transfer the digital data to the system for processing and display
The detector is an X-ray imaging device. The active array size is 2480 × 2976 pixels (active area of
24.80 × 29.76 cm) for the FlashPad HD 2530 detector; 3496 × 4260 pixels (active area of 34.96 ×
42.60 cm) for the FlashPad HD 3543 detector. Each pixel is attached to a data acquisition circuit
that converts incoming X-ray signal to 16-bit digital data.
The detector is constructed from carbon fiber faces in a metal frame. The front face contains a X-ray
imaging window. The back face contains safety warnings.
The system is compatible with the following detectors:
• FlashPad HD 2530 (GE Part number: 5771012) – 10 inch x 12 inch (25 cm x 30 cm) Detector
• FlashPad HD 3543 (GE part number: 5771417) – 14 inch x 17 inch (35 cm x 43 cm) Detector
Figure 10-70 10 × 12 inch Digital Detector
Figure 10-71 14 × 17 inch Digital Detector
Electronics
The primary function of the readout electronics is to convert the charge into digital image data.
This data is then transmitted to the system through a wireless link or an Ethernet connection.

10.5.2 Detector Handling

The device contains sensitive electronics that are susceptible to vibration, shock, drop, and
impact.
Do not swing the device into hard surfaces, especially corners, as this may scratch the
cover, create image quality artifacts, or damage the electronics inside.
Special Instructions if the detector is dropped: Inspect the exterior for any possible cracks. Run
Detector Check to test the detector. It will be clear if the electronics are not functioning. Other
possible failures may include communication problems, image quality degradation, and loss of
power. If any or all of these occur, call your GE Service Representative.
• Do not drop objects onto the detector.

• Do not use the detector as a stretcher to lift a patient.
• Do not drop the detector at any time.
• Do not prop the device on an edge, against wall or bed. Keep detector in cradle, bucky, or other
GE-supplied container.
• Do not place other objects or patients on the detector if it is not on a flat surface, as shown
below.
• Do not use unapproved chemical cleaners.
• Do not immerse detector into water or other liquids.
• Do not use an external defibrillator while patient remains in contact with detector.
• Do not use this system when an internal defibrillator is discharging.
• Do not place objects on detector if it is not lying flat
Detector surfaces have been treated with a finish to provide a smooth and easily cleanable surface.
Take care to protect the surface from scratches.
Extra precautions should be taken if the device will be exposed to excessive amounts of
bodily fluids or liquids.
The detector is designed to prevent some liquids or particulate matter from getting inside the cover.
It can sustain a temporary splash or spray, but it is not designed to be immersed in liquid (not even
temporarily).
A 3-axis accelerometer inside monitors the shock events. The Digital Detector can record “Bump
Events” as a result of mishandling.
Note: In the event that the detector is dropped or receives an impact, a QAP should be performed and
passed before imaging is attempted.

10.5.3 Hardware Overview

Features are typical for both detector sizes.
Detector Front
1 1 2
1 7
1 1 2
2 3 4 5
Item Description
1 Detector Active Visible Area (Imaging area inside the white marks) - The arrow
represents the Head Up orientation and edge is scalloped (Figure 10-73)
2 Wireless Antenna Window (on edge, Figure 10-73 & Figure 10-76)
3 Tether Connection (on edge, Figure 10-73)
4 Indicator Display (on edge, Figure 10-73)
5 Power Button (on edge, Figure 10-73)
6 ID Label (on edge, Figure 10-75)
7 Battery (on edge, Figure 10-76)
Figure 10-72 Front of the Digital Detector

Detector Edge Features
5
4
3
1
2
Item Description
1 Scalloped Edge, Head Up Side
2 Wireless Antenna Window
3 Tether Connection (see 10.5.6 Tether on page 586 for more information)
4 Indicator Display (Figure 10-74)
5 Power Button
Figure 10-73 Detector Antenna, Tether Connection, Indicator Display and Power Button

Detector Indicators
The detectors have an LCD display that indicates various conditions of operation. See Figure 10-
74.
1 2 3 4 5
Item Description

1
Detector Battery – 1 bar: >10% to ≤25%
Detector Battery Low: ≤10%, Below charge for exposures
No Detector Battery
LAN Connection
2
No LAN Connection
Wireless Connectivity – 4 bars – Excellent signal
Wireless Connectivity – 3 bars – Good signal
3 Wireless Connectivity – 2 bars – Low signal
Wireless Connectivity – 1 bars – Very Low signal
No Wireless Connectivity
4 Temperature Warning
5 Shock Warning
Figure 10-74 Indicator Display Details

Figure 10-75 Detector ID Label
Item Description
1 Detector Battery (see 10.5.5.1 Battery Replacement and Charging on page 581 for
more information)
2 Wireless Antenna Window
Figure 10-76 Detector Battery
10.5.4 Detector Grid

The Digital Detector grid is integrated with a holder that fits the detector exactly. The grid and
detector are keyed to allow for proper alignment and attachment. Once together, you may handle
the grid and detector as one unit with the same weight limits.
The markings on the grid surface show the direction of the grid lines.

3
3

1 2
Item Description
1 Grid Front (6:1 grid ratio or 8:1 grid ratio are available options for both the 14×17 and
10×12 detectors.)
2 Grid Back
3 Grid Line Indicators show direction of grid lines. Gaps between indicators show
center of grid/detector.
Figure 10-77 Detector Grid
The detector automatically detects when the grid is properly in place. If the grid has been put on
backwards, the system will give an alert to the user on the Acquisition Screen.
10.5.4.1 Grid Attachment
Figure 10-78 Attaching the Grid
See Figure 10-78.

• The bottom edge of the detector should be placed into the bottom lip of the grid holder while
held in the vertical position with the carbon graphite cover (on the front of the detector) facing
the inside of the grid holder.
• Ensure the head up arrow on the grid is aligned to the head up arrow on the detector, then
press the detector into the top edge of the grid holder.
• Be careful to not pinch your fingers or clothing when assembling.
While in use, keep a firm grasp on both the grid holder and the detector. The markings for the active
area are clearly shown on the exterior surface of the grid holder.

10.5.4.2 Grid Handling

The grid is a sensitive device containing delicate mechanical structures. It is made of very thin
pieces of lead (Pb) and interspersed with Aluminum (Al).
• Do not drop the grid.
• Do not allow objects to hit/impact the grid.
• Do not immerse grid in water or other liquid.
• Do not peel labels.
• Inspect the grid for physical damage before use.
• Clean the grid regularly (between each use). Refer to 2.3.5.3 Cleaning the System on page 60
for more information.
10.5.5 Detector Operation

Power ON Mode:
The digital detector is powered ON and ready for imaging.
In this mode, the digital detector indicator display will turn off after several seconds to save detector
battery power. Simply press and release the detector power button to turn this display back On.
To power off the detector, press and hold the power button for 4 seconds.
Power OFF Mode:
The digital detector is powered off and consumes no power.
To turn it on, press and hold the power button for 1 second. The detector will go through boot-up
cycle and will be ready for exposures in about 45 seconds.
The Digital Detector can be set to turn OFF automatically at a designated time to save the battery
power of the Digital Detector.
10.5.5.1 Battery Replacement and Charging
10.5.5.1.1 Battery Replacement
Figure 10-79 Battery Replacement
To replace the detector battery (Figure 10-79):

1. Push the to two buttons toward the center until the battery rises slightly from the slot.
2. Pull the battery from the slot.
3. Insert the replacement battery into the slot with the label side up. Gently push the battery fully
into the slot until it clicks into place.
Note: If the battery is inserted upside down, it will not fully seat in the slot. Remove it and turn it over.
A Detector Battery MUST be kept in the detector at all times. This includes imaging in both wireless
and tethered modes. Failure to do so may cause damage to the detector.
10.5.5.1.2 Desktop Battery Chargers

If the system is on and/or charging, the Digital Detectors will charge when in the bin of the Optima
XR240amx.
Backup batteries should be stored and charging in the Desktop Battery Chargers.
The chargers are intended for use only with the GE FlashPad HD rechargeable lithium-ion batteries.
Chargers are specific to each detector size.
The chargers display the status of the battery packs. There are two charging bays on each charger.
Status lights on the charger indicate the status of each battery pack.
Figure 10-80 Desktop Battery Charger
Battery Charger Safety

Carefully follow the instructions in this document for your own safety, the safety of others, and to
maximize charger and battery life and performance.
• Do not use the desktop battery charger if the casing is damaged.
• The desktop battery charger does not have a main power switch. During any observed unsafe
operating conditions, immediately disconnect the charger's AC power plug from the wall outlet.
• Follow appropriate safety precautions when connecting the AC power plug. Ensure access to
the power plug is unobstructed at all times.
• Observe and follow all safety information in this document and on the warning label found on
the desktop battery charger.
• Keep out of reach of children.
Battery Charger Setup
To set up the desktop battery charger:

1. Plug the provided power supply cable into the connector located on the side of the charger.
2. Plug the male connector of the provided cord into a properly grounded wall electrical outlet.
The green charger power status light (Figure 10-81) illuminates indicating that the battery
charger has power.
Figure 10-81 Charger Power Status Light
3. The optional bracket can be used to install the charger on the wall.
a. Locate the hardware kit, which contains anchors and screws for mounting to a wall, and
a captive screw for securing the charger to the bracket.
b. Refer to Figure 10-82. Install the captive screw (Item 1) in the wall mount bracket as
shown below, and attach the bracket to the wall using the mounting holes (Item 2), screws
and self-drilling anchors, if needed.

Item Description
1 Captive Screw for securing charger
2 Bracket Mounting Holes
Figure 10-82 Charger Wall Mount Bracket
c. Install the charger on the top shelf, and the power supply on the bottom shelf. Plug the
provided power supply cable into the connector located on the side of the charger.
Charging FlashPad HD Battery Packs
To charge FlashPad HD battery packs:
1. Verify that the battery pack and charger are clean.
2. Insert the battery pack into the charger bay, noting the orientation of the pack. The battery
contacts must face down and the battery pack label must face forward.
3. Note the color of the illuminated battery pack status light. See below.
- See Figure 10-83.There are four green LEDs per bay. The first LED status light should
illuminate when the battery is inserted indicating the battery is charging. When fully
charged, all four green LEDs will illuminate. Remove the battery from the charger; it is
now ready for use.

Figure 10-83 Charging Progress Bar, Green LEDs
- The red LED indicates a fault has occurred. The red LED in combination with flashing
green LED defines the fault status. See Figure 10-84.
Fault Remedy
Remove the battery from the charger, stop using this
Charge V too high
battery with the detector, and contact GE Service.
Battery Over Remove the battery from the charger, stop using this
Discharged battery with the detector, and contact GE Service.
Battery Charge >8hrs Remove the battery from the charger, stop using this
Incorrect Battery Do not charge an unauthorized battery in the charger. If
Inserted the fault shows with the correct battery inserted, remove
the battery from the charger, stop using this battery with
the detector, and contact GE Service.
SMBus Communication Remove the battery from the charger, stop using this
Temperature out of Control the environmental temperature so the charger
range operating temperature is within the defined range per
the specifications table.
Figure 10-84 Fault Indications
General Charger Instructions

• A new rechargeable battery comes in a discharged condition. Charge the battery before use
using the desktop battery charger.
• The desktop battery charger will charge the battery in up to three hours, depending on the
initial state of charge. The detector can also charge the battery, but the charge rate is much
slower.
• A charged battery will eventually lose its charge if unused. Upon initial use, (or after a
prolonged storage period), the battery may require three to four charge/discharge cycles
before achieving maximum capacity.

• The battery is keyed and can only be inserted into the charger in one orientation. Insert the
battery, and retain in the charger until all four charge status LEDs maintain a solid green,
indicating a full charge. To remove the battery, lift it out of the charger.
Charger Operating Conditions
• Do not use in temperatures outside of the operating ambient temperature range of 0–42° C
(32–107° F) during charging with 10% to 90% relative humidity, non-condensing.
• It is normal for a battery to become warm to the touch during charging.
• Observe and follow all safety information in this document and on the warning label found on
the charger.
Charger Maintenance
Do not disassemble. No modification of this equipment is allowed.
Charger Cleaning
• Clean the charger using a lightly moistened cloth with 70% isopropyl alcohol or 3% hydrogen
peroxide.
• Never use thinner, benzene, acetone, or any other corrosive or flammable cleaning agents.
Charger Disposal
• At the end of its working life, do not dispose of the charger with other waste.
• Recycle or dispose of the charger in accordance with local, state, and federal/national laws
and environmental regulations.
Definition of Charger Symbols
Symbol Description
Manufacturer’s Name and Address
Reference Number; Part Number
Serial Number
Date of Manufacture
European Conformity marking
UL found that representative product samples

met UL’s safety requirements for both the
United States and Canada
Refer to Instruction Manual
Disposal (WEEE).
Follow all local and regional disposal

requirements.

Symbol Description
Keep Dry
Operate within specified temperature range.
Operate within specified relative humidity

range (non-condensing).
Charger Specifications
General
Input Voltage 100–240V~
Input Current 1.3A
Output Voltage 15V
Output Current 10A
Charging time Approximately 3 hours
Temperature and Humidity Ranges
Charging 0–42° C; RH 10–90% non-condensing
Transportation -20–45° C; RH 10–90% non-condensing
Storage 15–35° C; RH 10–90% non-condensing
Ingress
Ingress protection rating IP2X No protection against liquids
10.5.6 Tether
Figure 10-85 Attachable Tether
10.5.6.1 Tether Handling

To ensure maximum tether life, follow these guidelines:
• Treat the tether with care.

• Clean the tether after each use with an approved cleaning chemical. See 2.3.5.3 Cleaning the
System on page 60 for complete cleaning instructions.
• Untwist the tether periodically. The colored stripe on the tether shows if it is twisted.
• Do not jerk or pull on the tether. For example, do not pull on the tether to free it from under a
wheel (especially if the tether is twisted).
• Do not step on the tether.
• Do not run over the tether with the unit, cart, table or other equipment.
• Do not use the tether as a handle.
• Do not bend or fold the tether sharply, especially at the points where the tether connects to the
detector and to the unit.
10.5.6.2 Tether Use

The tether should be kept with the mobile system at all times. It can be stored in the storage
compartment. Use the tether under these conditions:
• Low Digital Detector battery. Tether the system to continue imaging.
• Connectivity issues between the Digital Detector and the system.
• Complete loss of connectivity between the Digital Detector and the system. You can use the
tether until your Service Engineer can diagnose and repair the problem.
• QAP
• Register Detector
10.5.7 Wireless Pre-Shared Key (PSK)

The Wireless PSK is the password to allow for secure communication between the detector and
the system. The PSK can be reset through a manual process via the Service User Interface.
If the PSK has been reset, all detectors previously paired with the system will no longer connect
wirelessly and must be paired again before use.

10.5.8 Detector Labels

Number Text
1 FlashPad HD 2530 (GE Part number: 5771012) – 10 inch × 12 inch
(25 cm × 30 cm) Detector
2 FlashPad HD 3543 (GE part number: 5771417) – 14 inch × 17 inch
(35 cm × 43 cm) Detector
3 UDI QR Code
4 UDI Number
Figure 10-86 Detector Labels
UDI: Unique Device Identifier - A UDI is an unique numeric or alphanumeric identification code
assigned to medical devices by the manufacturer of the device. An unique device identification
marking is applied to a Product Model that is designated as a medical device as per FDA UDI
regulation.
Every Flashpad HD detector has an unique marking for identification. The Unique Device
Identification (UDI) marking appears on the product label which is located on the back of the
detector.
10.5.9 Electromagnetic Interference

The detector has been designed and tested to meet all IEC regulations in regard to electromagnetic
(EM) susceptibility (and EMC).
However, there are no regulations for low frequency EM fields. All flat panel detectors have some
susceptibility to these EM fields.
This detector is robust to EM fields up to 0.1mG over a broad low frequency range (DC - 250kHz).
It has been found that some common equipment in clinical environments can generate EM fields
well over 0.1mG. Some measurements have shown 4mG field strengths which can cause artifacts
on X-ray images.
EM fields are reduced by the square of the distance between the EM source and the detector. Thus,
moving the EM source twice as far away will reduce the field strength by 4 times.
General suggestions:

• Keep IV pumps, patient monitoring, feeding pumps 1 meter or more away from any detector
surface.
• Consider turning off equipment that cannot be moved.
• Change the patient or detector orientation /position to maximize distance from any equipment.
• Turn on the EMI Reduction feature. See the Preferences chapter for information on how to do
this.
Note: The default setting for EMI Reduction is OFF. In order for EMI Reduction to be performed on any
image, the feature must be turned ON. This will only apply to future acquisitions taken after the
feature is turned ON.
Possible sources of EM fields:
• IV pumps
• Monitors
• Feeding pumps
• Patient monitors
• ECG equipment
• EMG equipment
• Infusion pumps
• RF ablators
• Powered surgical equipment
• Heaters
• Air conditioners
• Refrigerators

10.5.10 Detector Icons

The table below defines various detector Icons. A single Icon will appear on the Operator UIF.
Table 10-13 Digital Detector Status

14×17 Icon 10×12 Icon Description
Discharging Digital Detector Battery – 4 green bars: >75% to

≤100%

≤75%

≤50%
Discharging Digital Detector Battery – 1 green bar: >10% to

≤25%
Discharging Digital Detector Battery Low: ≤10%, Below charge

for exposures
Charging Digital Detector Battery Low: ≤10%, Below charge for

exposures
Charging Digital Detector Battery – 1 green bar: >10% to ≤25%
Charging Digital Detector Battery – 2 green bars: >25% to

≤50%

≤75%

≤100%
Digital Detector – Tethered
Digital Detector – Sleep Mode
Digital Detector – No Primary Detector is registered with the

system
Digital Detector – Failed Communication. When detector is
placed in the bin and this symbol shows, it means the detector
is not ready for acquisition as it is not connected wirelessly or
via tether to the system.

10.5.11 Detector Registration and Management

See Section 4.16 Installing Digital Detectors on page 176.
10.5.12 Detector Sensors

The detector design includes sensors that combined with software provide warnings to the operator
for certain conditions.
• Voltages internal to the detector are monitored for conformance to lower spec limit (LSL) and
upper spec limit (USL). Voltage failure conditions are reported to the operator UIF. The event
is recorded. Depending on severity, exposure may be inhibited, and a request for detector
service will be posted.
• Temperature sensors are positioned in the detector to monitor panel temperature (for image
quality) and surface temperature (for patient safety). Defective sensor detection is employed
and the detector enters error-handling process once a new bad sensor is detected.
Detector Surface Temperature events will be stored within a system error log and the detector-
specific error log. Reported detector surface temperature data will be stored within a detector-
specific log file. Log data includes detector serial number, time stamp (date & time), detector
surface temperature, and the values of the individual internal temperature sensors (all
temperatures in degrees Celsius).
- Detector threshold value for alert is set to 39 degrees Celsius
- Detector threshold value doe detector shutdown is set to 41 degrees Celsius.
• Shock sensors monitor G-forces to detect any physical event that may have happened. There
are two sets of shock sensors inside the detector, which are used to monitor the amount of
shock received by the detector. There are two warning levels that can be reported to the
operator based on acceleration, levels 3 and 5.
If the detector is in a powered-off state, the detector will use the detector battery to monitor and
record shock events. If the detector battery is not present there is a small 3V battery internal
to the detector that supplies the necessary power to monitors shock.
- Level 3 (critical): Indicating a critical shock event has been detected. The system will
inhibit the use of the detector until successful QAP has been performed. The event is
saved to the SD card in the detector, a warning message is displayed to the user on the
system, and image acquisition is inhibited.
* After successful competition of a QAP, the system will clear the critical-shock inhibit
and allow the detector to be used again.
- Level 5 (warning): Indicating a serious event has been detected. The event is saved to
the SD card in the detector and a warning message is displayed to the user on the system.
* After the system receives the serious shock event, the system will clear the event and
allow the detector to be used.
Note: in both shock levels, the event information will remain saved in the SD card memory for
future reference by Health Page. Additionally, clearing the event as described above
equivalently clears the shock icon on the detector indicator panel that was illuminated when
the event occurred.
• Grid sensors detect the placement and removal of the grid on the front of the detector. Two
polarized magnets on the grid are used to accomplish this monitoring. Placement of a grid on
the rear of the detector will create a FAULT. The detector will monitor the presence of a grid
and send the system a grid status change message when the grid is attached to or removed
from the detector. If the grid is attached on the wrong side of the detector, the detector sends
a level 3 warning message.

10.5.13 Failure Modes
10.5.13.1 Communication Failures

An error message, error code, and Warning Icon will appear on the operator UIF when
communication between the host and detector is lost or fails to be established during detector boot.
Communications failures can occur at anytime whenever there is a failure to establish or maintain
the handshake between the host PC and the detector.
10.5.14 Detector Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

The following detector diagnostics and troubleshooting information is provided to assist the root
cause of issues associated to the system and detector. Specific diagnostics descriptions, pre-
requisites, and instructions are described. Pre-requisites include certain conditions. An example is
BIST Passes, or PING Passes. Verify these conditions are True, and use this information to isolate
root cause.
Diagnostics report individual test results, overall PASS or FAIL, or the status regarding expected
results of the test performed. Suggested follow up actions, based on the results of the diagnostics,
are provided in flow diagrams and supporting statements.
When a site has multiple systems, multiple detectors, multiple tethers, or just multiple
communication methods (Wireless or Tether), troubleshooting alternatives become available.
Some suggestions are the following:
• Try swapping between communication methods (Wireless and Tether) to root cause
• If a detector is suspect, try moving it to a different system to root cause
• Swap detectors and retest on the same system and mode of operation
• Swap tether cables to root cause
• Try different charging methods to root cause
• Swap batteries to root cause
• Swap grids to root cause
Observe the indicators on the detector during operation, during diagnostic testing, and during
troubleshooting. Typical LCD information is shown in Detector Indicators on page 578. Compare
observations and diagnostic results to the expected NORMAL operation.
Verify the detector is within normal application distance of the system during Wireless operation. A
Lost Communication message will appear if the detector is too far from the system. A No Wireless
Connectivity Wireless LCD will usually precede a message.
Always review symptoms, error logs, intermittent failures, or unusual performance details with the
operator.
10.5.14.1 Diagnostics for Communication Failures

There are several possible causes for communication failure between the system and detector.
Communication failures can happen in any communication method, and during any processes. Ask
the operator to describe the symptoms and any error that may have been posted.
Some unusual causes of communication failures are listed below:
• An extremely large patient may have blocked the antenna of the detector preventing
responses back to the system. This requires investigative troubleshooting.
• A lead apron may have been positioned on the patient, but too close to the detector antenna,
preventing responses back to the system.
• Other causes of communication failure can be loss of power from a source, external electronic
noise, RF signal blockage, or issues with interface boxes or cabinets, poor cable connections,

contaminated connectors and receptacle contacts or pins, intermittent AP operation, and

internal detector issues.
• A detector/system that fails to communicate in one method may communicate
successfully in another method. This will allow continued, but limited use, until the root
cause can be repaired.
10.5.14.2 BIST (Built In Self Test) Diagnostic (Wireless or Tethered)

This diagnostic tests the detector functions including SDRam and all communication paths. Any
specified test failure (within BIST) will result in BIST failure. BIST failure usually indicates there is a
problem internal to the detector.
The communication path in use (Tethered or Wireless) is checked during system start up. This is
accomplished by an applications version of BIST that runs automatically. BIST will not run if
detector is in Sleep mode.
Pre-requisites:
• Verify power to detector, verify detector LEDs are Normal for Wireless or Tether operation.
Verify the appropriate detector Icon is appearing on the operator UIF. If the test is being
conducted in Wireless operation, verify the detector used in this test is shown as “Active” on
the Detector Management screen.
Instructions:
1. Ensure the detector is placed in the appropriate location for the test and not in a charging bin.
2. Ensure the Detector is powered on.
3. Press the Start button to begin.
4. Press the Cancel button to abort or return to the navigation menu.
10.5.14.3 PING Diagnostic (Wireless or Tethered)

Ping operation of the detector to system communication is verified by performing Wireless Ethernet
Diagnostics.
10.5.14.4 Ethernet Stats Diagnostic (Wireless or Tethered)

This diagnostic tests the detector communication under load conditions similar to the image
acquisition mode. “Dark” images (no X-ray required) are sent to the host PC and any re-transmit of
data that is required is recorded with results displayed to the user. Hardware involved is associated
with communication path elements of the system and modules within the detector.
Pre-requisites:
• Verify power to detector, verify detector LEDs are Normal for Wireless, Tether, or GbEthernet
operation. Verify the appropriate detector Icon is appearing on the operator UIF. If the test is
being conducted in Wireless operation, verify the detector used in this test is shown as “Active”
on the Detector Management screen.
Instructions:
1. Ensure the detector is placed in the appropriate location for this test and not in a charging bin.
2. Ensure the Detector is powered on.
3. Press the Start button to begin.
4. Press the Cancel button to abort or return to the navigation menu.

6WDUW
:LUHOHVV2SHUDWLRQ
(WKHUQHW67$76 3DVV
'LDJQRVWLF
,IDOOWHVWV3DVV UXQ
)DLO 4$3
$5&)DLOXUH 'LJLWDO
7HVW3DWWHUQ)DLOXUH RU
'DUN,PDJH7HVW
)DLOXUH

7U\7HWKHU
RSHUDWLRQ
)DLO 5HSHDW(WKHUQHW 3DVV

6WDWV'LDJQRVWLF
,IWKHGLDJQRVWLFIDLOVRQWZR
5XQ:LUHOHVV&RPP
RUPRUHFRPPSDWKV WKH
'LDJQRVWLF
GHWHFWRULVKLJKO\VXVSHFW
7U\DQDOWHUQDWHGHWHFWRURU
PRYHWKHVXVSHFWGHWHFWRUWR
DQRWKHUV\VWHPDQGUHSHDW
GLDJQRVWLF

6WDUW
7HWKHU2SHUDWLRQ
(WKHUQHW67$76 3DVV
'LDJQRVWLF
)DLO ,IDOOWHVWV3DVV
UXQ4$3
3HUIRUPFRQWLQXLW\WHVWRQWKH
7HWKHU ([DPLQHFRQQHFWRUV
IRUGDPDJH &KHFNFRQQHFWLRQ
WR7,%LIXVHG
1R <HV
7HWKHU2. "
7U\DDOWHUQDWHGHWHFWRU
5HSODFHWKH RUPRYHVXVSHFWGHWHFWRU
WHWKHU WRDQRWKHUV\VWHPDQG
UHSHDWGLDJQRVWLF
10.5.15 Detector Boot and Registration Troubleshooting

This section describes and clarifies common error scenarios during detector boot, pairing, and
registration, provides troubleshooting and resolutions to common errors, and describes when the
HDx detector firmware, compatibility table, and private key need to be upgraded following released
service procedures to allow for proper function.
10.5.15.1 Detector and System Compatibility Matrix

Note: Applicable to Optima XR240amx Gen2 SW Version 2.25+.
The XR240amx system and HDx detector both contain a compatibility matrix that will only allow
specified firmware and software version combinations to function; i.e. if the software and/or the
firmware and/or the SDK do not return an expected value, detector registration is not allowed.
There are three components to the compatibility matrix that must match:
1. The system software version - application software must be allowed to accept certain
detector firmware/SDK versions
2. The detector SDK - the SDK is the means by which the applications software communicates
to the detector firmware. The SDK resides in the system's applications software.
3. The detector Firmware - the detector firmware controls high level communication and
functionality. Note that this is different than the system hardware firmware.
In addition to the compatibility matrix, the detector also contains an internal Private Key. The
Private Key indicates the detector was procured and distributed by GE Healthcare. The detector
Private Key feature was introduced in the Optima XR240amx Gen2 program, thus original Optima
XR240amx Gen1 detectors do not contain this. If the Private Key is found when queried by the

Optima XR240amx Gen2 system software, detector boot and registration is allowed; provided the
SDK, Firmware, and Software also match. If it is desired to share an original Gen1 detector (see
Table 1 below for part numbers and descriptions), with any other HDx applicable system, the
Firmware, SDK, compatibility table, and Private Key must all be updated. This process must also
be completed in the event of an Optima XR240amx Gen1 to Optima XR240amx Gen2 upgrade.
10.5.15.2 Detector Boot and Registration Decision Tree

Note: Applicable to Optima XR240amx Gen2 SW Version 2.25+.
Detector boot will query both the compatibility table on the system and the compatibility table on the
detector pending the response. The below description, in combination with the decision tree,
describes the boot sequence query.
During the detector boot request, the system software will query the
DetectorCompatibilityTable.cfg file on the system (blue highlighted box below in decision
tree). If the system software version and detector SDK/FW combination are found, registration is
allowed after boot sequence is complete.
If the system software version and/or detector SDK/FW combination are not found on the system's
compatibility table (blue highlighted box below in decision tree), the system will then query the
DetectorCompatibilityTable.cfg file on the detector (green highlighted box below in
decision tree). If the system software version and detector SDK/FW combination are found,
registration is allowed after boot sequence is complete. If the system software version and/or
detector SDK/FW combination are not found, the system will not allow registration and return a
Detector Incompatible error and/or an Incorrect Firmware error. Refer to decision tree below.

10.5.15.3 Maintaining Compatibility

Several important points for maintaining compatibility during continued development and product
release:
• If there is a system software (applications software) update, the compatibility matrix will be
updated as part of the software release.
- Compatibility of detector firmware to system software and SDK is evaluated and
maintained by the design engineering team.
• If there is a new system/product release, the compatibility matrix will be updated as part of the
launch.
• If there is a detector FW update, the compatibility matrix will be updated as part of the detector
firmware release.
- The detector firmware can be updated independently of an applications software update.
As updates always occur forward, or in the latest releases, detectors can always be shared
backwards to older software vintages on applicable systems; however, older detectors can never
be shared forward on newer software vintages (until firmware, SDK, compatibility table are
updated). See table below for sharing applicability and vintage description of the HDx detector
platform.

Table 10-14 Vintage Description and Sharing Applicability for HDx Detectors
Detector Part Description Original Private Shareable With Process to Update
Number SDK/ Key
Firmware
Release
5771012 REF on the detector label N/A N/A N/A N/A
5771417 (Figure 10-87 on
page 600). This is a static
part number used for in-
country registration
purposes and does not
indicate vintage or FW
version.
5781012: GE HDx detector introduction FW2.36 None XR240amx Gen1 Return to OEM or
Labeled and initial launch on ALL_16013 SW3.36 (+) and SDK update with
5781012-P: Varex Optima XR240amx Gen1 2.33 XR240amx Gen2
Labeled system. SW2.25,
5781012-R: Service XR646 (G3a) SW3.40
5781417: GE (+), or XR656 (G3a)
Labeled SW3.40 (+).
5781417-P: Varex
Labeled
5781417-R: Service
5781012-2: GE Label only change for FW2.36 None XR240amx Gen1 Return to OEM or
Labeled additional registration ALL_16013 SW3.36 (+) and SDK update with
5781012-2P: Varex clearances. 2.33 XR240amx Gen2
Labeled SW2.25,
5781012-2R: Service XR646 (G3a) SW3.40
(+), or XR656 (G3a)
5781417-2: GE SW3.40 (+).
Labeled
5781417-2P: Varex
Labeled
5781417-2R: Service
5781012-3: GE New firmware to support FW3.10 Yes XR240amx Gen1 See 3.6.2 Detector
Labeled release of Optima XR646/ ALL_16355 SW3.36 (+) and SDK Firmware Download
5781012-3P: Varex 656 and Optima 2.33 on page 78.
Labeled XR240amx Gen2 XR240amx Gen2
5781012-3R: Service SW2.25 (+) and SDK
3.9
5781417-3: GE XR646 (G3a) SW3.40
Labeled (+) and SDK 3.9
5781417-3P: Varex XR656 (G3a) SW3.40
5781417-3R: Service

Table 10-14 Vintage Description and Sharing Applicability for HDx Detectors (Continued)
Detector Part Description Original Private Shareable With Process to Update
Number SDK/ Key
Firmware
Release
5781012-4: GE Label only change for FW3.10 Yes XR240amx Gen1 See 3.6.2 Detector
Labeled additional registration ALL_16355 SW3.36 (+) and SDK Firmware Download
5781012-4P: Varex clearances. 2.33 on page 78.
Labeled XR240amx Gen2
3.9
5781417-4: GE XR646 (G3a) SW3.40
5781417-4P: Varex XR656 (G3a) SW3.40
5781417-4R: Service
5781012-5: GE New firmware as part of FW3.13 Yes XR240amx Gen1 See 3.6.2 Detector
Labeled continuous improvement ALL_16817 SW3.36 (+) and SDK Firmware Download
5781012-5P: Varex and development. 2.33 on page 78.
Labeled XR240amx Gen2
3.9
5781417-5: GE XR646 (G3a) SW3.40
5781417-5P: Varex XR656 (G3a) SW3.40
5781417-5R: Service
5781012-6: GE Labeled Label only change for FW3.13 Yes XR240amx Gen1 See 3.6.2 Detector
additional registration ALL_16817 SW3.36 (+) and SDK Firmware Download
5781012-6P: Varex
clearances. 2.33 on page 78.
Labeled
XR240amx Gen2
3.9
5781417-6: GE Labeled
XR646 (G3a) SW3.40
5781417-6P: Varex (+) and SDK 3.9
Labeled XR656 (G3a) SW3.40
(+) and SDK 3.9
5781417-6R: Service
5781012-7: GE Labeled New firmware to support FW4.8 Yes XR240amx Gen1 No update needed at
release of Optima XR646/ ALL_16981 SW3.36 (+) and SDK this time.
5781012-7P: Varex
656 and Optima 2.33
Labeled
XR240amx Gen2 with XR240amx Gen2
5781012-7R: Service CCS and QCS SW2.25 (+) and SDK
3.9
5781417-7: GE Labeled
XR646 (G3a) SW3.40
5781417-7P: Varex (+) and SDK 3.9
Labeled XR656 (G3a) SW3.40
(+) and SDK 3.9
5781417-7R: Service

Figure 10-87 Detector Label
10.5.15.4 Common Errors When Attempting To Register a Non-compatible

Detector
10.5.15.4.1 No Detector Found

When attempting to register a detector to the Optima XR240amx system, it is possible that the
system is unable to locate the detector. The following error (figure below) may appear in the
detector registration interface if:
• The detector in the specified location is not booted.
• The detector in the specified location is paired but boot is not complete.
• The detector in the specified location has not completed calibration data upload.
Figure 10-88 No Detector Found
Recovery:
Allow the detector to boot completely when it is connected to the tether or in the bin. Wait for all of
the following messages to appear: Successful Pairing, Boot Complete, and Calibration
Data Upload Complete. If attempting to register a detector to a system for the first time, this
may take 90 to 120 seconds to recognize the detector. If needed, remove the detector from the
tether/bin and attempt to reconnect.
10.5.15.4.2 Detector Compatibility Table Incorrect

system will disallow registration due to an incompatibility error. The following errors (figures below)
may appear if the detector in the specified location does not have the expected compatibility matrix,

or the compatibility matrix is corrupted or not in the correct directory. This means that the detector
is not compatible with the system software version and must have the compatibility table updated.
Figure 10-89 Detector booted, but Not Compatible error from Detector Registration UI
Figure 10-90 Error sequence for incorrect compatibility table from system message bar
Recovery:
Follow 3.6.2 Detector Firmware Download on page 78 to load the compatibility table and/or
firmware onto the detector; refer to Table 10-14 on page 598 for corresponding expected values.
Note: The detector does not need to be registered to update the compatibility table, only connected via
tether or charging bin.
Note: This error (1221219) will also appear if the detector firmware or SDK are not compatible with the
expected values within the compatibility table.
10.5.15.4.3 Detector with Incorrect Firmware

system will disallow registration due to an incorrect firmware error. The following error (figures
below) may appear if the firmware on the detector is corrupted or if it is not compatible with the
system software. This means that the detector firmware is of a prior vintage that is disallowed from
use with the current system software.

Figure 10-91 Detector booted, but Not Compatible error from Detector Registration UI
Figure 10-92 Error for incorrect detector firmware from system message bar
If a tether option is available, connect the detector to the tether and allow boot to complete.
1. Insert a Class M Service Key.
2. Go to SUIF > Diagnostics > Digital Detector > Built In Self Test
3. Press Start
4. The results will display the firmware version as ALL_XXXXX where XXXXX is the firmware
version. Match this to Table 10-14 on page 598 to assess compatibility.
5. Follow 3.6.2 Detector Firmware Download on page 78 to load the correct firmware and
compatibility table onto the detector (do not load private key unless the detector vintage
matches the description in Table 10-14 on page 598).
If a tether option is not available, it is not possible to determine the detector firmware version. This
is because the detector must be registered and connected wirelessly or be connected via tether. If
the firmware is not correct, it is not possible to register. The following error will appear when
attempting Built In Self Test:
Figure 10-93 Attempting to execute Built In Self Test with an incompatible detector
connected via wireless
If a tether option is not available, it is not possible to determine the detector firmware version. The
following error will appear when attempting to check the homepage for the firmware version.

Figure 10-94 SUIF Home Page display with an incompatible detector connected via
wireless
Recovery:
If the firmware version does not match the information in Table 10-14 on page 598 (or cannot be
determined), follow 3.6.2 Detector Firmware Download on page 78 to load the firmware and
compatibility table onto the detector (do not load private key unless the detector vintage matches
the description in Table 10-14). At completion of the firmware and compatibility table load, confirm
the firmware version in the SUIF Homepage or in Detector Built In Self Test. Repeat the process if
errors are observed.
Note: The detector does not need to be registered to update the firmware, only connected via tether or
charging bin.
10.5.15.4.4 Detector with Incorrect, Corrupt, or No Private Key

system will disallow registration due to an incorrect private key error. The following errors may
appear if the private key on the detector is incorrect, corrupted, or missing.
• 1221235, Successful pairing of detector via tether
• 1221029, Digital Cassette Detector Boot is in progress
• 1231217, A non-compatible detector has been connected to system. Please remove detector.
Error 1231217 means that a detector that is not recognized has been booted on the system.
Note that original Dragonfly Optima XR240anx Gen1 detectors (non-dash and -2) do NOT have a
private key. Refer to Table 10-14 on page 598 for further information.
Recovery:
Follow 3.6.2 Detector Firmware Download on page 78 to load the private key onto the detector. This
instruction also includes steps to test that there is an active private key on the detector.

10.5.15.5 Error Codes and Descriptions

The table below describes XRImDet subsystem error codes as they relate to the contents of this
document, detector boot, pairing, and registration.
Table 10-15 XRImDet subsystem error codes for boot, pairing, registration
Error Code Recovery Class Error Text Description
1221029 WARNING Digital Cassette Detector is currently
Detector Boot is in attempting to boot.
progress.
1221030 WARNING Digital Cassette Detector boot has
Detector Boot is completed.
complete.
1221036 WARNING Digital Cassette The firmware on the
firmware is incorrect. detector does not
Call service to perform match the expected
detector firmware value in the
download. compatibility table.
Detector registration
and function is not
allowed.
1221101 WARNING Digital Cassette Calibration file transfer
detector calibration from detector to system
upload in progress. is in progress.
Please wait.
1221102 WARNING Digital Cassette Calibration file transfer
detector calibration from detector to system
upload completed. has completed.
1221232 WARNING Detector data upload Calibration file transfer
was interrupted. from detector to system
was interrupted.
1221233 ADVISORY Successful pairing of Successfully paired.
the detector.
1221234 WARNING Pairing of the detector Pairing failed.
failed.
1221235 WARNING Successful pairing of Successfully paired with
detector via tether. tether.
1221219 WARNING Digital cassette detector Compatibility table does
is not compatible with not contain the
the system, please call expected value for: 1.
service to determine the system software, or 2.
compatibility. detector SDK, or 3.
detector firmware
1221220 WARNING Digital Cassette Data transfer from
detector data upload detector to the system
failed. Please reboot failed.
the system and try
again. Call service if
problem persists.
1221239 WARNING Successful pairing of Successful pairing of
detector in large bin large detector in bin.
slot.

Table 10-15 XRImDet subsystem error codes for boot, pairing, registration (Continued)
1221240 WARNING Successful pairing of Successful pairing of
detector in small bin small detector in bin.
slot.
1231217 WARNING A non-compatible Private Key is not
detector has been recognized as
connected to system. expected.
Please remove
detector.
10.5.15.6 Successful Pairing and Boot Message Sequence

The following sequence of messages indicate a successful pairing, boot, and data upload. These
messages in succession enable registration to occur.
Table 10-16 Successful message sequence example

Message Text
Successful pairing of the detector (location dependent - tether, large bin, small bin).
Digital Cassette Detector Boot is in progress.
Digital Cassette Detector Boot is complete.
Digital Cassette detector calibration upload in progress. Please wait.
Digital Cassette detector calibration upload completed.
Note that the first registration attempt, it may take 90 to 120 seconds to recognize the detector after
the final calibration upload completed message for registration to be allowed.
10.5.16 Detector Factory Reset

During detector use it is possible that an inadvertent factory reset will be triggered, causing detector
communication to break. There are two methods of completing the procedure, dependent upon
whether the system has a tether cable installed.
Reference figures:
Figure 10-95 Detector reset to Factory Defaults and in Access Point Mode
Figure 10-96 Detector in Wireless/LAN Mode
10.5.16.1 Restore GEHC Defaults with Tether Option Installed

1. Power off the detector.
2. Connect a tether to the system and detector.
3. Ensure the detector boots via tethered connection.
4. Wait for the AP icon to revert (see reference figures above).

5. Perform a detector registration via tether. Refer to Section 4.16 Installing Digital Detectors on
page 176.
10.5.16.2 Restore GEHC Defaults with NO Tether Option Installed on the

System
This option uses the detector wireless network to reset to GEHC defaults. This will only work for
United States as US is the default country selection with the detector in factory mode (Access Point,
AP mode).
1. On GEHC laptop: From the Start Menu, go to the Control Panel. If using Windows 7, go to
Network and Sharing Center. For Windows 10, select Network and Internet then Network
and Sharing Center.
Figure 10-97 Network and Sharing Center
2. Right-click Wi-Fi and select Properties.
Figure 10-98 Network Connections, Wi-Fi
3. A User Account Control warning message may appear, select Yes.

4. In the Wi-Fi Properties Networking Tab, select Properties for Internet Protocol Version 4
(TCP/IPV4)

Figure 10-99 Wi-Fi Properties
5. Set laptop network to a fixed connection with the same subnet as the detector in AP mode.
a. Set IP address manually by selecting, Use the following IP address:
b. Enter the following:
IP address: 192.168.22.15
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Figure 10-100 Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties
6. Select OK.
7. Left-click the network icon from the task bar.
8. Look for PerkinElmer network and connect.

Figure 10-101 Perkin Elmer Wireless Network
9. Enter user as admin and password as PerkinElmer

10. Open a browser and enter the IP address into the browser search bar: 192.168.22.1
11. Go to Network from the top bar.
12. When prompted for a password, enter admin and PerkinElmer
Figure 10-102 Detector Configuration Page
13. From the Show all menu on the left navigation pane, the detector in its current mode will show
as *Factory Settings in the Choose Configuration menu.
14. From the Choose Configuration drop down, select Configuration 1 which is the GEHC
default configuration.

Figure 10-103 Configuration Options
15. Click Save as Default.
Figure 10-104 Configuration 1, GEHC Defaults
16. Upon completion, the AP icon on the detector will revert to the wireless and LAN icon.
17. Reboot the Detector.
18. Perform a detector registration. Refer to Section 4.16 Installing Digital Detectors on page 176.
19. Revert laptop Wi-Fi settings to default.

a. In the Wi-Fi Properties Networking Tab, select Properties for Internet Protocol
Version 4 (TCP/IPV4)
b. Set IP address automatically by selecting Obtain IP address automatically.
c. Select OK.
d. Connect to a Wi-Fi network.

Section 10.6 Wireless Access Point (AP) Diagnostics (Gen 1

only)
The diagnostic procedures described in this section are only applicable to Dragonfly Optima
XR240amx Generation 1. For more information on executing Access Point Diagnostics for
Generation 2, refer to Section 10.7 Wireless Access Point (AP) Diagnostics (Gen 2 only) on
page 620.
Note: See Section 4.4 Country Codes on page 87 for the list of codes that are referenced below.
10.6.1 Command Line Interface Diagnostics

The system can return various diagnostics and status indicators through access to the AP. All
commands must be run as root user through the engineering terminal. To run the commands, enter
the following directory: <cd /magichome/xruser/bin>. The command to interface with the AP is as
follows: <./interfaceToAccessPoint COMMAND> where COMMAND can be any of the options
listed in the table below.
Command Description Tips

clients Get list of clients associated Every detector in signal range
with AP; clients are detectors. and paired with that system will
attempt to connect to that AP.
initialConfiguration Runs the initial configuration This is the same as committing a
script to set country code. country in the SUIF.
countryCode Returns the current country
code
getWorkingChannels Returns list of channels
configured
countryChannels Actual list of allowed channels
for AP based on current country
setting.
rfSummary Returns a summary of the RF
environment by channel
(anything other than the current
channel can be a few minutes
out of date).
ssid Returns the current SSID Useful to identify the AP’s so the
hospital does not identify as a
rogue device.
broadCastSsid Hide or unhide the network SSID This provides no security benefit
from broadcasting. when enabled.
ping telnet Telnet login.
errorCode Returns list of error code Any of the AP commands can
definitions (1-9). return an error code (1-9).
These are in devmasterserver or
interfacetoaccesspoint log.

factoryReset Clears all AP configurations back Must then reconfigure country

to factory defaults. in SUIF and register all
detectors.
help Returns list of available options
The system also has the ability to perform a loopback test between the system PC wireless card
and the access point. This basic loopback test can be used to diagnose connectivity issues along
with the commands listed at ./interfaceToAccessPoint. To run the loopback test, type:
sudo/magichome/xruser/bin/TestApDiagnostics.sh ENTER. The system will
automatically modify the configuration of the PC wireless card and perform a packet transfer. The
results of the test will return a pass or fail value. If the result is fail, the system cannot connect itself
to the AP indicating the WLAN is not functioning properly. In this case, proceed with further
troubleshooting.
10.6.2 Troubleshooting Scenarios and Workflow

a workflow to isolate and troubleshoot wireless access point issues. Included are log file locations,
error messages, diagnostic tools, and recommended corrective actions.
Page 612 Section 10.6 Wireless Access Point (AP) Diagnostics (Gen 1 only)
Table 10-17 Wireless Access Point (AP) Troubleshooting

AP cannot be Access point sysError.log 1221244: Country Code Open a terminal and login Attempt to configure
initialized or initial configuration failed. “Access point as root. Type: the country code again
configuration fails. configuration failed. by selecting ‘Commit’
cd /magichome/xruser/bin
Please reselect country in
<ENTER>
and commit. If problem SUIF>Configuration>S
persists, please call Type: ite or by manually
service.” configuring the ISO
./ InterfaceToAccessPoint
country code in the
countryCode to determine
Engineering terminal at
if there is a mismatch or
interfaceToAccessPoin
blank value.
t XX, where XX is the 2
letter country ISO
country code (refer to
system manual).
If configuration still
fails after recommitting
the country code, there
may be no intersection
of channels between
the AP and detector,
meaning wireless
exposures are not
allowed. In this case,
tether the detector for
wired exposures.
If the command returns
a blank country code,
there may be a
firmware issue with the
AP. Ensure the AP has
the latest firmware.
From the terminal
window, type:
swhwinfo
Search for the AP FW
version (need to match
with latest 'good' FW
listed in FMI
instructions (if any)).
Update FW if needed.
Tips:
If initial configuration fails, all other AP selections should be greyed out preventing further AP configuration. This
may happen during PC replacement, AP replacement, LFC.
Using command line configuration of country code, if there is a mismatch between the AP model (US, RoW, and
Japan) and country code selected, the configuration will return <<-1>> indicating a failure.
Certain countries do not have any channel intersection between the detector and AP. Wireless exposures are not
allowed in these regions.

Table 10-17 Wireless Access Point (AP) Troubleshooting (Continued)

Access point boot failed. sysError.log 1221245: AP is not booted. Wait for the AP to finish Wait for the system
“Access point boot attempting to boot (up to complete AP boot
failed. Please reset to 5 minutes). attempt.
system. If problem
persists, please call Attempt to
service.” reconfigure the
sysError.log 1221243:
country code via the
“Wireless access point SUIF or command
communication failed. line. If the failure
Please reset system. If returns, then check
problem persists, the connections on
please call service.” the AP (ethernet to
Devmastersvr.log will AP and ethernet to
indicate if AP boot is system as well as
complete or failed power).
WifiHAPDMM.cpp Reboot the system.
bootAccessThread Tip: If AP boot is pending, system will not
Complete or Failed write any message to the footer text. If the AP
boot fails , the system will write message
1221243 or 1221245. This is only
recoverable with a reboot.
Wireless access point sysError.log Unable to log into From the command Failed ping may
communication failed. 1221243: “Wireless AP. line, type: indicate a password
access point ./ conflict. Log into the
communication InterfaceToAccessPoi AP with the default
failed. Please reset nt ping password and
system. If problem to test login and reconfigure the
persists, please call connection to AP. country code.
service.”
Tip: The system uses new admin password
every configuration. Admin password can be
found in the wifi.txt log file.
cat ~root/wifi.txt
AP Memory or file Try to recommit the Reconfigure, reboot,
corruption (on AP country code or do a Replace AP.
or system). If factory reset (log into Note that upon a
something is not CLI then enter "./ reset, "AP
read properly in interfaceToAccessPoin communication lost"
boot thread. t factoryReset" then will appear.
reconfigure and reboot.

Detector loses Wireless access point sysError.log 1221243: Country Code (if it Check the country Attempt to configure
connection with communication failed. “Wireless access point has been code by entering a the country code again
the AP. communication failed. reconfigured). terminal and typing: by selecting ‘Commit’
Wireless exposure is
Please reset system. If in SUIF>
not supported for the problem persists,
./ Configuration> Site or
selected country. please call service.” InterfaceToAccessPoi by manually
nt countryCode configuring the ISO
country code in the
“Wireless exposure is Engineering terminal at
not supported for the interfaceToAccessPoin
selected country. t XX, where XX is the 2
Please check country letter country ISO
selection in country code.
configuration.”
If configuration still fails
Reference Log: after recommitting the
country code, there
/enggdata/log/
may be no intersection
XRImDet.0.log.
of channels between
DEVICE_CONNECTIO the AP and detector,
N meaning wireless
exposures are not
Reference Log:
allowed. In this case,
/magichome/xruser/log/ tether the detector for
sysMSG.log wired exposures.
CONNECTION_TYPE If the command returns
a blank country code,
there may be a
firmware issue with the
AP. Ensure the AP has
the latest firmware.
From the terminal
window, type:
swhwinfo
Search for the AP FW
version (need to match
with latest 'good' FW).
Update FW if needed.
Tips:
If initial configuration fails, all other AP selections should be greyed out
preventing further AP configuration. This may happen during PC
replacement, AP replacement, LFC.
Using command line configuration of country code, if there is a mismatch
between the AP model (US, RoW, and Japan) and country code
selected, the configuration will return <<-1>> indicating a failure.
Certain countries do not have any channel intersection between the
detector and AP. Wireless exposures are not allowed in these regions.
Loss of 12VDC Check that the AP is Check LED status
input from LVLE. getting 12VDC input. for PWR
Remove AP from illumination. Check
behind the AP door. cabling into AP and
from LVLE.


Detector is paired Check the list of Insert the detector
with a different registered detectors. into the bin to auto-
system. Check the primary/ pair.
secondary detectors.
Check the list of
currently paired/
connected detectors.
AP broadcast on Check the country Attempt to configure
a channel not code by entering a the country code again
supported by terminal and typing: by selecting ‘Commit’
detector. in SUIF>
./ Configuration> Site or
InterfaceToAccessPoi by manually
nt countryCode configuring the ISO
country code in the
Engineering terminal at
interfaceToAccessPoin
t XX, where XX is the 2
letter country ISO
country code.
Certain countries do not have any channel
intersection between the detector and AP.
Wireless exposures are not allowed in these
regions.
Access point no Check if login is Secure cables
longer possible by connecting
broadcasting via
(related power interfaceToAccessPoin
loss/hardware t.
failure).
Detector out of Image transfer rate. An inhibit message
range of AP (~200 Low signal strength or will appear prior to
feet) for heavy channel any exposure
connection - but interference. attempt.
this will give low
data transfer
rates. Will get a
low signal inhibit
well before
disconnect.
Unrecognized Open a terminal and type: Reboot the detector
detector cd /magichome/xruser/bin and the system.
connection to AP <ENTER> As long as there is
or detector does power to AP, all
Type:
not get proper IP detectors currently
address. ./ InterfaceToAccessPoint paired will remain
Clients paired to the AP. If
power is removed to
This will return a list of all
the AP, no clients
connected detectors and will be paired.
associated IP addresses.
Check that the detector of
interest is listed and that it
has a proper IP address.

Detector is not Identify detectors Select the detector
primary/ registered/paired with of interest as the
registered. the system. primary detector. Or,
register the detector.
or Dragonfly). If factory reset (log into Note that upon a
Unable to register Digital Cassette sysError.log 1221093, No Country Code Check the country code Commit proper country
a detector. Detector "Digital Cassette is Selected or selection in the and reboot. Or
communication lost. Detector country code is SUIF>Configuration>Site configure the country
Confirm communication communication lost, invalid. tab. The country code can code via command line
confirm communication also be checked at the by the following:
with detector. Call
with detectors." terminal by the following:
service if problem cd /magichome/xruser/
persists Reference Log: Type: bin <ENTER>
/enggdata/log/ cd /magichome/xruser/bin Type:
XRImDet.0.log. <ENTER>
./
DEVICE_CONNECTIO Type: InterfaceToAccessPoi
N nt countryCode XX,
./ InterfaceToAccessPoint
where XX is the 2 digit
Reference Log: countryCode to determine
ISO country code.
if there is a blank value.
/magichome/xruser/log/
sysMSG.log If it is determined that the AP, detector, and system
are operating properly, then the issue is that the
CONNECTION_TYPE
detector and AP do not have an allowed
intersection of channels, meaning wireless
exposures are not allowed in that specific country
or region.
10+ detectors Check UI to determine Delete and re-
have been how many detectors register/pair as
registered or too have been registered necessary.
many detectors or paired.
have been paired. When the user clicks the "Add" button, a popup will
appear indicating the maximum number of
registered detectors is reached. Remove a
detector to add another.
System will only allow exposure to the primary
detector while the secondary detectors remain
connected.
If it is determined that the AP, detector, and system
are operating properly, then the issue is that the
detector and AP do not have an allowed
intersection of channels, meaning wireless
exposures are not allowed in that specific country
or region.


AP Wireless access point sysError.log 1221243: Loss of 12VDC Check that the AP is Check LED status
communication communication failed “Wireless access point input from LVLE. getting 12VDC input. for PWR
lost. communication failed. Remove AP from illumination. Check
Please reset system. If behind the AP door. cabling into AP and
problem persists,
from LVLE.
please call service.”
Ethernet Check that the Insert cable into
connection lost or Ethernet cable is proper connection.
plugged into the inserted into the Replace cable if it is
wrong port 'ENET' port and not the damaged.
'CONSOLE' port.
Check the cable for
damage.
AP admin Check that the AP has Manually reset the
username and/or power and that the AP by pressing the
password is cables are connected HW reset button
incorrect. properly. located on the
bottom of the unit.
Power on and run
initial configuration.
Note: must reboot to
turn radios on.
The admin username and/or password mismatch
can only occur as a result of a manual change of
the configuration file. To correct, a manual reset
must occur as there will be no access to the AP via
command line. Note that upon a reset, "AP
communication lost" message will appear.
AP cannot get an Check for AP IP If no IP address,
IP address/ address. Enter a reboot the system.
cannot connect to terminal and type:
eth2 or system ifconfig eth2
DHCP server is
not running.
Incorrect FW. reconfigure and reboot.

AP boot issue. "AP boot incomplete." sysError.log 1221245: AP Wait for the AP to Wait for the system
"Access point boot “Access point boot Communication is finish attempting to to complete AP boot
failed. Please reset down or AP is in boot (up to 5 minutes). attempt.
failed."
system. If problem an inconsistent
"Initial configuration persists, please call Attempt to
failed." State.
service.” reconfigure the
country code via the
“Access point SUIF or command
configuration failed. line. If the failure
Please reselect country returns, then check
and commit. If problem the connections on
persists, please call the AP (Ethernet to
service.” AP and Ethernet to
Devmastersvr.log will system as well as
indicate if AP boot is power).
complete or failed
Reboot the system.
WifiHAPDMM.cpp
If AP boot is pending, system will not write
bootAccessThread any message to the footer text. If the AP boot
Complete or Failed fails, the system will write message 1221243
or 1221245. This is only recoverable with a
reboot.
or system). If factory reset (log into Note that upon a

Section 10.7 Wireless Access Point (AP) Diagnostics (Gen 2

only)
The below information is available for performing diagnostics and troubleshooting on the Wireless
Detector Access Point (AP) for either of the detector offerings (14x17 or 10x12). The diagnostic
procedures described in this section are only applicable to Dragonfly Optima XR240amx
Generation 2. For more information on executing Access Point Diagnostics for Generation 1, refer
to Section 10.6 Wireless Access Point (AP) Diagnostics (Gen 1 only) on page 611. Both Class C
and Class M users can perform on-demand diagnostics through the SUIF to assist in diagnosing
detector wireless communication issues and can imitate on-demand status checks which will
display other critical information. Class M users will be able to execute diagnostics remotely through
SSH. This diagnostic is intended to isolate wireless connection issues vs. detector hardware issues.
10.7.1 Access Point Diagnostics Home Page

The Access Point Diagnostics Main Page (Figure 10-105) provides a brief description of the
diagnostic package (AP Diagnostics), lists all tests available, and provides a brief instruction on
execution (select from expanded folder). A sub-folder is available for each individual diagnostic.
The AP Diagnostics include the following tests:
• Built In Self Test
• Wireless Connectivity Diagnostic
• Channel Monitoring Diagnostic
Figure 10-105 Access Point Diagnostics Main Page
10.7.2 Built In Self Test

The Built In Self Test is used to establish basic connectivity between the system PC and the
detector wireless access point. This will provide a cursory check when troubleshooting any potential
issues. The system software will automatically perform a pre-check of required conditions via a ping
test. If that passes, the diagnostic will be able to be run. If the ping test fails, the appropriate error
code and troubleshooting text shall be displayed. The login test checks the password and ability to
login to the AP. Lastly, the loopback test (between the STA and AP) uses the system's wireless card
to connect to the AP to communicate to itself wirelessly to verify WLAN.
1. The Built In Self Test (ping, login, loopback) displays a PC and Access Point icon with two
connecting blue lines, signifying that the AP is connected. Press START to begin the test.
Refer to Figure 10-106 below.
Figure 10-106 Built In Self Test Start Page
2. Upon completion, the Built In Self Test shall display a pass or fail status with the reported error
condition, if applicable. A double blue connecting line indicates a pass condition, a double blue
connecting line with a red 'X' indicates a failed condition.
Upon a failed condition, the system shall report the error code from devMgr (device manager)
and appropriate troubleshooting tips. See Figure 10-107 below for an example of this.

Figure 10-107 Failed Built In Self Test with suggested troubleshooting steps
3. The Built In Self Test can also be executed remotely via SSH or through an engineering
terminal. Must change directory to the following:
Execute the Built In Self Test by typing the following command:
./serviceAccessPoint.sh selfTest ENTER.
The test will call the same function as executing through the SUIF. If running remotely, there
may be a brief interruption in communication as the Built In Self Test is modifying the wireless
network, however should recover. Test results should be interpreted the same as execution
through the SUIF. See example in Figure 10-108 below.
Note: If remote connection does not recover, refresh and relaunch connection session.
Figure 10-108 Example of Remote Built In Self Test Execution
10.7.3 Wireless Connectivity Diagnostic

The Wireless Connectivity Diagnostic will report information from all the detector clients to which
the access point can communicate. The list shall indicate the client name, IP address, and Signal
to Noise (SNR) ratio. The SNR is the primary detector's signal strength. SNR < 20 is poor (displayed
as red box), SNR 20 to 29 is moderate (displayed as yellow box), and SNR ≥ 30 is good (displayed
as green box). This information can help isolate wireless connection issues versus hardware issues
on the detector or AP.
1. The Wireless Connectivity diagnostic displays a PC and Access Point icon with two connecting
blue lines, signifying that the AP is connected. The system software will automatically perform
a pre-check of required conditions via a ping test. If that passes, the diagnostic will be able to
run. If the ping test fails, the appropriate error code and troubleshooting text will be displayed.

Press START to begin the diagnostic. Refer to Figure 10-109 below.
Figure 10-109 Wireless Connectivity Start Page
2. The results will display on the screen, showing a table containing the AP Clients Information,
as shown below in Figure 10-110. If the tests fails, a corresponding error condition will also
show.
If a detector is not connected wirelessly to the system at the time the test is run, the SNR will
come back as Disconnected for said detector, also seen in Figure 10-110 below for big
det.
Figure 10-110 Wireless Connectivity Diagnostic Results Page
3. The Wireless Connectivity Diagnostic can also be executed remotely via SSH or through an
engineering terminal. Must change directory to the following:
Execute the Wireless Connectivity test by typing the following command:
./serviceAccessPoint.sh clients ENTER.
The test will call the same function as executing through the SUIF. SNR data will not show in
the clients diagnostic if running through remote SSH, this will appear in Channel Monitoring
(see 10.7.4 Channel Monitoring Diagnostic on page 626). Test results should be interpreted
the same as execution through the SUIF. See example in Figure 10-111 below.

Figure 10-111 Example of Remote Wireless Connectivity Diagnostic Execution
10.7.4 Channel Monitoring Diagnostic

This test can be used if the user suspects a connectivity issue with the AP to the detector. It will
report metrics for the current AP channel, the primary detector, and the system status. The metrics
that will be listed are AP Current Working Channel, AP SSID, AP Utilization, and AP Noise Floor.
Utilization > 80 is poor (displayed as red box), Utilization 51 to 80 is moderate (displayed as yellow
box), and Utilization ≤ 50 is good (displayed as green box).
1. The Channel Monitoring Diagnostic will display a PC and AP Icon with two blue lines
connecting them. Press START to begin the diagnostic. Refer to Figure 10-112 below.
Figure 10-112 Channel Monitoring Diagnostic Start Page
2. The results will display on the screen, showing a table containing channel monitoring
information, as seen below in Figure 10-113. The status of the Utilization will be displayed in
green, yellow, or red, and any errors will be displayed, if applicable.
Figure 10-113 Channel Monitoring Diagnostic Results Page

3. The Channel Monitoring diagnostic can also be executed remotely via SSH or through an
engineering terminal. Must change directory to the following:
Execute the Channel Monitoring test by typing the following command:
./serviceAccessPoint.sh channelMonitor ENTER.
The test will call the same function as executing through the SUIF. SNR appears when running
Channel Monitor diagnostic via remote SSH, and it will also appear in Clients Diagnostic if
running via the SUIF. Test results should be interpreted the same as execution through the
SUIF. See example in Figure 10-114 below.
Figure 10-114 Example of Remote Channel Monitoring Diagnostic Execution
10.7.5 Remote Factory Reset

This command, factoryReset, should not be used unless troubleshooting dictates a reset is
necessary.
The Factory Reset diagnostic can also be executed remotely via SSH or through an engineering
terminal. Must change directory to the following:
Execute the Factory Reset test by typing the following command:
./serviceAccessPoint.sh factoryReset ENTER.
After performing Factory Reset, reboot the system. Upon reboot, recommit the country code in SUIF
> Configuration > Site. Reboot again. Upon reboot, verify detector wireless communication.
Section 10.8 InSite Connectivity Troubleshooting

InSite is used to remotely connect to the system to perform diagnostics as well as to retrieve system
parametric data to establish health reports. If InSite is a configured option but is not responding,
check the configuration at SUIF>Configuration>Insite. Compare the current configuration with the
known network infrastructure or reference the pre-installation checklist. Contact GE Healthcare for
further troubleshooting.
Note: InSite is a background feature that will appear to be working even when it is not. A Class C
user may be notified by GE Healthcare personnel that their InSite connection is not functioning.
Note: This section is divided into XR240 Gen 1 (Generation 1) troubleshooting with the InSite 2 Agent,
and XR240 Gen 2 (Generation 2) troubleshooting with the RSVP Agent. Reference Section 1.1 on
page 25 for information on identifying the Generation and Agent type.
10.8.1 InSite Troubleshooting (Gen 1 only)

a workflow to isolate and troubleshoot InSite issues. Included are log file locations, error messages,
diagnostic tools, and recommended corrective actions.
Table 10-18 InSite Connectivity Troubleshooting for InSite 2 (Questra) Agent (Gen 1 only)

No InSite Various errors for worklist [xruser@magic] cd var/ No network Follow steps in the To check is the system
connectivity or query, image push, etc. log connectivity. hospital wireless is communicating
cannot establish a troubleshooting. through the hospital
Worklist Text: wpa_supplicant.log
remote network:
"Failed to connect to cd /magichome/
connection open a terminal
remote worklist Server. enggdata/log/
window type the
Returning previously VarLogMessages.log
following:
retrieved worklist entries."
ifconfig wlan0 <Enter>
"Failed to connect to sysMSG.log
remote MWL Server." Ping the listed IP
WORKLIST_QUERY_F
address to ensure that
Image Send Text: AILED
the system is
Popup: IMAGE_PUSH_FAILE communicating
D through the network.
The network destination is
not responding. If the Ping at a terminal
problem persists contact window by typing:
your network administrator.
ping <<IP Address>>
"Network is down. Queuing
Ping via the wireless
the job."
configuration window
"Network push failed." at
SUIF>Configuration>
Wireless>File (in
popup window)>Tools.

Table 10-18 InSite Connectivity Troubleshooting for InSite 2 (Questra) Agent (Gen 1 only) (Continued)

No message on system. Reference: InSite is not Check the configuration at Make sure
SUIF>Configuration>Insit configuration is correct
RSvP may indicate a qsaconfig.xml.booted in configured
properly e. Compare the current including proxy,
red or yellow dot the directory:
configuration with the enterprise, and tunnel
(missed ping). ~insite/QAgent/ known network URLs.
GeHealthCare/Agent/ infrastructure or reference
Restart the system and
etc/ the pre-installation
check for the
checklist.
qsaconfig.xml.booted
file located in:
~insite/QAgent/
GeHealthCare/Agent/
etc/
Enterprise and tunnel
URLs are prepopulated
at software load and
should not be changed
without direction from
engineering.
Qagent was not Login as root. This will show if the
created. Type: ps -eaf | grep - qsaconfig.xml file was
generated, and the
i qsa <Enter>
date stamp in which it
was created. If this is
not present, then the
InSite agent is not
running on the system.
If the 'qsaconfig.xml'
file is not present,
navigate to
SUIF>Configuration>In
site. Select 'Commit'
and reboot the system.
When the system
boots, repeat this step
to verify the Qagent
was created.
Page 630 Section 10.8 InSite Connectivity Troubleshooting

Table 10-18 InSite Connectivity Troubleshooting for InSite 2 (Questra) Agent (Gen 1 only) (Continued)

Qagent is not cd ~insite/QAgent/ If the
running. GeHealthCare/Agent/etc/ ‘qsaconfig.xml.booted’
<Enter> file is present that
means that the system
ls qsaconfig.xml.booted
was able to go through
<Enter>
the network and
communicate with the
Back Office server.
If the
'qsaconfig.xml.booted'
file is not present,
navigate to
SUIF>Configuration>In
site. Select 'Commit'
and reboot the system.
When the system
boots, repeat this step
to verify the Qagent is
running.
Site has blocked Disconnect from the Create a hot-spot
remote hospital network (do network through a
connection not delete networking portable device.
requests. profile information). Connect the system to
the hot-spot network.
Turn off Proxy
Required and
Authorization. Commit
changes and reboot
the system. Upon
reboot, attempt to
connect to the system
through Siebel or
RSvP. A successful
connection may
indicate site networking
IT has blocked the
system from external
requests, or that the
site networking
infrastructure has been
changed/updated
(PSK, Proxy, etc.). An
unsuccessful
connection may
indicate an issue with
networking hot-spot, an
issue with the RSvP
server, or an issue with
internal configuration.
Contact the OLC for
information on back
office connectivity or
check the Insite2
Support Central page.
If using a GE approved
portable device, must
have hot-spot
networking activated
through account
administration.

10.8.2 InSite Troubleshooting (Gen 2 only)

1. When searching the System to connect, the device shows as 'INELIGIBLE' in the Connectivity
Status.
a. Ineligible devices have been quarantined by the back office. This can happen for many
reasons:
* System ID Conflict - spelling and case sensitivity. Example: DFSYS1 vs DFSys1 vs
DFsys1.
* Agent ID Conflict - if a system has been previously registered with a legacy agent,
Insite1, Insite2/Questra, etc. and then is registered with RSvP. There are two daily
jobs that run in production environment to pick-up registered systems (one at 2
minutes and one at 6 hours), however it is possible this issue can occur in between
cycles.
* The device has been 'Muted' by the back office.
b. How to remove quarantined devices:
There are 2 mechanisms to remove quarantine:
* FFA team publishes list of quarantined devices and deletes on a monthly timeframe.
Deleting the quarantined device will allow for proper re-registration of the agent to
recognize connection.
* Submit a workflow ticket against RSVP through MyTech for urgent support
https://mytech.ge.com/help-and-support
Note: Additional information can be found from the support central site:
http://supportcentral.ge.com/products/sup_products.asp?prod_id=280498
2. The device shows the incorrect agent type in 'Connection Type'.
- Agent ID Conflict - if a system has been previously registered with a legacy agent, Insite1,
Insite2/Questra, etc. and then is registered with RSvP. The agent type is pulled from an
MDR database.
3. The device shows as 'Unknown' in the Connectivity Status.
- User permissions conflict - ensure that the user has the proper modalities configured in
their account. Contact rts.ffa@ge.com
4. The device shows as online but user is not able to connect to any of the available widgets.
- Device registration conflict - the device has been received as proper agent and is
connected, however there is no registration or identification to verify the device eligibility.
The device must be registered within the proper regional CRM for connection eligibility.
5. The device shows as online, service activity is valid, enters fast poll, but cannot connect to
SSH or SFTP. Warning message shows, 'Device has been quarantined, muted, or is offline'.
- User accounts for SSH and SFTP have not been sent to the back office via the password
API.
6. File Transfer/AutoSC issue, no data flowing to DataLake.
- X-Ray modality requires CRM verification for datalake to receive data, ensure device is
properly registered in regional CRM.
- DataLake requires specific file naming and tagging for files to be properly parsed. If the
tags are incorrect, data may be received but will not be parsed or processed. Contact
AutoSC, DataLake, Rules Studio, RSvP to remediate.
7. When attempting to connect, there is an 'Invalid Service Event ID' message.
- Make sure the user has a valid activity/job/RFS within the proper regional CRM.
- There is a broken link between regional CRM and FFA inhibiting the data query.
- Contact RSvP to remediate.
8. File Transfer (SFTP) unable to connect.
Page 632 Section 10.8 InSite Connectivity Troubleshooting

- Make sure the user accounts have been properly set and sent to the back office.
- If user accounts have been set and sent properly and SFTP still cannot connect, contact
support to check the timeout configuration. Less than 30 seconds may cause connection
issues.
9. Log Files of Interest:
- magichome/export/home/insite/RSVP/InSite/.InSite/Gateway/agentoplogs/insite.log
- magichome/export/home/insite/RSVP/InSite/.InSite/Gateway/xGate.log
10.8.3 Contacts
• @HEALTH DST Team Production Support <dst-healthcare-prodsupport@ge.com>
• @HEALTH GST FFA RTS <rts.ffa@ge.com>
• @HEALTH GST RSvP RTS <GSTRSvPRTS@ge.com>
Section 10.9 Hospital Wireless Troubleshooting

10.9.1 Troubleshooting Scenarios and Workflow:
a workflow to isolate and troubleshoot hospital wireless issues. Included are log file locations, error
messages, diagnostic tools, and recommended corrective actions.
Table 10-19 Log File Locations
Log Name Full File Path

wpa_supplicant.log var/log
VarLogMessages.log /magichome/enggdata/log/
sysMSG.log /magichome/xruser/log/sysMSG.log

Table 10-20 Hospital Wireless Troubleshooting

Cannot connect to Worklist Text: [xruser@magic] cd var/Adapter is not on. Enter the SUIF and If 'On' and/or 'Enabled'
the given network "Failed to connect to log select was selected, view the
SSID. Configuration>Wireles 'Current Status' tab and
remote worklist Server. wpa_supplicant.log
s. Select 'Select for wait for a connection
Returning previously
cd /magichome/ status. (if everything
retrieved worklist entries." Wireless
enggdata/log/ was configured
"Failed to connect to VarLogMessages.log
Configuration'. A pop properly and the only
remote MWL Server." up window will appear. issue was adapter off,
/magichome/xruser/log/ Make sure the adapter connection is
Image Send Text: sysMSG.log is turned ‘ON’ and the immediate.) If
Popup: WORKLIST_QUERY_F SSID is 'enabled' in the connection is
AILED main page of the successful and an IP
wireless configuration address is populated,
not responding. If the IMAGE_PUSH_FAILE
area. ensure connectivity
problem persists contact D
using the steps
your network administrator.
outlined below. If after
"Network is down. Queuing enabling the adapter
the job." and there is still no
connection, make sure
"Network push failed."
there is an SSID
configured with valid
credentials.
The wireless adapter is
'Off' by default after a
software load.
The network In the 'Networks' tab in the View the 'Current
SSID(s) will not wireless configuration Status' tab and wait for
allow connection. page: click scan to see all a connection status. If
available SSIDs. The connection is
SSIDs captured in pre- successful and an IP
installation should appear address is populated,
on the ID:SSID list. Make ensure connectivity
sure there are no spelling using the steps
errors in the SSID outlined below.
information configured at
The 'current status' tab
installation. Enter the
says, 'scanning' while
authentication information
connection is pending.
again to make sure there
The 'networks' tab says
were no spelling errors.
signal level is 'starting'
while connection is
pending.
Select the 'Networks' A good signal strength
tab in the wireless is between -30 to -40
configuration page. dB, lower is better,
Check the 'Signal higher is worse. Locate
the nearest Access
Level' for the SSID(s).
Point and move the
system closer,
checking the signal
strength. Note any
dead spots in the
network.
Page 634 Section 10.9 Hospital Wireless Troubleshooting

Table 10-20 Hospital Wireless Troubleshooting (Continued)

SSID(s) have no If SSID(s) show but Make sure there are no
signal strength. have no signal level, spelling errors in the
click ‘Scan’ on the SSID. De-select
'Networks' or 'Current 'merge SSID' to show
both 2.4 gHz and 5 gHz
Status' tab to verify the
channels, select
network is 'merge SSID' to only
broadcasting. show the best signal
between the 2.4 gHz
and 5 gHz channels.
Attempt to connect to
the desired SSID.
Adjust minimum db to
connect and minimum
db to roam.
SSID(s) have low Select the 'Networks' A good signal strength
signal strength. tab in the wireless is a lower dB level, a
configuration page. higher dB level is
Check the 'Signal worse. Locate the
nearest Access Point
Level' for the SSID(s).
and move the system
closer, checking the
signal strength. Note
any dead spots in the
network.
This will only show network SSIDs that are broadcasting a signal,
anything out of range will not appear. A good signal strength is a
lower dB level, a higher dB level is worse. It is possible the
hospital will choose to not broadcast the SSID, in which case
hospital IT must be contacted. Note that not broadcasting does
not increase security.
SSID is hidden. If the SSID(s) do not Select the SSID and
appear on the ID:SSID then select 'Edit'. Make
list click on the sure the SSID is
networks tab in the configured properly (no
speling errors). Check
wireless configuration
the box, 'network is not
window. broadcasting ssid
(hidden)' to connect to
a non-broadcast SSID.
Select Save and
attempt to connect.
Hospital network Try to find the SSID If the secondary device
authentication or with a standard laptop, can connect, the site
infrastructure phone, or device which may not be allowing
issue. allows WIFI connection into their
network. Contact site
connection. Attempt to
IT and ensure they
connect with same have proper MAC
authentication as what address of the system.
has been configured
on the XR240amx. If secondary device
and the system both
cannot connect, then
there may be a
problem with
authentication
provided by the site.
Contact site IT.

Table 10-20 Hospital Wireless Troubleshooting (Continued)

The system If the system is Configure as a static IP
appears to be configured as DHCP address. Contact IT to
connected to the and there is no IP have a static IP
SSID, but will not address populated on assigned.
assign an IP the ‘Current Status’ If a static IP address is
address. page, then try successfully
configure as a static IP. configured and
connection is allowed,
this could indicate a
DHCP server issue.
Site networking If after going through Perform a snapshot
infrastructure or these steps the issue is and escalate to the
system internal not resolved, gather Online Center for
configuration. information on where further
the network issues troubleshooting.
occur, what fails
(pushing images),
current configuration,
etc.
Cannot query Worklist Text: [xruser@magic] cd var/ Worklist server Prerequisite: Network Prerequisite:
worklist. log unavailable. connection has been Network connection
"Failed to connect to
remote worklist Server. wpa_supplicant.log successfully has been
Returning previously established. successfully
cd /magichome/
retrieved worklist entries." established.
enggdata/log/
"Failed to connect to VarLogMessages.log Navigate to If the ping is not
remote MWL Server." SUIF>Configuration>Hos successful, the
pital Wireless. In the pop- worklist server may
Image Send Text: sysMSG.log
up, select 'File', and then be offline; wait and
Popup: WORKLIST_QUERY_F 'Tools'. Enter the IP
retry.
AILED address of the worklist
server and select ping.
problem persists contact D Select C-Echo test If the C-Echo is not
your network administrator. from the tools and successful, the
"Network is down. Queuing utilities main menu. worklist server may
the job." be offline; wait and
retry.
Cannot send Worklist Text: [xruser@magic] cd var/ Archive network Prerequisite: Network Prerequisite:
images to the log location connection has been Network connection
"Failed to connect to
network location. remote worklist Server. wpa_supplicant.log unavailable. successfully has been
Returning previously established. successfully
cd /magichome/
retrieved worklist entries." established.
enggdata/log/
"Failed to connect to VarLogMessages.log Navigate to If the ping is not
remote MWL Server." SUIF>Configuration>Hos successful, the
pital Wireless. In the pop- archive server may
Image Send Text: sysMSG.log
up, select 'File', and then be offline; wait and
Popup: WORKLIST_QUERY_F 'Tools'. Enter the IP
retry.
AILED address of the worklist
server and select ping.
problem persists contact D Select C-Echo test If the C-Echo is not
your network administrator. from the tools and successful, the
"Network is down. Queuing utilities main menu. worklist server may
the job." be offline; wait and
retry.

10.9.2 Band Selection

The Networks Configuration screen was updated to allow the user to select whether they want to
operate in the 2.4 GHz band, 5 GHz, band or both the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz bands. See Figure 10-
115.
Figure 10-115
A Band Selection section is now located above the IP settings within the Network Configuration
screen as highlighted above. The default selection is to use both 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz. This screen
should be used to in place of the modifications called out in the Wireless Band Selection Service
Instruction (DOC1273850).
10.9.2.1 Indications for Use

The customer will report about problems with wireless networking such as not being able to pull a
worklist or push images to PACS. Further investigation requires answering the following questions:
• Does the network in question utilize both bands (2.4 GHz and 5 GHz)?
• Does the wpa_supplicant.log file show challenges connecting to one band but not the other?
• Can the network admin at the site confirm whether the site is utilizing Band Select (Cisco) or
Band Steering (Aruba)?
If the site is utilizing Band Steering or Band Select then you set the device to utilize 5 GHz.
If the site is only utilizing a single band for their network, then using this feature will not resolve any
connectivity issues the site is having.

If analysis of the wpa_supplicant.log file shows equal challenges connecting to 2.4 GHz (channels
1, 6, & 11) and 5 GHz channels then this feature will most likely not help with connectivity issues
the customer is having.
10.9.2.2 Cause
If the site is using Band Steering, Band Select, or some other similar technology the problem is that
the site is using methods outside of the 802.11 standard to guide clients that are capable of
operating on both 802.11 bands up to the less congested 5 GHz band. WiFi operates in two discrete
frequency bands: 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz. Most hospitals primarily utilize the 2.4 GHz band for their
wireless networks as it has better spatial coverage and decreases the total cost of ownership/
operation for a wireless network. Unfortunately, the 2.4 GHz band only offers 3 available channels
for use in an enterprise network, which leads to many issues in larger institutions including co-
channel interference and overcrowding.
To alleviate this, many sites are now beginning to utilize the 5 GHz spectrum as well as there are
more than 20 channels available and much less traffic. Since most clients only support 2.4 GHz, if
a network that utilizes Band Steering/Band Select sees a client capable of 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz
connections it will not let the client connect to the 2.4 GHz network. By doing this, the goal is to force
the client to move to the 5 GHz network and minimize connections on the 2.4 GHz network.
Vendor implementations of Band Steering vary widely, but each has its own perils and pitfalls from
the client’s perspective. This manifests itself as long roaming times (large gaps in connectivity while
moving around the hospital) and further inspection of log files shows little success connecting to 2.4
GHz Access Points (APs) while also showing consistent success connecting to 5 GHz APs.
There are other times where for other reasons (usually pertaining to timing settings on the wireless
controllers) having the client operate on one band or the other only instead of both is desirable.
When in doubt, utilize the 5 GHz band.
10.9.2.3 How To Use

If you have determined that Band Steering or Band Select (or another WLAN issue) may be harming
roaming performance you can set the system to utilize only one band or the other. Simply select the
radio button for 2.4 GHz only or 5 GHz only, save the change to the profile, and do a full system
reboot.
10.9.3 Roaming
Whereas previously adjustments to the roaming algorithm was done via the command line, the
parameters are now adjustable via the Roaming Tab in the wireless configuration screen. See
Figure 10-116.

Figure 10-116
10.9.3.1 Min. dB to attempt to connect

This field is used to establish the minimum connection threshold. If the best signal strength the
system hears from neighboring APs is not above this threshold the system will not attempt to
connect.
Default value is -75 dB, users should not have to adjust this value.
10.9.3.2 Min. dB to remain connected

This field is used to establish the threshold at which point the system will automatically disconnect
from an AP and search for a better connection if a roam has not already taken place.

Default value is -80 dB, users should not have to adjust this value.
10.9.3.3 Min. dB difference to roam to a new AP

This field is used to establish the roaming threshold. After scanning its environment, if the system
sees another access point (AP) that matches the network the system is assigned to that is at least
X dB better (where X is the Min. dB difference to roam to a new AP value) then the system will
attempt to roam to the new AP.
For example, if the value is set to 7 dB, our current RSSI is -70 dB, and the best AP we see that
matches the current profile is -63 dB, the system will attempt to roam to the new AP.
The default value is 7 dB. Environments with dense AP deployments or lots of sharp corners may
find they need to decrease this value in order to improve roaming performance.
10.9.3.4 Slow & Fast Scan Rate and Fast scan when signal is below threshold
The final three sliders on this page determine how often the client is performing background scans
to evaluate the RF environment. One of the primary jobs of the wireless software is to constantly
monitor the RF environment it is in to determine whether it is connected to the proper AP or whether
it is time to roam to a new one. The way our client does this is by doing what is called a background
scan. These sliders help determine how often that background scan is performed.
The Fast scan when signal is below threshold determines when the fast scan rate is used and when
the slow scan rate is used. If the signal strength of the current connection falls below this threshold,
the fast scan rate will be used. If the signal strength of the current connection is above this
threshold, the slow scan rate is used.
In dense installations of APs (APs are not spaced very far apart) it may be necessary to decrease
the fast scan rate to 4 seconds and the slow scan rate to 10 seconds so that the client can pick up
the new APs quickly as they become available.
10.9.4 Advanced
The final update to the user interface is the addition of the Advanced Tab (Figure 10-117).

Figure 10-117
10.9.4.1 Indications for Use

If the system is having trouble connecting to the network or has trouble maintaining a connection to
an 802.11n network you can now disable 802.11n mode for our system from the user interface.
The option to use software crypto moves the encryption process from the hardware on the wireless
chipset and into software. Check the box next to the option, commit, and do a full system reboot.

Section 10.10 System Battery Troubleshooting

10.10.1 Replacement
Note: Refer to local procedures before returning/shipping any batteries.
10.10.1.1 Single Pack Replacement

For the purposes of the examples below, assume:
• Pack 1 is the NEW battery pack
• Packs 2, 3, and 4, are the existing battery packs
There are several potential pitfalls with this replacement process.

• Installing a battery pack with significantly less charge than the remaining 3 packs can result in
the new pack being undercharged. This battery pack will then age faster and experience
deeper discharges than the others.
• Installing a battery pack with significantly more charge than the remaining 3 packs can result
in the new pack being overcharged.
10.10.1.1.1 Criteria for New Pack Integration:

• Currently installed set of batteries have less than 1 year of usage in system.
• New pack is ideally (slightly) less charged than the remaining 3 packs. This can be
approximated by comparing their voltages. This comparison will not be accurate if the system
is:
- Charging
- Recently stopped charging
- Or the temperature of the new pack is significantly different than the packs currently
installed in the system. Consider the transport temperature in the middle of winter or
summer relative to the customer environment. Allow time for the new pack to stabilize
relative to the sites environment.
• If the new battery pack's voltage is significantly lower than the remaining 3 packs ( > 4Vdc
difference during charge), it might be necessary to recharge the new pack using the
procedures described in Section 10.10.1.2.1 Two Step Battery Integration Overview on
page 643.
• At minimum the batteries must complete a FULL CHARGE CYCLE
- Generally this is 4 to 6 hours or longer if batteries are at a very low SOC
- FULL CHARGE CYCLE = 1 hour after the Battery Charge Meter displays 100%.
10.10.1.1.2 Monitoring and Error Conditions:

• With the new single battery pack installed and the system in the "Normal Charge mode" allow
the system to charge a minimum of 1 hour.
• After 1 hour of charging (state 3 of the charging cycle) examine the error log and ensure there
are no charging faults.
• Then using the Power Control diagnostic with the system charging, ensure the individual
battery pack voltages are not approaching 48Vdc and each pack temperature is not
approaching 55°C.
- If either voltage or temperature reaches these limits, charging will be terminated. You will
then need to perform the recommended Two Step Battery Integration Process.
Page 642 Section 10.10 System Battery Troubleshooting

• If the new battery pack's voltage begins to spike during the first recharge, it is likely already
100% charged, and the remaining 3 packs are not. So long as the voltage of the new pack does
not exceed 48Vdc, the charging will continue.
10.10.1.2 Full Set Replacement

The same concerns apply as in the Single Pack Replacement discussion above.
10.10.1.2.1 Two Step Battery Integration Overview

To properly and effectively integrate any number of battery packs of any vintage and SOC the
following two step process is recommended:
• Place the system in "Safe charge mode" and allow to charge undisturbed for 8 hours
(preferably overnight). Circuit breaker ON, system power OFF.
• Place the system in "Normal charge mode" and allow to charge undisturbed for 1 hour after
the Battery Charge Meter displays 100% (generally 4 to 6 hours total time). Circuit breaker
AND system power ON.
See 11.4.2 Battery Packs on page 685 for details on the battery pack replacement procedure.
10.10.2 Examples
10.10.2.1 A confirmed generator error fix after a full system charge.

This example demonstrates how to interpret the system error log, use and interpret the Power
Control Limits diagnostic to determine if the system batteries are the root cause of the generator
errors, and lastly a commentary on determining a successful corrective action.
The following table is an error log excerpt from an Optima XR220amx:
Table 10-21
Date Time Subsystem Error Code Error Text Debug Text

4/19/2013 11:51:25:203 XRS 3400017 System boot successful
4/19/2013 11:51:39:274 VEN 3600131 Generator Warning Error DjinnError 0581H: Input
voltage detected is low
4/19/2013 11:51:39:278 VEN 3600130 Generator Abort Error DjinnError 0504H: DC bus
4/19/2013 11:51:39:416 VEN 3600131 Generator Warning Error DjinnError 0581H: Input
voltage detected is low
4/19/2013 11:51:39:421 VEN 3600130 Generator Abort Error DjinnError 0504H: DC bus
• This is not the complete listing, just selected errors.

• The key element here is the time stamp.
Error log analysis - As the system is booted the generator reports its own boot errors.
• Error code 3400017 is the successful system boot. This is the PC reporting the OS and
Applications boot process.
• Approximately 15 seconds later the generator reports its boot status to the PC. Note the time
stamps of the 4 generator errors. They are milliseconds apart. The Error Text is a generic
statement. The Debug Text is the detail from the generator.
- To see the Debug Text you must have either Class C or Class M SUIF access.
• DjinnError 0581H is the first and key error. Among other things it points to the batteries.
• DjinnError 0504H is the second error and a result, not a cause.
Interpretation - This is indicative of low system batteries SOC, probably in the 135Vdc range. This
value is suggested because there is enough power to boot and stay up for a short time before the
breaker trips.
Recommendations:
1. If possible, in this state, with the system un-plugged, run the SUIF 'Diagnostics ' Hardware
Diagnostics ' System Power ' Power Control Limits
Record the individual "Actual" battery voltages, battery current, and LVLE2 current values.
The sum of the battery values should be close to estimated value above.
The Battery current should be approximately -0.8 to -0.9 amps and the LVLE2 +0.8 to +0.9
amps in system idle state.
2. Fully charge the system (4 to 6 hours) un-interrupted.
3. Perform step 1 again after the full charge and the system un-plugged.
4. Turn the collimator light on several times to remove the surface charge. (You will see the
battery voltage go down)
5. Record the voltages again after the last collimator lamp cycle.
Interpretation - With the system unplugged (not charging), brand new battery packs will maintain a
relatively close voltage relationship with its neighbors, generally within 1.5 volts. As battery packs
age a weak pack will start to create more separation from its neighbors, generally 2 to 3 volts. When
a pack is nearing its end of useful life, this separation will occur much quicker as it can no longer
sustain the necessary energy demanded by the system.
What are the actual values and timeframes?

There is no specific answer. It depends on many factors of battery age, system usage, charging
cycles/duration, environmental conditions.
Use this information as a guide to determine the following;
1. Did the customer forget to plug the system in or have a heavy workload?
2. The batteries may in fact be getting old.
3. A single battery pack or packs may have a defective battery/cells within it. (3 batteries per
pack)
10.10.2.2 Power Control Limits Diagnostic Interpretation

This example is provided to reinforce the understanding and usage of this diagnostic. It was
highlighted in the generator error fix example as a useful tool. The sampling rate of this tool is not
as sophisticated as your DVM, however it is quite sufficient to instill a high level of confidence in its
reporting.
• Section "Typical Healthy Battery Packs" is a simple reference with Results screen
informational element definitions.
• Section "Diagnosis of a Bad Battery Pack" is a detailed example of the workflow described in
the generator error fix example, recommendations subsection. It is not an exact duplicate of
the recommendations subsection on purpose.

10.10.2.2.1 Typical Healthy Battery Packs

This diagnostic contains the following informational elements;
• Upper and Lower category limits - Pass/Fail criteria.
• Pack voltage and temperature actual values - A single snapshot in time. Press Start to get
another sample.
• Battery current actual values - Negative when charger is OFF, Positive when charging.
• LVLE2 current actual values - Always positive, varies according to system load.
Table 10-22
Results
Power Control Limits Test Complete
Actual UL/LL
Pack 1 Voltage: 38.073 48.000/21.000 volts PASS
Battery Current: -0.932 9.000/-9.000 amps PASS
LVLE2 Current: 0.956 4.000/0.000 amps PASS
Pack 1 Temp 29.048 55.000/0.000 degC PASS
POWER CONTROL LIMITS DIAG PASS
• Average individual battery SOC = 12.66Vdc (1 pack = 3 batteries).

• Battery Current -0.932 is normal for Idle system (-1.1xx typical with detector charging).
• Pack temperatures are also typical for 24°C (75°F).
10.10.2.3 Diagnosis of a Bad Battery Pack

It is important to note, the examples that follow are to demonstrate the use of the Power Control
Limits Diagnostic to gather system battery information. Battery to battery variation is normal and
expected, and in many cases the system will tolerate this without impact to performance. Any part
replacements should be done based on appropriate system errors in conjunction with this analysis.
10.10.2.3.1 100% State of Charge - State 6 of charge cycle with bad pack
Table 10-23
Results
Actual UL/LL

Table 10-23 (Continued)

Battery Current: 0.024 9.000/-9.000 amps PASS
• Battery charge meter display = 100%.

• Battery current is minimal and positive indicating a maintenance charge.
• LVLE2 current is typical for an idle system, no detector in the charging bin.
• Charger is operating normally, 164Vdc is being maintained.
• No abnormal indication to indicate a bad battery pack.
10.10.2.3.2 100% State of Charge - Unplugged for 30 seconds with bad pack
Table 10-24
Results
Actual UL/LL
• Battery charge meter display = 100%.

• Battery Current -0.864 is normal for an idle system.
• LVLE2 current is typical for an idle system, no detector in the charging bin.
• Pack 4 voltage shows a significant drop in a very short time.

10.10.2.3.3 100% State of Charge - After 10 Collimator Lamp cycles with bad
pack
Table 10-25
Results
Actual UL/LL
• Battery pack 1 = 12.264Vdc per battery average (marginal health)

• Battery pack 2 = 12.737Vdc per battery average (good health)
• Battery pack 3 = 12.659Vdc per battery average (good health)
• Battery pack 4 = 11.834Vdc per battery average (bad health)
• Slight pack temperature rise is typical with current draw (Collimator lamp)
A "LOW" battery pack - this is generally a battery pack that is > 1.5Vdc lower than the other packs.
Overall the system stack voltage will usually look good, but under loads the system stack voltage
will drop, and the system can produce generator errors describe earlier and/or trip the breaker.
In this "Real" example it is clear that pack 4 is weak and cannot provide the necessary energy
required to adequately operate the system. Errors begin to occur after approximately 20 minutes of
use with the breaker eventually tripping. However, you may want to exercise your system more than
10 collimator cycles to ensure good battery health.

Section 10.11 SSA Key Troubleshooting

10.11.1 Resources
SSA Support Central: http://supportcentral.ge.com/products/sup_prcducts.asp?prod_id=156856
SSA Production Site: https://ssa.geheallhcare.com/#/home
10.11.2 Workflow
&ODVV0NH\LVQRW 7LPH7DPSHULQJ(QDEOHG
UHFRJQL]HG
,VWKHH[DFWDPRXQWRI
'LG\RXFKDQJH z^ WLPHNQRZQE\ZKLFKWKH z^ 5HVWRUHV\VWHP
WKHV\VWHPWLPH" V\VWHPZDVFKDQJHG" WRSUHYLRXVWLPH
ZLWKLQVHFV
EK
EK
2SHQ68,)!
&RQILJXUDWLRQ!
6LWH!6HUYLFH $GMXVWWKHWLPH
&RQWUDFW EDFNWRZKHUHLW
ZDVSULRUWR ,V&ODVV0 EK
0DQDJHPHQW >&ZĞƋƵŝƌĞĚ
DGMXVWLQJWLPHWR 5HVWRUHG"
WKHEHVWRI\RXU
NQRZOHGJH
z^
,VWKHYDOXHLQWKH z^
/ƐƐƵĞZĞƐŽůǀĞĚ
ERWWRPULJKWFRUQHU
³,19$/,'B6<67(0B'$7(´"
EK
,VWKHYDOXHLQWKH EK &RQWDFW*(6HUYLFH
ERWWRPULJKWFRUQHU 2QOLQH&HQWHUIRU
³1R(UURU´" DVVLVWDQFH
z^
*RWRQH[W
SDJH
Figure 10-118 SSA Key Troubleshooting (1 of 2)
Page 648 Section 10.11 SSA Key Troubleshooting

)URP
3UHY
3DJH
z^
,VDVHFRQG z^ ,V&ODVV0 z^

VHUYLFHNH\ /ƐƐƵĞZĞƐŽůǀĞĚ
UHVWRUHG"
DYDLODEOH"
EK EK
6HOHFW³9LHZ/RJ´LQ
6HUYLFH&RQWUDFW
0DQDJHPHQWVFUHHQ
'RHVWKHORJVD\ z^ 5HQHZ

³/,&(16(B(;3,5('´" VHUYLFHNH\
EK
5HTXHVW;5PRGDOLW\
'RHVWKHORJVD\ z^
DFFHVVWKHQUHQHZ /ƐƐƵĞZĞƐŽůǀĞĚ
³,19$/,'B02'$/,7<´"
VHUYLFHNH\
EK
&RUUXSW6HUYLFH.H\
)RUPDWVHUYLFHNH\
'RHVWKHORJVD\ z^ )$7XQLW ,V&ODVV0 z^
³,19$/,'B.(<´" VL]HWKHQUHQHZ UHVWRUHG"
OLFHQVH
EK
EK
EK $UHWKHUH
'HHSHUDQDO\VLV z^ /ŶǀĞƐƚŝŐĂƚĞ
DQ\PRXQWHUURUV
UHTXLUHG ŵŽƵŶƚŝƐƐƵĞƐ
ORJJHG"
Figure 10-119 SSA Key Troubleshooting (2 of 2)

Section 10.12 DICOM Troubleshooting

10.12.1 Identifying Non-compliant DICOM Tags
1. Command - cd /magichome/enggdata/TerraDMLogs
2. Open the file "vi tltTerraMwlpps.log "- log file should indicate the tags which are not DICOM
compliant from RIS.
3. To exit the vi editor without saving, press CTRL+C. To exit and save, type: :wq ENTER
10.12.2 Turn Off DICOM Validation

There are instances when RIS is not filling the DICOM tags correctly and if changes to fix cannot
be made on the RIS end, following are the temporary changes that could be done on the system
where DICOM Validation is turned off.
2. Open Command prompt.
3. Login as root. Password is <Partial UDI>
4. Navigate to cd /magichome/xruser/bin directory
5. Type the following command; ./kilall
6. All of the running software will be stopped. Now navigate to the following directory
cd /magichome/xruser/terra/resources/NETWORK
7. Type the following into the prompt, gedit mwl_pps_cfg.xml
8. Using the vi editor, change the following line:
<ValidateMwlResult>true</ValidateMwlResult>
to
<ValidateMwlResult>false</ValidateMwlResult>
9. Select SAVE, then FILE > QUIT.
10.12.3 Remove Private Tags On Push

See 4.9.1.3 Private DICOM Tag Removal on page 163.
10.12.4 Manually Change Port Number for Network Nodes/Printers

Procedure to manually set a port number for a network node or printer using port number "1024".
2. Open Command prompt.
3. Type the following into the command line for the type of host you need to change:
a. Work List: cd /magichome/xruser/terra/resources/NETWORK
b. Network Host: cd /magichome/xruser/terra/resources/NETWORK
c. Printer: cd /magichome/xruser/terra/resources/print
4. Once at the correct directory, type the following for the type of host you need to change:
a. Work List: gedit mwl_pps_cfg.xml
b. Network Host: gedit network-cfg.xml
Page 650 Section 10.12 DICOM Troubleshooting

c. Printer: gedit TerraPrintCfg.xml
If you need to change the work list or the network host, make sure you change both the work list
and the network host regardless of which one needs changing. The worklist host is declared as a
network host, so in order to edit the worklist port you must modify both files.
5. Find the name of the host you need to change in the file and change either of the following
lines shown below the name (where "XXX" is the desired port number for that node):
a. Change <port>1024<port> to <port>XXX<port>
b. Change <dPort>1024</dPort> to <dPort>XXX</dPort>
6. Select SAVE, then FILE > QUIT.
Section 10.13 Board Failure Troubleshooting

The Boundary Scan Tool is a software application that is run on a laptop which allows the tool to
diagnose board failures in Digital X-ray Mobile systems.
Refer to the following the documents:
• Boundary Scan User Guide: DOC2095932
• Boundary Scan Installation Guide for Windows 10: DOC2095941
• Boundary Scan Installation Guide for Windows 7: DOC2116804

Chapter 11 Replacement Procedures
THE POTENTIAL FOR INJURY OR DEATH FROM ELECTRICAL AND

HAZARDS MECHANICAL HAZARDS IS HIGH. CAREFULLY READ AND FOLLOW
EXIST INSTRUCTIONS. ALWAYS LOTO THE SYSTEM BEFORE ATTEMPTING
SERVICE OF ANY KIND, AS DESCRIBED IN Chapter 1 Safety / Before You Begin.
Section 11.1 Cover Management

11.1.1 Requirements

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): Depends on cover

• Security Torx screw bit = 5427920
• None

Item: Cover or Rear Bin
Quantity: Depends on cover
11.1.1.2.4 Safety
• None

Page 652 Section 11.1 Cover Management

11.1.2 Side Cover Removal

1. Loosen the 5 fasteners on the side cover(s) to be removed. See Figure 11-1.
2. Remove the side cover(s).
Figure 11-1 Side Cover Screws (left side shown)
11.1.3 Top Cover Removal

1. Remove the side covers. See Section 11.1.2 Side Cover Removal.
2. Remove the 3 cap screws from each side of the top cover. See Figure 11-2.
Figure 11-2 Top Cover Screws
Chapter 11 Replacement Procedures Page 653

3. Lift the top cover and disconnect the 3 cables. See Figure 11-3.
Figure 11-3 Top Cover Cables
4. Remove the top cover.
11.1.4 Front Cover Removal
11.1.4.1 Right Front Cover Removal

1. Remove the right side cover. See Section 11.1.2 Side Cover Removal on page 653.
2. See Figure 11-4. Remove the 2 mounting screws (Item 1) from the bottom cable exit cover
(Item 2).

Item Description
1 Mounting screws (2 used)
2 Bottom cable exit cover
Figure 11-4 Bottom Cable Exit Cover

3. Remove 2 mounting screws (Item 1) from the side of the cover. See Figure 11-5.

Item Description
1 Rear mounting screws (2 used)
2 Front mounting screw (1 used)
3 Right front cover
Figure 11-5 Right Front Cover
4. Remove 1 mounting screw (Item 2) at the front of the cover.

5. Slide the cover sideways to remove.

11.1.4.2 Left Front Cover Removal

1. Remove the left side cover. See Section 11.1.2 Side Cover Removal on page 653.
2. Remove the 3 mounting screws (Item 1) from the breaker tray (Item 2). See Figure 11-6.
Item Description
2 Breaker tray
Figure 11-6 Breaker Tray
3. Remove the breaker tray.

4. Remove 2 mounting screws (Item 1) from the side of the cover. See Figure 11-7.

Item Description
1 Rear mounting screws (2 used)
2 Front mounting screw (1 used)
3 Left front cover
Figure 11-7 Left Front Cover
5. Remove 1 mounting screw (Item 2) at the front of the cover.

6. Slide the cover (Item 3) sideways to remove.
11.1.5 Front Bin Removal

1. Remove the side covers. See Section 11.1.2 Side Cover Removal on page 653.
2. Remove the 3 cap screws on each side of the top cover, but do not disconnect any cables.
Leave the top cover in place. See Section 11.1.3 Top Cover Removal on page 653.

3. Remove the 3 cap screws (Item 1) on each side of the front bin (Item 2). See Figure 11-8.
Item Description
1 Mounting screws
2 Front bin
Figure 11-8 Front Bin

4. See Figure 11-9. Remove the 2 mounting screws (Item 1) from the top cable exit cover (Item
2), then remove the cover.
Item Description
2 Top cable exit cover
Figure 11-9 Top Cable Exit Cover
5. Slightly lift the rear of the top cover to clear the lip on the front bin.
6. Remove the front bin.

11.1.6 Rear Bin Replacement
11.1.6.1 Rear Bin Removal

1. See Figure 11-10. Remove the detectors, grids and two grid separator panels (Item 1) from
the bin.
Item Description
1 Grid Separator Panels
Figure 11-10 Grid Separator Panels
2. See Figure 11-11. Disconnect the exposure switch cable and remove the switch.
Item Description
1 Exposure Switch Connection
Figure 11-11 Exposure Switch Cable
3. Remove the side covers. See Section 11.1.2 Side Cover Removal on page 653.

4. See Figure 11-12. Disconnect the two Detector Charge to Bin Charging Board Cables (Item
1). The cables are color-coded for the 10×12" detector and the 14×17" detector. Remove the
LED power cable (Item 2).
Item Description
1 Cable Assy - Detector Charge to Bin Charging Board
2 Cable Assy - Bin Charge Board LED Power
Figure 11-12 Rear Bin Cables
5. Remove the Access Point (AP). See 11.5.14 Detector Access Point (AP) on page 744.
6. See Figure 11-13. Remove the two side mounting screws (Item 1) on each side of the rear bin.


Item Description
1 Rear bin side mounting screws
Figure 11-13 Rear Bin Side Mounting Screws
7. See Figure 11-14. Remove the three mounting screws (Item 1) at the top of the rear bin.
Item Description
1 Rear bin top mounting screws (3 used)
Figure 11-14 Rear Bin Top Mounting Screws

HEAVY WEIGHT
The rear bin is heavy. Support the bin when removing the screws and lifting the bin off of the
chassis.
8. Remove the rear bin.
11.1.6.2 Rear Bin Installation
HEAVY WEIGHT
The rear bin is heavy. Support the bin when lifting the bin on to the chassis and installing screws.
1. Carefully position the rear bin on the chassis.

2. See Figure 11-14. Install the three mounting screws (Item 1) at the top of the rear bin. Torque
to 7.9 Nm (70 lb-in).
3. See Figure 11-13. Install the two side mounting screws (Item 1) on each side of the rear bin.
Torque to 7.9 Nm (70 lb-in).
4. Install the Access Point (AP). See 11.5.14 Detector Access Point (AP) on page 744.
5. See Figure 11-12. Connect the two Detector Charge to Bin Charging Board Cables (Item 1).
The cables are color-coded for the 10×12" detector and the 14×17" detector.
6. See Figure 11-11. Connect the exposure switch cable and stow the switch.
7. Install grid separator panels in bin.
8. Install side covers.
• Safely boot the system to Applications view and insert the digital detectors into the charging
bin.
• Confirm that both size detectors are properly receiving charge and that the battery charging
indicator is functioning properly.
11.1.7 Column Skirt Cover Removal

1. Remove the left side cover and left front cover. See Section 11.1.4 Front Cover Removal on
page 654.
2. Rotate the tube column to access one of the mounting screws (Item 1), then remove the
mounting screw. See Figure 11-15.

Item Description
1 Mounting screw
2 Column skirt cover
Figure 11-15 Column Skirt Cover
3. Rotate the tube column to access and remove the other mounting screw.
4. Remove the column skirt covers (Item 2).

11.1.8 Tube Head Cover Removal

1. If the lower tube cover needs to be removed, the collimator must be removed first. See Section
11.6.9 Collimator on page 848.
2. See Figure 11-16. Remove the 4 mounting screws (Item 1) from the bottom of the lower tube
cover (Item 2). The collimator can be rotated to provide access to the screws.
Item Description
1 Safety Torx screws (4 used)
2 Lower tube cover
3 Upper tube cover
4 X-ray tube
Figure 11-16 Tube Covers
3. Remove the upper tube cover (Item 3).

4. Remove the lower tube cover (Item 2).

Section 11.2 Cable Replacement

11.2.1 General Cable Replacement

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): Depends on cable

• Anti-static (ESD) kit
• Cable ties

Item: Cable
Quantity: Depends on cable
11.2.1.2.4 Safety
• None

• Remove covers to access the desired cable. See Section 11.1 Cover Management on
page 652.
11.2.1.3 Procedure

LOTO must be performed. The mobile system is a battery-powered unit that can deliver lethal
current. Ensure you are not providing an earth ground path when practicing ESD procedures. See
Section 1.6 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) on page 35.
1. For cables that connect to the vertical column, horizontal arm, X-ray tube, collimator or DAP,
remove the zip ties and unzip/remove the cable cover.
2. Mark the location of all cable restraints on the old cable.
3. Cut or remove the cable restraints from the old cable.
4. Disconnect and remove the old cable.
5. Transfer the locations of the cable restraint marks from the old cable to the new cable.
6. Install and connect the new cable.

7. Install the cable restraints on the new cable.

9. Install the covers.
10. Re-install the cable cover and zip ties. See Section 11.3 Cable Cover Installation on page 679.
See Table 11-1 to determine required tests.
Table 11-1 Test Matrix for Cable Replacement
Cable being replaced Tests that must be performed

Aux Box to Rotor Cable Assembly Functional Checks:
(See 11.2.2 High voltage Cable Replacement • X-ray (see Table 2-16, PM Procedures, X-ray, on page 45)
on page 671 for the correct cable bundle
arrangement for the HV cable clamp)
Aux Box to Rotor Jumper Cable Functional Checks:
• X-ray (see Table 2-16, PM Procedures, X-ray, on page 45)
Col Bulkhead to DAP Cable Assembly Functional Checks:
(See 11.2.2 High voltage Cable Replacement • X-ray - Dose report (see Table 2-16, PM Procedures, X-ray, on
on page 671 for the correct cable bundle page 45)
Cable Assy- Spyder to Hornet HHS Checks:
• Generator operator indicators (see 7.1.6 Testing Generator
Operator Indicators on page 377)
Cable Assy- Spyder to Locust Functional Checks:
• Drive (see Table 2-13, PM Procedures, Drive, on page 43)
Cable Assy- Spyder to Djinn Functional Checks:
Cable Assy- Spyder to LVLE2 Functional Checks:
• Charging (see Table 2-11, PM Procedures, Charging Circuit, on
page 43)
• Light field buttons (see Table 2-15, PM Procedures, Collimator,
on page 45)
Cable Assy- Spyder to Firefly Functional Checks:
page 43)
Cable Assy - Spyder to Wired Handswitch Functional Checks:
Cable Assy- LVLE2 to Firefly Functional Checks:
(there are 2 separate cables) • Charging (see Table 2-11, PM Procedures, Charging Circuit, on
page 43)
Page 668 Section 11.2 Cable Replacement

Table 11-1 Test Matrix for Cable Replacement(Continued)

Cable Assy- Locust to LVLE2 Functional Checks:
page 43)
on page 45)
Cable Assy- LVLE2 to Djinn Functional Checks:
Cable Assy - LVLE2 to DPM-PC Functional Checks:
• X-ray (see Table 2-16, PM Procedures, X-ray, on page 45),
ensure images are created
Cable Assy- Locust to Caterpillar Functional Checks:
(there are 2 separate cables) • Drive (see Table 2-13, PM Procedures, Drive, on page 43)
Cable Assy - Locust to Drive Handle Functional Checks:
Cable Assy - Locust to Cricket Functional Checks:
• Drive - see Table 2-13, PM Procedures, Drive, on page 43
Cable Assy - Hornet to Display HHS Checks:
Cable Assy - Mantis to Firefly Functional Checks:
page 43)
Cable Assy - Cricket to Firefly Functional Checks:
page 43)
Cable Assy - Cricket to Djinn Functional Checks:
Cable Assy - Cricket to Breaker Functional Checks:
page 43)
Cable Assy - Locust to Park Latch Functional Checks:
• Drive (speed limited when tube not latched) (see Table 2-13, PM
Procedures, Drive, on page 43)
Cable Assy - Caterpillar to Bumper Functional Checks:
Cable Assy - Caterpillar to Rot Brake Functional Checks:
• Drive (brake solenoids) (see Table 2-13, PM Procedures, Drive,
on page 43)
• Tube column & arm (locks & latches) (see Table 2-14, PM
Procedures, Tube Column and Arm, on page 44)


Cable Assy - Hornet to Inverter HHS Checks:
Cable Assy - Hornet to Overlay Board HHS Checks:
Cable Assy - Drive Login to Overlay Board Functional Checks:
• Drive (drive login) (see Table 2-13, PM Procedures, Drive, on
page 43)
Cable Assy - Firefly to Power Switch Functional Checks:
page 43)
Cable Assy - Firefly to CLS J1 Functional Checks:
on page 45)
Cable Assy - Firefly to CLS HHS Checks:
• Light field intensity (see 7.1.3.1 Testing Light Intensity on
page 366)
Cable Assy - Mantis to Filter Functional Checks:
page 43)
Cable Assy - Fuse to Filter HHS Checks:
• Grounding (see 7.2.1 Ground Resistance Testing on page 378)
• Leakage (see 7.2.2 Performing Leakage Current Testing on
page 387)
Cable Assy - Locust to Hard Brake Release Functional Checks:
• Drive (brake solenoids) (see Table 2-13, PM Procedures, Drive,
on page 43)
Cable Assy - DPS to PC-Backup Tether Functional Checks:
• X-ray (see Table 2-16, PM Procedures, X-ray, on page 45),
ensure images are created
Cable Assy - Locust to Thorax Column Functional Checks:
Bulkhead • Tube column & arm (locks & latches) (see Table 2-14, PM
(See 11.2.2 High voltage Cable Replacement Procedures, Tube Column and Arm, on page 44)
on page 671 for the correct cable bundle
Cable Asm - Detector Power Supply to None
Detector charge cable (surge-limit cable
assembly)
Cable Asm - Surge-limit cable assembly to None
Detector charge bin connector
Cable Assy - Spyder to Speaker Functional Checks:
• X-ray (sounds & tones) (see Table 2-16, PM Procedures, X-ray,
on page 45)


Cable Assy - Sypder to Thorax Column Functional Checks:
Bulkhead -DAP- • X-ray (dose report) (see Table 2-16, PM Procedures, X-ray, on
page 45)
Cable Assy - CLS to Thorax Column Bulkhead HHS Checks:
-Collimator- • Light field intensity (see 7.1.3.1 Testing Light Intensity on
page 366)
Cable Assy- Spyder to PC video cable None
Cable Assy - Spyder to PC USB None
Cable Assy - PC to Ethernet Bulkhead None
Cable Assy - PC to USB Bulkhead None
Cable Assy - Detector Bin Docking to Detector Functional Checks:
Bin Charging Board • See Finalization procedures, 11.5.16 Detector Charge Cable
Assembly on page 750
Cable Assy - Spyder Dose Reporting to USB None
Bulkhead
Handswitch Cable - N9 Color Functional Checks:
11.2.2 High voltage Cable Replacement

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 60

• Silicone Oil (GE P/N LNR8733)
• Cable ties

Item: HV cable(s)
Quantity: 1 or 2
11.2.2.2.4 Safety
• None

• Remove the side covers and the front covers. See 11.1.4 Front Cover Removal on page 654.

11.2.2.3 Procedure
1. Remove the zip ties and unzip/remove the cable cover.
2. On the existing cable(s) to be replaced, mark the cable(s) at the position of each cable clamp
and cable tie.
3. Remove the HV cable clamp mounting screws. See Figure 11-17.
Item Description
1 HV cable clamp mounting screws (2)
Figure 11-17 HV Cable Clamp Mounting Screws
4. Remove the clamp from the HV cable bundle. See Figure 11-18.
Figure 11-18 HV Cable Clamp
5. See Figure 11-19. Loosen the set screw(s) (see Figure 11-20) in the HV cable tightening
ring(s) at the Djinn HV tank. Loosen and remove the tightening ring(s) and pull the cable(s) out
of the tank.

Item Description
1 Anode HV cable (not visible)
2 Cathode HV cable
3 Ferrite (one on each HV cable)
Figure 11-19 Djinn Tank - HV Cables
Item Description
1 HV cable tightening ring set screw
Figure 11-20 Djinn Tank - Tightening Ring Set Screw

6. See Figure 11-21. Remove the cable clamps (Item 1) from the side of the horizontal arm (Item
3) and vertical column (Item 4) and cut the cable ties (Item 2) from the cable(s) to be replaced.

Item Description
1 Cable clamps
2 Cable ties
3 Horizontal arm
4 Vertical column
Figure 11-21 Cable Clamps and Ties
7. Use a HV spanner wrench to loosen and remove the HV cable tightening ring(s) at the X-ray
tube. Pull the cable(s) out of the tube.
8. Lay the old cable down next to the new cable and transfer the cable clamp and cable tie
position marks over to the new cable. If both cables are being replaced, be sure to pair up
anode cables and cathode cables.
9. Remove the ferrites (see Figure 11-19, Item 3) from the old HV cables and install them in the
same locations on the new HV cables.
Note: Some of the original systems had HV cables that are approximately 250mm (10 inches) shorter than
the replacement HV cables. Distribute the additional cable length as follows (see Figure 11-22):
• Add 75mm (3 inches) in Loop 1 (Item 1) between the two plastic cable clamps on the horizontal
arm (Item 3) and vertical column (Item 4)
• Add 175mm (7 inches) in Loop 2 (Item 2) between the plastic clamp on the vertical column
(Item 4) and the clamp near the Djinn HV tank (Item 5)

Item Description
1 Loop 1 - Add 75mm (3 inches)
2 Loop 2 - Add 175mm (7 inches)
3 Cable clamp on the horizontal arm
4 Cable clamp on the vertical column
5 Cable clamp near Djinn HV Tank
Figure 11-22 HV Cables
Note: HV cables must be lubricated with silicone grease (GE P/N 46-125224P3) before insertion into the
X-ray tube HV wells.
10. Insert the new cable(s) into the X-ray tube HV well(s). Make sure that the cable marking (Tube
Anode or Tube Cathode) matches up with the X-ray tube marking (Anode or Cathode).
Route the cable(s) along the vertical column and horizontal arm, installing cable clamps and
cable ties at the marked positions.
If the new HV cables are longer than the old cables, be sure to distribute the extra length as
shown in Figure 11-22.
11. At the rear of the X-ray tube, route the cables and apply cable ties as shown in Figure 11-23,
Figure 11-24 and Figure 11-25.
&
$

Item Description
1 Cathode high voltage cable
2 DAP cable
3 Collimator cable
Figure 11-23 Cable Identification at Anode Side of X-ray Tube
&

Item Description
1 Anode high voltage cable
2 Stator cable
Figure 11-24 Cable Identification at Cathode Side of X-ray Tube

$QRGH6LGH &DWKRGH6LGH
Figure 11-25 Cable Routing at Rear of X-ray Tube
Note: HV cables must be lubricated with silicone oil (GE P/N LNR8733) before insertion into the tank HV
wells. See Figure 11-26.
Figure 11-26 Lubricate HV Cables
12. Insert the new cable(s) into the Djinn HV tank well(s). Make sure that the cable marking (Djinn
Anode or Djinn Cathode) matches up with the HV tank marking (Anode or Cathode). See
Figure 11-19. Tighten the HV cable tightening ring(s), then tighten the set screw(s) in the
ring(s) (see Figure 11-20).
13. Arrange the cable bundle as shown in Figure 11-27, use a cable tie to maintain cable positions.
14. Install the clamp onto the cable bundle. DO NOT TIGHTEN THE CLAMP YET.
clamp.


Item Description
1 DAP cable
2 Collimator cable
3 Anode cable (HV +) or Cathode (HV -)
4 Vertical brake cable
5 Auxiliary cable
6 Horizontal arm lock cable
7 Anode cable (HV +) or Cathode (HV -)
Figure 11-27 Correct Cable Bundle Arrangement
18. Install the system covers.
19. Re-install the cable cover and zip ties. See Cable Cover Installation on page 679.
Perform the following HHS checks:
• mAs accuracy - see 7.1.4.3 Testing mAs Accuracy on page 371

Section 11.3 Cable Cover Installation

1. The cable cover and several zip ties are required. See Figure 11-28.
Figure 11-28 Cable Cover and Zip Ties
2. Place cover over cables and close all five zippers shut. See Figure 11-29.
Figure 11-29 Install and Zip Cover

3. Install zip ties through openings on all three ends of cable cover. Secure ties tightly and clip
away excess tie wrap material. Push cable cover in as far as possible where cables enter body
of unit. See Figure 11-30.
Figure 11-30 Install Zip Ties at Ends of Cover
4. Orientate cover as desired so that zippers and junctions are best hidden. See Figure 11-31.
Figure 11-31 Conceal Zippers and Junctions
Section 11.4 Base Assembly

11.4.1 Drive Wheel

Required persons: 1 or 2
Timing (min): 30
Page 680 Section 11.4 Base Assembly


• 3 - 2 x 4 inch wood blocks (or equivalent)
• 1 - 3 ft.to 4 ft. (1.0 to 1.2 m) wood lever (or equivalent)
(Lever to be construction grade or better with no splits, bowing, and free from knots)
• Loctite 242 (GE part# 46-170686P2)

Item: Drive wheel
Quantity: 1
11.4.1.2.4 Safety
• PPE - Gloves
• PPE - Kneeling pad
TIPPING HAZARD
TIPPING THE POTENTIAL FOR SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH EXISTS. ENSURE WORK AREA IS FREE
AND CLEAR OF ANY PERSONS OR OBJECTS WITHIN A 3 METER RANGE OF THE SYSTEM.

• Remove the side cover for the wheel that requires replacement. See 11.1.2 Side Cover
Removal on page 653.
• Remove the front cover for the wheel that requires replacement. See 11.1.4 Front Cover
• Tube arm must be in the latched position.

TIPPING HAZARD
Tipping FAILURE TO LATCH THE TUBE ARM WILL RESULT IN A CHANGE OF THE CENTER OF
GRAVITY OF THE SYSTEM. THIS CAN RESULT IN UNCONTROLLED LIFT AND TIPPING OF
THE SYSTEM.
11.4.1.3 Procedure
1. A fulcrum and lever will be used to create a controlled lift of the system. See Figure 11-32 for
the dimensional representation.
Figure 11-32 Lever and Fulcrum Locations

Note: For system stability, the position of the support block is important. The support point must
be close to the wheel to be replaced. See Figure 11-33.
6XSSRUW
%ORFN
3RVLWLRQ
IRU'ULYH:KHHO
5HSODFHPHQW
Figure 11-33 Drive Wheel Lift and Support
The following steps are a generic representation of how to lift the system. Ensure the fulcrum, lever
and support blocks are positioned correctly for the wheel being replaced.
2. Prepare the two 2 x 4 inch blocks. Secure them together using tape or screws. (Screws have
been used in these examples.)

3. Position single 2 x 4 inch block approximately 4 inches from the vertical face of the battery box.
Place lever approximately 2 inches under battery box, perpendicular to the vertical face of the
battery box. Ensure the lever is fully supported on the fulcrum. See Figure 11-34.
Figure 11-34 Lift and Support Unit
4. While applying downward pressure onto the end of the lever (see Figure 11-35 - left), position
the two 2 x 4 support blocks under the other corner of the battery box (see Figure 11-35 - right).
Note: This example uses a one person standing position. This is simpler if two people are available.
5. Place aside the lever and fulcrum as needed for the remaining steps.

6. Remove the 8 mounting screws (Item 1) from the drive wheel (Item 2). See Figure 11-36.
Figure 11-36 Drive Wheel and Mounting Screws
7. Remove the drive wheel from the shaft.

8. Slide the new drive wheel onto the shaft.
9. See Figure 11-36. Apply thread locker Loctite 242 to the mounting screws (Item 1). Install the
mounting screws, finger-tight only. Make several passes, slightly tightening the screws in an
alternating pattern until all the screws are fully seated. Torque to 3 N-m (26.6 lb-in).
10. Lift the unit and remove the support blocks.
Verify system drive operation.
11.4.2 Battery Packs

Required persons: 1
Timing (minutes): 60 min + Charge Time

• None


Item: Battery pack
Quantity: Recommended to replace batteries only as a set of 4
11.4.2.2.4 Safety
• Weight of an individual battery is approximately 22.7 kg (50 lbs).

• Remove the side covers. See 11.1.2 Side Cover Removal on page 653.
• Dedicated location for Battery Integration Procedure.
11.4.2.3 Procedure
1. See Figure 11-37. Remove the battery compartment covers (Item 1) from both sides (4 screws
on each cover).
Item Description
1 Battery compartment cover (left side shown)
Figure 11-37 Battery Compartment Covers

2. See Figure 11-38. On the Cricket battery board, loosen the connector screws on the J1/J2 (left
side) and the J3/J4 power connectors (Item 1 - right side), then unplug the cables.
Item Description
2 Battery sensing connectors (J13, J14)
Figure 11-38 Battery Connectors (right side shown)
3. On the Cricket battery board, unplug the cables from the sensing connectors J11/J12 (left side)
and J13/J14 (Item 2 - right side).
4. On each side, remove the top battery and then the bottom battery from the battery
compartment.
Note: Refer to local procedures before returning/shipping any batteries.
5. Install the new batteries in the battery compartment.
6. Route the power and sensing cables through the cutouts in the chassis and plug them into the
Cricket battery board (the upper battery cables go to the upper connectors on the Cricket
battery board). Tighten down the connector screws for J1, J2, J3, J4 connectors.
7. Install the battery compartment covers. The tabs in the covers are intended to hold the
batteries in the proper location and should be positioned towards the front of the unit. If the
covers will not fit correctly, reposition the batteries to provide proper clearance.
If the cover holes do not line up properly, rotate the cover 180 degrees (it is upside down).
1. Perform the following functional checks:
- Confirm the system can accept charge by connecting to AC power. Observe the battery
indicator lights on the top cover and UI flash.
- Bus voltage level - The system batteries shall produce an open circuit voltage of
approximately 157 VDC when fully charged. Measure battery voltage on the Cricket
Battery Board, at test points TP7 and TP6. See Figure 11-39.

- Charge batteries,
Note: The system does not require a daily, weekly or timed charging schedule. Users
should charge the system when convenient according to the site's preferred workflow to
maintain an adequate state of charge during usage. To optimize the amount of time the
batteries are on charge, the system may at times inhibit charge so the batteries can rest.
This is managed by the system independent of any user habits, workflows, or charging
cycles.
Item Description
1 Cricket battery board
2 Chassis ground test point - TP6
3 Battery voltage test point - TP7
Figure 11-39 Battery Voltage Measurement
2. Install the front covers.

3. Install the side covers.

11.4.3 Front Bumper Assembly or Bumper Switch

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• None

Item: Front bumper assembly
Quantity: 1
or
Item: Front bumper switch
Quantity: 1 or 2
11.4.3.2.4 Safety
• None

• Remove the side covers and front covers. See 11.1.4 Front Cover Removal on page 654.

11.4.3.3 Procedure
11.4.3.3.1 Front Bumper Assembly
Figure 11-40 Front Bumper Assembly
1. See Figure 11-41. Using long-nose pliers, remove the extension springs (Item 1) from the cap
screws on both sides.

Item Description
1 Extension spring
2 Front bumper slot closure

Item Description
3 Switch
4 Switch arm mounting nut
5 Switch arm
6 Front bumper
7 Adjustment screw
Figure 11-41 Front Bumper Assembly - Top View
2. Remove the front bumper slot closure (Item 2). There are 2 mounting nuts that must be
removed from underneath the chassis.
3. Remove the wires from the switches (Item 3 - both sides).
4. Remove the mounting nuts (Item 4 - both sides) from the switch arms (Item 5 - both sides).
5. Lift the switch arms off of the mounting studs and guide the ends of the switch arms through
the slots in the chassis.
6. Slide the front bumper and attached parts (Item 6) out of the front of the unit.
7. On the new front bumper assembly, remove the mounting nuts (Item 4 - both sides) from the
switch arms (Item 5 - both sides). Lift the switch arms off of the mounting studs.
8. Slide the new front bumper and attached parts (Item 6) in from the front of the unit.
9. Guide the ends of the switch arms (Item 5 - both sides) through the slots in the chassis, then
place the switch arms onto the mounting studs and install the mounting nuts (Item 4 - both
sides).
10. Connect the wires to the switches (Item 3 - both sides). The wires are connected to the
common (COM) and normally open (NO) terminals on the switches.
11. Install the front bumper slot closure (Item 2). There are 2 mounting nuts that must be installed
from underneath the chassis.
12. Using long-nose pliers, install the extension springs (Item 1 - both sides).
13. Adjust the adjustment screw (Item 7) to just remove any side-to-side play of the front bumper
assembly.
14. Install the front covers and side covers.
11.4.3.3.2 Front Bumper Switch

1. See Figure 11-41. Remove the wires from the switch to be replaced (Item 3 - left and/or right).
2. Remove the mounting nuts (2) from the switch.
3. Replace the old switch with the new switch, install and tighten the mounting nuts.Torque to
0.56 N-m (5 lb-in)
4. Connect the wires to the switch. The wires are connected to the common (COM) and normally
open (NO) terminals on the switches.
6. Install the front covers and side covers.
Perform the following functional checks:
• Drive (all tests) - see Table 2-13, PM Procedures, Drive, on page 43

11.4.4 Front Caster

Required persons: 1 or 2
Timing (min): 30

• 3 - 2 x 4 inch wood blocks (or equivalent)
• 1 - 3 ft. to 4 ft. (1.0 to 1.2 m) wood lever (or equivalent)
(Lever to be construction grade or better with no splits, bowing, and free from knots)
• Loctite 242 (GE part# 46-170686P2)

Item: Front caster
Quantity: 1
11.4.4.2.4 Safety
• PPE - Gloves
• PPE - Kneeling pad
TIPPING HAZARD
TIPPING THE POTENTIAL FOR SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH EXISTS. ENSURE WORK AREA IS FREE
AND CLEAR OF ANY PERSONS OR OBJECTS WITHIN A 3 METER RANGE OF THE SYSTEM.

• Remove the side cover for the caster that requires replacement. See 11.1.2 Side Cover
• Remove the front cover for the caster that requires replacement. See 11.1.4 Front Cover
• Tube arm must be in the latched position.
TIPPING HAZARD
Tipping FAILURE TO LATCH THE TUBE ARM WILL RESULT IN A CHANGE OF THE CENTER OF

GRAVITY OF THE SYSTEM. THIS CAN RESULT IN UNCONTROLLED LIFT AND TIPPING OF
THE SYSTEM.
11.4.4.3 Procedure
1. A fulcrum and lever will be used to create a controlled lift of the system. See Figure 11-42 for
the dimensional representation.
Figure 11-42 Lever and Fulcrum Locations

Note: For system stability, the position of the support block is important. The support point must
be close to the caster to be replaced. See Figure 11-43.
6XSSRUW
%ORFN
3RVLWLRQ
IRU)URQW&DVWHU
5HSODFHPHQW
Figure 11-43 Front Caster Lift and Support
The following steps are a generic representation of how to lift the system. Ensure the fulcrum, lever
and support blocks are positioned correctly for the caster being replaced.
2. Prepare the two 2 x 4 inch blocks. Secure them together using tape or screws. (Screws have
been used in these examples.)

3. Position single 2 x 4 inch block approximately 4 inches from the vertical face of the battery box.
Place lever approximately 2 inches under battery box, perpendicular to the vertical face of the
battery box. Ensure the lever is fully supported on the fulcrum. See Figure 11-44.
4. While applying downward pressure onto the end of the lever (see Figure 11-45 - left), position
the two 2 x 4 support blocks under the other corner of the battery box (see Figure 11-45 - right).
Note: This example uses a one person standing position. This is simpler if two people are available.
5. Place aside the lever and fulcrum as needed for the remaining steps.

6. See Figure 11-46. At the top of the caster (Item 1), remove the 4 mounting nuts (Item 2) from
the studs.

Figure 11-46 Caster Location
7. Slightly tip the caster, and remove it from the unit.

8. Install the new caster onto the studs.
9. Apply thread locker Loctite 242 to mounting nuts and torque to 25 N-m (18.4 lb-in).
None
11.4.5 Spring Applied Brake (Column Rotational Brake)

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 45

• Cable ties


Item: Spring applied brake
Quantity: 1
11.4.5.2.4 Safety
• None

• Remove the left side cover and left front cover. See 11.1.4 Front Cover Removal on page 654.
11.4.5.3 Procedure
1. See Figure 11-47. Use a 3mm hex key to remove the four mounting screws (Item 2) from the
bottom of the column rotation lock assembly (Item 1).

Item Description
1 Column rotation lock assembly
3 Nut
Figure 11-47 Column Rotation Lock Assembly (Bottom View)
2. Remove the nut (Item 3) from the lock assembly. The assembly should easily come off of the
tapered shaft, but could require gentle prying with a screwdriver to release it.
3. Unplug the lock assembly cable connector and cut any cable ties as required to remove the
cable. The connector is located on top of the base assembly, behind the vertical column.
Rotate the column to a position that allows maximum access to the connector.
4. Remove the old lock assembly from the unit.

5. Route the cable from the new lock assembly up through the access hole in the base and plug
it into the connector. Install new cable ties to replace those removed in Step 3 above. Verify
that the cable routing prevents the column from rubbing against the cable during rotation.
6. Place the lock assembly on the shaft and install the nut (finger-tighten only).
7. Position the lock assembly so that the cable is oriented towards the rear of the unit.
8. Install and tighten the four mounting screws (Item 2) 1/4 turn past snug. No need to over-
tighten.
9. Tighten the nut (Item 3). Torque to 25 N-m (18.5 lb-ft).
11. Install the front cover and side cover.
• Tube column and arm (locks & latches) - see Table 2-14, PM Procedures, Tube Column and
Arm, on page 44
11.4.6 Column Support Assembly

Required persons: 2
Timing (min): 210

• Cable ties
• HV Tube Grease (GE part# 46-125224P3, Silicon Grease)
• Loctite 242 (GE part# 46-170686P2)

Item: Column support assembly
Quantity: 1
11.4.6.2.4 Safety
• The column vertical lock must be engaged before any weight (i.e. horizontal arm, X-ray tube,
collimator) is removed from the vertical carriage.

• Remove the zip ties and unzip/remove the cable cover.
• Remove the column skirt covers. See 11.1.7 Column Skirt Cover Removal on page 664.

• Lock the vertical carriage. See 11.6.1 Engaging Vertical Lock on page 809.
• Remove the collimator. See 11.6.9.1 Collimator Replacement on page 848.
• Remove the X-ray tube. See 11.6.8 X-ray tube on page 844.
• Remove the horizontal arm. See 11.6.3 Horizontal Arm Assembly on page 821.
• Remove the Column. See 11.6.2 Column Replacement on page 812.
11.4.6.3 Procedure
1. Identify the parts used in this procedure. See Figure 11-48 and Figure 11-49.

Item Description
1 Rotational Detent Arm (spring loaded)
2 Eccentric Stud Nut
3 Column Support Assembly
4 Column Mount Trap Spacer (bracket)
5 Hex key used to hold Rotational Detent Arm out
6 Spring Applied Brake electric cable
Figure 11-48 Parts Description (Underside)


Item Description
1 Column Inner Sleeve
2 Column Mounting Bolt hole
3 Eccentric Stud
4 Rotational Detent Arm (spring loaded)
5 Thorax Base
Figure 11-49 Parts Description (Topside)
2. Disconnect the Spring Applied Brake electrical connection and feed cable to bottom side of
base assembly. See Figure 11-48.
3. See Figure 11-48 and Figure 11-50. Locate the Column Mount Trap Spacer Bracket on the
underside of the system. Remove the two lower nuts, and two cap head screws. Then remove
the Column Mount Trap Spacer Bracket.

Figure 11-50 Column Mount Trap Spacer Bracket
HEAVY WEIGHT: THE COLUMN SUPPORT ASSEMBLY WEIGHS APPROXIMATELY 25LBS

(11.3KG) AND COULD CAUSE INJURY IT IF FALLS ON YOUR BODY. USE APPROPRIATE
TOOLS TO LOWER THE ASSEMBLY IF NEEDED.
4. See Figure 11-51. From the underside of the system remove the four nuts holding the Column
Support Assembly. Do not remove the Eccentric Stud Nut used on the Rotational Detent Arm.
Note you will need to support the weight of the Column Support Assembly while removing
these nuts to prevent the assembly from falling. You may also consider leaving some of the
nuts partially threaded to hold the Column Support Assembly up while performing the next
step.


Item Description
1 Remove these nuts
2 DO NOT REMOVE THIS NUT
Figure 11-51 Four Nuts Holding the Column Support Assembly
5. Lower the Column Support Assembly from the thorax. Since the assembly aligns with the four
studs, it has to be lowered evenly. You may need to pry the assembly down with a large
screwdriver if it does not come down easily.
6. See Figure 11-52 and Figure 11-53. Apply thread locker Loctite 242 to the four studs. Lift new
Column Support Assembly into position. Torque the four nuts holding the casting to the base
to 25.0 N-m (18.4 lb-ft).


Item Description
1 Apply thread locker Loctite 242 to studs
Figure 11-52 Apply thread locker Loctite 242 to studs before installing new Column
Support Assembly


Item Description
1 Torque nuts to 25.0 N-m (18.4 lb-ft)
Figure 11-53 Lifting the Column Support Assembly into place
7. See Figure 11-54. Apply thread locker and attach the four fasteners holding the Column Mount
Spacer (Bracket) to the system. It's recommended that all four fasteners be hand tightened
first, and then they can all be torqued to 20.0 N-m (177 lb-in).

Item Description
1 Torque fasteners to 20.0 N-m (177 lb-in)
Figure 11-54 Fasteners holding the Column Mount Trap Spacer (Bracket)
8. See Figure 11-55 and Figure 11-56. Use a large screwdriver at the base of the Thorax to move
the spring-loaded column rotational detent arm (Figure 11-54) toward the front of the unit.
From underneath the base, insert a 4mm (5/32") hex key into the hole in the cover (Figure 11-
55) to hold the rotational detent arm away from the column.

Item Description
1 Pry out detent arm
Figure 11-55 Prying the Rotational Detent Arm out with a Flathead Screwdriver

Item Description
1 Insert hex key here
Figure 11-56 Inserting the hex key to hold the Rotational Detent Arm out
9. See Figure 11-57. Ensure the main column mounting bolt hole is facing the general direction
of the front bumper, this will make the installation of the column mounting bolt easier. If
needed, rotate the Column Inner Sleeve by hand to face the bolt hole towards the front of the
system.
a. To rotate by hand, you must remove the brake assembly. Note, this may not be necessary
as the replacement part should already be pre-positioned.
b. See 11.4.5 Spring Applied Brake (Column Rotational Brake) on page 696.
c. Re-install the brake assembly before attempting to install the column.


GHJUHHV
GHJUHHV
Item Description
1 Position bolt hole towards the front
Bolt hole position range +/- 45 degrees from center as shown
Figure 11-57 Ensuring the Column Bolt Hole is facing the front of the system
10. Using two people lift the column into position on the chassis and install the column mounting
bolt. Torque to 90 N-m (66.4 lb-ft), no thread locker is used.
11. Pry out the Rotational Detent Arm with a Flathead screwdriver and remove the hex key that
was used to hold the rotational detent arm out.
12. Install the cable bracket onto the column.
13. Install the horizontal arm and the X-ray tube. See 11.6.3 Horizontal Arm Assembly on
page 821. See Figure 11-23, Figure 11-24 and Figure 11-25 for cable routing at the rear of the
X-ray tube.
14. Install the collimator. See 11.6.9 Collimator on page 848.
15. Install cable brackets and cable ties.
Examine the steel cables at the top of the column to ensure proper tension has been maintained
prior to unlocking the vertical carriage. If the safety lock has been engaged, disengaging the vertical
carriage lock can result in uncontrolled cable tension and/or equipment damage, resulting in column
replacement. For details on releasing the safety lock, see Column Replacement,
11.6.2.3 Procedure on page 812.
16. Unlock the vertical carriage. See 11.6.1 Engaging Vertical Lock on page 809.
17. Check and adjust the mechanical alignment of the column rotational detent position. See
6.1.3 Column Rotational Detent Procedure on page 361.

18. Install the column top cover. See 11.1.3 Top Cover Removal on page 653.
19. Install the column skirt covers. See 11.1.7 Column Skirt Cover Removal on page 664.
21. Install the front covers. See 11.1.4 Front Cover Removal on page 654.
22. Install the side covers. See 11.1.2 Side Cover Removal on page 653.
23. Re-install the cable cover and zip ties. See Cable Cover Installation on page 679.
1. Perform the following mechanical alignments:
- Check and adjust the mechanical alignment of the column rotational detent position. See
- Check and adjust the mechanical alignment of the park latch assembly and arm yoke for
the arm retracted position for smooth and repeatable operation. See 6.1.2 Tube Latch to
Arm Pin Adjustment Procedure on page 358.
- Check and adjust the Column Balance. See 6.1.1 Column Balance Procedure on
page 356.
2. Perform the following HHS checks:
- Light field to X-ray field alignment - see 7.1.3.2 Testing Light Field to X-ray Field
Alignment on page 367
- Tube column and arm - see Table 2-14, PM Procedures, Tube Column and Arm, on
page 44
- X-ray - see Table 2-16, PM Procedures, X-ray, on page 45
4. Perform QAP. See the Optima XR240amx Operator Manual, Quality Assurance and
Maintenance chapter.
11.4.7 Rear Bin Kickplate

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 20

• None

Item: Kickplate
Quantity: 1
11.4.7.2.4 Safety
• None


11.4.7.3 Procedure
1. Access the mounting nuts through the openings behind the drive wheels.
2. Remove the mounting nuts (3) from the rear of the kickplate, then remove the kickplate. See
Figure 11-58.
Item Description
1 Kick plate
2 Rear bin
Figure 11-58 Kickplate
3. Install the new kickplate and mounting nuts.

Verify drive operation.
11.4.8 Motor Brake and Motor Reducer Assembly

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30


• Loctite 242 (GE part# 46-170686P2)

Item: Motor reducer assembly and/or motor brake
Quantity: 1
11.4.8.2.4 Safety
• None

• Remove the side covers and the rear bin. See 11.1.6 Rear Bin Replacement on page 661.
• Remove the drive wheels. See 11.4.1 Drive Wheel on page 680.
11.4.8.3 Procedure

1. See Figure 11-59. Disconnect the three cables running from the motor/brake assembly to the

Caterpillar board (Item 1).
Item Description
1 Caterpillar base transition board
Figure 11-59 Caterpillar Board
2. See Figure 11-60. Remove the eight motor mounting screws (Item 3) and the motor/brake
assembly (Items 4 & 6).

Item Description
1 Drive wheel mounting screws (8 used)
2 Drive wheel
3 Motor mounting screws (8 used)
4 Motor
5 Brake mounting screws (4 used)
6 Brake
Figure 11-60 Drive Assembly (right side shown)

3. Before removing the brake, note the position of the cable exiting the brake so that the brake
can be mounted to the new motor in the same orientation.
4. Remove the brake mounting screws (Item 5) and the brake (Item 6) from the motor (Item 4).
5. Install the brake onto the motor (the brake should be positioned so that the cable comes out
towards the top). Torque to 3 N-m (26.6 lb-in).
6. Install the motor/brake assembly into the chassis. Install the eight mounting screws (Item 3)
with thread locker Loctite 242 and tighten them in an alternating pattern. Torque to 5 N-m (44.3
lb-in).
7. Plug the three cables into the Caterpillar board.
The left motor/brake assembly cables plug into connectors J3, J4 and J7.
The right motor/brake assembly cables plug into connectors J5, J6 and J9.
8. Install the drive wheel onto the hub, install the eight mounting screws (Item 1) with thread
locker Loctite 242 and tighten them in an alternating pattern. Torque to 3 N-m (26.6 lb-in).
10. Install the rear bin.
None
11.4.9 Caterpillar Base Transition Board

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 105

• None

Item: Caterpillar base transition circuit board
Quantity: 1
11.4.9.2.4 Safety
• None


11.4.9.3 Procedure

1. Locate the circuit board. See Figure 11-61.
Item Description
1 Caterpillar base transition board
Figure 11-61 Board Identification - lower rear
2. Disconnect all cables (11 connections) from the circuit board.

3. Remove the old circuit board (5 screws).
4. Install the new circuit board (Torque to 1 N-m (8.9 lb-in)).
5. Connect all cables to the circuit board.

Section 11.5 Thorax Assembly

11.5.1 Spyder System Controller

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• None

Item: Spyder system controller board
Quantity: 1
Note: The Spyder controller board is different in Brivo and Optima system configurations. You must use
the correct Spyder board part number for all replacements. Failure to use the correct board will
result in erratic system behavior and/or system non-functionality, including non-recoverable Spyder
board damage.
11.5.1.2.4 Safety
• None

• Remove the right side cover. See 11.1.2 Side Cover Removal on page 653.

11.5.1.3 Procedure

Item Description
1 Spyder system controller board
2 Locust drive board
Figure 11-62 Board Identification - Right Side
2. Disconnect all cables from the circuit board.

4. Install the new circuit board.
7. Install the right side cover.
Page 716 Section 11.5 Thorax Assembly

1. Update firmware. See Section 3.3 Performing a FW Load From Cold (LFC) on page 75.
- Drive - see Table 2-13, PM Procedures, Drive, on page 43
11.5.2 Locust Drive Board

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• None

Item: Locust drive circuit board
Quantity: 1
11.5.2.2.4 Safety
• None

11.5.2.3 Procedure




2. Perform the following calibrations:
- Drive handle - see 5.8.1 Drive Handle Calibration on page 343
- Tube column & arm (locks & latches) - see Table 2-14, PM Procedures, Tube Column and
Arm, on page 44
11.5.3 Locust Drive Board Fuses

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 10

• None

Item: Locust drive board fuses
Quantity: As required
11.5.3.2.4 Safety
• None

11.5.3.3 Procedure



2. Locate the bad fuse. See Figure 11-63.
)
)
)
Item Description
F12 Right motor fuse: 8A, time delay, 300vdc, 600vac
F13 Left motor fuse: 8A, time delay, 300vdc, 600vac
F15 Locks fuse: 8A, time delay, 300vdc, 600vac
Figure 11-63 Locust Board Fuses
3. Remove the old fuse.

4. Install the new fuse.
• Drive (brake solenoids) - see Table 2-13, PM Procedures, Drive, on page 43
• Tube column & arm (locks & latches) - see Table 2-14, PM Procedures, Tube Column and
Arm, on page 44

11.5.4 Firefly Charger Board

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• None

Item: Firefly charger circuit board
Quantity: 1
11.5.4.2.4 Safety
• None

• Remove the left side cover. See 11.1.2 Side Cover Removal on page 653.

11.5.4.3 Procedure

Item Description
1 Firefly charger board
Figure 11-64 Board Identification - Left Side
2. Remove the Firefly board safety shield.

3. Disconnect all cables from the circuit board.
4. Remove the old circuit board.
5. Install the new circuit board. (4 standoffs, torque to 2.3 N-m (20.4 lb-in))
7. Install the Firefly board safety shield.(4 screws, torque to 2.3 N-m (20.4 lb-in))
9. Install the left side cover.
- Charging - see Table 2-11, PM Procedures, Charging Circuit, on page 43

11.5.5 Firefly Board Fuses

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 10

• None

Item: Firefly board fuses
11.5.5.2.4 Safety
• None


11.5.5.3 Procedure


2. Remove the Firefly safety shield.
)
)
Item Description
F5 Power-in for Mantis (from batteries): 15A, time delay, 300vdc, 600vac
F6 Power-in for collimator lamp power supply (from batteries): 3.15A, time
delay, 5x20mm, 250V, 1.5kA interrupt, ceramic
Figure 11-65 Firefly Board Fuses
4. Remove the old fuse.

5. Install the new fuse.
6. Install Firefly board safety shield. (4 screws, torque to 2.3 N-m (20.4 lb-in))
• Charging - see Table 2-11, PM Procedures, Charging Circuit, on page 43

11.5.6 Cricket Battery Board

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• Cable ties

Item: Cricket battery circuit board
Quantity: 1
11.5.6.2.4 Safety
• None


11.5.6.3 Procedure

Item Description
1 Cricket battery board
Figure 11-66 Board Identification - Front
2. Disconnect all cables from the circuit board. Some of these connectors pass through the
plastic safety shield and must be removed before the safety shield can be removed. For the
smaller connectors, use a screwdriver to press on the release latch on the side of the
connector body.
3. Remove the mounting screws (two on each side) for the plastic safety shield.
Note: Remove the cable ties from the bottom of the safety shield only if necessary.
4. Remove the old circuit board (4 standoffs).
5. Install the new circuit board (4 standoffs, torque to 1 N-m (8.9 lb-in)).
6. Install the plastic safety shield and cable/cable ties.
9. Install the front cover.


• X-ray - see Table 2-16, PM Procedures, X-ray, on page 45
11.5.7 Cricket Board Fuses

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 10

• Cable ties

Item: Cricket board fuses
11.5.7.2.4 Safety
• None

11.5.7.3 Procedure


2. Disconnect the cables from the front and top of the circuit board. These connectors pass
through the plastic safety shield and must be removed before the safety shield can be
removed. For the smaller connectors, use a screwdriver to press on the release latch on the
side of the connector body.
3. Remove the mounting screws (two on each side) from the plastic safety shield.
Note: Remove the cable ties from the bottom of the safety shield only if necessary.

)
)
)
Item Description
F1 Charge fuse
F2 Drive fuse 1
F3 Drive fuse 2
Figure 11-67 Cricket Board Fuses
5. Remove the old fuse and replace it with the new fuse.
6. Install the plastic safety shield and cable/cable ties.
7. Connect the cables to the circuit board.

11.5.8 Bin Charging Board (BCB)

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 45

• Cable ties

Item: Bin charging board
Quantity: 1
11.5.8.2.4 Safety
• None

11.5.8.3 Procedure
1. Disconnect all cables from the bin charging board.
2. See Figure 11-68. Remove four socket head screws (Item 3) securing bin charging board
(Item 1) to the bracket (Item 2).
3. Position bin charging board (Item 1) on bracket (Item 2).

Item Description
1 Bin charging board
2 Bin charging board bracket
3 Socket head screws, Qty. 4
Figure 11-68 Detector charge board installation
4. Use four socket head screws (Item 3) to secure bin charging board (Item 1) to the bracket
(Item 2). Torque socket head screws (item 3) to 1.2 N-m (10.6 lb-in). See Figure 11-68.
5. Connect all cables to bin charging board.
• Safely boot the system to Applications view and insert the digital detectors into the charging
bin.
• Confirm that both size detectors are properly receiving charge and that the battery charging
indicator is functioning properly.

11.5.9 Hornet UIF board

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 45

• Cable ties

Item: Hornet UIF circuit board
Quantity: 1
11.5.9.2.4 Safety
• None


11.5.9.3 Procedure

1. See Figure 11-69. On the rear of the top cover, locate the Hornet circuit board which is under
a metal cover (Item 4).

Item Description
1 Drive login board assembly
2 Display inverter
3 Ferrite core
4 Hornet UIF board metal cover
Figure 11-69 Board Identification - top cover
2. Disconnect two cables from the top of the Hornet board.

3. Disconnect one cable from the right side of the Hornet board.
4. On the left side of the Hornet board, unplug the other end of the cable from the display inverter
board (Item 2).
5. Remove cables ties from the ferrite core (Item 3) and remove the core from the cable.
6. Remove the 12 mounting nuts and the metal cover (Item 4).

7. Disconnect the remaining cable from the bottom of the Hornet board.
8. Remove the old Hornet board (4 screws).
10. Connect the cable to the bottom of the Hornet board.
11. Transfer the cable from the left side of the old Hornet board to the new board.
12. Route the left-side cable through the metal cover, then install the cover and mounting nuts.
13. Connect all remaining cables to the circuit board.
14. Connect the left-side cable to the display inverter board.
15. Re-install the ferrite core onto the cable and secure with cable ties.
17. Install the top cover and side covers.
- Generator Operator Indicators - see 7.1.6 Testing Generator Operator Indicators on
page 377
11.5.10 Drive Login Active Board Collector

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• None

Item: Drive login active board collector
Quantity: 1
11.5.10.2.4 Safety
• None


11.5.10.3 Procedure

1. Locate the drive login board assembly. See Figure 11-70.

2. Remove the drive login board assembly (6 screws) from the top cover.
3. Remove the drive login board from the assembly (9 screws). See Figure 11-70.
Item Description
1 Drive login board assembly
Figure 11-70 Drive Login Board Assembly
4. Disconnect the cable from the circuit board.

5. Connect the cable to the new circuit board.
6. Install the new circuit board on the assembly.
7. Install the assembly on the top cover.
9. Install the top cover.
• Drive (drive login) - see Table 2-13, PM Procedures, Drive, on page 43

11.5.11 Top Cover or Display & Inverter Collector

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 60

• Cable ties

Item: Top cover or display & inverter collector
Quantity: 1
11.5.11.2.4 Safety
• None


11.5.11.3 Procedure

If replacing just the display & inverter, follow the steps listed below.
1. See Figure 11-71. On the rear of the top cover, locate the Hornet circuit board which is under
a metal cover (Item 4).

Item Description
1 Display assembly mounting screws (7 screws: 3 on left, 4 on right)
2 Display inverter
3 Ferrite core
4 Hornet UIF board metal cover
5 Cable clamp location (cable clamp not shown)
6 Board mounting plate screws (6 screws: 3 on each side)
7 Hornet to Overlay board cable
Figure 11-71 Board Identification - top cover
2. Disconnect two cables from the top of the Hornet board.

3. Remove the cable clamp (Item 5) from the large cable.

4. Disconnect the cable from the right side of the Hornet board.
5. On the left side of the Hornet board, unplug the other end of the cable from the display inverter
board (Item 2). Remove cable ties from the ferrite core (Item 3) and remove the core from the
cable.
6. Remove the 12 mounting nuts and tip the Hornet board metal cover (Item 4) to gain access to
the remaining cable. Disconnect the cable from the left side of the Hornet board. Route the
cable connector through the cover and remove the cover.
7. Disconnect the cable from the bottom of the Hornet board.
8. Remove the Hornet board (4 screws).
9. Disconnect the cable from the Overlay board (Item 7)
10. Remove the 4 small cables from the top and bottom of the Display inverter board (Item 2). Note
the colors of the cable wires (blue on the left, pink on the right).
11. Remove the 6 screws (3 on each side) and the board mounting plate. See Figure 11-72. Note
the locations of cable restraints and ground wires so that they can be properly placed upon re-
assembly.
Item Description
1 Board mounting plate
Figure 11-72 Board Mounting Plate
12. Remove the 7 display assembly mounting screws (Figure 11-71, Item 1) from the left and right
sides.
13. Remove the old display assembly and replace it with the new display assembly.
14. Install the 7 display assembly mounting screws.
15. Route the cable with 2 ferrite cores through the opening in the board mounting plate. Make
sure both ferrites are outside of the mounting plate before fastening it down.
16. Install the board mounting plate and 6 mounting screws.
- Be sure to attach all ground wires and cable clamps in the proper locations.
- Be careful not to trap any cables or wires underneath the plate.

17. Position the closest ferrite core into the opening in the board mounting plate. See Figure 11-73.
Item Description
1 Position one ferrite core in opening
Figure 11-73 Ferrite Cores
18. Reconnect the 4 small cables to the Display inverter board (blue = left, pink = right).
19. Reconnect the cable to the Overlay board (Figure 11-71, Item 7).
20. Install the Hornet board (4 screws).
21. Connect the cable to the bottom of the Hornet board.
22. Route the left-side cable through the metal cover, plug it into the Hornet board, then install the
metal cover and mounting nuts.
23. Connect all remaining cables to the Hornet board.
24. Connect the other end of the left-side cable to the display inverter board. Re-install the ferrite
core onto the cable and secure with cable ties.
25. Re-install the cable clamp on the large cable.
27. Install the top cover and side covers.
1. If the display was replaced with a new one, configure the LUT. See Section 4.23 Top Cover
LUT Configuration on page 321.
page 377

11.5.12 System PC

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• ESD kit
• External optical drive
• None

Item: System PC
Quantity: 1
Item: USB PCB Assembly (See note)
Quantity: 1
Note: The Dragonfly XR240amx Generation 2 PC includes a USB PCB Assembly which allows access to
additional USB connections. If a system has more than 2 hardware options which require a USB
connection, the Dragonfly XR240amx Generation 2 PC is required.
11.5.12.2.4 Safety
• None

• Perform system backup if possible. See Section 3.1 Backing Up System Data on page 61.
11.5.12.3 Procedure
2. Refer to Figure 11-74. Disconnect all cables from the PC.


Item Description
2 Cooling fans
3 PC
Figure 11-74 DPS, Cooling Fans and PC
3. Remove the four mounting nuts securing the DPS, fans and PC.
4. Lift the fans and DPS, then remove the PC.
5. Place the new PC in position over the mounting studs.
6. Place the DPS and fans back in position and install all four mounting nuts (Torque to 7.9 N-m
(69.6 lb-in)).
7. Connect all cables to the PC.
For Dragonfly XR240amx Generation 1 (GEN 1) PC interconnects, see 9.4.1 PC 5765451
Connections on page 475.
For Dragonfly XR240amx Generation 2 (GEN 2) PC interconnects, see 9.4.2 PC 5765451-2
w/ USB Adapter Connections on page 476.
8. If replacing the XR240amx Generation 1 PC with a Generation 2 PC:
a. See Figure 11-75. Install the USB PCB assembly (Item 1) onto the bulkhead.
b. Connect the ribbon cable from J1 on the USB PCB (Item 2) to J20 (Item 3) on the back
(LVLE side) of the PC.
c. Fold and secure the ribbon cable per 11.5.13 USB PCB Ribbon Cable Folding and
Installation on page 742.

Item Description
1 USB PCB
2 Ribbon Cable
3 PC J20 Connection on back of PC
Figure 11-75 USB PCB Assembly
d. See Figure 11-76. Install the Ethernet Isolator. Connect 5557051-4 PC Isolator Ethernet
Cable (Item 1) from J1 (Item 2) on the PC to 5775966 Ethernet Connector Gigabit Isolator
(Item 3) Equipment end as shown.
e. Connect Ethernet cable 5557051 (Item 4) to Isolator Network end as shown in Figure 11-
76.


Item Description
1 PC Isolator Ethernet Cable (#5557051-4)
2 PC Port J1
3 Ethernet Connector Gigabit Isolator (#5775966)
4 Ethernet cable (#5557051)
5 Tie Wrap Holder (#5764789)
6 Cable Tie (#5394300-3)
Figure 11-76 Ethernet Isolator Installation
f. Install tie wrap holders (Item 5) and cable ties (Item 6) to secure Cable (Item 1), Isolator
(Item 3) and Cable (Item 4) as shown in Figure 11-76.
10. Remove LOTO from the system.
2. Perform a load from cold. See Section 3.2 Performing Load From Cold (LFC) on page 62.
3. Restore from backup. See Section 3.5 Restoring System Data on page 76.
4. Configure the system and AP. See Chapter 4 Configuration.
5. Register the detector(s). See 4.16.2.3 Detector Registration (Gen 2 only) on page 182.
- Display - see Table 2-12, PM Procedures, Top Cover & Touch Screen, on page 43

- Networking - See Operator Manual for details of networking configuration and testing
Remote servicing capability uses the PC hardware as an internal identifier. If the PC is replaced, a
conflicting identifier triggers a Quarantine condition in the GE Healthcare back office. A Quarantine
condition will result in the inability to perform any remote servicing. When configuration has been
completed after PC replacement, a Quarantine must be removed. Submit a workflow ticket against
Insite RSVP through MyTech for urgent support to remove Quarantine.
11.5.13 USB PCB Ribbon Cable Folding and Installation

The ribbon cable must be folded in a specific manner to prevent damage to the cable. Refer to the
instructions below for the procedure.
1. See figure below. Start with the ribbon cable connected to J20 (Item 1) on the back (LVLE side)
of the PC.

Figure 11-77 Ribbon Cable Routing and Folding at PC
2. Fold the cable 90° at the left fan as shown above (Item 2) so that it is clear of the fan port
(Item 3). The cable should lay flat against the top and side of the PC.
3. Fold the cable accordion-style across its width (M or W shape), with a fold approximately every
5 wires (figure below).

Figure 11-78 Folding at Clamp
4. Slide the cushioned clamp over the folded cable, ensuring that the cables are surrounded by
the insulation of the clamp.
5. See figure below. Remove the nut at the left fan.
6. Install the clamp on the stud and reinstall the nut.
Figure 11-79 Secured Cable Clamp
7. See figure below. Route the cable to the USB PCB (Item 1), making two more 90° folds as
shown below.

Figure 11-80 Ribbon Cable Routing and Folding at USB PCB
11.5.14 Detector Access Point (AP)

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 60

• None

Item: Wireless Access Point Assembly
Quantity: 1
Note 1: There are three different AP assembly part numbers: one each for the USA, Japan, and the
rest of the world.
11.5.14.2.4 Safety
• None

• Perform a system backup before replacing the AP. See 3.1.2 Performing a System Backup on
page 61.

11.5.14.3 Procedure
1. See Figure 11-81. Remove the detectors, grids and two grid separator panels (Item 1) from
the bin.
Item Description
1 Grid Separator Panels
Figure 11-81 Grid Separator Panels
2. Locate the AP panel inside the detector bin. See Figure 11-82.
Item Description
1 AP Cover
Figure 11-82 AP Cover Location
3. Refer to Figure 11-83. Remove four screws (Item 1) and only loosen two screws (Item 2). Do
not remove screws (Item 2).


Item Description
1 Remove these screws.
2 Loosen these screws. Do not remove.
Figure 11-83 AP Cover Screws
4. Slide panel up and off of the system. Be careful to not damage cables attached to AP.
5. Refer to Figure 11-84. Disconnect power cable (Item 1) and Ethernet cable (Item 2).
Item Description
1 Power Cable
2 Ethernet Cable
Figure 11-84 AP Cable Connections
6. Refer to Figure 11-85. Remove four bracket mounting screws (Item 1).


Item Description
1 AP Bracket Mounting Screws
Figure 11-85 AP Bracket Mounting Screws
7. Refer to Figure 11-86. Separate cover (Item 1) from mounting bracket (Item 2). Unfasten hook
& loop straps (Item 3).
Item Description
1 AP Cover
2 Mounting Bracket
3 Hook & Loop Straps
Figure 11-86 AP Cover and Mounting Bracket
8. Refer to Figure 11-87. Separate AP (Item 1) from mounting bracket (Item 2).

Item Description
1 AP
2 Mounting Bracket
Figure 11-87 AP and Mounting Bracket
9. Place new AP in mounting bracket, oriented as shown in Figure 11-87 and Figure 11-86.
Secure with hook & loop straps.
10. Attach cover to mounting bracket with screws (Figure 11-85).
11. Connect power cable and Ethernet cable to AP (Figure 11-84).
12. Position cover assembly in detector bin and secure with screws (Figure 11-83).
13. See Figure 11-10. Install the detectors, grids and two grid separator panels (Item 1) in the bin.
Note that the grid separator panels are tapered to fit in the bin slots.
Note: The system must go through a power cycle prior to performing the finalization steps.
1. Restore system backup. See 3.5.2 Restoring System Data on page 76.
2. Configure the country setting. See 4.5.1 Site Configuration on page 90.
3. Register the detector(s). See 4.16.2.3 Detector Registration (Gen 2 only) on page 182.
11.5.15 Whip Antenna

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 15


• None

Item: Whip antenna
Quantity: 1 or 2
11.5.15.2.4 Safety
• None

• Remove the left side cover. 11.1.3 Top Cover Removal on page 653.
11.5.15.3 Procedure
1. See Figure 11-88. Unscrew the whip antenna from the chassis-mounted connector.
Item Description
1 Whip antenna
Figure 11-88 Whip Antenna
2. Install the new whip antenna.

None

11.5.16 Detector Charge Cable Assembly

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• Cable ties

Item: Detector charge cable assembly
Quantity: 1 or 2
11.5.16.2.4 Safety
• None

• Left side cover removed. See 11.1.2 Side Cover Removal on page 653.
11.5.16.3 Procedure
1. Remove the two socket head cap screws and access cover from the bottom of the rear bin
using a 2.5mm hex wrench.
Note: DO NOT unscrew the charging bin shock absorbers to take off the bottom bin cover.
2. See Figure 11-89. Cut cable tie (Item 5) and remove screws (Item 4). Note: there are 4 screws
per floating bracket.


Item Description
1 10×12 detector docking cable with floating bracket
2 14×17 detector docking cable with floating bracket
3 Notch in kick plate
4 Socket head cap screws
5 Cable tie
Figure 11-89 Docking cable and floating bracket installation
3. See Figure 11-90. Disconnect cable from bin charging board.
Item Description
1 Detector docking cables to bin charging board
Figure 11-90 Detector docking cable connections
4. See Figure 11-91. Disassemble docking cable from the floating bracket by removing two each
cap screws and nuts. Assemble replacement detector docking cable to the floating bracket
with screws and nuts. Torque to 1.2 N-m (10.6 lb-in).

Item Description
1 Detector docking cable
2 Floating bracket assembly
3 Holes for fasteners
Figure 11-91 Docking cable and floating bracket
5. See Figure 11-89. Position floating bracket with detector cable in the rear bin assembly. Match
the color-coding on the cable to the label on the bin: O = Orange 10×12 (rear position), Y =
Yellow 14×17 (forward position). Cables must be routed around shock absorber and through
notch in kick plate as shown.
6. See Figure 11-89. Secure the floating bracket with four socket head cap screws (Item 4).
Torque to 2.3 N-m (20.3 lb-in).
7. Secure docking cables with cable tie (Item 5) as shown in Figure 11-89.
8. See Figure 11-90. Connect the detector docking cable (Item 1) to bin charging board. The
cables and board connections are color-coded for the 10×12" detector and the 14×17"
detector.
9. Install detector bin bottom cover with two socket head cap screws. Torque to 1.2 N-m (10.6
lb-in).
10. Install the sides cover.
1. Restore system to normal operation.
2. Insert a detector into the bin (with detector battery installed).
A message will appear: The small or large detector has been paired
3. Verify that the battery charge indicator is on.

11.5.17 Detector Bin Shock Absorber

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• None

Item: Detector bin shock absorber(s)
Quantity: 1 to 4
11.5.17.2.4 Safety
• None

• None
11.5.17.3 Procedure
1. Remove the 2 mounting screws and access cover from the bottom of the detector bin.
2. See Figure 11-92. Loosen jam nut (Item 2) using a 3/4-inch wrench.

Item Description
1 Shock absorber (4 used)
Jam nut
Figure 11-92 Detector bin (bottom view, shown removed from system)

3. Use a hex key wrench to remove the shock absorber(s) (counter-clockwise rotation).
4. Position jam nut on replacement shock absorber by measuring as shown in Figure 11-93. For
the 10×12 detector (rear slot), set the measurement to 5 cm. For the 14×17 detector (front
slot), set the measurement to 4.7cm.
Figure 11-93 Setting shock absorber length
5. See Figure 11-94. Place a 15mm deep-well socket on the mounting nut inside the rear bin.
Figure 11-94 Mounting nut inside rear bin
6. While holding the socket on the mounting nut, install the new shock absorber.
7. Snug the jam nut 1/4 turn past finger-tight.
8. From inside the detector bin, fully compress the shock absorber. Adjust the height of the shock
absorber until the top surface of the shock absorber is flush with (or slightly below) the bottom
of the detector bin.
9. Install detector bin bottom cover with two socket head cap screws. Torque to 1.2 N-m (10.6
lb-in).
10. Verify shock absorber adjustment.
11. Install the access cover.

13. Install the sides covers
1. Restore system to normal operation.
2. Insert a detector into the bin (with detector battery installed).
3. Verify that the battery charge indicator is on.
11.5.18 Beetle Djinn Set of Cables

The ’Beetle Djinn set of cables’ is a kit that consists of all the cables that inter-connect the Djinn
generator hardware assemblies.
The Djinn generator hardware assemblies are defined as:
• Main Auxiliary Module (15kW)
• Optional Auxiliary Module (30kW)
• HV Tank
• Power Module (mounted to the HV Tank)
Other control cables that interface the Djinn generator hardware to the rest of the system are not
included in this cable kit.

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 6 hrs

• Cable ties

Item: Beetle Djinn set of cables
Quantity: 1
11.5.18.2.4 Safety
• None

• Remove the side covers, front covers and rear bin. See 11.1.4 Front Cover Removal on
page 654 and 11.1.6 Rear Bin Replacement on page 661.

11.5.18.3 Procedure

current.
1. Some cables are accessed/replaced from outside the chassis; some from inside the chassis.
Refer to Table 11-1 for a summary of the cables and the associated generator hardware they
are connected to.
Table 11-1 Beetle Djinn Set of Cables
Item Description
The cables listed below are accessed from outside the Thorax assembly.The side covers and
front covers must be removed to provide access.
- Shielded cable assy, Main Aux Module (15kW) to Power Module
- Cable, Power Module Filament Board to Main Aux Module (15kW)
The cables listed below are accessed from inside the Thorax assembly.The side covers and rear
bin assembly must be removed to provide access. If present, the Optional Power Module (30kW)
must be unbolted and moved aside to access the connections on the rear of the HV Tank.
- Cable, Power Module Filament Board to HV Tank
- Flat ribbon cable, Power Module Control Board to HV Tank
- Cable, Power Module to HV Tank (very short)
- Cable, Power Module to HV Tank (short)
- Ground cable, Main Aux Module (15kW) to Opt Aux Module (30kW) - UNUSED
- Ground cable, Main Aux Module (15kW) to Power Module - UNUSED
- Ground cable, Power Module to HV Tank - UNUSED
2. Replace each cable individually, one at a time.

3. For each cable:
a. If present, remove cable clamps and/or cut cable ties that are constraining the cable.
b. Disconnect each end of the cable.
c. Remove the cable and set aside (do not mix old cables with new cables).
d. Install the new cable.
4. When all the cables have been replaced, re-install any cable clamps and replace any cable
ties that were previously removed.
- Filament - see 5.3.1 Setting Filament Drive Level on page 324


- kV accuracy - see 7.1.4.2 Testing kVp Accuracy on page 370
- mAs Accuracy - see 7.1.4.3 Testing mAs Accuracy on page 371
- Reproducability - see 7.1.4.4 Testing Reproducibility and Linearity of Exposure on
page 374
- Linearity - see 7.1.4.4 Testing Reproducibility and Linearity of Exposure on page 374
11.5.19 Djinn Power Module

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 6 hrs

• Silicone oil (GE P/N LNR8733)

Item: Djinn power module
Quantity: 1
11.5.19.2.4 Safety
• None

• Remove the front covers. See 11.1.4 Front Cover Removal on page 654.

11.5.19.3 Procedure

current.
1. Locate the power module / HV tank assembly. See Figure 11-95.

Note that the power module and HV tank are on a mounting bracket that must be removed as
an assembly.
Due to space limitations, the assembly must be removed through the rear of the unit.

Item Description
1 Aux module 15kW
2 Power module
3 HV Tank
4 Aux module 30kW
Figure 11-95 Djinn Generator Module Locations

2. Disconnect all cables from the front and rear of the power module / HV tank assembly.
(To remove the HV cables, the set screws (Figure 11-20) in the tightening rings must be
loosened.)
3. Remove the power module / HV tank assembly (4 screws). See Figure 11-96.
Item Description
1 Mounting screws for power module / HV tank assembly
Figure 11-96 Power Module / HV Tank Mounting Screws
4. Remove the power module from the assembly (16 screws).

5. Disconnect the cables between the power module and HV tank (4 cables).
6. Mount the new power module in the assembly.
7. Reconnect the cables between the power module and HV tank.

8. Install the assembly in the chassis.
Note: HV cables must be lubricated with silicone oil (GE P/N LNR8733) before insertion into the HV tank
cable wells. See Figure 11-97.
9. Connect all cables to the assembly.

(After installing the HV cables, tighten the set screws in the HV cable tightening rings.)
page 374
11.5.20 Djinn HV Tank

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 6 hrs

• Silicone oil (GE P/N LNR8733)


Item: Djinn HV Tank
Quantity: 1
11.5.20.2.4 Safety
• None

11.5.20.3 Procedure

current.
1. Locate the power module / HV tank assembly. See Figure 11-95.

Note that the power module and HV tank are on a mounting bracket that must be removed as
an assembly.
2. Disconnect all cables from the front and rear of the power module / HV tank assembly.
(To remove the HV cables, the set screws (Figure 11-20) in the tightening rings must be
loosened.)

3. Remove the power module / HV tank assembly (4 screws). See Figure 11-98. Due to space
limitations, the module must be removed from the rear of the unit.
Item Description
1 Mounting screws for power module / HV tank assembly
Figure 11-98 Power Module / HV Tank Mounting Screws
4. Remove the HV tank module from the assembly (8 screws).

5. Disconnect the cables between the power module and HV tank (4 cables).
6. Mount the new HV tank module in the assembly.
7. Reconnect the cables between the power module and HV tank.
8. Install the assembly in the chassis.
Note: HV cables must be lubricated with silicone oil (GE P/N LNR8733) before insertion into the HV tank
cable wells. See Figure 11-99.
9. Connect all cables to the assembly.

(After installing the HV cables, tighten the set screws in the HV cable tightening rings.)

page 374
11.5.21 Djinn 30kW Auxiliary Module

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• None

Item: Djinn auxiliary module
Quantity: 1
11.5.21.2.4 Safety
• None


11.5.21.3 Procedure

current.
1. Locate the module. See Figure 11-95.

2. Disconnect the cable (red/black wires) from the rear of the aux module 15kW.
3. Remove the old module (3 screws). See Figure 11-100.
Item Description
1 Aux module 30kW mounting screws (3 on front side of panel)
Figure 11-100 Aux Module 30kW Mounting Screws
4. Install the new module.

5. Connect the cable (red/black wires) to the rear of the aux module 15kW.
page 374

11.5.22 Drive Handle Assembly

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 45

• Cable ties

Item: Drive handle assembly
Quantity: 1
11.5.22.2.4 Safety
• None

• Remove the top cover. See 11.1.3 Top Cover Removal on page 653.

11.5.22.3 Procedure

1. See Figure 11-101. Disconnect the drive handle cables from the Locust board, J4 - Drive
Brake (Item 2) and J7 - Drive Handle (Item 1).
Item Description
1 J7 - Drive Handle connector
2 J4 - Drive Brake connector
Figure 11-101 Drive Handle Cables
2. Cut the cable ties holding the cables to the chassis.

3. See Figure 11-102. Remove the 12 mounting screws (Item 1) from the drive handle (Item 2).

Item Description
2 Drive handle
Figure 11-102 Drive Handle Assembly
4. Remove the old drive handle assembly. Guide the cable connectors through the access
opening in the chassis.
5. Install the new drive handle assembly. Guide the cable connectors through the access opening
in the chassis.
6. Connect the cables to the Locust board, J4 and J7.
7. Install new cable ties to hold the cables in place.
- Drive handle - see 5.8.1 Drive Handle Calibration on page 343

11.5.23 Mantis Power Supply

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• None

Item: Mantis power supply
Quantity: 1
11.5.23.2.4 Safety
• None


11.5.23.3 Procedure

current.
1. Locate the Mantis power supply. See Figure 11-103.
Item Description
1 Mantis power supply
Figure 11-103 Mantis Power Supply
2. Disconnect all cables (3 connections) from the power supply.

3. Remove the old power supply (4 nuts).
4. Install the new power supply (4 nuts, torque to 4.6 N-m (40.7 lb-in)).
5. Ensure that the spacer near to J3 is in good condition without burrs and fractures (figure
below).
Figure 11-104 Spacer near J3

6. Inspect and ensure J1, J2, and J3 connectors are in good condition.
7. Ensure the J3 connector has 2 lock washers in standoff position (figure below).
Figure 11-105 Lock washer
8. Cut and remove the cable tie from the spacer, ensuring that no physical damage is caused to
the spacer (figure below).
Figure 11-106 Cut cable tie from spacer
9. Position the spacer over J3 connector (figure below).
Figure 11-107 Spacer on J3 connector
10. Connect the cable 5557020 (Cable Assy- Mantis to Firefly) from the J3 connector to Firefly
board. Ensure the labeled end is attached to J3. See figures below.
Figure 11-108 Cable 5557020

Figure 11-109 Cable Label
Figure 11-110 Cable and Spacer installed correctly
11. Connect all cables to the power supply.


11.5.24 EMI Filter

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• None

Item: EMI filter
Quantity: 1
11.5.24.2.4 Safety
• None


11.5.24.3 Procedure

current.
1. Locate the EMI filter. See Figure 11-111.
Item Description
1 EMI filter
Figure 11-111 EMI Filter
2. Record the color and location of the wires (5) connected to the filter.
3. Disconnect the wires from the filter.
4. Remove the old filter (2 nuts/washers).
5. Install the new filter (2 nuts/washers, torque to 2.3 N-m (20.4 lb-in).

6. Connect all wires to the filter. See Figure 11-112.

Item Description
1 Ground wire (green/yellow)
2 Line wire (brown)
3 Neutral wire (blue)
Figure 11-112 EMI Filter Wiring
• Grounding - see 7.2.1 Ground Resistance Testing on page 378
• Leakage - see 7.2.2 Performing Leakage Current Testing on page 387

11.5.25 LVLE2

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• None

Item: LVLE2
Quantity: 1
11.5.25.2.4 Safety
• None


11.5.25.3 Procedure

current.
1. Locate the LVLE2 power supply. See Figure 11-113.
Item Description
1 System PC
2 LVLE2 (Low Voltage Low Energy) power supply
Figure 11-113 Assembly Identification - under top cover
2. Disconnect all cables (up to 8 connections, depending on configuration) from the LVLE2.
3. Remove the old LVLE2 (4 nuts).
4. Install the new LVLE2 (4 nuts, torque to 4.6 N-m (40.7 lb-in)).
5. Connect all cables to the LVLE2.
• X-ray - see Table 2-16, PM Procedures, X-ray, on page 45
• Light field buttons - see Table 2-15, PM Procedures, Collimator, on page 45

11.5.26 Power Cord Reel

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 60

• None

Item: Power cord reel
Quantity: 1
11.5.26.2.4 Safety
• None


11.5.26.3 Procedure

current.
2. Locate the power cord reel, ground stud, and AC fuse assembly. See Figure 11-114.
Item Description
1 Power cord reel
2 Chassis ground stud
3 AC fuse assembly
4 Plastic cable guide
Figure 11-114 Power Cord Reel Location
3. Dismount the AC fuse assembly (2 nuts) from the chassis.

4. Disconnect the cord reel wires from the AC fuse assembly (note the existing connections of
the wires).
5. Disconnect the cord reel ground wire from the ground stud (1 nut).
6. Dismount the plastic cable guide (2 screws).

7. Remove the cord reel (2 nuts).

8. Install the new cord reel.
9. Install the plastic cable guide.
10. Connect the ground wire to the ground stud.
11. Connect the cord reel wires to the AC fuse assembly.
12. If this is a 230VAC system, the cord replacement reel is shipped without a power plug. Perform
the following steps to install a power plug:
a. Remove the existing power plug from the old cord reel. If the power plug is damaged or
missing, obtain an appropriate hospital-grade plug as dictated by local regulations.
b. Connect the power plug to the cord reel wires as shown in Table 11-2 Power Plug
Connections.
Table 11-2 Power Plug Connections
Wire color Power plug connection

Brown (hot) Connect to the brass terminal
Blue (neutral) Connect to the silver terminal
Green / yellow (ground) Connect to the green terminal
- Grounding - see 7.2.1 Ground Resistance Testing on page 378
- Leakage - see 7.2.2 Performing Leakage Current Testing on page 387
11.5.27 AC Power Plug

Note: For sites that do not use a standard U.S. AC Plug, regional plugs are available as FRU. Order the
appropriate plug and proceed with replacement.

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• None


Item: AC power plug
Quantity: 1
11.5.27.2.4 Safety
• None

Electrical Power on page 28. Leave the AC Plug (E1) exposed.
11.5.27.3 Procedure

current.
1. Remove the existing power plug (Figure 11-115) from the power cord.
Figure 11-115 Power Plug
2. Install the new power plug as shown in Table 11-3 Power Plug Connections.
Table 11-3 Power Plug Connections
Wire color Power plug connection

Brown (line) Pin 1, 120/220VAC
Blue (neutral) Pin 2, 120 neutral (220 hot)
Green / yellow (ground) Pin 3, earth ground wire

3. Use an ohm-meter to verify the continuity of the power connections as follows:

a. See Figure 11-116. Each power wire will need to be pulled about 1/8" off of the terminal
to allow measurement.

Item Description
1 EMI filter - ground wire
2 EMI filter - line wire
3 EMI filter - neutral wire
4 Fuses F1 & F2
Figure 11-116 EMI Filter
b. Check continuity between the power plug ground pin and the ground terminal (Item 1 -
green/yellow wire) on the EMI filter.
Note: If there is no continuity on the line (brown) wire or the neutral (blue) wire, check fuses F1 and F2
(Item 4).
c. Check continuity between the power plug line pin and the line terminal (Item 2 - brown
wire) on the EMI filter.
d. Check continuity between the power plug neutral pin and the neutral terminal (Item 3 -
blue wire) on the EMI filter.
4. Fully seat the 3 wires on the EMI filter.
- Grounding - see 7.2.1 Ground Resistance Testing on page 378
- Leakage - see 7.2.2 Performing Leakage Current Testing on page 387

11.5.28 AC Fuse Holder

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 40

• None

Item: AC fuse holder
11.5.28.2.4 Safety
• None

• Remove the left side cover. See Side Cover Removal on page 653.

11.5.28.3 Procedure

current.
1. See Figure 11-117. Locate the fuse holder assembly (Item 1).

Item Description
1 Fuse holder assembly
2 Mounting screws
Figure 11-117 AC Fuse Holder Assembly
2. Remove the fuses from the holders for reuse later.

3. Remove the 2 screws (Item 2) and remove the fuse holder assembly from the chassis.

4. See Figure 11-118. Remove the 2 wires from the fuse holder (Item 2) that is being replaced.

Item Description
1 Fuse holder assembly
2 Fuse holders
3 Nut and washer
4 Wires from cord reel MUST connect to these terminals
Figure 11-118 AC Fuse Holders
5. Remove the nut and washer (Item 3) from the rear of the fuse holder.
6. Remove the old fuse holder and replace with the new fuse holder.
7. Install the washer and nut.

Wires from the cord reel MUST be connected to the center (rear) terminals on the fuse holders.
8. Connect the 2 wires to the fuse holder. The wire coming from the cord reel MUST be connected
to the center (rear) terminal (Item 4) on the fuse holder.
9. Install the fuse holder assembly on the chassis.
10. Install the fuses.
• Grounding - see 7.2.1 Ground Resistance Testing on page 378
• Leakage - see 7.2.2 Performing Leakage Current Testing on page 387
11.5.29 AC Fuses

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 10


• None

Item: AC fuse
Quantity: 1
11.5.29.2.4 Safety
• None

11.5.29.3 Procedure

current.

1. Locate the AC fuses. See Figure 11-119
) )
Item Description
F1 AC power fuse
F2 AC power fuse
Figure 11-119 AC Fuse Locations
2. To remove the fuse cap from the fuse holder, push in the cap and rotate 1/4 turn
counterclockwise.
3. Remove the old fuse from the cap.
4. Install the new fuse in the cap.
5. Install the fuse cap in the fuse holder.
- Charging - see Table 2-11, PM Procedures, Charging Circuit, on page 43)

11.5.30 Power Switch Assembly

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• Loctite Super Bonder 416 Gap Filling Inst Adhesive (46-220312P1)

Item: Power switch assembly 5778346
Quantity: 1
The Power Switch Assembly replacement part includes the following:
- Power Switch
- Elastomer Gasket
- LED Ring
- Pushbutton Cover
- Switch Assembly with plastic bulkhead nut
- Power Switch Cable complete with mate-n-lok connector
11.5.30.2.4 Safety
• None


11.5.30.3 Procedure

1. See Figure 11-120. Remove the 8 mountings screws (Item 3) from the Display Overlay Board.
Note the position of the grounding cable for re-installation.
2. Disconnect the mate-n-lok connector at the end of the power switch cable (Item 1).
3. Remove the 3 cable clamps (Item 2) from the power switch wires.
4. Lift and tilt the Overlay Board to expose the back of the power switch.

Item Description
1 Power switch connector
2 Cable clamp (3 used)
4 Overlay board assembly
5 Overlay board to Hornet board cable
6 Drive login cable
Figure 11-120 Top Cover Components
5. See Figure 11-121. Turn the threaded nut securing the power switch counterclockwise to
loosen and remove it.
Note: The threads have a factory applied adhesive that will need to be broken.

6. Remove the old Power Switch Assembly and install the new Power Switch Assembly passing
the power switch cable through the opening in the Overlay Board and securing it with the
threaded nut.
7. Reconnect the mate-n-lok connector and reinstall the three cable clamps.
8. Reinstall the Overlay Board assembly (8 screws). Ensure the ground wire is reconnected.
Item Description
1 Mounting nut
2 Power switch
Figure 11-121 Power Switch
Verify system powers on and off.

11.5.31 Overlay Board Assembly

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• None

Item: Overlay board assembly
Quantity: 1
11.5.31.2.4 Safety
• None

11.5.31.3 Procedure

This procedure has you remove the top cover from the unit.
1. See Figure 11-122. Remove the 8 mountings screws (Item 3) from the Display Overlay Board.
Note the position of the grounding cable for re-installation.
2. Disconnect the mate-n-lok connector (Item 1) at the end of the power switch cable.
3. Remove the 3 cable clamps (Item 2) from the power switch wires.
4. Remove the old Overlay Board and replace with the new Overlay Board. Pass the power
switch cable through the opening in the Overlay Board.
5. Reconnect the mate-n-lok connector and reinstall the three cable clamps to secure the power
switch cable.
6. Secure the Overlay Board assembly (8 screws). Ensure the ground wire is reconnected.


Item Description
1 Power switch connector
2 Cable clamp (3 used)
4 Overlay board assembly
Figure 11-122 Display Overlay Board
• Charging - see Table 2-11, PM Procedures, Charging Circuit, on page 43)

11.5.32 Tube Park Latch Assembly, Switch or Solenoid

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• 3/32" or 1/16" drift pin punch
• Hammer or drift pin clamping device (3" C-clamp)
• None

Item: Tube park latch assembly
Quantity: 1
Item: Tube park latch switch
Quantity: 1
Item: Tube park latch solenoid
Quantity: 1
11.5.32.2.4 Safety
• None


11.5.32.3 Procedure

current.
11.5.32.3.1 Tube Park Latch Assembly

1. See Figure 11-123. Disconnect the wiring harness connector (Item 1).
Item Description
1 Wiring harness connector
2 Mounting screws (4)
3 Tube park latch assembly
Figure 11-123 Tube Park Latch Assembly
2. Remove the 4 mounting bolts (Item 2) from the tube park latch assembly (Item 3).
3. Replace the old assembly with the new assembly.
4. Install and tighten the mounting bolts.
5. Connect the cable harness.

11.5.32.3.2 Tube Park Latch Switch

1. See Figure 11-124. Remove the 2 mounting screws (Item 1) from the switch (Item 2).
Item Description
1 Mounting screws
2 Switch
3 Spade connectors (3) for switch
Figure 11-124 Tube Park Latch Switch
2. Record the color and location of the wires connected to the switch.
3. Remove the spade connectors (Item 3) from the switch and remove the switch from the
assembly.
4. Connect the spade connectors to the new switch.
5. Install the switch into the assembly and tighten the mounting screws.

11.5.32.3.3 Tube Park Latch Solenoid

1. Remove the park latch assembly (see 11.5.32.3.1 Tube Park Latch Assembly on page 793).
Note: It is recommended that you take the assembly to a sturdy work bench as the procedure
can cause damage to customer surfaces.
2. See Figure 11-125. Remove the 2 mounting screws (Item 1) from the switch (Item 2).

Item Description
1 Switch mounting screws (2)
2 Switch
3 Pin
4 Latch
5 Nut and washer
6 Solenoid and wiring harness
7 Spade connectors (3) for switch
8 Wiring harness connector
Figure 11-125 Tube Park Latch Assembly
3. Remove the spade connectors (Item 6) from the switch.

4. Drive the upper pin (Item 3) out of the park latch assembly until the latch (Item 4) can be
removed. About 6.5 mm (0.25 in.) of the pin will remain in the latch assembly body (see
Figure 11-126, Item 1).

Item Description
1 Latch pin (about 6.5mm [0.25 in] remains inside latch assembly body)
2 Latch assembly body
Figure 11-126 Remove Latch Pin and Latch
5. Remove the latch (Figure 11-125, Item 4).

6. Remove the nut and washer (Figure 11-125, Item 5) from the solenoid (Figure 11-125, Item 6).
7. Record the color and location of the wires connected to the switch (Figure 11-125, Item 7).
8. Disconnect the wiring harness connector (Figure 11-125, Item 8).
9. Remove the solenoid assembly.
10. Connect the new solenoid to the wiring harness connector.
11. Install the solenoid in the assembly, then install the washer and nut.
12. Place the latch in the assembly. Use a small screwdriver to depress the latch spring during
installation. See Figure 11-127. When the latch spring is properly positioned, the free end of
the spring will be vertical (see Figure 11-128).

Item Description
1 Latch spring
2 Screwdriver
Figure 11-127 Depress spring during installation
Figure 11-128 Correct Latch Spring Orientation
13. Hold the latch in position and re-install the pin.

14. Verify that the latch operates under tension.
15. Connect the spade connectors to the switch.

16. Install the switch into the assembly and tighten the mounting screws. Take care to apply even
force, alternating between screws, so as not to crack/damage the switch.
17. Install the park latch assembly onto the system.
1. Perform the following mechanical alignment:
6.1.3 Column Rotational Detent Procedure on page 361,
- Drive (speed limited when tube not latched) - see Table 2-13, PM Procedures, Drive, on
page 43
- Drive (reverse-only when bumper switch is pressed) - see Table 2-13, PM Procedures,
Drive, on page 43
11.5.33 Digital Power Supply Assembly

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 20

• None

Item: Digital power supply assembly
Quantity: 1
11.5.33.2.4 Safety
• None

• Remove the side covers and top cover. See 11.1.3 Top Cover Removal on page 653.

11.5.33.3 Procedure
2. See Figure 11-129. Locate the power supply assembly (Item 1).
3. Disconnect the cables from the assembly.
4. Remove the mounting nuts at both ends of the assembly, then remove the old assembly.
5. Position new Detector Power Supply (DPS) 5589310 (item 1) over fans (items 2) and PC
(Item 3) as shown.

Item Description
2 Cooling fans
3 PC
Figure 11-129 DPS installation
6. Secure DPS with nuts (Torque to 7.9 N-m (69.9 lb-in).

7. Re-connect the cables.
10. Remove LOTO from the system.
1. Restore the system to normal operation.
2. Connect a tethered detector to the system and perform an exposure.
3. Verify that an image is created.
4. Insert an un-tethered detector into the bin (with detector battery installed).
5. Verify that when the detector is in the storage bin, the battery LED indicator is on.

11.5.34 Collimator Lamp Power Supply

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 20

• None

Item: Collimator lamp power supply
Quantity: 1
11.5.34.2.4 Safety
• None

• Remove the top cover. See 11.1.3 Top Cover Removal on page 653.
11.5.34.3 Procedure


1. Locate the circuit board under the top cover. See Figure 11-130.
Item Description
1 Collimator lamp power supply
2 Collimator lamp supply pot R3
Figure 11-130 Board Identification - under top cover

7. Install the side cover.
1. Perform the following adjustment:
- Adjust the collimator lamp supply potentiometer R3 so that the voltage at the collimator
lamp is 20.0 - 22.0 VDC.
2. Perform the following HHS tests:
- Light field intensity - see 7.1.3.1 Testing Light Intensity on page 366
11.5.35 Main Circuit Breaker and Cable Assembly

Required persons: 1

Timing (min): 30

• None

Item: Main circuit breaker and cable assembly
Quantity: 1
11.5.35.2.4 Safety
• None


11.5.35.3 Procedure

current.
1. Locate the battery power connector J5 on the Cricket battery board at the rear of the unit. See
Figure 11-131.
Item Description
1 Battery power connector J5
Figure 11-131 Battery Power Connector J5
2. Loosen the two mounting screws and remove the plug from J5 (Breaker I/F) connector.

3. Locate the main circuit breaker and the breaker I/F cable plug (J10) on the Firefly charger
board. See Figure 11-132.

-
Item Description
1 Main circuit breaker
J10 Breaker I/F connector on FireFly charger board
Figure 11-132 Main Circuit Breaker Trip - J10
4. Disconnect the cable at J10 on the Firefly charger board.

5. Remove the main circuit breaker (4 screws) and cable assembly. See Figure 11-133.
Item Description
1 Main circuit breaker
Figure 11-133 Main Circuit Breaker
6. Install the new circuit breaker.

7. Connect the small cable to J10 on the Firefly charger board.
8. Route the power cable (2 heavy red wires) through the opening in the frame and over to
connector J5 on the Cricket battery board.
9. Plug the connector into J5 and tighten the mounting screws.
11. Install front covers.
2. Verify that the system powers up.

11.5.36 Front Bin and Inner Front Bin

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• None

Item: Front bin
Quantity: 1
or
Item: Inner front bin
Quantity: 1
11.5.36.2.4 Safety
• None


11.5.36.3 Procedure
1. See Figure 11-134. Remove the four mounting screws (Item 1) to separate the front bin (Item
2) from the inner front bin (Item 3).

Item Description
1 Mounting screws
2 Front bin
3 Inner front bin
4 Wipes hold down support
5 Filler blank
Figure 11-134 Front Bin Assembly
2. Replace the old part (front bin or inner front bin) with the new part and re-assemble the
components. To prevent stripping out the wipes hold down support (Item 4) and filler blank
(Item 5) holes, do not over tighten the screws.
3. Install the front bin assembly.
None

11.5.37 Handswitch
11.5.37.1.1 Personnel Requirements

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 10

• None
11.5.37.1.4 Parts
Item: Handswitch
Quantity: 1
11.5.37.2 Safety
• None

• None.
11.5.37.4 Procedure
1. Refer to Figure 11-135. Remove the mounting screw (Item 5).


Number Description
1 Handswitch
2 Handswitch cradle
3 Handswitch connector
4 Strain relief
5 Mounting screw
6 Storage compartment door
Figure 11-135 Handswitch Installation
2. Disconnect the handswitch connector (Item 3) on the handswitch cable from the port on the
system and remove the old handswitch.
3. Place new handswitch (Item 1) in cradle (Item 2).
4. Attach the handswitch connector (Item 3) on the handswitch cable to the port on the system.
5. Secure the strain relief (Item 4) to the system with the screw (Item 5). Position as shown to
prevent interference with opening/closing of the storage compartment (Item 6).
• Perform the following functional checks:
Section 11.6 Column, Horizontal Arm, X-ray Tube, Collimator

11.6.1 Engaging Vertical Lock

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 5

• None

Item: None
Quantity: None
11.6.1.2.4 Safety


11.6.1.3 Procedure
1. See Figure 11-136. Remove the mounting screws (Item 3) and top cover (Item 2) at the top of
the vertical column (Item 3).
Item Description
2 Column top cover
3 Column
Figure 11-136 Column Top Cover
2. Position the horizontal arm to a convenient working position.

3. Lock the vertical carriage:
a. The vertical lock can engage in multiple positions (approximately 18 cm (7 in.) apart)
throughout the vertical range of travel.
b. See Figure 11-137. At the top of the column, rotate the brass knob (Item 1) 90 degrees
until it lines up with, and slightly drops into, the locking notch (Item 2).
c. Slowly move the horizontal arm up/down until the spring-loaded locking pin clicks into the
locking hole (Item 3) in the side of the scroll (Item 4).
d. Verify that the locking knob is fully seated in the locking notch.
e. Verify that movement of the vertical carriage has now been locked.
Page 810 Section 11.6 Column, Horizontal Arm, X-ray Tube, Collimator
Item Description
1 Locking knob (shown in the unlocked position)
2 Locking notch
3 Locking holes (2) in side of scroll
4 Cable scroll
Figure 11-137 Column Locking Mechanism
4. To release the vertical lock, pull back on the locking knob until it clears the locking notch. It
may be necessary to provide slight up/down pressure on the horizontal arm to release the lock.
5. Rotate the locking knob 90 degrees and release. In the unlocked position, the knob should
appear as shown in Figure 11-138. Verify that the vertical carriage can freely move up/down.
Figure 11-138 Column Vertical Lock in Normal (Unlocked) Position
6. Install the column top cover.


None required.
11.6.2 Column Replacement

Required persons: 2
Timing (min): 180

• 3mm T-handle hex wrench
• 6 dozen cable ties

Item: Column
Quantity: 1
11.6.2.2.4 Safety

• Remove the tablet holder assembly, if installed. See 11.6.17 Tablet Holder Assembly on
page 876.
• Remove the secondary monitor and mounting bracket, if installed. See 4.18.6 Secondary
Monitor Installation, Lower Position (Gen 2 only) on page 249 or 4.18.7 Secondary Monitor
Installation, Upper Position (Gen 2 only) on page 264.
• Remove the column skirt covers. See 11.1.7 Column Skirt Cover Removal on page 664.
11.6.2.3 Procedure
Note: The carriage safety lock system is designed to limit downward motion of the horizontal arm / tube
assembly should an event occur where there is an imbalance in the counterweight system. In this
situation the carriage safety lock will engage to prevent the horizontal arm / tube assembly from
falling downward. However the horizontal arm / tube assembly can be ratcheted upwards when the
carriage safety lock is engaged.
Always be certain of the cause of the carriage safety lock engagement before disengaging the
carriage safety lock. If the carriage safety lock has engaged due to a problem in the counterweight
system it is critical to resolve that problem before disengaging the carriage safety lock.
When performing the column replacement procedure it is possible that the carriage safety lock may
become engaged if the carriage assembly is lifted upwards while the column vertical lock is
engaged. This is the only situation where the procedure below should be applied.
If the carriage safety lock becomes engaged while performing this procedure, use the following
steps to disengage it:
a. Ensure that the horizontal arm, tube, and collimator are installed and the vertical lock is
engaged. See 11.6.1 Engaging Vertical Lock on page 809.
b. Remove the 4 screws and carriage cover plate. See Figure 11-139.
Figure 11-139 Carriage Cover Plate
c. With one person lifting up slightly on the horizontal arm, have the other person pry the
carriage safety lock upwards with a large flat blade screwdriver. See Figure 11-140.

Figure 11-140 Release Safety Lock
d. Once the carriage safety lock is disengaged, slowly lower the horizontal arm until the steel
cable is supporting the weight.
e. Install the carriage cover plate and 4 screws.
f. Disengage the vertical lock.
1. Lock the vertical carriage. See 11.6.1 Engaging Vertical Lock on page 809.
2. Remove the 4 fasteners and the carriage cover plate from the carriage. See Figure 11-141.
Save these parts to use on the new carriage.
Figure 11-141 Carriage Cover Plate
3. Using caution, as these parts are under tension from the springs, remove both spring cap
screws. The hardware on these cap screws is very easy to fall off the cap screw and drop down
into the column. It is best to use a T-handle hex wrench for this task; hex wrenches with a ball
end will not work well. Note the order in which the hardware is placed on the cap screws. See
Figure 11-142.
Figure 11-142 Spring Cap Screws
4. Remove the cap screws, collars, and washers from the old carriage. Save these parts to use
on the new carriage.
5. Mark the location of existing cables ties and then remove cable ties as necessary to free the
column of any cable restraints or obstructions.
Note: ’Temporary’ cable ties can be used to mark the location of the old ties; they also help to hold the
relative position of the cables to each other when the old ties are removed. These ties are temporary
and will be removed during reassembly.
6. Remove the collimator. See 11.6.9.1 Collimator Replacement on page 848.

7. Remove the X-ray tube. See 11.6.8 X-ray tube on page 844.
8. Remove the horizontal arm. See 11.6.3 Horizontal Arm Assembly on page 821.
9. See Figure 11-143. Remove the cable bracket (Item 1) from the side of the column.
Item Description
1 Column cable bracket
2 Column
Figure 11-143 Column Cable Bracket
10. Remove the front bin. See 11.1.5 Front Bin Removal.
11. Remove the bottom half of the cable clamp. See Figure 11-144.
Figure 11-144 Cable Clamp (bottom half)
12. Remove the cable labelled "TO COL BULKHEAD" from the main bulkhead (J2 and ground).
See Figure 11-145.
*1'
-
Figure 11-145 Remove J2 and Ground
13. See Figure 11-146. Use a large screwdriver at the base of the vertical column to move the
spring-loaded column rotational detent arm (Item 1) toward the front of the unit. From
underneath the base, insert a 5/32" (4 mm) hex key into the hole in the cover (Item 2) to hold
the rotational detent arm away from the column.

Item Description
1 Spring-loaded column rotational detent arm
2 Hole to lock column rotational detent arm
Figure 11-146 Release Column Rotational Detent

14. See Figure 11-147. Rotate the column to obtain access to the column bolt (Item1), then
remove the bolt.
Item Description
1 Column mounting bolt
2 Column
Figure 11-147 Column Mounting Bolt
15. Using two people, lift the column off of the chassis and set aside.
16. Using two people, lift the new column into position on the chassis and install the column
mounting bolt. Torque to 90 N-m (66.4 lb-ft) - no thread locker is used.
17. Remove the hex key that was used to hold the rotational detent arm.
18. Install the cable bracket onto the column.
19. Install the horizontal arm.
20. Install the X-ray tube. See Figure 11-23, Figure 11-24 and Figure 11-25 for cable routing at the
rear of the X-ray tube.
21. Install the collimator.
22. Install the new cable labeled "TO COL BULKHEAD" to the main bulkhead (J2 and ground).
23. Install the bottom portion of the cable clamp.
24. Install cable brackets and cable ties.
25. On the new carriage, install the hardware that was removed from the old carriage in step 4.
Using a 3mm T-handle hex wrench (ball end hex wrench will not work), carefully pull the
assembled hardware upwards and towards the threaded hole. Get the cap screw edge into the
threaded hole then pry the cap screw up and screw it in. Torque to 2.3 N-m (20.4 lb-in). See
Figure 11-148, Figure 11-149 & Figure 11-150.
Figure 11-148
Figure 11-149

7RUTXHWR1POELQ
Figure 11-150
26. Install the carriage cover plate and screws.
27. Unlock the vertical carriage and install the column top cover.
28. Install the front bin.
29. Install the column skirt covers.
33. Re-install the secondary monitor and mounting bracket, if required. See 4.18.6 Secondary
Monitor Installation, Lower Position (Gen 2 only) on page 249 or 4.18.7 Secondary Monitor
Installation, Upper Position (Gen 2 only) on page 264.
page 356.
page 44
4. Perform QAP - refer to the Optima XR240amx Installation Manual, Chapter 6 - Detector checks
and QAP
11.6.3 Horizontal Arm Assembly

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 120

• Loctite 242 (GE part# 46-170686P2)
• Loctite 271 (GE part# 46-170684P1)
• HV Tube Grease (GE part#46-125224P3, Silicon Grease)
• Cable ties

Item: Horizontal arm assembly
Quantity: 1
11.6.3.2.4 Safety

11.6.3.3 Procedure
1. Remove the zip ties and unzip/remove the cable cover.
3. Remove the tube covers. See 11.1.8 Tube Head Cover Removal on page 666.
4. Lightly mark the positions of all cable clamps and cable ties on the side of the existing cables,
then cut and remove the cable ties.
5. See Figure 11-151. Remove the cable clamp (Item 1) from the side of the horizontal arm (Item
2).

Item Description
1 Horizontal arm cable bracket
2 Horizontal arm
Figure 11-151 Horizontal Arm Cable Bracket
6. See Figure 11-152. Remove the three tube yoke mounting screws (Item 1) from the horizontal
arm (Item 2).

Item Description
1 Tube yoke mounting screws (3 used)
2 Horizontal arm
3 X-ray tube/yoke assembly
Figure 11-152 X-ray Tube Mount
7. Tip the front of the X-ray tube assembly upward and slide the assembly out of the horizontal
arm. Set the assembly on the work surface.

8. See Figure 11-153. Remove the two mounting screws (Item 1) and the mounting block (Item
2) from the horizontal arm (Item 3).

Item Description
1 Mounting screws
2 Mounting block
3 Horizontal arm
4 Vertical carriage
Figure 11-153 Horizontal Arm
9. Tip the front of the horizontal arm upward and lift the arm off of the vertical carriage (Item 4).
Set the old horizontal arm aside on the work surface.
10. Install the new horizontal arm, mounting block and mounting screws. Apply thread locker
Loctite 242 and torque mounting screws (Item 1) to 7.9 N-m (69.9 lb-in).
11. See Figure 11-152. Install the X-ray tube and yoke assembly. Apply thread locker Loctite 271
and torque the 3 fasteners as follows;
- Single top fastener = 26.8 N-m (19.8 lb-ft)
- Two bottom fasteners = 13.3 N-m (117.7 lb-in)
12. Install the cable bracket to the side of the horizontal arm. Route the cables and apply cable ties
as shown in Figure 11-23, Figure 11-24 and Figure 11-25.
13. Install new cable ties on the remainder of the cable drape.
14. Install the tube covers.
15. Install the collimator.
16. Unlock the vertical carriage.

page 356.
page 44
4. Perform QAP - refer to the Installation Manual, Chapter 6 - Detector checks and QAP
11.6.4 Horizontal Arm Brake Cable Assembly with Track

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• Cable ties

Item: Horizontal arm brake cable assembly with track
Quantity: 1

11.6.4.2.4 Safety

• Remove the side covers, front covers and front bin. See 11.1.5 Front Bin Removal on
page 658.
11.6.4.3 Procedure
1. See Figure 11-154. Disconnect the horizontal arm brake cable from the Thorax bulkhead (J1).
-
Figure 11-154 Horizontal Arm Brake Cable - Thorax Bulkhead J1
Item Description
4. Follow the horizontal arm brake cable back through the cable drape. At each existing cable tie,
mark the location of the cable tie on an adjacent cable, then cut and remove the cable tie.
5. Position the horizontal arm to a convenient work position, then lock the vertical carriage. See
11.6.1 Engaging Vertical Lock on page 809.
6. See Figure 11-157. Remove the bushing (Item 2) from the horizontal arm.
7. Remove the two bracket mounting screws (Item 3) from the bottom of the horizontal arm.
8. Adjust the horizontal arm extension so that the cable mounting screws (Item 5) line up with the
access opening (Item 4). Remove the two screws.


Item Description
1 Horizontal arm brake cable
2 Bushing
3 Bracket mounting screws
4 Access opening
5 Cable mounting screws
Figure 11-157 Horizontal Arm Brake Cable
9. See Figure 11-158. Inside the horizontal arm, disconnect the cable from the plug (Item 1).
Item Description
1 Horizontal arm brake cable plug
Figure 11-158 Horizontal Arm Brake Cable Plug
10. Remove the old horizontal arm cable.

11. Route the new cable through the opening in the side of the horizontal arm.
12. Line up the mounting bracket and install the two screws (see Figure 11-157 Item 3, torque to
1.6 N-m (14.2 lb-in)).
13. Inside the horizontal arm, connect the cable to the plug (see Figure 11-158 Item 1).
14. Adjust the horizontal arm extension so that the cable mounting screw bracket (see Figure 11-
157 Item 5) lines up with the access opening (see Figure 11-157 Item 4). Install the two screws
(Torque to 1.6 N-m (14.2 lb-in)).
15. Install the bushing (see Figure 11-157 Item 2) in the side of the horizontal arm.
16. Route the horizontal arm brake cable back through the cable drape to the Thorax bulkhead,
attaching cable ties at the marks placed in Step 4 above.
17. Arrange the cable bundle as shown in Figure 11-159, use a cable tie to maintain cable
positions.
clamp.

1 2
4 3
Item Description
1 DAP cable
2 Wireless cable
21. Plug the horizontal arm brake cable into J1 on the Thorax bulkhead.

• Tube column and arm - see Table 2-14, PM Procedures, Tube Column and Arm, on page 44
11.6.5 Tube Mount - Detent Side (Cathode Side)

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 120

• Loctite 242 (GE part# 46-170686P2)
• Loctite 271 (GE part# 46-170684P1)
• Cable ties

Item: Tube mount - detent side (cathode side) (See Notes 1 & 2)
Quantity: 1
Note 1: A newer version of this part has been introduced. It is not backward-compatible with the
original version. If replacing the original version, you must replace BOTH sides with the newer
version. The newer version is physically longer. Mixing old and new versions results in tube
attachment mis-alignment. See Figure 11-160 for identification of mounts.
Note 2: The yolk mounting fasteners for the new version are longer than the original version. These
fasteners are provided with the new version replacement part and MUST be used.

Item Description
1 A thickness step in this location identifies a newer version tube mount
Figure 11-160 Tube Mount Identification
11.6.5.2.4 Safety

• Remove the collimator. See 11.6.9 Collimator on page 848.
• Remove the tube covers. See 11.1.8 Tube Head Cover Removal on page 666.
11.6.5.3 Procedure
1. Position the unit next to a work surface that can safely support the X-ray tube/yoke assembly.
4. Remove the HV cables from the X-ray tube wells. Protect the HV cable ends to prevent
damage.
5. Disconnect the rotor cable from the generator J6 connector, and free the rotor cable from the
cable drape marking the location of the cable ties.
arm (Item 2).

Item Description
2 Horizontal arm

8. See Figure 11-162. Remove the four end cap mounting screws (Item 1) from the cathode end
cap (Item 2).

6HH1RWH
Note 1: Do NOT loosen or disturb the screws in this location. These are non-
serviceable items and require specialized fixtures for proper assembly. This
applies to both the cathode and anode sides.
Item Description
1 End cap mounting screws (4 used on each end cap)
2 Cathode end cap and tube mount
3 Anode end cap and tube mount
4 X-ray tube
5 Yoke
6 Tube mount screws (4 used on each side)
9. Remove the four tube mount screws (Item 6) from the yoke (Item 5).
10. Remove the cathode end cap / tube mount assembly from the X-ray tube (Item 4).
11. Install the new end cap / tube mount assembly onto the X-ray tube.
12. See Figure 11-162. Install and tighten the four tube mount screws (Item 6) (apply thread locker
Loctite 242 and torque to 13.2 N-m (116.8 lb-in) and the four end cap screws (Item 1) (apply
thread locker Loctite 271 and torque to 2.5 N-m (22.1 lb-in).
13. Tip the front of the X-ray tube assembly upward and slide the assembly into the horizontal arm.
14. Install the X-ray tube and yoke assembly. Apply thread locker Loctite 271 and torque the 3
fasteners as follows;
15. Route and connect the rotor cable to the generator.
17. Install the collimator. Route and connect the collimator cable to the Thorax bulkhead J4 and
J5 connectors and chassis ground.
18. Insert the HV cables into the X-ray tube HV wells and tighten the mounting rings. Make sure
that the cable markings (Tube Anode or Tube Cathode) match up with the X-ray tube marking
(Anode or Cathode). See Figure 11-23, Figure 11-24 and Figure 11-25 for cable routing at the
rear of the X-ray tube, if necessary.
19. Replace the cable ties and secure the cable drape.

page 44
11.6.6 Tube Mount - Friction Side (Anode Side)

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 120


• Cable ties
• Loctite 242 (GE part# 46-170686P2)
• Loctite 271 (GE part# 46-170684P1)

Item: Tube mount - friction side (anode side) (See Note 1)
Quantity: 1
Note 1: A newer version of this part has been introduced. It is not backward-compatible with the
original version. If replacing the original version, you must replace BOTH sides with the newer
version. The newer version is physically longer. Mixing old and new versions results in tube
attachment mis-alignment. See Figure 11-163 for identification of mounts.
Note 2: The yolk mounting fasteners for the new version are longer than the original version. These
fasteners are provided with the new version replacement part and MUST be used.
Item Description
1 A thickness step in this location identifies a newer version tube mount
Figure 11-163 Tube Mount Identification
11.6.6.2.4 Safety

11.6.6.3 Procedure
4. Remove the HV cables from the X-ray tube wells. Protect the HV cables to prevent damage.
arm (Item 2).

Item Description
2 Horizontal arm

8. See Figure 11-165. Remove the four end cap mounting screws (Item 1) from the anode end
cap (Item 3).

6HH1RWH
Item Description
4 X-ray tube
5 Yoke
9. Remove the four tube mount screws (Item 6) from the yoke (Item 5).
10. Remove the anode end cap / tube mount assembly from the X-ray tube (Item 4).
11. Install the new end cap / tube mount assembly onto the X-ray tube.
12. See Figure 11-165. Install and tighten the four tube mount screws (Item 6) (apply thread locker
Loctite 242 and torque to 13.2 N-m (116.8 lb-in) and the four end cap screws (Item 1) (apply
thread locker Loctite 271 and torque to 2.5 N-m (22.1 lb-in).

page 44
11.6.7 Tube Yoke Assembly

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 120


• Loctite 242 (GE part# 46-170686P2)
• Loctite 271 (GE part# 46-170684P1)
• Cable ties

Item: Tube yoke assembly
Quantity: 1
11.6.7.2.4 Safety

11.6.7.3 Procedure
arm (Item 2).

Item Description
2 Horizontal arm

8. See Figure 11-167. Remove the eight tube mount screws (Item 6) from the yoke (Item 5).

6HH1RWH
Item Description
4 X-ray tube
5 Yoke
9. See Figure 11-168. Remove the mounting screws (Item 1) and cable bracket (Item 2) from the
old yoke (Item 3) and install them on the new yoke. Torque to 0.8 N-m (7.1 lb-in) - no thread
locker is used.
Item Description
1 Mounting screws
2 Cable bracket
3 Yoke
Figure 11-168 Yoke
10. See Figure 11-167. Install the new yoke. Install and tighten the eight tube mount screws
(Item 6) (apply thread locker Loctite 242 and torque to 13.2 N-m (116.8 lb-in).
12. See Figure 11-166. Install the X-ray tube and yoke assembly. Apply thread locker Loctite 271
and torque the 3 fasteners (Item 1) as follows:


11.6.8 X-ray tube

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 6 hrs

• Loctite 242 (GE part# 46-170686P2)
• Loctite 271 (GE part# 46-170684P1)

Item: X-ray tube
Quantity: 1
11.6.8.2.4 Safety

11.6.8.3 Procedure
arm (Item 2).

Item Description
2 Horizontal arm

8. See Figure 11-170. Remove the four end cap mounting screws (Item 1) from the cathode end
cap (Item 2).

6HH1RWH
Item Description
4 X-ray tube
5 Yoke
9. Remove the four cathode-side tube mount screws (Item 6) from the yoke (Item 5).
10. Remove the cathode end cap / tube mount assembly from the X-ray tube (Item 4).
11. Remove the four end cap mounting screws (Item 1) from the anode end cap (Item 3).
12. Remove the anode end cap / tube mount / yoke assembly from the X-ray tube (Item 4).
13. Use a HV spanner wrench (see Figure 11-171) to loosen and remove the HV cable tightening
rings, then remove the cables from the HV wells.
Figure 11-171 HV Cable Spanner Wrench
14. Disconnect the stator wires from the old X-ray tube.
15. Connect the stator wires to the new X-ray tube.
Note: HV cables must be lubricated with silicone grease (GE P/N 46-125224P3) before insertion into the
X-ray tube HV wells. The grease is shipped with the X-ray tube.
16. Insert the HV cables into the new X-ray tube HV wells and tighten the mounting rings. Make
sure that the cable markings (Tube Anode or Tube Cathode) match up with the X-ray tube
marking (Anode or Cathode). See Figure 11-23, Figure 11-24 and Figure 11-25 for cable
routing at the rear of the X-ray tube, if necessary.
17. See Figure 11-170. Install the anode end cap / tube mount assembly on the X-ray tube. Install
and tighten the four end cap mounting screws (Item 1) (apply thread locker Loctite 271 and
torque to 2.5 N-m (22.1 lb-in)) and the four tube mount screws (Item 6) (apply thread locker
Loctite 242 and torque to 13.2 N-m (116.8 lb-in).
18. See Figure 11-170. Install the cathode end cap / tube mount assembly on the X-ray tube.
Install and tighten the four end cap mounting screws (Item 1) (apply thread locker Loctite 271
and torque to 2.5 N-m (22.1 lb-in) and the four tube mount screws (Item 6) (apply thread locker
Loctite 242 and torque to 13.2 N-m (116.8 lb-in).


- Half-value layer - see Table 7-11 Beam Quality Data (Half Value Layer) on page 376
page 374
11.6.9 Collimator
11.6.9.1 Collimator Replacement
11.6.9.1.1 Personnel Requirements

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 60
11.6.9.1.2 Preliminary Requirements

• One Hexagon Wrench for M3 screws
• Loctite 242 (GE part# 46-170686P2)
• Cable ties

Item: Collimator
Quantity: 1
11.6.9.1.6 Safety
• Lead Locations. See Figure 11-172.

Item Description
1 Lead cone
2 Filter
3 Rear cover - lead plate pasted inside
Figure 11-172 Lead Locations

• Remove the side covers, front covers and front bin. See 11.1.5 Front Bin Removal on
page 658.

11.6.9.1.8 Procedure
See Figure 11-173. Collimator dismounting consists of disconnecting the collimator cable, opening
the back covers of the suspending lock sets, unlocking the suspending lock sets, pulling out the
rotation lock finger and lifting the collimator off of the interface ring.
Item Description
1 Handle
2 SID tape
3 Rotation lock handle
4 Suspending lock set (3 used)
5 Knob
6 Lamp switch
Figure 11-173 Installation and Removal
2. See Figure 11-174. Disconnect the collimator cable from the Thorax bulkhead (J4, J5 and
ground).
-
-
*1'
Figure 11-174 Collimator Cable - Thorax Bulkhead J4, J5, Gnd
Item Description

5. Follow the collimator cable back through the cable drape. At each existing cable tie, mark the
location of the cable tie on an adjacent cable, then cut and remove the cable tie.
6. Rotate the X-ray tube/collimator assembly 180 degrees (the bottom of the collimator faces
upward).
7. See Figure 11-177. Use a hex wrench to remove the screws and the back cover (Item 1) of the
suspending lock set. Repeat this step on all three back covers.

Item Description
1 Suspending lock set cover
2 Suspending lock finger
3 X-ray tube
4 Collimator
Figure 11-177 Suspending Lock
8. See Figure 11-178. Pull out the three suspending lock fingers (Item 1). Use a small hex key
(Item 2) to hook the center of the lock finger screw and pull it straight outward until it locks into
the extended position.
Item Description
1 Suspending lock finger
2 Hex key
Figure 11-178 Suspending Lock
9. Rotate the handle of the rotation lock set counterclockwise until the lock finger cannot be
rotated any more.
LEAD HAZARD
• Do not touch lead cone or filter by hand without gloves.
• Do not let the lead cone touch anything during the collimator installation and removal process.
10. Carefully lift the old collimator off of the X-ray tube and set it aside.
11. On the new collimator:
a. Close the collimator blades.
b. Rotate the handle of the rotation lock set counterclockwise until the lock finger cannot be
rotated any more.
c. Open the suspending lock set covers and pull out the three lock fingers until they lock in
the extended position
d. Lift the collimator by holding the handle, then rotate the collimator 180 degrees so that the
lead cone is facing downward and its axis is perpendicular to tube flange’s mounting
surface.
12. Put the collimator on the tube. Make sure the lead cone does not touch the tube flange during
this step.
13. Press the three buttons on the top of the three suspending lock sets to let the lock fingers pop
out.

DROP HAZARD
Make sure there is no RED color VISIBLE AT the back of each suspending lock set after pressing
THE suspending lock buttons.
14. Install the three suspending lock set covers and six screws with thread locker (Loctite 242).
The collimator can be rotated so that the suspending lock set is oriented towards the rear of
the X-ray tube; this will make it easier to install the screws and covers.
15. Turn the handle of the rotation lock set until the black line on the handle shaft aligns to the back
surface of the rotation lock set.
16. Check the installation thoroughly for correct and safe mounting.
17. Rotate the X-ray tube/collimator assembly back to the normal position.
18. Mark the collimator cable 400 mm (~16 in.) from the body of the collimator. Position the cable
so the mark lines up with the cable support bracket and install a cable tie.
19. Route the collimator back through the cable drape to the Thorax bulkhead, attaching cable ties
at the marks placed in Step 5 above.
20. Plug the collimator cable into J4 and J5 on the Thorax bulkhead and attach the ground wire to
the chassis.
21. Arrange the cable bundle as shown in Figure 11-179, use a cable tie to maintain cable
positions.
clamp.
C
1 2
4 3
Item Description
1 DAP cable
2 Wireless cable
30. Package the old collimator for return.
- Lamp (if HHS tests fail) - see 11.6.14 Collimator Lamp on page 865
- Field size indicator accuracy - see 7.1.3.3 Testing Field Size Indicator Accuracy on
page 369 or 7.1.3.3 Testing Field Size Indicator Accuracy on page 369
- Half-value layer - see 7.1.5.1 Measuring Half Value Layer (HVL) on page 375

11.6.10 Dose Area Product (DAP) meter

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 10

• None

Item: DAP meter
Quantity: 1
11.6.10.2.4 Safety
• None

11.6.10.3 Procedure
1. See Figure 11-180. Disconnect the DAP cable connector (Item 1).

Item Description
1 DAP cable connector
2 Latch
3 DAP meter
Figure 11-180 DAP
2. Release the latch (Item 2) and slide the DAP (Item 3) out of the collimator rails.
3. Install the new DAP into the collimator rails and push backwards until the latch engages.
4. Connect the DAP cable.
NOTICE: The system must be reset using the power button each time the DAP meter is
disconnected and then reconnected with system power on. The DAP meter does not support "Hot
Swapping". Failure to reset the system in this occurrence can result in an inaccurate dose value
reported by the DAP meter.
1. Perform DAP calibration - see 5.8.3 DAP Calibration on page 344.
- X-ray - Dose report - see Table 2-16, PM Procedures, X-ray, on page 45
- Light field intensity - see 7.1.3.1 Testing Light Intensity on page 366

11.6.11 SID Tape Measure

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 10

• Loctite 242 (GE part# 46-170686P2)

Item: SID tape measure
Quantity: 1
11.6.11.2.4 Safety
• None

• None
11.6.11.3 Procedure
1. Remove the two screws and remove the tape cover. See Figure 11-181.

Item Description
1 Tape
2 Tape cover
3 Tape cover screws
Figure 11-181 SID Tape Measure Replacement
2. Take the tape out of the tape cover.

3. Put a new tape into the tape cover.
4. Mount the tape cover and tighten the two screws with thread locker.
None

11.6.12 Collimator Adjustment Knob

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 10

• Loctite 242 (GE part# 46-170686P2)

Item: Collimator adjustment knob
Quantity: 1 (kit contains parts for one knob assembly)
11.6.12.2.4 Safety
• None

11.6.12.3 Procedure
1. Loosen the setscrew and remove the knob from the shaft. See Figure 11-182.

Item Description
1 Knob
2 Set screw
Figure 11-182 Knob Replacement
2. Put the new knob onto the knob shaft.

3. Ensure that the knob is up against the indicator tightly, and tighten the setscrew with thread
locker (i.e. Loctite 242 [blue]).
• Field size indicator accuracy - see 7.1.3.3 Testing Field Size Indicator Accuracy on page 369
• Light field to X-ray field alignment - see 7.1.3.2 Testing Light Field to X-ray Field Alignment on
page 367
11.6.13 Collimator Pointer

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 20

• 2 triangular stickers
• 1 piece of paper

• Loctite 242 (GE part# 46-170686P2)

Item: Collimator pointer
Quantity: 1 (kit contains parts for one knob assembly)
11.6.13.2.4 Safety
• None

11.6.13.3 Procedure
1. Turn the knob counterclockwise until it cannot be rotated any more.
2. Attach a triangle sticker on the front cover and make one of its vertexes align with the indicator
line. See Figure 11-183.
Item Description
1 Attach temporary position markers here
Figure 11-183 Paste Symbols to Replace the Indicator Plate Kit
3. Remove the knob (refer to 11.6.12.3 Procedure on page 861).

4. Loosen two setscrews to remove the indicator plate kit from the knob shaft. See Figure 11-184.


Item Description
1 Indicator plate kit
2 Set screws
3 Knob washer
Figure 11-184 Indicator Plate Kit Replacement
5. Insert a paper between the knob washer and front cover.

6. Loosen the setscrews on the new indicator plate kit and mount it onto the knob shaft.
7. Press the indicator plate kit to the knob washer, and let the indicator point to the paste symbol’s
vertex.
8. Tighten the setscrews.
Note: Ensure both setscrews have been tightened before proceeding to the next step.
9. Mount the knob. See 11.6.12 Collimator Adjustment Knob.

10. Rotate the knob to ensure it can rotate smoothly.
11. Verify the field size indicator accuracy. See 7.1.3.3 Testing Field Size Indicator Accuracy on
page 369 or 7.1.3.3 Testing Field Size Indicator Accuracy on page 369.
12. Remove the paper between the knob washer and the front cover.
13. Remove the triangle pasted on the front cover.
• Field size indicator accuracy - see 7.1.3.3 Testing Field Size Indicator Accuracy on page 369
• Light field to X-ray field alignment - see 7.1.3.2 Testing Light Field to X-ray Field Alignment on
page 367
11.6.14 Collimator Lamp

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• Loctite 242 (GE part# 46-170686P2)

Item: Collimator lamp
Quantity: 1
11.6.14.2.4 Safety
• None


11.6.14.3 Procedure
1. Rotate the tube and make the tube flange’s axis perpendicular to the ground with the bottom
of the collimator facing upward.
LEAD HAZARD
Do not touch the interior of the rear collimator cover without gloves.
2. Remove the four screws on the rear collimator cover, then remove the cover. See Figure 11-
185.
Item Description
1 Screws
Figure 11-185 Rear Cover Removal
3. Unplug the defective collimator lamp.

4. Make sure the screws which hold the lamp mask are tight.
POTENTIAL DAMAGE TO LAMP

When holding the new lamp, operator must wear clean cotton gloves.
5. Insert a new lamp in the lamp socket.

6. Make sure the filament of the new lamp is in the middle of the window on the lamp mask at
lateral orientation.
7. Mount the rear cover of the collimator and tighten the screws.
8. Turn the rotation lock handle until the black line on the handle shaft aligns to the back surface
of the rotation lock set.
9. Rotate the collimator to the desired position.

10. Verify if there is misalignment (refer to 7.1.3.2 Testing Light Field to X-ray Field Alignment on
page 367).
If there is misalignment in the N-S (lateral) orientation, then:
* Ensure the lamp position is according to the requirement of step 6 above.
* If the lamp position is correct, adjust the lamp support by loosening the screws. See
Figure 11-186.
Item Description
1 Adjustment screws
Figure 11-186 Lamp Support Adjustment
If there is misalignment in E-W (longitudinal) orientation, then:

* Ensure the lamp position is according to the requirement of step 4 above.

* If the screws are not loosened, adjust the lamp mask by loosening the screws, then
adjust orientation. See Figure 11-187.

Item Description
1 Adjust orientation
2 Screws for lamp mask
Figure 11-187 Lamp Mask Adjustment
11. Darken the exam room and check if the light field intensity fulfills the specification (refer to
7.1.3.1 Testing Light Intensity on page 366).
12. If the light field intensity does not fulfill the specification, remove the rear cover, and:
13. Check that the voltage at the collimator lamp is between 20 and 22 VDC.
14. Ensure the lamp position is according to the requirement of step 6.
15. If the lamp position is right, adjust the lamp mask to make it shade the filament smaller than
original position.
16. Repeat steps 10 through 15 above until misalignment and light intensity can both meet the
criteria of acceptance.
17. Apply thread locker (i.e. Loctite 242 [blue]) to the rear cover screws. Install the rear cover and
tighten the screws.
18. Remove LOTO from the system. See 1.5.4 Returning System to Service on page 34
- Adjust the collimator lamp supply potentiometer R3 so that the voltage at the collimator
lamp is 20.0 - 22.0 VDC.
- Field size indicator accuracy - see 7.1.3.3 Testing Field Size Indicator Accuracy on
page 369 or 7.1.3.3 Testing Field Size Indicator Accuracy on page 369
11.6.15 Collimator Rotation Lock Finger

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 20

• Cable ties

Item: Collimator rotation lock finger
Quantity: 1
11.6.15.2.4 Safety
• None

• Remove the collimator from the X-ray tube. See 11.6.9.1 Collimator Replacement on
page 848.

11.6.15.3 Procedure
1. See Figure 11-188. Remove the four mounting screws (Item 4) and the rotation lock cover
(Item 3).
Item Description
1 Collimator
2 Rotation lock knob
3 Rotation lock cover
4 Rotation lock cover screws
Figure 11-188 Rotation Lock
2. See Figure 11-189. Remove the rotation lock assembly (Item 2) from the collimator.
3. Remove the rotation lock finger (Item 1) from the rotation lock assembly (Item 2). Slightly
rotating the lock knob will make it easier to remove the lock finger.
Item Description
1 Rotation lock finger
2 Rotation lock assembly
Figure 11-189 Rotation Lock Finger Assembly
4. Install the new lock finger. The wider end of the lock finger should be on the bottom, as shown
in Figure 11-189.
5. Install the rotation lock assembly and mounting screws on the collimator.
6. Install the collimator on the X-ray tube. See 11.6.9.1 Collimator Replacement on page 848.
- Collimator (the 3 detent and 1 collimator rotation checks) - see Table 2-14, PM
Procedures, Tube Column and Arm, on page 44
11.6.16 Collimator Front Cover FRU

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 60



Item: FRU 5761534 Collimator Front Cover FRU
Quantity: 1
11.6.16.2.3 Safety
• None

• Remove DAP meter. See 11.6.10 Dose Area Product (DAP) meter on page 856.
11.6.16.3 Procedure
1. See Figure 11-190. Remove collimator back cover (Item 1) by removing 4 screws (Item 2)
using 2mm hex wrench.

Item Description
1 Back Cover
2 Cover Screws
Figure 11-190 Back Cover Removal
2. See Figure 11-191. Using 2mm hex wrench, remove 2 screws (Item 1) from backside of
collimator retaining U-shape cover (Item 2).

Item Description
1 U-Shape Cover
2 Cover Screws, Backside
Figure 11-191 U-Shape Cover, Backside
3. See Figure 11-192. Use collimator rotation lock knob (Item 1) and rotate collimator to gain
access to 4 screws (Item 2) located on top of the U-shape cover (Item 3). Remove screws
using 2mm hex wrench.

Item Description
1 Rotation Lock Knob
2 Cover Screws, Top
3 U-Shape Cover
Figure 11-192 U-Shape Cover, Top

4. See Figure 11-193. Separate the U-shape cover (Item 1) by slowing pulling it out from
collimator (Item 2).

Item Description
1 U-Shape Cover
2 Collimator
Figure 11-193 U-Shape Cover Removal
5. See Figure 11-194. Disconnect the collimator handle switch connector (Item 1) located inside
the bottom of the Collimator Front Cover (Item 2).

Item Description
1 Collimator Handle Switch Connector
2 Front Cover
Figure 11-194 Collimator Handle Switch Connector
6. Remove adjustment knobs. Refer to 11.6.12 Collimator Adjustment Knob on page 860.
(Figure 11-195)
7. Remove collimator pointers. Refer to 11.6.13 Collimator Pointer on page 861. (Figure 11-195)
Figure 11-195 Front Cover with Knobs and Pointers Removed
8. See Figure 11-196. Remove 3 screws (Item 1) from each side of collimator securing front
cover (Item 2).

Item Description
1 Screws, 3 each side
2 Front Cover
Figure 11-196 Front Cover Screws
9. See Figure 11-197. Carefully remove the front cover (Item 1) from the collimator (Item 2).


Item Description
1 Front Cover
2 Collimator
Figure 11-197 Front Cover Removal
10. Install replacement front cover by reversing previous steps.
1. Rotate collimator to forward position.
2. Install DAP meter. See 11.6.10 Dose Area Product (DAP) meter on page 856.
5. Test collimator handle switch for activation and that the switch does not stick in the ON
position.
6. Perform finalization for collimator adjustment knobs. Refer to 11.6.12 Collimator Adjustment
Knob on page 860.
11.6.17 Tablet Holder Assembly

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 60

• Loctite 243

Item: Tablet holder assembly
Quantity: 1
11.6.17.2.4 Safety
• None

• Shut down the system and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
11.6.17.3 Procedure
1. Unlock the tablet holder clamp and remove the tablet, if required.
2. Remove the lead apron hanger from the tablet holder assembly.
3. Remove the tablet holder assembly from the column
4. Install the tablet holder assembly on the column. See 4.18.4 Installing the Tablet Holder
Assembly on page 235, Step 4.
5. Perform tablet holder assembly functional check. See 4.18.4 Installing the Tablet Holder
Assembly on page 235, Step 9.
6. Return the key to the site administrator, if required.
11.6.18 Secondary Monitor, Lower to Upper Position Mounting (Gen 2

only)
The Secondary Monitor can be mounted at two different positions on the column. This procedure is
for moving the monitor that was installed in the lower position to the upper position.

Required persons: 1
Timing (min):

• Loctite 243

11.6.18.2.3 Parts
11.6.18.2.4 Safety
• None

11.6.18.3 Procedure, Upper Mount Position

1. Refer to Figure 11-198. Remove I/O cover (Item 1) from back of secondary monitor by
removing two M4 screws (Item 2). Retain cover and screws.

Item Description
1 I/O Cover
2 M4x8mm pan head screws, Qty. 2
Figure 11-198 I/O Cover on Back of Monitor
2. Refer to Figure 11-199. Cut two cable ties (Items 1 & 2) securing monitor cable bundle.
Item Description
1 Cable Tie and Tie Wrap Holder
2 Cable Tie and Tie Wrap Holder
Figure 11-199 Monitor Cable Routing, Lower Position

3. Refer to Figure 11-200. Disconnect the monitor video cable (Item 1) by loosening the two
screws on connector. Detach ground cable (Item 2) by removing M4 Nyloc nut. Disconnect
power cable (Item 3) by using integral pull-and-release connector (Item 4). Disconnect USB
cable (Item 5) by removing NCT holder (Item 6) and M3 pan head screw with spring washer
(Item 7). Retain all hardware. Reposition cable bundle out of the way.

Item Description
5 USB Cable (#5790694)
6 NCT Holder
4. Refer to Figure 11-201. Remove 4 M5x8mm bolts (Item 1) and M5 Nord lock washers (Item
2). Remove M4x14mm bolt (Item 3) and M4 Nord lock washer (Item 4). Remove 4 M5x6mm
bolts (Item 5) and M5 Nord lock washers (Item 6). Retain all Nord lock washers and discard all
bolts.

Item Description
Type Bolt (#1003-M5C010-22), Qty. 4
M5W-05), Qty. 4 (not shown)
Type Bolt (#1003-M4C014-22)
M4W-05) (not shown)
Type Bolt (1003-M5C006-22), Qty. 4
6 M5 Nord Lock Washer (2206-M5N-05) (not
shown)
Figure 11-201 Monitor Bracket Mounted to Column

5. Remove the monitor mounting bracket assembly from the vertical column as shown in
Figure 11-202 below.
Figure 11-202 Monitor Bracket Removal from Column
6. Refer to Figure 11-203. Remove and discard two M4 socket set screws (Item 1) in the monitor
mounting bracket at the location shown.
Item Description
(#1040-M4C004-27), Qty. 2
Figure 11-203 Screws at Upper Latch Position
7. Refer to Figure 11-204. Remove apron hanger (Item 1) from monitor mounting bracket
assembly (Item 2) by removing 4 M5x6mm bolts (Item 3) and 4 flat washers (Item 4). Retain
apron hanger and flat washers, and discard bolts.

Item Description
2 Monitor Mounting Bracket Assembly
(#5798908)
Type Bolt (1003-M5C006-22), Qty. 4
shown)
Figure 11-204 Apron Hanger Removal

8. Refer to Figure 11-205. Remove two arm caps by slightly spreading the open end and sliding
off.
Item Description
1 Arm Caps, Qty. 2
Figure 11-205 Arm Caps
9. Refer to Figure 11-206. Disassemble monitor arm from the mounting bracket by removing nuts
(Item 3) and washers (Item 2). Remove M6 bolts (Item 1) from bracket. Discard all fasteners.

Item Description
shown)
Figure 11-206 Lower Mounting Position

10. Refer to Figure 11-207. Insert two new M6 bolts (Item 1) into bracket upper position as shown.
Position monitor arm on bolts and apply Loctite 243 to bolt threads. Install new lock washers
(Item 2) and lock nuts (Item 3). Torque lock nuts (Item 3) to 10.5 Nm (93 lb-in).

Item Description
shown)
Figure 11-207 Upper Mounting Position
11. Refer to Figure 11-205. Install two arm caps that were removed at Step 8.
12. Refer to Figure 11-208. Remove the plunger mounting block (Item 1) from the lower position
by removing two M4 bolts (Item 2) and Nord lock washers (Item 3). Discard bolts (Item 2) and
retain lock washers (Item 3) for reuse.
13. If present, remove and retain two M4 socket head set screws (Item 4) from upper mounting
position.
14. Apply Loctite 243 to two new M4 bolts (Item 2). Install plunger mounting block (Item 1) at upper
position with two new M4 bolts (Item 2) and retained Nord lock washers (Item 3). Torque M4

Item Description
1 Plunger Mounting Block (#5792762)
(#1003-M4C008-22), Qty. 2
3 M4 Nord Lock Washers (#2206-M4N-05), Qty. 2
4 M4x4mm hexagonal socket set screw (#1040-M4C004-
27), Qty. 2
Figure 11-208 Plunger Mounting Block

15. Refer to Figure 11-209. Apply Loctite 243 to four M5x6mm bolt threads (Item 2) and install
apron hanger (Item 1) to monitor mounting bracket assembly with four flat washers (Item 3).
Torque M5 bolts (Item 2) to 3.2 Nm (28 lb-in).

Item Description
Type Bolt (1003-M5C006-22), Qty. 4
shown)
210 below.

17. Refer to Figure 11-211. Apply Loctite 243 to all bolt threads in this step. Secure monitor
bracket to vertical column with four M5x6mm bolts (Item 1) and M5 Nord lock washers (Item 2).
Torque M5 bolts (Item 1) to 3.2 Nm (28 lb-in).

Item Description
Type Bolt (1003-M5C006-22), Qty. 4
2 M5 Nord Lock Washer (2206-M5N-05),
Qty. 4 (not shown)
18. Move the monitor around the column, checking the latch function. To adjust the latch:
a. Refer to Figure 11-212. To adjust the plunger mounting block, loosen two M4 bolts
(Item 1) and reposition block. Torque M4 bolts (Item 1) to 2 Nm (18 lb-in).
Item Description
(#1003-M4C008-22), Qty. 2
Figure 11-212 Plunger Mounting Block Adjustment

b. Refer to Figure 11-213. To adjust the positioning cone mounting block, remove two M5
bolts (Item 1) and lock washers (Item 2). Discard bolts. Apply Loctite 243 to two new M5
bolt threads and install with lock washers. Torque M5 bolts (Item 1) to 4 Nm (35 lb-in)

Item Description
(1003-M5C012-22), Qty. 2
2 M5 Nord Lock Washers (#2206-M5N-05), Qty. 2 (not
shown)
Figure 11-213 Positioning Cone Mounting Block Adjustment
on connector. Attach ground cable (Item 2) with M4 Nyloc nut provided within the connection
terminal. Attach power cable (Item 3) with flat side towards monitor, using integral pull-and-
release connector (Item 4). Attach USB cable (Item 5) and secure with NCT holder (Item 6)
and M3 pan head screw and spring washer (Item 7).

Item Description
5 USB Cable (#5790694)
6 NCT Holder

(Item 1). Route cables as shown. Secure with cable ties at three tie wrap holders (Items 2, 3
& 4). Refer to dimensions A, B & C. Install I/O cover (Item 5) with two previously removed
M4x8mm screws. Route monitor cables along HV cables in cable sheath (Item 6).

&
Item Description
2 Tie Wrap Holder
3 Tie Wrap Holder
4 Tie Wrap Holder
5 I/O Cover
(Item 2): ~330mm (~13 in.)
(Item 3): ~440mm (~17.3 in.)
C Distance between tie wrap holder (Item 3) & tie wrap holder
(Item 4): ~340mm (~13.4 in.)
Item Description
(#1040-M4C004-27), Qty. 2
Section 11.7 Digital Detector

11.7.1 Digital Detector Replacement

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• Digital Detector: 14×17 in. (optional)
• Digital Detector: 10×12 in. (optional)
11.7.1.4 Safety
• None
11.7.1.5 Procedure
See Section 4.16 Installing Digital Detectors on page 176.

11.7.2 Detector Grip

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• None
11.7.2.4 Consumables
• Isopropyl Alcohol
• Masking tape or other tape that will not leave an adhesive/residue on the detector after
removal.

• Detector Grip: 14×17 in. (optional)
• Detector Grip: 10×12 in. (optional)
11.7.2.6 Safety
• None
11.7.2.7 Procedure
The process to install the detector grip is the same for both 10×12 and 14×17 detectors.
Note: The grip has very strong adhesive. If the grip is misplaced on the detector the grip will not come off
without having to order a new grip and clean the adhesive off of the detector.
The grip is to be placed on the non-image side (side with label) as shown below.
1. Using Isopropyl alcohol clean the surface of the detector to remove any dirt and/or debris. After
cleaning the surface, wait 5 minutes prior to installing the grip.
2. See Figure 11-217. Place a piece of tape on the longer edge of the detector approximately 0.5
inch (12mm) from the edge. Ensure that the tape is even across the detector. The tape will be
used to correctly align the grip.
3. Prior to removing the adhesive backing place, place the grip on the detector to ensure that the
placement is accurate. The detector grip should be centered in the detector with 0.5 inch
(12mm) gap at all four sides. See Figure 11-217.
Page 896 Section 11.7 Digital Detector

Figure 11-217 Tape/Grip Placement
4. See Figure 11-218. Partially remove the backing from the detector grip.
Figure 11-218 Backing Partially Removed
5. See Figure 11-219. Using the tape as a reference, lightly place the end of the grip against the
tape.

Figure 11-219 Start at Top Edge
6. See Figure 11-220. Carefully pull off the remainder of the backing while adhering the grip to
the detector. This is to ensure the grip stays aligned and adheres without trapping air bubbles.
Figure 11-220 Continue Installation
7. See Figure 11-221. Keep the last portion lifted slightly up and do not let it fall completely onto
the detector. Due to the existing detector label, the thin part of the grip can sometimes fold or
bubble. Doing this and slowly placing the grip onto the detector will help prevent any placement
issues.
Figure 11-221 Final Placement

8. Once the grip is in place, remove the masking tape and firmly press down onto the grip to
ensure complete adhesion.
Insert the detector into the bin and ensure that the detector can be placed in and out of the bin
without any issues. Also check to ensure that the bin battery indicator shows that detector is in place
and charging.
11.7.3 Detector Handle Latch Replacement

Required persons: 1


• Detector Handle Latch FRU
11.7.3.5 Safety
• None
11.7.3.6 Procedure
This procedure applies to detector handles with or without grid (black or white).
Figure 11-222 Detector Handle Latch

1. Remove the four Hex Socket Button Head Screw M4x6 as shown below.
Figure 11-223 Latch Screws
2. Remove the latch assembly from the handle and discard.

3. Using the new FRU parts, insert Detector Handle Latch Lock into slot provided in Detector
Handle Latch as shown below and slide it to the other end of the slot.
Figure 11-224 Detector Handle Latch Lock
4. Insert Detector Handle Latch Spring into Detector Handle Latch as shown below.

Figure 11-225 Detector Handle Latch Spring
5. Assemble Detector Handle Latch with Detector Handle as shown below.
Figure 11-226 Inserting Detector Handle Latch in Handle
6. Secure Detector Handle Latch Stoppers into Detector Handle using four Hex Socket Button
Head Screw M4x6 as shown below. Torque to 1.2 N-m (10.6 lb-in).

Figure 11-227 Detector Handle Latch Stoppers
7. Ensure that Detector Handle Latch Lock and Detector Handle Latch slide and operate freely
through entire range.

Appendix A Printer Configuration

Information
Section A.1 Agfa Drystar 3000 Printer Parameters
Table A-1 Agfa Drystar 3000 Printer Configuration Information
Tab Attribute Value Comments

DICOM Printer Label DRYSTAR3000 Or customers preference
Application Entry Title Enter value given by site AE titles may be site-
network administrator specific, check with site
Network Address Enter value given by site
network administrator
Port Number 104 Port number may be site-
specific, check with site
Pixel Depth 12
Printer Pixel Size (micron) 79.4
Configuration Information PERCEPTION_LUT=LIN
Printer
EAR (no spaces)
Density Min. = 20, Max. = 300
Magnification Type CUBIC
Smooth Factor 140
Trim NO Not supported
Polarity NORMAL
Border Density BLACK
Empty Image Density BLACK
Printer Memory Size 40Mbyte
Select the desired layouts 1:1, 1:2, 2:1, 2:2
allowed for this printer
Layouts
Slide formats Not applicable Not supported; do not
select
Page 903
Table A-1 Agfa Drystar 3000 Printer Configuration Information(Continued)

8 x 10in Pixel width = 2388 Agfa layout - portrait 9006
Pixel height = 2972
10 x 12in Pixel width =
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Pixel height = 4256
Film Sizes
Pixel height =
Pixel height = 5174
24 x 24cm Pixel width =
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Agfa Drystar 3000 general comments

Supports clear and blue film. If medium selected (clear, paper) does not match the printer, the job
will be queued until the correct film is loaded.
Agfa layouts are specific to maximum printable area layouts. Consult the Agfa technical
representative to install custom layouts.
Only 14x17 film was tested with this printer.
Trim is not supported by this printer.
Note: Avoid print job failures by having printer vendor ensure that the Confirmation Level (DICOM
Connectivity) at the printer is set to Ø (accept all). Failure to set this level on the printer will result in
failed print jobs.
Agfa print layouts

Custom layout must be configured by printer vendor for accurate image sizing. In addition to the
above layouts, the following layouts must be installed by the Agfa print representative:
Table A-2 Agfa Print Layouts
Film size Format P/l Agfa layout

14 x 17 1:1 P 2411
14 x 17 1:2 P 9001
14 x 17 2:1 P 9000
14 x 17 2:2 P 9002
14 x 17 1:1 L 2511
14 x 17 1:2 L 9003
Page 904
Table A-2 Agfa Print Layouts(Continued)

14 x 17 2:1 L 9004
14 x 17 2:2 L 9005
11 x 14 1:1 P 9014
11 x 14 1:2 P 9102
11 x 14 2:1 P 9103
11 x 14 2:2 P 9104
11 x 14 1:1 L 9018
11 x 14 1:2 L 9202
11 x 14 2:1 L 9203
11 x 14 2:2 L 9204
8 x 10 1:1 P 9006
8 x 10 1:2 P 9009
8 x 10 2:1 P 9008
8 x 10 2:2 P 9010
8 x 10 1:1 L 9007
8 x 10 1:2 L 9012
8 x 10 2:1 L 9011
8 x 10 2:2 L 9013
Page 905
Section A.2 Agfa Drystar 5500 Printer Parameters

DICOM Printer Label DRYSTAR5500 Or customer preference
Pixel Depth 12
Printer Configuration Information LUT=0.0
Smooth Factor 140
Trim NO
Polarity NORMAL
Layouts
select
8 x 10in Pixel width = 3852
Pixel height = 4300
Pixel height = 5280
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Film Sizes
Pixel height =
Pixel height = 7788
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Page 906
Agfa print layouts

Custom layout must be configured by printer vendor for accurate image sizing. In addition to the
above layouts, the following layouts must be installed by the Agfa print representative:
Table A-4 Agfa Print Layouts

14 x 17 1:1 P 2411
14 x 17 1:2 P 9001
14 x 17 2:1 P 9000
14 x 17 2:2 P 9002
14 x 17 1:1 L 2511
14 x 17 1:2 L 9003
14 x 17 2:1 L 9004
14 x 17 2:2 L 9005
11 x 14 1:1 P 9014
11 x 14 1:2 P 9102
11 x 14 2:1 P 9103
11 x 14 2:2 P 9104
11 x 14 1:1 L 9018
11 x 14 1:2 L 9202
11 x 14 2:1 L 9203
11 x 14 2:2 L 9204
8 x 10 1:1 P 9006
8 x 10 1:2 P 9009
8 x 10 2:1 P 9008
8 x 10 2:2 P 9010
8 x 10 1:1 L 9007
8 x 10 1:2 L 9012
8 x 10 2:1 L 9011
8 x 10 2:2 L 9013
Page 907
Section A.3 Codonics Horizon Printer Parameters
Table A-5 Codonics Horizon Printer Configuration Information

DICOM Printer Label HORIZON Or customers preference
Pixel Depth 12
Configuration Information LUT=LINEAR
Printer
Magnification Type REPLICATE
Smooth Factor 0 Not supported
Trim NO
Polarity NORMAL
Border Density BLACK Can also pass OD value of
0-310
Empty Image Density BLACK Can also pass OD value of
0-310
Select the desired layouts
Layouts allowed for this printer
Slide formats
Page 908
Table A-5 Codonics Horizon Printer Configuration Information(Continued)

Pixel height = 2790
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Pixel height = 4072
Film Sizes
Pixel height =
Pixel height = 5025
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Codonics Horizon general comments

Codonics Horizon printer supports clear film, blue film and paper.
Only 8 x 10 and 14 x 17 inch film formats have been validated.
Other smoothing and sharpening algorithms for magnification type are supported.
Consult Codonics technical representative to install customer preferences if desired.
Page 909
Section A.4 Fuji FM DPL Printer Parameters
Table A-6 Fuji FM DPL Printer Configuration Information

DICOM Printer Label FUJIFMDPL Or customer preference
Pixel Depth 12
Printer Pixel Size (micron) 100
Printer Configuration Information CS000
Smooth Factor SHARP
Trim NO
Polarity NORMAL
Layouts
select
Pixel height = 2510
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Pixel height = 3600
Film Sizes
Pixel height =
Pixel height = 4240
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Page 910
Fuji FM DPL general comments

The following configurations must be configured by the Fuji printer representative to print correctly
sized images:
• LUT1 as SAR17 for calling AE_TITLE.
• Trim width at 1 pixel for calling AE_TITLE.
• Globally configure “a margin between image” for 0 pixels.
• Globally configure “Image layout” for spread.
Section A.5 Fuji DryPix 1000 Printer Parameters
Table A-7 Fuji DryPix 1000 Printer Configuration Information

DICOM Printer Label DRYPIX1000 Or customer preference
Pixel Depth 12
Smooth Factor SHARP
Trim NO
Polarity NORMAL
Layouts
select
Page 911
Table A-7 Fuji DryPix 1000 Printer Configuration Information(Continued)

Pixel height = 2877
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Pixel height = 4096
Film Sizes
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Fuji DryPix 1000 general comments

sized images:
• LUT1 as SAR17 for calling AE_TITLE.-Trim width at 1 pixel for calling AE_TITLE.
• A densitometer filter (FUJI part number 605S0003) must be used when performing printer
calibration.
Page 912

Pixel Depth 12
Smooth Factor SHARP
Trim NO
Polarity NORMAL
Layouts
select
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Film Sizes
Pixel height =
Pixel height = 4972
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Page 913

sized images:
calibration.
Note: Only 14x17 film should be used with this printer. Any other film size used may print films with
incorrect measurements.

Application Entry Title Enter value given by site AE Titles may be site-
Pixel Depth 12
Printer Pixel Size (micron) 50
Smooth Factor SHARP
Trim NO
Polarity NORMAL
Slide formats
Page 914
Table A-9 Fuji DryPix 7000 Printer Configuration Information(Continued)

Pixel height = 4819
Pixel height =
Pixel height = 7043
Pixel height =
Film Sizes
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Pixel height =

sized images:
calibration.
Note: Only 14x17 film should be used with this printer. Any other film size used may print films with
incorrect measurements.
Page 915
Section A.8 Kodak 8200 Printer Parameters
Table A-10 Kodak 8200 Printer Configuration Information

DICOM Printer Label KODAK8200 Or customer preference
Application Entry Title Enter value given by site AE Titles may be site-
Pixel Depth 12
Printer Configuration Information LUT=Wkstn2a.w87,2 (no

spaces)
Smooth Factor 15
Trim NO
Polarity NORMAL
Select the desired layouts 1:1, 1:2, 2:1, 2:2 1:2 only valid for portrait
Layouts allowed for this printer 2:1 only valid for landscape
Slide formats
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Film Sizes
Pixel height =
Pixel height = 4277
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Page 916

Pixel Depth 12
Configuration Information LUT=Wkstn2a.w87,2 (no
Printer
spaces)
Smooth Factor 15
Trim NO
Polarity NORMAL
Slide formats Not applicable Not supported; do not select
Page 917
Table A-11 Kodak 8500 Printer Configuration Information(Continued)

Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Film Sizes
Pixel height =
Pixel height = 4277
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Page 918

Pixel Depth 12
Printer Configuration Information LUT=Wkstn2a.w87,2 (no

spaces)
Smooth Factor 15
Trim NO
Polarity NORMAL
Slide formats Not applicable Not supported; do not select
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Film Sizes
Pixel height =
Pixel height = 5221
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Page 919
Kodak 8700 general comments

The following configurations must be configured by the Kodak printer representative:
• Calling AE_TITLE must be declared in 9410 host table or print will be rejected.
• Pixel correction turned off.
• TFT emulation enabled. Landscape printing will be functional only if a Kodak 8800 is installed.
Note: Customer will get incorrect image sizing if unsupported formats (portrait 2:1 or landscape 1:2) are
used.

Application Entry Title Enter value given by site AE titles may be site-specific,
network administrator check with site
Pixel Depth 12
Printer Pixel Size 38
(micron)
Printer Configuration LUT=Ver693c0.w87,6
Information
Smooth Factor 40
Trim NO
Polarity NORMAL
Printer Memory Size 40Mbytes
Select desired layouts 1:1, 1:2, 2:1, 2:2 Check at least one (1:1); more
Layouts allowed for this printer as desired
Slide formats
Page 920
Table A-13 Kodak 8900 Printer Configuration Information(Continued)

Pixel height = 6286
Pixel height = 7342
Pixel height =
Pixel height = 8896
Film Sizes
Pixel height =8662
Pixel height = 10612
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Section A.12 Konica Dry Pro 793 Printer Parameters

DICOM Printer Label Customer preference
Pixel Depth 12
Printer Configuration Information Dicom
Smooth Factor 1
Trim NO Not supported
Polarity NORMAL
Printer Memory Size 512
Page 921
Table A-14 Agfa Drystar 3000 Printer Configuration Information(Continued)

Select the desired layouts 1:1, 2:1, 1:2, 4:1, 6:1
Slide formats
Pixel height =
Pixel height = 6826
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Film Sizes
Pixel height =
Pixel height = 9725
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Page 922
Glossary
ADC or A/D Analog to digital converter.
AE Title Application entity title. Name used to identify the DICOM nodes communicating to each other. AE
titles need to be locally unique, and are usually managed by a system administrator. They are case-
sensitive and 16 bytes long, and are configured before initializing a DICOM connection.
BIST Built in self test.
CAN Controller area network. A serial communication method.
CANOPEN Software communications protocol used in the CAN. Often called CAN.
CR- Mode where, if the PACS rejects DX images, CR images are sent instead. This occurs only if the
FALLBACK PACS does not support DX modality images, or if the PACS is configured to reject DX modality
images.
DAP METER Dose area product meter.
DICOM Digital Imaging and Communication in Medicine. A standard for distributing and viewing medical
images regardless of the source.
ELECTRO- A transfer of electrostatic charge between objects at different potentials caused by direct contact or
STATIC induced by an electrostatic field.
DISCHARGE
(ESD)
ESD Electrostatic discharge
FPGA Field programmable gate array. Programmed by the CPU core after a reset and handles all the
exposure control logic including the system interface real-time lines.
FRU Field replaceable unit. Spare part. This is a defined and GE-sanctioned assembly or component
specifically designated as replaceable outside GE’s controlled manufacturing or repair facilities.
GEHC General Electric Healthcare.
HHS United States Department of Health and Human Services. “HHS” is often used to refer to the
specific testing procedures defined in 21CFR regulations.
HV High voltage.
LAT Lateral.
LFC Load from cold. Complete software load.
LONG Longitudinal.
LOTO Lock out/tag out. Process defined by GEHC to ensure the safety of employees, specifically the
process of energy control for service activities of GE products.
LSL Lower specification limit.
Page 923
LUT Look-up table.
MAINS Hospital-supplied AC power.
OLC On-Line Center. GE Healthcare department that provides support to field service personnel.
OS Operating system.
POS Positioner.
PWA Printed wire board. Synonymous with printed circuit board (PCB).
RAD Radiography.
SID Source to image distance. Distance from the X-ray tube focal spot to the image plane ( or film
cassette).
SPGP System power ground point.
SUIF Service user interface.
TORQUE 1 N-m = 0.738 lb-ft = 8.85 lb-in.
UIF User interface.
USL Upper specification limit.
Page 924
GE Medical Systems, a General Electric Company, going to market as GE Healthcare.
3000 N. Grandview Boulevard
Waukesha, Wisconsin 53188
USA
www.gehealthcare.com
926

Optima XR240amx ESM

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Optima XR240amx ESM

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Front cover

Optima XR240amx and

Direction 5761784-1EN, Rev 11

WARNING This service manual is available in English only.

VÝSTRAHA Tento provozní návod existuje pouze v anglickém jazyce.

WAARSCHUWING Deze onderhoudshandleiding is enkel in het Engels verkrijgbaar.

AVVERTENZA Il presente manuale di manutenzione è disponibile soltanto in lingua inglese.

ATENŢIE Acest manual de service este disponibil doar în limba engleză.

CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT

LITHIUM BATTERY CAUTIONARY STATEMENT

DANGER - Risk of Explosion

ATTENTION - Danger d’Explosion

TECHNICAL MANUAL UPDATES

OMISSIONS AND ERRORS

MEDICAL DEVICE REPORTING

FDA Medical Device

OPTIMA XR240amx HD UPGRADE APPLICABILITY

Revision Date Reason for change

Preface - Publication Conventions

Safety & Hazard Information

Text Format of Signal Words

• Destruction of a disk drive

Symbols and Pictorials Used

keep_up magnetic biohazard compressgas ppe-hearing

fragile impact corrosive heavyobject ppe-2people

static_elec heat general laser ppe-respitory

keep_dry pinch radiation poisongas ppe-loto

general explosive electrical flammable ppe-eye

torque crush/mechanical tipping Read Manual ppe-gloves

ce instuction poisonmatl entanglement instuction

EXAMPLES OF PREFIXES USED FOR GENERAL INFORMATION:

Computer Screen Output/Input Text Character Styles

Buttons, Switches and Keyboard Inputs (Hard & Soft Keys)

Chapter 2 Planned Maintenance.................................................................... 38

Chapter 3 System Data and Software ........................................................... 61

Section 3.4 Restoring Generator Firmware Only ......................................... 76

Section 4.8 Auto Protocol Assist ................................................................ 158

Section 4.19 Importing Custom IP Looks ..................................................... 305

Chapter 5 Calibration .................................................................................... 323

Section 5.9 PACS Image Tests .................................................................... 346

Chapter 6 Mechanical Adjustment Procedures ......................................... 356

Chapter 7 Radiation and Electrical Testing ................................................ 365

Chapter 8 Theory .......................................................................................... 404

Section 8.2 Detector Theory......................................................................... 412

Chapter 9 System Diagrams ......................................................................... 463

Chapter 10 Troubleshooting .......................................................................... 477

Chapter 11 Replacement Procedures ............................................................ 652

11.4.3 Front Bumper Assembly or Bumper Switch ............................................................. 689

11.6.5 Tube Mount - Detent Side (Cathode Side) .............................................................. 831

Appendix A Printer Configuration Information .............................................. 903

Glossary ................................................................................................................ 923

Chapter 1 Safety / Before You Begin

Section 1.1 How to Determine System Vintage

1.1.1 System Software Version

1.1.2 PSI Code

PSI Codes Description

1.1.3 Back Office Lookup

Chapter 1 Safety / Before You Begin Page 25

Section 1.2 Low Temperature Operation

Section 1.3 Pinch point and crush hazard safety

TUBE PARK LATCH:

HAND CRUSH HAZARD: KEEP YOUR EXTREMITIES AND THE PATIENT’S

Page 26 Section 1.2 Low Temperature Operation

X-RAY TUBE AND COLLIMATOR: